Aficio 2238c Manual

B147/B149/B190
SERVICE MANUAL
001892MIUMIU
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
®
B147/B149/B190
SERVICE MANUAL
B147/B149/B190
SERVICE MANUAL
001892MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY
GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
B147 DSc332 LD232c Aficio 2232C C3224
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 01/2004 Original Printing
1 09/2004 B190 Addition
B147/B149/B190
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT.................................................1-2
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2
1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ..........................................................1-3
1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS ........................................................................1-3
1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ................................................................1-3
1.3 COPIER.....................................................................................................1-4
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................1-4
1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................1-5
1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION........................................................................1-6
1.4.1 COPIER............................................................................................1-6
Accessory Check ..................................................................................1-6
Installation Procedure ...........................................................................1-7
Settings Relevant to Contract .............................................................1-11
1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE........................................................................1-12
1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE..........................................................1-13
1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT .....................................................................................1-15
1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ....................................................1-15
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-15
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-16
1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT....................................................1-19
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-19
1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ..............................................................1-23
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-23
1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER ......................................1-27
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-27
1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER...................................................................1-30
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-30
1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT .................................................................................1-33
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-33
1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ...........................................................1-37
Accessories Check List.......................................................................1-37
SM i B147/B149/B190
Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray .....................................................1-38
1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER .....................................................................1-39
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-39
Adjusting the Height............................................................................1-40
Main Body...........................................................................................1-41
Optional Punch Unit ............................................................................1-44
1.5.9 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT (FOR ASIA MODEL ONLY)................1-48
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-48
1.5.10 POSTSCRIPT 3............................................................................1-51
1.5.11 256 MB MEMORY ........................................................................1-52
1.5.12 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER ......................................................1-53
1.5.13 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)................................................................1-54
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-55
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 ........................................................1-55
1.5.14 USB 2.0 ........................................................................................1-56
USB SP Settings.................................................................................1-57
1.5.15 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) .................................................1-58
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN ...................................................1-60
SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11B WIRELESS LAN.........................1-61
1.5.16 BLUETOOTH................................................................................1-62
1.5.17 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ......................................................1-64
1.5.18 KEY COUNTER HOLDER............................................................1-65
1.5.19 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................1-67
1.5.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................1-69
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 SETTINGS.................................................................................................2-1
New Unit Set.........................................................................................2-1
Counter Reset.......................................................................................2-1
2.2 PM TABLES ..............................................................................................2-2
2.3 OTHERS ...................................................................................................2-5
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................3-1
3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ..............................................................................3-2
3.2.1 SCANNING.......................................................................................3-2
Scanner sub-scan magnification ...........................................................3-2
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration..............................3-2
Main scan dot position correction .........................................................3-3
B147/B149/B190 ii SM
3.2.2 ARDF................................................................................................3-4
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration .................................3-4
3.2.3 REGISTRATION...............................................................................3-5
Image Area ...........................................................................................3-5
Leading Edge........................................................................................3-5
Side to Side ..........................................................................................3-5
Adjustment Standard ............................................................................3-5
Paper Registration Standard.................................................................3-5
Adjustment Procedure ..........................................................................3-6
3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION .................................................................3-6
Line Position Adjustment ......................................................................3-6
Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper............................................3-6
3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ..................................................3-7
Copy Mode ...........................................................................................3-7
Printer Mode .......................................................................................3-11
3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT......................................................................3-13
3.3.1 TOP COVER ..................................................................................3-13
3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD .........................................................3-13
3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1 .....................................................3-14
3.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH .............................3-15
3.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR..................3-15
3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2 .................................................................3-15
3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ..............................................................................3-16
3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD................................................................3-16
3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR ................................................................3-16
3.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR...............................................................3-17
3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS ..............................................................................3-18
3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES ..............................................3-18
3.5.2 LEFT SIDE .....................................................................................3-20
3.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS...........................3-21
3.6 SCANNER UNIT......................................................................................3-22
3.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-22
3.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR ..........................................3-22
3.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU).......................................................3-23
3.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER ...................................................3-24
3.6.5 XENON LAMP ................................................................................3-24
3.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSU) ....................................3-25
3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-25
3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE ..............................................................3-26
3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE.................................................................3-29
3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT .................................3-32
3.7 LASER OPTICS ......................................................................................3-33
3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .....................................................3-33
3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT ..................................................3-34
Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit...............3-39
3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................3-40
3.7.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ........................3-40
3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...........................................................3-41
SM iii B147/B149/B190
3.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-42
3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ..........................3-42
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ...............................................................................3-42
By-pass Tray.......................................................................................3-42
3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD ...........................................3-43
3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR ...............................................3-44
3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT .......................................................................3-44
3.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS .....................3-45
3.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES.............................................................3-45
3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH ..............................................................3-46
3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .......................................................................3-46
3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR...................................................................3-47
3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT .....................................3-48
3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT .........................................................................3-48
3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT............................................3-49
3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER ...........................3-50
3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-52
3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR...............................................3-54
3.11 ID SENSORS ........................................................................................3-55
3.12 FUSING .................................................................................................3-56
3.12.1 FUSING UNIT...............................................................................3-56
3.12.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT AND UPPER COVER....................................3-57
3.12.3 CLEANING UNIT ..........................................................................3-58
3.12.4 HEATING ROLLER LAMP............................................................3-59
3.12.5 FUSING BELT UNIT.....................................................................3-60
3.12.6 HOT ROLLER...............................................................................3-61
3.12.7 HEATING ROLLER ......................................................................3-61
3.12.8 PAPER GUIDE PLATES AND STRIPPER PAWLS......................3-62
3.12.9 THERMISTOR AND FUSE...........................................................3-63
3.12.10 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP .......................................3-64
3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................3-65
3.12.12 FUSING UNIT FAN.....................................................................3-67
3.12.13 WASTE OIL BOTTLE .................................................................3-68
3.12.14 PAPER EXIT ..............................................................................3-68
3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-69
3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY .............3-69
3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C,
B OUT OF THE WAY ...................................................................3-70
3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU ...................................................3-70
3.13.4 HDD..............................................................................................3-72
3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE .....................................3-72
NVRAM on BCU .................................................................................3-72
NVRAM on Controller .........................................................................3-73
3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B .......3-74
3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT .......................................................3-74
3.13.8 PSU ..............................................................................................3-75
3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD ..........................................................................3-75
B147/B149/B190 iv SM
3.14 DRIVE UNIT ..........................................................................................3-76
3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-76
3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-76
3.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY .................................................3-77
3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K .3-79
3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K...........................................3-80
3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-81
M Toner Supply Unit ...........................................................................3-81
C and Y Toner Supply Units ...............................................................3-85
K Toner Supply Unit............................................................................3-86
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS .........................................4-1
4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT .........................................4-1
4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT ...............................4-3
4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT .......................................4-4
4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE ...........................................................................4-7
4.2.1 VPU TEST MODE ............................................................................4-7
SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R ..........................................................4-7
SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G ..........................................................4-7
SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B ..........................................................4-7
4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE..............................................................................4-7
SP4-904-1 Register Write/Read Check Result ....................................4-7
SP4-904-2 Image Path Check Result ..................................................4-7
4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-9
4.3.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-9
SC Code Classification .......................................................................4-10
4.4 SC TABLE ...............................................................................................4-11
4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................4-55
4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-55
Work-flow............................................................................................4-55
4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................4-57
4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-57
Detailed Explanation ...........................................................................4-61
Copy Image processing ......................................................................4-66
4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT ...............................................................................4-68
Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 mm..................................................4-70
How to measure the gap between color lines .....................................4-76
4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT .........4-78
Check the color shift level ...................................................................4-78
Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment ...................................4-78
4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT .....................................................................4-81
Black Over Print Disabled ...................................................................4-81
Black Over Print Enabled....................................................................4-81
4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-82
4.7.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-82
SM v B147/B149/B190
4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-84
4.9 LEDS (BCU) ............................................................................................4-84
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ...........5-1
Entering SP Mode.................................................................................5-1
Exiting SP Mode ...................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES ....................................................................5-2
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-3
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ...........5-4
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................5-4
Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-5
5.1.3 REMARKS........................................................................................5-5
Display on the Control Panel Screen ....................................................5-5
Others ...................................................................................................5-6
5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE............................................................................5-7
5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..................................................................5-7
SP1-XXX (Feed) ...................................................................................5-7
SP2-XXX (Drum).................................................................................5-15
SP3-XXX (Process) ............................................................................5-27
SP4-XXX (Scanner) ............................................................................5-35
SP5-XXX (Mode) ................................................................................5-42
SP6-XXX (Peripherals) .......................................................................5-64
SP7-XXX (Data Log)...........................................................................5-67
SP8-xxx: Data Log2 ............................................................................5-78
5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE .................................................................5-114
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007 ............................................................5-116
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor...........................................................5-117
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) .................................................5-117
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ................................................5-117
Table 4: Original Size Detection .......................................................5-118
5.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE .............................................................5-119
5.2.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997) .........................................................5-123
5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ..................................................................5-124
SP1-XXX (Service Mode) .................................................................5-124
5.4 SCANNER SP MODE ...........................................................................5-126
SP1-xxx (System and Others) ..........................................................5-126
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ..................................................5-127
5.5 REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET ................................................5-137
5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET ....................................................................5-137
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ...................5-137
System Setting Reset .......................................................................5-137
Copier Setting Reset.........................................................................5-138
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE ...........................................................................5-139
5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE..................................................................5-139
B147/B149/B190 vi SM
Rev. 06/2004
5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN… ..............................................................5-140

5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE...............................................................5-140
5.6.3 VERIFYING A SUCCESSFUL UPDATE ......................................5-147
5.6.4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL.............5-150
5.6.5 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA ..................................................5-151
5.6.6 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-152
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ...................................5-152
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM................................................5-152
5.6.7 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE .........................................5-153
5.6.8 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS...............................5-156
5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE........................................................................5-157
5.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-157
5.7.2 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................5-158
5.7.3 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................5-159
5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................5-160
5.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-160
5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ................................................5-161
5.9 USER PROGRAM MODE .....................................................................5-162
5.9.1 MENU ...........................................................................................5-162
5.9.2 DISPLAY ......................................................................................5-166
Selecting Menu .................................................................................5-166
Inquiry ...............................................................................................5-166
5.10 DIP SWITCHES...................................................................................5-167
Controller Board................................................................................5-167
BCU Board........................................................................................5-167
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-3
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4
Overview...............................................................................................6-4
Descriptions ..........................................................................................6-5
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS ......................................................................6-6
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-8
6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-8
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-8
Overview...............................................................................................6-8
Process Control Self Check ..................................................................6-9
6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-10
Step 1: VSG Adjustment .....................................................................6-10
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment .........................6-12
SM vii B147/B149/B190
Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation .................................6-13
Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection...........................................6-13
Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection ........................................................6-13
6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB ..........................6-14
Highlight Pattern .................................................................................6-14
Adjustment Process ............................................................................6-14
6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .........................................................6-15
Overview.............................................................................................6-15
Toner Supply Control Modes ..............................................................6-15
6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION ............................6-16
Introduction .........................................................................................6-16
Toner Near End Detection 1 ...............................................................6-17
Toner Near End Detection 2 ...............................................................6-17
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-18
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-18
6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION ......................................................6-19
6.3 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-20
6.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-20
6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-21
6.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-22
6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ..................................................6-23
6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-24
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-24
6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................6-25
Signal Processing ...............................................................................6-25
A/D Conversion...................................................................................6-25
White Level Correction........................................................................6-25
Others .................................................................................................6-25
Black Level Correction ........................................................................6-26
Adjustments ........................................................................................6-26
VPU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-26
6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM...................................................................6-27
Shading Correction .............................................................................6-27
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction ..........................................6-28
Scan Line Correction ..........................................................................6-28
Image Separation................................................................................6-28
ACS (Auto Color Select) .....................................................................6-29
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .....................6-30
Filtering ...............................................................................................6-31
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) ..................................................6-31
Color Conversion ................................................................................6-32
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-33
Printer Gamma Correction ..................................................................6-34
Error Diffusion .....................................................................................6-36
IPU Board Test ...................................................................................6-36
6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH................................................................................6-37
Copier Application...............................................................................6-37
Printer Application...............................................................................6-37
Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits) ........................................................6-37
B147/B149/B190 viii SM
Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)..........................................6-37
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-38
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-38
6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-39
6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR ........................................6-40
Overview.............................................................................................6-40
Main Scan Start Detection ..................................................................6-40
Clock Frequency Adjustment ..............................................................6-40
6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-41
Dual Beam Mechanism.......................................................................6-41
Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism...............................................6-41
Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position ..........................................6-42
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................6-43
Error Messages ..................................................................................6-44
6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..............................6-45
Overview.............................................................................................6-45
Summary of Each Adjustment ............................................................6-46
Adjustment Conditions ........................................................................6-47
Main Scan Skew Adjustment ..............................................................6-48
6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES ...............6-48
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT ...................................................................6-49
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-49
6.7.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-50
6.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS .............................................6-51
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51
Initialization Process and SC Codes ...................................................6-52
6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING .............................................6-53
6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-54
6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION .....................................................6-55
Waste Toner Path ...............................................................................6-55
Waste Toner Vibrator..........................................................................6-56
6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION ...............................6-57
6.8 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-58
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-58
6.8.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-59
6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION .............................................................6-60
6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-61
6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-62
Overview.............................................................................................6-62
Toner Agitation and Attraction ............................................................6-62
Air Flow and Toner Flow .....................................................................6-63
Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................6-63
Toner Transport ..................................................................................6-64
6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION ...............................................6-65
6.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................6-66
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-66
6.9.2 DRIVE – TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY .........................6-67
6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2..........................................................6-68
6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2....................................6-69
SM ix B147/B149/B190
6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2 ..............................6-70
6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2 ....................................6-70
6.9.7 REGISTRATION.............................................................................6-71
6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED...........................................................6-72
6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM .......................................6-73
6.10 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................6-74
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-74
6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION .................................................................6-75
Up to A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF ............................................................6-75
Larger than A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF...................................................6-75
6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT...........................................................6-76
6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE) ........6-77
6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................6-78
6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER ....6-79
With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...........................................6-79
With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...............................6-79
6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................................6-80
Drive ...................................................................................................6-80
Feed-in and feed-out...........................................................................6-80
6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................6-81
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-81
6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ............................................................6-82
Drive Motor .........................................................................................6-82
Rotation Encoder ................................................................................6-83
6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT................................................................6-84
6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING .....................................................6-85
6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT ......................................................6-86
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-86
Transfer Belt Sensor ...........................................................................6-87
Copier ACS.........................................................................................6-87
Printer ACS.........................................................................................6-88
6.12 FUSING .................................................................................................6-89
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-89
6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE...................................................................6-90
Belt and Rollers ..................................................................................6-90
Fusing Clutch......................................................................................6-90
6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................6-91
Fusing Temperatures..........................................................................6-91
Temperature Corrections ....................................................................6-92
Overheat Protection ............................................................................6-92
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY AND CLEANING .....................................................6-93
Oil Supply Pad and Roller...................................................................6-93
Oil Supply Mechanism ........................................................................6-94
6.12.5 WASTE OIL ..................................................................................6-95
Bottle Set Sensor ................................................................................6-95
Waste Oil Sensor ................................................................................6-96
6.12.6 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION ..........................6-96
6.12.7 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...........................................................6-97
Overview.............................................................................................6-97
B147/B149/B190 x SM
Panel Off Mode ...................................................................................6-98
Auto Off Mode.....................................................................................6-99
6.13 PAPER EXIT .......................................................................................6-100
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-100
6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ............................................6-101
6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS .......................................................................6-102
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-102
6.14.2 HARD DISK ................................................................................6-104
Overview...........................................................................................6-104
Data Transfer....................................................................................6-104
6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING .....................................................6-105
RPCS Driver .....................................................................................6-105
PCL5c Driver ....................................................................................6-105
PS3 Driver ........................................................................................6-106
CMS (Color Management System) ...................................................6-106
Gray Correction ................................................................................6-106
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)..........................6-106
Gamma Correction............................................................................6-106
Toner Limitation ................................................................................6-107
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP .......................................................6-107
6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS .....................................................6-108
Sample Print .....................................................................................6-108
Locked Print......................................................................................6-108
6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING .........................................................................6-109
Related SP Modes ............................................................................6-109
Paper Source Selection ....................................................................6-110
Auto Continue ...................................................................................6-111
Paper Output Tray ............................................................................6-112
Stapling.............................................................................................6-112
Punching...........................................................................................6-113
6.15 ETHERNET BOARD ...........................................................................6-114
6.15.1 ETHERNET BOARD LAYOUT ...................................................6-114
6.15.2 ETHERNET BOARD OPERATION.............................................6-115
6.16 IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)..........................................................6-116
6.16.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-116
6.17 USB .....................................................................................................6-118
6.17.1 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................6-118
6.17.2 USB 1.1/2.0 ................................................................................6-118
6.17.3 USB CONNECTORS..................................................................6-119
6.17.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT .....................................................................6-119
6.17.5 REMARKS ABOUT USB ............................................................6-120
Related SP Mode..............................................................................6-120
6.18 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) ........................................................6-121
6.18.1 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................6-121
LED Indicators ..................................................................................6-121
6.18.2 TRANSMISSION MODES ..........................................................6-122
Ad Hoc Mode ....................................................................................6-122
Infrastructure Mode...........................................................................6-122
6.18.3 SECURITY FEATURES .............................................................6-123
SM xi B147/B149/B190
Using the SSID in Ad hoc mode .......................................................6-123
6.18.4 WIRELESS LAN TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES .......................6-124
Communication Status......................................................................6-124
Channel Settings ..............................................................................6-124
Troubleshooting Procedure...............................................................6-125
6.19 BLUETOOTH.......................................................................................6-126
6.19.1 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................6-126
6.19.2 BLUETOOTH PROFILES ...........................................................6-127
6.19.3 BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES.......................................6-127
6.20 SCANNER FUNCTIONS .....................................................................6-128
6.20.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE.........................6-128
Image Data Path ...............................................................................6-128
6.20.2 SCANNER ACS (AUTO COLOR SELECTION) .........................6-129
6.21 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)...................................................6-130
SPECIFICATIONS
7. SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................7-1
1.1 BASIC..................................................................................................7-1
1.2 PRINTER.............................................................................................7-3
1.3 SCANNER ...........................................................................................7-4
2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES......................................................................7-5
2.1 PAPER FEED......................................................................................7-5
2.2 PAPER EXIT .......................................................................................7-6
PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ....................................7-7
3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .....................................................................7-8
3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ............................................................................7-8
3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE ..........................................................................7-8
Scanner ................................................................................................7-9
Scanner Drivers ....................................................................................7-9
Scanner Utilities ....................................................................................7-9
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ...................................................................7-10
5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................7-12
5.1 ARDF.................................................................................................7-12
5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT .......................................................7-13
5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ......................................................7-13
5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ...........................................7-13
5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT ...........................................7-14
5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER ........................................................................7-15
5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ..............................................................7-16
ARDF B597
SEE SECTION B597 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
B147/B149/B190 xii SM
Rev. 05/2004
ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599

BOOKLET FINISHER B602

FAX OPTION B603

INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

SEE SECTION IFAX FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694

SEE SECTION B692/B694 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM xiii B147/B149/B190
IIMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts
making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can
explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical
one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not
recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance
with local regulations.
1. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
5. Dispose of used fusing oil in accordance with local regulations.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage
your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved
with those marks.
Symbols and Abbreviations

This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol What it means

Refer to section number
 See Core Tech Manual for details
 Screw
 Connector
 E-ring
 Clip ring
Short Edge Feed (SEF) Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Rev. 05/2004
INSTALLATION
POSITION 1
TAB
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B597
FAX OPTION B603
INTERNET FAX (IFAX)
POSITION 2
TAB
POSITION 3
TAB
POSITION 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB
POSITION 5
SERVICE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 6
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS TAB
SPECIFICATIONS
POSITION 7
TAB

POSITION 8
TAB
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1. INSTALLATION
Installation
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Ambient Humidity (%RH)
80%
70%
Recommended conditions:
15 to 25°C
30 to 70 %RH
54%
30%
15%
B146I935.WMF 10°C 15°C 30°C 32°C
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
5. Avoid exposing the machine to sudden temperature changes, which include:
1) Direct cool air from an air conditioner
2) Direct heat from a heater
6. Avoid installing the machine in areas that might be exposed to corrosive gas.
7. Install the machine at a location lower than 2,500 m (8,200 ft.) above sea level.
8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no
more than 5 mm.)
9. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be subjected to strong vibration.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")
SM 1-1 B147/B149/B190
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.
[B]
[A] [C]
[D]
B146I927.WMF
A: Over 10 mm (0.39")
B: Over 100 mm (3.9")
C: Over 550 mm (22")
D: Over 75 mm (3.0")
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Insert firmly the plug in the outlet.
2. Avoid using an outlet extension plug or cord.
3. Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A

220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 %
3. Do not put or place anything on the power cord.
B147/B149/B190 1-2 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS
1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS
Installation
1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS
No. Options Remarks

1 1-tray paper feed unit
2 2-tray paper feed unit One from the three
3 Large capacity tray
4 Platen cover
One from the two
5 ARDF
6 Multi-bin output tray One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9
7 Two-tray finisher One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9
8 Punch kit (3 types) No. 7 required; One of the three types
9 Booklet Finisher One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9
10 Punch unit (4 types) No. 9 required; One of the four types
Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)
1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS
No. Options Remarks

11 Printer/scanner
12 256 MB memory For Asia model only
13 NIB
14 IEEE 1394
15 IEEE 802.11b
One from the four
16 USB 2.0
17 Bluetooth
18 PostScript 3
19 File Format Converter
Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)
SM 1-3 B147/B149/B190
COPIER
1.3 COPIER
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
1. ARDF
Rating voltage output
connector for accessory
Max. DC24V
2. Duplex unit
Max. DC24V
3. Finisher
Max. DC24V
B146I932.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-4 SM
COPIER
1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART
Installation
The following flow chart shows the flow of the installation procedures.
Start
A
Unpack the copier. Install the copier.
Select the language.

Will the paper feed
unit or LCT installed?
Set the date and time.

Yes
Place the copier on the paper feed unit or

LCT, and install it. Perform ACC.
No
Check magnification and registration.

Will the controller options installed?
Yes
Adjust the operation panel display if
Install the controller options. necessary.
No
Specify the settings relevant to the
Install the platen cover or ARDF.
contract (see section 1.4.1).
Will the two-tray finisher End

or booklet finisher installed?
Yes
Will the punch unit installed?
Yes
Install the punch unit.

No
No
Install the finisher.
A
B146I901.WMF
The finisher requires an optional paper tray unit or the LCT.
A punch unit is dedicated to the two-tray finisher or the booklet finisher.
SM 1-5 B147/B149/B190
MACHINE INSTALLATION
1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.4.1 COPIER
CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before moving the
machine, otherwise the transfer belt and the black PCU may be damaged.
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Operating Instructions–System Setting................................1
2. Operating Manual–Copy Reference ....................................1
3. Operating Manual–Printer Reference*.................................1
4. CD-ROM–Printer/Scanner Driver* .......................................1
5. CD-ROM–Operating Instructions*........................................1
6. Ferrite Core* ........................................................................1
7. Paper Size Decal .................................................................1
8. Model Name Decal ..............................................................1
9. Operation Panel Indication Decal ........................................1
10. Energy Star Sticker............................................................1
11. Decal–Inkjet Caution..........................................................1
12. Decal–Copy Prohibition .....................................................1
13. Oil Supply Unit ...................................................................1
14. External Tray .....................................................................1
15. Power Cord........................................................................1
16. Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth .........................................1
17. Cloth Holder.......................................................................1
18. NECR (New Equipment Condition Report) ........................1
* The Asia model does not include these accessories.
B147/B149/B190 1-6 SM
Rev. 10/2004 MACHINE INSTALLATION
Installation Procedure
Installation
CAUTION
Remove the tape from the development units (see step 2) before you turn
the main switch on. The development units may be severely damaged if
they operate with the tape attached.
If you install an optional paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time, place
the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install the copier and other
options.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. You may need
them (in the future) to transport the machine to another location.
[A]
B146I945.WMF
B146I944.WMF
⇒ 1. Remove the tape and padding on the copier. To remove the tapes from the
developer units follow the procedure below:
a) Turn the transfer belt release lever
counterclockwise.
b) Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate.
Then lift the plate until you hear a click.
SM 1-7 B147/B149/B190
MACHINE INSTALLATION Rev. 10/2004
⇒ c) Hold the development unit. At the

same time, slowly pull out the tape
horizontally.
d) Push in each development unit
e) Lower the drum plate. Then tighten

two screws that hold the plate (the
upper left one first, then the lower
right one). Return the transfer belt
release lever to its operational position. (See Step a).
2. Remove the pin [A]. (As shown on the previous page.)

NOTE: Keep the pin. You may need it to transport the machine in the future
( 1.4.3).
B146I913.WMF
3. Remove the tape from the oil supply unit.

B146I914.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-8 SM
⇒4. Install the oil supply unit to the fusing

[A]
Installation
unit.
5. Install the fusing unit [A] to the copier.
[B] B146I912.WMF
6. Shake the toner cartridge five or six

times.
7. Install the toner cartridges to the copier.
8. Check that the hooks [B] hold the
cartridge correctly.
B146I915.WMF
[C]
9. Install the external tray [C].
B146I916.WMF
SM 1-9 B147/B149/B190
⇒ 10. Attach the cloth holder [A] to the left side of the
scanner unit.
11. Place the contact glass cleaning cloth [B] in the
holder.
B146I936.WMF
12. Remove the guide cover [C].

13. Attach the duplex inverter guide [D].
14. Re-attach the guide cover.
[B]
[C]
[A] B146I003.WMF
[D]
15. Attach the appropriate model name decal [A] to

the front cover.
16. Pull each paper tray out, and adjust the side
guides and end guide to match the paper size.
NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out
the tray fully, then push down the green
lock at the rear inside the tray.
17. Attach the appropriate paper tray number
decals [B] to the paper trays.
[A]
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used
for the optional paper tray or the
optional LCT. Keep any remaining
decals for use with these optional units.
18. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen B146I928.WMF
cover. [B]
B147/B149/B190 1-10 SM
⇒19. Plug in the machine and turn the main power switch on. The machine
Installation
automatically starts the initialization procedure. After this has finished, the Start
button LED (C) turns green.
20. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
21. Perform the Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) as follows:
1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
2) Place the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Place 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
5) Press “Start Scanning” on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
22. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
23. Check that the circuit breaker works normally.
Settings Relevant to Contract

If the customer has a service contract, change the settings of the following SPs in
accordance with it.
NOTE: You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in
accordance with the contract ( SP5-045-001).
Item SP No. Function Default
Counting SP5-045-001 Specifies whether the counting method “0”:
method used in meter charge mode is based on Developments
developments or prints.
NOTE: You can specify this setting only
one time. After you have specified
it, you cannot change the setting.
A3/11" x 17" SP5-104-001 Specifies whether the counter is doubled “No”: Single
double for A3/11" x 17" paper. counting
counting
Serivice Tel. SP5-812-001 Programs the service station fax number.
No. Setting through 004 The number is printed on the counter list
when the meter charge mode is selected,
so that the user can fax the counter data to
the service station.
SM 1-11 B147/B149/B190
1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE
CAUTION
This section assumes that you will manually move the machine from one floor to
another floor. When using any transport equipment, see section 1.4.3,
“Transporting Machine.”
The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray
or LCT installed. You can remove them as necessary.
1. Check that the transfer belt is in its

correct position.
2. Remove all trays from the optional
paper feed unit or LCT.
3. Remove the front stand [A]
( x 2).
[A]
G080I910.WMF
4. Remove the rear stand [B]

( x 2, 2 brackets).
[B]
G080I911.WMF
CAUTION: After moving the machine to it’s new location, reinstall the machine
stands. Without them, the machine may tip over when you pull out a
paper tray or while you work on the machine.
B147/B149/B190 1-12 SM
1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE
Installation
CAUTION
1. Check that the transfer belt is in its correct position.

2. Remove the machine stands ( 1.4.2)
3. Remove the toner cartridges to prevent toner from flowing into the toner supply
tube due to vibrations experienced during transport. This may cause the tube to
be clogged with toner.
4. Put air packing into the toner cartridge holder to shield the toner supply
entrance. This prevents toner from flowing out to the toner cartridge holder.
5. Set the lock pin [A] (which comes
with the machine) in the transfer belt
unit.
NOTE: The lower end of the transfer
belt moves. The surfaces of
the belt and PCU may be
damaged by the friction [A]
between them if you
transport the machine
without locking the belt.
6. Make sure there is no paper left in
the paper trays and fix down the B146I911.WMF
bottom plates with a sheet of paper
and tape.
7. Empty out the waste toner bottle and
attach securing tape to prevent the
bottle from falling out.
8. Empty out the waste oil bottle and
attach securing tape to prevent the
bottle from falling out.
9. Turn the release lever [B] [B]
counterclockwise to its lowermost
position. (The lever does not stay in
this position if you do not hold it.)
Fasten the lever in this position with
tape. B146I939.WMF
NOTE: The release lever lifts the transfer belt up and holds it against the black
PCU. The surfaces of the belt and PCU may be damaged by the
friction between them if you transport the machine with the two units in
this position.
SM 1-13 B147/B149/B190
10. Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors, or shrink-wrap the machine
tightly.
NOTE: 1) If pre-installing machines for actual test prints at a service depot, use a
jig oil supply unit, and not the oil supply unit enclosed as an accessory.
This is because the toner supply system uses a touch-and-release

mechanism, which can cause the unit to move freely up and down
during transport if shipping the mainframe with the oil supply unit
installed. This in turn may cause damage to the white holder on the
fusing unit. However if simply moving the machine from floor to floor, the
oil supply unit can be left installed.
2) If shipping a used machine to a new location, dispose of the used oil

supply unit and install a new one, due to the reason explained above.
This is not necessary when simply moving the machine from floor to
floor.
3) After having moved the machine to a new location, be sure to perform

Auto Adjust (User Program mode) or forced Line Position Adjustment
(SP5-993-002) to optimize color line alignment.
4) Make sure that the side fences in the trays are properly positioned to
prevent color shifting.
B147/B149/B190 1-14 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1
2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1
3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M4 x 10 .....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
1 2 3 6 7
4 5
B146I929.WMF
SM 1-15 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug its power cord before
starting the installation procedure.
2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly
unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and
grips may be damaged.
1. Remove all tape on the paper tray

unit.
B146I919.WMF
2. Remove the paper tray and

remove all tape and padding.
3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).
[A] B146I920.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-16 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
4. Install the rear stand [A].
5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]
( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B146I921.WMF
[E]
6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of
the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the
paper feed unit [F].
[D]
[F]
B146I004.WMF
SM 1-17 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
8. Remove tray 2 of the copier.

9. Fasten the knob screw [A].
10. Re-install tray 2.
[A]
B146I922.WMF
11. Open the right cover. [B]

12. Install the link bracket [B]
(1 knob screw).
B146I923.WMF
13. Turn on the main switch.

14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality.
B147/B149/B190 1-18 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
Installation
Accessory Check
Description Q’ty
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M4 x 10 .....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
1 2 3 6 7
5
4
B146I929.WMF
SM 1-19 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and
grips may be damaged.
1. Remove all tape on the paper tray

unit.
B456I002.WMF
2. Remove the paper trays and

remove all tape and padding.
3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).
B456I103.WMF
[A]
B147/B149/B190 1-20 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C] B598I901.WMF
6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of [E]

the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the
paper feed unit [F].
[D]
[F]
B146I004.WMF
SM 1-21 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT

[A]
B146I902.WMF

(1 knob screw).
B146I903.WMF

B147/B149/B190 1-22 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
Installation
Accessory Check
Description Q’ty
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M 4 x 10 ....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
1 2 3 6 7
5
4
B146I929.WMF
SM 1-23 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the LCT installed. The handle and grips may be
damaged.
1. Remove all tape.
B457I001.WMF
[A]
2. Press the stopper [A] and pull out
the tray [B].
3. Install the front stand [C] ( x 2).
[B]
[C] B457I003.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-24 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B598I901.WMF
6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of [E]

the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT
[F].
[D]
[F]
B600I901.WMF
SM 1-25 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT

[A]
B146I917.WMF

(1 knob screw).
B146I918.WMF

B147/B149/B190 1-26 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
Installation
Accessory Check
Description Q’ty
1. Left stopper bracket ......................................................................1
2. Right stopper bracket....................................................................1
3. Knob screw ...................................................................................4
4. Stud screw ....................................................................................2
5. Screw M4 x 10 ..............................................................................2
6. Screwdriver Tool ...........................................................................1
7. Decal.............................................................................................1
8. Decal.............................................................................................1
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 B146I924.WMF
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug its power cord before
1. Remove all tape.
G564I122.WMF
SM 1-27 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
[E]
[B]
[C]
B146I930.WMF
[D]
B597I901.WMF
[A]
[F]
B146I937.WMF
2. Install the two stud screws [A].

3. Mount the ARDF on the copier, and slide it to the front as shown.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the ARDF, grasp it as shown.
4. Fasten the two screws [B] to secure the ARDF.
5. Attach the left [C] and right [D] stopper brackets (Knob screw x 2 for each).
6. Connect the cable [E] to the copier.
7. Fasten the cable with the clamp [F].
B147/B149/B190 1-28 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[C]
[A]
[B]
G564I102.WMF
B146I931.WMF
8. Remove the platen sheet [A] and place

it on the exposure glass [B].
9. Align the rear left corner (of the platen
sheet) flush against the corner [C] on
the exposure glass.
10. Close the ARDF.
11. Open the ARDF and check that the
platen sheet is correctly attached.
12. Attach the decal [D] with the arrow (on
the decal) pointing at the ARDF
exposure glass.
[D]
[E] G564I105.WMF
13. Attach the decal [E] on the top.

14. Turn the main switch on, and check
the operation.
15. Make a full size copy, and check that
the registrations (side-to-side and
leading edge) and image skew are
correct. If they are not, adjust the
registration and image skew with SP
mode.
G564I106.WMF
SM 1-29 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER

Accessory Check
Description Q’ty
1. Duplex-unit support.......................................................................1
2. Tray...............................................................................................2
3. Link rail .........................................................................................1
4. Link-rail holder ..............................................................................1
5. Screw M4 x 12 ..............................................................................6
6. Screw M4 x 8 ................................................................................2
1 2 3
6
4
B146I926.WMF
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug its power cord before
1. Remove all tape. Check that no tape remains inside

the front cover and on the left cover.
2. Fold the external tray [A].
[A]
B146I905.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-30 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
3. Set the link rail [A] on the link-rail
holder [B].
4. Install the link-rail holder (with the
link rail) to the copier [C] ( x 2).
[C]
[B]
[A]
B146I906.WMF
5. Install the duplex-unit support [D] to

the copier ( x 3).
[D]
B146I907.WMF
SM 1-31 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
6. Adjust the position of the connection

bracket [A] as necessary ( x 2):
• Upper position for the copier with the
two-tray paper feed unit or LCT.
• Lower position for the copier with the
one-tray paper feed unit.
[A] B146I908.WMF
7. Connect the finisher [B] with the copier [B]

( x 1).
8. Connect the finisher cable to the
connector of the copier.
B146I909.WMF
9. Install the two trays [C] ( x 1 for each).

[C]
10. Extend the external tray of the copier
(see step 2).
11. Turn the main switch on and check the
operation.
B146I910.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-32 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT
Installation
Accessory Check
Description Q’ty
1. Punch unit............................................................................1
2. Sensor arm ..........................................................................1
3. Spring ..................................................................................1
4. Screw M3 x 6 .......................................................................2
5. Step screw...........................................................................2
6. Hopper.................................................................................1
7. Spacer (2 mm) .....................................................................1
8. Spacer (1 mm) .....................................................................2
2 1
8
4
B146I933.WMF
5 6 7
SM 1-33 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord. If the two-tray
finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
[A]
[C]
[B]
B377I102.WMF
B377I103.WMF
1. Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Open the front door of the finisher and remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).
3. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 2) and paper guide [C] (stepped  x 1).
B147/B149/B190 1-34 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[B]
[A]
[C]
B377I101.WMF
[E]
B377I104.WMF
[D]
4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2).

5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped  x 1).
6. Install the spring [C].
7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D].
8. Install the punch unit [E] ( x 2, stepped  x 1).
SM 1-35 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
B377I200.WMF
[C]
[B]
B377I106.WMF
9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp it as shown.

10. Slide in the hopper [B].
11. Fasten the two 1-mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment.
NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the punch
holes.
12. Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation.
B147/B149/B190 1-36 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY
Installation
Accessories Check List
Description Q’ty
1. Front Tray Holder.................................................................1
2. Rear Tray Holder .................................................................1
3. Tray .....................................................................................2
4. Screw (M3 x 14)...................................................................4
5. Discharge Brush ..................................................................2
6. Ground Plate for Left Cover.................................................1
7. Ground Plate for Upper Exit.................................................1
8. Ground Plate for Lower Exit.................................................1
1 2 3 4
B146I934.WMF 5 6 7 8
SM 1-37 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray

NOTE: Before installing the multi-bin output tray, install the duplex unit.
1. Open the left cover [A] of the duplex [D]

[E]
unit.
2. Install the ground plate [B] behind the
magnet.
3. Install the ground plate [C] on the rear
of the left cover.
[A]
4. Attach the ground plate to the top
cover, aligning the bottom edges of
the plate [D] and cover [E].
[C] [B]
G306I101.WMF
5. Attach the discharge brushes [F][G] to [H]

the upper edges of the paper exits, so
that the ends of the brushes [H][I]
touch the ground plates [C][D]
respectively.
NOTE: Make sure the brushes do not [F]
obstruct paper coming from
the exits.
[G]
[I]
G306I102.WMF
[A]
6. Install the front [A] and rear [B] tray
holders on the top cover ( x 2 for [C]
each).
7. Install the upper [C] and lower [D]
trays.
8. Turn the main switch on; select the SP
mode menu, SP6–901–1; and change
the multi-bin output tray setting.
NOTE: The multi-bin output tray is not
automatically recognized by the [B]
printer mainframe. The multi-bin G306I103.WMF
output tray cannot be used until [D]
you have changed this SP mode setting.
B147/B149/B190 1-38 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER
Installation
Accessory Check
Description Q’ty
1. Regular tray ..................................................................................1
2. Rail holder.....................................................................................1
3. Magnet catch–rear........................................................................1
4. Magnet catch–front .......................................................................1
5. Duplex-unit support.......................................................................1
6. Rail joint ........................................................................................1
7. Screw M4 x 12 ..............................................................................6
8. Screw M4 x 6 ................................................................................8
9. Screw M3 x 14 ..............................................................................4
10. Rail..............................................................................................1
11. Stapler unit..................................................................................1
12. Staple cartridge...........................................................................1
13. Pad .............................................................................................3
1 2 3 4
5
10
6
7
8
11
9
B602I912.WMF
13 12
NOTE: Make sure that you retain the pads. The pads are white and made of
styrofoam.
SM 1-39 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
Adjusting the Height
[B]
[D]
[A] [C]
B602I901.WMF
B602I008.WMF
1. Check the type of optional paper tray installed:

• If the optional two-tray paper feed unit or the optional LCT is installed, go to
step 2.
• If either of them is not installed, go to “Main Body.”
2. Tape the pads [A] to the right-hand side of the machine.
3. Lay the finisher on its right-hand side.
4. Remove the adjuster plates [B] ( x 2).
5. Change the height [C].
6. Reinstall the adjuster plates [D].
7. Take out the finisher from the box and stand it up.
8. Check that the height is correct, and remove the pads.
B147/B149/B190 1-40 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Main Body
Installation
1. Remove all tape and padding.
B602I001.WMF
2. Remove the screw cover [A].

3. Install the rail joint [B] ( x 4).
4. Reinstall the screw cover.
[A]
[B]
B602I902.WMF
5. Install the regular tray [C] ( x 4).
[C]
B602I903.WMF
SM 1-41 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
[F]
6. Remove 2 screws [F] and install the
magnet catches [A][B] ( x 2 for each).
7. Install the duplex-unit support [C] ( x 3). [A]
[C]
[B] B602I004.WMF
8. Slide the rail [D] through the rail holder

[E].
9. Install the rail holder (with the rail) to the
copier ( x 2).
[D] [E] B602I904.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-42 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
10. Connect the booklet finisher unit to
the copier ( x 1).
B602I905.WMF
11. Install the stapler unit [A].
[A]
B602I907.WMF
12. Turn the knob [B] clockwise until the

staple-cartridge holder [C] reaches the
front-most position.
13. Install the staple cartridge [D] firmly to
[B]
the staple-cartridge holder.
[C]
[D] B602I908.WMF
14. Turn on the main switch and check the operation.
SM 1-43 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
Optional Punch Unit

Description Q’ty
1. Punch unit............................................................................1
2. Decal ...................................................................................1
3. Screw M4 x 6 (with the base) ..............................................1
4. Cable ...................................................................................2
4
B647I001.WMF
1. Remove the front lower cover

[A] ( x 2).
[A]
B602R988.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-44 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[E]
[G]
[B]
[C]
[D] [A]
B647I002.WMF
2. Remove the joint guard [A] ( x 2).

3. Open the front door [B].
4. Release the stopper and remove the knob [C].
5. Remove the front cover [D] ( x 2).
6. Remove the rear cover [E] ( x 3).
NOTE: Do not damage the mylar when you remove the screw.
7. Remove the right top cover with the paper entrance cover [G] ( x 4).
SM 1-45 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
8. Remove the right top cover [A] from [A]

the paper entrance cover [B].
[B]
B647I003.WMF
9. Install the punch unit [C] ( x 2, [D]

1 screw with the base [D])
[C] B647I901.WMF
10. Install the right top cover [E] ( x 2).

[E]
B647I005.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-46 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B647I006.WMF
11. Install the cable to the connectors as follows:

• J1003 (punch unit) [A] to CN12 (booklet finisher unit) [D]
• J1004 (punch unit) [B] to CN14 (booklet finisher unit) [C]
[E] [F]
B602I911.WMF
B647I903.WMF
12. Fasten the cable with the clamps.
13. Reassemble the booklet finisher unit.
NOTE: Check that the side guide and the front cover correctly join with each
other [E].
14. Attach the decal [F].
15. Turn on the main switch and check the punch operation.
SM 1-47 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.9 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT (FOR ASIA MODEL ONLY)

The printer scanner unit is a standard unit for the models other than the Asia model.
Accessory Check
Check the accessories in the box against the following list:
Description Q’ty
1. Key Tops – Printer (English: 1 set, Universal: 1 set)............2
2. Key Tops – Scanner (English: 1 set, Universal: 1 set).........2
3. NIB.......................................................................................1
4. IEEE 1284 Interface Board ..................................................1
5. SD Card...............................................................................1
6. Ferrite Core (For LAN cable) ...............................................1
CAUTION
Switch the main switch off and unplug the power cord before starting any
procedure described in these instructions.
CAUTION: When installing an SD card, push the

card into the slot until you hear a click. If
you release it too early, the SD card may
be pushed out of the slot.
You need to install the optional 256 MB memory with

the printer/scanner unit.
B612I901.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-48 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the
I/F Card Slot B ( x 2).
2. Install the Ethernet board [B]
(Knob-screw x 2).
[B]
[A]
B612I002.WMF
3. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card

Slot A [C] ( x 2).
4. Install the IEEE 1284 interface board
[D] (Knob-screw x 2).
[D]
[C]
B612I903.WMF
SM 1-49 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
5. Remove the slot cover [A] from SD [B]

Card Slot 1 ( x 1).
6. Turn the SD-card face [B] to the rear
of the machine, and push it slowly into
the slot until you hear a click. [A]
7. Attach the slot cover ( x 1).
B612I004.WMF
8. Remove the dummy keys [C] and

install one of the printer keys [D][d]
and one of the scanner keys [E][e].
[C]
Prin ter Scanner
[D] [d] [E] [e]

B612I902.WMF
[F]
9. Attach the ferrite core [F] to the LAN cable.
10. Connect the LAN cable.
B603I904.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-50 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.10 POSTSCRIPT 3
Installation
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from SD

Card Slot 2 ( x 1). [B]
2. Turn the SD-card face [B] to the rear
of the machine, and push it slowly
into the slot until you hear a click.
3. Attach the slot cover ( x 1). [A]
G369I901.WMF
4. Attach the “Adobe PostScript 3” decal [C] to the

front cover.
[C]
G369I902.WMF
SM 1-51 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.11 256 MB MEMORY
CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B612I001.WMF
1. Remove the controller board [A] ( x 3).

2. Install the expansion memory [B].
3. Reinstall the controller board ( x 3).
B147/B149/B190 1-52 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.12 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER
Installation
CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B609I901.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the file format converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
SM 1-53 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.13 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)

CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[C]
[A]
B581I901.WMF
You can install one of the following network interfaces: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless
LAN), USB 2.0, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth. (For the information on the Asia
model, see section 1.5.9.)
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot D [A] ( x 2).
2. Make sure that the jumper [B] is set on “TB2.”
3. Install the FireWire board [C] (Knob-screw x 2).
B147/B149/B190 1-54 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394
Installation
Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter  key.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
3. Press Interface Settings.
4. Press the corresponding key to enter the following settings:
• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• IP Over 1394. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables
IP Over 1394 as the default setting for the printing method.
• SCSI Print. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables
SCSI Print as the default setting for the printing method.
• SCSI Print Bi-directional. Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print.
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.
SP No. Name Function

5-839 004 Host Name Sets the name of the device used on the network.
Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX
5-839 007 Cycle Master Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE
1394 standard bus.
5-839 008 BCR Mode Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for
the Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus
for when IRM is not in use. The following three settings
are available: “Standard,” “IRM Color Copy,” and
“Always Effective.”
5-839 009 IRM 1394a Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a is
Check conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
5-839 010 Unique ID Enables the “Node_Unique_Id” setting for enumeration
on the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
5-839 011 Logout Determines how successive initiator login requests are
handled during login in for SBP-2.
5-839 012 Login Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
5-839 013 Login MAX Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range:
1 ~ 62.
SM 1-55 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.14 USB 2.0

CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B596I901.WMF
2. Install the FireWire board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B147/B149/B190 1-56 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
USB SP Settings
Installation
The following SP commands are available. However, only one setting may require
adjustment and this setting should be performed only if the customer is
experiencing USB data transmission errors.
NOTE: Do not change the settings marked “DFU”. These settings are for design
and factory use only.
5-844-001 Transfer Rate Adjusts the USB transfer rate. Do not change the
setting unless there is a data transfer error using the
USB high speed mode.
HS/FS: High speed/Full speed auto adjust
(480Mbps/12Mbps)
FS: Full speed (12Mbps fixed)
5-844-002 Vendor ID Displays the vendor ID. DFU
5-844-003 Product ID Displays the product ID. DFU
5-844-004 Dev. Release Displays the development release version number.
Number DFU
SM 1-57 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.15 IEEE 802.11b (WIRELESS LAN)

CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B582I901.WMF
2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B147/B149/B190 1-58 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
[C]
Installation
[E]
[B]
[D]
[F]
[A]
B582I902.WMF
3. Pull off the edge connector protector [A] off the card and discard it.
4. With the card label facing left, insert the card [B] into the PCI slot.
5. Use the Velcro pads to install the antennas [C] on the left rear corner of the
machine.
NOTE: The antennas should be separated by at least 40 ~ 60 mm (1.5~2.5").
Always detach the antennas from the corners of the machine and
disconnect them before moving the machine.
6. Connect the antennas to the terminals [D].
7. Wrap the cables [E] and hang them over the antennas as shown.
8. Attach the cover [F] ( x 2).
9. If reception is poor, you may need to move the machine:
• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of
equipment that can generate a strong magnetic field.
• Position the machine as close as possible to the access point.
SM 1-59 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
NOTE: The wireless LAN cannot be used if Ethernet is being used.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.

2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
3. Select Interface Settings → Network (tab) → Network I/F Settting
4. Select either “Ethernet” or “IEEE 802.11b”.
5. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options are displayed.
6. Transmission Mode. Select either “Ad Hoc Mode” or “Infrastructure Mode”.
7. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
8. Channel. This setting is required when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different
countries.
9. WEP (Privacy) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is
designed to protect wireless data transmission. In order to unlock encoded
data, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. There are 64 bit and
128 bit WEP keys.
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit 10 characters
128 bit 26 characters
10. Bandwidth Status. This setting is enabled only for the Infrastructure Mode.
Press here to display the current status of the bandwidth. One of the following
is displayed to reflect the reception status of the wireless LAN:
Good 76 ~ 100%
Fair 41 ~ 75%
Poor 21 ~ 40%
Unavailable 0 ~ 20%
B147/B149/B190 1-60 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
11. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to display more settings, then
Installation
select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the
closest machine or access point, depending on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and
the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the
distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)
12. To initialize the wireless LAN settings, use page 2/2. Press Execute to initialize
the following settings:
• Transmission mode
• Channel
• Transmission Speed
• WEP
• SSID
• WEP Key
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 802.11b

5-840-004 SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
5-840-006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
5-840-007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings
allowed for your country.
5-840-010 WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
5-840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
5-840-020 WEP Mode Used to display the maximum length of the string that
can be used for the WEP Key entry.
SM 1-61 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.16 BLUETOOTH
CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B582I901.WMF
2. Install the Bluetooth board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B147/B149/B190 1-62 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[B]
[C]
[A] G377I901.WMF
3. Insert the Bluetooth card [A] into the slot.

4. Press the antenna [B] to extend it.
5. Attach the antenna cap [C].
SM 1-63 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.17 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS
1. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch.

2. Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page.
User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page
NOTE: The same data can also be printed by executing SP1-004 – Print
Summary. All installed options are listed in the “System Reference”
column.
B147/B149/B190 1-64 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.18 KEY COUNTER HOLDER
Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).
[A]
B146R102.WMF
[B]
2. Cut a 15-mm (0.6") piece [B] off the 15 mm
tape. (0.6")
NOTE: You do not need the smaller
piece for the installation.
A674I901.WMF
3. Remove the scanner right cover

[A]
[A] ( x 2).
4. Clean the area [B] with alcohol.
5. Attach the tape.
[B]
A674I902.WMF
SM 1-65 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
[D]
62 mm
[C]
(2.4")
[B]
A674I903.WMF A674I904.WMF
The view from the back The view from the top
6. Attach the key counter holder as follows.

• The bottom end of the key counter holder [B] is 62 mm (2.4") below the
bottom end of the scanner right cover [A].
• The bracket on the back of the key counter holder [C] is aligned to the rear
end of the scanner cover [D].
7. Reassemble the covers.
A674I905.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-66 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.19 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (SCANNER)
Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).
[A]
B146R102.WMF
[F]
2. Remove the scanner right cover [B]
( x 2).
3. Remove the rear scale [C] ( x 3). [C]
4. Remove the exposure glass [D] with

the left scale [E] ( x 2). [E]
[B]
NOTE: You do not have to remove the
ARDF exposure glass. If the
glass is removed, position the
glass marker [F] at the rear-left
corner when reattaching.
[D]
B146I940.WMF
SM 1-67 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
5. Install the anti-condensation heater [A] [A]

in the rear-left corner of the scanner
unit ( x 2).
6. Pass the cable through the opening
[B] in the rear.
B146I942.WMF
[B]
[D]
7. Attach the clamps [C] to the rear
frame.
8. Fasten the cable with the clamps.
9. Connect the connector [D]. [C]
10. Reassemble the copier.
B146I943.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-68 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (PAPER TRAY)
Installation
CAUTION
1. Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
2. After cutting the lower-most rectangular piece off the right-bottom corner
of the rear cover, file the edges to smooth them. Rough edges may hurt
the user. The user pushes the tray-heater switch through this
rectangular opening.
1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5). [A]

2. Remove the switch bracket [B] (
x 2).
3. Remove tray 1 and tray 2.
[B]
B146I947.WMF
4. Cut the lower-most rectangular

piece [C] off the right-bottom corner (viewed
from the rear) of the rear cover.
5. File the edges to smooth them.
[C]
B146I946.WMF
6. Make sure that the heater switch [D]
is not upside down. The “–” sign [E]
is on the upper end and the “” sign [E]
[F] is on the lower end.
NOTE: The “–” sign means “on.” The
“” sign means “off.” [D]
7. Install the switch to the bracket [G].
[F]
8. Make sure that the heater switch is
off.
[G] B146I948.WMF
SM 1-69 B147/B149/B190
OPTIONAL UNIT
9. Install the switch bracket (with the

heater switch) to the original place. Do [A]
not fasten the screws yet. [B]
10. Connect the white connectors to the
switch.
B146I949.WMF
11. Insert the red connector [A] into the [C] [D]
opening on the frame [B].
12. Fasten the two screws on the switch bracket. [G]
13. Align the caution decal [E] with the [E]
mark [F] on the front of the heater
cover [G], and attach the caution
decal there.
B146I950.WMF
[F]
14. Align the tray heater [H] with the [H]

marks [I][J] on the back of the
heather cover, and attach the tray
heater there. [K]
15. Connect the tray heater connector
[K] (from the front side of the [I] [J] B146I951.WMF
copier) to the red connector [A].

16. Insert the heater cover to the
openings [C][D] from the front side
( x 1).
NOTE: The connectors [A][K] are
under the heater-tray cover.
17. Reassemble the copier and install
tray 1 and tray 2. On
18. Attach the “On/Stand by” decal on

the left-hand side of the main switch
(not the tray heater switch). Stand by
B146I952.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-70 SM
SETTINGS
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 SETTINGS
New Unit Set
You must enable New Unit Set (SP5-999) before you replace the following units:
Maintenance
Preventive
• PCU–K (SP5-999-001) • Development Unit–C (SP5-999-006)
• PCU–Y (SP5-999-002) • Development Unit–M (SP5-999-007)
• PCU–M (SP5-999-003) • Development Unit–Y (SP5-999-008)
• PCU–C (SP5-999-004) • Fusing Unit (SP5-999-009)
• Development Unit–K (SP5-999-005)
To enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit), perform as follows:
1. Start the SP mode ( 5.1.1).
2. Select a program from SP5-999-001 to 009.
3. Select "1. Enable."
4. Select "OK."
5. Quit the SP mode.
6. Turn the main switch off.
7. Replace the unit.
8. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts the initialization for the new unit.
Counter Reset
After you replace the following units, you must reset the counter (SP7-804):
• By-pass tray (SP7-804-011) • Tray 4 (SP7-804-015)
• Tray 1 (SP7-804-012) • Transfer unit (SP7-804-017)
• Tray 2 (SP7-804-013) • Transfer belt cleaning unit (SP7-804-
• Tray 3/LCT (SP7-804-014) 018)
1. Start the SP mode ( 5.1.1).
3. Select "EXECUTE."
SM 2-1 B147/B149/B190
PM TABLES Rev. 09/2004
2.2 PM TABLES
On the B190, there is a wider gap between sheets of paper. Since the PM interval
is based on the number of motor revolutions, increasing the paper interval means
shortening the PM interval by 10% (motor revolutions are more frequent, making
the PM timing sooner).
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 3 copies/original (prints/job)
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect

B147/B149
Copier B190
20K 40K 60K 120K 140K

Item EM Remarks
18K 36K 54K 108K 126K
Scanner
1st/2nd/3rd mirrors C Optics cloth
Front and Rear Rails C Dry cloth
Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth; alcohol
ADF Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Exposure Lamp I Dry cloth; alcohol
APS Sensor C Dry cloth
Development
Dev. Unit–K R 2.1
Dev. Unit–C R 2.1
Dev. Unit–M R 2.1
Dev. Unit–Y R 2.1
PCU–K R 2.1
PCU–CMY R 2.1
Transfer
Waste Toner Bottle R
Fusing
Fusing Unit R 2.1
Oil Supply Unit R
Paper Path
Registration Sensor C Blower brush
Duplex Unit
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth
Transport Roller C Damp cloth
Inverter Sensor C Blower brush
Miscellaneous
Dust Filter R Distributed with development unit-K
Breaker I
B147/B149/B190 2-2 SM
Rev. 09/2004 PM TABLES
B147/B149
ARDF B190
240K
Item EM Remarks
216K
Pick-up Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Feed Belt R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Separation Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Maintenance
Sensors C C Blower brush
Preventive
Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
White Plate C Dry or damp cloth
Drive Gear L Grease G501
Transport Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Exit Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Idle Rollers C Damp cloth; alcohol
NOTE: 240k copies (= 80k originals x 3 copies/original) (B147/B149)

216k copies (= 72k originals x 3 copies/original) (B190)
One-Tray Paper Feed Unit

Item 240K EM Remarks
Feed Roller C Damp cloth
Pickup Roller C Damp cloth
Separation Roller C Damp cloth
Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

Feed Rollers C Damp cloth
Pickup Rollers C Damp cloth
Separation Rollers C Damp cloth
LCT
Relay Roller C Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth
Two-Tray Finisher
Items 240K EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger Fences I Replace if required.
Two-Tray Finisher Punch Kit

Punch Chad C Discard chad.
SM 2-3 B147/B149/B190
PM TABLES
Booklet Finisher
Item 60K EM Remarks
Shafts C Damp cloth
Jogger fences I
Booklet Finisher Punch Kit

Item 60K EM Remarks
Punch Chad C C Discard chad.
B147/B149/B190 2-4 SM
OTHERS
2.3 OTHERS
NOTE: These units are considered as EM parts since their expected lifetimes are
relatively long.
Copier
Item 150K 500K 1000K Remarks
Transfer
Maintenance
Preventive
Transfer Unit R 2.1
Belt Cleaning Unit R 2.1
Bypass Tray
Feed Roller R 2.1
Pickup Roller R 2.1
Separation Roller R 2.1

Feed Roller R Damp cloth
Pickup Roller R Damp cloth
Separation Roller R Damp cloth

Feed Rollers R Damp cloth
Pickup Rollers R Damp cloth
Separation Rollers R Damp cloth
LCT
Relay Roller R Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad R Damp cloth
SM 2-5 B147/B149/B190
SPECIAL TOOLS
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the procedures in this section.
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.

: See or refer to  : Screw  : Connector
 : Clip ring  : E ring
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Part Number Description Q’ty
B6455010 SD Card 1
B6456700 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1
B6456800 USB Reader/Writer 1
A029 9387 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 1
G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel 1
C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope 1
A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1
52039501 Silicon Grease G-501 1
A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set) 1
SM 3-1 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3.2.1 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Scanner sub-scan magnification

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and
make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 to
adjust if necessary.
Standard: ±1.0%.
A: Sub-scan magnification
B146R962.WMF
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make A
a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration,
and adjust them with the following SP modes if
necessary. Standard: 0 ± 2mm.
SP mode B
Leading Edge Registration SP4-010-001
Side-to-Side Registration SP4-011-001
B146R963.WMF
A: Leading Edge Registration
B: Side-to-side Registration
B147B149/B190 3-2 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Main scan dot position correction

NOTE: Before adjusting the scanner, adjust the printer registration.
1. Enter the SP mode and open SP4-010 and SP4-011.
2. Check that each value corresponds to the factory-set value.
3. Press the “COPY Window” key and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo
mode.
NOTE: Be sure to copy in the photo mode. This is because color displacement
cannot be checked properly in text mode.
4. Check the yellow and cyan vertical lines. (Use a Magnification Scope to do
this.) If they exactly overwrite the black line at the edges of the copy, exit the
SP mode to end the adjustment. If the yellow and cyan lines significantly
Replacement
extend beyond the black line, proceed to the next step.
Adjustment
5. Press the “SP Mode” key to return to the SP mode and open SP4-932.
and
Compare the current values against the table.
SP4-932-1 Dot correction R left edge
SP4-932-2 Dot correction R right edge
SP4-932-3 Dot correction B left edge
SP4-932-4 Dot correction B right edge
SM 3-3 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.2 ARDF
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration
B
B146R964.WMF
A: Leading edge registration
B: Side-to-side registration
B146R965.WMF
Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT (11 x 17 inch) paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Registration ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-002 Leading Edge Registration (Simplex) ± 42 steps
SP6-006-003 Buckle: Duplex Front ± 42 steps
SP6-006-004 Buckle: Duplex Rear ± 45 steps
B147B149/B190 3-4 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.3 REGISTRATION
Image Area
B
The image area shown in the
illustration must be accurate. So make Feed direction
sure that the registration is adjusted A
within the adjustment standard range
as described below.
Image Area
Replacement
Adjustment
A = B = C = 4.2mm (1.6")
and
B146R966.WMF
Leading Edge
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Side to Side
Adjusts the side to side registration for each paper feed station. The side to side
registration for the optional paper feed unit, LCT, and duplex unit can be adjusted
with SP mode (SP1-002).
Adjustment Standard
• Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 3 ± 0 mm
• Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 ± 0 mm
Paper Registration Standard

The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions may fluctuate within the
following tolerance.
1st side
• Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 1.5 mm
• Main-scan direction: 0 ± 2 mm
2nd side in duplex
• Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 3 mm
• Main-scan direction: 0 ± 4 mm
SM 3-5 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP mode and access SP5-997.
2. Print out the pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP5-997.
NOTE: Registration may change slightly print by print as shown above.
Therefore print a few pages of the trimming pattern for step 3 and 4,
and average the leading edge and side-to-side registration values and
adjust each SP mode.
3. Perform the leading edge registration adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value then press the  key.
4) Check the leading edge adjustment by generating the trim pattern.
4. Perform the side to side registration adjustment.
1) Check the side to side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value then press the  key.
4) Check the side to side adjustment by generating the trim pattern.
3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION

Line Position Adjustment
Normally, the automatic line position adjustment is executed under a specified
condition to optimize the color prints. If color registration shifts, execute “Auto
Adjust” with the user tools (Maintenance menu – Color registration) or SP5-993-2
to do the forced line position adjustment. In addition, it is recommended to perform
the line position adjustment under the following conditions:
• After transporting or moving the copier (If copier are pre-installed at the
workshop and transported to the user location, forced line position adjustment
should be done after copier installation is completed at the user location.)
• When opening the drum positioning plate
• When removing or replacing the motors, clutches, and/or gears related to the
drum/development/transfer sections
• When removing or replacing the transfer belt or laser optical housing unit
Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper

You must adjust the line speed of the fusing unit (the speed of development motor-
K) under the following conditions:
• The color registration shifts more on the trailing edge than on the leading
edge.
• This problem has not been solved by the line position adjustment.
B147B149/B190 3-6 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION

NOTE: Normally, the ACC is enough to adjust the color balance to achieve the
optimum print output. The printer gamma correction is only required for
fine-tuning to meet user requirements.
The printer gamma curve created during ACC can be modified using SP modes.
The gamma data for highlight, middle, shadow areas, and IDmax can be adjusted.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 15 (16 steps).
Copy Mode
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment
The adjustment uses only “Offset” values.
Replacement
Adjustment
NOTE: Never change “Option” values (default value is 0).
and
Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image
ID max
density.)
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,
Offset
middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
There are four adjustable modes (SP4-918-009):

• Copy Photo mode
• Copy Letter mode
• Copy Letter (Single Color) mode
• Copy Photo (Single Color) mode
B146R967.WMF
SM 3-7 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you are going to adjust.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select “Copy SP.”
4. Select SP4-918-009.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard ( the
table below).
NOTE: 1) Never change “Option” value (default value is 0).

2) Adjust the density in order from “ID Max,” “Middle,” “Shadow,” and then
“Highlight.”
- Photo Mode, Full Colour -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
ID max: Adjust the offset value so that
1 (K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
Middle (Middle ID) Adjust the offset value so that
Shadow (High ID) Adjust the offset value so that
Highlight (Low ID) Adjust the offset value so that
(K, C, M, and Y) dirty background is not visible on
4 the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.
K Highlight (Low ID) Adjust the offset value so that
(C,M, and Y) the color balance of black scale
<on the full color levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
5 copy> seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
should be visible). If the black
scale contains C, M, or Y, redo
step 1 to 4.
B147B149/B190 3-8 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
- Photo Mode, Single Colour -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
1 (K) the density of level 10 matches
(K) dirty background is not visible on
Replacement
Adjustment
on the C-4 chart.
and
- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Colour -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
(K, C, M, and Y) dirty background is not visible on
on the C-4 chart.
SM 3-9 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Colour -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
(K) dirty background is not visible on
on the C-4 chart.
NOTE: After adjusting ‘shadow’ as explained above, text parts of the test pattern
may not be printed clearly. If this happens, check whether the 5 line/mm
pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of
‘shadow’ again until it is.
B147B149/B190 3-10 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):
• 1200 x 1200 photo mode
• 600 x 600 text mode
• 1800 x 600 text mode
• 1200 x 1200 text mode
K C M Y
Highlight SP1-104-1 SP1-104-21 SP1-104-41 SP1-104-61
Middle SP1-104-2 SP1-104-22 SP1-104-42 SP1-104-62
Shadow SP1-104-3 SP1-104-23 SP1-104-43 SP1-104-63
Replacement
Adjustment
IDmax SP1-104-4 SP1-104-24 SP1-104-44 SP1-104-64
and
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select “Printer SP”.
5. Select SP1-102-001 and select the print mode that you are going to adjust.
6. To review the image quality for these settings, choose SP1-103-1 to print out a
tone control test sheet.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown below comparing the tone
control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
NOTE: Adjust the density in order from “ID Max”, “Shadow”, “Middle”, and then
“Highlight”.
8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1-105-001.
SM 3-11 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction

The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The
tables show the level of the color scale on the C4 test chart and on the tone control
test sheet printed in the printer SP mode. For example, for K at text mode, grade
12 on the tone control test sheet should be the same as grade 7 on the C4 chart.
Normally, it is not necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since
ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. The fine-tuning of color balance by
gamma data adjustment will be required only when the result from ACC and Color
Calibration does not meet the customer’s requirements.
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -
Photo 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 16 -
K Test 1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 16
sheet 600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -
Text 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 16 -
1200 x 1200 - 1 3 5 6 9 11 12 15 16
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 13 14
Photo 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 12 13
C Test 1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13
sheet 600 x 600 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13
Text 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 12 14
1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 14 16 -
Photo 1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 15 16 -
M Test 1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -
sheet 600 x 600 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -
Text 1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 13 14 16 -
1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 13 16 -
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 1 3 4 9 11 12 14 15 16 -
Photo 1800 x 600 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -
Y 1200 x 1200 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -
Test
sheet 14/
600 x 600 1 2 5 8 10 11 14 15 16
15
Text
1800 x 600 1 3 6 9 10 12 14 15 16 -
1200 x 1200 1 2 4 7 9 10 13 15 16 -
B147B149/B190 3-12 SM
DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT
3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

3.3.1 TOP COVER
1. External tray [A]

[B]
2. Open the duplex left cover [B]. [C]
3. Top cover [C] ( x 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A] B146R985.WMF
3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD
1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)

2. Duplex control board [A] ( x 4,  x 7)
[A]
B146R925.WMF
SM 3-13 B147/B149/B190
3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1
1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)

2. Exit tray [A] [B]
3. Duplex unit [B] ( x 1,  x 1)
[A]
B146R955.WMF
4. Inner cover [C] ( x 2)

[C]
5. Duplex control board bracket [D]
( x 2,  x 7)
[D]
B146R986.WMF
6. Duplex inverter motor 1 [E]

( x 2, 1 timing belt)
[E]
B146R500.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-14 SM
3.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH

[A]
1. Duplex control board bracket ( 3.3.3)
2. Duplex inverter unit switch [A]
( x 1,  x 1)
3. Duplex inverter motor 2 [B]
( x 2, 1 timing belt)
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R501.WMF
3.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR

[C]
1. Open the duplex inverter unit [A]
2. Exit sensor 3 [B] ( x 1)
3. Duplex inverter sensor [C]
( x 1,  x 2)
[B]
[A]
B146R134.WMF
[B] [A]
3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2
1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)

2. Open the duplex unit.
3. Exit sensor 1 [A]
( x 1,  x 1, 1 bracket)
4. Exit sensor 2 [B] ( x 1)
B146R135.WMF
SM 3-15 B147/B149/B190
DUPLEX FEED UNIT
3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT

3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD
[B]
[A] [C]
B146R136.WMF
B146R114.WMF
1. Open the front cover

2. Duplex feed unit [A] ( x 1)
3. Inner cover [B] ( x 1)
4. Duplex drive board [C] ( x 2,  x 3)
3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR

[A]
1. Duplex feed unit ( 3.4.1)
2. Inner cover [A] ( x 1)
3. Duplex feed motor [B]
( x 1,  x 1, 1 timing belt)
B146R137.WMF
[B]
B147B149/B190 3-16 SM
DUPLEX FEED UNIT
3.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R138.WMF

2. Duplex feed sensor [A] ( x 1)
SM 3-17 B147/B149/B190
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS

NOTE: 1) For the procedure to remove the paper exit tray, see section 3.7.2,
“Laser Optics Housing Unit.”
2) For the procedure to remove the paper exit cover, see section 3.12.14,
“Paper Exit.”
3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES
1. ARDF or platen cover (if installed)

2. Rear cover [A] ( x 5, 2 hooks)
[A]
B146R102.WMF
3. Front cover [B] (2 pins)
[B]
B146R917.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-18 SM
EXTERIOR COVERS
4. Open the by-pass tray [A]. [D]

[C]
5. Right cover [B] ( x 2)
6. Upper right cover [C] (1 strap)
7. Upper front cover [D] ( x 2)
Replacement
[A]
Adjustment
B146R918.WMF
[B]
and
CAUTION: Do not put anything on the operation panel. After you remove the upper
front cover, the operation panel may become unstable.
8. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3)

9. Rear right cover [E]
( x 4, 1 hook)
[E]
B146R905.WMF
SM 3-19 B147/B149/B190
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.5.2 LEFT SIDE [E]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[A]
[B]
B146R921.WMF
1. Duplex unit ( 3.3.3)

2. Duplex unit base cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Duplex inverter guide [B]
4. Duplex unit base [C] ( x 6)
5. Left cover [D] ( x 6, 1 hook)
6. Rear cover ( 3.5.3)
7. Open the upper left cover [E]
8. Scanner left cover ( 3.5.3)
9. Rear left cover [F] ( x 4)
B147B149/B190 3-20 SM
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS

[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R919.WMF

3. Upper front cover ( 3.5.1)
4. Operation panel [A] ( x 4,  x 1)
5. Scanner left cover [B] ( x 2, 1 hook)
6. Scanner right cover [C] ( x 2)
7. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 1)
SM 3-21 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER UNIT
3.6 SCANNER UNIT

3.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
[D]
1. Rear scale [A] ( x 3) [B]
2. Exposure glass with left scale [B]
( x 2) [C] [A]
3. ARDF exposure glass [C]
NOTE: When reattaching the exposure
glass and ARDF exposure glass,
position the glass marker [D] at
the rear-left corner.
B146R987.WMF
3.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR
1. Exposure glass with left scale [B]

( 3.6.1) [A]
2. Original length sensors [A]

( x 2,  x2)
3. Original width sensor 1 [B]
( x 1,  x1)
B146R927.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-22 SM
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU)

2. Exposure glass ( 3.6.1)
3. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3) [A]
4. Inner cover [A] ( x 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
B146R127.WMF
and
[B]
5. Sensor board unit
[B] ( x 4,  x 4)
B146R128.WMF
6. After replacing the sensor board unit, adjust the following SP modes (
3.3.12):
• SP4–008 (Scanner leading edge magnification)
• SP4–010 (Scanner leading edge registration)
• SP4–011 (Scanner side-to-side registration)
SM 3-23 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER
1. Exposure glass with left scale

( 3.6.1)
[A]
2. Sensor board unit ( 3.6.3)
3. Exposure lamp stabilizer [A]
( x 2,  x 2)
B146R129.WMF
3.6.5 XENON LAMP

[A]
2. Operation panel and scanner covers
( 3.5.3)
3. Exposure glass with left scale
( 3.6.1)
4. Left frame [A] ( x 2)
5. Front frame [B] ( x 5)
[B]
B146R130.WMF
[C]
6. Xenon-lamp cover [C] ( x 5)
7. Xenon lamp [D] (2 clamps)
[D]
B146R131.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-24 SM
SCANNER UNIT
Reassembling
1. Take up the cable slack.
2. Adjust the cable clamp position [A] if
necessary.
[A]
B146R139.WMF
Replacement
Adjustment
3.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSU)
and
2. Scanner power supply unit [A] [A]
(all 's,  x 6)
B146R132.WMF
3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR
1. Scanner PSU ( 3.6.6)

2. Scanner motor [A] ( x 2, Spring x 1) [B]
3. Timing belt [B]
Reassembling
1. Install the motor.
2. Install the timing belt.
3. Install the spring. [A]
4. Fasten the screws. B146R133.WMF
SM 3-25 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE

[A]
1. Front frame ( 3.6.5)
2. Front scanner wire clamp [A]
3. Front scanner wire bracket [B]
( x 1)
4. Front scanner wire and scanner
drive pulley [C] ( x 1)
[C]
[B] B146R140.WMF
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire

1. Position the center ball [A] [B]
in the middle of the forked
holder. [C]
2. Pass the right end (with
the ring) [B] through the
square hole, and the left [A]
end (with the ball) [C]
through the notch.
3. Wind the right end [D]
clockwise (viewed from the
machine’s front) three
times; wind the left end
counterclockwise five
times.
B146R141.WMF
NOTE: The two red marks [D] meet when you have done this. Stick the wire to
the pulley with tape, so you can handle the assembly easily during
installation.
B147B149/B190 3-26 SM
SCANNER UNIT
[B] [C] [D]

4. Install the drive pulley on
the shaft [A].
NOTE: Do not secure the
pulley to the shaft
with the screw yet.
5. Insert the left end into the
slit [B], with the end going
via the rear track of the left
pulley [C] and the rear
track of the movable pulley
[D].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R142.WMF
[A]
6. Hook the right end onto

the front scanner wire
bracket [E], with the end [E]
going via the front track of
the right pulley [F] and the
front track of the movable
pulley [G].
NOTE: Do not secure the [G]
scanner wire bracket
with the screw yet.
B146R143.WMF
[F]
SM 3-27 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER UNIT
[D]
[A]
7. Remove the tape from the [I]
drive pulley.
8. Insert a scanner positioning
pin [A] through the 2nd
carriage hole [B] and the left
holes [C] in the front rail. [G]
Insert another scanner
positioning pin [D] through
the 1st carriage hole [E] and
the right holes in the front rail [H]
[F]. [E]
[B]
9. Insert two more scanner
positioning pins in the holes
in the rear rail. [C] [F] B146R144.WMF
10. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [G].

11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [H].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [I].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
NOTE: After removing the positioning pins, make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages
move smoothly. If they do not, repeat steps 8 through 13.
B147B149/B190 3-28 SM
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE

CAUTION: Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagram
below. Image adjustment may become difficult if these screws are
removed.
[S1] [S3]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[S2]
[C]
[B]

[D] B146R928.WMF

2. Operation panel and scanner covers ( 3.5.3)
3. Exposure glass with left scale ( 3.6.1)
4. Left frame ( 3.6.5)
5. Scanner PSU ( 3.6.6)
6. Five screws on the right-hand side (viewed from the front) [A]
7. Two screws on the left-hand side (viewed from the front) [B]
8. Pivot brackets [C][D] ( x 1 for each)
SM 3-29 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
B146R929.WMF
9. Rear frame [A] ( x 2,  x 7)

NOTE: To remove the screw [B] on the bottom-right corner (viewed from the
front), lift the right-hand side (viewed from the front) of the scanner unit.
10. Rail frame [C] ( x 5)
NOTE: When reassembling, make sure that the home position sensor [D] is
not damaged by the sensor blade near the rear end of the xenon lamp.
[F] [E]
11. Rear scanner wire clamp [E]
12. Rear scanner wire bracket [F]
( x 1)
13. Loosen the two screws on the
scanner-motor bracket ( 3.6.7)
14. Scanner motor gear [G] ( x 1)
15. Rear scanner wire and scanner
drive pulley [H] ( x 1)
[G] [H] B146R145.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-30 SM
SCANNER UNIT
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire

1. Position the center ball [A] [B] [C]
in the middle of the forked
holder.
2. Pass the left end (with the
ball) [B] through the drive
pulley notch, and the right [A]
end (with the ring) [C]
through the drive pulley
hole. [D]
3. Wind the left end
counterclockwise (viewed
Replacement
Adjustment
from the machine’s front)
and
five times; wind the right
end clockwise three times.
B146R146.WMF
NOTE: The two red marks [D] meet when you have done this. Stick the wire to
the pulley with tape, so you can handle the assembly easily during
installation.
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
NOTE: Do not secure the pulley on the shaft with the screw yet.
5. Install the wire.
NOTE: The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner
should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front,
except that it should appear as a mirror image.
Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with
the three windings should face the front of the machine. At the rear of
the machine, it should face the rear.
6. Perform steps 7 through 13 in the “Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire”
Section.
SM 3-31 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: It is necessary to calibrate touch panel in the following cases:

• When the operation panel is replaced.
• When the controller board is replaced.
• When the touch panel detection function is not working correctly
Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are
for design use only.
1. Press , press , and then press  5 times to open the Self-
Diagnostics menu.
B146R147.WMF
2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press ).
B146R148.WMF
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and
repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
calibration settings.
B147B149/B190 3-32 SM
LASER OPTICS
3.7 LASER OPTICS
WARNING
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Caution decals are placed as shown below.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R900.TIF
B146R107.WMF
B146R901.TIF
 WARNING
Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser
unit. This printer uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm
and an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
SM 3-33 B147/B149/B190
LASER OPTICS
3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT
CAUTION: Before installing a new laser optics housing unit, remove the sponge
padding and the tag from the new unit.
Steps 1 through 4 refer to the [A]
procedure for a newly supplied unit
that replaces the old one.
1. Top cover of the laser optics
housing unit [A] ( x 4) [B]
2. Sponge padding [B] [C]
3. Tag [C]
4. Reinstall the top cover.
B146R149.WMF

[D]
7. Open the duplex inverter unit [D].
8. Open the front cover [E].
[E]
B146R922.WMF
10. Right cover, upper right cover, and upper front cover ( 3.5.1)
11. Operation panel, scanner left cover, scanner right cover, and scanner rear
cover ( 3.5.3)
B147B149/B190 3-34 SM
LASER OPTICS
12. Remove the support [A] on the front of

the scanner unit.
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B146R920.WMF
and
CAUTION: 1) Before going to the next step, make sure that the cables on the rear
of the scanner unit are safe. The whole function (not only the
scanner unit) may be disabled if some of the cables are damaged.
2) Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagram
below. Image adjustment may become difficult if these screws are
removed.
13. Lift the scanner unit [B] ( x 7) and [B]

prop the unit with the support [C].
NOTE: Remove screw [D] and
screw [E].
[C]
CAUTION: Do not lift the scanner unit
any higher after setting the
support under the scanner
unit. The support may come [S1]
off the opening [F]. [F]
[D]
[S2]
B146R924.WMF [E]
[S3]
SM 3-35 B147/B149/B190
LASER OPTICS
[A]
14. Securing screws for the paper exit tray
[A] ( x 2)
NOTE: Do not remove the paper exit
tray yet.
B146R912.WMF
15. Securing screws for the toner supply

unit [B] ( x 4) [B]
16. Securing screws for the laser optics
housing unit [C] ( x 2)
[C]
B146R910.WMF
[A]
17. Hold the toner supply unit [D] up and [D]

lower it , so the pins [E] on the front
and rear shafts hold the unit.
[E] 2
B146R914.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-36 SM
LASER OPTICS
18. Paper exit tray [A]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R923.WMF
19. Connector cover [B] ( x 3) [C]

1 2
20. Four flat cables [C]
21. Connector [D] [B]

B146R909.WMF
[D]
22. Flat cable bracket [E] ( x 1)

23. Release the cable from the clamps [F].
[E]
[F]
B146R913.WMF
SM 3-37 B147/B149/B190
LASER OPTICS
[A]
24. Duct [A]
25. Securing screws for the laser optics [C]
housing unit [B] ( x 2)
NOTE: When reassembling, attach the
ground cable [C]. [B]
26. Palace a sheet of paper [D] between the
laser optic housing unit and the machine
rear frame. [D]
NOTE: This ensures that the cables are
not caught by the brackets when
you lift the laser optics housing
unit.
27. Hold the unit with both hands and slowly
lift it up, making sure that the flat cables B146R911.WMF
from the laser diode board are not caught

by the brackets.
NOTE: If you roughly remove the unit, the cables can be caught by the
brackets and the laser diode board may be damaged.
28. After reinstalling the laser optics housing unit, do adjustments ( the
procedures on the following page).
After installing the laser optics housing unit, execute the forced line position
adjustment (SP5-993-2 or User Tools > Maintenance > Colour Registration > Auto
Colour Registration > OK).
B147B149/B190 3-38 SM
LASER OPTICS
Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit

1. Enter SP mode.
2. Input the values printed on three decals on the new laser optics housing unit
into the following SPs. Each decal contains two values.
Value on the left Value on the right Function
Decal 1 SP2-109-3 SP2-109-2 Laser beam pitch
Main-scan registration
Decal 2 Not used Not used
correction for black and cyan
Main-scan registration
Decal 3 Not used Not used correction for magenta and
yellow
Replacement
Decal 1 Decal 2 Decal 3
Adjustment
and
Jp:xxxxx P:46,41 Jp:xxxxx KC:-2,-2 Jp:xxxxx MY:-2,-2
K C
600dpi 1200dpi M Y
B146R150.WMF
B146R152.WMF B146R151.WMF
NOTE: The values on decals 2 and 3 do not need to be input, as the machine
performs the main scan registration correction for each color during
automatic line position adjustment.
3. Print out the following test pattern (Cross Stitch M) with SP5-997.
4. Check these test patterns. If the laser beam pitch is not correct, vertical black
strips seem to appear.
• Cross-stitch pattern: The thin lines should be of uniform thickness (no
striping effect should appear on the printout).
5. Adjust the laser beam pitch values in SP2-109-2 and -3 until the printout is
correct, as shown below.
Feed direction
Adjustment not completed Adjustment completed

B146R153.WMF
6. Execute SP5-993-2 or “Auto Colour Registration” in the User Tools

(Maintenance > Colour Registration > Auto Colour Registration > OK).
SM 3-39 B147/B149/B190
LASER OPTICS
3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

[A]
1. Laser optics housing unit ( 3.7.2)
2. Cover [A] ( x 4)
[B]
3. Polygon mirror motor [B]
( x 1,  x 4)
B146R915.WMF
3.7.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS

2. Synchronizing detector boards [A]
( x 1 for each,  x 1 for each)
[A]
B146R916.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-40 SM
PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT

NOTE: Do not touch the PCU drum. Do not let any metal object touch the
development sleeve.
1. Start the SP mode and execute the [B1] [B2]

New Unit Set:
• PCU: SP5-999-001 ∼ 004
• Development unit: SP5-999-005 ∼
004
3. Open the front cover [A].
[C]
Replacement
4. Loosen the 2 screws [B1][B2] (on the
Adjustment
drum positioning plate).
and
NOTE: When reassembling, fasten
screw [B1] first, and screw [B2]
second. [A]
B146R930.WMF
5. Turn the release lever [C] counter-

clockwise.
6. Lift the drum positioning plate.
7. Pull a development unit [D] out.
[D]
8. Check that the development units are
installed in the proper color order
(black → yellow → cyan → magenta
from left to right).
B146R154.WMF
9. Release the lever and pull a PCU [E] [E]

out until the handle appears.
10. Grasp the handle [F] and pull the PCU
out of the machine.
11. Turn the main switch on. The machine
starts the initialization for the new unit.
B146R155.WMF [F]
SM 3-41 B147/B149/B190
PAPER FEED
3.9 PAPER FEED

3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
Tray 1 and Tray 2
1. Tray 1 and Tray 2
2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation roller [C] ( x 1) [B]
[A]
[C] B146R961.WMF
[A] [C]
By-pass Tray
1. Open the right door.
2. By-pass tray cover [A] (1 hook,  x
1)
3. Raise the paper end sensor actuator
[B].
4. Pick-up roller [C] (1 hook)
[B]
B146R932.WMF
5. Feed roller [D] ( x 1) [D]

6. Vertical transport cover [E] ( x 4)
NOTE: To have easier access to
the four screws, remove the
right rear cover ( 3.9.4).
7. Separation roller [F] ( x 1)
[F]
B146R156.WMF
[E]
B147B149/B190 3-42 SM
PAPER FEED
3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD
[D]
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[C]
B146R933.WMF
1. Open the by-pass tray.

2. Center the side fences [A].
3. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 2, 2 hooks)
NOTE: There is a square opening [C] on each side. Release the hooks by
pushing them through these openings.
4. Paper width detection board [D] ( x 1)
NOTE: To remove the connector,
open the bottom cover [E].
[E]
B146R157.WMF
SM 3-43 B147/B149/B190
PAPER FEED
3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR
[B]
[A]
B146R158.WMF

2. Vertical transport cover [A] ( x 4)
NOTE: To have easier access to the four screws, remove the right rear cover
( 3.9.4).
3. Vertical transport sensor [B] ( x 1)
3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT
B146R159.WMF
[A] [B]
B146R160.WMF
1. Rear right cover ( 3.5.1)

2. Open the right door [A].
3. Lift the vertical transport unit [B] to remove it from its hinges ( x 3,  x 1).
B147B149/B190 3-44 SM
PAPER FEED
3.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS
[B]
[C]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R956.WMF
B146R934.WMF
1. Right door unit ( 3.9.4)

2. Registration guide [A] ( x 2)
3. Registration sensor [B] ( x 1,  x 1)
4. Relay sensor [C] ( x 1,  x 1)
3.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES
1. Paper trays
2. Rear cover ( 3.5.1) [B] [A]
3. Swing out the high voltage supply unit
( 3.13.2).
4. Clutch holder [A] ( x 2, 1 bearing)
5. Paper feed clutch for tray 1 [B] ( x 1)
6. Clutch holder [C] ( x 2, 1 bearing)
7. Paper feed clutch for tray 2 [D] ( x 1)
[D] [C]
B146R161.WMF
SM 3-45 B147/B149/B190
PAPER FEED
3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH
1. Right door unit ( 3.9.4) [B]

[A]
2. By-pass tray cover [A]
( x 1, 1 hook)
[F]
3. Loosen the screw on the right
door latch [B].
4. Turn the latch in the opposite [D]
direction.
5. Upper guide plate [C] [C]
( x 4,  x 1)
6. Support plate [D] ( x 2)
B146R162.WMF
7. Relay gear [E] (1 hook) [E]

8. By-pass feed clutch [F] ( x 1)
3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

3. Swing out the high voltage supply
unit ( 3.13.2).
4. Sub power supply unit [A]
( x 2,  x 3) [A]
B146R122.WMF
5. Tray lift motors (tray 1 [B], tray 2 [C])
( x 2,  x 1)
[B]
[C]
B146R163.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-46 SM
PAPER FEED
3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A] B146R164.WMF

2. Sub power supply unit ( 3.9.8)
NOTE: This step is necessary to release the cable.
3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 3,  x 1)
NOTE: The connector is CN604 on the driver board [B].
SM 3-47 B147/B149/B190
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT
3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT
NOTE: When removing or installing the transfer unit, grasp the central areas of the
front and rear frame. Do not touch the transfer belt [A]. Do not damage the
entrance mylar [B].
After replacing the transfer unit, reset the maintenance counter, SP7-804-16, and
conduct the output check, SP5-804-74.
[A]
[C]
[B]
B146R958.WMF

2. Turn the release lever counterclockwise. ( 3.8)
3. Pull out the transfer unit [C] until the entire unit is visible ( x 2).
4. Grasp the transfer unit grips as shown above. Lift the unit to remove it.
NOTE: Grasp the front grip. Use caution not to damage the actuator on the rear.
After replacing the transfer unit:

• Perform forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or  > Maintenance >
Color Registration).
• Print the 1-dot grid pattern on A3/11" x 17" paper and check the color shift level
( 4.6.3).
B147B149/B190 3-48 SM
3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT
NOTE: After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, reset the maintenance
counter, SP7-804-17.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A]
[B]
B146R165.WMF
While pushing the lever, pull out the transfer belt cleaning unit [A] ( x 1).
NOTE: 1) The blade [B] may damage the belt if you do not keep pushing the lever.
2) When reassembling, check that the transfer unit release lever is put
back to the original position ( 3.8).
After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, perform forced line position
adjustment (SP5-993-002 or  > Maintenance > Color Registration).
SM 3-49 B147/B149/B190
3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER
[A]
[B]
B146R166.WMF
1. Transfer belt cleaning unit ( 3.10.2)

2. Cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
3. Tension spring [B]
[E]
[D]
[C] B146R167.WMF
4. Lever [C]
5. 3 gears [D] ( x 1)
6. Gear box [E] ( x 1)
B147B149/B190 3-50 SM
[A]
[B]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R168.WMF
7. Roller cover [A] ( x 2)

8. Cleaning brush gear [B] ( x 1)
9. Cleaning brush [C] (Bushing x 1)
After replacing the cleaning blade, perform forced line position adjustment (SP5-
993-002 or “Maintenance menu – Color registration - Auto Adjust” in User Program
mode).
SM 3-51 B147/B149/B190
3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT
NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt during handling. When replacing the belt,
hold the belt at its end.
[A]
[B]
B146R169.WMF

2. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1)
3. Transfer entrance guide [A] ( x 3)
4. Right bracket [B] ( x 2)
[C]
[D] [E]
B146R936.WMF
5. Left bracket [C] ( x 2)

6. Tension roller [D] ( x 2, Spacer [E] x 1)
NOTE: When reassembling, attach the spacer [E] to the original position.
B147B149/B190 3-52 SM
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R170.WMF
7. Lay the transfer unit on its side.

8. Grasp the upper end of the transfer belt and pull the transfer belt [A] up and out.
NOTE: If the drive rollers are dirty, clean them with a damp cloth.
After replacing the transfer belt, perform forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-
002 or  > Maintenance > Color Registration).
SM 3-53 B147/B149/B190
3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR
[B]
[A]
B146R171.WMF

2. Pull out the transfer unit ( 3.10.1).
3. Release lever [A] ( x 1)
4. Front cover [B] ( x 3)
[C]
[D]
B146R937.WMF
5. Front plate [C] ( x 5,  x 2, Timing belt x 1)

6. Transfer unit drive motor [D] ( x 2)
B147B149/B190 3-54 SM
ID SENSORS
3.11 ID SENSORS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R172.WMF

2. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)
3. Black PCU ( 3.8)
4. ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
When reassembling, check that the ID sensor bracket receives the drum-
positioning plate correctly.
SM 3-55 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
3.12 FUSING
CAUTION
1. Be careful when handling the fusing unit. It is very hot.
2. Take care not to spill silicone oil.
3.12.1 FUSING UNIT

[C]
[B] [D]
[A]
B146R173.WMF
CAUTION: Do not tilt the fusing unit [A] while handling it. The oil supply unit [B] can
fall off the fusing unit after the grip [C] is released from the oil supply
unit.
1. Start the SP mode and execute the New Unit Set (SP5-999-009).
3. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed.
4. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.
5. Push the heat insulator [D]. The grip [C] is released from the oil supply unit.
6. Fusing unit [A]
7. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts initialization for the new unit.
After replacing the fusing unit, if the customer uses thick paper, make some test
prints on a sample of the paper used by the customer. If there are any color
registration problems, adjust the line speed for thick paper with the following SP:
• SP1-004-007 (Development Motor Speed–[K] 62.5 Thick)
B147B149/B190 3-56 SM
FUSING
3.12.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT AND UPPER COVER
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R174.WMF
1. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed.

2. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.
3. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)
4. Oil supply unit [A]
5. Upper cover [B] ( x 4)
SM 3-57 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
3.12.3 CLEANING UNIT

[A]
[B]
[C]
B146R175.WMF
1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)

2. 2 handle guides [A][B] ( x 2 for each)
3. Handle [C] (Spring x 1)
[D] [F]
[E]
B146R176.WMF
4. Gear [D] and collar [E] (Retaining ring x 1)

5. Cleaning unit [F] ( x 2)
NOTE: When reattaching, make sure that you set the cleaning unit [F] in place first
and then attach the gear [D] and collar [E].
B147B149/B190 3-58 SM
FUSING
3.12.4 HEATING ROLLER LAMP
[C]
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R177.WMF

2. Heating roller lamp [A] ( x 2)
NOTE: When reinstalling, make sure the front [B] and rear [C] ends of the lamp are
on the correct terminals.
SM 3-59 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
3.12.5 FUSING BELT UNIT
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
B146R178.WMF
[D]
1. Cleaning unit ( 3.12.3)
2. Heating roller lamp ( 3.12.4)
3. Upper paper guide plate ( 3.12.8)
4. Pressure roller gear [A] (C ring x 1)
5. 2 pressure brackets [B][C] (Spring x 1 for each)
6. Knob [D] ( x 1)
7. Fusing belt unit [E] ( x 1,  x 1)
B147B149/B190 3-60 SM
FUSING
3.12.6 HOT ROLLER
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
and
B146R179.WMF
1. Fusing belt unit ( 3.12.5)

2. Hot roller [A] (Bushing x 2)
3.12.7 HEATING ROLLER
[A]
B146R180.WMF
1. Pressure roller ( 3.12.6)

2. Heating roller [A]
SM 3-61 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
3.12.8 PAPER GUIDE PLATES AND STRIPPER PAWLS
[A]
B146R181.WMF

2. Lower paper guide plate [A] ( x 2)
[B]
[C]
B146R182.WMF
3. Upper paper guide plate [B] ( x 2)

4. 5 stripper pawls [C]
B147B149/B190 3-62 SM
FUSING
3.12.9 THERMISTOR AND FUSE
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A]
B146R183.WMF
1. Lower right cover [A] ( x 2)
[B]
B146R184.WMF
2. Thermistor [B] ( x 1,  x 1)
SM 3-63 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
[A]
B146R185.WMF
3. Fuse [A] ( x 3)
3.12.10 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP
[A]
B146R186.WMF
1. Fusing belt unit ( 3.12.5)

2. Pressure roller fusing lamp [A] ( x 2)
B147B149/B190 3-64 SM
FUSING
3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER
[C]
Replacement
[A]
Adjustment
and
B146R187.WMF
[B]
1. Pressure roller fusing lamp ( 3.12.10)

2. Lower paper guide plate ( 3.12.8)
3. Drive gear holder [A] ( x 1)
4. Drive gear [B] ( x 1)
5. Lower right cover ( 3.12.9)
6. Pressure roller unit [C] ( x 5,  x 2)
SM 3-65 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
[C]
[A]
B146R188.WMF
[B]
7. Pressure roller gear [A] (C ring x 1, Bushing x 1)
8. Pressure roller holder [B] ( x 1)
9. Pressure roller [C] (C ring x 1)
B147B149/B190 3-66 SM
FUSING
3.12.12 FUSING UNIT FAN
CAUTION
When reinstalling, make sure that the fan faces to the correct direction. The
arrow on the fan [D] and the arrow on the duct [D] must face to the same
direction.

2. Left cover, rear left cover ( 3.5.2)
[A]
3. Connector cover (on the top of the
controller box) ( 3.13.1)
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Fusing fan duct [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
and
B146R116.WMF
5. Release the hooks and remove the [B]

upper cover [B].
6. Fusing fan [C] [D]
[C]
B146R939.WMF
SM 3-67 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
3.12.13 WASTE OIL BOTTLE
1. Open the front cover [A]. [B]
2. Release the hook [B].

[D]
3. Waste oil bottle [C]
4. Close the bottle with the lid [D].
5. Dispose of the bottle (with waste [C]
oil in it) in accordance with your
local regulations.
[A]
B146R189.WMF
NOTE: 1) The message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full,” is cleared when the
front cover is closed. You do not need to turn the main switch off and
on.
2) The message, “Waste Oil Bottle Setting Error,” indicates that the bottle
is not in position. Check that the bottle is correctly reinstalled if this
message is displayed.
[C]
3.12.14 PAPER EXIT
1. Lift the scanner unit ( 3.7.2). [A]

2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Exit upper limit sensor [B]
4. Paper exit sensor [C]
[B]
B146R938.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-68 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY

2. Connector cover [A] ( x 3) [B] 1 2
3. Four flat cables [B]

[A]
4. Connector [C]
5. Ground cable [D] ( x 1)
[D]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[C]
B146R959.WMF
[F]
[E]
6. Duct [E] ( x 1,  x 2)
7. Ground cable [F] ( x 1)
8. Two connectors [F]
9. Swing out the controller box [G]
( x 5).
[G]
B146R960.WMF
SM 3-69 B147/B149/B190
3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, B OUT

OF THE WAY

2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit
[A]
[A] ( x 2).
B146R190.WMF
3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU
NOTE: 1) Before replacing the BCU or controller, print out the SMC reports (“SP
Mode Data” and “Logging Data”).
2) After replacing the BCU or controller, remove the NVRAM on the old
board and install it on the new board.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A] B146R954.WMF
1. Controller [A] ( x 3)
2. IPU [B] ( x 2,  x 2)
3. Option bracket [C] ( x 2)
4. Rear cover [D] ( 3.5.1)
B147B149/B190 3-70 SM
5. Connector cover ( 3.13.1)

[A]
6. Cover bracket [A] ( x 4)
7. Inner bracket [B] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[B] B146R942.WMF
8. BCU [C] (Flat cables x 4,

All 's,  x 8)
[C]
[E] [D] B146R943.WMF
CAUTION: 1) When handling NVRAMs, keep them away from any objects that can
cause static electricity. The data in NVRAMs may be corrupted by
static electricity.
2) Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the board. A half-disk
[D] is engraved on one side of the NVRAM, while a guide mark [E] is
on one side of the NVRAM slot. Install the NVRAM so that the half-
disk and the guide mark are on the same side.
3) When replacing the BCU, make sure that the DIP-switch settings on
the old board and on the new board are the same ( 5.10).
NOTE: 1) Before replacing the NVRAM, make sure the SMC reports (“SP Mode
Data” and “Logging Data”) has been printed out.
2) After replacing the BCU or controller, remove the NVRAM on the old
board and install it on the new board. If the NVRAM on the old board is
defective, replace the NVRAM ( 3.13.5).
SM 3-71 B147/B149/B190
3.13.4 HDD
You cannot separate the hard-disk drive into two different hard-disk drives. If you
should separated it into two and replace one of them, the controller does not
recognizes the hard-disk drive.
1. Controller ( 3.13.3)
2. HDD [A] ( x 4, Shoulder-screw x 3)
[A] B146R191.WMF
3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

NVRAM on BCU
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings) that comes with the
copier.
2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
3. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card ( SP5-824) if possible.
4. Turn off the main switch and unplug the power cord.
5. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.
6. Select a paper-size type ( SP5-131-001).
7. Specify the device number and destination code of the machine.
NOTE: 1) Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the device
number and destination code.
2) SC 999 or “Fusing Unit Setting Error” may be displayed until the
device number and destination code is properly programmed.
B147B149/B190 3-72 SM
8. Turn the main switch off and on.

9. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have
successfully copied them to the SD card.
10. Reset the settings for meter charge ( SP5-930-002).
11. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
12. Execute the process control self-check.
13. Perform ACC for the copier application program.
14. Perform ACC for the printer application program.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
NVRAM on Controller
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings) that comes with the
copier.
2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
3. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card ( SP5-824) if possible.
4. Enter SP mode and print out the SMC reports ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
5. Turn off the main switch and unplug the power cord.
6. Replace the NVRAM on the controller and reassemble the machine.
7. Turn the main switch on.
8. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have
successfully copied them to the SD card.
9. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
10. Perform ACC for the copier application program.
11. Perform ACC for the printer application program.
SM 3-73 B147/B149/B190
3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B
[A]
B146R121.WMF

2. High voltage supply board [A] (All 's,  x 6)
3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT
[A]
B146R122.WMF

2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit ( 3.13.2)
3. Sub power supply unit [A] ( x 2,  x 3)
B147B149/B190 3-74 SM
3.13.8 PSU
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R192.WMF
1. Left cover ( 3.5.2)

2. PSU [A] (All 's,  x 5)
NOTE: Check that the interlock switches on the PSU work normally after
reinstalling the PSU (open/close the left and front doors).
3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD
[A]
B146R193.WMF

2. Swing out the controller box ( 3.13.1).
3. Driver board [A] (All 's,  x 4)
SM 3-75 B147/B149/B190
DRIVE UNIT
3.14 DRIVE UNIT

3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH
[A]
B146R944.WMF

9. Registration clutch [A] ( x 1,  x 1)
3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES [C]

1. Drum gears ( 3.14.3).
2. Development clutch assembly [A]
( x 1,  x 1)
3. Clutch holder [B]
4. Clutch shaft [C] (1 bushing,  x 1)
[B]
[A]
B146R945.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-76 SM
DRIVE UNIT
3.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R946.WMF

3. Drum gear cover [A] ( x 2,  x 5)
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B146R947.WMF
4. Turn the drum gears [B] counterclockwise, so the shoulder screws [C][D] are in
the three, seven, or eleven o'clock position.
NOTE: By doing that, you can align the three corners of each drum-gear shaft to
the three openings on the development-clutch securing plate [E].
SM 3-77 B147/B149/B190
DRIVE UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
B146R948.WMF
5. 4 drum gears [A] ( x 2 for each)

NOTE: 3) Do not move the drum-gear shafts after removing the drum gears.
4) The print quality may be affected if any of the teeth on the drum
gears are damaged. Make sure they are intact.
6. Timing belt gear [B] (Timing belt x 1, Bushing x 1)
7. Idle gear [C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B146R949.WMF
[H] [G]
8. 4 gear drive holders [D]∼[G] ( x 1 for each)
9. Development clutch securing plate [H] ( x 8,  x 6)
NOTE: Two of the six connectors are on the rear side.
B147B149/B190 3-78 SM
DRIVE UNIT
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R950.WMF
10. Development drive motor - CMY [A] ( x 5,  x 1, Spring x 1)

NOTE: When reassembling, remove the three bushings [B] and install the
development drive motor first. After this, install the bushings.
3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K

[B]
1. Development clutch securing plate
( 3.14.3)
2. Drum drive motor - CMY [A] ( x 2)
3. Drum drive motor - K [B] ( x 2)
[A]
B146R194.WMF
SM 3-79 B147/B149/B190
DRIVE UNIT
3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K
1. Fusing fan duct ( 3.12.12)

2. Development clutch securing plate
( 3.14.3)
3. Solenoid cover [A] ( x 2)
[A]
B146R951.WMF
[C]
2 1
[B]
B146R952.WMF
[D]
4. Development clutch securing plate ( 3.14.3)

5. Development drive motor – K [B] (with the fusing clutch [C]) ( x 4,  x 2)
NOTE: When reassembling, remove the bushing [D] and install the
development drive motor–K (with the fusing clutch) first. After this,
install the bushing.
B147B149/B190 3-80 SM
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT

NOTE: 1) Do not touch the PCU drum. Do not let any metal object touch the
development sleeve.
2) Having removed the PCUs, cover them with paper or cloth. Keep them
in a dark place.
M Toner Supply Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
and
B146R953.WMF
[B]

2. All development units and PCUs ( 3.8)
4. Development clutch securing plate ( 3.14.3)
5. Right inner cover with the drum positioning plate [A] ( x 3)
6. M development unit plate [B] ( x 1)
SM 3-81 B147/B149/B190
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[A]
[B]
B146R195.WMF
7. Development unit left guide [A] ( x 1)

9. Registration upper stay [B] ( x 4)
[E]
[C] [D]
B146R196.WMF
CAUTION: 1) When you remove the toner path cover and a toner supply pipe, the
toner spills out. Before removing them, place some paper or cloth
beneath the toner supply unit and waste toner collection path.
2) After removing a pipe, close it with a paper clip or tape.
10. Toner path cover [C] ( x 2)

11. Toner supply pipe [D]
12. Toner supply unit [E] ( x 2,  x 1)
B147B149/B190 3-82 SM
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
Reinstalling the M Toner Supply Unit
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B146R197.WMF
1. Wind the harness [A] on the shaft.

2. Insert the toner collection pipe [B].
NOTE: Check that the pipe does not come off the unit.
[C]
B146R198.WMF
3. Remove the toner supply unit bushing [C].
SM 3-83 B147/B149/B190
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[A]
[B] B146R199.WMF
4. Install the unit [A] and secure it with the screws.

5. Unwind the harness and connect it.
6. Install the bushing.
7. Connect the toner supply pipe and the waste toner collection pipe [B].
8. Check that the pipes [C] do not come

off the unit.
9. Attach the toner path cover and
secure it with screws.
10. Reassemble the machine.
[C]
B146R200.WMF
B147B149/B190 3-84 SM
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
C and Y Toner Supply Units
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
and
B146R201.WMF
1. Development drive motor - CMY ( 3.14.3)

2. Development unit plates ( M Toner Supply Unit)
NOTE: To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the C and M
development unit plates. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the
Y and C development plates.
3. Development unit left guide ( M Toner Supply Unit)
4. PCU 3C guide rail [A] ( x 2)
NOTE: 1) To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the M PCU guide. To
replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the Cyan PCU guide.
2) Pull the front plate [B] slightly.
SM 3-85 B147/B149/B190
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[C]
[A] [B]
B146R202.WMF
5. Toner path cover [A] ( x 2)

6. Branch toner path covers [B][C] ( x 1)
NOTE: To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the cover on the right-
hand side [B]. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the cover on
the left-hand side [C].
7. Toner supply pipe and toner supply unit ( M Toner Supply Unit)
K Toner Supply Unit

1. K and Y development unit plates ( M Toner Supply Unit)
2. Development unit left guide ( M Toner Supply Unit)
3. PCU 3C guide rail ( C and Y Toner Supply Units)
NOTE: Remove the Y PCU guide.
4. Toner supply unit ( M Toner Supply Unit)
B147B149/B190 3-86 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT
SP-3-005-006 (Developer Initialization Result)
No. Result Description Possible Causes Action
Not Developer When initializing only When done in SP mode, do
performed initialization is not the black developer, the the developer initialization
performed. initialization result again. If the result is the
becomes “1000”. same, reinstall the engine
main firmware.
When done at unit

0 replacement:
• Check if a new unit is
installed
• Check if the unit detection
system is working
• Check if SP2-223-001 (auto
shooting
initialization at unit
Trouble-
replacement) is enabled.
Successfully Developer - -
completed initialization is
1
successfully
completed.
Forced Developer A cover was opened or When done in SP mode, do
termination initialization was the main switch was the developer initialization
forcibly terminated. turned off during the again. If the result is the
initialization. same, reinstall the engine
2 main firmware.
When done at unit

replacement, turn the main
switch off and on.
Vt error Vt is less than 0.5V 1. Check if the drum stay is properly set and secured.
and “Reset 2. Check if the development unit is properly set.
development unit” 3. If the problem is still the same, check the following:
is displayed. • Poor connection of connectors
3
• TD sensor defective
• Harness damage
• BCU board failure
• Firmware problem (engine main or MUSIC)
SM 4-1 B147/B149/B190

Toner supply During toner fill-up 1. Check if the toner cartridge is properly set.
error mode, Vt does not 2. Check if the amount of toner left in the toner cartridge
reach the target is insufficient.
value. 3. Check if toner is coagulated. (If yes, shake the toner
cartridge well.)
8
4. Check if the connectors of the following parts are
properly set, and/or replace the parts.
Toner attraction pump / Air Pump / Valves
5. Check if the toner supply tube is bent, caught, or
damaged.
Failure Vt cannot be 1. Shielding tape is not 1. Remove the shielding tape
adjusted within 3.0 removed. to supply developer to the
± 0.1V. unit.
SC370 - 373 will 2. Development unit is 2. Reinstall the development
be displayed. not firmly installed, unit.
9
Turning the main causing poor
switch off and on connection of the TD
clears this SC sensor connector.
code. 3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace the development
unit.
NOTE: After you set "Enable" in SP5-999-005, 006, 007, or 008, the machine
starts developer initialization. If an error other than Error 8 occurs,
developer initialization is automatically resumed by opening and closing the
front door or turning the main switch off and on.
B147/B149/B190 4-2 SM
4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT

SP3-975-001 (Process Control Self-check Result)
Not Process control self- - Do the process control
0
performed check is not done. self-check again.
Successfully Process control self- - -
1 completed check successfully
completed.
ID sensor Vsg cannot be 1. Dirty ID sensor (toner, 1. Clean the ID sensor.
adjustment adjusted within 4.0 ± dust, or foreign material)
error 0.5V. 2. Dirty transfer belt 2. Check the belt
cleaning, and clean or
replace the transfer
2
belt.
3. Scratched or damaged 3. Replace the transfer
transfer belt belt.
4. Defective ID sensor 4. Replace the ID
sensor.
Vmin error Vmin is not within Vmin is calculated during the self-check. Even when
the specified range. the calculated Vmin value is out of the specified range,
an optimum value is automatically used instead.
shooting
Therefore, this error code does not usually occur.
Trouble-
3 If no problem is observed with image density and/or
development gamma, nothing needs to be done.
If an image problem such as low image density is
observed, check the following points:
Transfer belt / Belt guide plate / ID sensor
Sampling Not enough data can 1. ID sensor pattern 1. Check the image
4
data error be sampled. density is too high or development process
Gamma Gamma is out of low. and correct toner
error range. 2. Residual image on density if necessary.
5 transfer belt 2. Check the transfer belt
0.3 > Gamma, or
6.0 < Gamma 3. Toner dropped from cleaning unit.
Vk error Vk is out of range. development unit 3. Clean the development
-150 > Vk or 150 < 4. Scratched or damaged unit and correct toner
6 Vk transfer belt density.
4. Replace the transfer
belt.
Vt error Vt is out of range. 1. Development unit not 1. Check.
0.5 > Vt or 4.8 < Vt properly installed.
2. Toner density is too low 2. Check and/or correct
7
or high. toner density.
3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace development
unit.
Sampling Not enough data can See the possible causes and action for error codes 4,
data error be sampled during 5, and 6.
during LD the LD power
8
power correction (if "LD
correction Power" is set in SP3-
125-002).
Forced Process control self- A cover was opened or the Do the process control
9 termination check was forcibly main switch was turned off self-check again.
terminated. during the self-check.
SM 4-3 B147/B149/B190
4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT

SP5-993-007 (Line Position Adjustment Result)
No. Result Description Note
Successfully Data sampling was correctly done and line position
01
completed adjustment was successfully completed.
Out of adjustment The calculated result for line position correction is
02 range greater than ±1.4 mm.
(over ±2 mm)
03 Calculation Error Distance between the lines is greater than ±1.4 mm.
04 Sampling Error Data sampling cannot be done properly.
Descending slope The ascending or descending slope of the ID sensor
05
error signal wave is out of specification. (See Note 1)
Ascending slope
06
error (See Note 1)
Pattern lines The detected number of pattern lines is less than 64.
07 mismatch (See Note 1)
(less than 64 lines)
Sampling time-out Data sampling cannot be done within the allocated
08
time.
Sampling start The start mark cannot be detected within the
09
error allocated time.
Pattern length The pattern length is shorter or longer than specified.
10
mismatch (See Note 1)
Pattern lines The detected number of pattern lines is over 64.
11 mismatch
(over 64 lines)
Magnification The calculated magnification value does not match
12 mismatch any data in the laser power frequency adjustment
data table.
Toner condition The machine is in the toner near-end or toner end
13
condition.
Not executed The machine is not ready to do the line position
17
adjustment manually from the user menu.
Potential control Line position adjustment cannot be done due to
18
error failed potential control.
Cyan line error The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the
19
adjustment range (cyan only).
Magenta line error The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the
29
adjustment range (magenta only).
Cyan & Magenta The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the
39
line error adjustment range (cyan and magenta).
Yellow line error The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the
49
adjustment range (yellow only).
Cyan & yellow line The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the
59
error adjustment range (cyan and yellow).
Magenta & yellow The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the
69
line error adjustment range (magenta and yellow).
Cyan, magenta, & The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the
79
yellow line error adjustment range (cyan, magenta, and yellow).
Note 1: Concerning the error codes (05, 06, 07 or 10) which stop sampling data
when either the front, center, or rear ID sensor detect an error, the machine
may display the error code for both ID sensors in some cases.
B147/B149/B190 4-4 SM
Possible causes of errors in the line position adjustment

Possible
Possible Cause Action
Error Code
1 The pattern does not reach the proper density.
1. Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or 04, 05, 06, 07, 1. Clean the ID sensors.
foreign material) 08, 09, 10
2. Incorrect toner density 2. Correct the toner density.
Low: ID sensor cannot detect the
pattern lines.
High: Lines may be partially blank
due to improper toner density
and/or paper transfer current.
3. Incorrect transfer current 3. Correct the transfer current.
2 The ID sensors are affected by electrical noise or dirt/damage on the transfer belt.
1. Scratched or damaged OPC drum 02, 03, 04, 05, 1. Replace PCU
2. Scratched or damaged transfer belt 06, 10, 11, 12 2. Replace transfer belt
3. Dirty transfer belt 3. Clean or replace transfer belt
4. High voltage leak in transfer unit 4. Fix the high voltage leak
5. Residual image on transfer belt 5. Check transfer belt cleaning and
clean the belt
6. Toner dropped from development 6. Clean the development unit and
unit adjust the toner density
shooting
Trouble-
7. Carrier dropped from development 7. Clean the development unit and
unit adjust the toner density
3 The transfer belt is covered with toner.
Development does not work properly. All error codes Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
4 None of the patterns are developed.
Development does not work properly. 09, 04 Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
5 Some of the patterns are not developed;
Development does not work properly. 07, 08 Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
6 The machine is not in the condition to execute the line position adjustment;
The machine is in the toner near end 13 Replenish toner.
or end condition.
The machine is not ready to do the 17 Wait until machine becomes the
line position adjustment manually from ready condition from the energy
the user menu. saver or auto off mode.
Line position adjustment cannot be 18 Fix the problem causing the potential
done due to failed potential control. control error.
7 The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (1)
No error code is displayed. However, -
the machine keeps displaying
“execution” on the screen.
In addition, the green LED on the
BICU stays on or off under the
following condition.
1. The MUSIC CPU resets due to
1. Fix the bias leak and/or replace
electrical noise generated by a high PCU
voltage leak on a damaged OPC
drum.
SM 4-5 B147/B149/B190
Possible
Possible Cause Action
Error Code
8 The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (2)
No error code is displayed. However, -
the machine keeps displaying
“execution” on the screen.
The green LED on the BICU keeps
blinking faintly (this is normal) even
under one of the following conditions.
1. Poor connection between the toner 1. Check the connection between
cartridge detection board and the the detection board and memory
memory chip on the toner cartridge chip.
2. The memory chip on the toner 2. Replace the toner cartridge.
cartridge fails.
B147/B149/B190 4-6 SM
SCANNER TEST MODE
4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE

4.2.1 VPU TEST MODE
To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern
with SP4-907. After you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key,
the VPU test pattern is printed out.
SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R

SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G
SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B
• If the copy is abnormal and the VPU test pattern is normal, the CCD on the SBU
board may be defective.
• If the copy is normal and the VPU test pattern is abnormal, the harness may not
connected properly between SBU and IPU, or the IPU or SBU board may be
defective.
shooting
Trouble-
4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE
You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2.
If no error is detected, the test ends, and the completion code appears in the
operation panel display. If an error is detected, the test is interrupted and an error
code is displayed. The table below lists the completion and error codes.
SP4-904-1 Register Write/Read Check Result

Code Defective ASIC
Normal end 00 —
Abnormal end 11 ASIC 1
12
13 ASIC 2
14 ASIC 3
15 Ri 10
SP4-904-2 Image Path Check Result

Code Error detected in the image data path
Normal end 00 —
Abnormal end 21 ASIC 1 → ASIC 2
22 ASIC 1 → ASIC 3 → ASIC 1 → ASIC 2
23 ASIC 2 → ASIC 1 → ASIC 3 → ASIC 1 → ASIC 2
24 ASIC 3 → Ri 10
25 Scanner ASIC → ASIC 1
SM 4-7 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER TEST MODE
Errors may be caused by the following problems:

1) Short circuit on the signal lines
• When the IPU board is installed, a pin or two on the ASIC is damaged.
• Some conductive matter or object is trapped among the pins.
• Condensation
2) Destruction of circuit elements
• Overcurrent or a defective element has broken the circuit.
3) Abnormal power supply
• The required voltage is not supplied to the devices.
4) Overheat/overcooling
• The board (the scanner unit) is in an inappropriate environment.
5) Static electricity
• Static electricity of a high voltage occurred during the test.
6) Others
• Error code 25 may be detected if the scanner and IPU are incorrectly
connected.
When you have conducted a check, turn the main switch off and on before
conducting another check. When you have conducted all necessary checks, turn
the main switch off and on.
B147/B149/B190 4-8 SM
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.3.1 SUMMARY
Section 4.4 classifies the SC codes into the controller errors and other errors. The
latter (the errors other than the controller errors) are classified into four types by
their reset procedures. The table lists the classification of the SC codes.
Key Definition Reset Procedure
Controller The error has occurred in the See "Troubleshooting Procedure" in
CTL
errors controller. the table.
The error involves the fusing unit. Turn the main switch off and on.
A The machine operation is disabled. Reset the SC (set SP5-810 to 1).
The user cannot reset the error. Turn the main switch off and on.
The error involves one or some
specific units. The machine Turn the operation switch off and
B
operates as usual, excluding the on.
related units.
Other The error is logged. The SC-code
errors The SC will not be displayed. Only
C history is updated. The machine
the SC history is updated.
operates as usual.
The machine operation is disabled.
You can reset the machine by
shooting
Trouble-
turning the operation switch or main Turn the operation switch or main
D
switch off and on. If the error power switch off and on.
recurs, the same SC code is
displayed.
After you turn the main switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the
main switch on ( SC 672). All SCs are logged. Printing logging data (SP5-990-
004) in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters
when the SC code is detected.
NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect, then
reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load
before replacing motors or sensors.
SM 4-9 B147/B149/B190
SC Code Classification
The table lists the classification of the SC codes:
Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section
100 - Scanner
1XX Scanning
190 - Unique for a specific model
200 - Polygon motor
220 - Synchronization control
230 - FGATE signal related
2XX Laser exposure
240 - LD control
260 - Magnification
300 - Charge
330 - Drum potential
3XX Image development 1
350 - Development
400 - Image transfer
420 - Paper separation
430 - Cleaning
4XX Image development 2
440 - Around drum
460 - Unit
480 - Others
500 - Paper feed
5XX Paper feed / Fusing 515 - Duplex
520 - Paper transport
530 - Fan motor
540 - Fusing
5XX Paper feed / Fusing
560 - Others
600 - Electrical counters
620 - Mechanical counters
630 - Account control
6XX Communication 640 - CSS
650 - Network
670 - Internal data processing
700 - Original handling
7XX Peripherals 720 - Two-tray finisher
740 - Booklet finisher
800 - Error after ready condition
820 - Diagnostics error
8XX Controller
860 - Hard disk
900 - Counter
9XX Others 920 - Memory
990 - Others
B147/B149/B190 4-10 SM
SC TABLE
4.4 SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 101 Exposure lamp • The standard white level is • Exposure lamp 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
error not properly detected when defective 2. Turn the power key off and on.
scanning the shading plate. • Lamp stabilizer 3. Check and clean the scanner
(The shading data peak defective mirror(s) and scanner lens.
does not reach the specified • Exposure lamp 4. Check and clean the shading plate.
threshold.) connector defective 5. Replace the exposure lamp.
• Standard white plate 6. Replace the lamp stabilizer.
dirty 7. Replace the scanner mirror(s) or
• Scanner mirror or scanner lens.
scanner lens out of 8. Replace the SBU.
position or dirty
• SBU defective
SC 120 Scanner home • The scanner home position • Scanner I/O board or SC 121 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
position error 1 sensor does not detect the SBU defective and 122 2. Check the cable connection between
on condition during • Scanner motor the scanner I/O board and scanner
scanning. defective motor.
• Harness between 3. Check the cable connection between
scanner I/O board the SBU and HP sensor.
and scanner motor 4. Replace the SBU or scanner I/O
disconnected board.
• Scanner HP sensor 5. Replace the scanner motor.
defective 6. Replace the HP sensor.
• Harness between 7. Replace the scanner wire, timing belt,
SBU and HP sensor pulley, or carriage.
disconnected
• Scanner wire, timing
belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
SM 4-11 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
off condition during • Scanner motor the scanner I/O board and scanner
scanning. defective motor.
disconnected board.
disconnected
belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
home position during • Scanner motor the scanner I/O board and scanner
initialization. defective motor.
disconnected board.
disconnected
belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
B147/B149/B190 4-12 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 142 White level • The white level cannot be • Dirty exposure glass 1. Turn on the main switch off and on. D
detection error adjusted within the target or optics section 2. Clean the exposure glass, white plate,
during auto gain control. • SBU board defective mirrors, and lens.
• IPU board defective 3. Check if the exposure lamp is lit
• Exposure lamp during initialization.
defective 4. Check the harness connection
• Lamp stabilizer between SBU and IPU.
defective 5. Replace the exposure lamp.
6. Replace the SBU board.
7. Replace the IPU board
SC 144 SBU • The SBU hardware is • Defective SBU 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication inconsistent with the hardware 2. Replace the SBU.
error software. • Incorrect software 3. Update the software.
SC 161 IDU error • After the command is • IPU board defective 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
written into the DFID self- (defective connection 2. Replace the IPU board.
diagnosis startup register, between ASIC and
the correct value is not DFID, or Defective
stored in the register in the LSYNC)
specified duration.
NOTE: This error is
detected when the main
switch is turned on.
• After the negate interruption
of FGATE occurs, IDU is not
recognized in the specified
duration.
NOTE: This error is
detected during scanning
operations.
SM 4-13 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 195 Serial Number • Serial number stored in the • NVRAM defective Open the front cover and turn on the D
Mismatch memory does not consist of • BCU replaced without main switch. Check the serial number
the correct code. original NVRAM with SP5-811-002.
• Incorrect DIP-switch If the stored serial number is incorrect,
setting contact your product specialist for
details of how to solve the problem.
For DIP-switch settings, see section
5.10.
SC 201 Polygon motor • The polygon mirror motor • Polygon mirror motor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
error does not reach the targeted error 2. Check the cables.
operating speed within 10 • Abnormal GAVD 3. Replace the polygon motor.
seconds after turning on. behavior
• The lock signal does not • Cable disconnection
become high within 10
seconds after turning off the
polygon motor.
• The lock signal does not
become low within 0.2
second after the polygon
motor reaches the targeted
operating speed.
B147/B149/B190 4-14 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 220 Synch. The front (for K&Y) or rear (for • Disconnection of the 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
detection signal C&M) laser synchronizing cable between front 2. Check the cable connection between
error 1 detector board, which is used (K&Y) or rear (C&M) front (for K&Y) or rear (for C&M)
220-001: Y to determine the start timing of synchronizing synchronizing detector board and the
220-002: M laser writing, does not send a detector board and LD unit.
220-003: C signal while the polygon motor the LD unit 3. Check or reinstall the front (for K&Y)
220-004: K0 is operating normally and the • Incorrect installation or rear (for C&M) synchronizing
220-005: K1 LD is on. of front (K&Y) or rear detector board.
(C&M) synchronizing 4. Replace the front (for K&Y) or rear
detector board (the (for C&M) synchronizing detector
beam does not target board.
the photo detector.) 5. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
• Defective LD unit 6. Replace the BCU.
• Defective BCU 7. Replace the PSU.
• Defective +5VLD
circuit
SM 4-15 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 221 Synch. Main scan length detection is • Damaged or After doing any of the following, print ten D
detection signal not properly completed ten disconnected cable jobs or more to see if the same SC code
error 2 consecutive times. between front (C&M) is displayed:
221-001: Y or rear (K&Y) laser 1. Turn the main switch off and on.
221-002: M The front (for C&M) or rear (for synchronizing 2. Check or replace the cable
221-003: C K&Y) laser synchronizing detector board and connecting front (for C&M) or rear (for
221-004: K detector boards are used for the LD unit K&Y) synchronizing detector board
the main scan length • Incorrect installation and the LD unit.
detection, which automatically of front (C&M) or rear 3. Check or reinstall the front (for C&M)
corrects the main-scan (K&Y) synchronizing or rear (for K&Y) synchronizing
magnification. detector board (the detector board.
beam does not target 4. Replace the front (for C&M) or rear
the photo detector.) (for K&Y) synchronizing detector
• Defective front (C&M) board.
or rear (K&Y) 5. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
synchronizing 6. Replace the BCU.
detector board If a synch. detector board cannot be
• Defective LD unit replaced, do the following as a
temporary measure:
• Disable main scan length detection
(SP 2-919-001)
B147/B149/B190 4-16 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 230 FGATE error The BCU generates the • Poor connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
230-001: Y FGATE signal based on the between BCU and LD 2. Check the cables between the LD
230-002: M registration sensor ON timing. units units and the BCU.
230-003: C Then, it sends the signal to the • Defective BCU 3. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
230-004: K LD units. The LD units send a • Defective LD unit 4. Replace the BCU.
feedback signal to the BCU.
When the LD units start
emitting laser beams, the
feedback signal changes from
High to Low.
The SC code is generated

when the BCU receives no
feedback signal (stays High)
from the LD unit 1 second after
paper reaches the position
where the laser should start
writing.
SC 231 FGATE timeout When LD units emit laser • Poor connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
231-001: Y beams to print a job, the between BCU and LD 2. Check the cables between the LD
231-002: M feedback signal stays Low and units units and the BCU.
231-003: C becomes High after laser • Defective BCU 3. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
231-004: K exposure for a page is • Defective LD unit 4. Replace the BCU.
completed. The SC code is
detected in the following
cases:
• When the feedback signal
stays Low 7 seconds after
completing the laser
exposure, or
• When the feedback signal
stays Low until the laser
exposure timing for the next
page in multi-page print
mode.
SM 4-17 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 240 LD over The power supply for the LD • LD worn out 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
240-001: Y unit exceeds 67 mA. (current/light output 2. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
240-002: M characteristics have
240-003: C changed.)
240-004: K • LD broken (short
circuit)
SC 260 LD HP sensor During homing, it takes more • Defective motor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
not switched on than five seconds to switch the • Defective sensor 2. Check the sensor actuator position of
(for K only) HP sensor on (the sensor • Mechanical problem the LD positioning motor.
actuator does not cover the when switching the 3. Replace the LD positioning motor.
sensor). actuator 4. Replace the LD home position
• Brown fuse (FU81) on sensor.
the Power supply unit 5. Check and/or replace the PSU.
SC 261 LD HP sensor After the laser beam pitch was • Defective motor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
not switched off changed, it takes more than • Defective sensor 2. Check the sensor actuator position of
(for K only) five seconds for the HP sensor • Mechanical problem the LD positioning motor.
to switch off. when switching the 3. Replace the LD positioning motor.
actuator 4. Replace the LD home position
• Brown fuse (FU81) on sensor.
the Power supply unit 5. Check and/or replace the PSU.
B147/B149/B190 4-18 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 285 Line position Line position adjustment fails • Pattern sampling 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
adjustment three consecutive times. error due to 2. Check and fix the problem that
(MUSIC) error insufficient image causes low image density. .
density of patterns 3. Clean or replace the transfer belt
used for the and/or the ID sensor.
adjustment 4. Replace the PCU or clean the
• Inconsistency in the development unit that causes toner to
sampling line position drop on the transfer belt.
adjustment pattern
due to dust on the
pattern, damage to
the OPC drum,
damage or toner
dropped on the
transfer belt, or a dirty
or defective ID sensor
SC 370 TD sensor [K]: During the developer • Poor connection (TD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
Adjustment initialization, the output value sensor outputs is less 2. Reset the related color development
error of the TD sensor is without the than 0.5V.) unit.
SC 371 TD sensor [Y]: adjustment range (3.0 ± 0.1V). • Defective TD sensor 3. Replace the related color
Adjustment development unit.
error
SC 372 TD sensor [C]:
Adjustment
error
SC 373 TD sensor [M] :
Adjustment
error
SC 374 Vt error [K] During the image • Poor connection (TD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
SC 375 Vt error [Y] development, Vt value is less sensor outputs is less 2. Reset the related color development
SC 376 Vt error [C] than 0.5V. than 0.5V.) unit.
SC 377 Vt error [M] • Defective TD sensor 3. Replace the related color
development unit.
SM 4-19 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 380 Black When the motor speed is • Defective motor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
development within the target level, the • Defective BCU 2. Replace the motor.
motor error motor sends a lock signal 3. Replace the BCU.
SC 381 Color (High to Low at CN214-5) to
development the BCU.
motor error SC380 is detected under the
following conditions:
• The Lock signal stays High
2 seconds after the motor
turns on.
• The Lock signal stays Low 2
seconds after the motor
turns off.
• The Lock signal stays High
for more than 2 seconds
while the motor is on.
SC 385 ID sensor VSG Vsg is the out of adjustment • Defective ID sensor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
adjustment range during a process control • Dirty ID sensor 2. Clean the ID sensor and adjacent
error self-check. • ID sensor parts.
disconnected 3. Check the drum cleaning condition.
Adjustment range: • Dirty drum (cleaning 4. Check the ID sensor connector.
4.0 ± 0.5V incomplete) 5. Replace the ID sensor.
SC 386 Development Any of the following conditions • Unsuitable toner 1. Turn the main switch off and on . D
gamma error K happens three consecutive density 2. Check the process control self-check
SC 387 Development times: • Toner supply result (SP3-975). If the result is not
gamma error Y • When the development mechanism problem “1”, fix the problem according to the
SC 388 Development gamma is out of the • Laser exposure table in section 4.1.2.
gamma error C following range: problem 3. Print a full color image by disabling
SC 389 Development 0.3 ≤ γ ≥ 6.0 • Image transfer SC detection (SP5-809-001) and
gamma error M • When Vk is out of the problem check if the image quality is OK. If the
following range: image quality is not OK, fix the
-150V ≤ Vk ≥ 150V problem. Then, enable the SC
• Development gamma detection again.
calculation error
B147/B149/B190 4-20 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 390 Development The high voltage supply board • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
Bias output (C/B) monitors the circuit and • Defective power pack 2. Check if the harness and cables are
error detects abnormal conditions C/B output properly connected.
such as a voltage leak or no • Damaged cable 3. Disconnect the high voltage supply
output condition. If this • Defective cables from the bias terminals on the
happens, the high voltage development unit high voltage supply board C/B.
supply board sends an error • Defective BCU Measure the DC voltage using a
signal (High to Low at CN204- multi-meter.
A18) to the BCU. • Replace the high voltage supply
board if no voltage is supplied.
The BCU monitors this signal 4. If the result is OK at step 2, check if
every 2 ms and generates this the high voltage supply cable or
SC code when the error development unit is grounded.
condition occurs 250 • Replace the high voltage supply
consecutive times. cable if it damages.
• Replace the development unit if it
damages.
5. Check the PWM signals are sent to
the high voltage supplied board from
the BCU. Replace the BCU or
harness between the BCU and high
voltage supply board if the voltage is
0.
SC Charge AC: The high voltage supply board • Power pack 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
391-01 output error sends the feedback signal disconnected 2. Check the connector.
391-01: K (CN228-2 to 5; MCYK). The • Charge receptacle or 3. Check that the PCU is correctly
391-02: Y BCU monitors these feedback terminal installed.
391-03: M signals every 8 ms. If the • Defective PCU bias 4. Check the PCU charge voltage input
391-04: C average of the sampled data is input terminal (the spring/conducting shaft) or
not within the control target 20 • Incorrect power pack replace the PCU.
consecutive times, this SC B/C output 5. Replace the power pack B/C.
code is generated. • Damaged cable 6. Replace the cable.
• Defective BCU 7. Replace the BCU.
• PCU not found
SM 4-21 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC TD sensor error The development-unit drive • Loose cable 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
393- during warming starts. TD sensor signal is 0.78 connection 2. Check that the development unit is
001 up V or less. • Positioning plate out correctly installed.
393-001: K of place 3. Remove the development unit and
393-002: Y • Defective TD sensor check the connector on the rear.
393-003: C • Development unit not 4. Check the positioning plate.
393-004: M found 5. Replace the development unit.
SC Drum motor No drum gear position sensor • Defective PCU 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
440- error signal is detected within 0.7 • Defective drum motor 2. Check and/or replace the PCU.
001 440-001: Black second (185 mm/s), 1.0 • Defective drum gear 3. Check and/or replace the sensor.
440-002: Color second (125 mm/s), or 2.0 position sensor
seconds (62.5 mm/s).
SC Thermistor 1 When the temperature • Thermistor 1 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
460- error (open detected by thermistor 1, defective 2. Check the cable connections.
001 circuit) which is at the left (fusing unit) • Cable connection 3. Replace the thermistor.
side of the laser optics unit, is error 4. Replace the BCU.
less than -30°C for 10 seconds • BCU defect
consecutively, the BCU
determines that the circuit is
opened and displays this SC
code.
460- error (short detected by the thermistor 1, defective 2. Check the cable connections.
002 circuit) which is at the left (fusing unit) • Cable connection 3. Replace the thermistor.
side of the laser optics unit, is error 4. Replace the BCU.
higher than 70°C for 10 • BCU defect
seconds consecutively, the
BCU determines that the
circuit is shorted and displays
this SC code
B147/B149/B190 4-22 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
461- error (open detected by the thermistor 2, defective 2. Check the cable connections.
001 circuit) which is at the right (paper • Cable connection 3. Replace the thermistor.
feed section) side of the laser error 4. Replace the BCU.
optics unit, is less than -30°C • BCU defect
for 10 seconds consecutively,
the BCU determines that the
circuit is opened and displays
this SC code.
461- error (short detected by the thermistor 2, defective 2. Check the cable connections.
002 circuit) which is at the right (paper • Cable connection 3. Replace the thermistor.
feed section) side of the laser error 4. Replace the BCU.
optics unit, is higher than 70°C • BCU defect
for 10 seconds consecutively,
the BCU determines that the
circuit is shorted and displays
this SC code
SC 471 Transfer belt The transfer belt HP sensor • Transfer belt unit not 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
H.P. error signal does not change from set properly 2. Reset the transfer belt unit.
Low to High (home position) or • Defective transfer belt 3. Clean or replace the transfer belt
vice versa 1 second after the H.P. sensor and/or sensor.
transfer belt contact motor transfer belt sensor 4. Replace the transfer belt contact
turns on. • Defective transfer belt motor.
contact motor 5. Check the contact and release
• Transfer belt unit mechanism of the transfer belt unit.
problem
SC 481 Waste toner The waste toner vibrator does • Loose connector 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
vibrator error not operate. • Defective motor 2. Replace the motor.
SM 4-23 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 490 Transfer bias / The high voltage supply board • Defective high 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
paper attraction - Transfer monitors the circuit voltage supply board 2. Check the transfer unit and replace
roller bias leak and detects current leaks. If - Transfer the belt and/or the transfer unit if any
error this happens, the high voltage • Damaged transfer damage is found.
supply board sends a SC belt 3. Replace the high voltage supply
signal (High to Low at CN213- board - Transfer.
8) to the BCU.
• Transfer unit 4. Check and/or replace the high voltage
• Damaged high supply cables.
The BCU monitors this signal voltage supply cables 5. Check and/or replace the dc cables
every 2 ms and generates this • Damaged cables between the BCU and high voltage
SC code when the error between the BCU and supply board.
condition occurs 250 high voltage supply 6. Replace the BCU.
consecutive times. board
• Defective BCU
SC 501 Paper Tray 1 When the tray lift motor is • Defective paper lift 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
error turned on, if the upper limit is sensor 2. Check if the bottom plate smoothly
SC 502 Paper Tray 2 not detected within 10 • Defective tray lift moves up and down manually.
error seconds, the machine asks the motor 3. Check and/or replace the paper lift
user to reset the tray. If this • Defective bottom sensor.
condition occurs three plate lift mechanism 4. Check and/or replace the tray lift
consecutive times, the SC is motor.
generated.
B147/B149/B190 4-24 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC Tray 3 error For the paper feed unit: For the paper feed unit: 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
503-01 (Paper Feed When the tray lift motor is • Defective tray lift 2. Check the cable connections.
Unit or LCT) turned on, if the upper limit is motor or connector 3. Check and/or replace the defective
not detected within 18 disconnection component.
seconds, the machine asks the • Defective lift sensor
user to reset the tray. If this or connector
condition occurs three disconnection
consecutive times, the SC is
generated. For the LCT:
• Defective stack
For the LCT: transport clutch or
This SC is generated under connector
the following conditions: disconnection
• If the upper or lower limit is • Defective tray motor
not detected within 15 or connector
seconds when the tray lift disconnection
motor is turned on to lift up • Defective end fence
or lower the tray home position sensor
• If the paper stack is not or connector
transported within a specific disconnection
number of pulses after the • Defective upper limit
tray motor and stack sensor or connector
transport clutch turn on to disconnection
transport the paper stack • Defective tray lift
• If the end fence home motor or connector
position sensor stays ON for disconnection
a specific number of pulses
after the tray motor and
stack transport clutch turn
on to transport the paper
stack.
SM 4-25 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC Tray 3 error • If the following condition For the paper feed unit: 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
503-02 (Paper Feed occurs 3 consecutive times, • Defective tray lift 2. Check the cable connections.
Unit or LCT) this SC is generated. motor or connector 3. Check and/or replace the defective
disconnection component.
For the paper feed unit: • Defective lift sensor
When the main switch is or connector
turned or when the tray is set disconnection
and if the upper limit is already
detected, the lift motor turns on For the LCT:
to lower the bottom plate until • Defective stack
the lift sensor goes off. transport clutch or
If the motor turns on for 7 connector
seconds or more, the machine disconnection
asks the user to reset the tray. • Defective tray motor
or connector
For the LCT: disconnection
When the main switch is • Defective end fence
turned on or when the LCT is home position sensor
set, if the end fence is not in or connector
the home position (home disconnection
position sensor ON), the tray
lift motor stops.
SC Tray 4 error (3 When the tray lift motor is • Defective tray lift 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
504-01 Tray Paper turned on, if the upper limit is motor or connector 2. Check the cable connections.
Feed Unit) not detected within 18 disconnection 3. Check and/or replace the defective
seconds, the machine asks the • Defective lift sensor component.
user to reset the tray. If this or connector
condition occurs three disconnection
consecutive times, the SC is
generated.
B147/B149/B190 4-26 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC Tray 4 error (3 When the main switch is • Defective tray lift 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
504-02 Tray Paper turned or when the tray is set motor or connector 2. Check the cable connections.
Feed Unit) and if the upper limit is already disconnection 3. Check and/or replace the defective
detected, the lift motor turns on • Defective lift sensor component.
to lower the bottom plate until or connector
the lift sensor goes off. disconnection
If the motor turns on for 7
seconds or more, the machine
asks the user to reset the tray.
If this condition occurs 3
consecutive times, this SC is
generated.
SC 530 Fusing fan The BCU does not receive the • Defective fusing fan 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
motor error lock signal (CN210-B5) 5 motor or connector 2. Check the connector and/or replace
seconds after turning on the disconnection the fusing fan motor.
fusing fan. • Defective BCU 3. Replace the BCU.
SC 541 Heating roller The temperature measured by • Loose connection of 1. Check if the heating roller thermistor A
thermistor error the heating roller thermistor the heating roller is firmly connected.
does not reach 7 °C for ten thermistor 2. Replace the fusing unit.
seconds. • Defective heating 3. Replace the BCU.
roller thermistor
• Defective BCU
SC 542 Heating roller After the main switch is turned • Heating roller fusing 1. Check if the heating roller thermistor A
warm-up error on or the cover is closed, the lamp broken is firmly connected.
heating roller temperature • Defective heating 2. Replace the fusing unit.
does not reach the ready roller thermistor 3. Replace the BCU.
temperature within 60 seconds • Defective BCU
during fusing unit warm-up.
SC 543 Heating roller The detected fusing • Defective PSU 1. Replace the PSU. A
fusing lamp temperature stays at 210°C or • Defective BCU 2. Replace the BCU.
overheat more for five seconds.
SM 4-27 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 544 Heating roller During stand-by mode or a • Defective heating 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp print job, the detected heating roller thermistor 2. Replace the PSU.
high roller temperature stays at • Defective PSU 3. Replace the BCU.
temperature 210 °C or more for 0.2 second. • Defective BCU
error
SC 545 Heating roller When the fusing unit is not • Heating roller 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp running in the Ready condition, thermistor out of
consecutive full the heating roller fusing lamp position
power keeps on with full power for 30
consecutive seconds.
SC 546 Heating roller The heating roller temperature • Loose connection of 1. Check if the fusing unit is properly set A
fusing lamp changes by ±20°C or more in the thermistor and connected to the main frame.
temperature one second. This occurs three • Loose connection 2. Check if the heating roller thermistor
fluctuation times in one minute or two between the fusing connector is firmly connected.
consecutive times. unit and main frame 3. Replace the fusing unit.
SC 551 Pressure roller The measured pressure roller • Loose connection of 1. Check that the pressure roller A
thermistor error temperature does not reach pressure roller thermistor is firmly connected.
7°C for 30 seconds. thermistor 2. Replace the fusing unit.
• Defective pressure 3. Replace the BCU.
roller thermistor
• Defective BCU
SC 552 Pressure roller After the main switch is turned • Pressure roller fusing 1. Check if the pressure roller thermistor A
warm-up error on or the door is closed, the lamp broken is firmly connected.
pressure roller temperature • Defective pressure 2. Replace the fusing unit.
does not reach the ready roller thermistor 3. Replace the BCU.
temperature within 180 • Defective BCU
seconds during fusing unit
warm-up.
SC 553 Pressure roller The detected pressure roller • Defective PSU 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp temperature stays at 210°C or • Defective BCU 2. Replace the PSU.
overheat more for five seconds. 3. Replace the BCU.
B147/B149/B190 4-28 SM
Rev. 06/2004 SC TABLE
⇒ SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause

Related
SCs
Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SC 555 Pressure roller When the fusing unit is not • Pressure roller 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
consecutive full the pressure roller fusing lamp position
power keeps ON with full power for
100 consecutive seconds.
SC 556 Pressure roller The pressure roller • Loose connection of 1. Check if the fusing unit is properly set A
fusing lamp temperature changes by the pressure roller and connected to the main frame.
temperature ±20°C or more in one second. thermistor 2. Check if the pressure roller thermistor
fluctuation This occurs three times in one • Loose connection connector is firmly connected.
minute or two consecutive between the fusing 3. Replace the fusing unit.
times. unit and main frame
SC 560 Zero cross error When the main switch is • Electrical noise in the 1. Replace the PSU. A
turned on, the machine checks supply from the
how many zero-cross signals power cord
are generated during 500 ms.
If the number of zero-cross
signal generated is either more
than 66 or less than 45 and
when this condition is detected
10 consecutive times, this
code is displayed.
SC 620 ARDF • After the ARDF is detected, • Incorrect installation 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication the break signal occurs or of ARDF 2. Check the cable connection of the
error communication timeout • ARDF defective ARDF.
occurs. • IPU board defective 3. Shut out the external noise.
• External noise 4. Replace the ARDF.
5. Replace the IPU board.
SC 621 Two-tray While the BCU communicates • Cable problems 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
finisher/booklet with an optional unit, an SC • BCU problems 2. Check if the cables of peripherals are
finisher code is displayed if one of • PSU problems in the properly connected.
communication following conditions occurs. machine 3. Replace the PSU if no power is
error 1. The BCU receives a signal • Main board problems supplied to peripherals.
SC 622 Bank which is generated by the in the peripherals 4. Replace the BCU or main board of
communication peripherals only just after peripherals.
error the main switch is turned
SM 4-29 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 623 Duplex unit on. • Cable problems 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication 2. When the BCU does not • BCU problems 2. Check if the cable of the duplex
error receive an OK signal from a • PSU problems in the inverter unit is properly connected.
peripheral 100ms after machine 3. Replace the PSU if no power is
sending a command to it. • Duplex control board supplied to the peripherals.
The BCU resends the problem 4. Replace the duplex control board in
command. The BCU does the inverter unit.
not receive an OK signal
after sending the command
3 times.
SC 630 CSS An communication error has • Communication line Logging only. CTL
communication occurred during error
error communication with the CSS.
SC 632 MF accounting The controller sends data to • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
device error 1 the accounting device, but the between the 2. Check the connection.
device does not respond. This controller and the
occurs three times. accounting device
SC 633 MF accounting After communication is
device error 2 established, the controller
receives the brake signal from
the accounting device.
SC 634 MF accounting The accounting device sends • Defective controller of 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
device error 3 the controller the report that the MF accounting 2. Replace the controller board of the
indicates a backup RAM error device accounting device.
has occurred. • Battery error 3. Replace the battery.
SC 635 MF accounting The accounting device sends
device error 4 the controller the report that
indicates the battery voltage
error has occurred.
B147/B149/B190 4-30 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 640 BCU - The check sum of the interface • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Controller between the BCU and • Defective BCU 2. Replace the controller.
communication controller is not the same. 3. Replace the BCU.
error (check
sum error)
SC 641 BCU – The controller does not receive • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Controller any response from the BCU • Defective controller 2. Check the connection between the
communication three consecutive times when • Defective BCU BCU and controller.
error (no sending a signal every 100ms. 3. Replace the controller.
response) 4. Replace the BCU.
SC 670 No response When the main power is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
from BCU at turned on or the machine • Defective controller 2. Check the connection between the
power on starts warming up from • Defective BCU BCU and controller.
energy-saving mode, the 3. Replace the controller.
controller does not receive a 4. Replace the BCU.
command signal from the
BCU.
SM 4-31 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 672 Controller-to- • After the machine is • Controller stalled 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
operation panel powered on, the • Controller board 2. Check the condition of the controller
communication communication between the installed incorrectly board.
error at startup controller and the operation • Controller board 3. Check the condition of the operation
panel is not established, or defective panel.
communication with • Operation panel 4. Replace the controller board.
controller is interrupted after connector loose or 5. Replace the operation panel.
a normal startup. defective 6. Turn the main switch off, wait for one
• After startup reset of the • The controller is not second or more, and turn the main
operation panel, the completely shutdown switch on.
attention code or the when you turn the
attention acknowledge code main switch off.
is not sent from the
controller.
• After the controller issues a
command to check the
communication line with the
controller at 30-second
intervals, the controller fails
to respond twice.
SC 680 BCU/ MUSIC After the engine CPU sends a • Toner cartridge 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication message, the Music CPU does memory chip loose 2. Check if the toner cartridge is
error not respond within five connection installed correctly.
seconds three consecutive • Memory chip problem 3. Replace the toner cartridge.
times. • Memory chip cable 4. Check if the harnesses are not
wiring problem damaged.
5. Replace the BCU.
SC 685 SBU-IPU • During data transfer, a • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication checksum error occurs. between SBU and 2. Shut out the external noise.
error • During any operation except IPU 3. Check the cable connection of the
initialization, the SBU sends • SBU board defective scanner unit.
a hardware-reset • IPU board defective 4. Replace the SBU board.
acknowledgement to the • External noise 5. Replace the IPU board.
IPU.
B147/B149/B190 4-32 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 686 BCU-IPU • After the machine is • Board connector 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication powered on or recovering between BCU and 2. Check the cable connection between
error from the power save mode, controller loose the board connector and BCU.
timeout occurs during BCU • Board connector 3. Check the cable connection between
communication. between controller controller and motherboard.
• The break signal is received and motherboard 4. Check the cable connection between
after the communication is loose motherboard and IPU.
normally established with • Board connector 5. Replace the BCU board.
the BCU. between motherboard 6. Replace the IPU board.
• Timeout occurs while the and IPU loose 7. Replace the controller board.
communication with the • BCU board defective 8. Replace the motherboard.
BCU is retried after a • IPU board defective
communication error. • Controller board
defective
• Motherboard
defective
SC 687 Memory The BCU does not receive a • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
address memory address command • Defective controller 2. Check if the controller is firmly
command error from the controller 60 seconds • Defective BCU connected to the BCU.
after paper is in the position for 3. Replace the controller.
registration. 4. Replace the BCU.
SC GAVD I2C • The I2C bus device ID is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
690- communica-tion identified during • Defective BCU 2. Check the cable connection.
001 error initialization. • Defective LD 3. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
690-001: Y • A device-status error occurs controller board 4. Replace the BCU board.
690-002: M during I2C bus
690-003: C communication.
690-004: K • The I2C bus communication
is not established due to an
error other than a buffer
shortage.
SM 4-33 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 691 Scanner startup • After the machine is • Board connector 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error powered on or recovering between controller 2. Check the cable connection between
from the power save mode, and motherboard controller and motherboard.
the scanner ready signal is loose 3. Check the cable connection between
not verified. • Board connector motherboard and IPU.
between motherboard 4. Replace the IPU board.
and IPU loose 5. Replace the controller board.
• IPU board defective 6. Replace the motherboard.
• Controller board
defective
• Motherboard
defective
SC 692 GAPCII2C • The I2C bus device ID is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication identified during • Defective BCU 2. Check the cable connection.
error initialization. • Defective LD 3. Replace the BCU.
• A device-status error occurs controller board
during I2C bus
communication.
• The I2C bus communication
is not established due to an
error other than a buffer
shortage.
SC 700 ARDF original • After the pick-up motor is • Original stopper HP SC 701 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
pick-up turned on, the original sensor defective 2. Replace the HP sensor.
malfunction stopper HP sensor is not • Pick-up motor 3. Turn the main switch off and on.
activated. defective (not 4. Replace the pick-up motor.
rotating) 5. Replace the control board.
• Timing belt out of
position
• ARDF main board
defective
B147/B149/B190 4-34 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 701 ARDF original • The original pick-up HP • Original pick-up HP SC 700 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
pick-up/paper sensor is not activated after sensor defective 2. Replace the pick-up motor.
lift mechanism the pick-up motor is turned • Pick-up motor 3. Replace the control board.
malfunction on. defective 4. Replace the HP sensor.
• ARDF main board
defective
SC 722 Two-tray • The jogger fences of the • Defective jogger H.P. 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher jogger two-tray finisher donot sensor 2. Check the connection of jogger H.P.
motor error return to home position • Loose connection sensor and jogger motor connectors
within a specific time. • Defective jogger 3. Replace the jogger H.P. sensor.
• The two-tray finisher jogger motor 4. Replace the jogger motor.
motor does not leave home
position within a given time.
SC 724 Two-tray Stapling does not finish within • Staple jam 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher staple 150 ms after the staple • Loose connection 2. Check if the staple hammer motor
hammer motor hammer motor turns on. • Overload caused by connector is properly connected.
error stapling too many 3. Check if the staple jam occurs.
pages 4. Replace the staple hammer motor.
• Defective staple
hammer motor
SC 725 Two-tray The stack feed-out belt H.P. • Defective stack feed- 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher stack sensor does not activate within out H.P. sensor 2. Check if the connectors of the stack
feed-out motor a specified time after the stack • Loose connection feed-out H.P. sensor and motor are
error feed-out motor turns on. • Stack feed-out motor properly connected.
overload 3. Replace the stack feed-out H.P.
• Defective stack feed- sensor.
out motor 4. Replace the stack feed-out motor.
SM 4-35 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 726 Two-tray • The upper stack height 1 • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher shift sensor is activated • Defective upper stack 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
tray 1 lift motor consecutively (detecting height 1 sensor and motor are properly connected.
error paper) for 15 seconds after • Defective shift tray 1 3. Replace the upper stack height 1
the shift tray starts moving lift motor sensor.
up. • Motor overload 4. Replace the shift tray 1 lift motor.
• The upper stack height
sensor 1 is deactivated
consecutively (not detecting
paper) for 15 seconds after
the shift tray starts moving
down.
• When the upper tray moves
from lower paper exit to the
upper paper exit, the upper
stack height 1 sensor is
activated.
SC 727 Two-tray The stapler cannot return to its • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher stapler home position within a • Defective stapler 2. Check if the stapler rotation motor
rotation motor specified time after the stapler rotation motor connector is properly connected.
error rotation motor starts rotating. • Motor overload 3. Replace the stapler rotation motor.
SC 729 Two-tray The punch home position is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher punch not detected within 250 ms • Defective punch H.P. 2. Check if the connectors of sensor,
motor error after the punch clutch turns on. sensor clutch and/or motor are properly
• Defective punch connected.
clutch 3. Replace the punch H.P. sensor.
• Defective punch hole 4. Replace the punch clutch.
motor 5. Replace the punch hole motor.
SC 730 Two-tray The stapler home position is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher stapler not detected within a specified • Defective stapler H.P. 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
motor error time after the staple motor sensor and motor are properly connected.
turns on. • Defective stapler 3. Replace the stapler H.P. sensor.
motor 4. Replace the stapler motor.
B147/B149/B190 4-36 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 731 Two-tray The exit guide plate open • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher exit sensor is not activated within a • Defective exit guide 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
guide plate specified time after the exit plate open sensor and motor are properly connected.
motor error guide plate motor turns on. • Defective exit guide 3. Replace the exit guide plate open
plate motor sensor.
4. Replace the exit guide plate motor.
SC 732 Two-tray Tray 1 home position is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher tray 1 detected within a specified • Defective tray shift 1 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
shift motor error time after the tray 1 shift motor sensor and motor are properly connected.
turns on. • Defective tray 1 shift 3. Replace the tray shift 1 sensor.
motor 4. Replace the tray 1 shift motor.
SC 733 Two-tray • The lower stack height 1 • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher tray 2 sensor is activated • Defective lower stack 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
lift motor error consecutively (detecting height 1 sensor and motor are properly connected.
paper) for 15 seconds after • Defective tray 2 lift 3. Replace the lower stack height 1
the shift tray starts moving motor sensor.
up. • Motor overload 4. Replace the tray 2 lift motor.
• The lower stack height
sensor 1 is deactivated
consecutively (not detecting
paper) for 15 seconds after
the shift tray starts moving
down.
SC 734 Two-tray Tray 2 home position is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher tray 2 detected within a specified • Defective tray shift 2 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
shift motor error time after the tray 2 shift motor sensor and motor are properly connected.
turns on. • Defective tray 2 shift 3. Replace the tray shift 2 sensor.
motor 4. Replace the tray 2 shift motor.
SM 4-37 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 740 Booklet finisher • The folder home position • Defective transport 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
transport motor sensor does not turn off motor 2. Check the connection of the transport
error within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of motor.
folder rollers start to move. the transport motor 3. Check the connection of the folder
• The folder home position • Defective folder home home position sensor.
sensor does not turn on position sensor 4. Replace the transport motor.
within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of
folder rollers start the holder home
transporting the paper to the position sensor
booklet tray.
SC 741 Booklet finisher • The paddle home position • Defective paddle 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
paddle motor sensor does not turn off motor 2. Check that the connection of the
error within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of paddle motor.
paddles start to move. the paddle motor 3. Check the connection of the paddle
• The paddle home position • Defective paddle home position sensor.
sensor does not turn on home position sensor 4. Check the connection of the stack-
within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of tray upper-roller home-position
paddles start to operate. the paddle home sensor.
• The stack-tray upper roller position sensor 5. Replace the paddle motor.
home position sensor does • Defective stack-tray
not turn off within 2 seconds upper-roller home-
after the paddle motor starts position sensor
to lower the roller. • Loose connection of
• The stack-tray upper-roller the stack-tray upper-
home-position sensor does roller home-position
not turn on with in 2 sensor
seconds after the paddle
motor starts to lower the
roller.
B147/B149/B190 4-38 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 742 Booklet finisher • The stapler home position • Defective stapler slide 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
stapler slide sensor does not turn off motor 2. Check the connection of the stapler
motor error within 1 second after this • Loose connection of slide motor.
same sensor turns on. the stapler slide 3. Check the connection of the stapler
• The stapler home position motor home position sensor.
sensor does not turn on • Defective stapler 4. Replace the stapler home position
within 1 second when the home position sensor sensor.
stapler is coming back to its • Loose connection of 5. Replace the stapler slide motor.
home position. the stapler home
position sensor
SC 743 Booklet finisher • The front-jogger-fence • Incorrect assembling 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
front jogger home-position sensor does of the front jogger 2. Check the connection of the front
fence motor not turn off within 3 seconds fence jogger fence motor.
error after the front-jogger-fence • Loose connection of 3. Check the connection of the front-
motor starts. the front jogger fence jogger-fence home-position sensor.
• The front-jogger-fence motor 4. Replace the front-jogger-fence home-
home-position sensor does • Defective front- position sensor.
not turn on within 3 seconds jogger-fence home- 5. Replace the front jogger fence motor.
when the front-jogger-fence position sensor
motor is driving the fence to • Loose connection of
its home position. the front-jogger-fence
home-position sensor
SC 744 Booklet finisher • The rear-jogger-fence • Incorrect assembling 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
rear jogger home-position sensor does of the rear jogger 2. Check the connection of the rear
fence motor not turn off within 3 seconds fence jogger fence motor.
error after the rear-jogger-fence • Loose connection of 3. Check the connection of the rear-
motor starts. the rear jogger fence jogger-fence home-position sensor.
• The rear-jogger-fence motor 4. Replace the rear-jogger-fence home-
home-position sensor does • Defective rear-jogger- position sensor.
not turn on within 3 seconds fence home-position 5. Replace the rear jogger fence motor.
when the rear-jogger-fence sensor
motor is driving the fence to • Loose connection of
its home position. the rear-jogger-fence
home-position sensor
SM 4-39 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 745 Booklet finisher • The stack-tray-belt home- • Defective stack-tray 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
stack-tray exit position sensor does not exit motor 2. Check the connection of the stack-
motor error turn off within 394 • Loose connection of tray exit motor.
milliseconds after the stack- the stack-tray exit 3. Check the connection of the stack-
tray exit roller starts to drive motor tray-belt home-position sensor.
the belts. → The stack-tray • Defective stack-tray- 4. Replace the stack-tray-belt home-
exit motor retries to drive belt home-position position sensor.
the belts, but the stack-tray- sensor 5. Replace the stack-tray exit motor.
belt home-position sensor • Loose connection of
still does not turn off within the stack-tray-belt
another 394 milliseconds. home-position sensor
• The stack-tray-belt home-
position sensor does not
turn on within 1,084
milliseconds after the same
home-position sensor turns
off. → The stack-tray exit
motor retires to drive the
belts, but the stack-tray belt
home-position sensor still
does not turn on within
another 1,084 milliseconds.
B147/B149/B190 4-40 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 746 Booklet finisher • The stapler/folder motor • Malfunction of the 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
stapler/folder starts. But the controller stapler/folder motor 2. Check the connection of the
motor error does not receive the signal • Loose connection of stapler/folder motor.
from the encoder sensor the stapler/folder 3. Check the connection of the encoder
within 0.1 second. motor sensor.
• The stapler/folder motor • Loose connection of 4. Check the connection of the stapler
starts to drive the stapler the encoder sensor switch.
unit, and the stapler switch • Defective encoder 5. Check the connection of the stapler
is on. But the controller sensor home position sensor.
does not receive the signal • Loose connection of 6. Check the connection of the folder-
from the home position the stapler switch roller home-position sensor.
sensor for 0.5 second. • Defective stapler 7. Replace the stapler/folder motor.
• The stapler starts to staple switch 8. Replace the encoder sensor.
the paper. But the controller • Loose connection of 9. Replace the stapler switch.
does not receive any signal the stapler home 10.Replace the stapler home position
from the home position position sensor sensor.
sensor, and the stapler 11.Replace the folder-roller home-
• Defective stapler
switch is off. position sensor.
home position sensor
• The stapler/folder motor • Loose connection of
starts to drive the folder the folder-roller
rollers. But the home home-position sensor
position sensor does not • Defective folder-roller
turn off within 9.247 home-position sensor
seconds.
• The home position sensor
does not turn on within
9.247 seconds after this
same sensor turns off.
SM 4-41 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 747 Booklet finisher • The upper limit sensor • Defective paper 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
lift motor error detects the regular tray height sensor 2. Check the connection of the paper
while the lift motor is lifting • Loose connection of height sensor.
the regular tray. the paper height 3. Check the connection of the upper
• The paper height sensor sensor limit sensor.
does not turn off within 10 • Defective upper limit 4. Check the connection of the lift motor
seconds after the lift motor sensor encoder sensor.
starts to lower the regular • Loose connection of 5. Check the connection of the lift motor.
tray. the upper limit sensor 6. Replace the paper height sensor.
• The upper limit sensor does • Defective lift motor 7. Replace the upper limit sensor.
not turn off within 10 • Loose connection of 8. Replace the lift motor encoder sensor.
seconds after the lift motor the lift motor 9. Replace the lift motor.
starts to lower the regular • Incorrect assembling
tray. of the lift motor
• The paper height sensor • Defective lift motor
does not turn on within 10 encoder sensor
seconds after the lift motor • Loose connection of
starts to lift the regular tray. the lift motor encoder
• The controller does not sensor
receive the signal from the
lift motor encoder sensor
within 50 milliseconds after
the lift motor starts.
SC 748 Booklet finisher The CPU tries to write data in • Defective EEPROM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
backup data the EEPROM three times, but • EEPROM not 2. Check that the EEPROM is installed.
error fails to write data. installed 3. Replace the EEPROM.
SC 749 Booklet finisher A communication-error alarm • The finisher controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit is not cleared for 3 seconds. cannot communicate 2. Check the connection between the
communication with the punch-unit finisher controller and the punch-unit
error controller. controller.
SC 750 Booklet finisher The checksum in the backup • Defective EEPROM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit data is inconsistent. (on the punch-unit 2. Check that the EEPROM is installed.
controller error controller) 3. Replace the EEPROM.
• EEPROM not
installed
B147/B149/B190 4-42 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 751 Booklet finisher The paper edge and size • Defective sensors 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit sensors receive the 2.5-volt • Dirty sensors 2. Clean the sensors.
sensor error 1 light or weaker light even when 3. Replace the sensors.
the source emits 4.4-volt light.
SC 752 Booklet finisher • The registration motor • Incorrect assembly of 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit drives the slide unit to the the registration motor 2. Check the connection of the
registration rear side for 1 second. But • Loose connection of registration motor.
motor error the home position sensor the registration motor 3. Check the connection of the home
does not turn on. • Defective home position sensor.
• The registration motor position sensor 4. Replace the home position sensor.
drives the slide unit to the • Loose connection of 5. Replace the registration motor.
front side for 1 second. But the home position
the home position sensor sensor
does not turn off.
SC 753 Booklet finisher • The punch motor starts to • Malfunction of the 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit drive the punch cams. But punch motor 2. Check that the connection of the
punch motor the controller does not • Loose connection of punch motor.
error receive the encoder-lock the punch motor 3. Check the connection of the home
signal for 60 milliseconds. • Defective home position sensor.
• The punch motor start to position sensor 4. Check the connection of the encoder
drive the punch cams. But • Loose connection of sensor.
the home positions sensor the home position 5. Replace the home position sensor.
does not turn on for 250 sensor 6. Replace the encoder sensor.
milliseconds. • Loose connection of 7. Replace the punch motor.
the encoder sensor
• Defective encoder
sensor
SC 754 Booklet finisher The A/D inputs of the sensor • Defective sensor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit are not corrected by varying • Dirty sensor 2. Clean the sensors.
sensor error 2 the D/A outputs. 3. Replace the sensors.
SC 818 Watch-dog While the system program is • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error running, other processes do • Software error 2. Replace the controller.
not operate at all. 3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC
table
SM 4-43 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 819 Fatal error
[696E] Process error System completely down • Defective RAM DIMM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[766D] Memory error Unexpected system memory • Defective ROM DIMM 2. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM.
size • Defective controller 3. Check and/or replace the ROM
• Software error DIMM.
4. Replace the controller.
5. See NOTE at the end of the SC
table.
[4361] Kernel stop The cache error trap occurs in • CPU cache error 1. Replace the controller. CTL
error the CUP.
Kernel stop Any error in the operation • Defective CPU 1. Replace the memory. CTL
error system (An error message is • Defective memory 2. Replace the controller.
output.) • Defective flash
memory
• Incorrect software
SC 820 Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0001] CPU error During the self-diagnostic, the • System firmware 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
to controller CPU detects an problem 2. Reinstall the controller system
[06FF] error. There are 47 types of • Defective controller firmware.
error code (0001 to 4005) 3. Replace the controller.
depending on the cause of the
error. The CPU detects an When the problem cannot be fixed with
error and displays the specific the above procedure, the following
error code with the program information displayed on the screen
address where the error needs to be fed back to a technical
occurs). support center.
• SC code
• Detailed error code
• Program address
B147/B149/B190 4-44 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
[0702] CPU/Memory • System firmware 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[0709] Error problem 2. Reinstall the controller system
[070A] • Defective RAM-DIMM software.
• Defective controller 3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
[0801] CPU error Same as [0001] CTL
to
[4005]
[0B00] ASIC error The write-&-verify check error • Defective ASIC 1. Replace the controller. CTL
has occurred in the ASIC. device
SC 821 Self-diagnosis The CPU checks if the ASIC • System firmware 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[0D05] error: ASIC timer works properly compared problem 2. Reinstall the controller system
with the CPU timer. If the ASIC • Defective RAM-DIMM firmware.
timer does not function in the • Defective controller 3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
specified range, this SC code 4. Replace the controller board.
is displayed.
SC 822 Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive) [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[3003] Timeout error When the main switch is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[3004] Command error turned on or starting the self- • Defective HDD 2. Check that the HDD is properly
diagnostic, the HDD stays • Defective controller connected to the controller.
busy for the specified time or 3. Replace the HDD.
more. 4. Replace the controller.
SC 823 Self-diagnostic error: NIB [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[6101] MAC address The result of the MAC address • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
check sum error check sum does not match the 2. Replace the controller.
check sum stored in ROM.
[6104] PHY IC error The PHY IC on the controller
cannot be properly recognized.
[6105] PHY IC loop- An error occurred during the
back error loop-back test for the PHY IC
on the controller.
SM 4-45 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 824 Self-diagnosis The controller cannot • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[1401] error: Standard recognize the standard • Defective standard 2. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly
NVRAM NVRAM installed or detects NVRAM inserted into the socket.
that the NVRAM is defective. • Defective controller 3. Replace the NVRAM.
SC 826 Self-diagnostic error: RTC [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[1501] Self-diagnostic • An RTC device is • RTC defective 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Error: RTC/ recognized, and the • NVRAM without RTC 2. Replace the NVRAM with another
Optional difference between the RTC installed NVRAM with an RTC device.
NVRAM device and the CPU • Backup battery
exceeds the defined limit. discharged
• No RTC device is
recognized.
[15FF] Self-diagnostic • The RTC device is not • NVRAM without RTC 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Error: RTC/ detected. installed 2. Replace the NVRAM with another
Optional • Backup battery NVRAM with an RTC device.
NVRAM discharged
SC 827 Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0201] Verification Error detected during a • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error write/verify check for the • Defective SDRAM 2. Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM 3. Replace the controller.
DIMM). • Defective controller
[0202] Resident The SPD values in all RAM • Defective RAM DIMM 1. Replace the RAM DIMM. CTL
memory error DIMM are incorrect or • Defective SPD ROM
unreadable. on RAM DIMM
• Defective 12C bus
SC 828 Self-diagnostic error : ROM [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0101] Check sum The boot monitor and OS • Defective ROM DIMM 1. Turn the main switch on and off. CTL
error 1 program stored in the ROM • Defective controller 2. Replace the ROM DIMM
DIMM is checked. If the check 3. Replace the controller.
sum of the program is
incorrect, this SC code is
displayed.
B147/B149/B190 4-46 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
[0104] Check sum All areas of the ROM DIMM
error 2 are checked. If the check sum
of all programs stored in the
ROM DIMM is incorrect, this
SC code is displayed.
SC 829 Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0302] Composition The result of checking the • Not specified RAM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error (Slot 0) composition data of the RAM DIMM installed 2. Replace the RAM DIMM.
in Slot 0 (CN5) on the • Defective RAM DIMM 3. Replace the controller board.
controller is incorrect.
[0401] Verification The data stored in the RAM in
error (Slot 1) Slot 1 does not match the data
when reading.
[0402] Composition The result of checking the
error (Slot 1) composition data of the RAM
in Slot 1 (CN6) on the
controller is incorrect.
SC 835 Self-diagnosis error: Centronics interface [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[1102] Verification The controller detects that the • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error loop-back connector is not • Defective loop-back 2. Check the connection between the
properly connected. connector Centronics connector and loop-back
[110C] DMA A DMA data abnormality is • Defective Centronics connector.
verification error detected even when the loop- connector 3. Reconnect the loop-back connector.
back connector is properly set. • Defective controller 4. Replace the controller.
[1120] Loop-back The loop-back connector is not
connector error set when starting the detailed
self-diagnostics.
SC 840 EEPROM An error has occurred during Defective EEPROM 1. Replace the EEPROM on the CTL
access error I/O processing. controller.
SC 841 EEPROM read The EEPROM stores three Defective EEPROM 1. Replace the EEPROM on the CTL
error different data in mirrored controller.
areas.
SC 850 Network The network is unusable. • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
interface error 2. Replace the controller.
SM 4-47 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 851 IEEE1394 The 1394 interface is • Defective IEEE1394 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
interface error unusable. • Defective controller. 2. Replace the IEEE1394 interface
board.
SC 853 Wireless LAN The wireless LAN card is not • Loose connection SC 854 1. Check the connection. CTL
card not detected before
detected communication is established,
though the wireless LAN board
is detected.
SC 854 Wireless LAN The wireless LAN card is not • Loose connection SC 853 1. Check the connection. CTL
card not detected after communication
detected is established, though the
wireless LAN board is
detected.
SC 855 Wireless LAN An error is detected in the • Loose connection 1. Check the connection. CTL
card error wireless LAN card. • Defective wireless 2. Replace the wireless LAN card.
LAN card
SC 856 Wireless LAN An error is detected in the • Defective wireless 1. Check the connection. CTL
card error wireless LAN board. LAN board 2. Replace the wireless LAN board.
• Loose connection
SC 857 USB interface The USB interface cannot be • Defective USB driver 1. Check the connection. CTL
error used due to a driver error. • Loose connection 2. Replace the USB board.
SC 860 HDD: The controller detects that the • HDD not initialized 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Initialization hard disk fails. • Defective HDD 2. Reformat the HDD.
error 3. Replace the HDD.
SC 861 HDD: Reboot The HDD does not become • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error ready within 30 seconds after • Defective cables 2. Check the connection between the
the power is supplied to the • Defective HDD HDD and controller.
HDD. • Defective controller 3. Check and replace the cables.
4. Replace the HDD.
B147/B149/B190 4-48 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 862 Defective sector The 101st defective sector is • Same as SC 863 (SC 1. Replace the HDD. CTL
error detected in the hard disk. 862 counts the
number of SC 863
occurrence.)
SC 863 HDD: Read The data stored in the HDD • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error cannot be read correctly. • Defective controller 2. Replace the HDD.
SC 864 HDD: CRC While reading data from the • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error HDD or storing data in the 2. Replace the HDD.
HDD, data transmission fails.
SC 865 HDD: Access An error is detected while • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error operating the HDD. 2. Replace the HDD.
SC 866 SD card A correct license is not found • SD-card data has 1. Store correct data in the SD card. CTL
authentication in the SD card. corrupted.
error
SC 867 SD card error The SD card is ejected from • The SD card is 1. Install the SD card. CTL
the slot. ejected from the slot. 2. Turn the main switch off and on.
SC 868 SD card access An error report is sent from the • An error is detected in 1. For a file system error, format the SD CTL
error SD card reader. the SD card. card on your PC.
243-252: File 2. For a device error, turn the mains
system error switch off and on.
253: Device 3. Replace the SD card.
error 4. Replace the controller.
SC 870 Address book An error is detected in the data • Defective software 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error copied to the address book program 2. Initialize the address book data (SP5-
over a network. • Defective HDD 846-050).
• Incorrect path to the 3. Initialize the user information (SP5-
sever 832-006/007).
4. Replace the HDD.
SC 871 FCU flash ROM An error is detected in the • Defective flash ROM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error flash ROM that stores the 2. Replace the MBU (on the FCU).
address-book data.
SM 4-49 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 872 HDD mail data An error is detected in the • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error HDD at machine initialization. • Power failure during 2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-
an access to the HDD 007).
3. Replace the HDD.
SC 873 HDD mail An error is detected in the • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
transfer error HDD at machine initialization. • Power failure during 2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-
an access to the HDD 008).
3. Replace the HDD.
SC 880 File format The file format converter does • Defective file format 4. Turn the main switch off on. CTL
converter error not respond. converter 5. Replace the file format converter.
SC 900 Electric counter Abnormal data is stored in the • Defective NVRAM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error counters. • Defective controller 2. Check the connection between the
NVRAM and controller.
3. Replace the NVRAM.
SC 901 Mechanical The mechanical counter is not • The counter is 1. Make sure that the counter is D
total counter connected. manually ejected. correctly installed.
error 1 NOTE: This error is detected • Loose connection 2. Replace the counter.
SC 902 Mechanical by the North America • Defective counter 3. Check that the DIP-switch setting is
total counter model only. • Incorrect DIP-switch correct ( 5.10).
error 2 setting
SC 920 Printer An error is detected in the • Defective software 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
application error printer application program. • Unexpected hardware
resource (e.g.,
memory shortage)
SC 921 Printer font A necessary font is not found • A necessary font is 1. Check that the SD card stores correct CTL
error in the SD card. not found in the SD data.
card.
• The SD card data is
corrupted.
B147/B149/B190 4-50 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 925 Net file function The management area or • Defective HDD • When SC 860-865 keep occurring: CTL
error management file on the HDD • Data inconsistency 1. Follow the troubleshooting
is corrupted. (e.g., caused by procedures.
power failure) • In other cases:
3. Initialize the net file partition.
4. Initialize the hard disk.
5. Replace the HDD.
SC 990 Software The software makes an • Defective software 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
performance unexpected operation. • Defective controller 2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine
error • Software error main firmware.
3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC
table.
SC 991 Software The software has attempted to • Software program This SC is not displayed on the LCD CTL
continuity error perform an unexpected error (logging only).
operation. However, unlike SC • Internal parameter
990, the object of the error is incorrect, insufficient
continuity of the software. working memory.
SC 992 Undefined error An undefined error has • Defective software CTL
occurred. program
SC 995 BCU error The DIP witch on the BCU is • The DIP switch on the 1. Set the DIP switch correctly. D
incorrectly set. BCU is incorrectly 2. Turn the main switch off and on.
set.
SC 997 Application • The application selected by • Software (including SC 998 1. Check the devices necessary for the CTL
function the operation panel key the software application program. If necessary
selection error does not start or ends configuration) devices have not been installed,
abnormally. defective install them.
• An option required by 2. Check that application programs are
the application (RAM, correctly configured.
DIMM, board) is not 3. Take necessary countermeasures
installed specific to the application program. If
the logs can be displayed on the
operation panel, see the logs.
SM 4-51 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 998 Application start No applications start within 60 • Loose connection of 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error seconds after the power is RAM-DIMM, ROM- 2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-
turned on. DIMM DIMM are properly connected.
• Defective controller 3. Reinstall the controller system
• Software problem firmware.
B147/B149/B190 4-52 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
SC 999 Program • The download (program, • Board installed 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
download error print data, language data) incorrectly 2. If you can download necessary
from the IC card does not • Engine board programs, do it by using an
execute normally. defective appropriate card.
• IC card defective 3. If you cannot download necessary
• Incorrect IC card programs, use the special card and
used (machine tool for downloading or replace the
type/model, card board having been used for the
version) unsuccessful downloading.
• NVRAM defective
• Loss of power during
downloading
NOTE 1: This error is
not logged because
the error occurs in the
download mode
(different from the
normal operation
mode).
NOTE 2: If the
machine loses power
while downloading, or
if the download does
not normally end for
some other reason,
this could damage the
controller board or the
target PCB of the
downloading and
prevent subsequent
downloading. If this
problem occurs, the
damaged PCB must
be replaced.
SM 4-53 B147/B149/B190
SC TABLE
NOTE 1: If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the problem may be caused by a software
error. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist.
• Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
• Summary sheet (SP mode ‘1 Service/Printer SP’, SP1-004 [Print Summary])
• SMC - All (SP5-990-002)
• SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
• Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
• All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.)
• Image file which causes the problem, if possible
B147/B149/B190 4-54 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY
Work-flow
The following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the considerable
image quality problems on this product.
Start
Verification of
problem reported
from users
Can the
Ask customer to
problem be No
duplicate it.
duplicated?
Yes
shooting
Trouble-
Troubleshoot using
Image Quality? No the service manual
or technical bulletin.
Yes
Make copy in the

enlargement or Copy Copy or Print?
reduction mode.
Print
Make a test pattern

in SP5-997.
No
Location of
the image problem
shifted?
Troubleshoot
Colour related? No depending on the
type of problem.
Possible Symptoms No problem on pattern

y Vertical white dotted lines * Font problem
Yes Check the transfer bias or paper * Image data missing
condition.
Yes y Vertical white lines on thick paper Especially, problems
Check the timing when the problem related to the above
occurs. symptoms and if no
y Dirty lines problem is found on the
Check the transfer belt cleaning section. test pattern, it may be
y Poor fusing / Fusing offset related to the application
Check the paper types selected in the used or driver. Collect a
printer driver. capture file for further
y Smeared image at trailing edge investigation (select
Check the fusing unit speed. 'Print to File' in the
y Crow marks driver).
Check the humidity condition and adjust
A B the transfer bias if necessary.
B146T901.WMF
SM 4-55 B147/B149/B190
(From previous page)
A B
Possible Symptoms
y Colour shift
Check the level of the Yes
Problem is related to
colour shift and follow All colour?
the scanner section.
the troubleshooting
guide if required.
Make a test print No

from SBU in SP4- Check Points
907 in each colour. y Connection of flat cable Yes
between the controller
and laser optic housing Colour missing
unit.
y Mirror position of related
Can the
colour located in the laser
problem be
optic housing unit.
duplicated? No
y Controller or BCU board
defective
No
Yes
Specify the colour
that caused the
Make a test print image problem.
Check the scanner section
from IPU in SP4-417
(exposure glass, mirrors,
by selecting related
scanner movement, etc.)
colour.
Check the image

processing area of
Can the Check the connection
the colour specified
problem be No between the SBU/IPU or
in the previous step
duplicated? replace the SBU.
Yes
Check connection
between the IPU/
Controller, or
replace the IPU.
Considerable Symptom
y Faint image (K)

Check the image transfer unit position lever.
y Cyan/Magenta jitter
Check if the registration roller speed is suitable for the type of paper used.
y Toner blasting
Check which colour is blasting and adjust the toner limit or transfer bias.
y Image density change
Check when the problem is reported and follow the necessary steps.
y Dirty Background
Check in which condition the problem is reported, and follow the required procedure.
y Colour vertical bands/lines/dirty background
Check the OPC drum and/or development unit.
y Colour shift
Check the level of the colour shift and follow the troubleshooting guide if required.
y Colour lines/bands/dirty background
When the PCU/development unit is close to its life end, the developer or the cleaning blade of the
PCU wears out, causing vertical colour lines, bands, or dirty background. Check the related colour
unit and replace it if necessary.
B146T902.WMF
B147/B149/B190 4-56 SM
4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY
The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the following image problems.
• Smeared image for 4C thin lines or White lines in solid image areas
• Dirty background
• Fireflies
• Crow marks
• Image density change
• Toner blasting
Subject Symptom Cause Action
Smeared image for 4C 4C thin lines become Spurs are located just before the fusing Clean the edges of the spurs and change the
thin lines or white lines smeared in the paper feed section to prevent paper from touching position of the spurs as shown below.
in solid image areas direction or white lines the fusing unit. When paper touches the
If 4C thin lines become smeared:
appear in solid image areas. spurs and the spurs do not rotate, the
spurs scratch the mage.
B146T903.WMF
If white lines appear in solid image areas:
B146T904.WMF
B147/B149/B190 4-57 SM

Dirty background Dirty background may When the developer has deteriorated or Perform forced toner refresh mode (SP3-921-1 or
continuously appear on the when prints are made in a very low 2).
left side (relative to paper humidity condition, dirty background may The machine automatically does this in the
feed) under very low appear continuously. following sequence. (It takes about 20 minutes to
temperature and humidity complete this mode.)
conditions.
1. Consumes toner in the development unit
without toner supply until toner end is detected.
2. Starts toner recovery mode.
3. Starts process control self-check.
NOTE: It takes about 20 minutes to complete this
mode, to prevent carrier flowing out.
Dirty background may While making prints with a low image Change the settings of the following SP modes:
intermittently appear with area ratio, the toner-carrier attraction
SP3-906-1 Job End Process Control Self-check
originals that have a high tends to increase. Then, when a large
200 (Default) to 100
image area ratio after making amount of toner is supplied under this
multiple prints of originals condition, the supplied toner cannot be SP3-920-3 OPC Refresh – Prints
with a low image area ratio. properly charged, causing toner to flow 200 (Default) to 100
out from the development unit.
SP3-920-6 Toner Refresh Mode
Fireflies Fireflies may appear with While making prints with a low image 0 (Default: Disable) to 1 (Enable)
originals that have a high area ratio, developer is agitated with less
During the above mode, toner refresh will
image area ratio after making toner supplied. This may cause some
automatically be done after job end process
multiple prints of originals toner to coagulate and harden. Then,
control self-check, and will consume the
with a low image area ratio. when switching over to originals with a
coagulated or overcharged toner.
high image area ratio, this toner may
cause fireflies. SP3-125-3 Auto TD Adjust
Default 0 (Disable) to 1 (Initial process control)
Making prints with a low image area ratio causes
the toner-carrier attraction to increase, resulting in
low image density. Activating the Auto TD
Adjustment corrects toner density within the target
range; however, it takes up to 6 minutes to
complete the self-check and Auto TD Adjustment.
SM 4-58 B147/B149/B190

Crow marks When making duplex prints in A charge is applied to the paper at each Using SP2-301 (Transfer Current), increase the
low temperature and humidity color station in order to attract each paper transfer current for black in the mode in
conditions, crow marks may toner onto the paper. Therefore, the which the problem occurs.
appear on black images, initial toner colors will receive multiple
especially in halftone areas charging as they pass each station,
on the 2nd side. which increases the attractive force NOTE: White dotted lines may appear on outputs
between the toner and paper. Since if the transfer current is increased too
black is the last toner to be applied, the much. Therefore, after adjusting the
attractive force between it and the paper transfer current, it is necessary to check
is lowest. Black toner moves on the the results by making a solid or halftone
paper during transport to the fusing image in duplex mode.
section, due to discharge from the toner
to the surrounding guide plates.
Image density change When the machine is tuned When the machine is off, the If this is often pointed out by users who are very
(1) on in the morning (having environmental conditions can begin to particular about image density, turn on Auto TD
been unused for a while), the affect the machine’s development Adjustment (SP3-125-3) as a solution.
ID of the initial outputs may capability. When the main switch is
NOTE: It takes about 5 minutes to complete the
be relatively low or high, in tuned on, the machine starts a process
self-check.
which case the machine control self-check and adjusts the
needs to compensate by development parameters to achieve the
raising or lowering the ID proper development potential gap
during machine operation. without adjusting the toner
concentration. Over the course of the
print operation, the ID will then get closer
and closer to the target level.
B147/B149/B190 4-59 SM

Image density change Image density is too low or If the machine has never been turned off Change the settings of the following SP modes:
(2) high. and Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) is
SP3-906-3 Non-use Time 1
disabled, the machine has never
0 (Default) to 500
performed the initial process control self-
check, causing the image density to SP3-906-4 Non-use Time 2
become low or high. 30 (Default) to 480
• If Energy Saver 1 is activated (Default: Off), the
non-use time process control self-check will not
function. Therefore, make sure that Energy
Saver 1 is Off (SP5-101-3 or UP mode).
• With the above setting, the self-check
automatically starts after 500 prints and after no
prints have been made for 480 minutes (8
hours). Based on the average daily printing
volume of 500 prints, self-check would be
performed first thing every morning. These
settings are suitable for machines, which are
used during the day and then kept On in Ready
status throughout the night. Therefore, this SP
mode should be set based on the particular way
the customer uses the printer.
Toner blasting Toner may blast, causing An excessive amount of toner is used for Change the toner limit setting in SP mode.
smeared text characters development. • If toner blasted images appear for text or lines
and/or lines in 2C or process in 2C, decrease the setting for Text from 190%
black mode (depending on to 150 - 170%.
the PDL setting or type of • If toner blasted images for text and lines
paper used.) recognized as pure image data (i.e. not
processed as text/line data), decrease the
setting for Photo from 260% to 170 - 190%.
NOTE: If the toner limit is lowered too much, it
may cause the density of shadow areas to
be not smooth.
SM 4-60 B147/B149/B190
Detailed Explanation
The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the considerable image problems.

Symptoms not related to color
Vertical white dotted If the paper transfer bias is In the low humidity condition, the • Check if the optional heater has been installed
lines excessive for the paper type electrical resistance of paper tends to in the paper tray and it is activated.
used in the low humidity increase. Excessive paper transfer bias
condition, vertical white may cause electrical leak, causing • Customize (decrease) the paper transfer
dotted lines may appear. vertical white lines. current for the related mode (SP2-301).
Vertical white lines In high temperature and In this condition, the drum sensitivity The drum sensitivity recovers, and this symptom
humidity conditions, vertical tends to drop. Since the image transfer disappears after waiting for about 5 minutes after
white lines may appear in efficiency differs between plain and thick this symptom has been observed.
halftone areas on thick paper paper, sensitivity drop may cause
after multiple prints of the changes in image transfer efficiency on
same image. thick paper, causing vertical white lines.
Dirty lines/bands or The cleaning blade of the transfer belt Check and replace the transfer belt-cleaning unit.
background on 2nd cleaning may be worn away or damaged
side when the transfer belt cleaning unit
becomes close to its life (500KP).
Poor fusing / Fusing The type of paper selected in the printer Please instruct users to select the correct paper
offset driver does not match the paper type type in the printer driver.
used for printing, causing the fusing
temperature not to be controlled for the
paper used.
Smeared image When making prints of an The paper’s trailing edge tends to flip up Please instruct users to select 1800x600 or
original with a solid image and come very close to the fusing belt 1200x1200dpi.
near the trailing, a smeared after it passes the paper transfer unit.
image may appear. The static electricity built up on the
fusing belt may cause toner to move,
resulting in the smeared image.
This is most noticeable with 600x600dpi
printing.
B147/B149/B190 4-61 SM

Crow marks When making duplex prints in A charge is applied to the paper at each Using SP2-301 (Transfer Current), increase the
low temperature and humidity color station in order to attract each paper transfer current for black in the mode in
conditions, crow marks may toner onto the paper. Therefore, the which the problem occurs.
appear on black images, initial toner colors will receive multiple
especially in halftone areas charging as they pass each station,
on the 2nd side. which increases the attractive force NOTE: White dotted lines may appear on outputs
between the toner and paper. Since if the transfer current is increased too much.
black is the last toner to be applied, the Therefore, after adjusting the transfer current, it is
attractive force between it and the paper necessary to check the results by making a solid
is lowest. Black toner moves on the or halftone image in duplex mode.
paper during transport to the fusing
section, due to discharge from the toner
to the surrounding guide plates.
Symptoms related to color
Faint image (black) Only black becomes lighter. The transfer belt position is not in the Check the transfer belt unit position and/or the
correct position. transfer belt unit release lever.
Magenta and/or cyan Magenta jitter may appear at If the registration roller speed is too fast Adjust the registration roller speed depending on
jitter 67 mm and/or cyan jitter at for the paper types used, the shock the paper types and/or mode selected.
165 mm from the trailing when the trailing edge has just passed
SP1-004-4: Normal paper (1200 dpi)
edge. the registration roller generates
SP1-004-5: Normal paper (600 dpi)
vibration, causing the jitter.
SP1-005-3: Thick paper (1200 dpi)
This may appear especially when using
If SP1-005-3 cannot improve the level even when
thick paper because of its stiffness.
setting it to “-1.0”, follow the procedure below.
1. Set SP1-005-3 to “-1.0”.
2. Print the samples by adjusting SP1-004-4 from
100% (-0.2% to -0.8%).
After adjusting SP1-004-4, check the image
quality also with normal paper in the 1200 dpi
mode. Readjust it so that the image quality
level is acceptable for both thick and normal
paper if necessary.
SM 4-62 B147/B149/B190

Toner blasting (1) Toner may blast, causing An excessive amount of toner is used for Change the toner limit setting in SP mode.
smeared text characters development. • If toner blasted images appear for text or lines
and/or lines in 2C or process in 2C, decrease the setting for Text from 190%
black mode (depending on to 150 - 170%.
the PDL setting or type of • If toner blasted images for text and lines
paper used.) recognized as pure image data (i.e. not
processed as text/line data), decrease the
setting for Photo from 260% to 170 - 190%.
may cause the density of shadow areas to be not
smooth.
Toner blasting (2) Black toner may blast on the Black toner moves on the paper during Increase the paper transfer current in SP data
2nd side of paper under the transport to the fusing section, due to from the default setting to a recommended value
low temperature. discharge from the toner to the depending on the mode selected as shown below.
surrounding guide plates.
SP2-301-3 ([K] 125mm/sec): “16” to “21”
SP2-301-4 ([K] 180mm/sec): “27” to “32”
SP2-301-16 ([FC, K] 125mm/sec): “9” to “13”
SP2-301-17 ([FC, K]180mm/sec): “15” to “20”
may cause the density of shadow areas to be not
smooth.
Image density change When the machine is tuned When the machine is off, the If this is often pointed out by users who are very
(1) on in the morning (having environmental conditions can begin to particular about image density, turn on Auto TD
been unused for a while), the affect the machine’s development Adjustment (SP3-125-003) as a solution.
ID of the initial outputs may capability. When the main switch is
NOTE: It takes about 5 minutes to complete the
be relatively low or high, in tuned on, the machine starts a process
self-check.
which case the machine control self-check and adjusts the
needs to compensate by development parameters to achieve the
raising or lowering the ID proper development potential gap
during machine operation. without adjusting the toner
concentration. Over the course of the
print operation, the ID will then get closer
and closer to the target level.
B147/B149/B190 4-63 SM

Image density change Image density is too low or If the machine has never been turned off Change the settings of the following SP modes:
(2) high. and Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) is
SP3-906-003 Non-use Time 1
disabled, the machine has never
0 (Default) to 500
performed the initial process control self-
check, causing the image density to SP3-906-004 Non-use Time 2
become low or high. 30 (Default) to 480
• If Energy Saver 1 is activated (Default: Off), the
non-use time process control self-check will not
function. Therefore, make sure that Energy
Saver 1 is Off (SP5-101-3 or UP mode).
• With the above setting, the self-check
automatically starts after 500 prints and after no
prints have been made for 480 minutes (8
hours). Based on the average daily printing
volume of 500 prints, self-check would be
performed first thing every morning. These
settings are suitable for machines, which are
used during the day and then kept On in Ready
status throughout the night. Therefore, this SP
mode should be set based on the particular way
the customer uses the printer.
Dirty background Dirty background may When the developer has deteriorated or Perform forced toner refresh mode (SP3-921-001
continuously appear on the when prints are made in a very low or 002).
left side (relative to paper humidity condition, dirty background may The machine automatically does this in the
feed) under very low appear continuously. following sequence. (It takes about 20 minutes to
temperature and humidity complete this mode.)
conditions.
4. Consumes toner in the development unit
without toner supply until toner end is detected.
NOTE: It takes about 20 minutes to complete this
mode, to prevent carrier flowing out.
SM 4-64 B147/B149/B190

Color Shift Color shift level is out of the The adjustment standard on this product Check the level of the color shifts reported from
adjustment standard. is “maximum 150 µm”. user and follow the troubleshooting procedure
The color shift level may change described in section 4- if necessary.
depending on a type of paper used.
Color missing Color(s) is missing on the • The position of 3rd mirror moves due • When replacing the laser optic housing unit
outputs. to the rough transportation of service due to any reason, make a color demo page in
part; and then, becomes out of the UP mode. If color(s) is missing, open the
position. unit and reposition the mirror(s).
• Flat cable(s) is not properly • Reconnect the flat cable(s) firmly.
connected to the BCU board.
B147/B149/B190 4-65 SM
Copy Image processing

Symptom Mode Cause Action
Black image is weaker ACS The ACS Mode use K toner and CMY toner to Specify "Black & White" in the following menu:
when the ACS is on. create black images. CMY toner makes black > Copier/Document Server Features > Adjust
images weaker. Color Image > ACS Priority
Black ballpoint pen FC This symptom is caused by the characteristic of Specify "Darker" level in the following menu:
images are colored. ballpoint pen ink. > Copy Quality > Adjust UCR > Darker
Generation copy makes FC Generation copy is executed in the text mode. Select "Photo" as the original type.
less colorful images. Photo images become less colorful.
Maps are incorrectly FC The Map Mode uses CMYK toner to create black • Specify "Darker" level in the following menu:
colored. letters. Sometimes black images are somewhat > Copy Quality > Adjust UCR > Darker
colored. • Raise the "Sharp" level in the following menu:
> Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Sharp
The ACS does not ACS Darker images are sometimes incorrectly taken Specify "Full Color" in the following menu:
correctly distinguish as black & white images. > Copier/Document Server Features > Adjust
between color and black & Color Image > ACS Priority
white images.
Color images are FC, When the following originals are used, color Raise the "Photo" level in the following menu:
enclosed by black lines. Text/Photo images are sometimes incorrectly taken as black > Copy Quality > Text/Photo Sensitivity > Photo
Black letters are enclosed letters, or black letters are incorrectly enclosed
by while lines. by white lines:
• Outputs from a printer (laser or ink-jet)
• Copied images
Black letters and black FC, Black letters and lines are colored when the Raise the "Text" level in the following menu:
lines are colored. Text/Photo background of the original is not clear. > Copy Quality > Text/Photo Sensitivity
NOTE: If you raise the "Text" level too much, some
weaker images are enclosed by black lines.
Mono color images are B&W, This symptom is based on the copier Raise the "Soft" level in the following menu:
not sharp enough. Text/Photo, characteristics. > Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Soft
ACS
SM 4-66 B147/B149/B190
Symptom Mode Cause Action

Letters are not clear when B&W, This symptom is based on the copier • Raise the "Sharp" level in the following menu:
the background is shaded. Text/Photo, characteristics. > Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Sharp
ACS • Specify the full-color mode when using color originals.
• Specify the text mode when using black-and-white
originals.
Letters are not clear when B&W, This symptom is based on the copier • Raise the "Sharp" level in the following menu:
the background is slightly Text/Photo, characteristics. This symptom tends to occur > Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Sharp
shaded. ACS when the background is shaded with a rough dot • Specify the full-color mode when using color originals.
pattern. • Specify the text mode when using black-and-white
originals.
B147/B149/B190 4-67 SM
4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT

The following briefly explain the factors causing color shifts and what to do on the machine to correct it:
• Temperature change causes the optical components in the laser
optics housing unit to contract, causing the main scan The black development motor drives the
magnification to change. To correct the line position, the machine fusing unit pressure roller. The motor
automatically does the line position adjustment when the speed is adjustable in the SP mode.
temperature changes by 5°C since the last position adjustment.
If the line position adjustment functions properly, no color shift
occurs. If the line position adjustment fails (result: SP5-993-007),
color lines may shift anywhere on the outputs.
• The process speed at each stage (registration roller, transfer belt,
and fusing belt/roller) affects the paper transport speed. If the
paper transport speed changes during image transfer of a color,
the color line being transferred shifts with respect to the color line
already transferred to the paper. The registration roller speed The transfer motor drives the
(adjusted by color development motor speed) and fusing transfer belt. The motor speed
belt/roller speed (adjusted by black development motor speed) is not adjustable.
are adjusted by the manufacturer.
Paper speed may slightly change due to the type of paper used or
after replacing the parts related to the drive sections of the
registration section, transport unit, and fusing unit. (After replacing The color development motor drives
the fusing unit, the speed adjustment should be done in the User the registration rollers. The motor
Program mode.) Also, the position where color shift occurs speed is adjustable in SP mode.
depends on which section starts moving at the incorrect speed. B146T905.WMF
• Paper skew directly affects the color shift between the front and
rear sides. There are several factors. One of them is the position
of the side fences.
SM 4-68 B147/B149/B190
As explained on the previous page, there are several types of color shift problem. The following table shows the symptoms,
factors, action required, and the page to see for details.
Symptom Factors Action Required Refer to #

1 Color shift on entire image in • Line position adjustment does not • Check the result of the line position Page 4-4
main-scan and/or sub-scan function properly. adjustment (SP5-993-007) and solve the
directions • Transfer belt unit has just been problem if an error was detected. Main-scan
replaced. • Check which color lines are shifted from Page 4-56/57
black line and adjust the SP modes for Sub-scan
registration and magnification. Page 4-54/55
Transfer Unit
Page 4-60
2 Color shifts only at the Registration roller speed is not Adjust the color development motor speed Page 4-54
leading edge area appropriate. (SP1-004-4, 5, and SP1-005-003) depending
(sometimes causing shock on the process speed.
jitter, magenta or cyan lines)
3 Color shifts only at the trailing Fusing belt/roller speed is not Adjust the black development motor speed Page 4-54
edge area appropriate. (SP1-004-001, 002, and 007, or “Fuser
Adjust” in the User Program mode) depending
on the process speed.
4 Color shifts between the front Paper skew on transfer belt Reposition the side fences. Page 4-57
and rear sides • Side fences are not properly set. Reposition the paper attraction roller unit.
• Pressure between the paper
attraction roller and transfer belt is
not even at the front and rear
sides.
B147/B149/B190 4-69 SM
Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 µm The flowchart illustrates the procedure to adjust line positions.
NOTE: The allowance of color shift is 150µm. Keep the color shift in the range of 0 to
Start 150µm.
Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).
Set the factory settings in the following SPs:

SP2-103-055 (M: [K] 64.3 MHz) is ... 250 or higher SP2-909-001, 002, and 003
SP2-103-055, 056, 057, and 058
Less than 250
Print out a pattern with the following settings:

SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-997-004 "Full Color"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
Set the factory settings in the following SPs:

SP2-909-001, 002, and 003
How much do the lines shift? 2 mm or more
SP2-916-008, 009, and 010
SP2-103-056, 057, and 058
Less than 2 mm
Execute the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002).
Are the Replace or clean the

Has the SP ended normally? No transfer belt and ID sensors No transfer belt and/or the
clean? ID sensors.
Yes
Yes
Print out a pattern with the following settings:

Execute the forced toner-density
SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
adjustment with the following SP:
SP5-997-004 "Full Color"
SP3-126-002
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
Do the lines shift? No
Yes
A End
B146T906.WMF
SM 4-70 B147/B149/B190
When you have come to

Main-scan direction How the lines shift? this step, the lines shift
0.2 mm or less.
Sub-scan direction
Yes Are the black Which part

No Whole part
lines and color lines parallel? of the lines shift?
Leading or trailing edge

Yes Check the transfer-belt speed with Adjust the sub-scan
the following SPs: registration with the
Adjust the main-scan registration with the Adjust the magnification SP5-993-031 following SPs:
following SPs: with the following SPs: SP5-993-033 SP5-993-016
SP5-993-010 SP5-993-013 SP5-993-017
SP5-993-011 SP5-993-014 Leading or trailing edge SP5-993-018
SP5-993-012 SP5-993-015 Disable the transfer-belt feedback SP5-993-019
feature with the following SP: SP5-993-020
SP5-995-020 SP5-993-021
Execute the line position adjustment with the Which

following SP: Leading edges edges of the color lines has Yes
SP5-993-002 shifted? Execute the line position
Adjust the development- adjustment with the
motor speed with the Trailing edges following SP:
following SPs: SP5-993-002
Adjust the development-motor speed
Print out a pattern with the following settings: SP1-004-005
with the following SPs:
SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)" SP1-004-004
SP1-004-002
SP5-997-004 "Full Color" SP1-005-003
SP1-004-001
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600" SP1-007-001
SP1-004-007
Print out a pattern with the

Enable the transfer-belt feedback following settings:
Do the lines shift? No feature with the following SP: SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-995-020 SP5-997-004 "Full Color"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
and "1200 x 1200"
No Do the lines shift?
End
B146T907.WMF
B147/B149/B190 4-71 SM
Action Required
Direction Area Symptom Possible Cause Procedure / Remarks
Output Mode SP Mode
Sub-scan Leading Color shift, Registration roller Normal Paper SP1-004- Check the magenta line position against the black line.
edge especially 100 mm speed is not 004 If the registration roller is too fast or slow, the magenta
1200 dpi
from the leading suitable for the line appears above or below the black line.
edge. paper used. Normal Paper SP1-004- Above: Speed is too fast: Decrease speed
005
600 dpi
Below: Speed is too slow: Increase Speed
(Refer to pattern 1 Thick Paper SP1-005- When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.05
on page 4-57 for the 003
1200 dpi steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern.
symptom.)
Then, repeat this until the shift between magenta and
(by-pass feed) black is minimized.
NOTE: If the registration roller is too fast, magenta jitter
may appear at 67 mm and/or cyan jitter at 165 mm from
the trailing edge. This is caused by the mechanical
shock when the trailing edge of the paper passes the
registration rollers.
Trailing Color shift, Fusing roller Normal Paper SP1-004- Check the magenta line position against the black line.
edge especially 100 mm speed is not 001 If the fusing roller is too fast or slow, the magenta line
1200 dpi
from the trailing suitable for the appears above or below the black line.
edge. paper used. Normal Paper SP1-004-
Above: Speed is too fast: Decrease speed
002
600 dpi Below: Speed is too slow: Increase Speed
(Refer to pattern 2 Thick Paper SP1-004- When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.1
on page 4-57 for the 007
1200 dpi steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern.
symptom.)
Then, repeat this step until the shift between magenta
(by-pass feed) and black is minimized.
SM 4-72 B147/B149/B190
Action Required
Output Mode SP Mode
Sub-scan Entire Color shift on the SP mode setting Normal Paper SP5-993- Measure the gap between the black line and other
image entire image, and is not suitable for 016 (Y) colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
600 dpi
the amount of shift the paper used. Convert the measured value from [µm] to [dots] with the
SP5-993-
from leading to following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
017 (M)
trailing edge is dot value in the SP mode.
almost the same. SP5-993-
018 (C) Correction [dots] = Measured value [µm] / 21.2 or 42.4
600 dpi mode: 1 dot = 42.4 µm
Normal Paper SP5-993- 1200 dpi mode: 1 dot = 21.2 µm
019 (Y)
1200 dpi If color (YMC) has shifted up in relation to black, add the
SP5-993- above value to the current value.
020 (M)
If color (YMC) has shifted down in relation to black,
SP5-993- subtract the above value from the current value.
021 (C)
Examples
• If the magenta line has shifted up in relation to black
by 40µm in 600dpi mode, add 1 to the current setting
of SP5-993-017.
Correction [dots] = +(40/42.4) = Approx. +1
• If the magenta line has shifted down in relation to
black by 70µm in 600dpi mode, subtract 2 from the
current setting of SP5-993-17.
Correction [dots] = -(70/42.4) = Approx. –2
B147/B149/B190 4-73 SM
Action Required
Output Mode SP Mode
Main-scan Entire Color shifts on the Main-scan - SP5-993- Measure the gap between the black line and other
image entire image, and magnification is 013 (Y) colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
the amount of shift not correctly Convert the measured value [mm] to [%] with the
SP5-993-
differs at front, adjusted. following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
014 (M)
center, and rear. value in the SP mode
SP5-993-
Correction [%] = Measured value [mm] / 287 x 10000
015 (C)
(Refer to pattern 3 If the color line is enlarged in relation to black, add the
on page 4-45 for the correction value to the current setting.
symptom.)
If the color line is reduced in relation to black, subtract
the correction value from the current setting.
NOTE: Line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or ‘Auto
Adjust’ in User Program mode) should be done to check
the result after changing the main-scan magnification
data. This is because the changes will affect the line
position adjustment.
Examples
• If the magenta line is enlarged by 0.1mm in relation to
the black line, add “4” to the current setting of SP5-
993-014.
Correction [%] = (0.1/287) x 10000 = Approx. +4
• If the magenta line is reduced by 0.05 mm in relation
to the black line, subtract “2” from the current setting
of SP5-993-014.
Correction [%] = -(0.05/287) x 10000 = Approx. -2
SM 4-74 B147/B149/B190
Action Required
Output Mode SP Mode
Main-scan Entire Color shifts on the Main-scan - SP5-993- Measure the gap between the black line and other
image entire image and registration is not 010 (Y) colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
amount of shifts is correctly Convert the measured value [µm] to [dots] with the
SP5-993-
almost the same at adjusted. following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
011 (M)
front, center, and dot value in the SP mode.
rear sides. SP5-993-
012 (C) Correction [dots] = Measured value [µm] / 21.2
If color (YMC) has shifted to the left in relation to black,
(Refer to pattern 4 add the above value to the current setting.
on page 4-45 for the
symptom.) If color (YMC) has shifted to the right in relation to black,
subtract the above value from the current setting.
Examples
• If the magenta line has shifted to the left by 40µm,
add 4 to the current setting of SP5-993-011
Correction [dots] = +(40/21.2) = Approx. +2
• If the magenta line has shifted to the right by 70µm,
subtract 3 from the current setting of SP5-993-011.
Correction [dots] = -(70/21.2) = Approx. -3
Front or The amount of color • Side fence - - • Check if the side fences of the paper trays are
rear shift at the front and position properly positioned. If there is clearance between the
rear sides becomes • Transfer belt paper and the side fences, this causes paper to skew
gradually bigger position during paper transport.
toward the trailing • Check if the transfer belt is in correct position, if the
edge. tension springs are properly set, or if the paper
attraction roller is properly installed..
( 3.7.4 Transfer Belt)
B147/B149/B190 4-75 SM
How to measure the gap between color A A
lines
Use a magnification scope to measure the
gap [A] between two lines. Measure the
distance between the same sides of two lines.
For example (see the illustration), measure
between the left edges of the lines.
Magnification Black
scope line Color B146T908.WMF
Pattern 1 line
Color shift in the sub-scan direction at the

leading edge
This illustration shows that the colored
(dotted) line is above the black line. This
means that the registration roller speed is too
high for the paper used. Therefore, the
registration roller speed needs to be reduced
by decreasing the setting (percentage) of
SP1-004-004, 005, and SP1-005-003
depending on the mode selected.
• SP1-004-004 Normal paper,
Color mode, 1200 dpi (62.5 mm/s)
• SP1-004-005 Normal Paper,
Color mode, 600 dpi (125 mm/s) B146T909.WMF
• SP1-005-003 Thick Paper (62.5 mm/s)
Pattern 2
Color shift in the sub-scan direction at the
trailing edge
This illustration shows that the colored
(dotted) line is above the black line. This
means that the fusing roller speed is too high
for the paper used. Therefore, the fusing
roller speed needs to be slower by
decreasing the setting (percentage) of SP1-
004-001, 002, or 007 depending on the
mode selected.
• SP1-004-001 Normal paper, B146T913.WMF
Color mode, 1200 dpi (62.5 mm/s)
• SP1-004-002 Normal Paper,
Color mode, 600 dpi (125 mm/s)
• SP1-004-007 Thick Paper (62.5 mm/s)
B147/B149/B190 4-76 SM
Pattern 3
Color shift (magnification change) in the main-scan direction
Fig. 1 and 2 show that the colored (dotted) line has shifted away from the black line
and the amount of shift differs at the front, center, and rear. Both Fig. 1 and Fig. 2
show the color grid is larger than the black grid. Yellow becomes larger from left to
right in Fig. 1, but cyan and magenta become larger from right to left. This is
because the laser writing direction for B&Y is different from C&M.
shooting
Trouble-
B146T910.WMF
B146T911.WMF
Fig. 1 (Yellow) Fig. 2 (Cyan & Magenta)
Pattern 4
Color shift (registration) in the main-
scan direction
Colored line shifts in the main-scan

direction and the amount of shift is the
same at left, center, and right.
This is caused by incorrect color
registration.
B146T912.WMF
SM 4-77 B147/B149/B190
4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT

If the color shift level is not within the target range (max 150µm) after replacing the
transfer unit and performing the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or
Auto Color Registration), follow the procedure explained below.
Check the color shift level

1. Make sure that OPC Refresh (SP3-920-005) has been done.
2. Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).
3. Print a 1-dot grid pattern using A3/11" x 17" paper. Refer to the following table
for detailed SP mode settings.
SP5-997 (Test Pattern) Setting
Mode Tray Paper size
Pattern Color mode Resolution
selection (By-pass)
Normal, color, 600 dpi 2 05 Full Color 600x600 —
Normal, color, 1200 dpi 2 05 Full Color 1200x1200 —
NOTE: Each adjustment needs to be done by using the paper type which the
customer normally uses.
4. Check the tendency of color shift in the grid pattern printed in step 3.
Sometimes, a magnification scope must be used to measure the amount of
color shift between colors.
5. If the result is not within the target, go to the next step.
Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment

SP mode (sub-scan registration) reset
1. Make sure that the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002) have been printed out.
2. Reset the setting of SP5-993-016 to 021 to "0."
Transfer belt aging
1. Remove all PCUs. Place them on clean sheets of paper and cover the drums
with a few sheets of paper to prevent the drums from light fatigue. Then, secure
the drum positioning plate (2 screws) and return the transfer unit release lever
to the original position.
2. Perform the transfer belt idling with SP5-804-074 (Drum M H CW) for about 3
minutes. (This is to stabilize the transfer belt side-to-side movement.)
3. Reinstall the PCUs.
4. Perform the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or ‘Auto Adjust’ in User
Program mode).
5. Print a 1-dot grid pattern using A3/11" x 17" paper in 600 dpi mode.
6. If the color shift in the main-scan direction is not within the adjustment standard,
follow the troubleshooting guide.
B147/B149/B190 4-78 SM
Fusing roller speed adjustment

Program mode).
2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes using A3/11" x 17"
paper.
(1) Normal, 600 dpi

(2) Normal, 1200 dpi
(3) Thick, 1200 dpi
3. If the color has shifted within 100 mm from the trailing edge, follow the
troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Trailing edge).
Registration roller speed adjustment (for color mode)

Program mode).
2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes using A3/11" x 17"
paper.
shooting
Trouble-
(1) Normal, 600 dpi
(2) Normal, 1200 dpi
3. If the color has shifted within 100 mm from the leading edge, follow the
troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Leading edge).
NOTE: The registration roller speed for by-pass paper feed is the same as for
normal 1200 dpi mode.
Line position fine adjustment for sub-scan

1. Print a 1-dot grid pattern each for each of the following modes using A3/11" x
17" paper.
Mode Tray Color Paper size
Pattern Resolution
selection mode (By-pass)
Normal, color, 600 dpi 2 05 Full Color 600x600 -
Normal, color, 1200 dpi 2 05 Full Color 1200x1200 -
Thick paper 0 05 Full Color 1200x1200 A3 / 11x17
2. Check if there is any color which has shifted from the black line by the same
amount all the way down the page from leading to trailing edge. If there is,
follow the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Whole image).
SM 4-79 B147/B149/B190
Registration roller speed adjustment (For B&W mode)

1. Input the following values in the SP modes.
SP1-004-006 = (Value of SP1-004-005)

SP1-005-002 = (Value of SP1-004-005) – 0.2%
2. Print a 2-dot pattern (pattern 12) using A3/11" x 17" paper.

Mode Tray Single
Pattern Color Mode Resolution
selection Color
Normal color 600 dpi 2 12 6 (Black) Single Color 600x600
3. Depending on the paper used, a horizontal band may appear at 60 mm (2.76")

from the leading edge on A3 (11" x 17") paper. If the horizontal band is
observed on the 2-dot pattern, decrease the setting of SP1-004-006 in 0.05%
steps until the problem is solved.
B147/B149/B190 4-80 SM
4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT

Black Over Print prevents unexpected white lines from appearing when black
letters or lines are printed with color background. You can enable or disable this
feature from the printer driver (default: disabled).
When it is enabled, Black Over Print has the following unpleasant side effects:
• Crispness may deteriorate because the black toner spreads out.
• More toner is consumed.
• The background color may be seen through black letters or lines.
Black Over Print Disabled [D]
Black lines and color background are [A]

printed as follows: Y Y [B]
1. The color toner (for example, 1 M M
[C]
magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)
is transferred on the paper [C].
Some space [D] is left blank for Y Y
the black toner. 1 M K M
shooting
Trouble-
2. The black toner [E] is transferred
in the blank space. [E]
If the line position of the black toner Y Y

is not correct, an unexpected white
line [F] appears.
1 M K M
B146T920.WMF
[F]
Black Over Print Enabled
Black lines and color background are [A]
printed as follows:
Y Y Y [B]
1. The color toner (for example, M M M
[C]
magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)
is transferred on the paper [C]. [D]
K
2. The black toner [D] is transferred Y Y Y
on the color toner. 1 M M M
K
Even if the line position of the black Y Y Y
toner is not correct, an unexpected
white line does not appear.
1 M M M
B146T921.WMF
SM 4-81 B147/B149/B190
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.7.1 SENSORS
Component CN Condition Symptom
Scanner Home Open SC121
632-A2
Position Shorted SC120
APS and ARE do not function
Open
Platen Cover 648-2 properly.
Shorted No symptom
CPU cannot detect the original size
Open properly. APS and ARE do not
Original Width 632-A
function correctly.
Shorted
Original Length-1 632-B
function correctly.
Shorted
Original Length-2 632-B
function correctly.
Shorted
Open SC261
LD H.P. sensor 220-B12
Shorted SC260
K: 210-A3 Open SC370/371/372/373
C: 210-B9 SC370/371/372/373 or
TD sensor
M: 209-A19 Shorted SC374/375/376/377
Y: 210-A9
Transfer belt Open SC471
210-A12
sensor Shorted
Rear: 228-3 Open SC385
ID sensor Center: 228-4, 7
Shorted
Front: 228-8
The Paper End indicator lights even
Open
Tray1: 205-A5 if paper is placed in the paper tray.
Paper end sensor Tray2: 205-B9 The Paper End indicator does not
By-pass: 209-A15 Shorted light even if there is no paper in the
paper tray.
The bottom plate of the paper feed
Tray1: 205-A2 Open
Paper lift sensor unit is not lifted up.
Tray2: 205-B6
Shorted SC501/502
Paper Jam is detected whenever a
Open
print is made.
Relay sensor 205-A8
Paper Jam is detected even if there
Shorted
is no paper.
Open
print is made.
Vertical transport Paper Jam is detected even if there
208-B11
sensor is no paper.
Shorted
B147/B149/B190 4-82 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
Component CN Condition Symptom

Open
Registration print is made.
209-B2
sensor Paper Jam is detected even if there
Shorted
is no paper.
Open
print is made.
Fusing exit sensor 212-A7
Shorted
is no paper.
Open
print is made.
Paper exit sensor 212-B4
Shorted
is no paper.
The paper overflow message is not
displayed even when a paper
Open
Paper overflow overflow condition exists, causing
212-A2
sensor paper jam.
The paper overflow message is
Shorted
displayed.
Toner near end may not be
K: 209-A2 Open detected even when the toner near
Y: 206-A7 end condition is satisfied.
Toner end sensor
shooting
Trouble-
C: 206-A4 Toner near end may be detected
M: 206-A1 Shorted even when the toner near end
condition is not satisfied.
Drum gear K: 213-13 Open SC440
position sensor CMY: 210-B12 Shorted
Waste oil near full message is
Open
displayed.
Waste oil sensor 212-A13 Waste oil near full message is not
displayed even when a waste oil
Shorted
near full condition exists, causing a
waste oil leak.
The message “Reset waste oil
Open bottle correctly” is displayed even
Waste oil bottle when it is set correctly.
212-A16
set sensor The message “Reset waste oil
Shorted bottle correctly” is not displayed
even when it is not set correctly.
Waste toner near full message is
Open displayed, even when a waste toner
near full condition does not exist.
Waste toner
213-A4 Waste toner near full message is
sensor
not displayed even when a waste
Shorted
toner near full condition exists,
causing waste toner leak.
NOTE: The CN numbers are the connector numbers on the BCU.
SM 4-83 B147/B149/B190
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Rating Symptom when turning on the
Fuse
115 V 220 - 240 V main switch
Power Supply Unit
FU1 15A/125V — No response (No power is supplied
CB1 — 8A/250V to the electrical components.)
No response (No DC power is
FU2 10A/125V 5 A/250V supplied to the electrical
components.)
Only 24V DC power is not supplied.
FU91 10A/125V 10A/125V The  LED lights. But you see no
other response.
High Voltage Power Supply Board–Transfer
SC285 (The electricity to the
following components is cut off: the
IP101 1.5A/50V
transfer roller, paper attraction roller,
and transfer exit roller.)
4.9 LEDS (BCU)

Status
LED
Blinking Stays OFF or ON
LED 3 (Red) The Main CPU functions The Main CPU does not function
correctly. properly.
The MUSIC CPU functions The MUSIC CPU does not function
LED 2 (Green)
correctly. properly.
LED 1 (Yellow) The DSP functions correctly. The DSP does not function properly.
B147/B149/B190 4-84 SM
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
CAUTION
Before starting the SP mode, check that the data-in LED () is not on. This LED
indicates that some data is coming to the copier. When the LED is on, wait for
the copier to process the data.
5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only, so
that they can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by
anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be
deleted or settings might be changed. In this case, product quality cannot
be guaranteed any more.
Entering SP Mode
 1. Press the Clear Mode key.
 2. Use the keypad to enter “107”.
 3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
4. Enter the Service Mode.
Exiting SP Mode
Service
Tables
Exit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
SM 5-1 B147/B149/B190
5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES

Copy SP ...........SP modes related to the engine functions
Printer SP .........SP modes related to the controller functions
Scanner SP ......SP modes related to the scanner functions
Fax SP..............SP modes related to the fax functions
After accessing the SP mode, select one of the Service Program modes (Copy,
Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below.
This section explains the functions of the Printer/Copy/Scanner SP modes. Please
refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.
B146S910.WMF
B147/B149/B190 5-2 SM
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
B146S911.WMF
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.

Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the SP
mode screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window.
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then
press . (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing . If not,
just press the required SP Mode number.)
Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
Service
Tables
operation.
Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
SM 5-3 B147/B149/B190
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start  to execute the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to
adjust.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the
list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.
B146S912.WMF
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.
5. To enter a setting:
• Press  to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to
enter the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous
setting.
• Press  to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
• When you are prompted to complete the selection, press “Yes.”
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window
and select the settings for the test print. Press Start , and then press SP
Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
B147/B149/B190 5-4 SM
Exiting Service Mode

Press the Exit key on the touch-panel.
NOTE: To make the following settings effective, you must turn the main switch off
and on after exiting service mode.
SP Modes Related to the Engine SP Modes Related to the Controller
SP2-208-009 SP5-302-002
SP2-213-001 SP5-801-003 to 013
SP2-224-001 to 004 SP5-824-001
SP5-150-001 SP5-825-001
SP5-994-001 and 002 SP5-832-001 to 011
SP5-998-001
SP5-999
NOTE: If the settings of SP modes 5-993-013 to 015 are changed, these changes
will affect the next line position adjustment.
5.1.3 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen
Since the maximum number of characters which can be displayed on the control
panel screen is limited (20 characters), the description of SP modes displayed on
the screen needs to be abbreviated The following are the major abbreviations used
for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
Paper Type
N: Normal paper
Service
Tables
TH: Thick paper
Color Mode [Color]
[K]: Black in B&W mode
[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full
color mode
Paper Feed Station
P: Paper tray
B: By-pass table
Fusing Section
H: Heating roller
P: Pressure roller
Print Mode
S: Simplex
D: Duplex
Process Speed
62.5, 125, 185
SM 5-5 B147/B149/B190
As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the print
mode (B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP mode
settings depend on the process speed.
Resolution Line speed Print speed

Mode
(dpi) (mm/s) (ppm)
600 x 600
185 38
B/W 1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200 125 28
600 x 600
125 28
Color 1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200 62.5 14
600 x 600
OHP/Thick 1,800 x 600 62.5 10
1,200 x 1,200
The process speed (mm/s) depends on the print mode (B&W or Color), resolution,
and/or type of paper selected. Some SP mode settings depend on the process
speed.
Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting
(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory
setting sheets enclosed, which is located underneath the jammed paper removal
decal.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
Do not touch the SP mode in the field.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main
switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this
mode is stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to
the default value. “BCU” and “CTL” indicate which NVRAM contains the data.
• BCU: NVRAM on the BCU board
• CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP
table in the following manner.
[ Adjustable range / Default setting / Step ] Alphanumeric
NOTE: If “Alphanumeric” is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the
setting of the SP mode is displayed on the screen using alphanumeric
characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in
the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.
B147/B149/B190 5-6 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE

5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE
SP1-XXX (Feed)
1-001 [Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration
(Paper Type, [Color ], Process Speed), Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP, TH: Thick
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operation
timing for each mode.
1-001-1 Normal [K] 62.5 *BCU [ -10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
1-001-2 Normal [K] 125 *BCU
1-001-3 Normal [K] 185 *BCU
1-001-4 Normal [FC] 62.5 *BCU
1-001-5 Normal [FC] 125 *BCU
1-001-6 Thick [K] *BCU
1-001-7 Thick [FC] *BCU
1-001-8 OHP [K] *BCU
1-001-9 OHP [FC] *BCU
1-002 [Side to Side Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for
each mode.
1-002-1 By-pass Table *BCU [ -10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
1-002-2 Paper Tray 1 *BCU
1-002-4 Paper Tray 3 *BCU [ -10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
1-002-6 Duplex *BCU
Service
Tables
1-003 [Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle
(Paper Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed), Paper Type: N: Normal, TH:
Thick
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper
feed timing.
1-003-1 Paper Tray 62.5 *BCU [ -5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
1-003-4 By-pass N 62.5 *BCU
1-003-5 By-pass N 125 *BCU
1-003-6 By-pass N 185 *BCU
1-003-7 By-pass TH *BCU
1-003-8 By-pass OHP *BCU
SM 5-7 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
1-004 [Dev. Motor Speed] Development Drive Motor Speed

([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick
Adjusts the development drive motor speed for correcting color shifts at the leading
edge or trailing edge area.
Black Motor [K]: Adjusts fusing roller speed for the trailing edge area.
Color Motor [YMC]: Adjusts registration roller speed for the leading edge area.
NOTE:
• SP1-004-002 and 005 is for color mode. Fine adjustment for B&W mode can be
done with SP1-005-001 and 002.
• SP1-004-004 is for normal paper. Fine adjustment for thick paper can be done with
SP1-005-003.
1-004-1 [K] 62.5 Normal *BCU [ 96.0 to 104.0 / 97.8 / 0.1 %/step ]
1-004-2 [K] 125 *BCU [ 96.0 to 104.0 / 97.6 / 0.1 %/step ]
1-004-3 [K] 185 *BCU [ 96.0 to 104.0 / 98.1 / 0.1 %/step ]
1-004-4 [YMC] 62.5 *BCU [ 96.00 to 104.00 / 100.00 / 0.05 %/step ] FA
1-004-5 [YMC] 125 *BCU
1-004-6 [YMC] 185 *BCU
1-004-7 [K] 62.5 Thick *BCU
1-005 [Dev. Motor Speed2] Development Drive Motor Speed 2

([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> TH: Thick
1-005-1 [K] *BCU [ -0.2 to +1.0 / +0.2 / 0.1 %/step ]
Adjusts the black development drive motor speed for the B&W 125mm/s process
speed. The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-002 (see the note
for SP 1-004).
At the 125mm/s process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than for
color mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport quality, causing the
paper to flip up at the fusing section if the same speed as color mode is used for B&W
mode. To minimize the occurrence of paper flipping up, which causes smeared
images in the trailing area, this SP mode can change the motor speed in B&W mode.
1-005-2 [YMC] *BCU [ -1.00 to 1.00 / 0 / 0.05 %/step ] FA
Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for the B&W 125mm/s process
speed. The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-005 (see the note
for SP 1-004).
At the 125mm/s process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than for
color mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport speed slightly. This
SP mode can adjust the motor speed for B&W mode.
1-005-3 [YMC] Thick *BCU [ -0.30 to 0.30 / 0 / 0.05 %/step ]
Adjust the color development drive motor speed for thick paper in by-pass mode. The
value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-004 (see the note for SP 1-
004).
Normal and thick paper are different types of paper, and this sometime causes color
shift due to paper slippage. This SP mode can change the motor speed for thick
paper.

([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> SP: Special
Adjusts the development motor speed for special paper.
1-006-1 [K] 62.5 Special *BCU [ -4.0 to 4.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step ]
1-006-2 [K] 125 Special *BCU
1-006-3 [YMC] 62.5 Special *BCU [ -4.00 to 4.00 / -0.1 / 0.05 %/step ]
1-006-4 [YMC] 125 Special *BCU
B147/B149/B190 5-8 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

Adjusts the development motor speed for postcards.
1-007-1 [CL] Mail TH *BCU [ -1.00 to 0.00 / -0.40 / 0.05%/step]
1-008 [Drum STM Speed] Drum STM Speed Adjustment

Adjusts the drum speed of each line-speed mode (62.5 mm/s and 125 mm/s); this
adjusts drum speed but not transfer belt speed.
1-008-1 [CL] 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 7 / 1 /step ] DFU
1-008-2 [CL] 125 *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 7 / 1 /step ] DFU
1-008-3 [Bk] 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 5 / 1 /step ] DFU
1-008-4 [Bk] 125 *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 3 / 1 /step ] DFU
1-008-5 OHP *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 3 / 1 /step ] DFU
1-008-6 MUSIC *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 3 / 1 /step ] DFU
1-104 [Fusing Control]

1-104-1 Control Method *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: ON/OFF Control
1: Phase Control
Selects the fusing control method.
NOTE: This mode can be used only for N. America models
1-104-25 Process Speed *BCU [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Color 62.5 mm/s (temperature specified by
SP 1-105-8 and 19)
1: Color 125 mm/s (temperature specified by
SP 1-105-9 and 20)
2: Thick / OHP (temperature specified by SP 1-
105-13 and 24)
3: K 125 mm/s (temperature specified by SP 1-
Service
Tables
105-4 and 15)
4: K 185 mm/s (temperature specified by SP 1-
105-5 and 16)
Selects the power-on default target fusing operation temperature.
The target operating fusing temperature depends on the process speed. When the
machine is switched on, it starts warming up for the process speed specified in this
SP mode.
1-105 [Fusing Temperature]

(Heating or Pressure roller: Paper Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP. TH: Thick, SP: Special
Some settings of fusing temperature depend on the destination (US or Europe/Asia).
US: Setting for US, EU: Setting for Europe/Asia
1 105-1 H: Ready *BCU [ 10 to 100 / 10 / 1oC/step ]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing ready condition.
After the main switch has been turned on, the machine enters the print ready
condition when the heating roller temperature reaches the temperature specified in
this SP mode.
When the machine is in the recovery mode from the energy saver or auto off mode,
the machine becomes ready when both heating and pressure roller temperatures
reach the specified temperature.
Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-3 to 28) –
Temperature specified in this SP mode.
SM 5-9 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 06/2004

1-105-2 P: Ready *BCU [ 10 to 100 / NA: 10, EU: 20 / 1oC/step ]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing ready condition.
Temperature specified in this SP mode
The following SPs set the target operating temperatures of the heating and pressure
rollers in various modes. (The default settings are different for N. America and
Eur./Asia)
1-105-4 H:N [K] S 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 180, EU: 175 / 5°C/step]
⇒ 1-105-6 H:N [K] D 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 165 / 5°C/step] **
1-105-7 H:N [K] D 185 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 175 , EU: 175 / 5°C/step]
1-105-8 H:N[FC] S 62.5 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5°C/step]
1-105-9 H:N[FC] S 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / 180 / 5°C/step]
1-105-10 H:N[FC] D 62.5 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 145, EU: 145/ 5°C/step]
⇒ 1-105-11 H:N[FC] D 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 170 / 5°C/step] **
1-105-13 H:OHP *BCU [ 100 to 190 / 165 / 5°C/step]
1-105-15 P:N [K] S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 160, EU: 155 / 5°C/step]
⇒ 1-105-17 P:N [K] D 125
1-105-18 P:N [K] D 185
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 145 / 5°C/step] **
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 145, EU: 155 / 5°C/step]
1-105-19 P:N[FC] S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 125, EU: 130 / 5°C/step]
1-105-20 P:N[FC] S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 160 / 5°C/step]
1-105-21 P:N[FC] D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 120, EU: 125 / 5°C/step]
⇒ 1-105-22 P:N[FC] D 125
1-105-24 P:OHP
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5°C/step] **
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 150 / 5°C/step]
1-105-26 H:TH *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 175 / 5°C/step]
1-105-28 P:TH *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5°C/step]
1-105-29 H:Envelop *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 175 / 5°C/step]
1-105-30 P:Envelop *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5°C/step]
1-105-31 H: Slow Down *BCU [ 1 to 20 / 5 / 1°C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
Fusing temperature must be decreased when the machine changes to a process
speed that is slower than the current process speed (for example, when the speed
changes from 185 mm/s to 62.5 mm/s). The machine idles while reducing the fusing
temperature. When the fusing temperature becomes lower than the ready
temperature, the machine starts printing.
Ready Temperature = Target temperature + Temperature specified in this SP mode.
1-105-32 P: Slow Down *BCU [ 1 to 20 / 10 / 1°C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
1-105-33 H:SP 62.5 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]
1-105-34 H:SP 125 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]
1-105-35 H:SP 185 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]
1-105-36 P:SP 62.5 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]
1-105-37 P:SP 125 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]
1-105-38 P:SP 185 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +20 / 1°C/step]
⇒ ** Requires Engine firmware 1.09C or later.

1-106 [Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)
Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
1-106-1 Heat Roller [ 0 to 200 / - / 5°C/step]
1-106-2 Pressure Roller
B147/B149/B190 5-10 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
1-902 [Paper Size] Tray Paper Size

1-902-1 Tray 1 A4/LT *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: A4 sideways, 1: LT sideways
Tray 1 can only use these two sizes.
US: 1 FA
Specifies the paper size for tray 1.
1-902-2 Tray 2 B4/LG *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: B4 lengthwise, 1: LG lengthwise
This specifies which size is detected for a
sensor output of 1101 (see section 6 for
details).
US: 1 FA
1-902-3 Tray 2 A4/LT *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: A4 lengthwise, 1: LT lengthwise
details).
US: 1 FA
1-902-4 Tray 2 B5/LT *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: LT, 1: B5 lengthwise
details).
1-910 [Fusing Idling Time]

Specifies the timer for deciding whether to do fusing idling when receiving a print
Service
command.
Tables
When receiving a new job within the time specified in this SP mode after the last job
is completed, fusing idling is not done because the fusing section was already
warmed up during the last job.
1-910-1 Idling Time *BCU [ 0 to 180 / 1 / 1 minute/step ] DFU
SM 5-11 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
1-912 [Machine Temp. Cor.] Machine Temperature Correction

Th: Threshold, Heating or Pressure roller
Corrects the fusing temperature depending on the temperature inside the machine.
If the temperature inside the machine is too high or low, this may cause hot or cold
offset image at the fusing section. To avoid the offset image, the fusing temperature is
corrected depending on the temperature inside machine, which is monitored by the
thermistor located on the right side of the laser optics housing unit.
If the temperature inside the machine is detected as high or low (based on the
settings of SP1-912-001 or 002), the fusing temperature is decreased or increased by
the temperature specified in SP1-912-003 to 006.
Also see SP 1-917-1.
1-912-1 Th:High Temp *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 30 / 1°C/step]
Sets the threshold for entering the high temperature condition.
1-912-2 Th:Low Temp *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 17 / 1°C/step]
Sets the threshold for entering the low temperature condition.
1-912-3 H:High Temp *BCU [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1°C/step]
Sets the fusing temperature decrease for the high temperature condition.
1-912-4 P:High Temp *BCU [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1°C/step]
1-912-5 H:Low Temp *BCU [ 0 to 15 / 5 / 1°C/step]
Sets the fusing temperature increase for the low temperature condition.
1-912-6 P:Low Temp *BCU [ 0 to 15 / 5 / 1°C/step]
1-913 [Temperature. Cor. 1] Fusing Temperature Correction (Correction Timing)

Specifies the number of sheets to determine whether or not to apply the fusing
temperature correction.
During a multi print job, the fusing temperature tends to slightly overshoot around the
10th sheet and then stabilize. Temperature overshooting may cause the glossiness to
increase.
To minimize the overshooting, both fusing and pressure roller temperatures are
decreased by the amount specified in SP1-914 at the number of sheets specified in
this SP mode, until the end of the job.
The temperatures are decreased in two steps.
Example: 125 mm/s line speed
First step (also called 'Mode 1'): After 5 sheets (SP 1-913-2), temperature drops by
5C (SP 1-914-2).
Second step (also called 'Mode 2'): After 20 sheets (SP 1-913-7), temperature drops
by 10C (SP 1-914-7).
Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or less
Wide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF
1-913-1 Mode 1 185 *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]
1-913-3 Mode 1 62.5 *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]
1-913-4 Mode 1 OHP narrow *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]
1-913-5 Mode 1 185 wide *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]
1-913-8 Mode 2 62.5 *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step ]
1-913-9 Mode 2 185 narrow *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]
1-913-10 Mode 2 185 wide *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step ]
B147/B149/B190 5-12 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
1-914 [Temperature Cor. 2] Fusing Temperature Correction (Temperature Setting)

Specifies the temperature to be subtracted from the targeted temperatures specified
in SP1-105-4 to-24.
Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or less
Wide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF
1-914-1 Temp 1 185 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step ]
1-914-2 Temp 1 125 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5°C /step ]
1-914-3 Temp 1 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step ]
1-914-4 Temp 1 OHP narrow *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5°C /step ]
1-914-5 Temp 1 OHP wide *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5°C /step ]
1-914-6 Temp 2 185 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 5°C /step ]
1-914-7 Temp 2 125 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 5°C /step ]
1-914-8 Temp 2 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 5°C /step ]
1-914-9 Temp 2 OHP narrow *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5°C /step ]
1-914-10 Temp 2 OHP wide *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5°C /step ]
1-915 [Stand-by Time]

1-915-1 Job Receiving *BCU [ 0 to 180 / 60 / 10 seconds/step ]
0: The machine does not shift to the stand-by
mode.
Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode when not receiving a
print start command after receiving a print preparation command.
1-915-2 Job End *BCU [ 0 to 180 / 30 / 10 seconds/step ]
0: The machine does not shift to the stand-by
mode.
Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode after the last job is
completed.
Service
Tables
1-916 [Idling Mode]
1-916-1 Mode Set *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]
0: Off
1: On
Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready just after the
main switch has been turned on.
1-916-2 Idling Time *BCU [ 10 to 120 / 30 / 10 sec/step ]
Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed.
1-916-3 PreJob Mode *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]
0: Off
1: On
Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready when a print
job arrives at the copier.
1-916-4 Idling Time *BCU [ 0 to 360 / 0 / 1 sec/step ]
Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed when special paper is used
and the line speed is 185 mm/s.
SM 5-13 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
1-996 [OHP/TH Fusing] OHP/Thick Paper Fusing Temperature Correction

(Heating or Pressure Roller)
Specifies the temperature for starting a print job.
The fusing section is already warmed up when the last print job was completed. If
prints are made on OHP or thick paper at this time, the fusing temperature tends to
be higher than the target, causing exit roller marks or a paper jam in the fusing
section.
To prevent this, the print job will not start if the heating and pressure roller
temperatures are higher than the following:
(Target temperature specified by SP1-105-12, -13, -23, -24) - (Temperature specified
by this SP mode (default: 5°C for heating roller, 10°C for pressure roller))
1-996-4 H:Print Temp *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 1°C /step ]
1-996-5 P:Print Temp *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 1°C /step ]
1-996-6 PreJob Mode *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On
This SP enables or disables the 30-second fusing unit idling at the start of an OHP
print job. When enabled, idling is done even if the machine is in the ready condition.
B147/B149/B190 5-14 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP2-XXX (Drum)
2-001 [Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (DC or AC component: [Color], Process Speed)
U: Upper, L: Lower
Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;
therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3-
125 Default: ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode with SP3-125,
the values in these SP modes are used for printing.
2-001-1 DC:[K] *BCU [ 300 to 1000 / 700 / 10 volts/step ] DFU
2-001-2 DC:[Y] *BCU
2-001-3 DC:[M] *BCU
2-001-4 DC:[C] *BCU
• Displays the AC component of the charge roller bias adjusted during machine
initialization or process control self-check.
• Sets AC bias in the various print modes for test purposes.
If the optimum AC bias cannot be selected because of the upper and lower limits
(SP2-001-10 and 11 for K, SP 2-001-21 and 22 for YMC), this may cause white spots
on images and black spots on background. (In particular, spots may appear if the
room temperature is very low.)
Check the printouts after changing the AC bias with these SP modes (SP2-001-12 to
20) and exiting SP mode. If increasing or decreasing the AC bias for relevant color
solves the spot problem, shift the AC upper and lower limits (SP2-001-10 and 11 for
K, SP 2-001-21 and 22 for YMC) by the value increased or decreased during the test.
NOTE: The AC upper and lower limits have been optimized by the manufacturer;
therefore, these settings should not be adjusted in the field.
2-001-5 AC:[K] 62.5 [ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU
2-001-6 AC:[K] 125 [ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU
2-001-7 AC:[K] 185 [ 0 to 255 / 159 / 1/step ] DFU
2-001-8 AC:[Y] 62.5 [ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU
2-001-9 AC:[Y] 125 [ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU
2-001-10 AC:[M] 62.5 [ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU
Service
Tables
2-001-11 AC:[M] 125 [ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU
2-001-12 AC:[C] 62.5 [ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU
2-001-13 AC:[C] 125 [ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU
Sets the upper limit of the AC component adjustable range for black.
During machine initialization and process control self-check, the AC component of the
charge roller bias is automatically adjusted within the range specified by SP2-001-014
through 017.
2-001-14 AC Target [K] *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 86 / 1/step ] DFU
2-001-15 AC Target [Y] *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 83 / 1/step ] DFU
2-001-16 AC Target [M] *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 86 / 1/step ] DFU
2-001-17 AC Target [C] *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 83 / 1/step ] DFU
2-101 [TrimAdjust] Trimming Adjustment

This program adjusts the trimming area (the area in which no image is created).
2-103-1 front *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
2-103-2 back *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
2-103-3 lead *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
2-103-4 trail *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
SM 5-15 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-103 [LD Control] LD Power Control

([Color Mode, Color], Process Speed, K or Color mode) P: Power, M: Magnification
Adjusts the laser power by changing the current applied to LD.
Laser power is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjusting
these data has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default : ON) is activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
2-103-1 P:[K] 62.5 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-2 P:[K] 125 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-4 P:[Y] 62.5 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-5 P:[Y] 125 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-7 P:[M] 62.5 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-8 P:[M] 125 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-10 P:[C] 62.5 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-11 P:[C] 125 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-13 P:[K] 62.5 K *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-14 P:[K] 125 K *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-15 P:[K] 185 K *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 601 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-26 P:[0 1] 125 K *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-27 P:[0 1] 185 K *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 601 / 1/step ] DFU
Main Scan Magnification ([Color], Laser Exposure Frequency)
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the
main scan magnification; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next
line position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-
993-013 to 015 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be
effective from the next line position adjustment).
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can
be adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case, the
line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
2-103-55 M:[K] 64.3MHz *BCU [ 0 to 280 / 140 / 1 dot/step ] 1 dot = 20µ DFU
2-103-56 M:[Y] 64.3MHz *BCU
2-103-57 M:[M] 64.3MHz *BCU
2-103-58 M:[C] 64.3MHz *BCU
2-103-59 M:[K] 47.6MHz *BCU
2-103-101 CF:[K,K] 1 *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 604 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-102 CF:[K,K] 2 *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 604 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-103 CF[FC,K] *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-104 CF:[FC:Y] *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-105 CF:[FC,M] *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-106 CF:[FC,C] *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-107 CF:[K] OHP/TH *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-108 CF:[Y] OHP/TH *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-109 CF:[M] OHP/TH *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU
2-103-110 CF:[C] OHP/TH *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU
B147/B149/B190 5-16 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-109 [LD Beam Pitch] LD Beam Pitch

Sets the beam pitch for black in 1200 dpi or 600 dpi mode.
NOTE: After replacing the laser optics housing unit, the data printed on the decal
attached to the new unit must be input with this SP mode.
2-109-2 Pitch 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 50 / 50 pulse/step ] FA
2-109-3 Pitch 600 *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 42 / 50 pulse/step ] FA
2-109-5 Display 1200 [ 0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step ]
2-109-6 Display 600 [ 0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step ]
2-112 [Polygon OFF Timing 1] Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing

2-112-1 Warming-up *BCU [ 0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step ]
0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode
The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print start command for
the time specified in this SP mode after receiving the print preparation command.
2-112-2 Job End *BCU [ 0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step ]
0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode
The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print job for the time
specified in this SP mode after the previous job was completed.
2-113 [Polygon OFF Timing 2] [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]

Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing 0: Enable, 1: Disable
2-131-1 The polygon mirror motor does not turn on until the copier enters the ready condition
even after receiving the print start command.
NOTE: When a user complains about high frequency noise, enabling this mode can
minimize the noise.
2-201 [Dev. Bias] Development Bias ([Color], Process Speed)
Service
Tables
Adjusts the development bias.
Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default: ON) is
activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
2-201-1 [K] 62.5 *BCU [ 200 to 800 / 500 / 10 V/step ] DFU
2-201-2 [K] 125 *BCU
2-201-3 [K] 185 *BCU
2-201-4 [Y] 62.5 *BCU
2-201-5 [Y] 125 *BCU
2-201-6 [M] 62.5 *BCU
2-201-7 [M] 125 *BCU
2-201-8 [C] 62.5 *BCU
2-201-9 [C] 125 *BCU
2-207 [Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])

Forces toner to be supplied to the development unit.
The toner supply clutch turns on for 0.7 s and off for 1.3 s.
2-207-1 [K] [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]
2-207-2 [Y] 0: Not execute
2-207-3 [M] 1: Execute
2-207-4 [C]
SM 5-17 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-208 [Toner Supply Mode] Toner Supply Mode ([Color])

Selects the toner supply method.
2-208-1 [K] *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
2-208-2 [Y] *BCU 0: Fixed supply (with the supply rates stored
2-208-3 [M] *BCU with SP2-208-5 to 8)
2-208-4 [C] *BCU 1: Fuzzy control supply
2: Proportional control supply (using the Vref
values stored with SP2-224-5 to 8)
Sets the toner supply rate used when the toner supply method (SP2-208-1 to 4) is set
to ‘0’ (fixed supply mode).
2-208-5 Fixed Rate [K] *BCU [ 0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step ]
2-208-6 Fixed Rate [Y] *BCU
2-208-7 Fixed Rate [M] *BCU
2-208-8 Fixed Rate [C] *BCU
Specifies the maximum possible toner supply, expressed as a percentage of the
maximum amount of toner that can possibly be supplied for a sheet of paper.
If too much toner is supplied to the development unit especially for black or in the low
humidity condition, this may cause dirty background due to insufficient agitation. This
SP mode limits the maximum possible toner supply for black and only in the low
humidity condition for color.
NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
2-208-9 Upper Limit *BCU [ 0 to 100 / 63 / 1 %/step ] DFU
#
Adjusts the toner supply amount (fixed rate) when making multiple prints of pages
with low image ratio (coverage).
When printing with a low image ratio, toner concentration is controlled only with Vt
outputs since pixel count is not done for low image ratios. This may cause the
attraction force between toner and carrier to increase, resulting in low image density
on outputs. To prevent this, the machine counts the number of pixels and supplies a
fixed amount of toner if the accumulated number of pixels becomes greater than the
specified level.
2-208-10 LowCoverage[K] *BCU [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %/step ] DFU
2-208-11 LowCoverage[Y]
2-208-12 LowCoverage[M]
2-208-13 LowCoverage[C]
Specifies each constant to adjust the toner supply amount. The optimum value is
specified before shipment.
2-208-14 Vt Coeff[Bk] *BCU [ 0 to 10.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU
2-208-15 Vt Coeff[Y]
2-208-16 Vt Coeff[M]
2-208-17 Vt Coeff[C]
2-208-18 Img Coeff[Bk] *BCU [ 0 to 10.0 / 0.7 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU
2-208-19 Img Coeff[Y]
2-208-20 Img Coeff[M]
2-208-21 Img Coeff[C]
2-208-22 ImgCrctCoef[Bk] *BCU [ 0 to 10.0 / 0.1 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU
2-208-23 ImgCrctCoef[Y]
2-208-24 ImgCrctCoef[M]
2-208-25 ImgCrctCoef[C]
B147/B149/B190 5-18 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-210 [Toner Supply Counter] Toner Supply Counter ([Color])

Displays the total time that the toner supply clutch has been on.
This data is stored in the memory chip on each toner cartridge.
2-210-5 [K] *BCU [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 second/step ]
2-210-6 [Y] *BCU
2-210-7 [M] *BCU
2-210-8 [C] *BCU
2-212 [Toner Near/End] Toner Near End / End Detection Threshold ([Color])
When the amount of toner amount left in the cartridge becomes less than this value,
the machine starts monitoring the Vt values for toner near end detection.
2-212-1 Start [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 g/step ]
2-212-2 Start [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the threshold for toner near-end detection.
The machine detects toner near-end when the following happens 10 times
consecutively.
Vt > Vref + Threshold
2-212-5 Near [K] *BCU [ 0 to 5.0 / 0.4 / 0.1 V/step ]
2-212-6 Near [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the threshold for toner end detection.
The machine detects toner end when the following happens 10 times consecutively.
Then, the machine stops printing, even during a print job.
Vt > Vref + Threshold
2-212-7 End [K] *BCU [ 0 to 5.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 V/step ]
2-212-8 End [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the number of sheets with full image coverage that can be printed after
toner near-end has been detected.
When near-end is detected, the pixels in the images are counted. The machine
detects toner end when the following happens, and the machine stops printing even
during a print job.
Pixel count = 5 A4/LT sheets with full image coverage
Service
Tables
NOTE: The setting of SP2-212-11 has priority for deciding when to stop printing.
2-212-9 Pixel [K] *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step ]
2-212-10 Pixel [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the minimum number of sheets that can be printed after toner near-end has
been detected.
However, when the following happens 10 consecutive times, the machine stops
printing even during a print job or if this guaranteed minimum has not been met.
Vt > Current Vref value + 1.2V or Vt > 4.8V
2-212-11 Min. Print *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]
Displays the average signal value of the toner end sensor. Printed images can be
weak when the value is larger.
Each toner sensor detects the toner that is falling through the toner path beneath the
toner cartridge. Each sensor outputs “0” when it detects toner in the toner path, or
outputs “1” when it does not detect toner. The signal is “1” if toner is not passing
through the path even though the toner cartridge contains toner. These signals, “0”
and “1”, are periodically checked and used to calculate the signal average. When
enough toner is in the cartridge, the signal average is a smaller value (“0” or its
vicinity). When toner is insufficient, the average is a larger value (“1” or its vicinity).
2-212-12 sensor avg [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01/step ]
2-212-13 sensor avg [Y]
2-212-14 sensor avg [M]
2-212-15 sensor avg [C]
SM 5-19 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-213 [Toner End ON/OFF] Toner End Detection ON/OFF

Enables or disables toner near-end and end detection (if disabled, the toner supply
clutch on time is still counted).
Use this SP only when tests are necessary under the toner end or toner near end
condition. Specify the default value after the tests.
2-213-1 T End ON/OFF *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step] Alphanumeric, DFU
# 0: Both sensors disabled
1: Both sensors enabled
2: Toner end sensor disabled and TD sensor
enabled
2-223 [TD Vcnt Control] TD Sensor Vcnt Control

2-223-1 Initialization *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric, DFU
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the Vcnt Auto Adjustment when detecting a new development
unit.
When the machine detects a new development unit, developer initialization
automatically starts. During the developer initialization, Vcnt is automatically adjusted
so that Vt is within 3.0 ± 0.1V.
2-223-2 Humidity *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the Humidity Auto Correction. This corrects the Vcnt value for the
current humidity. This correction is applied to both the Vcnt values automatically
adjusted during developer initialization and manually adjusted with SP2-224-1 to 4.
If this correction does not work well under certain environmental conditions or due to
a defective humidity sensor, deactivate the Humidity Auto Correction and adjust the
Vcnt value in SP2-224-1 to 4 (by trial and error).
2-223-3 Toner Fill Up *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric, DFU
0: Deactivate
1: Activate
Activates or deactivates the Toner Fill Up mode, which fills up the toner supply tube
with toner during developer initialization.
This function is required only at machine installation. Although the default is “0”, the
factory setting is “1”. After toner fill-up occurs during machine installation, the setting
is changed to “0” automatically.
B147/B149/B190 5-20 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-224 [Vcnt / Vref] Vcnt / Vref ([Color])

Adjusts the Vcnt value manually.
The value in this SP mode is effective until after the next process control self-check.
To always use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode
with SP2-208-1 to 4.
2-224-1 Vcnt [K] *BCU [ 0 to 22.0 / 10.0 / 0.1 V/step ] FA
2-224-2 Vcnt [Y] #
2-224-3 Vcnt [M]
2-224-4 Vcnt [C]
Adjusts the Vref value manually.
The value in this SP mode is effective until the next process control self-check. To
always use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode with
SP2-208-1 to 4.
2-224-5 Vref [K] *BCU [ 0 to 5.0 / 2.8 / 0.1 V/step ]
2-224-6 Vref [Y] *BCU
2-224-7 Vref [M] *BCU
2-224-8 Vref [C] *BCU
2-301 [Transfer Current]

([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper
Adjusts the transfer current for each color and each print mode.
NOTE: If the transfer current is increased too much, image offset may occur
especially in halftone areas.
2-301-1 [K]P S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-2 [K]P S 185 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 22 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-3 [K]P D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 16 / 1 µA/step ]
Service
Tables
2-301-4 [K]P D 185 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-5 [K]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-6 [K]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-7 [K]B S 185 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 22 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-8 [FC,K]P S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-9 [FC,K]P S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-10 [FC,Y]P S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-11 [FC,Y]P S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-12 [FC,M]P S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-13 [FC,M]P S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-14 [FC,C]P S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-15 [FC,C]P S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-16 [FC,K]P D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 9 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-17 [FC,K]P D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-18 [FC,Y]P D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-19 [FC,Y]P D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-20 [FC,M]P D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-21 [FC,M]P D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-22 [FC,C]P D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301- [FC,C]P D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
23
2-301- [FC,K]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
24
2-301-25 [FC,K]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 µA/step ]
SM 5-21 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-301 [Transfer Current]

([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper
2-301-26 [FC,Y]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-27 [FC,Y]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-28 [FC,M]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-29 [FC,M]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-30 [FC,C]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-31 [FC,C]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-32 [K]OHP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-33 [FC,K]OHP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-34 [FC,Y]OHP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 11 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-35 [FC,M]OHP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-36 [FC,C]OHP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 9 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-37 [K]TH R62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-38 [FC,K]TH R62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-39 [FC,Y]TH R62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-40 [FC,M]TH R62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-41 [FC,C]TH R62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-42 [K]SP S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 8 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-43 [K]SP S125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-44 [K]SP S185 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 22 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-45 [FC,K]SP S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-46 [FC,Y]SP S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-47 [FC,M]SP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-48 [FC,C]SP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-49 [FC,K]SP 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-50 [FC,Y]SP 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-51 [FC,M]SP 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-52 [FC,C]SP 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-57 [K]TH S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-58 [FC,K]TH S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-59 [FC,Y]TH S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-60 [FC,M]TH S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-61 [FC,C]TH S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-62 [K]SP D62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-63 [K]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 16 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-64 [K]SP D185 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-65 [FC,K]SP D62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 9 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-66 [FC,Y]SP D62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-67 [FC,M]SP D62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-68 [FC,C]SP D62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-69 [FC,K]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-70 [FC,Y]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-71 [FC,M]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-301-72 [FC,C]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
B147/B149/B190 5-22 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-309 [Current Paper Size] Transfer Current - Paper Size Correction

Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, OHP
Corrects the transfer current for paper size.
When small paper is used for printing, the transfer current flows to the drum at the
non image areas where the transfer belt touches the OPC drum. This may cause an
abnormal image due to insufficient current at the image areas.
NOTE: Increase only when an abnormal image (insufficient image transfer) occurs on
a small paper size. However, increasing the current too much may cause
image offset.
2-309-5 N LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step ]
2-309-6 N A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.8 / 0.1/step ]
2-309-7 TH LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step ]
2-309-8 TH A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step ]
2-309-9 OHP LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step ]
2-309-10 OHP A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 4.0 / 0.1/step ]
2-402 [Transfer Ctrl] Transfer Control

2-402-1 C Mode Posit *BCU [ 0 to 500 / 170 / 10/step ] DFU
Adjusts the transfer belt position for color printing.
SP2-402-1 is valid only when auto correct (SP2-402-2) is disabled ( 6.7.5).
2-402-2 Auto Correct *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step ] DFU
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enable or disable the auto-adjustment of the transfer belt position.
• When SP2-402-2 is enabled, the transfer belt position for color printing is decided in
accordance with the result of the initialization processing ( 6.7.5).
• SP2-402-2 validates the setting of SP2-402-1, but does not affect the setting of
SP2-402-3.
Service
Tables
2-402-3 Bk Mode Posit *BCU [ 0 to 500 / 130 / 10/step ] DFU
Adjusts the transfer belt position for monochrome printing.
SP2-402-3 is always valid regardless of the setting in SP2-402-2.
SM 5-23 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-801 [PA Roller Current] Paper Attraction Roller Current

([Color], Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed): Current Adjustment
(Paper or By-pass): Paper Size Correction
Adjusts the paper attraction roller current for color printing.
If paper misfeeds occur at the transfer unit in color mode, check and/or adjust the
paper attraction roller current.
NOTE: The magenta development section is close to the paper attraction roller.
Decreasing the current may not cause paper misfeed.
If the current is increased too much, the following image problems may occur
depending on the humidity.
High humidity:
Insufficient image transfer in magenta due to current flow to the magenta OPC drum
Low humidity:
Offset image in magenta halftone areas due to paper charged positive too much
When adjusting the current with this SP mode, the value should be lower than transfer
current.
2-801-6 [FC] S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 1 / 1 µA/step ]
2-801-7 [FC] S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 1 / 1 µA/step ]
2-801-8 [FC] D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]
2-801-9 [FC] D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]
2-801-14 [K] B TH S *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 5 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-15 [FC] B TH S *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-16 [K] B OHP *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 5 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-17 [FC] B OHP *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-18 [K] B TH D *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 5 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-19 [FC] B TH D *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-20 [K] SP S *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 8 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-21 [K] SP D *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 12 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-22 [FC] SP S 62.5 *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-23 [FC] SP S 125 *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-24 [FC] SP D 62.5 *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
2-801-25 [FC] SP D 125 *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
2-802 [PA Current Paper Size] Paper Attraction Roller Current - Paper Size Correction
Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, OHP
Adjusts the correction, depending on the paper size.
When small-width paper is used for printing, the paper attraction roller current flows to
the non-image areas of OPC drum where the transfer belt touches the drum. This
may cause paper misfeed due to insufficient current.
To increase the current by 1.5 times, set the SP mode to “1.5.”
NOTE: Adjust only when a paper misfeed occurs with a small paper size. Increasing
the current too much may cause image offset in magenta halftone areas.
2-802-1 N LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step ]
2-802-2 N A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step ]
2-802-3 TH LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step ]
2-802-4 TH A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step ]
2-802-5 OHP LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.4 / 0.1/step ]
2-802-6 OHP A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 4.0 / 0.1/step ]
B147/B149/B190 5-24 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-908 [Mirror Motor] Mirror Positioning Motor ([Color])

mirror position, which corrects the optically skewed image; however, this will be
automatically corrected at the next line position adjustment.
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be
adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,
the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
2-908-2 [C] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 pulse/step ] DFU
2-908-3 [M] *BCU
2-908-4 [Y] *BCU
2-909 [Main-scan Reg.] Main-scan Registration ([Color])

main scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line
position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-010
to 012 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the
next line position adjustment.
1 dot = 20µ
2-909-1 [Y] *BCU [ -500 to 500 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] DFU
2-909-2 [M] *BCU
2-909-3 [C] *BCU
2-909-4 [K] *BCU
2-916 [Sub-scan Reg.] Sub-scan Registration ([Color Mode, Color], Resolution)

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the sub
Service
Tables
scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line position
adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-016 to 021
(this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the next
line position adjustment.
600 dpi: 1 dot = 40µ, 1200dpi: 1 dot = 20µ
2-916-1 [K] 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 7510 / 1 dot ] DFU
2-916-2 [FC,K] 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 15038 / 1 dot ] DFU
2-916-3 [FC,Y] 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 10402 / 1 dot ] DFU
2-916-4 [FC,M] 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 1136 / 1 dot ] DFU
2-916-5 [FC,C] 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 5762 / 1 dot ] DFU
2-916-6 [K] 600 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 3755 / 1 dot ] DFU
2-916-7 [FC,K] 600 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 7519 / 1 dot ] DFU
2-916-8 [FC,Y] 600 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 5201 / 1 dot ] DFU
2-916-9 [FC,M] 600 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 568 / 1 dot ] DFU
2-916-10 [FC,C] 600 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 2881 / 1 dot ] DFU
2-919 [Main Scan Lgth Det] Main-scan Length Detection

Enables or disables the main-scan length detection.
2-919-1 MScan Lgth D *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Disable
1: Enable
SM 5-25 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-994 [Main Scan Reg Cor] Main-scan Registration Correction ([Color])

Not used. DFU
2-994-1 [Y] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] DFU
2-994-2 [M] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 1 / 1 dot/step ] DFU
2-994-3 [C] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 1 / 1 dot/step ] DFU
2-994-4 [K] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] DFU
2-995 [Motor Reset] Mirror Positioning Motor Reset

Rotates the mirror position motors (CMY) by 250 pulses clockwise; then by 125
pulses counterclockwise. This moves the mirrors back to the initial position. Then, the
settings of SP2-908-002 to 004 are reset to 0.
When the line position adjustment fails, it is one of possible causes when the mirror
position motor locks. Performing this SP mode can move the mirrors back to the
original position if it locks. Then, do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-
002).
2-995-1 Motor Reset *BCU
B147/B149/B190 5-26 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP3-XXX (Process)
3-005 [TD Initial] TD Sensor Initialization ([Color])
3-005-1 [K] Initializes the developer. DFU
3-005-2 [Y]
3-005-3 [M]
3-005-4 [C]
3-005-5 [All Color]
3-005-6 Result *BCU [ 1 to 9 / - / - ]
1: Success
2 to 9: Failure
Displays the developer initialization result.
All colors are displayed. Values is displayed in the order K Y C M.
e.g., 1 1 2 1: Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded
See the troubleshooting section for details.
3-006 [Vcnt Initial] Vcnt Initial Setting Display ([Color])

Displays the initial Vcnt value.
3-006-1 [K] *BCU [ 0 to 240 / 100 / 0.1/step ]
3-006-2 [Y] *BCU
3-006-3 [M] *BCU
3-006-4 [C] *BCU
3-007 [Vcnt Current] Vcnt Current Value Display ([Color])

Displays the current Vcnt value.
3-007-1 [K] *BCU [ 0 to 240 / - / 0.1/step ]
3-007-2 [Y] *BCU
3-007-3 [M] *BCU
3-007-4 [C] *BCU
Service
Tables
3-008 [Humidity]
3-008-1 Humidity *BCU [ 0 to 100 / - / 1/step ]
Displays the humidity measured by the humidity/temperature sensor.
SM 5-27 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
3-107 [Vsg Display] Vsg Display (Front or Rear)

3-107-1 Vsg Front *BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]
Displays the Vsg value of the front ID sensor.
Vsg is normally 4.0 ± 0.5 V.
If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this is detected 3 times consecutively, it
leads to SC385.
3-107-2 LED Current Front *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]
Displays the ID sensor LED current adjusted during Vsg adjustment.
3-107-3 Vsg Center *BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]
Displays the Vsg value of the center ID sensor.
leads to SC385.
3-107-4 LED Current Center *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]
3-107-5 Vsg Rear *BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]
Displays the Vsg value of the rear ID sensor.
leads to SC385.
3-107-6 LED Current Rear *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]
3-107-7 Vsg avg bk *BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]
Displays the average black Vsg value of the center ID sensor.
3-120 [Dev. Gamma Target] Development Gamma Target ([Color])

Adjusts the development gamma by changing the Vref value used for toner density
control.
Vref is automatically corrected so that the gamma measured during the process
control self-check becomes “the value set with this SP mode ± 0.15”
3-120-1 [K] *BCU [ 1.00 to 3.00 / 1.90 / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step ] DFU
3-120-2 [Y] *BCU [ 1.00 to 3.00 / 1.65 / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step ] DFU
3-120-3 [M] *BCU
3-120-4 [C] *BCU
3-121 [Dev. Gamma Display] Development Gamma Display ([Color])

Displays the development gamma measured during the process control self-check.
3-121-1 [K] *BCU [ 0 to 10 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV /step ]
3-121-2 [Y] *BCU Normal Range: 1.00 to 2.00
3-121-3 [M] *BCU
3-121-4 [C] *BCU
3-122 [Vk Display] Vk Display ([Color])

Displays the current Vk value.
3-122-1 [K] *BCU [ -255 to 255 / - / 1 V/step ]
3-122-2 [Y] *BCU Normal Range: -50 to 50
3-122-3 [M] *BCU
3-122-4 [C] *BCU
B147/B149/B190 5-28 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
3-123 [Vref Display] Current Vref Display ([Color])

Displays the current Vref value.
3-123-1 [K] *BCU [ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]
3-123-2 [Y] *BCU
3-123-3 [M] *BCU
3-123-4 [C] *BCU
3-125 [Process Control]

3-125-1 ON/OFF *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: OFF (Use the fixed values for VD, VL and
VB set with SP2-001, SP2-103, and SP2-201.)
1: ON
Enables or disables process control.
3-125-2 LD Control *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: Fixed (at the value in SP2-103)
1: Controlled by process control
2: Controlled by LD power selection
Selects the LD control mode.
3-125-3 Auto TD Adj. *BCU [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: Disable
1: Initial & Non-use self-check
2: Job end & Non-use self-check
3: Initial & Job end & Non-use self-check
Specifies when to perform the Auto Toner Density Adjustment. When performing the
Auto Toner Density Adjustment, the machine supplies or consumes toner so that the
development gamma is within ± 0.15 of the gamma target.
Change if the customer complains of toner density fluctuations. Before changing the
setting away from 0, check whether the forced TD adjustment (3-126-2) is effective. If
the problem is persistent, then change to 1, 2, or 3. However, the machine takes
Service
Tables
several minutes to do this adjustment.
3-125-4 ACC *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step ]
0: Disable
1: Process Control Self-check
2: Auto TD Adjustment & Process Control Self-
check
Enables or disables the process control self-check before printing the ACC pattern.
NOTE: If color balance changes during multi-copy runs after ACC is performed, select
1 or 2. Setting 2 can precisely adjust the image density; however, it takes about 6
minutes. Select 1 or 2 depending on the customer’s requirement.
3-125-5 TD Adj. Cndtn *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: No
1: Yes
Specifies whether temperature and humidity are taken into account when deciding the
timing of the auto toner density adjustment (described in SP 3-125-3).
Timing for the auto toner density adjustment is determined by the setting of SP3-125-
003. In addition, if SP 3-125-5 is set to 1, the auto toner density adjustment is done
when the temperature and humidity meet specified conditions (same conditions as
used for transfer current correction).
Specify “1” when both temperature and humidity are both high or low.
SM 5-29 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
3-125 [Process Control]

3-125-6 TD Adj. Times *BCU [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
Limits the number of auto toner density adjustments.
The auto toner density adjustment consists of three steps: detecting the development
gamma, supplying or consuming toner, and detecting the development gamma again.
When these three steps are all complete, it means a single auto toner density
adjustment is complete.
3-126 [Forced Self Check] Forced Self-check

3-126-1 Forced Self Check Performs a forced process control self-check.
3-126-2 Forced TD Adj. Performs a forced auto toner density
adjustment.
3-902 [Pointer Display] Pointer Table Display ([Color])

Displays the number in the pointer table that was selected during the latest process
control self-check.
3-902-1 Printer [K] *BCU [ 1 to 30 / - / 1/step ]
3-902-2 Printer [Y] *BCU
3-902-3 Printer [M] *BCU
3-902-4 Printer [C] *BCU
3-902-5 CF [K] *BCU
3-902-6 CF [Y] *BCU
3-902-7 CF [M] *BCU
3-902-8 CF [C] *BCU
3-903 [M/A Target] M/A Target ([Color])

Adjusts the M/A (Mass per Area, mg/cm2) value used during the process control self-
check.
Adjusting this changes the development bias. This causes the solid ID to increase or
decrease. If developer capability causes an ID problem, toner density needs to be
adjusted with SP3-120-1 to 4, depending on the color.
3-903-1 Printer [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1.50 / 0.60 / 0.05 mg/cm2 /step ] DFU
3-903-2 Printer [Y] *BCU
3-903-5 CF [K] *BCU
3-903-6 CF [Y] *BCU
3-903-7 CF [M] *BCU
3-903-8 CF [C] *BCU
3-904 [M/A for LD] M/A Target for LD Correction ([Color])

Adjusts the M/A value used during the LD correction mode. This value is effective
when SP3-125-2 “LD Control Selection” is set to “2”.
Adjusting this data effects the image reproduction especially in highlight areas.
3-904-1 Printer [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 0.10 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3-904-2 Printer [Y] *BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 0.12 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3-904-5 CF [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 0.13 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3-904-6 CF [Y] *BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 0.14 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3-904-7 CF [M] *BCU
3-904-8 CF [C] *BCU
B147/B149/B190 5-30 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
3-905 [M/A Target]

Adjusts the target amount of each toner on paper sheets.
These values are optimized before shipment. Do not change the values. Changing
these values does not affect toner density on paper sheets.
3-905-1 Intrvl [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1.50 / 0.30 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3-905-2 Intrvl [Y] *BCU
3-905-3 Intrvl [M] *BCU
3-905-4 Intrvl [C] *BCU
Displays the amount of each toner on the paper.
A problem may have occurred in the copier engine if the value is high or low (i.e., if
the difference between SP3-905-1/2/3/4 and SP3-5/6/7/8 is larger than ±0.03
mg/cm2).
Possible problems: Defective TD sensor, defective ID sensor, toner near-end (if the
value is lower than the target), defective toner supply mechanism
3-905-5 Intrvl [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1.500 / - / 0.001 mg/cm2 /step]
3-905-6 Intrvl [Y] *BCU
3-905-7 Intrvl [M] *BCU
3-905-8 Intrvl [C] *BCU
3-906 [PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks

3-906-1 Job End *BCU [ 0 to 999 / 200 / 1 print/step ]
Specifies the execution timing of the job end process control self-check.
The job end process control self-check is automatically done after a job is completed
when 200 prints have been made since the last self-check.
The counter for the job end process control self-check resets when one of the
following process control self-checks is done.
• Initial
• Interval: Interrupt
• Non-use Time
Service
Tables
• During Toner End
When K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient in
SP3-906-5.
3-906-2 Interrupt *BCU [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step ]
Specifies the execution timing of the interrupt process control self-check.
The interrupt process control self-check is automatically done if the number of prints
in the job exceeds the number set in this SP mode. When the print job is completed,
the counter is reset, even if the interrupt self check did not occur.
When K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient in
SP3-906-5.
3-906-3 Non-use Time 1 *BCU [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step ]
0: Disable
Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.
The non-use time process control self-check is automatically done after the number of
prints set with this SP mode have been made and no prints have been made for the
time set with SP mode 3-906-4 since the last print job.
If the conditions are met, the self-check will be done after the print job is completed.
The counter is reset when the initial process control self-checks is done or when a
print is made.
3-906-4 Non-use Time 2 *BCU [ 0 to 2550 / 480 / 10 minutes/step ]
0: Disable
Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.
SM 5-31 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
3-906 [PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks

3-906-5 K Coefficient *BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step ] DFU
Sets the coefficient to calculate the counter value for black-and-white prints.
With the default setting (100), counters used for process control count up by 1 when 1
black-and-white print has been made.
3-910 [Vmin Display] Vmin Display ([Color])

3-910-1 [K] *BCU [ 0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01/step ]
Displays the current Vmin value for K
3-910-2 [Color] *BCU [ 0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01/step ]
Displays the lowest current Vmin value for the colors (CMY).
3-911 [Vt Current Display] Vt Current Display ([Color])

Displays the current Vt value.
3-911-1 [K] *BCU [ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]
3-911-2 [Y] *BCU
3-911-3 [M] *BCU
3-911-4 [C] *BCU
3-912 [Vt Average Display] Vt Average Display ([Color])

Displays the average Vt value.
3-912-1 [K] *BCU [ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]
3-912-2 [Y] *BCU
3-912-3 [M] *BCU
3-912-4 [C] *BCU
3-913 [Tonver Supply Time] Toner Supply Time Display ([Color])

Displays the toner supply clutch on time for the most recent page.
3-913-1 [K] *BCU [ 0 to 5000 / - / 10 ms/step ]
3-913-2 [Y] *BCU
3-913-3 [M] *BCU
3-913-4 [C] *BCU
B147/B149/B190 5-32 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
3-920 [OPC Refresh]

3-920-1 Temperature *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 25 / 1°C /step ]
This SP determines the temperature threshold for determining whether refresh mode
is done just after the machine is switched on.
The charge roller generates NOx (nitrogen oxides), and these contaminate the OPC
drum surface and may cause a smeared image.
Just after the main switch is turned on, if the temperature measured by both the
thermistor located at the right side on the laser optics housing unit and the
temperature/humidity sensor is greater than the temperature specified in this SP
mode, refresh mode is done before initial process control.
During refresh mode, toner is developed on the OPC with 50V development potential
and cleaned to remove NOx. This cycle is repeated a few times.
3-920-2 Humidity *BCU [ 10 to 90 / 75 / 1%/step ]
This SP determines the humidity threshold for determining whether refresh mode is
done just after the machine is switched on.
Just after the main switch is turned on, if the humidity measured by the
temperature/humidity sensor is greater than the humidity specified in this SP mode,
refresh mode is done before the initial process control self-check.
3-920-3 Prints *BCU [ 10 to 2550 / 200 / 10 prints/step ]
Specifies how often refresh mode is done.
When the total number of prints since the last refresh mode exceeds the number
specified in this SP mode, refresh mode is done before the job end process control
self-check.
3-920-4 Mode Set *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Done at power on and toner end recovery
2: Done at power on, toner end recovery, and
after the specified number of prints.
Enables/disables refresh mode.
NOTE: Refresh mode is done during the toner end recovery self-check after a new
Service
Tables
toner cartridge is installed.
3-920-5 Forced
Executes a forced refresh mode.
Use this mode when the image is smeared. It takes about 1 minute.
Also use after replacing the components of the transfer unit (see section 3).
3-920-6 Auto Toner Refresh *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
(Auto Toner Refresh) 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Performs a toner refresh during the OPC refresh mode by changing the development
bias from 50V to 400V.
Enable this SP mode when dirty background and/or firefly spots appear intermittently
on prints with a low image area ratio.
While making prints with a low image area ratio, developer is agitated with less toner
supplied. This may cause the toner-carrier attraction force to increase or toner to
coagulate.
This sometimes causes firefly spots or dirty background when a large amount of toner
is supplied.
NOTE: When enabling this SP mode, the following SP modes should be changed.
SP3-906-001 Job End Process Control Self-check
200 (Default) -> 100
SP3-920-003 OPC Refresh Mode / Prints
200 (Default) -> 100
SM 5-33 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
3-921 [Forced Toner Refresh] Forced Toner Refresh

Perform forced toner refresh mode.
When the developer has deteriorated or when prints are made in a very low humidity
condition, dirty background may appear continuously.
When this kind of dirty background appears, check whether or not the development
gamma is within the target (SP3-120 and 121). If the development gamma is not
within the target, do this SP mode.
The machine automatically does the toner refresh mode in the following sequence.
1. Consumes toner in the development unit without toner supply until toner end is
detected
NOTE: If toner is drastically consumed for a short time, this may cause carrier to flow
out. To prevent this, toner is consumed over a long period of time. (It takes about 20
minutes to complete this toner refresh mode).
3-921-1 K
3-921-2 All Color
3-922 [OPC Refresh2]

Specifies when the OPC refresh is executed for CMY drums, which forcibly creates a
temporary 15mm-wide toner line on the drum surface by applying the development
bias (200V) and turning on the development clutch at the end of a job.
Note that this OPC refresh is a separate process from the one controlled by SP 3-920
and 3-921.
3-922-1 Mode Set *BCU [ 0 ∼ 2 / 1 / 1 /step ]
0: Disable (OPC refresh is not executed.)
1: Low coverage (OPC refresh is executed
after an output of low coverage ratio.)
2: Every time (OPC refresh is executed after
every job.)
3-975 [P Control Result] Process Control Self-check Result

Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.
All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “K Y C M”
e.g., 1 1 9 1: The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were successful
See the troubleshooting section for details
3-975-1 P Ctrl Result *BCU [ 0 to 9999 / - / 1/step ]
B147/B149/B190 5-34 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP4-XXX (Scanner)
4-008 [SubScanMagnification] Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
4-008-1 SubScanMagnification *CTL [ -1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step ] FA
4-010 [Leading Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-
scan direction.
4-010-1 Leading Edge Reg. *CTL [ -3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
4-011 [Side-to-Side Reg.] Side-to-Side registration Adjustment

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main
scan direction.
4-011-1 Side-to-Side Reg. *CTL [ -6.0 to 6.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
4-012 [Blank Margin] Blank Margin Adjustment

Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap
between the original and the scale.
4-012-1 Leading Edge *CTL [ 0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
4-012-2 Trailing Edge
4-012-3 Left
4-012-4 Right
4-013 [Scanner Free Run]
Service
Tables
Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
4-013-1 Lamp: OFF
4-013-2 Lamp: ON
4-017 [Scan Operation]

Makes one scan with generating an F-Gate signal and shading on or off in the
following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
Uses this SP mode to check if the F-Gate signal is properly generated (F-Gate tells
the engine to start printing data).
4-017-1 Shading ON
4-017-2 Shading OFF
SM 5-35 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
4-205 [Black ADS Level] DFU

4-205-1 Black ADS Level *CTL Do not change the setting. Use SP4-460.
4-301 [APS Operation Check]

Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors.
(See Input Check Table.)
4-301-1 APS Operation Check
4-303 [APS A5size Detection]

Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all
OFF.
4-303-1 APS A5size Check *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: No original
1: A5 Lengthwise
4-305 [8K/16K Detection] *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: A/B
1: 8K/16K
4-305-1 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
4-417 [IPU Test Pattern]

Selects the IPU test pattern.
4-417-1 IPU Test Pattern [ 0 to 16 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: Scanned image
1: Grid pattern
2: Slant grid pattern
3: Gradation main scan1
4: Gradation sub scan1
5: Gradation RBGYMCK
6: UCR pattern
7: Color patch 16 (1)
8: Color patch 16 (2)
9: Color patch 64
10: Grid pattern YMCK
11: Color patch YMCK
12: Gray pattern (1)
13: Gray pattern (2)
14: Gradation main scan2
15: Scanned + Grid pattern
16: Scanned + Gray scale
B147/B149/B190 5-36 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
4-440 [Saturation Adj.] Saturation Adjustment

Adjusts the level of saturation for copying.
4-440-1 Saturation Adj. * [ 0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step ]
CTL 0: High
1: Lowest
2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
5: Highest
4-460 [Digital Black ADS Level] *BCU [ 0 to 128 / 10 / 1 step]

4-460-1 Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode.
4-540 [Printer V] [ -127 to 128 / 1 / 1/step]

4-540-1 R:K *CTL Specifies the printer vector correction value.
4-540-2 R:C
4-540-3 R:M
4-540-4 R:Y
4-540-5 Y:K
4-540-6 Y:C
4-540-7 Y:M
4-540-8 Y:Y
4-540-9 G:K
4-540-10 G:C
4-540-11 G:M
4-540-12 G:Y
4-540-13 C:K
4-540-14 C:C
Service
Tables
4-540-15 C:M
4-540-16 C:Y
4-540-17 B:K
4-540-18 B:C
4-540-19 B:M
4-540-20 B:Y
4-540-21 M:K
4-540-22 M:C
4-540-23 M:M
4-540-24 M:Y
4-628 [R Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Red

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
4-628-1 R EVEN
4-628-2 R ODD
SM 5-37 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
4-629 [G Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Green

4-629-1 G EVEN Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the
4-629-2 G ODD controller for Green.
4-629-3 G BK EVEN
4-629-4 G BK ODD
4-630 [B Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Blue

4-630-1 B EVEN Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the
4-630-2 B ODD controller for Blue.
4-661 [R Gain Display (Last Adjust)] Gain Adjustment Red (Last Adjustment)
4-661-1 R EVEN *BCU This program displays the previous result of
4-661-2 R ODD SP4-628.
4-662 [G Gain Display (Last Adjust)] Gain Adjustment Green (Last Adjustment)
4-661-1 G EVEN *BCU This program displays the previous result of
4-661-2 G ODD SP4-629.
4-663 [B Gain Display (Last Adjust)] Gain Adjustment Blue (Last Adjustment)
4-661-1 B EVEN * This program displays the previous result of
4-661-2 B ODD BCU SP4-630.
4-685 [Reference Adj.: R] Reference Adjustment Red DFU

4-685-1 Reference Adj.: R *BCU Do not change the setting. Use SP4-885.
4-686 [Reference Adj.: G] Reference Adjustment Green DFU

4-686-1 Reference Adj.: G *BCU Do not change the setting. Use SP4-886.
4-687 [Reference Adj.: B] Reference Adjustment Blue DFU

4-687-1 Reference Adj.: B *CTL Do not change the setting. Use SP4-887.
B147/B149/B190 5-38 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
4-688 [DF: Density Adj.] DF Density Adjustment

Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is
different.
4-688-1 DF: Density Adj. *CTL [ 83 to 100 / 86 / 1 %/ step ]
4-800 [DF: Density Correction]

Sets a coefficient to adjust the image density level when scanning an image with the
ARDF.
4-800-1 R *CTL [ -20 to 20 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU
4-800-2 G
4-800-3 B
4-885 [Level Convert Adj.: R] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 49 / 1/step]
4-885-1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of red.
4-886 [Level Convert Adj.: G] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 49 / 1/step]
4-886-1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of green.
4-887 [Level Convert Adj.: B] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 49 / 1/step]
4-887-1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of blue.
Service
Tables
4-903 [Ver. Line Correct] *CTL [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]
4-903-1 This SP selects the level of the vertical line correction. The vertical line can occur
while the ARDF is feeding the originals from the original tray.
0: Deactivated
1: Very low
2: Low
3: High
4: Very highl
SM 5-39 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
4-904 [Scanner IPU Test]

4-904-1 Test1:Register Access 00: OK
11, 12, 13, 14, 15: NG
Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the scanner IPU board and displays
the result.
4-904-2 Test2: Image Path 00: OK
21, 22, 23, 24, 25: NG
Performs an image path check on the scanner IPU board and displays the result.
4-905 [Dither Selection]

Changes the parameters for error diffusion.
4-905-1 Dither Selection *CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU
4-907 [VPU Test Pattern]

4-907-1 Test Pattern: R [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step ]
0: Default (Scanned Image)
1: Cyan pattern
2: White pattern
3: Cyan Pattern 16 steps
4: Line pattern
Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.
4-907-2 Test Pattern: G [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step ]
1: Magenta pattern
2: White pattern
3: Magenta Pattern 16 steps
4: Line pattern
Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.
4-907-3 Test Pattern: B [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step ]
1: Yellow pattern
2: White pattern
3: Yellow Pattern 16 steps
4: Line pattern
Selects the test pattern generated by the scanner IPU board.
4-918 [Manual Gamma Adj.]

4-918-9 Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
See ‘Replacement and Adjustment – Gamma Correction – Copy Mode’ for how to
use.
Offset: Highlight *CTL [ 0 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step ]
Offset: Middle
Offset: Shadow
Offset: IDmax
Adjusts the option data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
Option: Highlight *CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step ] DFU
Option: Middle
Option: Shadow
Option: IDmax
B147/B149/B190 5-40 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
4-932 [Dot Position Cor.] Main Scan Dot Position Correction

Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD.
For details on this adjustment, see Replacement and Adjustment – Image Adjustment
- Scanner
4-932-1 R: Left *CTL [ 0 to 9 / 5 / 1 /step ]
4-932-2 R: Right
4-932-3 B: Left
4-932-4 B: Right
4-999 [ADF Scan Glass Dust Check]
4-999-1 Check ON/OFF Change *CTL 0: OFF/1: ON)

4-999-2 Detect Level [ 0 to 8 / 5 / 1 /step ]
0: Lowest ←→ 8: Highest
Service
Tables
SM 5-41 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP5-XXX (Mode)
5-024 [mm/inch Display Selection]
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
5-024-1 mm/inch display *CTL 0: mm (Europe/Asia)
1: inch (USA)
5-045 [Counter Method]

Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001.
NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the
counter value is negative or positive.
5-045-1 Counter Method *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Developments
1: Prints
5-046 [Rom Update Display]

Enables or disables the ROM Update utility. When enabled, this utility will be
displayed in the user program mode.
5-046-1 ROM Update *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 1 /- ] DFU
0: Enable
1: Disable
5-104 [A3/DLT Double Count]

Specifies whether the counter is double clicked for A3/DLT size prints.
5-104-1 Double Count *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Normal count
1: Double count
5-113 [Optional Counter Type] *CTL

5-113-1 This program specifies the counter type.
0: None 1: Key card (RK 3, 4) 2: Key card (down)
3: Prepaid card 4: Coin rack 5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor 9: Bar-code Printer
5-118 [Disable Copying] *CTL [0: Not disabled/1: Disabled]

5-118-1 This program disables copying.
5-120 Mode Clear Opt. Counter *CTL [0: Yes (removed)/1: Standby (installed but not
Removal used)/2: No (not removed)]
5-120-1 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or
remove an optional counter, check the settings.
5-121 Counter Up Timing *CTL [0: Feed/1: Exit]

5-121-1 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper feed”
and “paper exit” respectively.
5-127 APS Mode *CTL [0: Not disabled/1: Disabled]

5-127-1 This program disables the APS.
B147/B149/B190 5-42 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-128 Code Mode With Key/Card Option *CTL

5-128-1 DFU
5-131 Paper Size Type Selection *CTL [0: DOM (Japan)/1: USA /2: ERP (Europe)]
5-131-1 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB
system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).
5-150 By-Pass Length Setting *CTL 0: Off, 1: On

5-150-1 Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited
to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
5-162 App. Switch Method *CTL [0: Soft Key Set/1: Hard Key Set]
5-162-1 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
5-212 Page Numbering *CTL

This program adjusts the position of the page numbers.
5-212-3 Duplex Printout Right/Left Position [0 ∼99 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
5-212-4 Duplex Printout High/Low Position [0 ∼99 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
5-302 [Set Time]

Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
NA :-300 (New York)
Service
EU :+ 60 (Paris)
Tables
CH :+480 (Peking)
TW :+480 (Taipei)
AS :+480 (Hong Kong)
5-302-2 Set Time *CTL [ -1440 to 1440 / 60 / 1 min./step ]
#
5-404 [User Code Counter Clear]

Clear all counters for users.
5-404-1 UCodeCtrClr [0 to 1 / 1 / 0/step]
0: Not executed
1: Executed
SM 5-43 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-501 PM Alarm *CTL

5501-1 PM Alarm Level [0~9999 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Alarm off
1~9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1~9999) ≥ PM
counter
5501-2 Original Count Alarm 0: No alarm sounds
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing
through the ARDF ≥ 10,000
5-504 Jam Alarm *CTL

5504-1 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included).
[0~3 / 3 / 1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
5-505 Error Alarm *CTL [0~255 / 50 / 100 copies per step] Japan only
5-507 Supply Alarm *CTL

5-507-1 Paper Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, DFU
5-507-2 Staple Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, Japan only
5-507-3 Toner Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, DFU
5-507-128 Interval :Others [00250 ~ 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step] DFU
5-507-132 Interval :A3
5-507-141 Interval :B4
5-507-142 Interval :B5
5-507-160 Interval :DLT
5-507-164 Interval :LG
5-507-166 Interval :LT
5-507-172 Interval :HLT
5-508* CC Call *CTL

5-508-1* Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
5-508-2* Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
5-508-3* Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
5-508-4* Low Call Mode 0: Normal mode, 1: Reduced mode
Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number of
calls.
5-508-11* Jam Detection: Time Length [03~30 / 10 / 1]
Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper jam”. This
setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
B147/B149/B190 5-44 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-508-12* Jam Detection: Continuous [02~10 / 5 / 1]

Count
Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting is
enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
5-508-13* Door Open: Time Length [03~30 / 10 / 1]
Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
5-508-21* Jam Operation: Time Length 0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended.
5-508-22* Jam Operation: Continuous 0: Automatic Call
Count 1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when consecutive paper jams occur.
5-508-23* Door Operation: Time Length 0: OFF, 1: ON
Determines what happens if the door remains open (15 min.).
Displays a warning if set to ON. Pressing the call button will contact the service
center. This setting is available for setting only if SP5508 004 is set for 1.
5-610 [ACC Factory Setting]

5-610-4 Recall
Recalls the factory settings.
5-610-5 Overwrite
Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.
5-610-6 Previous Setting
Recalls the previous settings.
5-611 [Toner Ratio in 2C]

Adjusts the color balance of a single color (blue, green, or red) by changing the
proportion of color toner (C, M, and/or Y).
Service
Tables
5-611-1 B-C *CTL [ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]
5-611-2 B-M [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
5-611-3 G-C [ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]
5-611-4 G-Y [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
5-611-5 R-M [ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1 %/step ]
5-611-6 R-Y [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
5-801 [Memory Clear]

NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following this table.
5-801-1 All Clear
Resets all correction data for process control and all software counters, and
returns all modes and adjustments to their default values.
To execute, hold down  for over 3 seconds, and then turn the copier off and
on again.
Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the copier has
malfunctioned due to a damaged NVRAM.
5-801-2 ENG All
Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below.
5-801-3 SCS
Clears the system settings.
5-801-4 IMH Memory Clr
Clears IMH data. DFU
SM 5-45 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-801-5 MCS
Clears MCS data. DFU
5-801-6 Copier Application
Clears the copy application settings.
5-801-7 Fax Application
Clears the fax application settings.
5-801-8 Printer Application
Clears the printer application settings.
5-801-9 Scanner Application
Clears the scanner application settings.
5-801-10 Network Application
Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the
job login ID.
5-801-11 NCS
Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also),
SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
5-801-12 R-FAX
Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
5-801-13 IPU
Clears the IPU settings
5-801-14 Clear DCS Settings
5-801-15 Clear UCS Settings
5-802 EngineFreeRun
5-802-1 EngineFreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
NOTE:
• The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT
printing from the 1st tray. Therefore, paper should be loaded in the 1st tray, but
paper is not fed.
• The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a
test.
5-803 [Input Check] See section 5-3-2.

5-804 [Output Check] See section 5-3-3.
5-808 [Destination Code] Destination Code Display

Displays the destination code.
5-808-1 Destination *BCU
5-809 [SC Detection ON/OFF] SC Detection ON/OFF

Enable or disables the service call detection (SC codes will be ignored if disabling
this SP mode).
5-809-1 All *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Enable
1: Disable
5-809-2 Vib Motor
B147/B149/B190 5-46 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-810 [SC Reset]

Resets a type A service call condition.
NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
5-810-1 SC Reset
5-811 [Machine Serial No.] Machine Serial Number Display

Displays the machine serial number.
5-811-2 SN Display *BCU
5-812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]

5-812-1 Service *
CTL
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on
the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter” menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be
input).
5-812-2 Facsimile *CTL
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter” menu if
the Meter Charge mode is selected with SP5-930-1.
This can be up to 13 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be
input).
5-812-3 Supply *CTL
Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the
number and press #.
Press the  key to input a pause. Press the “Clear modes” key to delete the
telephone number.
Service
Tables
5-812-4 Operation *CTL
Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and
press #.
Press the  key to input a pause. Press the “Clear modes” key to delete the
telephone number.
5-816 [Remote Service]

5-816-1 I/F Setting *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] DFU
5-816-2 CE Call 0: Disable
5-816-3 Function Flag 1: Enable
5-816-4 Communication Test Call
5-816-5 Device Information Call
5-816-6 Device Information Call
Display Setting
5-816-7 SSL Disable
5-816-8 RCG Connect Timeout
5-816-9 RCG Write Timeout
5-816-10 RCG Read Timeout
5-816-11 Port 80 Enable
SM 5-47 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-821 [CSS-PI Device Co]

5-821-1 CSS-PI Device Co *CTL [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] DFU
5-821-2 RCG IP Address
5-824 [NV-RAM Data Upload]

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from
the NVRAM to a flash memory card.
5-824-1 # [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Not executed
1: Executed
5-825 [NV-RAM Data Download]

Downloads the UP and SP mode data from a flash memory card to the NVRAM
5-825-1 NvramDownload # [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Not executed
1: Executed
5-828 [Network Setting]

5-828-66 Job Spooling Clear: Start *CTL Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists
Time at power on.
0: Data is cleared
1: Automatically printed
5-828-69 Job Spooling (Protocol) Validates or invalidates the job spooling
function for each protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: (Reserved)
bit7: (Reserved)
5-828-74 Delete Password Deletes passwords.
5-828-84 Print Settings List Prints the NCS parameter list
5-828-90 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) Validates or invalidates the Telnet protocol.
5-828-91 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) Enables or disables the Web operation.
5-828-115 SMB Computer Name Specifies the SMB computer name.
5-828-116 SMB Work Group Name Specifies the SMB workgroup name.
B147/B149/B190 5-48 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-832 [HDD] HDD Initialization

5-832-1 HDD Formatting (ALL) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only
5-832-2 HDD Formatting (IMH) if there is a hard disk error.
5-832-3 HDD Formatting
(Thumbnail)
5-832-4 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
5-832-5 HDD Formatting (Printer
Fonts)
5-832-6 HDD Formatting (User Info)
5-832-7 Mail RX Data
5-832-8 Mail TX Data
5-832-9 HDD Formatting (Data for a
Design)
5-832-10 HDD Formatting (Log)
5-832-11 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
5-833 [Job Log On/Off]

Saves the result of the jobs in the job log. If this mode is enabled, the result is
written on the HDD. If no HDD is installed, this feature is disabled even if this SP is
set to ‘enabled’.
5-833-7 JobLog ON/OFF *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5-836 Capture Settings *CTL

5-836-1 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
Service
Tables
5-836-2 Panel Setting 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from
the initial system screen. The setting for SP58361 has priority
5-836-71 to 5-836-76, Copier and Printer Document Reduction
The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the
document management server via the MLB. [0~2 / 2 / 1]
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed
5-836-71 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 2: 1/4
5-836-72 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 0: 1/4
5-836-73 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 0: 1/4
5-836-74 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 2: 1/4
5-836-75 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 0: 1/4
5-836-76 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 0: 1/4
5-836-77 Reduction for Printer Color 1200
5-836-78 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200
5-836-81 to 5-836-86, Stored document format
The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to
the document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed
SM 5-49 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-836-081 Format for Copy Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,

2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
5-836-082 Format for Copy B&W Text 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
5-836-083 Format Copy B&W Other 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
5-836-084 Format for Printer Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
5-836-085 Format for Printer B&W 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
5-836-086 Format for Printer B&W HQ 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
5-836-091 Default for JPEG [5~95 / 50 / 1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
5-839 [IEEE1394]
5-839-4 Host Name *CTL DFU
5-839-7 Cycle Master DFU
5-839-8 BCR mode DFU
5-839-9 IRM 1394a Check DFU
5-839-10 Unique ID DFU
5-839-11 Logout DFU
5-839-12 Login DFU
5-839-13 Login MAX DFU
5-840 [IEEE 802.11b]

5-840-4 Current SSID *CTL
Enters a unique ID (up to 32 characters long) to identify the device when it is
operating in an area with another wireless LAN network.
5-840-6 Channel Max *CTL [ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
USA: 1 to 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the
upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU
Note: Do not change the setting
5-840-7 Channel Min *CTL [ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
USA: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the
lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU
Note: Do not change the setting
B147/B149/B190 5-50 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-840-11 WEP key Select *CTL [00~11 / 00 / 1 binary]

00: Key #1
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
Selects the WEP key.
5-840-18* SSID Key Check
5-840-20 WEP mode *CTL [0~1/0/1]
0: Max. 64-bit (10 characters)
1: Max. 128-bit (10, 26 characters)
Displayed only when the option 801.11b for
wireless LAN is installed.
Determines the operation mode of the WEP key.
5-841 [Supply Name Setting]

5-841-1 Tone Name Setting: Black *CTL Specifies supply names. These appear on the
5-841-2 Tone Name Setting: Cyan screen when the user presses the Inquiry
5-841-3 Tone Name Setting: button in the user tools screen.
Yellow
5-841-4 Tone Name Setting:
Magenta
5-841-5 OrgStamp
5-841-7 OrgStamp
5-841-11 Staple Std1
Service
Tables
5-844 [USB]
5-844-1 Transfer Rate *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Auto Change
1: Full speed
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
5-844-2 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU
5-844-3 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU
5-844-4 Device Release Number *CTL Displays the development release version
number. DFU
SM 5-51 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-845 Delivery Server Setting *CTL

Provides items for delivery server settings.
5-845-1 FTP Port No. [0~65535 / 3670 / 1]
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
5-845-2 IP Address (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
5-845-6 Delivery Error Display Time [0~999 / 300 / 1]
Netfiles:
Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed
when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and
an external device.
5-845-8 IP Address (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255
Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the
secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP
address without reference to the DNS setting.
5-845-9 Delivery Server Model [0~4/ 0 / 1]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
5-845-10 Delivery Svr Capability [0~255 / 0 / 1]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits Changes the
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible capability of
the registered
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible that the I/O
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists device
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists registered.
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to “0”)
B147/B149/B190 5-52 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-846 UCS Settings *CTL

5-846-1 Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is
only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or
IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
5-846-2 Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable.
After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the
machine off and on.
5-846-3 Maximum Entries [2000~50000/ 2000 /1]
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared,
and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
5-846-4 Delivery Server Model 0: Not used, 1:SG1 Provided,
2: SG1 Package, 3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Changes the model of the transfer server registered for the I/O device.
5-846-5 Delivery Server Capability Bit 7 = 1 Comment information
Bit 6 = 1 Address direct entry possible
Bit 5 = 1 Mail Rx confirmation possible
Bit 4 = 1 Address book auto update
Bit 3 = 1 Fax Rx function
[0~255 / 0 / 2]
Changes the capability of the server registered for the I/O device.
5-846-6 Delivery Server Retry Timer [0~255/ 0 /1]
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
Service
Tables
5-846-7 Delivery Server Retry Times [0~255/ 0 /1]
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
5-846-8 Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000~50000 / 2000 / 1]
Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information
managed by UCS.
5-846-10 LDAP Search Timeout [1~255 / 60 / 1]
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
5-846-50 Initialize All Directory Info. Clears all directory information managed by UCS,
including all user codes.
5-846-70 LDAP Attribute (Name) Allows you to enter a search attribute other than
the default mail (cn) for the LDAP server search.
5-846-71 LDAP Attribute (Mail) Allows you to enter a search attribute other than
the default mail address (mail) for the LDAP
server search.
5-846-72 LDAP Attribute (Fax) Allows you to enter a search attribute other than
the default facsimile telephone number
(FacsimileTelephoneNumber) for the LDAP server
search.
5-846-73 LDAP Attribute (Organization) Allows you to enter a search attribute other than
the default organization name (o) for the LDAP
server search.
5-846-74 LDAP Attribute (Organizational Allows you to enter a search attribute other than
Unit) the default organization unit name (ou) for the
LDAP server search.
SM 5-53 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-846-80 Backup FCU Backs up all directory information on the HDD to

the FCU ROM.
5-846-90 Plain Data Forbidden Allows you to prevent the address from plain data.
This is a security function that prevents
unauthorized access to address book data.
0: No check. Address book data not protected.
1: Check. Allows operation of UCS without data
from HDD or SC card and without creating
address book information with plain data.
5-847 Net File Resolution Reduction *CTL

5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data transferred
externally by the Net File page reference function. [0~2 / 2 / 1]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile.
“Net files” are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
5-847-1 Rate for Copy Color 0: 1x
5-847-2 Rate for Copy B&W Text 1: 1/2x
5-847-3 Rate for Copy B&W Other 2: 1/3x
5-847-4 Rate for Printer Color 3: 1/4x
5-847-5 Rate for Printer B&W
5-847-6 Rate for Printer B&W HQ
5-847-7 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi
5-847-8 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi
5-847-21 Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This
function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5~95 / 50 / 1]
5-848 Web Service *CTL

5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5847 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
5-848-1 Access Control: Netfile Bit switch settings.
Protocol
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router
have no effect on capture.
5-848-2 Access Control: Repository 0000: No access control
(only Lower 4 bits) 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
5-848-3 Access Control: DocBox Print Switches access control on and off.
(only Lower 4 bits) 0000: OFF
5-848-4 Access Control: User Directory
(only Lower 4 bits)
5-848-5 Access Control: Delivery Input
(only Lower 4 bits)
5-848-6 Access Control: Fax Control
(only Lower 4 bits)
5-848-7 Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax
(Lower 4 bits)
B147/B149/B190 5-54 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-848-8 Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Scan Switches access control on and off.
(Lower 4 bits) 0000: OFF
5-848-9 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4
bits)
5-848-11 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Sys
(Lower 4 bits)
5-848-12 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Copy
(Lower 4 bits)
5-848-13 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Fax
(Lower 4 bits)
5-848-14 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Printer
(Lower 4 bits)
5-848-15 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl
Scanner (Lower 4 bits)
5-848-21 Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4
bits)
5-848-100 Repository: max size of [1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1/K]
download image
5-849 Installation Date *CTL

5-849-1 Display DFU
5-849-2 Switch to Print DFU
5-850 Address Book Function *CTL Japan Only

5-850-3 Replacement of Circuit Classification
The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all at
once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason the
G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
Service
Tables
5-853 Stamp Data Download
Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM
and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This
SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
Note: This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
5-856 [Remote ROM Update]

Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable
5-856-2 Local Port *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5-857 Debug Log Save Function *CTL

5-857-1 On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: ON, 1: OFF
Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until
this feature is switched on.
5-857-2 Target (1:IC Card 2:HDD) 1:IC Card, 2:HDD
Select “1” (IC Card) if an HDD unit is not installed in the machine, or if the HDD unit
is temporarily out of service. The IC card can store only 4 MB so use the HDD
selection.
SM 5-55 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-857-5 Save to HDD DFU

Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card.
5-857-9 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
5-857-10 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
5-857-11 Erase HDD Debug Data
5-857-12 Erase SD Card Debug Data
5-857-13 Free Space on SD Card
5-857-14 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
5-857-15 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
5-857-16 Make HDD Debug
5-857-17 Make SD Debug
5-858 Debug Save When *CTL

These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error
codes.
5-858-1 Engine SC Error Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors.
5-858-2 Controller SC Error Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors.
5-858-3 Any SC Error [0~65535 / 0 / 1]
5-858-4 Jam Stores jam errors.
5-859 Debug Save Key No. *CTL

5-859-1 Key 1 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files
5-859-2 Key 2 for functions that use common memory on the
5-859-3 Key 3 controller board. ( 5.3.1)
5-859-4 Key 4 [-9999999~9999999 / 0 / 1]
5-859-5 Key 5
5-859-6 Key 6
5-859-7 Key 7
5-859-8 Key 8
5-859-9 Key 9
5-859-10 Key 10
B147/B149/B190 5-56 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-860 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 *CTL

5-860-20 Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1~168 / 72 / 1]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception.
The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received
during this prescribed time.
5-860-21 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0~1 / 1 /1]
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
0: No
1: Yes
5-860-22 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0~1 / 0 / 1]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated
account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. “From” item not switched.
1: Yes. “From item switched.
5-870 Common Key Info Writing *CTL

Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS
specifications.
5-871 HDD Function Disable DFU *CTL [0~1 / 0 / 1] (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the HDD.
After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable the
setting.
Note: This SP is intended for use during the installation of the security DIMM, an
option that is not yet available.
Service
Tables
5-873 SD Card Appli Move
5-873-1 Move Exec This SP copies the application programs from the SD
card in SD Card Slot 3.
5-873-2 Undo Exec This SP copies the application programs from the SD
card in SD Card Slot 3. Use this menu to
5-907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name] Plug & Play Name Selection
Specifies the manufacturer and model name.
5-907-1 Plug/Play *BCU [ 0 to 11 / 0 / 1/step ] FA
MF Model Name NetBeui
0 Ricoh Aficio 2232C Aficio2232C
1 Ricoh Aficio 2238C Aficio2238C
2 Savin C3324 C3324
3 Savin C3328 C3328
4 Gestetner DSc332 DSc332
5 Gestetner DSc338 DSc338
6 NRG DSc332 DSc332
7 NRG DSc338 DSc338
8 Infotec ISC 2432 ISC2432
9 Infotec ISC 2838 ISC2838
10 Lanier LD232c LD232c
11 Lanier LD238c LD238c
SM 5-57 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-913 Switchover Permission Time *CTL [3~30 / 3 / 1 s]

Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the
operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain control
of the display.
5-961 Large Capacity Exit Mode *CTL 0: OFF, 1: ON

Selects whether or not all stapled copies are sent to Shift Tray 1 when the Two-Tray
finisher is installed.
5-967 Copy Server Set Function *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF

Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents
image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this
setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.
5-974 [Cherry Server]

Specifies which version of ScanRouter, “Lite” or “Full”, is installed.
5-974-1 Cherry Server Setting *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Lite
1: Full
5-989 [Loop Back Test]

Executes a communication test with peripherals by using a special tool (connector)
which is unique for each peripheral.
The machine checks if the communication with the peripherals is OK or NG; then
displays the result.
DFU
5-989-1 Duplex
5-989-3 Finisher
5-989-4 PSU
5-989-5 ADF
5-990 [SP print mode]

Prints out the SMC sheets.
5-990-1 All (Data List)
5-990-2 SP (Mode Data List)
5-990-3 User Program
5-990-4 Logging Data
5-990-5 Diagnostic Report
5-990-6 Non-Default
5-990-7 NIB Summary
5-990-8 Net File Log
5-990-21 Copier User Program
5-990-22 Scanner SP
5-990-23 Scanner User Program
B147/B149/B190 5-58 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-991 [Jam OFF/ON] Jam ON/OFF

Enables or disables jam detection.
5-991 1 Jam OFF/ON [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Enable
1: Disable
5-993 [Line Position Adj.] Line Position Adjustment

Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])
M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: Magnification
For example: M Reg = Main scan registration
5-993-1 Mode Selection *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: Never done
1: Done at a) all process control self checks
except after toner end recovery and developer
initialization, b) new PCU detected, and c) the
temperature has changed by 5°C since the last
adjustment
2: As for setting ‘1’, except it is not done during
self-checks. However, it is done at the initial
process control self check.
Specifies when the automatic line position adjustment is done.
The size of the 5°C difference can be changed with SP5-993-3.
5-993-2 Execute
Use to make a line position adjustment.
5-993-3 Temperature *BCU [ 3 to 15 / 5 / 1/oC]
Specifies the temperature for starting the line positioning adjustment.
The line position adjustment automatically starts when the temperature differs by the
amount specified in this SP mode from the temperature when the last adjustment was
done.
Service
Tables
There are two thermistors on the laser optics-housing unit. The thermistor close to the
fusing unit monitors the temperature for this adjustment.
5-993-4 Interrupt *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during a print job when the
temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature at
the last adjustment.
5-993-5 Stand-by *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during stand-by mode when the
temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature at
the last adjustment.
5-993-6 Job Start *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment just before starting a color print job
when the temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the
temperature when the machine woke up from energy saver mode.
SM 5-59 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-993-7 Result *BCU

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment in 4 digits.
First and second digits: Error detected on the rear ID sensor

Third and fourth digits: Error detected on the center ID sensor
Fifth and sixth digits: Error detected on the front ID sensor
010101
The 6th digit ↑ ↑ The 1st digit
Refer to the Troubleshooting section for more details about the two-digit codes.
5-993-8 Exe. Counter *BCU
Displays how many times the line position adjustment has been executed.
Counts up by +1 normally.
After a forced adjustment and a PCU replacement, it counts up +3
Also includes adjustments done at the factory.
5-993-9 Error Counter *BCU Displays how many times errors have been
detected during the line position adjustment.
The way that the auto line position adjustment is done can be adjusted using the
following SP modes (SP5-993-010 to 021). These are coefficients used for the
adjustment.
Normally, do not change except if the automatic adjustment gives poor results
immediately after installing a new optics housing unit. Change the value then do a
forced line position adjustment (SP 5-993-2) to check the effects of the changes.
Example: If magenta is always shifted one dot to the left, reduce 5-993-11 by 1.
5-993-10 M Reg. [Y] *BCU A fine adjustment to the main-scan registration.
5-993-11 M Reg. [M] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA
5-993-12 M Reg. [C] *BCU 1 dot = 20µ
5-993-13 M Mag. [Y] *BCU A fine adjustment to the main-scan
5-993-14 M Mag. [M] *BCU magnification.
5-993-15 M Mag. [C] *BCU [ -100 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 %/step ] FA
NOTE: The setting changes in this SP mode
will be affect the next line position
adjustment.
5-993-16 S Reg. 600[Y] *BCU A fine adjustment to the sub-scan registration
5-993-17 S Reg. 600[M] *BCU for each color (color registration).
5-993-18 S Reg. 600[C] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA
5-993-19 S Reg. 1200[Y] *BCU 600dpi: 1 dot = 40µ
5-993-20 S Reg. 1200[M] *BCU 1200 dpi: 1 dot = 20µ
5-993-21 S Reg. 1200[C] *BCU
5-993-22 Interrupt *BCU [ 10 to 250 / 100 / 10 sheets/step ]
Specifies the number of sheets to be printed before a line position adjustment is done
during a print job.
SP 5-993-4 must be set to ‘enabled’.
When the temperature difference meets the conditions specified in SP5-993-3, the
machine starts counting the number of prints in the job. The machine interrupts the
print job and does the line position adjustment if the number of prints exceeds the
number specified in this SP mode.
If the counted number of prints does not exceed the number specified, the machine
resets the counter, then continues to monitor the temperature and does the line
position adjustment next time.
5-993-24 Mscan Lgth Det *BCU [ 100 to 990 / 211 / 10 sec/step ]
Performs the main scan length detection when the polygon motor has operated
consecutively for the time specified in this SP mode.
5-993-25 Drm Gear Phase *BCU [ 0 to 345 / 0 / 15 degrees/step] DFU
Adjusts the phases of the black drum gear and the color drum gear.
B147/B149/B190 5-60 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-993-26 Initialization *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: Disable
1: Enable
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during initialization.
5-993-27 Toner Refresh *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enables or disables the toner refreshing operation.
Repetitive line position adjustments can cause abnormal outputs such as white spots.
To prevent this, toner is consumed and supplied after line position adjustment.
5-993-31 PPS: 125 This SP checks the transfer PPS in the 125-mm/s mode.
5-993-32 PPS Set: 125 *BCU [6043 to 6166 / 6105 / 1 step]
This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the 125-mm/s mode.
5-993-33 PPS: 62.5 This SP checks the transfer PPS in the 62.5-mm/s mode.
5-993-34 PPS Set: 62.5 *BCU [6043 to 6166 / 6105 / 1 step]
This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the 62.5-mm/s mode.
5-993-35 Color Adj level *BCU [LOW, MID, HIGH ]
This SP specifies the level of color adjustment. This SP sets the following SPs as
listed.
HI MID LOW
SP3-906-001 200 200 255
SP3-906-002 200 0 0
SP3-906-003 200 0 0
SP3-906-004 480 480 480
SP3-906-005 1.00 1.00 0.5
SP3-993-001 1 1 1
SP3-993-003 3 5 7
SP3-993-004 1 1 1
Service
SP3-993-005 0 0 0
Tables
SP3-993-006 1 1 0
SP3-993-022 100 100 250
SP3-993-024 105 211 422
SP3-993-026 1 0 0
5-994 [Unit Detection ON/OFF] Maintenance Unit Detection ON/OFF

5-994-1 Dev/PCU *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric DFU
# 0: Enable
1: Disable
Enables or disables PCU and development unit detection.
NOTE: If this mode is disabled, new unit detection also does not function. Use this
mode as a temporary measure, only when the micro-switches are defective.
5-994-2 Oil Supply Unit *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
# 0: Enable
1: Disable
NOTE: Use this mode as a temporary measure, only when the unit detection
mechanism is defective.
SM 5-61 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-995 [ColorGapAdj2] Color Gap Adjustment 2

5-995-20 Trans Drv FB *BCU Enables or disables the transfer belt feedback
feature.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-997 [Test Pattern]

5-997-1 Tray Selection [ 0 to 4 / 1 / 1/step ]
0: By-pass Table 1: Tray 1
2: Tray 2 3: Tray 3
4: Tray 4
Selects the tray for making a test print.
NOTE: The machine makes a test pattern on the paper size loaded in the selected
paper tray.
5-997 2 Pattern [ 0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: None
1: 1-dot sub-scan line
3: 1-dot main-scan line
5: 1-dot grid pattern (Fine)
6: 2-dot grid pattern (Fine)
7. 1-dot grid pattern (Rough)
9. 1-dot slant grid pattern
11. 1-dot pattern
12. 2-dot pattern
13. 4-dot pattern
14. 1-dot trimming pattern
16. Cross stitch: sub-scan
17. Cross stitch: main-scan
18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)
19. Belt pattern (Vertical)
20. Checkered Flag
21. Grey scale (Vertical)
22. Grey scale (Horizontal)
23. Solid
Selects a test pattern.
5-997-3 Single Color [0 to 6 / 6 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Red 1: Green
2: Blue 3: Yellow
4: Magenta 5: Cyan
6: Black
Selects the color for making a test pattern.
5-997-4 Color Mode [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Full Color 1: Single Color
Selects the color mode for making a test print.
5-997-5 Resolution [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: 600x600 1: 1800x600
2: 1200x1200
Selects the resolution for making a test print.
B147/B149/B190 5-62 SM
Rev. 06/2004 COPY SERVICE MODE
5-997-6 By-pass Paper Size [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric

0: A4 LEF 1: LT LEF
2: A3 3: DLT
Selects the paper size for making a test pattern from the by-pass table.
5-997-7 Print
Prints the test pattern with the settings specified with SP5-997-001 to 006.
NOTE: When exiting the SP mode, the test print mode is automatically canceled.

5-998-1 ENG Setting Clears the engine settings except for counters.
5-998-2 ENG Counter Clears all counters.
5-999 New Unit Set *BCU [0: Disable/1: Enable]

#
5-999-1 PCU: Bk This program makes the machine to start the
5-999-2 PCU: Y initialization processing for a newly installed
⇒ 5-999-3
5-999-4
PCU: M
PCU: C
unit. You set “1: Enable” before installing a
new unit.
5-999-5 Dev. U: Bk
5-999-6 Dev. U: Y
5-999-7 Dev. U: M
5-999-8 Dev. U: C
5-999-9 Fuser
Service
Tables
SM 5-63 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
6-006 [DF Registration Adj.] DF Registration Adjustment
Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.
6-006-1 Side-to-Side *CTL [ -3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
6-006-2 Leading Edge [ -42 to 42 / 0 / 1 /step ]
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and rear
sides.
6-006-3 Buckle: Duplex Front *CTL [ -42 to 42 / 0 / 1 /step ]
6-006-4 Buckle: Duplex Rear [ -45 to 45 / 0 / 1 /step ]
Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.
6-006-5 Rear Edge Erase *CTL [ -20 to 10 / -3 / 1 /step ]
6-007 [ADF Input Check]

Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF.
6-007-1 Group 1 5.2.2
6-007-2 Group 2
6-007-3 Group 3
6-008 [ADF Output Check]

Activates the electrical components for functional check.
It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time.
6-008-1 Fee-in Motor Fwd.
6-008-2 Feed-in Motor Rev.
6-008-3 Drive Motor Fwd.
6-008-4 Reverse Motor Fwd.
6-008-5 Reverse Motor Rev.
6-008-6 Feed Clutch
6-008-7 Inverter Solenoid
6-008-8 Pick-up Motor Fwd.
6-008-9 Pick-up Motor Rev.
6-009 [DF Free Run]

Performs a DF free run in duplex mode or stamp mode.
6-009-1 Duplex Mode
6-009-2 Stamp Mode
6-010 [Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment

Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
6-010-1 Stamp Position Adj. *CTL [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]
6-016 [Original Size Priority] Original Size Detection Priority

Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original
sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
B147/B149/B190 5-64 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
6-016-1 Original Size Priority *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: Setting 1
1: Setting 2
Setting 1 Setting 2
Bit 7 A4 (L) LT (L)
Bit 6 11" x 15" DLT (L)
Bit 5 DLT (L) 11" x 15"
Bit 4 LT (S) US Exec (S)
Bit 3 LT (L) 8" x 10" (L)
Bit 2 LG (L) F4 (L)
Bit 1 A4 (L) 16K (L)
Bit 0 8K (L) DLT (L)
Bits used for detection differ depending on

destination as shown below.
Bit 7 to 6: Only for Japan
Bit 5 to 2: Only for US
Bit 1 to 0: Only for EU/AA
6-017 [DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment

Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.
6-017-1 DF Magnification Adj. *CTL [ -5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step ]
6-110 [Punch Position]

Adjusts the punching position.
Punch 1
US: 2 punch holes
Service
Europe: 2 punch holes
Tables
North Europe: 4 punch holes
Punch 2
US: 3 punch holes
Europe: 4 punch holes
Increment: Holes move toward the paper center.
Decrement: Holes move toward the paper edge.
6-110 1 MF Fin 1 *BCU [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]
6-110 2 MF Fin 2 *BCU
6-110 3 Booklet Fin [ -2.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]
6-111 [Staple Position]

Adjusts the stapling position.
Increment: Staple position moves toward the edge of paper.
Decrement: Staple position moves toward the center of paper.
NOTE: Although the adjustable range is ±3.5 mm, the stapling position can be
changed only by 1.0 mm when stapling one position at the front or rear side even
when the input value is more than 1.0.
6-111-1 MF Fin *BCU [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]
6-111-2 Booklet Fin [ -3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step ]
6-112 [Fold Position] *BCU [ -3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step ]
SM 5-65 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
6-111-1 A3/DLT Adjusts the folding positions of the optional

6-111-2 B4/LG booklet finisher.
6-112-3 A4/LT
6-112-4 A3/DLT
6-112-5 B4/LG
6-112-6 A4/LT
6-901 [Multi Bin Set]

Specifies whether or not the optional multi-bin output tray is installed. When installing
the multi-bin output tray, this SP mode should be set to “1”.
6-901-1 Multi Bin Set *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not installed
1: Installed
B147/B149/B190 5-66 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP7-XXX (Data Log)

7-001 Working Time *BCU Display: 00000000~99999999 min
The number of prints and drive time for drum revolutions can be obtained by counting
the main motor revolution time. If the amount of time required for the drum to revolve
to print 1 copy increases, this data combined with the number of copies can be used
to analyze problems and could be useful for future product development.
7-002 [Original Counter]

Displays the total original count (number of originals fed) for the selected mode.
7-002-1 Total *CTL
7-002-2 Copy
7-002-3 Fax
7-002-4 Doc. Svr. Application
7-002-5 Scanner
7-002-6 Others
7-003 [Print Counter] Meter Charge Counter

(Print, Development)
Displays the values of the color counters.
7-003-1 Total Count *CTL [ -9999 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ]
7-003-2 Copy: B&W
7-003-4 Copy: Full Color
7-003-5 FAX: B&W
7-003-7 Print: B&W
7-003-8 Print: Full Color
7-003-10 Development: CMY *CTL These SP modes are development counters for
7-003-11 Development: K the meter charge mode.
7-003-12 Copy: Single Color *CTL Displays the values of the color counters.
Service
7-003-13 Copy: Twin Color
Tables
7-003-20 Total: Full Color *CTL These SP modes are used for Japanese
7-003-21 Total: B&W Single market only.
7-003-22 Total: Single
7-003-23 Total: B&W *CTL This SP mode is print counters for the meter
charge mode.
7-003-24 Copy: Full Color *CTL These SP modes are used for Japanese
7-003-25 Print: Full Color market only.
7-003-26 Copy: Color *CTL These SP modes are print counters for the
7-003-27 Copy: B/W meter charge mode.
7-003-28 Print: Color
7-003-29 Print: B&W
7-003-30 Total: Color Total
7-007 [Other Counter]

Displays counter values.
7-007-1 Duplex *CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
7-007-2 A3/DLT
7-007-3 Staple
7-101 [Print Count–Paper Size] Paper Size Counter

Displays the counter values for each paper size.
7-101-5 A4 LEF *CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
SM 5-67 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-101-6 A5 LEF
7-101-14 B5 LEF
7-101-38 LT LEF
7-101-44 HLT LEF
7-101-132 A3 SEF
7-101-133 A4 SEF
7-101-134 A5 SEF
7-101-141 B4 SEF
7-101-142 B5 SEF
7-101-160 DLT SEF
7-101-164 LG SEF
7-101-166 LT SEF
7-101-172 HLT SEF
7-101-255 Other
7-105 [Print Count–Paper Size] Paper Size Counter

Displays the counter values for each paper size.
7-105-1 Normal *CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
7-105-2 Recycled
7-105-3 Special
7-105-4 Colour
7-105-5 Letterhead
7-105-6 Letterhead
7-105-7 Label
7-105-8 Thick
7-105-9 Used
7-105-11 Index
7-105-12 Others
7-201 [Total Scan Counter]

Displays the total number of scans.
7-201-1 Total Scan Counter *CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 scan/step ]
7-204 [Print Counter–Paper Tray] Paper Feed Section Counter

Displays the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
7-204-1 Bypass *CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
7-204-2 Tray 1
7-204-3 Tray 2
7-204-4 Tray 3
7-204-5 Tray 4
7-204-6 Duplex
7-205 [Total ADF Counter]

Displays the total number of originals fed by the ARDF.
7-205-1 ADF Total Counter *CTL
7-206 [Staple Counter]

7-206-1 Normal Staple *CTL Displays the number of stapler operations.
B147/B149/B190 5-68 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-206-2 Binding Staple
7-209 [Punch Counter]

Displays the number of times hole punching has been done.
7-209-1 Punch *CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ]
7-401 [Total SC Counter]

Displays the number of SC codes detected.
7-401-1 SC Counter *CTL [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ]
7-403 [SC History]

Logs the SC codes detected.
The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be
seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
7-403-1 Latest *CTL
7-403-2 Latest 1
7-403-3 Latest 2
7-403-4 Latest 3
7-403-5 Latest 4
7-403-6 Latest 5
7-403-7 Latest 6
7-403-8 Latest 7
7-403-9 Latest 8
7-403-10 Latest 9
7-502 [Total Paper Jam Counter]

Displays the total number of jams detected.
Service
Tables
7-502-1 Total Jam *CTL [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
7-503 [Total Original Jam Counter]

Displays the total number of original jams.
7-503-1 Original Jam counter *CTL [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step ]
7-504 [Paper Jam Location]

D: Duplex, MB: Mail Box, F; Finisher, E: External, I: Internal
ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected.
7-504-3 Tray 1: ON *CTL
7-504-4 Tray 2: ON
7-504-5 Tray 3/LCT: ON
7-504-6 Tray 4: ON
7-504-8 Regist.: ON
7-504-9 External Tray: ON
7-504-10 Internal Tray: ON
7-504-11 Duplex: ON
7-504-12 Duplex Exit 1: ON
SM 5-69 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE

7-504-15 Duplex Feed: ON
7-504-51 Tray 1: OFF
7-504-52 Tray 2: OFF
7-504-53 Tray 3/LCT: OFF
7-504-54 Tray 4: OFF
7-504-61 Registration: OFF
7-504-63 External Tray: OFF
7-504-64 Internal Tray: OFF
7-504-65 Duplex: OFF
7-504-66 Duplex Exit 1: OFF
7-504-69 Duplex Feed: OFF
7-504-100 Finisher Entrance
7-504-101 Finisher Shift Tray 1
7-504-102 Finisher Shift Tray 2
7-504-103 Finisher Staple
7-504-104 Finisher Exit
7-504-105 Finisher Drive
7-504-106 Finisher Tray Up/Down
7-504-107 Finisher Jogger
7-504-108 Finisher Staple
7-504-109 Finisher Exit
7-504-110 Finisher Punch
7-504-111 Finisher Jam Clear
7-504-120 Finisher 120
7-504-121 Finisher 121
7-504-122 Finisher 122
7-504-123 Finisher 123
7-504-124 Finisher 124
7-504-125 Finisher 125
7-504-126 Finisher 126
7-504-127 Finisher 127
7-504-128 Finisher 128
7-504-129 Finisher 129
7-504-130 Finisher 130
7-504-131 Finisher 131
7-505 [Original Jam Detection]

Displays the total number of original jams by location.
7-505-1 At Power On *CTL
7-505-3 Skew Correction Sensor (On Check)
7-505-4 Interval Sensor (On Check)
7-505-5 Registration Sensor (On Check)
7-505-6 Relay Sensor (On Check)
7-505-7 Inverter Sensor (On Check)
7-505-53 Skew Correction Sensor (Off Check)
7-505-54 Interval Sensor (Off Check)
7-505-55 Registration Sensor (Off Check)
7-505-56 Relay Sensor (Off Check)
7-505-57 Inverter Sensor (Off Check)
B147/B149/B190 5-70 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-506 [Jam Count by Paper Size]

Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
7-506-5 A4 LEF *CTL [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
7-506-6 A5 LEF
7-506-14 B5 LEF
7-506-38 LT LEF
7-506-44 HLT LEF
7-506-132 A3 SEF
7-506-133 A4 SEF
7-506-134 A5 SEF
7-506-141 B4 SEF
7-506-412 B5 SEF
7-506-160 DLT SEF
7-506-164 LG SEF
7-506-166 LT SEF
7-506-172 HLT SEF
7-506-255 Others
7-507 [Plotter Jam History]

Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
7-507-1 Latest *CTL
7-507-2 Latest 1
7-507-3 Latest 2
7-507-4 Latest 3
7-507-5 Latest 4
7-507-6 Latest 5
7-507-7 Latest 6
7-507-8 Latest 7
Service
Tables
7-507-9 Latest 8
7-507-10 Latest 9
7-508 [Original Jam History]

Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
7-508-1 Latest *CTL
7-508-2 Latest-1
7-508-3 Latest-2
7-508-4 Latest-3
7-508-5 Latest-4
7-508-6 Latest-5
7-508-7 Latest-6
7-508-8 Latest-7
7-508-9 Latest-8
7-508-10 Latest-9
7-801 [ROM No./Firmware Version]

Displays the version of each firmware
7-80-255 Firmware Version
SM 5-71 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-803 [PM Counter]

(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Oil Supply: Oil Supply Unit, Fusing:
Fusing Unit, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed.
Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot be
deactivated.
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is
installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM
Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 9) and is reset to “0”.
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-1 to 9.
7-803-1 Paper *BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
7-803-2 S: PCU [K]
7-803-3 S: PCU [Y]
7-803-4 S: PCU [M]
7-803-5 S: PCU [C]
7-803-6 S: Dev. [K]
7-803-7 S: Dev. [Y]
7-803-8 S: Dev. [M]
7-803-9 S: Dev. [C]
7-803-10 S: Oil Supply
7-803-11 PF By-pass
7-803-12 PF Tray 1
7-803-13 PF Tray 2
7-803-14 PF Tray 3
7-803-15 PF Tray 4
7-803-16 S: Fusing
7-803-17 S: Transfer
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current
maintenance unit.
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is
installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM
Counter - Previous (SP7-906-10 to 20) and is reset to “0”. The total number of
revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-10 to 20.
7-803-18 R: PCU [K] *BCU Target Revolution: 300,000
7-803-19 R: PCU [Y] Target Revolution: 319,000
7-803-20 R: PCU [M] Target Revolution: 319,000
7-803-21 R: PCU [C] Target Revolution: 319,000
7-803-22 R: Dev. [K] Target Revolution: 1,142,000
7-803-23 R: Dev. [Y] Target Revolution: 1,146,000
7-803-24 R: Dev. [M] Target Revolution: 1,146,000
7-803-25 R: Dev. [C] Target Revolution: 1,146,000
7-803-26 R: Oil Supply Target Revolution: 2,559,000
7-803-27 R: Fusing Target Revolution: 8,397,000
7-803-28 R: Transfer
Displays the number of sheets printed until the waste toner bottle becomes full or
toner runs out.
7-803-29 S: Waste Toner *BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
7-803-30 S: Toner [K]
7-803-31 S: Toner [Y]
7-803-32 S: Toner [M]
B147/B149/B190 5-72 SM
7-803-33 S: Toner [C]

Displays the total operating time for the toner attraction pump.
7-803-34 Toner Supply[K] *BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 s/step ]
7-803-35 Toner Supply[Y]
7-803-36 Toner Supply[M]
7-803-37 Toner Supply[C]
Displays the value given by the following formula:
(Current revolution ÷ Target revolution) × 100, where “Current revolution” is the
current value for the counter of the part, and “Target revolution” is the values of SP7-
803-17 through 27. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been
used up.
The R% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter
is still less than 100%.
Oil supply unit: When the R% counter reaches 100%, it enters the near-end condition,
not the end condition. The end condition occurs some number of rotations after this
(not adjustable).
NOTE: The machine internally adjusts or compensates as necessary, depending on
conditions of machine usage. Due to this, at the oil supply unit near-end
condition, the R% counter of the oil supply unit can be 100%, lower than
100%, or higher than 100%.
7-803-38 R(%): PCU [K] *BCU
7-803-39 R(%): PCU [Y]
7-803-40 R(%): PCU [M]
7-803-41 R(%): PCU [C]
7-803-42 R(%): Dev [K]
7-803-43 R(%): Dev [Y]
7-803-44 R(%): Dev [M]
7-803-45 R(%): Dev [C]
7-803-46 R(%): Oil Spply
7-803-47 R(%): Fusing
Service
Tables
7-803-48 S: Trans Cln
7-803-49 R: Trans Cln
7-804 [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear

(Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Clears the PM counter.
⇒ Press the Enter key after the machine asks “Execute?,” which will store the PM
counter value in SP7-906-1 to 25 (PM Counter – Previous), and reset the value
of the current PM counter to 0.

7-804-1 Paper
7-804-2 PCU [K]
7-804-3 PCU [Y]
7-804-4 PCU [M]
7-804-5 PCU [C]
7-804-6 Dev. [K]
7-804-7 Dev. [Y]
7-804-8 Dev. [M]
7-804-9 Dev. [C]
7-804-10 Oil Supply
7-804-11 PF By-pass
7-804-12 PF Tray 1
SM 5-73 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-804-13 PF Tray 2
7-804-14 PF Tray 3
7-804-15 PF Tray 4
7-804-16 Fusing
7-804-17 Transfer
7-804-18 Trans Cln
7-804-50 All
7-807 [SC/Jam Counter Reset]

Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
7-807-1 SC/Jam Clear
7-808 [Counter Reset]

Clears all counters.
7-808-1 Counter Clear
7-810 [Access Code Clear]

Use to clear the access code if the customer forgets the code (password).
7-810-1 Access Code Clear
7-811 [Original Counter Clear]

7-811-1 This program reset the original counter (SP7-002-001 through 006).
7-816 [Tray Clear] Paper Tray Counter Clear

Clears the counters (SP7-204) for the number of sheets fed from the paper feed
stations.
7-816-1 Bypass Tray
7-816-2 Tray 1
7-816-3 Tray 2
7-816-4 Tray 3/LCT
7-816-5 Tray 4
7-816-6 Duplex
7-826 [MF Error Counter] Japan Only

7-826-1 Error Total
7-826-2 Error Staple
7-827 [MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only
7-832 [Self-Diagnose Result Display]

Displays the result of the diagnostics.
7-832-1 Diag. Result *CTL
B147/B149/B190 5-74 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-833 [Coverage] Pixel Coverage Ratio

Displays the image coverage ratio for each color of the last output.
This SP mode displays the “coverage ratio” of the output, i.e. the ratio of the total
pixel area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper. Note that this
value is not directly proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of course
it is one factor that affects this amount. The other major factors involved include: the
type, total image area and image density of the original, toner concentration and
developer potential.
7-833-1 Last [K] *BCU [ 0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step ]
7-833-2 Last [C]
7-833-3 Last [M]
7-833-4 Last [Y]
Displays accumulated average value of image coverage ratio for each color.
SP 7-833-5 to -8 vs SP 8-831-1 to –4
The averages for K (SP 7-833-5 and SP 8-831-1) are the same.
For CMY, SP 8-831 does not include black-and-white pages in the middle of a colour
job. However, SP 7-833 does include these pages in the average. As a result, the
readings of SP 7-833 will be lower, because these averages include pages for which
there is zero for CMY, but the averages calculated for SP 8-831 do not include these
pages.
7-833-5 Average [K] *BCU [ 0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step ]
7-833-6 Average [C]
7-833-7 Average [M]
7-833-8 Average [Y]
Displays the total number of toner cartridges replaced.
7-833-11 Toner [K] *BCU [ 0 to 65535 / - / 1 cartridge/step ]
7-833-12 Toner [C] NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011
7-833-13 Toner [M] through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001
7-833-14 Toner [Y] through 004 are the same.
Service
Tables
7-834 [Coverage Clr] Coverage/Toner Data Clear
7-834-1 Average This menu resets the data in SP7-833-005
through 008.
7-834-2 Toner This menu resets the data in SP7-833-011
through 014 and SP8-781-001 through 004.
7-834-3 S: PREV Toner This menu resets the data in SP8-901-001
through 004.
7-834-4 S: Coverage 0-100 This menu resets the data in SP8-851-001
through 004, SP8-861-001 through 004, SP 8-
871-001 through 004, and SP8-881-001
through 004.
7-834-255 All This menu resets all the data listed above.
7-835 ACC Counter *CTL [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]

7-835-1 Copy ACC Displays the number of times ACC has been
7-835-2 Printer ACC done.
7-836 Total Memory Size

Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
SM 5-75 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-852 ADF Scan Glass Dust Check Counter

Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on the
scanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4991 1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust
Check) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to zeror
7-901 [Assert Info]

Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in
this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU
7-901-1 File Name
7-901-2 Number of Lines
7-901-3 Location
7-905 [Alert Display]

7-905-10 Wst Oil: Full *BCU [ 232 to 464 / 232 / 1 kilo-revolutions/step ]
Specifies the number of revolutions the development drive motor-K can make after
the message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full”, is displayed.
The machine stops after the motor has made the specified number of revolutions.
This SP specifies the interval from near end to end for the waste oil bottle. 232k
revolutions equals 2.5k prints. If it is set to 464, the end condition is 5.0k prints after
near end.
7-905-14 Oil: Alert: Page *BCU [ 25.0 to 27.5 / 27.5 / 0.1 kilo-sheets/step ]
Specifies the number of sheets the machine can output after the oil supply reaches
the near-end condition.
7-906 [PM Counter: Previous]

(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
7-906-1 S:PCU [K] *BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
7-906-2 S:PCU [Y]
7-906-3 S:PCU [M]
7-906-4 S:PCU [C]
7-906-5 S:Dev. [K]
7-906-6 S:Dev. [Y]
7-906-7 S:Dev. [M]
7-906-8 S:Dev. [C]
7-906-9 S:Oil Supply
7-906-10 S:Fusing
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous
maintenance units.
7-906-11 R:PCU [K] *BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
7-906-12 R:PCU [Y]
7-906-13 R:PCU [M]
7-906-14 R:PCU [C]
7-906-15 R:Dev. [K]
7-906-16 R:Dev. [Y]
7-906-17 R:Dev. [M]
7-906-18 R:Dev. [C]
7-906-19 R:Oil Supply
7-906-20 R:Fusing
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner
cartridge.
7-906-21 S:Waste Toner *BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
B147/B149/B190 5-76 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-906-22 S:Toner [K]

7-906-23 S:Toner [Y]
7-906-24 S:Toner [M]
7-906-25 S:Toner [C]
(Current count ÷ Yield count) x 100, where “Current count” is the current values in the
counter for the part, and “Yield count” is the recommended yield.
7-906-26 R(%): PCU [K] *BCU [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
7-906-27 R(%): PCU [Y]
7-906-28 R(%): PCU [M]
7-906-29 R(%): PCU [C]
7-906-30 R(%): Dev [K]
7-906-31 R(%): Dev [Y]
7-906-32 R(%): Dev [M]
7-906-33 R(%): Dev [C]
7-906-34 R(%): Oil Supply
7-906-35 R(%): Fusing
7-907 [Check Sum]

Displays the check sum of the firmware.
7-907-1 Engine Main *BCU
7-907-2 Engine MUSIC
Service
Tables
SM 5-77 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP8-xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8-211~SP8-216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8-401~SP8-406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8-691~SP8-696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:
• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an ‘application’). Before reading
the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.
Prefixes What it means

T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.)..
C: Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
F: Fax application. application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application. document server.
S: Scan application.
L: Local storage Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document
(document server) server. The L: counters work differently case by
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
O: Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web
(external network Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
applications, for (Software Development Kit) will also be counted
example) with this group in the future.
B147/B149/B190 5-78 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of

displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ “By”, e.g. “T:Jobs/Apl” = Total Jobs “by” Application
> More (2> “2 or more”, 4> “4 or more”
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Service
Tables
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter
does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this
counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10
(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,
e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to
monitor machines remotely. “NRS” is used overseas, “CSS”
is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that
allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers
on the network, and allows files to moved around,
combined, and converted to different formats. Currently not
available.
PC Personal Computer
SM 5-79 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
Abbreviation What it means

PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model
A2 only. This machine is under development and currently
not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8
counters are recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or the
Counter Reset SP7 808.
B147/B149/B190 5-80 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-001 T:Total Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of times each
8-002 C:Total Jobs *CTL application is used to do a job.
8-003 F:Total Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-004 P:Total Jobs *CTL Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
8-005 S:Total Jobs *CTL other applications are used to send a job to the
document server, plus the number of times a file
8-006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
already on the document server is used.
8-007 O:Total Jobs *CTL
• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either “Delete Data” or “Specify Output” is
specified.
• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:
counter does not (the document server is not used).
• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not
be counted until the transmission has been completed.
Service
Tables
• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax
application, the F: counter increments.
SM 5-81 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the
8-012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL document server by each application, to reveal how
8-013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL local storage is being used for input.
8-014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
8-016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL
operation panel.
8-017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8-021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the
8-022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL document server were stored on the document
8-023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL server originally.
8-024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
8-026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL
screen at the operation panel.
8-027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
B147/B149/B190 5-82 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were used
8-032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL to output documents from the document server.
8-033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8-035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL printed from within the document server mode
8-036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8-037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8-041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored
8-042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL files on the document server that were later
8-043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL accessed for transmission over the telephone
8-044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or
as a fax image by I-Fax).
8-045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
8-047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
scanned from within the document server mode
• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
Service
Tables
increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8-051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to send
8-052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL files from the document server over the
8-053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL telephone line or over a network (attached to an
8-054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
merged for sending are counted separately.
8-055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
8-057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.
• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.
SM 5-83 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-061 T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
8-062 C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8-063 F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
8-064 P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
8-065 S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
8-066 L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
8-067 O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8-06x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set
for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter
increments. (See SP8 066 1)
8-06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
8-06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
8-06x 4 Bookle Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple
t mode, the Staple counter also increments.
8-06x 5 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
and set for folding (Z-fold).
8-06x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
8-06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
B147/B149/B190 5-84 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-071 T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
8-072 C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
8-073 F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
8-074 P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
8-075 S:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
8-076 L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
8-077 O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of “Other” application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the
job.
8-07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21~50 Pages
8-07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51~100 Pages
8-07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101~300 Pages
8-07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301~500 Pages
Service
8-07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501~700 Pages
Tables
8-07x 6 6~10 Pages 8 07x 13 701~1000 Pages
8-07x 7 11~20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001~ Pages
• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.
SM 5-85 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-111 T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8-113 F:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
fax directly on a telephone line.
8-116 L:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
fax on a telephone line using a file stored on the document server.
Documents sent from fax memory are not counted.
8-11x 1 B/W
8-11x 2 Color
• These counters count jobs, not pages.

• This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application,
including documents stored on the document server.
• If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the
job started.
• If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination
where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x)
also increments.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
8-121 T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
8-123 F:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
8-126 L:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent using a
file stored on the document server , as fax images using I-Fax.
8-12x 1 B/W
8-12x 2 Color

• The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not
available at this time.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is
sent.
B147/B149/B190 5-86 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-131 T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was
used or not.
8-135 S:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and
attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
8-136 L:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL
These SPs count the number of (color or black-and-white) jobs using a file
stored on stored on the document server, and attaching it to e-mail.
8-13x 1 B/W
8-13x 2 Color
• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).
8-141 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
and sent to a Scan Router server.
8-143 F:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
fax mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8-145 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8-14x 1 B/W
8-14x 2 Color
• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a “Color” job.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
SM 5-87 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-151 T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
8-155 S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL
and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8-15x 1 B/W
8-15x 2 Color

• If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
8-161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax
8-163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it
is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending
the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.
8-191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by each
8-192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL application that uses the scanner to scan
8-193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL images.
8-195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL
• SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number
of physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
B147/B149/B190 5-88 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Examples
• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8-201 T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission
are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display.
8-205 S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are
not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display..
8-211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned
8-212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL into the document server .
8-213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
Service
8-215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
Tables
8-216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
• Reading user stamp data is not counted.

• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
SM 5-89 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-221 ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
8-221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front
side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user
loads face up.)
8-221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side
scanning.
• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.
8-231 Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
8-231 1 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded
in the ADF at one time.
8-231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
8-231 3 Mixed Size Selectable. Select “Mixed Sizes” on the operation
panel.
8-231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
8-231 5 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application
so if the original’s page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
• If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
B147/B149/B190 5-90 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-241 T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8-242 C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
8-243 F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
8-245 S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
8-246 L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8-247 O:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type by Other
applications.
8-241 8-242 8-243 8-245 8-246 8-247
8-24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8-24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8-24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8-24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
8-24x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
8-24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No No
8-24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No No
8-24x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No No
Service
Tables
8-24x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No No
8-24x 10: Color Yes No No Yes No No
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
SM 5-91 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit
8-252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL features have been selected at the operation
8-254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL panel for each application. Some examples of
8-256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL these editing features are:
8-257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL • Erase> Border
• Erase> Center
• Image Repeat
• Centering
• Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the
edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have been
used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8-261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL

8-262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL
8-26x 1 Color Conversion These SPs show how many times color creation
8-26x 2 Color Erase features have been selected at the operation
8-26x 3 Background panel.
8-26x 4 Other
8-281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned
8-285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal
how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery
functions.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
8-291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages stamped
8-293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL with the stamp in the ADF unit.
8-295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
B147/B149/B190 5-92 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-301 T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
8-302 C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
8-303 F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
output page size [SP 8-443].
8-305 S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
output page size [SP 8-445].
8-306 L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
8-30x 1 A3
8-30x 2 A4
8-30x 3 A5
8-30x 4 B4
8-30x 5 B5
8-30x 6 DLT
8-30x 7 LG
Service
Tables
8-30x 8 LT
8-30x 9 HLT
8-30x 10 Full Bleed
8-30x 254 Other (Standard)
8-30x 255 Other (Custom)
SM 5-93 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-311 T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
8-315 S:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
8-31x 1 1200dpi ~
8-31x 2 600dpi~1199dpi
8-31x 3 400dpi~599dpi
8-31x 4 200dpi~399dpi
8-31x 5 ~199dpi
• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

• The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count
is done for the Fax application.
B147/B149/B190 5-94 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-321 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by compression method the total number of pages
scanned.
8-325 S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by compression method the total number of pages
scanned by the Scan application.
8-32x 1 JPEG
8-32x 2 JPEG2000
8-32x 3 TIFF (Comp OFF)
8-32x 4 TIFF (Comp ON)
8-32x 5 PDF
8-32x 6 Other
8-381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8-382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL by the customer. The counter for the application
8-383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL used for storing the pages increments.
8-384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
8-386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
8-387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen go to the C: counter.
• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT
Service
Tables
page is counted as 2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
are counted for the application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
• Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
• Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
• Reports printed to confirm counts.
• All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
• Test prints for machine image adjustment.
• Error notification reports.
• Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
SM 5-95 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-391 LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8-401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8-402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL from the document server. The counter for the
8-403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL application used to print the pages is
8-404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8-405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
8-406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.
B147/B149/B190 5-96 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-411 Prints/Duplex *CTL This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.
Last pages printed only on one side are not
counted.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-421 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
8-422 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
8-423 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
8-424 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
8-425 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
8-426 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
8-427 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
pages processed for printing by Other applications
8-42x 1 Simplex> Duplex
8-42x 2 Duplex> Duplex
8-42x 3 Book> Duplex
8-42x 4 Simplex Combine
8-42x 5 Duplex Combine
8-42x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8-42x 10 9> 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)
8-42x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
8-42x 12 Booklet
8-42x 13 Magazine
• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who
need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
SM 5-97 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
Booklet Magazine
Original Original
Count Count
Pages Pages
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
8-431 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
8-432 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
8-434 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
8-436 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
8-437 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
8-43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
8-43x 2 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
8-43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
B147/B149/B190 5-98 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-441 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
8-442 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
8-443 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
8-444 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
printer application.
8-445 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanner application.
8-446 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8-447 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
8-44x 1 A3
8-44x 2 A4
8-44x 3 A5
8-44x 4 B4
8-44x 5 B5
8-44x 6 DLT
Service
Tables
8-44x 7 LG
8-44x 8 LT
8-44x 9 HLT
8-44x 10 Full Bleed
8-44x 254 Other (Standard)
8-44x 255 Other (Custom)
• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
SM 5-99 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-451 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8-451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray
8-451 2 Tray 1 Copier
8-451 3 Tray 2 Copier
8-451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8-451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8-451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
8-451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.
8-461 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
8-462 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
8-463 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
8-464 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
8-466 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
8-46x 1 Normal
8-46x 2 Recycled
8-46x 3 Special
8-46x 4 Thick
8-46x 5 Normal (Back)
8-46x 6 Thick (Back)
8-46x 7 OHP
8-46x 8 Other
B147/B149/B190 5-100 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-471 PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
8-471 1 ~49%
8-471 2 50%~99%
8-471 3 100%
8-471 4 101%~200%
8-471 5 201% ~
• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8-481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL

8-484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
Service
Tables
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8-492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL in the Color Mode by each application.
8-493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8-496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8-49x 1 B/W
8-49x 2 Single Color
8-49x 3 Two Color
8-49x 4 Full Color
8-501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8-504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL in the Color Mode by the print application.
8-50x 1 B/W
8-50x 2 Single Color
8-50x 3 Full Color
SM 5-101 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-511 T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8-514 P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8-514 1 RPCS
8-514 2 RPDL
8-514 3 PS3
8-514 4 R98
8-514 5 R16
8-514 6 GL/GL2
8-514 7 R55
8-514 8 RTIFF
8-514 9 PDF
8-514 10 PCL5e/5c
8-514 11 PCL XL
8-514 12 IPDL-C
8-514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8-514 14 Other
• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the
Print application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
B147/B149/B190 5-102 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-521 T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
8-522 C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
8-523 F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Fax application.
Note:
• Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
8-524 P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print application.
8-525 S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Scanner application.
8-526 L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8-52x 1 Sort
8-52x 2 Stack
8-52x 3 Staple
8-52x 4 Booklet
8-52x 5 Z-Fold
8-52x 6 Punch
8-52x 7 Other
Service
Tables
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.
8-531 Staples *CTL This SP counts the amount of staples used

by the machine.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
SM 5-103 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-581 T:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8-581 1 Total
8-581 2 Total: Full Color
8-581 3 B&W/Single Color
8-581 4 Development: CMY
8-581 5 Development: K
8-581 6 Copy: Color
8-581 7 Copy: B/W
8-581 8 Print: Color
8-581 9 Print: B/W
8-581 10 Total: Color
8-581 11 Total: B/W
8-582 C:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
8-582 1 B/W
8-582 2 Single Color
8-582 3 Two Color
8-582 4 Full Color
8-583 F:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color
output.
8-583 1 B/W
8-584 P:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8-584 1 B/W
8-584 3 Full Color
8-586 L:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
output.
8-582 1 B/W
8-582 3 Two Color
8-582 4 Full Color
B147/B149/B190 5-104 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-591 O:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
8-591 1 A3/DLT
8-591 2 Duplex
8-591 3 Staple
8-631 T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
8-633 F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
8-63x 1 B/W
8-63x 2 Color
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8631 and SP8633 are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Service
Tables
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
SM 5-105 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-641 T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
8-643 F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
8-64x 1 B/W
8-64x 2 Color
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8641 and SP8643 are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
B147/B149/B190 5-106 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-651 T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-
mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
8-655 S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
mail for the Scan application only.
8-656 L:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
mail for LS applications only.
8-65x 1 B/W
8-65x 2 Color
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
Service
Tables
SM 5-107 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-661 T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8-665 S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Router server by the Scan application.
8-666 L:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Router server by LS applications.
8-66x 1 B/W
8-66x 2 Color
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.
8-671 T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8-675 S:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-
to-PC with the Scan application.
8-676 L:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-
to-PC function with the LS applications.
8-67x 1 B/W
8-67x 2 Color
B147/B149/B190 5-108 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC
8-683 F:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and
SP8 683 are the same.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC
through the copier to the destination.
• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,
the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location
A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8-691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent from
8-692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL the document server. The counter for the
8-693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL application that was used to store the pages is
8-694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL incremented.
8-695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
8-696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen go
to the C: counter.
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored are counted for the application that stored them.
Service
Tables
3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is
done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
8-701 TX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8-701 1 PSTN-1
8-701 2 PSTN-2
8-701 3 PSTN-3
8-701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8-701 5 Network
8 741 RX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port
used to receive them.
8-741 1 PSTN-1
8-741 2 PSTN-2
8-741 3 PSTN-3
8-741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8-741 5 Network
SM 5-109 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-771 Dev Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
8-771 1 Total
8-771 2 K
8-771 3 Y
8-771 4 M
8-771 5 C
8-781 Toner Botol Info. *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-
781-001 through 004 are the same.
8-781 1 Toner [BK] The number of black-toner bottle
8-781 2 Toner [Y] The number of yellow-toner bottle
8-781 3 Toner [M] The number of magenta-toner bottle
8-781 4 Toner [C] The number of cyan-toner bottle
8-791 LS Memory Remain *CTL This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
8-801 Toner Remain *CTL [0~100/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps)
is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
8-801 1 K
8-801 2 Y
8-801 3 M
8-801 4 C
8-831 Coverage *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the average coverage by color. ( SP 7-833)
8-831 1 Average [BK]
8-831 2 Average [Y]
8-831 3 Average [M]
8-831 4 Average [C]
8-841 Coverage *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the coverage of the last print by color. ( SP 7-833)
8-841 1 Last [BK]
8-841 2 Last [Y]
8-841 3 Last [M]
8-841 4 Last [C]
B147/B149/B190 5-110 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-851 Coverage: 0-10% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 0% to 10%.
8-851 1 S: BK
8-851 2 S: Y
8-851 3 S: M
8-851 4 S: C
8-861 Coverage: 11-20% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8-851 1 S: BK
8-851 2 S: Y
8-851 3 S: M
8-851 4 S: C
8-871 Coverage: 21-30% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8-871 1 S: BK
8-871 2 S: Y
8-871 3 S: M
8-871 4 S: C
8-881 Coverage: 31%- *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

each color is 31% or higher.
Service
Tables
8-881 1 S: BK
8-881 2 S: Y
8-881 3 S: M
8-881 4 S: C
8-891 PM Counter *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application.
8-891 1 S: Toner [BK]
8-891 2 S: Toner [Y]
8-891 3 S: Toner [M]
8-891 4 S: Toner [C]
8-901 PM Counter: Previous *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of sheet output by the scan application with
the previously replaced units.
8-901 1 S: Toner [BK]
8-901 2 S: Toner [Y]
8-901 3 S: Toner [M]
8-901 4 S: Toner [C]
SM 5-111 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-941 Machine Status *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
8-941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
8-941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
8-941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
8-941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
8-941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
8-941 6 Down Time/SC Total down time due to SC errors.
8-941 7 Down Time/PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
8-941 8 Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
8-941 9 Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.
8-951 AddBook Register *CTL

These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
8-951 1 User Code User code registrations. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8-951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
8-951 4 Group Group destination registrations.
8-951 5 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations
for relay TX.
8-951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
8-951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations with [0~255 / 0 / 255]
the Program (job settings) feature.
8-951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
8-951 9 Printer Program Printer application registrations
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
8-951 10 Scanner Scanner application registrations
Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
B147/B149/B190 5-112 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
NOTE: Memory Clear (SP5-801 & 7-808)

The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information,
meter charge setting (SP5-930), and meter charge counters (SP7-003) are not
cleared.

5-801-3 SCS SP5-009, 101, 104, 305, 812, 833, 961, and 970
SP7-101, 204, 209, 401, 502, 504, 506, and 507
5-801-4 IMH No SP modes are cleared. But, all files stored in the
HDD are cleared.
5-801-5 MCS No SP modes are cleared.
5-801-6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
5-801-7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
5-801-8 Printer application The following service settings:
• Bit switches
• Gamma settings (User & Service)
• Toner Limit
The following user settings:
• Tray Priority
• Menu Protect
• System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver
• I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
• PCL Menu
5-801-9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all
the scanner SP modes.
5-801-10 Netfile application Deletes the network file application management files
and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
5-801-11 NCS All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)
5-801-12 IPU Clears the IPU settings
Service
Tables
5-801-13 R-Fax Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.

5-998-1 ENG Setting All engine related SP modes except for the following:
• Serial number information
• SP modes related to meter charge
• Counters and logging data
5-998-2 ENG Counter All counters and logging data related to engine
7-808 [Counter Clear]

7-808-1 Counter Clear SP7-101, 204, 209, 502, 504, 506, and 507
SM 5-113 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each
digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
5-803 Reading
Bit Description
0 1
5-803-1 Paper Tray 1
0 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected
1 Paper Lift Sensor Activated
Deactivated (Actuator not
inside sensor)
2 Paper Height Sensor 1
See Table 1.
3 Paper Height Sensor 2
4 Tray Set Not set Set
5-803-2 Paper Tray 2
1 Paper Lift Sensor Activated
Deactivated (Actuator not
inside sensor)
2 Paper Height Sensor 1 See Table 1.
3 Paper Height Sensor 2 1: Activated
(Actuator inside sensor)
4 Paper Size Switch 1
5 Paper Size Switch 2 See Table 2.
6 Paper Size Switch 3 1: Pushed
7 Paper Size Switch 4
5-803-3 By-pass Table
1 Paper Size 1
2 Paper Size 2
See Table 3.
3 Paper Size 3
4 Paper Size 4
5-803-4 Doors
0 Front Door Switch Opened Closed
1 Left Door Switch Opened Closed
2 Right Door Switch Opened Closed
3 Vertical Transport Switch Opened Closed
4 Duplex Inverter Unit Switch Opened Closed
5 Right Door Switch (LCT/PFU) Opened Closed
5-803-5 Paper Feed
0 Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Upper Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Lower Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
5 Duplex Inverter Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Duplex Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
B147/B149/B190 5-114 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-803-6 Paper Exit

0 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Paper Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Duplex Exit Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected
5 Exit Upper Limit Sensor Not full Full
5-803-7 Fusing Unit
0 Fusing Unit (Set) Not set Set
1 Fusing Unit (New) 0 to 1 : New unit installed
2 Oil Supply Unit (Set) Set Not set
3 Oil Supply Unit (New) 1 to 0 : New unit installed
4 European Version US Europe
5 Waste Oil Bottle Set Sensor Not Set Set
6 Waste Oil Sensor Not full Full
5-803-8 Motor Lock
0 Development Drive Motor - CMY Not locked Locked
1 Development Drive Motor - K Not locked Locked
2 Fusing Fan Motor Not locked Locked
3 Air Pump Motor - MY Not locked Locked
4 Air Pump Motor - CK Not locked Locked
5-803-9 Dev. Unit/ PCU
0 Development Unit - K Not set Set
1 Development Unit - C Not set Set
2 Development Unit - M Not set Set
3 Development Unit - Y Not set Set
4 PCU - K Not set Set
5 PCU - C Not set Set
6 PCU - M Not set Set
Service
Tables
7 PCU - Y Not set Set
5-803-10 Toner End Sens
0 Black Toner Not end End
1 Cyan Toner Not end End
2 Magenta Toner Not end End
3 Yellow Toner Not end End
5-803-13 Others
0 LD H.P. Sensor Not H.P. H.P.
1 Transfer Belt Sensor Not contact Contact
2 - - -
3 Used Toner Sensor Not full Full
4 Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor Not set Set
5 Drum Gear Position Sensor - K Activated
Deactivated (Actuator inside
sensor)
6 Drum Gear Position Sensor - CMY Activated
Deactivated (Actuator inside
sensor)
SM 5-115 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-803 Reading
Bit Description
0 1
5-803-15 Mail Box 1 (Not used)
0 Tray 1 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
1 Tray 1 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
5-803-16 Mail Box 2 (Not used)
0 Vertical Transport Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Vertical Transport Sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Door Safety Switch Opened Closed
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007

6-007 Reading
Bit Description
0 1
6-007-1 7 Original width sensor 4 Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Original width sensor 3 Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Skew correction sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Original length sensor 1* Paper not detected Paper detected
6-007-2 7 Original stopper HP sensor Original stopper up Original stopper down
6 Pick-up HP sensor Cover closed Cover opened
5 Top cover Sensor Cover closed Cover opened
4 Lift sensor Pick-up roller up Pick-up roller down
3 Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
0 Interval Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6-007-3 7 (Not used) — —
6 (Not used) — —
NOTE: The original length sensors detect the following paper sizes: B5 (sensor 1),
LG (sensor 2), and A4 (sensor 3).
B147/B149/B190 5-116 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

Low: Deactivated, High: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full Low Low
Nearly full Low High
Near end High High
Almost empty High Low
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)

0: Not pushed, 1: pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 1 2 3 4
11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 1 0 0
A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 0
81/2" x 14" SEF *1 B4 SEF *1 1 1 0 1
81/2" x 11" SEF *2 A4 SEF *2 0 1 1 0
11" x 81/2" LEF *3 11" x 81/2" LEF *3 1 0 1 1
A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1
B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0
A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1
NOTES:
*1
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2
*2
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3
*3
: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4
Service
Tables
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)
Models Bit No.
North America Europe/Asia 4 3 2 1
11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 0 1 1
A3 SEF A3 SEF 0 0 0 1
- B4 SEF 0 0 1 0
81/2" x 11" SEF A4 SEF 0 1 1 0
8" x 13" SEF F SEF 0 1 0 0
- A5 SEF 1 1 0 0
51/2" x 181/2" SEF B6 SEF 1 0 0 0
Post Card Post Card 0 0 0 0
SM 5-117 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
Table 4: Original Size Detection

Width
Original Size Length Sensor SP4-301
Sensor
display
A4/A3 version LT/DLT version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132
B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141
F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165
A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133
B5-L X X O X X 142
A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5
B5-S X X X X O 14
A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128
B147/B149/B190 5-118 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2.1 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE

CH: Charge
PF: Paper Feed
TS: Toner Supply
CW: Clockwise
CCW: Counterclockwise
MB: 4-bin Mailbox
DI: Duplex Inverter
5-804 Description
5-804-1 Lift M UP (1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / UP
5-804-2 Lift M DOWN(1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / DOWN
5-804-3 Lift M UP(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / UP
5-804-4 Lift M DOWN(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / DOWN
5-804-5 By-pass CL By-pass Feed Clutch
5-804-6 Pick-up SOL Pick-up Solenoid
5-804-7 PF CL (1) Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 1
5-804-8 PF CL (2) Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 2
5-804-9 PF GRP SOL Grip Roller Release Solenoid
5-804-10 Regist CL Registration Clutch
5-804-11 Junction SOL Exit Junction Gate Solenoid
5-804-12 Oil Supply SOL Oil Supply Unit Solenoid
5-804-13 Fusing CL Fusing Clutch
5-804-14 Wst Tn Vib M Waste Toner Vibration Motor
5-804-19 K Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - K
5-804-20 C Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - C
5-804-21 M Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - M
5-804-22 Y Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - Y
Service
Tables
5-804-23 K Dev M H Development Motor - K / High Speed
5-804-24 K Dev M M Development Motor - K / Middle Speed
5-804-25 K Dev M L Development Motor - K / Low Speed
5-804-26 K Dev M Card Black Development Motor - Thick paper
5-804-27 FC Dev M H Color Development Motor - 185mm/s
5-804-28 FC Dev M M Color Development Motor - 125mm/s
5-804-29 FC Dev M L Color Development Motor - 62.5mm/s
5-804-30 TS CL [Y] Toner Supply Clutch for Yellow
5-804-31 TS CL [M] Toner Supply Clutch for Magenta
5-804-32 TS CL [C] Toner Supply Clutch for Cyan
5-804-33 TS CL [K] Toner Supply Clutch for Black
5-804-34 Valve SOL [K] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Black
5-804-35 Valve SOL [C] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Cyan
5-804-36 Valve SOL [M] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Magenta
5-804-37 Valve SOL [Y] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Yellow
5-804-38 Toner Sply Mt1 Toner Supply Motor 1 - yellow and magenta
5-804-39 Toner Sply Mt2 Toner Supply Motor 2 - cyan and black
5-804-40 Air Supply [Y] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Yellow
5-804-41 Air Supply [M] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Magenta
5-804-42 Air Supply [C] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Cyan
5-804-43 Air Supply [K] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Black
5-804-44 T End Sens [Y] Toner End Sensor - Y
SM 5-119 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-804 Description
5-804-45 T End Sens [M] Toner End Sensor - M
5-804-46 T End Sens [C] Toner End Sensor - C
5-804-47 T End Sens [K] Toner End Sensor - K
5-804-50 PSU Fan PSU Cooling Fan Motor
5-804-51 Fusing Fan H Fusing Fan Motor / High Speed
5-804-52 Fusing Fan L Fusing Fan Motor / Low Speed
5-804-53 M Fan Laser Optics Housing Unit Cooling Fan
5-804-54 Belt M CW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Clockwise
5-804-55 Belt M CCW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Counterclockwise
5-804-56 Belt M Break Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Break
5-804-57 Fusing Relay Fusing Relay
5-804-58 Heat Lamp Heating Roller Fusing Lamp
5-804-59 Pressure Lamp Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
5-804-65 Drum M L CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Low Speed / Clockwise
5-804-66 Drum M M CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Middle Speed /
Clockwise
5-804-67 Drum M H CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / High Speed / Clockwise
5-804-76 PF M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise
5-804-77 PF M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise
5-804-78 PF M H CW Paper Feed Motor / High Speed / Clockwise
5-804-79 PF M Feed Paper Feed Motor / Feed Speed / Clockwise
5-804-80 By-Pass M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise
5-804-81 By-Pass M C CW Paper Feed Motor / Thick paper or OHP mode /
Clockwise
5-804-82 By-Pass M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise
5-804-89 CH DC [Y] Charge DC Bias for Yellow / 125 mm/s
5-804-90 CH DC [M] Charge DC Bias for Magenta / 125 mm/s
5-804-91 CH DC [C] Charge DC Bias for Cyan / 125 mm/s
5-804-92 CH DC [K] Charge DC Bias for Black / 125 mm/s
5-804-93 CH AC [FC] 62.5 Charger AC / Full Color / 62.5 mm/s
5-804-94 CH AC [K] 62.5 Charger AC / Black / 62.5 mm/s
5-804-95 CH AC [FC] 125 Charger AC / Full Color / 125 mm/s
5-804-96 CH AC [K] 125 Charger AC / Black / 125 mm/s
5-804-97 CH AC [FC] 185 Charger AC / Full Color / 185 mm/s
5-804-98 CH AC [K] 185 Charger AC / Black / 185 mm/s
5-804-99 Dev DC [Y] Development DC Bias for Yellow
5-804-100 Dev DC [M] Development DC Bias for Magenta
5-804-101 Dev DC [C] Development DC Bias for Cyan
5-804-102 Dev DC [K] Development DC Bias for Black
5-804-103 Dev AC [FC] 62.5 Development AC Bias for Color - 62.5 mm/s
5-804-104 Dev AC [K] 62.5 Development AC Bias for Black - 62.5 mm/s
5-804-105 Dev AC [FC] 125 Development AC Bias for Color - 125 mm/s
5-804-106 Dev AC [K] 125 Development AC Bias for Black - 125 mm/s
5-804-107 Dev AC [FC] 185 Development AC Bias for Color - 185 mm/s
5-804-108 Dev AC [K] 185 Development AC Bias for Black - 185 mm/s
5-804-109 Transfer [Y] Transfer Current for Yellow
5-804-110 Transfer [M] Transfer Current for Magenta
5-804-111 Transfer [C] Transfer Current for Cyan
B147/B149/B190 5-120 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-804 Description
5-804-112 Transfer [K] Transfer Current for Black
5-804-113 Cleaning Bias Transfer Belt Cleaning Roller Bias
5-804-114 PA Roller Bias+ Paper Attraction Roller Bias
5-804-115 PA Roller Bias- Paper Attraction Roller Bias
5-804-116 DevAC TRG [FC] Development AC Trigger for Color
5-804-117 DevAC TRG [K] Development AC Trigger for Black
5-804-118 DevPWM TRG [K] Development PWM Trigger for Black
5-804-119 DevPWM TRG [C] Development PWM Trigger for Cyan
5-804-120 DevPWM TRG [M] Development PWM Trigger for Magenta
5-804-121 DevPWM TRG [Y] Development PWM Trigger for Yellow
5-804-122 CHdcPWM TRG [K] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Black
5-804-123 CHdcPWM TRG [C] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Cyan
5-804-124 CHdcPWM TRG [M] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Magenta
5-804-125 CHdcPWM TRG [Y] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Yellow
5-804-126 CHac1 TRG [FC] Charge AC1 Trigger for Color
5-804-127 Chac2 TRG [FC] Charge AC2 Trigger for Color
5-804-128 Chac3 TRG [FC] Charge AC3 Trigger for Color
5-804-129 CHac1 TRG [K] Charge AC1 Trigger for Black
5-804-130 Chac2 TRG [K] Charge AC2 Trigger for Black
5-804-131 Chac3 TRG [K] Charge AC3 Trigger for Black
5-804-132 ID Sensor LED ID Sensor LED
5-804-133 TD Vcnt TD Sensor / Vcnt
5-804-134 Memory Chip Memory Chip / Power (5V) Supply
5-804-136 PCU Cln Bias K PCU Cleaning Bias Black
5-804-137 PCU Cln Bias YMC PCU Cleaning Bias YMC
5-804-141 Polygon M 29 Polygon Motor / 29.528
Service
5-804-142 Polygon M 21 Polygon Motor / 21.850
Tables
5-804-143 LD FC[K]62.5 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 62.5
5-804-144 LD FC[K]125 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 125
5-804-145 LD FC[Y]62.5 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 62.5
5-804-146 LD FC[Y]125 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 125
5-804-147 LD FC[M]62.5 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 62.5
5-804-148 LD FC[M]125 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 125
5-804-149 LD FC[C]62.5 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 62.5
5-804-150 LD FC[C]125 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 125
5-804-151 LD1 [K] 62.5 LD1 Power for Black / 62.5
5-804-152 LD1 [K] 125 LD1 Power for Black / 125
5-804-154 LD2 [K] 62.5 LD2 Power for Black / 62.5
5-804-157 LD [K]62.5 LD Power for Black / 62.5
5-804-158 LD [K]125 LD Power for Black / 125
5-804-159 LD [K]185 LD Power for Black / 185
5-804-165 PSU M Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU: Paper Supply Unit) /
Motor
5-804-166 PF CL PFU (1) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 1
5-804-167 PF CL PFU (2) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 2
SM 5-121 B147/B149/B190
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-804 Description
5-804-168 Pick-up SOL PSU Pick-up Solenoid / Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU:
Paper Supply Unit)
5-804-170 MB M 4-bin Mailbox Main Motor
5-804-171 MB SOL1 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 1
5-804-174 MB Gate SOL 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid
5-804-176 Duplex SOL Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
5-804-177 DI M1 62.5CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise
5-804-178 DI M1 65CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 65 / Counterclockwise
5-804-184 DI M1 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Clockwise
5-804-186 DI M2 62.5CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise
5-804-195 DI M2 OFF Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / OFF
5-804-196 DI M12 62.5CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise
5-804-197 DI M12 65CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 65 / Counterclockwise
5-804-203 DI M12 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 370 / Clockwise
5-804-204 DI M12 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 450 / Clockwise
5-804-205 PF M 125CCW Duplex Feed Motor / 125 / Counterclockwise
B147/B149/B190 5-122 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2.2 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997)
Test Pattern Selection (SP5-997-002)

0: None
Test Pattern Printting 1: 1-dot sub-scan line
Selects the tray in which 4: 2-dot main-scan line
SP5-997-001 desired paper size is 5: 1-dot grid pattern (Fine)
loaded. 6: 2-dot grid pattern (Fine)
SP5-997-002 Selects a pattern. 9. 1-dot slant grid pattern
11. 1-dot pattern
Selects a color if printing 12. 2-dot pattern
SP5-997-003 the test pattern in the 13. 4-dot pattern
Single Color mode. 14. 1-dot trimming pattern
16. Cross stitch: sub-scan
SP5-997-004
Selects the Single Color 17. Cross stitch: main-scan
or Full Color mode. 18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)
19. Belt pattern (Vertical)
20. Checkered Flag
21. Grey scale (Vertical)
SP5-997-005 Selects the resolution.
22. Grey scale (Horizontal)
23. Solid
Service
Selects the desired
Tables
Tray or by-pass By-pass SP5-997-006
paper size.
Tray
SP5-997-007 Prints the test pattern.
B146S913.WMF
SM 5-123 B147/B149/B190
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE

SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1-001 [Bit Switch]
1-001-1 Bit Switch 1 Settings *CTL Adjusts the bit switch settings. DFU
1-001-2 Bit Switch 2 Settings
1-003 [Clear Setting]

1-003-1 Initialize Printer System
Initializes settings in the “System” menu of the user mode.
1-003-3 Delete Program
1-004 [Print Summary]

1-004-1 Print Summary
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1-005 [Display Version]

1-005-1 Disp. Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1-006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On

1-006-1 Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the document
server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. When
you select “1,” the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode
SP5-967.
1-101 [Data Recall]

Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the
previous setting, or c) the current setting.
1-101-1 Factory *CTL
1-101-2 Previous
1-101-3 Current
1-101-4 ACC
1-102 [Resolution Setting]

Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
1-102-1 1200x1200 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 1200x1200 Text, 1800x600,
Text, 600x600 Text
1-103 [Test Page]

Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma
adjustment.
B147/B149/B190 5-124 SM
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
1-103-1 Color Gray Scale

1-103-2 Color Pattern
1-104 [Gamma Adjustment]

Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the “Mode Selection” menu.
1-104-1 Black: Highlight * [ 0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1-104-2 Black: Shadow CTL
1-104-3 Black: Middle
1-104-4 Black: IDmax
1-104-21 Cyan: Highlight
1-104-22 Cyan: Shadow
1-104-23 Cyan: Middle
1-104-24 Cyan: IDmax
1-104-41 Magenta: Highlight
1-104-42 Magenta: Shadow
1-104-43 Magenta: Middle
1-104-44 Magenta: IDmax
1-104-61 Yellow: Highlight
1-104-62 Yellow: Shadow
1-104-63 Yellow: Middle
1-104-64 Yellow: IDmax
1-105 [Save Tone Control Value]

Stores the print gamma adjusted with the “Gamma Adj.” menu item as the current
setting. Before the machine stores the new “current setting", it moves the data
currently stored as the ‘current setting’ to the “previous setting” memory storage
location.
1-105-1 ToneCtlSave
Service
Tables
1-106 [Toner Limit]
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1-106-1 Toner Limit: Photo *CTL [ 100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]
1-106-2 Toner Limit: Text [ 100 to 400 / 190 / 1 %/step ]
SM 5-125 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER SP MODE
5.4 SCANNER SP MODE

SP1-xxx (System and Others)
1-004 [Compression Type]
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
1-004-1 Compression Type * [ 1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
CTL 1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
1-005 [Erase margin]

Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.
1-005-1 Erase Margin * [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
CTL
1-007 [Store Priority] * [1: Send/2: Store Only/3: Send & Store]
CTL
1-007-1 This program specifies how scanned data is processed as default.
B147/B149/B190 5-126 SM
SCANNER SP MODE
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

2-002 [Text (Print) mode settings]
2-002-1 MTF Filter Coefficient * [ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1/step ] DFU
(Main scan) CTL
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Text mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
If this is “0”, the MTF filter is not applied.
(Sub scan) CTL
As above, for sub scan

2-002-7 Smoothing Filter * [ 0 to 255 / 1 / 255/step ] DFU
CTL
Selects the smoothing pattern for Text mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
A larger value could cause moiré to appear in the image.
2-002-8 Scanner Gamma * [ 0 to 6 / 4 / 11/step ] DFU
CTL 0: Standard
1: Smooth
2: Clearly
3: Liner
4: Text image for the delivery function
5: Text/photo image for the delivery function
6: Photo image for the delivery function
Selects the scanner gamma type for Text mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
Adjusts the image density for each image density level for Text mode when using
binary picture processing mode.
Service
Tables
2-002-11 Notch No.7: (Lighter): Brightness * [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-12 Notch No.7: (Lighter): Contrast CTL [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-13 Notch No.7: (Lighter): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-14 Notch No.6: Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-15 Notch No.6: Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-16 Notch No.6: Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-20 Notch No.4 (Middle): Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-21 Notch No.4 (Middle): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-22 Notch No.4 (Middle): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-29 Notch No.1: (Darker): Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-30 Notch No.1: (Darker): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-002-31 Notch No.1: (Darker): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
SM 5-127 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER SP MODE
2-003 [Text (OCR) mode settings]

2-003-1 MTF Filter Coefficient * [0 to 255 / 11 / 1/step ] DFU
(Main scan) CTL
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Text/Photo mode.
(Sub scan) CTL

CTL
Selects the smoothing pattern for Text/Photo mode when using binary picture
processing mode.
CTL
Selects the scanner gamma type for Text/Photo mode when using binary picture
processing mode.
2-003-20 Notch No.4: (Middle): Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-003-21 Notch No.4: (Middle): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-003-22 Notch No.4: (Middle): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step ] DFU
2-003-31 Notch No.1: (Darker): Threshold [ 0 to -255 / 110 / 1/step ] DFU
B147/B149/B190 5-128 SM
SCANNER SP MODE
2-004 [Text/Photo mode settings]

(Main scan) CTL
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Text/Photo mode.
(Sub scan) CTL

CTL
Selects the smoothing pattern for Text/Photo mode when using binary picture
processing mode.
CTL
Selects the scanner gamma type for Text/Photo mode when using binary picture
processing mode.
Service
Tables
2-004-31 Notch No.1: (Darker): Threshold [ 0 to -255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
SM 5-129 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER SP MODE
2-005- [Photo mode settings]

(Main scan) CTL
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Photo mode.
(Sub scan) CTL

CTL
Selects the smoothing pattern for Photo mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
CTL
Selects the scanner gamma type for Photo mode when using binary picture
processing mode.
2-005-9 Dither Matrix Filter * [1 to 11 / 5 / 1 step] DFU
CTL
Selects the dither matrix type for Photo mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
B147/B149/B190 5-130 SM
SCANNER SP MODE
2-006 [Gray – scale mode settings]

2-006-1 MTF Filter Coefficient * [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step ] DFU
(Main scan) CTL
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction when using grayscale
processing mode.
If this is “0”, the MTF filter is not applied
2-006-2 MTF Filter Coefficient * [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step ] DFU
(Sub scan) CTL

CTL
Selects the smoothing pattern when using grayscale processing mode.

CTL
Selects the scanner gamma type when using grayscale processing mode.
2-006-11 Notch No.7 (Lighter): Brightness * [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-006-12 Notch No.7 (Lighter): Contrast CTL [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-006-13 Notch No.7 (Lighter): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Service
Tables
SM 5-131 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER SP MODE
2-007 [Full Color (Text) mode settings]

(Main scan) CTL
processing mode.
(Sub scan) CTL

CTL

Adjusts the scanner gamma for RGB.
2-007-4 R-Gamma Curve * [ 0 to 11 / 9 / 1 /step ] DFU
2-007-5 G-Gamma Curve CTL
2-007-6 B-Gamma Curve
2-007-11 Notch No.7(Lighter): R - Brightness * [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-12 Notch No.7(Lighter): G - Brightness CTL [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-13 Notch No.7(Lighter): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-14 Notch No.7(Lighter): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-15 Notch No.7(Lighter): G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-16 Notch No.7(Lighter): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-17 Notch No.7(Lighter): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-18 Notch No.7(Lighter): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-19 Notch No.7(Lighter): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-20 Notch No.6: R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-21 Notch No.6: G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-22 Notch No.6: B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-23 Notch No.6: R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-24 Notch No.6 G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-25 Notch No.6: B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-26 Notch No.6: R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-27 Notch No.6: G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-28 Notch No.6: B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-38 Notch No.4(Middle): R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
B147/B149/B190 5-132 SM
SCANNER SP MODE
2-007-39 Notch No. 4(Middle): G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-40 Notch No. 4(Middle): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-41 Notch No. 4(Middle): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-42 Notch No. 4(Middle) G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-43 Notch No. 4(Middle): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-44 Notch No. 4(Middle): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-45 Notch No. 4(Middle): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-46 Notch No. 4(Middle): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-62 Notch No.2: R - Threshold * [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-63 Notch No.2: G - Threshold CTL [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-65 Notch No.1(Darker): R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-66 Notch No. 1(Darker): G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-67 Notch No. 1(Darker): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Service
Tables
2-007-68 Notch No. 1(Darker): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-69 Notch No. 1(Darker) G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-70 Notch No. 1(Darker): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-71 Notch No. 1(Darker): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-72 Notch No. 1(Darker): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-007-73 Notch No. 1(Darker): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
SM 5-133 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER SP MODE
2-008 [Full Color (Photo) mode settings]

(Main scan) CTL
processing mode.
(Sub scan) CTL

CTL

Adjusts the scanner gamma for RGB.
2-008-4 R-Gamma Curve * [ 0 to 10 / 10 / 1 /step ] DFU
2-008-5 G-Gamma Curve CTL
2-008-6 B-Gamma Curve
2-008-11 Notch No.7 (Lighter): R - Brightness * [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-12 Notch No.7 (Lighter): G - Brightness CTL [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-13 Notch No.7 (Lighter): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-14 Notch No.7 (Lighter): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-15 Notch No.7 (Lighter): G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-16 Notch No.7 (Lighter): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-17 Notch No.7 (Lighter): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-18 Notch No.7 (Lighter): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-19 Notch No.7 (Lighter): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-38 Notch No.4 (Middle): R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
B147/B149/B190 5-134 SM
SCANNER SP MODE
2-008-39 Notch No. 4 (Middle): G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-40 Notch No. 4 (Middle): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-41 Notch No. 4 (Middle): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-42 Notch No. 4 (Middle) G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-43 Notch No. 4 (Middle): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-44 Notch No. 4 (Middle): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-45 Notch No. 4 (Middle): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-46 Notch No. 4 (Middle): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-62 Notch No.2: R - Threshold * [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-63 Notch No.2: G - Threshold CTL [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-65 Notch No.1 (Darker): R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-66 Notch No.1 (Darker): G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-67 Notch No.1 (Darker): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Service
Tables
2-008-68 Notch No.1 (Darker): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-69 Notch No.1 (Darker) G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-70 Notch No.1 (Darker): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-71 Notch No.1 (Darker): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-72 Notch No.1 (Darker): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-008-73 Notch No.1 (Darker): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
2-021 [Compression ratio of gray-scale]

Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three
settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
2-021-1 Compression ratio (Normal image) * [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ]
2-021-2 Compression ratio (High quality image) CTL [ 5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step ]
2-021-3 Compression ratio (Low-quality image) [ 5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
SM 5-135 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER SP MODE
2-022 [ACS settings]

2-022-1 Color judge rate * [ 1 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step ]
CTL
This menu specifies the area ratio that is checked by the auto-color sensing feature.
2-022-2 Color gap Notch No.1 * [ 0 to 255 / 30 / 1 /step ]
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
This program specifies the color difference for each image density level.
2-002-7 Adjustment value of threshold * [ -127 to 127 / -80 / 1 /step ]
CTL
This menu specifies the threshold of the auto-color sensing feature.
B147/B149/B190 5-136 SM
REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET
5.5 REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET

5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET
The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Use the following
procedure.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-or-
Press and hold down   together for over 10 seconds. When the machine
beeps once, release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please wait” is displayed for
a few seconds, the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal
operation.
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET

System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the
following procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .

2. Hold down  and then press System Settings.
NOTE: You must press  first.
Service
Tables
B146S914.WMF
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system
settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
SM 5-137 B147/B149/B190
REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET
Copier Setting Reset

The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following
procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .

2. Hold down  and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
NOTE: You must press  first.
B146S915.WMF
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier
Document Server settings, press “Yes”.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press “Exit”.
B147/B149/B190 5-138 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE

To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the
firmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted
into SD Card Slot 3 on the right side of the controller box.
5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE

There are 16 types of firmware as shown below.
Location of
Type of firmware Function Message displayed
firmware
Engine - Main Printer engine control BCU Flash ROM Engine
Engine - Music Line position adjustment BCU MUSIC CPU Music
Engine - DSP Line position adjustment BCU DSP CPU DSP
Operating system Flash ROM on the Onboard System
System
controller board
Feature application Flash ROM on the Netfile DocBox
Netfile Application
controller board
Feature application Printer/scanner Onboard Printer
Printer Application
SD card
Feature application Printer/scanner Onboard Scn
Scanner Application
SD card
Feature application Flash ROM on the Opt DIMM Fax
Fax Application
controller board
Network Interface Flash ROM on the Network Support
NIB
controller board
Scanner IPU Scanner control IPU Flash ROM Scanner IPU
Service
Tables
Operation Panel Panel control Operation Panel Ope Panel. XX
Fax FCU Fax control FCU Jupi FCU (XXX)-1
Language firmware Operation Panel LANG.1
Language Two languages can be LANG.2
(16 languages) selected from 16
languages.
Document server Flash ROM on the Web Document Box
WebDocBox
application controller board
Web Service application Flash ROM on the Web Support
WebSys
controller board
SG3-PRE1 Optional G3 fax control FCU SG3DREI-1
SM 5-139 B147/B149/B190
FIRMWARE UPDATE Rev. 06/2004
5.6.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN…

An SD card is a precision device, so always observe the following precautions
when handling SD cards:
• Always switch the machine off before inserting an SD card. Never insert the SD
card into the slot with the power on.
• After the power has been switched on, never remove the SD card from the
service slot.
• Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD
card.
• Store SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed high temperature,
high humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
• Always handle SD cards with care to avoid bending or scratching them. Never
drop an SD card or expose it to other shock or vibration.
Keep the following points in mind while you are using the firmware update
software:
• “Upload” means to send data from the machine to the SD card, and “download”
means to send data from the SD card to the machine.
• To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-
screen of the LCD, or press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the
operation panel. For example, “Exit (0)” displayed on the screen means you can
touch the Exit button on the screen, or press the  button on the operation
panel of the copier.
• Before starting the firmware update procedure, always make sure that the
machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job from arriving
while the firmware update is in progress.
5.6.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE

⇒ Preparation
1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire “romdata” folder onto the SD card.
2. If the card already contains the “romdata” folder, copy the “B149” folder onto the
card.
3. If the card already contains folders up to “B149”, simply copy the necessary
firmware files (e.g. B149xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
B147/B149/B190 5-140 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. Turn the main power switch off.

2. Remove the slot cover of SD Card Slot
3 ( x 1). [C]
3. With the label on the SD card [B]
facing as shown in the diagram, insert
[B]
the SD card into SD Card Slot 3 [C].
4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot
so it locks in place.
5. Make sure the SD card is locked in
place.
NOTE: To remove the SD, push it in
to unlock the spring lock and
then release it so it pops out of [A]
the slot. B146S901.WMF
6. If the machine is connected to a network, disconnect the network cable from

the copier.
7. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version
update screen appears on the LCD in English.
Update Menu
Firmware (1)
Service
Tables
Language Data(2)
Exit(0)
B146S916.WMF
KEY WHAT IT DOES

Press this button on the touch-screen (or  on the 10-key pad) to open
Firmware (1)
the firmware update screen.
Press this button on the touch-screen (or  on the 10-key pad) to open
Language Data (2)
the language update screen.
Press this key on the touch-screen (or  on the 10-key pad) to quit the
Exit (0)
update procedure and return to normal machine operation.
SM 5-141 B147/B149/B190
FIRMWARE UPDATE
NOTE: The firmware update and language update cannot be performed during the
same session. If you need to do both, do the firmware update, switch the
machine off and on to confirm the successful update of the firmware, then
do the language update.
8. Touch “Firmware (1)” to open the firmware update screen.
PCcard -> ROM Page01
Printer (1) ROM: G0000000 NEW: G0000000

ROM: 0.01 NEW: 0.0X
Engine (2) ROM: B0705254 NEW: B0705254
ROM: 2.16:16 NEW: 2.16:16
OpePanel.DOM (3) ROM: B0705370 NEW: B0705370
ROM: 1.22 NEW: 2.00
Exit(0)
B146S917.WMF
ROM/NEW WHAT IT MEANS

Tells you the number of the module and name of the version presently
ROM:
installed. The first line is the module number, the second line the version name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The first
NEW:
line is the module number, the second line the version name.
9. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the
operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.
B147/B149/B190 5-142 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
10. After pressing the module button, or entering the appropriate number with the
10-key pad to select the module, the “Verify” and “Update” keys appear at the
bottom of the screen.
NOTE: The screen below shows only the “Printer” option selected for update.

ROM: 0.01 NEW: 0.0X
Engine (2) ROM: B0705254 NEW: B0705254
ROM: 2.16:16 NEW: 2.16:16
ROM: 1.22 NEW: 2.00
Verify(./*) Exit(0) UpDate(#)
B146S918.WMF
KEY WHAT IT DOES

Verify (./*) Press this button (or ) to verify the selected module.
Update(#) Press this button (or ) to upgrade the selected module.
Exit(0) Press this button (or ) to return to the previous screen.
Service
Tables
11. To start the update, touch “UpDate (#)” (or ).
SM 5-143 B147/B149/B190
FIRMWARE UPDATE
After selecting “Update”, three lines are displayed on the screen:
PCcard -> ROM
Loading
Printer
*****_ _ _ _ _
Printer
B146S919.WMF
The first line tells you what is happening, the second line is the name of the
module, and the third line tells you about the progress of the operation. As the
update progresses, the underscores (_) in the progress bar are replaced by
asterisks.
The update is finished after all 10 underscores are replaced by asterisks.
NOTE: The progress bar (*****_ _ _ _) is not displayed for the operation panel
firmware after you touch “OpePanel”. While the LCDC firmware is
updating, the power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals. When
the update is finished, the power key flashes on and off slower at 3 s
intervals.
When the update is finished, you will see a screen like the one below:
PCcard -> ROM
Update done.
Printer Card No.: 1/1
B146S920.WMF
The first line prompts you that the update is finished, and the second line tells
you the name of the module that has just been updated.
NOTE: If you have selected more than one module for updating, only the
screen for the last module updated will be displayed.
B147/B149/B190 5-144 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
12. When you see the “Update Done” message, switch the copier main power
switch off.
13. Press in the SD card to release it, then remove it from the slot.
14. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
Error Messages
If an error occurs during the download, an error message will be displayed in
the first line.
PCcard -> ROM
No Valid Data E24
Exit(0)
B146S921.WMF
The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number. The example above
shows error “E24” displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table.
( 5.6.8)
Service
Tables
SM 5-145 B147/B149/B190
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during
the update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.
PCcard -> ROM
Reboot after card insert. E82
BLC2 eplot Card No.:1/1
B146S922.WMF
Recovery After Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the
firmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be
guaranteed after the machine is switched on again. If the ROM update does not
complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct operation
of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to be displayed until the ROM
is updated successfully.
In this case, just insert the card once again and switch on the machine to continue
the firmware download automatically from the card without the menu display.
B147/B149/B190 5-146 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.4 VERIFYING A SUCCESSFUL UPDATE

Follow this procedure to verify that a module has been updated successfully.
1. Switch off the main power switch.
2. If the SD card is not in the machine, insert it into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial screen
appears on the LCD in English.
Update Menu
Firmware (1)
Language Data(2)
Exit(0)
B146S923.WMF
4. Press “Firmware (1)” to open the firmware update screen.
Service
Tables

ROM: 0.01 NEW: 0.0X
Engine (2) ROM: B0705254 NEW: B0705254
ROM: 2.16:16 NEW: 2.16:16
ROM: 1.22 NEW: 2.00
Exit(0)
B146S924.WMF
SM 5-147 B147/B149/B190
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5. On the touch-screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key
on the operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to verify
6. After pressing the key, the items selected for verification are displayed in
reverse and the “Verify” and “Update” keys appear at the bottom of the screen.
7. To start the verification, touch “Verify (./*” (or press ).
After selecting “Verify”, two lines are displayed on the screen:
PCcard -> ROM
Verify done.
B146S925.WMF
The first line tells you the status of the verification for the item selected from the
menu, and the second name tells you the name of the item verified.
NOTE: If you selected more than one item for verification, the “Verify Done”
message is displayed only once for the last module verified.
9. When you see the “Verify Done” message, switch the copier main power switch
off.
10. Press in the SD card to release it, then remove it from the slot.
11. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
B147/B149/B190 5-148 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Error during Verification

If anything abnormal is detected during verification, an error message is
displayed:
PCcard -> ROM
Verify Error
B146S926.WMF
The second line tells you the name of the module where the error was detected.
If an error occurs during verification, switch the printer off and download the
firmware from the SD card again.
Service
Tables
SM 5-149 B147/B149/B190
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.5 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL

Follow this procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).
1. Turn the copier main switch off.
2. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main switch on.
4. After about 45 seconds the initial screen opens in English.
5. Touch “OpePanel”.

ROM: 0.01 NEW: 0.0X
Engine (2) ROM: B0705254 NEW: B0705254
ROM: 2.16:16 NEW: 2.16:16
ROM: 1.22 NEW: 2.00
Verify(./*) Exit(0) UpDate(#)
B146S927.WMF
6. Touch “UpDate(#) (or ) to start the update.

After about 9 seconds, the downloading starts.
While the data is downloading, the operation panel goes off and the main
power on key flashes in red at 0.5 s intervals. When the update is finished, the
same key starts flashing in green at 1 s intervals.
7. Switch the copier main power switch off, remove the SD card, then switch the
copier on again.
B147/B149/B190 5-150 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.6 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA

The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard
disks:
• When the machine is installed.
• After the hard disks have been replaced.
The print data contains the controller software, so execute SP5853 to download the
fixed stamp data required by the hard disks.
2. Select SP5853 then press “Execute”. The following screen opens while the
stamp data is downloading.
PCcard -> ROM
Loading
Stamp Data
**_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Service
Tables
B146S928.WMF
The download is finished with the message prompts you to close.
Processing finished. Switch on the

main power switch.
Note: May re-set automatically.
Close
B146S929.WMF
3. Press the “Close” button then cycle the copier off and on again.
SM 5-151 B147/B149/B190
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card
Follow this procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
NOTE: This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is
replaced.
1. Before switching the machine off, execute SP5990 001 (SMC Print). You will
need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
2. Switch the copier main power switch off.
3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3, then switch the copier on.
4. Execute SP5824 001 (NVRAM Data Upload) then press the “Execute” key
When uploading is finished, the following files are coped to an NVRAM folder
on the SD card. The fileis saved to the path and filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number “B1490017”:
NVRAM\B1490017.NV
5. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card
that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the
data was uploaded.
NOTE: NVRAM data from more than one machine can be uploaded to the
same SD card.
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM

Follow this procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the
machine.
• If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between
the controller and BCU is defective, the NVRAM data download may fail.
• If the download fails, repeat the download procedure.
• If the second attempt fails, enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print
you created before uploading the NVRAM data. ( 5.6.6)
2. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main power switch on.
4. Execute SP5825 001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the “Execute” key.
NOTE: In order for the NVRAM data to download successfully, the serial
number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the
machine. If the serial numbers do not match, the download will fail.
This procedure downloads the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count
B147/B149/B190 5-152 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.8 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE

Many languages are available for selection, but only two can be selected for
switching. Follow this procedure to select the two languages, either of which can be
selected for the user interface on the operation panel.
2. Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 45
seconds.
4. Touch the “Language (2)” on the screen (or press ).
Download Language LC D C R O M B 0705370 Lang.C ard ------
S elect Lang.
N ow Lang.
LANG. 1(1) Japanese 2.87 -> ------------ ---------------
------ ---------------
LANG. 2(2) English - U K 2.87 -> ------------ ---------------
---------------
------
Exit(0)
B146S930.WMF
Service
Tables
5. Touch “LANG. 1(1)” or “LANG 2(2)
Key What it does

Touch this button on the screen (or press  on the 10-key pad) to open the next
LANG. 1(1)
screen so you can select the 1st language.
Touch this button on the screen (or press  on the 10-key pad) to open the next
LANG. 1(2)
screen so you can select the 2nd language.
Touch this key on the screen (or press  on the 10-key pad) to quit the update
Exit(0)
procedure and return to normal screen.
SM 5-153 B147/B149/B190
FIRMWARE UPDATE
6. To select the 1st Language, touch “LANG 1(1)”.

-or-
To select the 2nd Language, touch “LANG(2)”.
(7) Italian (1)

S panish (2)
D utch (3)
N orw egian (4)
D anish (6)
(9)
Exit(0)
B146S931.WMF
7. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-
keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) Language.
If a language is already selected, it will be displayed in reverse.
Touching “Exit(0)” also returns the previous screen.
8. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch “↑(7)” or “↓(9)” on
the screen (or press  or ) to display more choices.
B147/B149/B190 5-154 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
After you select a language, the Download Screen opens.

The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating is displayed.
To the right of the selection, the first column displays the language currently
selected and the 2nd column displays the language selected to replace that
language.
The example below shows that the download will replace “Japanese” with
“Italian” as the 1st language.
Download Language LC D C R O M B 0705370 Lang.C ard ------
S elect Lang.
N ow Lang.
LANG. 1(1) Japanese 2.87 -> Italian 2.88
------ ---------------
LANG. 2(2) English - U K 2.87 -> ------------ ---------------
---------------
------
Exit(0) UpDate(#)
B146S932.WMF
9. Touch “Update(#)” on the screen (or press ) to start the download.

Another screen with a progress bar is not displayed while the language is
downloading.
Service
Tables
While the language is downloading:
• The operation panel switches off.
• The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.
10. After the Start LED begins to flash slowly, switch the copier main power switch
off, then remove the SD card from the slot.
11. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.
SM 5-155 B147/B149/B190
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.9 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS

If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be displayed in the first
line. The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number (“E20”, for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
Cannot map logical address Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use
20
another SD card.
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Cannot decompress Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
22
compressed data corrupted.
Error occurred when ROM Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt
23
update program started fails, replace controller board.
SD card access error Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use
24
another SD card.
No HDD available for stamp HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
30
data download
Data incorrect for continuous Insert the SD card with the remaining data required
31
download for the download, the re-start the procedure.
Data incorrect after download Execute the recovery procedure for the intended
32 interrupted module download, then repeat the installation
procedure.
Incorrect SD card version Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
33
corrupted.
Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct
34 module is not on the SD card) data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install
again.
Module mismatch – Module on SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD
35 SD card is not for this machine card is for another machine. Acquire correct update
data then install again.
Cannot write module – Cause SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD
36 other than E34, E35 card is for another machine. Acquire correct update
Engine module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD
40
failed card and try again, or replace the BCU board.
Operation panel module Replace the update data for the module on the SD
42
download failed card and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD
43
failed card and try again, or replace the hard disks.
Controller module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD
44
failed card and tray again, or replace controller board.
Electronic confirmation check SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD
50 failed card is for another machine. Acquire correct update
B147/B149/B190 5-156 SM
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.7.1 OVERVIEW
The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) enables you to copy
application programs from an SD card to another SD card.
The machine has three SD card slots. It can use two of them–Slot 1 and Slot 2–as
the storage of application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenance work only. You
cannot use three SD cards at the same time as the application program storage. If
your application programs are in three or more SD cards, choose one or two SD
cards from them, and save all the application programs into the SD card(s).
Extreme caution should be exercised when using SD Card Appli Move:

1. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application
program from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to
use the SD card after you copy the application program from the card to
another card.
2. Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer.
Normal operation is not guaranteed when such SD card is used.
3. Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from
the card to another card. This is because: The SD card can be the only proof
that the user is licensed to use the application program. You may need to
check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
4. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy another
Service
Tables
data to the SD card that stores PostScript data.
SM 5-157 B147/B149/B190
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.7.2 MOVE EXEC

The menu “Move Exec” (SP5-873-001) enables you to copy application programs
from the original SD card to another SD card.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is
copied into this SD card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.
The application program is copied from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.”
7. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
B147/B149/B190 5-158 SM
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.7.3 UNDO EXEC

The menu “Undo Exec” (SP5-873-002) enables you to copy back application
programs from an SD card to the original SD card. You can use this program when,
for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec
(SP5-873-001).
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copied
back into this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.
The application program is copied back from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 “Undo Exec.”
7. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 1
10. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 and insert it to SD Card Slot 1.
NOTE: This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are
used by the machine.
Service
Tables
12. Check that the application programs run normally.
SM 5-159 B147/B149/B190
CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

5.8.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
• Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics
just after the power has been turned on.
• Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by
using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)
• SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or
during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
Power ON A
Diagnostic RAM Check NG Not initialized Power-on or

Detailed
CPU Check NG SC820 Detailed
ROM Sum Check NG SC828

ASIC Check NG SC821
Standard RAM Detailed

NG SC829
Standard RAM Check
NG SC827
Conection Check
Optional RAM Detailed
NG
Optional RAM Check Not use optional RAM
NG SC829
Connection Check Error Logged
Standard NVRAM
NG
Detailed Check
Clock Generator Check NG SC838
Error Logged
Optional NVRAM Power-on
NG
Standard NVRAM Detailed Check
Check Error Logged
Optinoal HDD Check NG

Optional NVRAM Check NG SC824
Error Logged
IEEE1284 Loop-back
NG
Check
Font Header Check NG
Error Logged
Error Logged Real Time Clock
NG SC826
Detailed Check
Real Time Clock Check NG SC826
Font ROM Sum Check NG

Network Check NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
END
Engine I/F Check NG
Error Logged
Interrupt Check NG
Error Logged
Memory Chip Check NG
Error Logged
B146S933.WMF
B147/B149/B190 5-160 SM
CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is
powered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually
in order to test other components or conditions that are not tested during self-
diagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put the
machine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode.
No. Name
G0219350 Parallel Loopback Connector
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis

Follow this procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.
1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the
Centronics I/F port.
2. Hold down , press and hold down , and then while pressing both keys at
the same time, switch on the machine.
You will see “Now Loading” on the touch-panel, and then you will see the
results of the test.
The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics and prints the diagnostic
report after completing the test.
• Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected
during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).
• Refer to section 4.2 for details about the error codes.
Service
Tables
SM 5-161 B147/B149/B190
USER PROGRAM MODE
5.9 USER PROGRAM MODE

5.9.1 MENU
System Settings
General Features Interface Settings Key Operator Tools
• Panel Tone • Network • User Code Management
• Warm Up Notice • Parallel Interface • Key Counter Management
• Copy Count Display • Print List • External Charge Unit
• Function Priority Management
• Print Priority File Transfer • Key Operator Code
• Function Reset Timer • Delivery Option • Extended Security
• Output: Copier • SMTP Server • Display/Print Counter
• Output: Document Server • SMTP Authentication • Display/Clear/Print
• Output: Facsimile • POP before SMTP Counter per User Code
• Output: Printer • Reception Protocol • Print Address Book:
• <F/F4> Size Setting • POP3/IMAP4 Settings Destination List
• Key Operator's E-mail • Panel Off Level
Tray Paper Settings Address • Address Book
• Paper Tray Priority: Copier • E-mail Reception Port Management
• Paper Tray Priority: • E-mail Reception Interval • Address Book
Facsimile • Maximum Reception E- Program/Change/Delete
mail Size Group
• Paper Tray Priority: Printer
• E-mail Storage in Server • Address Book:
• Tray Paper Size: Tray 2
Program/Change/Delete
• Paper Type: Bypass Tray • Default User Transfer Request
• Paper Type: Tray 1 Name/Password (Send)
• Address Book: Change
• Paper Type: Tray 2 • Program/Change/Delete Order
• Cover Sheet Tray E-mail Message
• Address Book: Edit Title
• Program/Change/Delete
• Slip Sheet Tray • Address Book: Select Title
Subject
• Scanner Recall Interval • Auto Delete File
Timer Settings • Delete All Files
Time
• Auto Off Timer • Password Management for
• Number of Scanner
• Energy Saver Timer Recalls Stored Files
• Panel Off Timer • E-mail Account • AOF
• System Auto Reset Timer • Program/Change LDAP
• Copier/Document Server Server
Auto Reset Timer • User LDAP Server
• Facsimile Auto Reset
Timer
• Scanner Auto Reset Timer
• Set Date
• Set Time
B147/B149/B190 5-162 SM
USER PROGRAM MODE
Maintenance
Auto Color Calibration
Color Registration
Copier Document Server Features

General Features Reproduction Ratio Stamp
• Auto Paper Select Priority • Shortcut R/E 1 • Preset Stamp
• Paper Display • Shortcut R/E 2 • User Stamp
• Original Type Display • Shortcut R/E 3 • Date Stamp
• Original Type Priority • Enlarge 1 • Page Numbering
• Original Photo Type • Enlarge 2
Priority • Enlarge 3 Input/Output
• Auto Tray Switching • Enlarge 4 • Switch to Batch
• Duplex Mode Priority • Enlarge 5 • SADF Auto Reset
• Copy Orientation in Duplex • Priority Setting: Enlarge • Rotate Sort: Auto Paper
Mode • Reduce 1 Continue
• Original Orientation in • Reduce 2 • Auto Sort
Duplex Mode • Reduce 3 • Memory Full Auto Scan
• Change Initial Mode Restart
• Reduce 4
• Maximum Copy Quantity • Letterhead Setting
• Reduce 5
• Tone: Original Remains
• Reduce 6
• Job End Call Adjust Color Image
• Priority Setting: Reduce
• Copy Function Key: F1 • Background Image of ADS
• Ratio for Create Margin (Full Color/Two Color)
• Copy Function Key: F2 • R/E Priority
• Copy Function Key: F3 • Color Sensitivity
• Copy Function Key: F4 • A.C.S. Sensitivity
Edit
Service
• A.C.S. Priority
Tables
• Copy Function Key: F5 • Front Margin: Left/Right
• Document Server Storage • Back Margin: Left/Right
Key: F1 • Front Margin: Top/Bottom
• Document Server Storage • Back Margin: Top/Bottom
Key: F2
• 1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto
• Document Server Storage Margie: T to T
Key: F3
• 1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto
• Document Server Storage
Margie: T to B
Key: F4
• Erase Boarder Width
• Document Server Storage
Key: F5 • Erase Original Shadow in
Combine
• Clear Bypass Mode
• Erase Center Width
• Color Mode Priority
• Front Cover Copy in
• Two Color Mode Priority Combine
• Auto Image Density
• Copy Order in Combine
Priority
• Image Repeat Separation
Line
• Double Copies Separation
Line
• Separation Line in
Combine
• Orientation Magazine
SM 5-163 B147/B149/B190
USER PROGRAM MODE
Facsimile Features
General Settings/Adjustment Reception Settings Key-Operator Tools
• Memory/Immediate • Switch Reception Mode • Program/Change/Delete
Transmission Switch • Authorized RX Standard Message
• Text Size Priority • Forwarding • Store/Change/Delete Auto
• Original Type Priority • RX File Print Quantity Document
• Auto Image Density • 2 Sided Print • Program/Change/Delete
• Adjust Scan Density Scan Size
• RX Reverse Printing
• Select Title • Paper Tray • Print Journal
• Change Initial Mode • Transmission Page Count
• Specify Tray for Lines
• Adjust Sound Volume • Checkered Mark • Forwarding
• Program Fax Information • Memory Lock RX
• Center Mark
• Scan End Reset • Print Reception Time • ECM
• TX Stamp Priority • Parameter Setting
• Line Priority Setting E-mail Settings • Program Special Sender
• Program Economy Time • Internet Fax Settings • Box Setting
• On Hook Mode Release • Maximum E-mail Size • Transfer Report
Time • SMTP RX File Delivery • Program Confidential ID
• Quick Operation Key 1 Setting • Program Polling ID
• Quick Operation Key 2 • Program Memory Lock ID
• Quick Operation Key 3 • Reception File Setting
• Stored RX File User Code
Setting
Printer Features
Paper Input System PCL Menu
• Bypass Paper Size • Print Error Report • Orientation
• Auto Continue • Form Lines
List/Test Print • Memory Overflow • Font Source
• Multiple List • Job Separation • Font Number
• Configuration Page • Memory Usage • Point Size
• Error Log • B&W Page Detect • Font Pitch
• Menu List • Duplex • Symbol Set
• PCL Configuration/Font • Copies • Courier Font
Page • Sub Paper Size • Extend A4 Width
• PS Configuration/Font • Page Size • Append CR to LF
Page
• Letterhead Setting • Resolution
• Hex Dump
Host Interface
Maintenance
• I/O Buffer
• Menu Protect
• I/O Timeout
• 4 Color Graphic Mode
B147/B149/B190 5-164 SM
USER PROGRAM MODE
Scanner Features
Scan Settings Destination List Settings Send Settings
• Default Scan Settings • Destination List Display • TWAIN Standby Time
• Wait Time for Next Priority 2 • File Type Priority
Original: Exposure Glass • Select Title • Compression (Black &
• Wait Time for Next White)
Original(s): SADF • Compression (Gray
• Original Setting Scale/Full Color)
• Original Feed Type Priority • Print & Delete Scanner
• Mixed Original Sizes Journal
Priority • Maximum E-mail Size
• Original Orientation Priority • Divide & Send E-mail
• Change Initial Mode • E-mail Information
• Auto Color Select: Mode Language
Priority • Sender's Name Default
• A.C.S. Sensitivity Level
(Language)
—
Inquiry
Print Inquiry List
Counter
Service
Tables
Print Counter List
SM 5-165 B147/B149/B190
USER PROGRAM MODE
5.9.2 DISPLAY
Selecting Menu
To start the UP mode (User Tools/Counter), press the  key. The initial screen
is displayed.
User Tools/Counter Exit
Copier/Document Server Francais

Features
System Settings
Facsimile Features
Maintenance Printer Features Inquiry
Scanner Features Counter
B146S908.WMF
For the list of the menus and submenus, see section 5.9.1, “Menu.”
Inquiry
The menu “Inquiry” displays the information specified by the corresponding SPs:
Information Specified by
Consumables Telephone number to order SP5-812-003
Machine maintenance/Repair Telephone number SP5-812-001
Sales representative Telephone number SP5-812-004
B147/B149/B190 5-166 SM
Rev. 09/2004 DIP SWITCHES
5.10 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board
DIP SW No. OFF ON
Boot-up from flash Boot-up from IC card
1
ROM
2 to 4 Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.
BCU Board
Set the DIP switch on the BCU as listed in the table.
DIP Switch
Model 4
1 2 3
B147/B190 B149
North/South
ON OFF OFF OFF ON
America
Europe OFF ON OFF OFF ON
Asia ON ON OFF OFF ON
Taiwan ON OFF ON OFF ON
Korea OFF ON ON OFF ON
When the DIP switch is incorrectly set, one of the following error occurs:
• “SC195”
• “SC902”
• “Fusing Unit Setting Error”
Service
Tables
SM 5-167 B147/B149/B190
OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
27 10
26
25
11
24
12
23
K
13
22
Y
14
21 C
M 15
20
19 16
18
17
Descriptions
Detailed
B146D901.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor 15. Transfer unit
2. ADF exposure glass 16. Rotation encoder
3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 17. Tray 2
4. Scanner lamp 18. Tray 1
5. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 19. Waste oil bottle
6. Original width sensor
20. Waste toner bottle
7. Original length sensor
21. Waste toner vibrator
8. Scanner motor
9. Exposure glass
22. Duplex feed unit
10. Sensor board unit (SBU) 23. Transfer belt cleaning unit
11. Toner cartridge 24. ID sensor
12. Laser optics housing unit 25. Development unit (each color)
13. Polygon mirror motor 26. PCU (each color)
14. By-pass feed table 27. Fusing unit
SM 6-1 B147/B149/B190
OVERVIEW
6.1.2 PAPER PATH

1 2
12
11
10
9
K
8 Y
C 3
7
M
B146D911.WMF
1. Original tray 7. Duplex inverter unit
2. Original exit tray 8. Duplex feed unit
3. By-pass tray 9. To optional finisher
4. Tray 1 10. To optional finisher
5. Tray 2 11. External Tray
6. Optional paper feed unit/LCT 12. Standard tray
The two-tray finisher requires an optional paper feed unit or the LCT. The duplex
inverter unit has two exits for the two-tray finisher. When the one-tray paper feed
unit is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the upper exit. When
the two-tray paper feed unit or LCT is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray
finisher from the lower exit.
B147/B149/B190 6-2 SM
OVERVIEW
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
3 7
4 9
B146D912.WMF
1. Scanner motor: Drives the scanner unit.

2. Development drive Drives the development unit for black, the fusing unit, and the paper
Descriptions
motor-K: exit section. Detailed
3. Development drive Drives the color development units (magenta/cyan/yellow), the
motor-CMY: registration roller, and the waste toner collection coils from the PCUs.
4. Drum drive motor-CMY: Drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
5. Transfer belt contact Moves the transfer belt into contact and away from the color PCUs.
motor:
6. Paper feed motor: Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2/by-pass tray).
7. Drum drive motor-K: Drives the black PCU and the collection coil in the waste toner bottle.
8. Transfer unit drive Drives the transfer unit.
motor:
9. Waste toner vibration Makes vibration to prevent the waste toner from clogging the waste
motor: toner path.
SM 6-3 B147/B149/B190
OVERVIEW
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE

Overview
Solenoids G3 board
Fax Controller
Unit
Clutches Handset
Fans
HDD
Tray motors SD card

(Printer/
scanner)*
Toner pumps
Ethernet*
Chips (toner
cartridge) Base Engine
Motherboard IEEE1284*
Trans. unit Control Unit
drive motor Controller
IEEE1394
Sensors Wireless
LAN
Waste toner
vibrator Bluetooth
Polygon motor USB
Synch. File format

detectors converter
LD boards IPU Board SBU
Scanner
Paper feed I/O Board
unit/LCT Sub Power Supply Unit
Operation
Fusing lamps panel
Feed motor ARDF

Finisher controller
controller High volt.
Main Power
Supply Unit supply (T. unit)
High volt. Scanner
supply unit Driver Trans. unit motor
board drive motor
Duplex unit Develop.
motors motors Standard
component
Duplex unit Optional
Drum motors
solenoid component
B146D913.WMF
* The SD card (printer/scanner), the IEEE 1284 interface, and the Ethernet
interface are optional components for the Asia model.
B147/B149/B190 6-4 SM
OVERVIEW
Descriptions
BCU (Base Engine Control Unit):
The BCU controls all the mechanical components. The BCU has three CPUs (Main,
MUSIC, and DSP). The CPUs control the following functions:
Main CPU
• Engine sequence
• Engine operation
• Timing for peripherals
• High voltage supply, laser, and fusing
• Sensors, drive board, and solenoids
• Motors
MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction) CPU
• TD sensor
• Line position adjustment
• Memory chip on the toner cartridge
DSP (Digital Signal Processor)
• Line position adjustment
Controller:
The controller connects to the BCU through a PCI bus. The controller handles the
following functions:
• Machine-to-host interface
• Operation panel interface
• Network interface
• Interfacing and control of the optional USB, Bluetooth, IEEE1394,
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN), HDD, and DRAM DIMM
LD Drive Board:
This is the laser diode drive circuit board.
DRB:
Descriptions
The DRB (driver board) controls the paper feed motor, development motors Detailed
(color/black), drum drive motors (color/black), transfer unit drive motor, and transfer
voltage.
IPU:
The Image Processing Unit is a large-scale integrated circuit. This unit processes
digital signals.
SBU:
The Sensor Board Unit has a CCD (charge-coupled device) and an analog-to-
digital conversion circuit.
Operation Panel Board:
Controls the display panel, the LED, and the keypad.
Motherboard:
The motherboard is the main circuit board connecting with the BCU, FCU,
controller, IPU, and main power supply unit.
SM 6-5 B147/B149/B190
OVERVIEW
FCU:
The FCU (fax controller unit) manages the fax programs and communicates with
the controller to share copier resources.
Scanner I/O Board:
The scanner I/O board is a circuit board that transmits control signals, image data,
and electricity.
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS
2, 6
1
5
3
8
10 K
4
Y
9
C
B146D500.WMF
This machine uses four PCUs, four development units, and four laser beams for
color printing. Each PCU consists of a drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, and
blade. From the left, the PCU stations are black, yellow, cyan, and magenta.
A transfer belt feeds paper past the PCUs, and the toner image on each drum is
transferred to the paper.
The paper path is inclined about 38 degrees to make the machine as compact as
possible.
B147/B149/B190 6-6 SM
OVERVIEW
Drum charge:
The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge
Laser exposure:
The laser beam from the laser diode (LD) goes through the lens and mirrors and
reaches the drum. The beam creates a latent image on the drum by turning the
laser beam on and off.
Development:
The development roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the
drum surface. This machine uses four independent development units (one for
each color).
Image transfer:
The charge applied to the transfer roller attracts the toner from the drum to the
paper. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the paper.
Cleaning for OPC drum:
The cleaning brush and blade remove any toner remaining on the drum surface
after image transfer to the paper.
Quenching for OPC drum:
Quenching is done by illuminating the entire area of the drum surface with the laser
at the end of every job.
Paper attraction:
Paper is attracted to the transfer belt by the charge applied to the paper attraction
roller.
Separation:
Paper separates from the transfer belt when the belt curves away from it.
Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt:
The cleaning brush and blade clean the belt surface. The grounding roller inside
the transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.
ID sensor:
Descriptions
The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors (one at the front, center, and rear). Detailed
The ID sensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on the transfer belt. The
ID sensor output is used for process control and for automatic line position, skew,
and color registration adjustments for the latent image.
SM 6-7 B147/B149/B190
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.1 OVERVIEW
This machine provides the following two forms of process control:
• Potential control
• Toner supply control
The process control facilities of this machine have the following features:
• Three ID (image density) sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID
sensor is used for process control. The front, center, and rear ID sensors are
used for line positioning and other adjustments.
• TD (toner density) sensor.
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL

Overview
Potential control controls development to maintain the density of the toner images
on the drums. It does this by compensating for variations in drum chargeability and
toner density.
The machine uses the ID sensor to measure the reflectivity of the transfer belt and
the density of a standard sensor pattern. This is done during the process control
self check.
The machine determines the following depending on the ID sensor output and a
reference table in memory.
• VD: Drum potential without exposure – to adjust this, the machine adjusts the
charge roller voltage.
• VB: Development bias
• VL: Drum potential at the strongest exposure – to adjust this, the machine
adjusts the laser power.
(In addition, VREF is corrected. This is used for toner supply control.)
This process controls the development potential so that the maximum amount of
toner applied to the drum is constant. However, to control the development
potential to improve reproduction of highlight parts of images, the laser power
control method can be changed. This depends on the setting of SP3-125-2. The
default setting is 1 (normal control method). To change to the highlight range
control method, set this SP to 2.
If SP3-125-1 is set to 0 (Off), the machine does not do the potential control, but
uses the development bias adjusted with SP2-201-1 to -9, the charge roller voltage
adjusted with SP2-001-1 to -9, and the laser power selected with SP2-103-1 to -27.
However, these SPs should normally not be adjusted in the field.
B147/B149/B190 6-8 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Process Control Self Check

This machine carries out potential control using a procedure called the process
control self check. There are seven types of process control self check, categorized
according to their execution timing.
1. Forced
This is done when SP3-126-1 is used.
2. Initial
This starts automatically when the power is turned on or when recovering from
energy saver mode, but only if the fusing unit pressure roller temperature is
60°C or less.
3. Interval: Job End
This starts automatically at the end of a print job when the total print counter for
this feature exceeds 200 (this can be changed with SP3-906-1). After any
process control is done (except for forced process control), the counters are
reset to “0.”
4. Interval: Interrupt (default: not done)
This interrupts printing and then starts automatically when the machine makes
a certain number (A) of continuous color prints in the same job and the main
scan length detection is executed. After it is completed, the machine continues
to make prints.
The value A can be adjusted with SP3-906-2 (default: off).
At this time, only VREF is corrected. Potential control (VD, VB, VL correction) is
not done.
5. Non-use Time (default: not done)
This starts before the next print job if the machine has no job for a certain time
(M) after it makes more than a certain number (N) of prints.
Descriptions
M is adjusted with SP3-906-4 and N is adjusted with SP3-906-3. Detailed
6. After Toner End Recovery

This starts after recovery from a toner end condition.
7. After Developer Initialization
The machine executes the Auto Toner Density Adjustment (SP3-125-003). This
starts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occurs
automatically after a new development unit has been installed.
SM 6-9 B147/B149/B190
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE
Start
VSG adjustment Step 1
ID sensor solid pattern generation Step 2
Sensor pattern density detection Step 3
Toner amount calculation Step 4
VD, VB, VL selection and VREF adjustment Step 5
ID sensor highlight pattern generation Step 6
Sensor pattern density detection Step 7 Default: off
VL (LD power) selection Step 8
End
B146D501.WMF
Step 1: VSG Adjustment

This machine uses three ID sensors (direct reflection type). They are located at the
front, center, and rear of the transfer unit. Only the center ID sensor is used for
process control. The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belt's reflectivity and the
machine calibrates the ID sensor until its output (known as VSG) is as follows.
• VSG = 4.0 ± 0.5 Volts
This calibration compensates for the transfer belt's condition and the ID sensor
condition, such as dirt on the surface of the belt or ID sensor.
B147/B149/B190 6-10 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation
12 mm
15 mm
Left
Transfer belt
B146D502.WMF
First, the machine agitates the developer for between 15 and 30 seconds until the
fluctuation in TD sensor output becomes less than 0.3V.
Second, the machine makes the first series of grade patterns. See the diagram;
this 5-grade pattern is made in black, in yellow, in cyan, and in magenta (20
squares in total). They are made by changing the development bias and charge
roller voltage. The difference between development bias and charge roller voltage
is always the same.
Descriptions
Third, the machine makes the second series of grade patterns in the same order as
Detailed
the first series. The development bias and charge roller voltage are different from
those of the first series.
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection

The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 solid-color squares for each color (5
squares in the first series and another 5 squares in the second series). This data
goes to memory.
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation

The amount of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) is
calculated for each of the 10 grades of the sensor pattern from the ID sensor
output value from each grade of the pattern.
SM 6-11 B147/B149/B190
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment
M/A
Development Bias Charge Bias LD Power

B0 C0 L0
Target B1 C1 L1
M/A — — —
B C L
— — —
Bn-1 Cn-1 Ln-1
Bn Cn Ln
B Development Bias
B146D503.WMF
The machine determines the relationship between the amount of toner on the
transfer belt and the development bias for each of the 10 grades. The machine now
selects the development bias and charge roller voltages for the target M/A for each
color by referring to a table in memory.
The way that the laser power (VL) is selected depends on the setting of SP3-125-2.
• If it is set to 0, the LD power is fixed at the value of SP2-103-1, to -27.

• If it is set to 1, LD power is selected using the same memory table as mentioned
above.
• If it is set to 2, LD power is determined by ID sensor highlight pattern generation
(steps 6 to 8 later in this procedure).
The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time so that the
development gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP3-
120-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
NOTE: The patterns on the transfer belt are cleaned by the transfer belt cleaning
unit.
Allowable changes to VD, VB, and VL as a result of process control:
This depends on the process control type as follows.
• Forced : No limit
• Initial, After Developer Initialization: ± 80 volts
• Interval (Job End/ Non-use Time/ During Toner End Recovery): ± 40 volts
• Interval (Interrupt): Constant (The memory table is not used.)
Steps 6 to 8 are carried out only if SP3-125-2 is set to 2. (Default: Steps 6 to 8
are not used)
B147/B149/B190 6-12 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation
12 mm
15 mm
Left
Transfer belt
B146D504.WMF
The machine makes a 10-grade pattern on the transfer belt for each toner color.
The pattern consists of 10 squares. Each of the squares is 12 mm x 15 mm, and is
a dot-pattern squares (not solid-color squares like in the process of step 2). They
are made using constant bias and charge roller voltages selected from one of the
types mentioned above, and the various grades are made by changing the LD
power.
Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection

The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 grade-pattern squares for each color.
This data goes to memory.
Descriptions
Detailed
Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection

The machine determines the relationship M/A
between the amount of toner on the transfer
belt and the laser power for each of the 10
grades. The machine now selects the laser
power to get the target M/A. Target
M/A
L LD Power
B146D505.WMF
SM 6-13 B147/B149/B190
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB
[A]
[B]
Left
Transfer belt
B146D506.WMF
Highlight Pattern
The M/A target (mass-per-area target) is the target toner amount in a given area.
To adjust the toner amount, a highlight pattern [B] is created on the transfer belt at
the following times during each print job.
Job Interval Color of highlight pattern
Black-and-white printing After every four pages Black
Color printing After every one page One of four colors
For color jobs, the order of pattern generation is K → Y → M → C → K → Y → M

→ C.... The highlight pattern is created about 2 cm after the trailing edge of the
paper [A].
Adjustment Process
The machine generates a highlight pattern (just one grade) of a specified density.
The center ID sensor checks the density and the machine adjusts VREF by
comparing the reading with the target of each color (SP3-905-1 to 4). When this
adjustment is not sufficient, the machine adjusts VCNT too.
B147/B149/B190 6-14 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL

Overview
Toner supply control uses the following to determine the amount of toner to be
supplied. This is done before every development for each color.
• Density of the toner in the developer (as detected by the TD sensor) - VREF, VT
• Pixel count
The image density is kept constant by adjusting the density of toner in the
development unit, while accommodating to changes in the development conditions
through the potential control mechanism. Environmental changes and the number
of prints made are also used in the calculation.
The amount of toner supplied is determined by the “on” time of the toner supply
clutch. The total “on” time for each toner supply clutch is stored in the memory chip
for the relevant toner cartridge. The amount of toner supplied also depends on the
process line speed for the current job. The machine supplies the calculated amount
of toner for each color.
Toner Supply Control Modes

This machine has three toner supply control modes. They are selected with SP2-
208-1 to -4.
1. Fuzzy control mode
This is the default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor, ID sensor, and
pixel count are used in this mode.
2. Proportional control mode
This mode is used when the ID sensor at the center becomes faulty. Only the
TD sensor is used to control toner supply. The machine uses the VREF that is
stored in SP2-224-5 to -8.
Descriptions
3. Fixed supply mode Detailed
This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes faulty. The amount of toner
supply can be adjusted with SP2-208-5 to -8 if the image density is incorrect
(the default setting is 5%).
SM 6-15 B147/B149/B190
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION
[B] [C]
[A]
[D]
B146D507.WMF
Introduction
Toner Near End

To determine the toner near end status, the controller considers the following
information:
• TD sensor [A] in the development unit
• Operation time counter of the toner attraction pump [B]
• Memory chip [C] on the toner cartridge
• Toner end sensor [D]
There are two different toner near-end detection procedures (after here, referred to
as “Toner Near End Detection 1” and “Toner Near End Detection 2”). If either of
these detect near end, the machine enters the near-end condition.
Toner End
To determine the toner end status, the controller considers the following
information:
• TD sensor [A] in the development unit
• Pixel counter
B147/B149/B190 6-16 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Toner Near End Detection 1

The controller considers the information from the TD sensor.
1) The controller checks that the following condition is satisfied ten times
consecutively:
VREF + 0.4 V < VT
NOTE: The condition can be adjusted with SP2-212.
2) If the above condition is satisfied, toner is supplied to the development unit.
The messages, “Loading Toner” and “Please wait,” are displayed.
3) The controller checks the above condition again.
a) If the condition is satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is in
the toner near end status. The messages, “Toner is almost empty,”
“Replace Toner Cartridge(s),” and “Xxxxx,” are displayed; where “Xxxxx”
indicates the color, such as cyan.
b) If the condition is not satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is
not in the toner near end status. The machine resumes its normal
operation.
Toner Near End Detection 2

The controller considers the information from the operation time counter of the
toner attraction pump, the memory chip on the toner bottle, and the toner end
sensor.
1) To calculate the toner amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the controller
considers the operation time counter of the toner attraction pump and the
initial amount of the toner (recorded in the memory chip).
2) If the amount reaches the predefined weight (default: 100 g), the controller
checks the signals from the toner end sensor.
NOTE: The weight can be adjusted with SP2-212-1 and -2.
Descriptions
Detailed
a) If the signals indicate the toner amount has fallen to a certain level
(determined by SP 2-212-12 to -15), the controller decides that the
machine is in the toner near end status. The messages, “Toner is almost
empty,” “Replace Toner Cartridge(s)”, and “Xxxxx,” are displayed; where
“Xxxxx” indicates the color, such as cyan.
b) If the signals indicate the toner amount is not less than a certain level,
the controller decides that the machine is not in the toner near end status.
The machine resumes its normal operation.
SM 6-17 B147/B149/B190
PROCESS CONTROL
Toner End Detection

The machine flags the toner end status when one of the conditions below is
detected for a toner color. The messages, “No Toner,” “Replace Toner Cartridge,”
and “Xxxxx,” are displayed; where “Xxxxx” indicates the color, such as cyan.
• VREF + 0.5 V < VT (ten times consecutively)
• The pixel counter counts up the equivalent of 50 A4 sheets of pixels (100%
coverage) since near-end was detected.
However, if fewer pages have been made since near-end than the number
guaranteed with SP 2-212-11 (default: 10 pages), printing will continue.
NOTE: If one of the following conditions is detected 10 consecutive times, the
machine flags a “toner end condition” regardless of the number of pages
printed since near-end.
• VREF + 1.2 V < VT
• VT > 4.8 V
After the machine detects toner end for black, it cannot print until the toner
cartridge is replaced. If cyan, magenta, or yellow are in a toner end condition
during standby mode, the machine can print with black and white only; color
printing is disabled.
NOTE: If the yellow, cyan, or magenta toner ends during a color printing job, the
job is suspended until toner is supplied. If new color toner is not installed,
the user can print black-and-white jobs but not color jobs.
Toner End Recovery

The machine assumes that the toner cartridge has been replaced if either of the
following occurs when the near-end or end status exists:
• The upper right cover is opened and closed.
• The main switch is turned off and on.
The machine then starts to supply toner to the development unit. After supplying
toner, the machine clears the toner near-end or end status if the following
conditions are detected.
• Vt [0] – Vt [3] > 0.5V
• Vt – Vref > 0.3V
B147/B149/B190 6-18 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION

After installing a new development unit, you set “Enable” in SP5-999-005, 006, 007,
or 008 for the machine to detect the new unit. When detecting a new unit, the
copier initializes the developer.
First, the copier agitates the developer for about 100 seconds. Second, it adjusts
VCNT (control voltage for TD sensor) so that VT (TD sensor output) becomes 3.5 ±
0.1 volts. Third, the copier stores this VT as VREF.
VCNT is corrected for the current humidity every print job. VCNT is also corrected for
the total number of prints, to prevent the developer Q/M from varying.
If the humidity correction is giving poor

results (for example, if the humidity sensor
[A] is broken), it can be disabled with SP2-
223-2. Then a value for VCNT must be input
manually using SP2-224-1 to -4 (adjust by
trial and error).
During developer initialization, the machine
forcibly supplies toner because there is no
toner inside the toner transport tube at
installation. Then the machine does the
process control self check.
[A]
B146D903.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-19 B147/B149/B190
SCANNING
6.3 SCANNING
6.3.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10 9
B146D904.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor 6. Scanner motor

2. ADF exposure glass 7. Exposure glass
3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 8. Sensor board unit (SBU)
4. Scanner lamp 9. Original length sensor
5. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 10. Original width sensor
The original on the exposure glass or ARDF exposure glass reflects the light
emitted from the scanner lamp. The reflected light goes to the CCD on the sensor
board by way of the 1st and 2nd scanners. The sensor board converts the CCD
analog signals into digital signals.
When the original is manually placed on the exposure glass, the scanner motor
pulls the 1st and 2nd scanners via mechanical linkage. The original is scanned
from left to right as shown above.
When the original is fed from the optional ARDF, it is automatically transported
onto the ARDF exposure glass, and to the original exit. The original does not stay
on the glass, but keeps going to the exit. The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their
home positions.
B147/B149/B190 6-20 SM
SCANNING
6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B146D508.WMF
The 1st and 2nd scanners [A] are driven by the scanner motor [B] through the
scanner drive pulley, scanner drive shaft [C], and two scanner wires [D].
- Book mode -
The SBU board controls the scanner drive motor. The 2nd scanner speed is half
that of the 1st scanner.
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the
magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or
magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by
changing the scanner motor speed, and in the main scan direction it is done by
image processing on the IPU board.
Descriptions
Detailed
Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner
motor speed using SP4-008.
- ARDF mode -
The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner H.P sensor
detects the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ARDF motor feeds the original
through the ARDF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the
sub-scan direction is done by changing the ARDF motor speed. Magnification in
the main scan direction is done in the IPU board, like for book mode.
Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ARDF
motor speed using SP6-017
SM 6-21 B147/B149/B190
SCANNING
6.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B146D905.WMF
• The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length
sensors [B] detect the original length.
• The SBU controller on the SBU board checks each sensor status when the
platen cover sensor is activated as it is closed. It detects the original size by the
on/off signals received from each sensor.
• If the copy is made with the platen cover fully open, the SBU controller on the
SBU determines the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start key is
pressed.
L1 L2 L3
W1
W2
B146D509.WMF
B147/B149/B190 6-22 SM
SCANNING
Width
Original Size Length Sensor
Sensor SP4-301
Metric display
Inch version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
version
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132
B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141
F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165
A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133
B5-L X X O X X 142
A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5
B5-S X X X X O 14
A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128
NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present, X: Paper not present
For other combinations, “Cannot detect original size.” will be indicated on the
operation panel display.
The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This
original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and
increases the machine's productivity.
However, if the by-pass tray is used, note that the machine assumes that the copy
paper is lengthwise (L). For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by-
pass tray, the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area,
disregarding the original size sensors.
Original size detection using the ARDF is described in the manual for the ARDF.
6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

Descriptions
Detailed
The anti-condensation heater is available as an optional unit. The anti-

condensation heater prevents condensation on the mirrors, which may occur when
the scanner unit is, for example, carried from a cold room to a warm room. Such
condensation can cause abnormal images.
SM 6-23 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.4.1 OVERVIEW
CCD SBU
IPU
FCU
Option
Mother Board
LD Board
HDD
M
Controller BCU
C
Y
Memory
K
B146D917.WMF
Memory
K
• The CCD (Charged Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals.
• The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital
signals. It sends these signals to the IPU (Image Processing Unit).
• The IPU processes the image, then the image data is sent to the controller.
B147/B149/B190 6-24 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM
O R(B)
Analog Amplifier 10 bit R 10 bit Field 8 bit
E A/D Converter Memory
O G
Analog Amplifier 10 bit SBU G 10 bit Field 8 bit
CCD E ASIC
A/D Converter Controller Memory
O B(R)
Analog Amplifier 10 bit B 10 bit 8 bit
E A/D Converter
SBU IPU
B146D929.WMF
Signal Processing
1. Signal Amplification
• Odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals from the CCD are amplified by
operational amplifiers.
2. Signal Composition
• The amplified signals (even-pixel and odd-pixel for each RGB color) are
combined by the MPX circuit after A/D conversion.
A/D Conversion
• The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1024 gradations) digital
signals.
Descriptions
White Level Correction Detailed
A white plate is on the back of the left scale. When you turn the switch on, the
scanner scans this plate to see the actual white level. To compensate the
difference between the actual white level and the ideal white level (target white
level), the CCD-gain control is conducted.
Others
The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if the original is scanned by
using ARDF.
SM 6-25 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE PROCESSING
Black Level Correction

• Improves image reproduction for high-density areas.
• Reads the black video level at black elements on the CCD. These pixels are
masked off, and should produce a pure black signal.
• This is subtracted from the value of each pixel.
• Calculated for each scan line.
• Corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machine
scans down the page.
Adjustments
The properties of the scanner unit, which are necessary for controlling the scanner
VPU (video processing unit), are stored in the NVRAM on the controller.
After replacing the SBU, adjust the following:
SP4–008 Scanner sub-scan magnification
SP4–010 Scanner leading edge registration
SP4–011 Scanner side-to-side registration
VPU Test Mode

To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern
with SP4-907. ( “4. Troubleshooting” for details)
B147/B149/B190 6-26 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM
SBU
• Shading Correction
• Picture Elemnet Correction
• Color Correction
• Scanner γ Correction
• Main Scan Magnification
• Filter
• ADS ASIC1
I/F
Controller
• Image Separation • Printer γ Correction
PCI BUS
ASIC3
BCU
ASIC2
• Gradation Processing
ASIC4
IPU
Controller
FCU
Option
B146D931.WMF
Shading Correction
Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the amount of light at the
edge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or variations
among pixels of the CCD.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-27 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE PROCESSING
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction

Picture element correction does two things.
1. Completion of the scan line correction process.
2. Correction if the CCD is not perpendicular to the light.
• The green CCD line is taken as a standard.
• Both ends of the red and blue lines are adjusted to match.
• Use SP 4-932-1 to 4-932-4 to change the vertical line correction level
( “3. Replacement and Adjustment – Image Adjustments”).
Scan Line Correction

R, G, and B CCD lines are spaced 4 lines apart (8 lines total) when full size
magnification is used.
• Scan line correction synchronizes these signals by storing each line in memory.
• The difference between the R, G and B signals depends on the magnification
ratio.
• If this calculation does not result in an integer, the corrected data is set to the
closest integer, but further correction is needed ( “Picture Element
Correction”).
Image Separation
The machine separates the original image into text and photo (dot screen) areas.
Edge Separation
• Used to locate text and line diagrams
• Locates areas of strong contrast.
• Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels.
• Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels.
• Only uses data from the green CCD.
Dot Screen Separation

• If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area.
Colored Text Separation

• Identifies whether the text area’s pixels are black or color.
• Based on:
1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels.
2) Output levels of the RGB video signals.
B147/B149/B190 6-28 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
ACS (Auto Color Select)
Black and white first
255
Signal Level
204 (50% UCR rate)
153 (50% UCR rate)
Color first
RGB common data

0 102 128 255
R G B (40% UCR rate) (50% UCR rate)
RGB signal after scanner γ correction
B146D510.WMF
B146D511.WMF
The Auto Color Select determines if an original is black/white or color. Black copy
mode or full color mode is automatically selected.
Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels.
RGB video signals are compared.
If the maximum difference among RGB signals is within a certain range, the
original is considered black and white.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-29 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE PROCESSING
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction)
255 255
0 1023 0
255
Dark Light Dark Light
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
B146D513.WMF
B146D512.WMF
The RGB video signals from the CCD are sent to the IPU section. This signal is
proportional to the intensity of light reflected from the original image (Fig. 1).
Scanner gamma correction inverts the video signals. The shading circuit converts
the signal from 10-bit to 8-bit.
• The IPU section converts the signal levels as shown in Fig. 2.
• This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY color conversion (conversion is done
later in the image process).
• The same table is used for R, G, and B signals.
B147/B149/B190 6-30 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Filtering
Appropriate software filters are applied to the RGB video signals.
• Varies depending on the results of auto text/photo separation (or on the selected
original mode).
• RGB smoothing is applied to photo areas
• Edge emphasis applied to text areas.
Background Density Control

• Removes low ID image signals (background) that are less than a certain
threshold.
• The threshold depends on the color mode (single color or full color).
Users can select a different threshold for each mode.
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection)

• Full color mode
1) Refers to the RGB data taken from the entire original.
2) Calculates a threshold for removing the background based on this data.
• Black and white mode
1) Determines the peak white level.
2) Peak level data is taken for each scan line.
3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white
background.
4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for
A/D conversion.
5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-31 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE PROCESSING
Color Conversion
Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates for
the differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts the
RGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.
Conversion Matrix
The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrix
operation.
• Simple color copying.
• No special modes applied.
• To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.
Color Conversion Table

Original Color
K R Y G C B M W
Toner
Y 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
M 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0
C 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
K 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
User Program Mode

When the user selects one of the following special modes, the values in this table
may fall between 0 and 1.
Photo mode
• Glossy Photo
• Printed Photo
• Copied Photo
Others
• Generation Mode
• Pale Mode
• Map Mode
Two-color mode
• Separates black areas and colored areas.
• Converts black areas to a color selected by the user.
• All other areas are converted to a second color selected by the user.
( the operator's manual for details)
B147/B149/B190 6-32 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Main Scan Magnification

While the machine changes the scanner speed to reduce or enlarge the original in
the sub-scan direction, the ASIC2 chip on the IPU board handles reduction and
enlargement in the main scan direction.
• Scanning and laser writing are done at a fixed pitch (CCD elements cannot be
squeezed or expanded).
• Imaginary points are calculated, corresponding to a physical enlargement or
reduction.
• Image density is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on the
image data for the nearest two true points.
• The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data.
NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial
convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of a
service manual and will not be covered here.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-33 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE PROCESSING
Printer Gamma Correction
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
B146D515.WMF
B146D514.WMF
Ideally, the gamma curves for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black should be
identical, as shown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electrical
components can result in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2.
• Printer characteristics are much more variable than the scanner. Printer gamma
needs recalibration and adjustment from time to time.
• The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepancies
in color reproduction.
• ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, and
black text).
• After ACC, the gamma curve for each color can be adjusted with service
programs (SP4-909 to SP4-918).
• 4 different modes:
1) ID max.
2) Shadow (High ID)
3) Middle (Middle ID)
4) Highlight (Low ID)
• If the previous gamma curve was better, it can be recalled.
• Factory settings can be loaded using SP 5-610-4.
NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new
values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate,
since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings
may no longer be suitable.
• Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings using SP5-
610-5.
B147/B149/B190 6-34 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
ID Max.
This mode adjusts the total image density
as shown in figure 3.
Fig. 3 B146D516.WMF
Shadow (High ID)

The High ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 6 and Level 9 of the
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart
(figure 4).
Fig. 4
B146D517.WMF
Middle (Middle ID)

The Middle ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 3 and Level 7 of the
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart
(figure 5).
Descriptions
Detailed
Fig. 5 B146D518.WMF
Highlight (Low ID)

The Low ID mode adjusts the image density
between Level 2 and Level 5 of the color
gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure
6).
Fig. 6
B146D519.WMF
SM 6-35 B147/B149/B190
IMAGE PROCESSING
Auto Color Calibration Test Pattern

The test pattern has eight 17-step
gradation scales for each color (CMYK),
including background white, for Text
and Photo modes.
Dark Light
ACC automatically calibrates the printer
gamma curve. The user starts the ACC K
process.
C
1. The user prints an ACC Test M
Pattern.
Y
2. The user places the test pattern on
the exposure glass. K
3. The copier makes 8 scans to read C

each color scale. M
4. The copier corrects the printer Y
gamma by comparing the ideal
settings with the current image
density.
5. The copier combines the corrected
B146D520.WMF
gamma curve with the Shadow,
Middle, and Highlight values
currently in memory.
6. The copier then calculates the ID
max (amplitude of the gamma curve) based on data from the ACC scan.
7. The corrected printer gamma curves can be adjusted further using SP modes
(SP4-909 to SP4-918).
Error Diffusion
Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a
halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the
surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion
matrix.
IPU Board Test

You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2.
( “4. Troubleshooting” for details)
B147/B149/B190 6-36 SM
IMAGE DATA PATH
6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH
CCD SBU
IPU
FCU
Option
Mother Board
LD Board
HDD
M
Controller BCU
C
Y
Memory
K
B146D917.WMF
Copier Application
SBU → IPU → Controller (HDD/Memory) → IPU → Controller (straight through) →
Descriptions
BCU Detailed
Printer Application
Controller → IPU (through) → Controller → BCU
Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits)

SBU → IPU → Controller (HDD/Memory)
Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)

Transmission: SBU → IPU → FCU
Reception: FCU → IPU → Controller (straight through) → BCU
SM 6-37 B147/B149/B190
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.1 OVERVIEW
1 2
18
17 3
16
4
15 5
6
14 8
13
12
11
9
10 B146D521.WMF
1. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-E 10. OPC drum-M

2. LD unit-Y 11. WTL
3. LD unit-K 12. OPC drum-C
4. LD Mirror-M 13. OPC drum-Y
5. LD unit-M 14. OPC drum-K
6. LD unit-C 15. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-S
7. F-theta lens-M, C 16. F-theta lens-Y, K
8. Synchronizing detector board-M, C-S 17. Polygon mirror motor
9. Synchronizing detector board-M, C-E 18. LD Mirror-K
This machine uses four LD units and one polygon mirror motor to produce latent
images on four OPC drums (one drum for each color toner).
There are two hexagonal mirrors. Each mirror reflects beams from two LD units.
The LD unit for black has two laser diodes to do dual beam writing (this is only
done for black-and-white printing; for full color printing, only one of the beams is
used).
Laser exposure for magenta and cyan starts from the rear side of the drum, but for
yellow and black it starts from the front side of the drum. This is because the units
for magenta and cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirror from the units for
yellow and black.
B147/B149/B190 6-38 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH

[D]
[A]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[E]
B146D522.WMF
The laser beams for cyan [C] and yellow [A] are directed to the upper part of the
polygon mirror [B], and those for magenta [E] and black [D] are directed to the
lower part of the polygon mirror. The LD mirrors (see the previous page) deflect the
laser beams for magenta and black towards the lower polygon mirror.
The WTL [F] corrects the main scan line; without this component, the line bends
out towards the middle of the main scan. The central bend of the WTL is adjusted
in the factory.
The speed of the polygon mirror depends on the selected mode (see below).
Descriptions
Detailed
Resolution Polygon motor Process line Print speed
Mode Remarks
(dpi) speed (rpm) speed (mm/s) (ppm)
B/W 600 x 600
21,850 185 38
(except 1,800 x 600 Dual beam
OHP/Thick writing
1,200 x 1,200 29,528 125 28
paper)
Color 600 x 600
29,528 125 28
(except 1,800 x 600
OHP/Thick
1,200 x 1,200 29,528 62.5 14
paper)
600 x 600
OHP/Thick 1,800 x 600 29,528 62.5 10
1,200 x 1,200
SM 6-39 B147/B149/B190
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR
[B]
[B]
[A]
[A]
B146D523.WMF
Overview
The machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards (LSD), one at each
corner of the laser optics housing unit.
Each pair of boards detects two colors. The machine recognizes each color from
the time that they are detected. The two LSDs at the right [A] are used for magenta
and cyan, and the two [B] at the left are used for yellow and black.
Main Scan Start Detection

For magenta and cyan, the LSD at the rear detects the start of the main scan. For
yellow and black, the LSD at the front detects the start of the main scan.
Clock Frequency Adjustment

Each pair ensures that the number of laser clock pulses in the main scan is
constant. If the count for one particular beam varies from normal, the LD clock
frequency for that beam is adjusted.
If the board at the end position is defective, this cannot be detected. In such case,
you must disable the detection feature with SP2-919-1.
B147/B149/B190 6-40 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING

Dual Beam Mechanism
The LD unit for black has two laser diodes. Each face of the polygon mirror writes
two main scan lines. This only happens for black and white printing.
Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism
[E]
[A]
[B]
1
2
3
B146D524.WMF
[C] [D]
B146D525.WMF
There is a spring [A] at the front end of the black LD unit [E], and there is a
positioning motor [D] at the right end. The spring pushes the unit clockwise, while
the motor pushes it counterclockwise. These two components drive the unit to one
of the following three positions:
• 600-dpi position []
• 1,200-dpi position []
Descriptions
• Home position [] Detailed
Before it is driven to the 600-dpi position or the 1,200-dpi position, the black LD unit
is set to its home position. When driven from one position to another, the unit goes
as follows:
• 600-dpi position → Home position → 1,200-dpi position
• 1,200-dpi position → Home position → 600-dpi position
The home position is detected by the home position sensor [B]. When the unit is in
its home position, the actuator [C] is out of the sensor. The 600-dpi and 1,200-dpi
positions are determined by the distance from the home position. The distance is
calculated from the operation time of the LD positioning motor.
SM 6-41 B147/B149/B190
LASER EXPOSURE
Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position

The machine changes the main scan resolution between 600 and 1,200 dpi for
black and white printing by rotating the LD unit, except for OHP sheets and thick
paper (remains at the 600 dpi position).
The table lists the printing modes and the positions of the black LD unit.
Mode Position
600 dpi 600-dpi position
Monochrome
1,200 dpi 1,200-dpi position
600 dpi 600-dpi position
Color
1,200 dpi 600-dpi position
After the laser optics housing unit has been replaced, the beam pitch for 600 dpi
and 1,200 dpi must be adjusted (SP2-109-2, -3).
B147/B149/B190 6-42 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH
+24V +5V
PSU
Front Door and CN350-6 LD5V CN101-10 CN221-3 CN401-48 (C)

LDB (C)
Left Door SW
Right Door SW RELAY
CN361-1
CN221-2 CN401-49 (C)
CN361-2
A relay on the PSU ensures technician

and user safety and prevents the laser
E-MAC
beam from inadvertently switching on
during servicing. This relay turns off
when the front cover, upper left cover, or CN222-3 CN401-48 (M)
LDB (M)
right door is opened, and cuts the power
(+5V) supplied to the LD board for each CN222-2 CN401-49 (M)
color through the BCU.

Two safety switches are used to turn the
relay off. One switch is used for the front
cover and upper left cover. This safety
E-MAC
switch is off when either of the two
covers is opened. Another safety switch
is used for the right door. CN223-3 CN401-48 (K)
LDB (K)
• E-MAC: Enhanced Modulation ASIC CN223-2 CN401-49 (K)

on CMOS
• LDB: LD Drive Board
(included in the LD Unit)
Front and Upper Left Cover Switch E-MAC
Descriptions
The micro switch [A] on the PSU is Detailed
activated or deactivated by the actuator CN224-3 CN401-48 (Y)
LDB (Y)
[B] when the front cover or the upper left CN224-2 CN401-49 (Y)
cover is opened and closed.
BCU
E-MAC
B146D923.WMF
[A]
[B]
B146D526.WMF
SM 6-43 B147/B149/B190
LASER EXPOSURE
Error Messages
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B146D918.WMF
Cooperating with other switches, the LD safety switches help display error
messages related to external covers. When one or more covers are open, the
messages, “Cover is open as shown” and “Close it,” are displayed with a diagram.
The diagram indicates which cover is open. The table lists the diagram indications
and the switch conditions. Note that some diagram indications take precedence
over others.
Condition
Diagram indication [A] Upper left [B] Duplex unit [C] Front door [E] Right door
cover switch switch switch switch
Upper left cover Open (any) (any) (any)
Duplex unit (any) Open (any) (any)
Front cover Closed (any) Open (any)
Right door Closed (any) Closed Open
NOTE: 1) In the table, “any” indicates the condition does not affect the diagram
indication.
2) The left door switch [D] is closed when the upper left cover switch [A] is
closed.
B147/B149/B190 6-44 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Overview
YY, KK, CC, MM: Spaces between two lines of the same color
KY, KC, KM: Spaces between a black line and a color line
Front Center Rear
Y
YY KY YY KY YY KY
K
KK KC KK KC KK KC
C
CC KM CC KM CC KM
M
MM MM MM
Y
K
C
M
B146D527.WMF
During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns above are created eight
times on the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (YY, KK, CC, MM, KY, KC,
KM) are measured by the front, center, and rear ID sensors. The controller takes
the average of the spaces, and adjusts the following positions and magnification:
• Sub scan line position for YCM
Descriptions
• Main scan line position for KYCM Detailed
• Magnification ratio for KYCM
• Skew for YCM
After the patterns are measured, the transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the transfer
belt. If an error is detected three times consecutively, SC285 is generated.
SM 6-45 B147/B149/B190
LASER EXPOSURE
Summary of Each Adjustment
Sub scan line position for YCM

The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for YCM is based on the line position
for K (color registration). The machine measures the gaps between the lines of
each color in the pattern on the transfer belt. If the gaps for a color are not correct,
the machine moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this,
it changes the laser write timing for that color.
Main scan line position for KYCM

If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it
changes the laser write start timing for each scan line.
Magnification adjustment for KYCM

If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the
LD clock frequency for the required color.
Skew for YCM

The adjustment of the skew for YCM is based on the line position for K.
B147/B149/B190 6-46 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
Adjustment Conditions
Line position adjustment timing depends on several SP mode settings. Among
them, the mode selection, SP5-993-001, takes precedence over the others. The
table below lists the conditions and the processes to be executed. Note that the
adjustments of the sub-scan line position, main scan line position, and
magnification are executed under the same conditions.
The numbers in the mode selection column indicate the setting of SP 5-993-001.
For details, refer to the description for SP 5-993-001 in the SP table.
Mode S-pos./
selec- Condition Setting M-pos./ Skew
tion Magni.
Job End SP3-906-001
Interrupt SP3-906-002
Process Non-use Time 1, 2 SP3-906-003, 004
1
control Recovery (fusing
tempera-ture 60°C or None
lower)
Standby SP5-993-003, 005
Temperature
Job start SP5-993-003, 006
difference
Interrupt SP5-993-003, 04, 022
1 or 2 Main scan length detection SP5-993-024 *
Recovery (fusing temperature over
SP5-993-026
60°C)
Replacement of development unit or
None
PCU
0, 1, or 2 Forced self check SP5-993-002
S-pos. : Sub-scan line position : Executed

M-pos. : Main scan line position * : Executed one time when the
Magni. : Magnification conditions are met twice
NOTE: 1) “Recovery” includes turning on the main switch.
Descriptions
2) Fusing temperature is measured by the thermistor in the fusing unit. Detailed
Other temperature is measured by the sensors on the laser optics
housing unit.
3) You can use SP5-993-035 to select one of the three frequency levels of
color adjustment.
SM 6-47 B147/B149/B190
LASER EXPOSURE
Main Scan Skew Adjustment
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B146D528.WMF
The 3rd mirror positioning motors for magenta [A], cyan [B], and yellow [C] adjust
the angle of the 3rd mirrors [B] respectively, based on the 3rd mirror position for
black. This mechanism corrects main scan skew.
6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES

To improve reproduction in the copy mode, the machine generates the print image
with 2 bits per pixel. Different parameters are used for the copy and print modes as
shown in the table below.
Function Copy Mode Printer Mode
Gradation for printing 2 bits / pixel 1 bit / pixel
LD control SP2-103-101 to -110 SP2-103-1 to -59
Pointer table display SP3-902-5 to -8 SP3-902-1 to -4
M/A target SP3-903-5 to -8 SP3-903-1 to -4
M/A target for LD correction SP3-904-5 to -8 SP3-904-1 to -4
B147/B149/B190 6-48 SM
Rev. 06/2004 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

⇒ 6.7.1 OVERVIEW
2
6
B146D529.WMF
1. Cleaning brush roller 4. Cleaning brush

2. Charge roller (non-contact) 5. Waste toner collection auger
3. OPC drum 6. Cleaning blade
This machine has four independent PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU consists
Descriptions
of an OPC drum, non-contact charge roller, cleaning brush, and cleaning blade. Detailed
The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm).
The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development roller
is determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not
adjustable in the field.
.
SM 6-49 B147/B149/B190
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.2 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
M
G080D927.WMF
The drum drive motor-K [A] drives the PCU for black.
The drum drive motor-CMY [B] drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
Using one motor to drive these three drums reduces CMY color misalignment.
B147/B149/B190 6-50 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
B146D530.WMF
Mechanism
The machine uses these sensors to detect if the drum motors rotate. When it
Descriptions
detects that the drum motor is not moving, SC440 appears. These sensors also
Detailed
help the machine to initialize the relative positions of the gears when turning on the
main switch and initializing. This prevents phase fluctuation between printouts.
There is an interrupter [E] on each of the black [D] and yellow [C] drum gears. The
drum gear position sensors [F][G] detect the positions of these interrupters
respectively. The sensors check that the two interrupters are parallel. This
mechanism makes sure that output quality does not vary. The cyan [B] and
magenta [A] drum gears operate with the yellow drum gear because these three
drum gears are linked through other gears [H][I].
In the ready status, the two interrupters stay in a parallel position. If they are not in
a parallel position (as shown in the illustration), the machine adjusts the position of
the black drum gear.
SM 6-51 B147/B149/B190
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Initialization Process and SC Codes

When a drum gear position sensor has found an error, SC code 440-1 or 440-2 is
displayed. The table lists the steps of the initialization process, possible errors, and
corresponding SC codes.
Initialization process Possible error SC code

The four drums are simultaneously The black drum gear
440-1
operated for seven seconds. The two interrupter is not detected.
drum position sensors detect the two The yellow drum gear
drum gear interrupters several times. 440-2
Step 1 interrupter is not detected.
Both black and yellow drum
gear interrupters are not 440-1
detected.
The time lags between detection of
the black drum gear interrupter and
Step 2 detection of the yellow drum gear
interrupter are checked. The average
time lag is calculated.
The black drum is operated. The The black drum gear
Step 3 position of the gear is adjusted interrupter is not detected 440-1
according to the average time lag. ( NOTE).
NOTE: If the connector of the black drum position sensor has been connected to
the yellow drum position sensor (and the connector of the yellow drum
position sensor, to the black drum position sensor), no error occurs in step
1 and step 2.
B147/B149/B190 6-52 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING
[B]
[A]
B146D531.WMF
This machine uses a non-contact charge roller [A] to reduce ozone. The non-
contact charge roller gives the drum surface a negative charge. The high voltage
supply board – C, B, which is located at the rear of the machine, applies a dc and
ac voltage (at a constant current) to the roller. The ac voltage helps to ensure that
the charge given to the drum is as uniform as possible.
The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage if automatic process
control is enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to 0). However, if process control is
switched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to 1), the dc voltage is the value stored in
SP2-001-1 to -9 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
The diameter of the roller is 11.14 mm (circumference about 35 mm). The gap
Descriptions
Detailed
between a drum and the corresponding charge roller is about 50 µm.
The cleaning brush roller [B], which always contacts the charge roller, cleans the
charge roller.
The charge roller can generate small amounts of nitrogen oxide gases (known as
NOx), which may be absorbed by the surface of the drum. This can cause
unfocused copies. To avoid this, the film of NOx is removed at power on, at the end
of a job (if more than 200 prints), and when a toner cartridge has been replaced.
SP3-920-1 to -4 determine when this procedure (known as “refresh mode”) is done.
It can also be executed at any time (using SP3-920-5) if the prints are smeared.
Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the
end of every job.
SM 6-53 B147/B149/B190
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING
[B]
[C]
[A]
B146D532.WMF
The cleaning brush [A] spreads out the waste toner remaining on the drum. The
cleaning blade [B] then scrapes it off. The toner collection auger [C] transports the
toner towards the waste toner collection duct.
B147/B149/B190 6-54 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION
[F]
[G]
[E] [J]
[H]
[M]
[K]
[I]
[B] [L]
[A] [D]
B146D906.WMF
[C]
Waste Toner Path

The waste toner from the collection augers in the four PCUs drops into the waste
toner collection duct from the four openings [F][G][H][I] at the rear of the PCUs. The
toner collection coils [J][K][L] in the duct transport this waste toner towards the
waste toner bottle [A]. The coils [J][K][L] are driven by development drive motor-
Descriptions
Detailed
CMY. The openings and PCUs correspond as follows: black → [F], yellow → [G],
cyan → [H], magenta → [I].
The waste toner from the transfer belt cleaning unit drops into the waste toner
collection duct from another opening [E].
The end of the waste toner collection duct is in the waste toner bottle [A]. There are
three openings [B][C] and one collection coil [D] in this part. The waste toner drops
into the bottle through the openings. The collection coil [D] is driven by drum drive
motor-K.
SM 6-55 B147/B149/B190
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Waste Toner Vibrator

The waste toner vibrator contains one motor [M]. The motor operates for about one
second at a time. Its vibration prevents the waste toner from clogging the waste
toner path.
The table lists the conditions under which the motor operates.
Machine status Motor operation

During machine start (machine Two times
initialization)
At the beginning of the process One time
control
Printing jobs that output five or less At the job end if 3 or more papers have been output
papers since the previous operation (of the motor) ()
Printing jobs that output 6 or more Every five papers and at the job end ()
papers
Suppose: The copier executes two jobs, the first job outputs one paper, and the
second job outputs two papers. In this case, the motor operates one time at the
end of the second job (see ).
Suppose: The copier executes one job, and the job outputs 12 papers. In this case,
the motor operates one time during the fifth printing, one time during the tenth
printing, and one more time at the job end (see ).
Suppose: The copier executes two jobs, the first job outputs one paper, and the
second job outputs 12 papers. In this case, the motor operates one time during the
fifth printing of the second job, one time during the tenth printing of the second job,
and one more time at the end of the second job (see ; This case does not satisfy
condition ).
B147/B149/B190 6-56 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B146D533.WMF
The waste toner bottle set switch [A] detects the bottle when it is placed in the
machine.
The waste toner sensor [B] detects the weight of the bottle and informs when it is
almost full.
When the bottle contains a certain amount of waste toner, the sensor is
deactivated. The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is almost full and
displays “Waste Toner is Almost Full”.
Descriptions
Detailed
After that, the machine can print about 2,500 more sheets. After printing 2,500
sheets, it displays “Replace Waste Toner,” and after the end of the job, the
machine cannot be used until the bottle is replaced or emptied.
NOTE: The number of sheets is calculated on the assumption that the paper size
is A4 and that the coverage ratio of each color is 5%.
SM 6-57 B147/B149/B190
DEVELOPMENT Rev.06/2004
6.8 DEVELOPMENT
⇒ 6.8.1 OVERVIEW
3
6
5 B146D534.WMF
1. Doctor blade 4. TD sensor

2. Developer hopper 5. Mixing auger (left)
3. Mixing auger (right) 6. Development roller
This machine has four independent development units, one for each color. Each
contains 280 g of developer when new. The developer in each unit is supplied to
the development roller by the two mixing augers and attracted onto the surface of
the roller.
The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined by
the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not adjustable in the field.
The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unit
has a TD sensor.
The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm (circumference about 56.5 mm).
B147/B149/B190 6-58 SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.2 DRIVE
[A]
B146D535.WMF
[B]
Descriptions
Detailed
B146D536.WMF
The development drive motor-K [A] drives the development roller for black through
gears and a clutch. This motor also drives the fusing unit and paper exit rollers.
The gear trains are indicated in the diagram by dotted lines.
The development drive motor-CMY [B] drives the development unit for magenta,
cyan, and yellow through gears and clutches. This motor also drives the
registration roller.
SM 6-59 B147/B149/B190
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION
[A]
[B] B146D537.WMF
Two mixing augers [A and B] circulate the developer forward and backward to
agitate the developer.
This happens during the process control self check, during toner supply, and during
development.
B147/B149/B190 6-60 SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
[B]
[A]
B146D930.WMF
The high voltage supply board [A] supplies development bias to the development
roller via the receptacle [B] at the rear of each development unit.
There are both ac and dc bias voltages. The ac bias improves toner transfer to the
drum.
Descriptions
Detailed
The machine automatically controls the dc bias, if automatic process control is
enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to 0). However, if process control is switched off,
(i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to 1), the dc bias is the value stored in SP2-201-001 to
009 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
The ac bias cannot be adjusted.
SM 6-61 B147/B149/B190
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM

[D]
[E]
[C]
[B] [F]
[A]
[G]
[H]
[H]
B146D538.WMF
Overview [J]
The air transport system agitates the toner [H] in the toner cartridges [G]. Toner is
transported to the development unit [A] by the toner attraction pump [B] (each
cartridge has a separate pump). This provides a more stable way to transport fine
powder than previous methods.
Toner Agitation and Attraction

The rear air pump [D] supplies air to the yellow and magenta toner cartridges, while
the front air pump [E] supplies air to the black and cyan toner cartridges. Air
agitates all the toner in each cartridge. The pumps and four valves [C] control the
air flow. Mixed with air, the toner passes part of the way along the transport tube [J]
towards the toner attraction pump. This pump draws the toner the rest of the way
( Toner Transport).
The air pump turns on to supply air to the toner cartridges for one second under
any of the following conditions:
• During normal operation, when the “on” time for a toner supply clutch
reaches a certain value
• When forced toner supply (SP2-207) is done
• When forced toner density adjustment (SP3-126-002) is done
• At toner end recovery
• Developer initialization
The filter [F] on the inner package of the toner cartridge ensures that the internal
pressure does not become too high.
B147/B149/B190 6-62 SM
DEVELOPMENT
Air Flow and Toner Flow
[B]
[C]
[A] [D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
B146D539.WMF
The air tube [F] and the toner tube [E] are connected to the joint [C] at the bottom
of the toner cartridge holder. This joint contains an inner pipe [A] and an outer pipe
[B]. These two pipes are L-shaped. The inner pipe goes through the outer pipe,
and is longer than the other.
The toner goes through the inner pipe [A], and reaches the toner tube [E] at the
bottom end of the pipe. On its way to the toner tube, the toner passes the sensor
Descriptions
windows [G]. These windows are at the front side and the rear side of the pipe, and Detailed
are transparent. The light emitted from the toner end sensor [D] goes through this
area if the toner is not going through the pipe.
The air flow generated by the air pump goes through the outer pipe [B], and comes
out of the four openings at the top end.
Toner Near End Detection

Toner end sensors [D] detect toner near end conditions ( 6.2.6).
SM 6-63 B147/B149/B190
DEVELOPMENT
Toner Transport
[B]
[C] [D]
[E]
[A]
B146D540.WMF
Each toner attraction pump has the same mechanism. The pump (toner attraction
pump) [A], which consists of the toner supply clutch [B], rubber tube [C], and rotor
[D], attracts the toner in the toner transport tube [E] toward the development unit.
The toner supply clutch drives the rotor, which draws the toner in from the cartridge
and passes it to the development unit. When supplying toner, the clutch is on for
0.7 second and off for 1.3 seconds. The clutch turns on and off as many times as
necessary to supply the appropriate amount of toner. The amount of toner depends
on the results of toner supply control.
Motor drive comes from the development drive motors.
B147/B149/B190 6-64 SM
DEVELOPMENT
Shutter Mechanism
[D] [C]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[A]
B146D541.WMF
The development unit and toner attraction pump each have a shutter mechanism.
When the development unit is placed in the machine, the protrusion [A] on the
development unit opens the shutter [B] in the pump, and the protrusion [C] on the
pump opens the shutter [D] in the development unit. When both shutters are open,
toner can enter the development unit from the toner attraction pump.
When the development unit is removed, the shutter spring [E and F] pulls and
closes the shutter.
6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION
Descriptions
The memory chip [A] on each toner cartridge [A] Detailed
stores the total “on” time of the toner supply
clutch. This is used to calculate the amount of
toner remaining in the toner cartridge. The chip
is also used to detect whether the cartridge is
installed (if the cartridge is not installed, the
machine does not detect a signal from the
memory chip).
B146D542.WMF
SM 6-65 B147/B149/B190
PAPER FEED
6.9 PAPER FEED

6.9.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
8
10
11
12
16 15 14 13 B146D543.WMF
1. Pick-up roller - tray 1 9. Separation roller - By-pass feed

2. Feed roller - tray 1 10. Transport roller
3. Separation roller - tray 1 11. Vertical transport roller
4. Relay roller 12. Feed roller - tray 2
5. Registration roller 13. Separation roller - tray 2
6. Feed roller - By-pass feed 14. Pick-up roller - tray 2
7. Pick-up roller - By-pass feed 15. Paper tray 2
8. By-pass feed table 16. Paper tray 1
There are two paper trays (500 sheets each), and a by-pass feed table (100
sheets).
The paper feed mechanism uses an FRR system.
Tray 1 can only hold A4 or letter paper. Tray 2 can hold a range of sizes.
B147/B149/B190 6-66 SM
PAPER FEED
6.9.2 DRIVE – TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E] [D]
[H]
[I] [F] [Q]

[J]
[K] [G]
[N]
[L]
[O]
[M] [P] B146D545.WMF
B146D544.WMF
The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanisms in tray 1 [E], tray
2 [F], and the by-pass tray [G], using clutches and complex trains of gears (the
locations of the gear trains are indicated by dotted lines in the above diagram).
When tray 1 and tray 2 are inside the machine, their pick-up rollers [H][K] are
always in contact with each top sheet of the paper stack. On the other hand, the
pick-up roller [P] of the by-pass tray stays away until the by-pass pick-up solenoid
[Q] turns on. When the paper feed clutch [B][C][D] turns on, the pick-up, feed
Descriptions
[I][L][N], and separation [J][M][O] rollers start rotating to feed the paper. The paper Detailed
feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor activates.
SM 6-67 B147/B149/B190
PAPER FEED
6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2
[G] [F] [E]
[H]
[A]
[B]
[I]
[D]
[C]
B146D546.WMF
The tray 1 set switch [A] and tray 2 paper size switches [B] detect when the paper
trays [C] are placed in the machine. When the machine detects that a tray has
been placed in the machine, the tray lift motor [D] rotates and the coupling gear [E]
on the tray lift motor engages the pin [F] on the lift arm shaft [G]. Then the tray lift
arm [I] lifts the tray bottom plate [H] until the paper lift sensor for the tray detects
that the top of the stack is at the paper feed position.
B147/B149/B190 6-68 SM
PAPER FEED
6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2
[D]
[F]
[A] [E]
[G]
[C]
[B]
B146D547.WMF
For tray 1, there is no size switch. The paper size is fixed at either A4 or LT; this
can be changed with SP1-902-1.
For tray 2, four paper size switches, working in combination, detect the paper size
as shown in the table below. The actuators are on the side plate [A]. The side plate
is moved by the end plate [B] through a cam [C].
1: Pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 1 [D] 2 [E] 3 [F] 4 [G]
11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 1 0 0
A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 0
Descriptions
*1
81/2" x 14" SEF B4 SEF *1 1 1 0 1 Detailed
81/2" x 11" SEF *2 A4 SEF *2 0 1 1 0
11" x 81/2" LEF *3 11" x 81/2" LEF *3 1 0 1 1
A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1
B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0
A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1
NOTE:
*1
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2
*2
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3
*3
: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4
The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected
(if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).
SM 6-69 B147/B149/B190
PAPER FEED
6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2
[A] [C]
[B]
B146D548.WMF
Two paper height sensors, working in combination, detect the amount of paper in
the tray.
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever moves up
and the actuator [A] (on the pressure lever drive shaft) rotates.
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 [B] Paper height sensor 1 [C]
Full OFF OFF
Nearly full ON OFF
Near end ON ON
Almost empty OFF ON
OFF: No actuator
6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler
and the paper end sensor deactivates.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout in
the tray bottom plate, and this activates the paper end sensor.
B147/B149/B190 6-70 SM
PAPER FEED
6.9.7 REGISTRATION
[A]
[B]
B146D549.WMF
The development drive motor - CMY [A] drives the registration roller [B] using a
clutch and a complex train of gears (the location of the gear train is indicated by
dotted lines in the above diagram).
The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew.
The paper buckle can be adjusted with SP1-003-1 to - 8.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-71 B147/B149/B190
PAPER FEED
6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED

This machine has three process line speeds (for feed from registration roller to
fusing unit) depending on the mode and selected resolution
Resolution Line speed Print speed

Mode
(dpi) (mm/s) (ppm)
600 x 600
185 38
B/W 1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200 125 28
600 x 600
125 28
Color 1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200 62.5 14
600 x 600
OHP/Thick 1,800 x 600 62.5 10
1,200 x 1,200
During a monochrome print job, the machine changes the line speed if there is a
page with color in the middle of the job. However, it will not change the line speed if
there is a monochrome page in the middle of a color print job.
Line speed (mm/s)

Paper feed from tray to registration roller 230
Fusing, paper exit to standard tray, and mailbox A bit slower than “Process line speed”
Duplex invert and feed 370
Finisher 450
B147/B149/B190 6-72 SM
PAPER FEED
6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM
[C] [D] [E]
[B] [F]
[A]
[G]
B146D550.WMF
The grip roller release mechanism reduces the pressure of the grip roller [E].
The grip roller transports a sheet of paper to the transfer unit. When the transfer
unit starts to feed the leading edge of the paper [G], the trailing edge has still not
reached the grip roller. So the paper is handled by the transfer unit and the grip
roller at the same time. If the handling speeds are not the same, this may skew the
paper. Longer paper sizes are more affected by the speed difference than shorter
sizes. From the viewpoint of image crispness, multi-color images are more easily
affected than mono-color images.
Descriptions
To solve this possible problem, the grip roller release mechanism is activated Detailed
under the following conditions:
1) B4 paper or longer is being fed.
2) The machine is operating in the full-color mode.
3) The leading edge of the paper has been fed in the transfer unit.
The spring [A] is always pressing the grip roller against the transport roller [B].
When the above conditions are met, the solenoid [F] turns on, the lever [C] pushes
the grip roller shaft [D], and the grip roller moves away from the paper.
SM 6-73 B147/B149/B190
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10 DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.1 OVERVIEW
1 2
4
B146D551.WMF
1. Exit sensor 1 6. Junction mylar 2

2. Junction gate 7. Exit sensor 3
3. Duplex feed sensor 8. Junction mylar 1
4. Duplex inverter sensor 9. Exit sensor 2
5. Junction mylar 3
• For duplex printing, the second page (rear side) is printed first.
• To print on the second side, the duplex inverter unit (on the side of the machine)
inverts the paper from the fusing unit and feeds it to the duplex feed unit (inside
the machine).
• The duplex feed unit feeds the inverted paper back to the paper feed section.
• When both sides have been printed, the duplex inverter unit feeds the paper out
to the finisher.
• If the mailbox or standard exit tray (on top of the machine) was selected to
receive the duplex copies, the print will not enter the duplex unit after the second
side has been printed. The junction gate inside the machine directs it upwards to
the selected tray.
• Duplex copies are not fed out to the external tray (on the left of the machine).
B147/B149/B190 6-74 SM
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION

Up to A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF
There are three sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. The
interleave method is used.
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages.
The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
[A]
2 ⇒ 4 ⇒ 6 ⇒ 1 ⇒ 8 ⇒ 3 ⇒ 5 ⇒ 7
1 2 3 1 4 2 3 4
[B]
B146D552.WMF
Larger than A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF

There are two sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. The
interleave method is used.
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages.
The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
[A]
2 ⇒ 4 ⇒ 1 ⇒ 6 ⇒ 3 ⇒ 8 ⇒ 5 ⇒ 7
1 2 1 3 2 4 3 4
[B]
Descriptions
B146D553.WMF
Detailed
SM 6-75 B147/B149/B190
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
B146D554.WMF
The duplex inverter motor 1 [A] drives the paper exit roller 1 [B], paper transport
roller [C], paper exit roller 2 [D], and upper inverter roller [E].
The duplex inverter motor 2 [F] drives the exit roller 3 [G], paper exit roller 4 [H],
and lower inverter roller [I].
B147/B149/B190 6-76 SM
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE)
[B]
[A]
B146D555.WMF
This shows how the machine feeds paper through the duplex unit to the external
tray [A], when duplex mode is not selected.
NOTE: The paper cannot be fed out to the external tray if duplex printing is
selected.
The junction gate [B] directs the paper from the fusing unit out to the external tray if
Descriptions
thick paper or OHP mode is selected, or if the external tray is selected as the Detailed
output tray with the operation panel or the printer driver.
SM 6-77 B147/B149/B190
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT
[A]
[C]
B146D556.WMF
[B] B146D557.WMF
This shows how the machine feeds paper back into the machine after side 1 is
printed.
The junction gate [A] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [B] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 3 [C]. Then, the paper is switched
back and junction mylar 3 directs the paper back into the machine for the second
side.
The next page shows how the paper is fed out to the finisher after both sides are
printed.
B147/B149/B190 6-78 SM
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER

With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit
[B]
[D]
[A]
[D]
B146D559.WMF
[C]
B146D558.WMF
The paper is fed out to the finisher from the upper exit [A].
The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 1 [D]. Then, the paper is switched
back and junction mylar 1 directs the paper out to the finisher.
With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

[B]
Descriptions
[A] Detailed
[D]
[D] [E]
B146D561.WMF
[C] B146D560.WMF
The paper is fed out to the finisher from the lower exit [A].
The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 2 [D], but before it passes junction
mylar 3 [E]. Then, the paper is switched back and junction mylar 2 directs the
paper out to the finisher.
SM 6-79 B147/B149/B190
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT

Drive
[A]
B146D562.WMF
The duplex feed motor [A] drives all paper transport rollers.
Feed-in and feed-out
[A]
B146D563.WMF
The duplex feed unit feeds the paper from the duplex inverter unit to the relay roller
[A].
B147/B149/B190 6-80 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
11 1
2
10
9 3
8
7
4
G080D701.WMF
1. Transfer unit drive motor 7. Cleaning blade

2. Transfer belt 8. Toner collection auger
3. Rotation encoder 9. Cleaning brush
4. Paper attraction roller 10. Cleaning unit
5. Transfer roller 11. ID sensor
6. Back-up roller
Paper is fed to the transfer belt before image transfer begins. The paper attraction
Descriptions
Detailed
roller charges the paper to ensure that the paper is attracted to the belt.
The magenta, cyan, yellow, and black color images transfer to the paper while the
transfer belt feeds the paper past the drums towards the fusing unit. A positive
charge is applied to the paper under the transfer belt, opposite each drum, to
transfer the toner from the drums onto the paper. The back-up roller ensures that
the contact area between the drum and belt is sufficient.
The cleaning unit in the transfer unit cleans the belt surface with the cleaning blade
and brush. The waste toner collected from the belt is transported to the waste toner
bottle.
There are three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID sensor
detects the image density of the patterns generated on the transfer belt for process
control. The other function of the ID sensors is for automatic line position
adjustment. All ID sensors are used for this.
SM 6-81 B147/B149/B190
6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE

Drive Motor
[B]
[A]
B146D564.WMF
The transfer unit drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] and the cleaning unit via
the timing belt and gears. The speed of transfer belt drive depends on the process
line speed.
B147/B149/B190 6-82 SM
Rotation Encoder
[A]
[C]
[B]
B146D914.WMF
An encoder [C] is on one of the rollers. This encoder checks the rotation speed of
the transfer belt. The controller analyzes the signals from the encoder, and adjusts
the rotation speed of the transfer belt.
The encoder contains a disk that has 300 notches on its surface [B]. These
notches are read by the sensor [A]. The controller counts the number of notches
that the sensor has read in the unit of time. If the sensor has read an unusually
large number of notches or an unusually small number of notches, the controller
ignores such unusual signals. Thanks to this feature, incorrect reading does not
affect the rotation speed.
Ignored
Number of notches
(read by the sensor)
Filter H
Descriptions
Detailed
Filter L
Ignored
Time
B146D915.WMF
Filter H: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is
at its possible highest.
Filter L: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is
at its possible lowest.
SM 6-83 B147/B149/B190
6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT
[A]
[F] [B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B146D565.WMF
The transfer roller [D] applies a current to transfer the toner to the paper on the
transfer belt [A]. The high voltage supply board – Transfer applies a current to the
transfer roller and the paper attraction roller [C].
These currents are automatically corrected for paper size, temperature (measured
by the thermistor on the right side of the laser optics housing unit), and humidity
(measured by the humidity sensor).
Available adjustments are summarized below.
• The transfer roller current for each printing mode (color or B/W, resolution, paper
type) can be adjusted with SP2-301-1 to -56. The by-pass tray settings are used
when the duplex unit has not been installed and the user is making duplex prints
manually from the by-pass tray. There is a correction for narrow-width paper with
SP2-309-1 to -4.
• The current for paper attraction can be adjusted with SP2-801-1 to -9. There is a
correction for narrow-width paper with SP2-801-10 to -13.
The back-up roller [E] makes a wider contact area between the drum [B] and the
belt. The transfer exit roller [F] is charged to 2 kV. The roller prevents the toner
from being scattered while the paper is leaving the transfer unit.
The other rollers are grounded to neutralize the belt surface.
B147/B149/B190 6-84 SM
6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
B146D567.WMF
[E]
The transfer belt cleaning unit removes toner (during printing) and the ID sensor
patterns (during process control or automatic line position adjustment) on the belt.
Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer belt makes one rotation. The transfer
unit drive motor [A] drives the unit.
Descriptions
The cleaning brush [B] always contacts the transfer belt [C], and removes waste Detailed
toner from the belt. The cleaning blade [D] in the cleaning unit scrapes the toner off
the transfer belt. The toner collection auger [E] transports the toner towards the
waste toner collection duct.
SM 6-85 B147/B149/B190
6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B146D568.WMF
Mechanism
The transfer belt contact and release mechanism improves the lifetime of the
transfer belt and drums.
The drum for black always contacts the belt, but the transfer belt moves away from
the other drums during monochrome printing.
In the standby mode, the transfer belt contacts only the black drum. The transfer
belt comes away from the black drum when you turn the release lever
counterclockwise.
When the machine prints a color page, the machine waits until the previous page
has gone through the transfer unit. Then the transfer belt contact motor [C] turns on
and a cam [D] moves the lower end [E] of the transfer belt upward, so that it
contacts the other three drums.
The machine does not release the transfer belt from the color drums during the job,
even if a monochrome page comes again. This is because the total printing speed
reduces if the transfer belt changes position often.
The belt comes away from the color drums if the job is interrupted by any error
except a power failure.
NOTE: If a power failure occurs when the transfer belt is in contact with the drum,
the belt stays in this position. To release the belt, swing out the controller
box, and turn the drive gear [B] manually.
B147/B149/B190 6-86 SM
Transfer Belt Sensor

The transfer belt sensor [A] works as the detection sensor during machine
initialization, and works as the position sensor during machine operations.
Before machine initialization, the lower end of the transfer belt is in the home
position. When initialization starts, the transfer belt contact motor lifts the lower end
until the actuator has passed the sensor, and lowers it to its home position. This
action actuates the sensor in a certain pattern.
The table lists the sensor actuation patterns.
Machine status Sensor pattern

Initialization On → Off → On→ Off → On
Standby (Default) On
Operation B/W printing On
Color Printing Off
On: The actuator is out of the sensor.
Off: The actuator is interrupting the sensor.
Copier ACS
The Auto Color Select manages the transfer belt and PCUs. To print color pages,
the ACS lifts the transfer belt and operates the four PCUs. To print black and white
pages, the ACS manages the transfer belt and the PCUs as follows:
1. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in the lower position and operates the black
PCU (does not operate the other PCUs) if the first print of a job is a black and
white page.
2. The ACS lifts the transfer belt to the upper position and operates the four PCUs
if a color page appears in the job.
3. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in
Descriptions
the upper position and keeps Detailed
operating the four PCUs after the first K K Color Color K K Color
color page. Note that all PCUs are in

operation even when black and white K PCU Four PCUs
pages are processed.

The ACS works when the user pushes B146D935.WMF
the Auto Color Select key from the operation panel. The table lists which PCUs are
in operation.
Original
Key
B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color
Auto Color Select Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or four
PCUs
Full Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs
Black and White Black PCU Black PCU Black PCU
SM 6-87 B147/B149/B190
Printer ACS
The user can validate or invalidate the ACS from the following menu:  > Printer
Features > System > B&W Page Detect. The ACS works when B&W Detect is on,
and does not work when B&W detect is off. The tables list which PCUs are in
operation.
B&W Page Detect: On

Print
Printer Driver
Color Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or four
PCUs
B&W Page Detect: Off

Print
Printer Driver
Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs
B147/B149/B190 6-88 SM
FUSING
6.12 FUSING
6.12.1 OVERVIEW
1
2
15
3
14
4
13
5
12
6
11 7
9 8
10
B146D569.WMF
1. Oiling roller 9. Pressure roller thermo fuse

2. Oil supply roller 10. Pressure roller fusing lamp
3. Heating roller 11. Pressure roller
4. Heating roller fusing lamp 12. Hot roller
5. Heating roller thermostat 13. Junction gate
6. Heating roller thermistor 14. Cleaning roller
7. Fusing belt 15. Oil supply unit
8. Pressure roller thermistor
Descriptions
Detailed
• A belt fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventional
hot and pressure roller system.
• The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusing
belt quickly.
• The hot roller is made of sponge, which flattens slightly, also increasing the
fusing nip. This roller does not contain a fusing lamp.
• Each of the heating and pressure rollers has a fusing lamp.
– NA: 770W for the heating roller, 350W for the pressure roller
– EU: 700W for the heating roller, 325W for the pressure roller
• The heating roller thermistor and pressure roller thermistor control the
temperature of these lamps.
• Temperature is normally controlled by turning the fusing lamps on and off. To
change between on/off control and phase control: SP1-104-1.
• The oil supply roller supplies oil to the fusing belt through the oiling roller. This
mechanism spreads the oil on the fusing belt evenly.
SM 6-89 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B146D570.WMF
[G]
Belt and Rollers

Development drive motor-K drives the pressure roller [G], hot roller [B], oil supply
roller [C], and oiling roller [D] through the gear train. The heating roller [E] is driven
by the pressure with the fusing belt [F].
Fusing Clutch
The fusing clutch [A] turns off and cuts the drive power when the fusing unit does
not need to operate. This mechanism prevents the belt and rollers from wearing
and saves the fusing oil.
NOTE: The fusing clutch turns off when images and patterns are created on the
transfer belt during process control and line position adjustment.
B147/B149/B190 6-90 SM
FUSING
6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Fusing Temperatures
When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays
on until the thermistor detects the standby temperature. Then the CPU raises the
temperature to the printing temperature.
The fusing temperature for each mode is as follows.
Resolution Temperature of Temperature of

Mode Note
(dpi) Heating Roller Pressure Roller
Energy saver
100°C 130°C
level 1
NA: 175°C NA: 145°C If SP1-104-
Standby mode
EU: 170°C EU: 140°C 025 is set to 4
NA: 125°C
1,200 x 1,200 150°C
EU: 130°C
Color
1,800 x 600
180°C 160°C
600 x 600
NA: 180°C NA: 160°C
1,200 x 1,200
EU: 175°C EU: 155°C
Black and white
1,800 x 600 NA: 185°C NA: 155°C
600 x 600 EU: 180°C EU: 160°C
OHP All 165°C 150°C
Thick All 175°C 155°C
NA: 120°C
1,200 x 1,200 145°C
Color EU: 125°C
(duplex) 1,800 x 600 NA: 165°C NA: 135°C
600 x 600 EU: 170°C EU: 150°C
NA: 135°C
1,200 x 1,200 165°C
Black and white EU: 145°C
(duplex) 1,800 x 600 NA: 145°C
175°C
Descriptions
600 x 600 EU: 155°C Detailed
The heating and pressure roller temperatures for fusing are stored in SP1-105-4 to
-28.
When the machine is switched on, the fusing lamp temperatures increase to those
specified by SP1-104-25.
The print ready temperature is slightly less than the fusing temperature. The
difference is specified by SP1-105-1 and -2.
SM 6-91 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
Temperature Corrections
To prevent excessive glossiness caused by fusing temperature overshoot, the
following SP modes are available:
• 1-913: Fusing temperature is reduced after this number of pages during the
job.
• 1-914: This shows how much the temperature is reduced
If a job using OHP or thick paper starts while the fusing unit is still warm, the fusing
temperature could be higher than the target for this type of paper, causing marks
on the output. To prevent this problem, we have the following SP modes:
• 1-996-4, 5: These SPs specify a limit, above which printing will not start.
Overheat Protection
If the heating or pressure roller temperature becomes higher than 210°C, the CPU
cuts off the power to the fusing lamp. SC543 for the heating roller or SC553 for the
pressure roller is generated.
If thermistor overheat protection fails, there are the thermostat for the heating roller
and two thermofuses for the pressure roller in series with the common ground line
of the fusing lamp.
• If the thermostat temperature becomes higher than 215°C, the thermostat
opens, removing power from the fusing lamp.
• If either of the two thermofuses temperature becomes higher than 126°C, the
thermofuse opens, removing power from the fusing lamp.
NOTE: These thermofuses make a series circuit.
In either case, the machine stops operation.
B147/B149/B190 6-92 SM
FUSING
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY AND CLEANING

Oil Supply Pad and Roller
[B]
[C]
Front [A]
[D]
[E]
Rear
B146D571.WMF
The fusing oil makes it easier for paper to separate from the fusing belt and roller
after fusing. The oil [C] from the oil supply pad [B] is supplied to the oil supply roller
[A]. The oil supply roller rotates and supplies a bit of oil to the oiling roller [D]. The
oiling roller applies the oil to the fusing belt [E].
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-93 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
Oil Supply Mechanism

Rear
[A]
[B]
[C]
[G]
Front
[F]
[E]
B146D572.WMF
[D]
When the solenoid [A] turns on, the solenoid lever [B] pushes the oil supply lever
[C] on the fusing unit. The movement is transmitted by the link [D] and the bracket
[E] to the oil supply roller [F]. The roller is lifted and touches the oil supply pad [G].
B147/B149/B190 6-94 SM
FUSING
6.12.5 WASTE OIL
[A]
[I]
[B]
[H] [C]
[F]
[G]
[D] B146D919.WMF
[E]
Bottle Set Sensor

Excess fusing oil is collected in the waste oil bottle [H] through the pipe [I]. There is
a feeler [E] behind the waste oil bottle holder [G]. The feeler is linked to the bottle
set sensor [D]. The feeler is pushed when the bottle is in the holder and the holder
is set in place.
Descriptions
Detailed
NOTE: 1) The feeler goes through an opening [F] on the rear side of the holder.
The bottle pushes the feeler directly.
2) The bottle set sensor is checked when the main switch is turned on or
when the front or left door is opened and closed.
If the sensor does not detect the bottle, the message, “Waste Oil Bottle Setting
Error,” is displayed. This message is cleared after the bottle is set and the front
cover is closed (or the main switch is turned off and on). Just opening and closing
the cover does not clear the message.
NOTE: With this error message, another message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost
Full,” can be displayed ( Waste Oil Sensor).
SM 6-95 B147/B149/B190
FUSING Rev. 06/2004
Waste Oil Sensor

There is an enclosed area [A] on the rear left shoulder of the waste oil bottle. On
the inside wall of this area are two pinholes, through which the waste oil can flow
into the enclosed area. This enclosed area contains an actuator [B], which
interrupts the waste oil sensor [C] if no oil is in the area.
When the amount of waste oil becomes large enough for the waste oil to flow into
the area, the actuator floats on the oil. When the actuator leaves the waste oil
sensor, the message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full,” is displayed on the
operation panel.
NOTE: With this error message, another message, “Waste Oil Bottle Setting
Error,” can be displayed ( Bottle Set Sensor).
After this message appears, the copier can operate until the number of rotations of
development drive motor K reaches the value specified with SP7-905-010. When
⇒ the number has reached this value, an error message is displayed and the copier
stops its operation. When you dispose of the waste oil, the machine resumes its
normal operations (no need to switch the machine off/on).
6.12.6 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B146D573.WMF
The fusing oil supply unit [A] contains a fuse [B] in a circuit between the fusing unit
and the BCU board. The fuse opens shortly after a new unit has been installed in
the machine and the power is switched on. When the power is turned on or the left
cover is closed, the BCU checks whether a new fusing oil supply unit is installed by
checking the fuse condition. If the fusing oil supply unit has been replaced, the
machine detects the new unit and automatically resets the counter for the unit.
Oil near-end is detected by counting the number of prints made. The machine
indicates oil near-end 2,500 sheets before the life of the oil supply unit runs out.
This timing can be changed with SP7-905-14. . When the number has reached this
⇒ value, an error message is displayed and the copier stops its operation.
B147/B149/B190 6-96 SM
FUSING
6.12.7 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Overview
Stand-by Mode
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.) Energy Saver Key ON
-or-
Panel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 10 s)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off Panel-Off Mode (1&2) Return Time Less Than 3s Panel-Off Level 1
-or- Return Time Less Than 10s Panel-Off Level 2
Auto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)
Energy Saver Timer
(1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off Low Power Mode Return Time Less Than 30 s
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)
Operation Sw. On
Auto Off Mode Platen Cover Open / Close
Original Set ADF
Off Mode
Return Time Less Than 101 s
FAX: RX, etc.

After Printing
Printer Data in
Off Stand-by Mode
B146D936.WMF
When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
This machine has two types of energy saver mode as follows.
Descriptions
1) Panel-off mode Detailed
2) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes.
• Panel off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Panel Off
Timer
• Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Auto Off
Timer
• Auto off disabling: User Tools – System Settings – Key Operator Tools –
AOF (Always ON). This disables the auto off mode.
SM 6-97 B147/B149/B190
FUSING
Panel Off Mode

Entering the panel off mode
The machine enters the panel off mode under the following condition:
• The panel off timer runs out.
• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second.
If the value specified in the panel off timer is larger than the value specified in the
energy saver timer, the machine goes into the low power mode without going into
the panel off mode. A similar thing happens when the value in the panel off timer is
larger than that in the auto off timer. To make the panel off mode effective, specify
a value smaller than the values in the energy saver timer and auto off timer.
What happens in panel off mode

When the machine is in the panel off mode, each of the fusing lamps are kept at
the temperatures indicated in the table below, and the operation panel indicators
are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power LED.
If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program
(e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of each
fusing lamp rises to print the data.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
• Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
• An original is placed in the ADF
• The ADF is lifted
• A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The return time from the panel off mode to stand-by mode is less than 30 seconds.
Operation Energy
Mode Fusing Temperature +24V System +5V
Switch Saver LED
Heating roller: 100oC
Panel off On On On On
Pressure roller: 130oC
B147/B149/B190 6-98 SM
FUSING
Auto Off Mode

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference
between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machine’s condition when it
enters the Auto Off mode.
Entering off stand-by and off modes

The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off Mode when one of the following
is done.
• The auto off timer runs out.
• The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off.
If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-by
mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters the Off Mode.
• Error or SC condition
• Image data is stored in the memory
• During memory TX or polling RX
• The handset is off hook
• An original is in the ARDF
• The ARDF is open
Off Stand-by mode

The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a
ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is
activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes
the print job.
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Descriptions
Detailed
Returning to stand-by mode
The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
return time is less than 99 seconds.
Operation Energy
Mode Fusing Lamp +24V System +5V Note
Switch Saver LED
Off Off
Off Off On On
Stand-by (On when printing)
+5VE is
Off Off Off Off Off Off
supplied
SM 6-99 B147/B149/B190
PAPER EXIT
6.13 PAPER EXIT

6.13.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
B146D574.WMF B146D920.WMF
[D]: To standard paper tray

[E]: To external paper tray
[F]: Junction gate
[G]: Junction gate solenoid
After fusing, the junction gate feeds paper to the standard paper tray or the
external paper tray. The junction gate solenoid [D] controls the junction gate as
follows:
• To the standard paper tray: The junction gate
solenoid is off (default)
• To the external paper tray: The junction gate
solenoid is on.
Development drive motor-K drives the exit rollers.
B147/B149/B190 6-100 SM
PAPER EXIT
6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION
[A]
B146D921.WMF
When the paper overflow sensor [A] is activated, the machine detects that the
paper stack height has exceeded a certain limit, and stops printing.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-101 B147/B149/B190
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS

6.14.1 OVERVIEW
The printer/scanner unit is provided as a standard unit for North America and
Europe models. For other models, install the printer/scanner unit to use scanner
functions.
AS Option AL Option AL Option AS Option
Printer/ RAM RAM RAM

IEEE1284 NIB PS3 SD Card 2.5" HDD 2.5" HDD
Scanner (256 MB) (256 MB) (256 MB)
SDRAM SDRAM SDRAM

SD Slot 1 SD Slot 2 SD Slot 3 IDE IDE
DIMM DIMM DIMM
Local BUS
System
NVRAM
Flash ROM CLARINET CPU
(128 kB)
(16 MB)
PCI BUS
CONTROLLER PCI PCI PCI PCI
IEEE1394/
File Format
BCU Wireless LAN/ FCU NCU
Converter
Bluetooth
AL Option AL Option AL Option AL Option
AS Option: Optional component for Asia model
(standard component for other models)
AL Option: Optional component for all models
: Optional printer/scanner for Asia model
(standard component for other models)
B146D924.WMF
The controller is based on the GW (Grand Work) architecture.

CPU: RM7065C-533 (496 MHz)
CLARINET:
This is one of the GW-architecture ASICs. It uses a 124 MHz bus to interface with
the CPU and memory. CLARINET controls the interface, memory, local bus,
interruption processing, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation panel,
IEEE1284, and image processing.
Flash ROM: The 16-MB flash ROM is for the system program.
B147/B149/B190 6-102 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
SDRAM DIMM (3 slots):

The controller has 512-MB resident SDRAM. You can expand the memory up to
768 MB (256 MB x 3).
NVRAM:
The 128-KB NVRAM stores the engine/controller settings and logs.
Ethernet:
100Base-TX/10Base-T is an optional component for the Asia model, and a
standard component for other models.
IEEE1284 Interface:
The IEEE1284 interface is a standard component for the Europe and North
America models, and an optional component for other models.
NIB:
The network interface board is a standard component for the Europe and North
America models, and an optional component for other models.
Interface Option:
You can install one of the four network components (USB 2.0, IEEE1394, Wireless
LAN, Bluetooth).
HDD:
Two 40-GB HDDs are among standard components. Each hard disk is partitioned
as shown below. You cannot change the partition sizes.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-103 B147/B149/B190
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.2 HARD DISK

Overview
The capacity of the hard disk is 80 GB. The controller partitions it into several
drives and allocates them for different functions. You can initialize these partitions
as necessary ( SP5-832). The table lists the contents of the hard disk.
Volatile/ Initialization
Contents Capacity (MB)
Nonvolatile (SP5-832)
37,500 Nonvolatile
Images 002
25,000 Volatile
Thumbnails 2,400 Nonvolatile 003
Job logs 10 Nonvolatile 004
Printer fonts 500 Nonvolatile 005
User information 100 Nonvolatile 006
Mail RX data 200 Nonvolatile 007
Mail TX data 1,000 Nonvolatile 008
1,256 Nonvolatile
Designer data 009
1,000 Volatile
Logs 150 Nonvolatile 010
Ricoh interfaces 500 Nonvolatile 011
Volatile: The data is lost when you turn the main switch off.
Nonvolatile: The data is retained when you turn the main switch off.
Data Transfer
Memory
The copier executes the direct memory access
(DMA) two times as fast as the conventional DMA.
The controller has two identical hard disk drives.
One HDD interface connects these drives with the HDD Interface
memory. There is a 32-bit data bus between the
memory and the HDD interface; and a 16-bit data
bus between the HDD interface and each hard
disk drive (two 16-bit data busses in total).
When receiving 32-bit data from the memory, the
HDD interface divides them into two 16-bit data
and transfers them to each hard disk drive. Hard
disk drive 1 stores data in an address; hard disk
drive 2 stores data in an address. These two
addresses correspond with each other. When
HDD 1 HDD 2
receiving two 16-bit data from two corresponding
B146D937.WMF
addresses of the hard disk drives, the HDD
interface combines them and transfers 32-bit data to the memory.
If a bad sector is found in an address of one hard disk drive, the sector in the
corresponding address of the other hard disk drive is also treated as a bad sector.
B147/B149/B190 6-104 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING

RPCS Driver
Host Controller Printer
Engine
ICM Engine/
ICM profile
8-bit K
RGB
RPCS Driver Gray

RGB
Correction
Matching UCR/BG
Corrected
RGB
RCM profile
8-bit
CMYK
γ Correction
CMYK
Toner Limitation
CMYK
8 bits CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
Dithering & ROP
B146D932.WMF
PCL5c Driver
Host Controller Printer
Engine
(Matching by Host)
RGB
RGB 8 bits
PCL Driver Decode

RGB & RGB
Descriptions
Scale 8 bits Color
8 bits Matching Detailed
ICM Engine/
ICM profile CMY
8 bits
CMY Dithering
RGB £ CMY 8 bits &
Correction ROP
CMY
1 bit
CMYK
• BG/UCR, 1 bit
• Gray Correction
• Toner Limitation
B146D933.WMF
SM 6-105 B147/B149/B190
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
PS3 Driver
Color CMYK
CIE ABC CIE XYZ 8 bits
Matching
to
XYZ CRD
Toner Limitation
Gray Correction
Dither and RIP

XYZ
PS Driver CMYK
Gamma
CMYK CMYK CMYK 1 bit or 2 bits
RGB
Fine
to
Fine Super
XYZ
CMYK
RGB BG/UCR 8 bits
Vivid
Super Vivid
(RGB
None Correction)
CMM/
ICC/ICM
Profile
B146D934.WMF
CMS (Color Management System)

CMS optimizes the color print quality using a color profile that is based on the
characteristics of the printer. With RPCS, the color profile is applied by the driver.
With PS3 and PCL5c, the color profile is applied in the matching/CRD module on
the controller except when using CMM/ICC/ICM profiles.
CMS is not used when the color profile setting in the printer driver is set to “Off.”
Gray Correction
Gray correction processes gray with the K or CMYK toner depending on the driver
settings.
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)

The RGB data is converted to CMYK data with BG/UCR. During CMYK conversion,
some CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm.
Gamma Correction
The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). For
CMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data is
stored in NVRAM.
B147/B149/B190 6-106 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Toner Limitation
Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.
Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can
be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).
• Default: 190% for text, 260% for photo
• Adjustable range: 100% to 400%
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP

Dither patterns have been prepared for photo and text independently. Dithering
converts 8-bit data to 1-bit or 2-bit data. However, these dither patterns create the
illusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern is
selected depending on the selected resolution.
RIP: Raster Image Processing
ROP: Raster Operation
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-107 B147/B149/B190
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

Sample Print
This feature was formerly known as “Proof Print.” This function gives users a
chance to check the print results before starting a multiple-set print run.
• The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 5.8 GB. This
partition is also used by the collation and locked print features.
• The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using locked print.
• The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding jobs stored
using locked print.
• The maximum number of pages is 2,000, including jobs using locked print
and collation.
Locked Print
Using this feature, the print job is stored in the machine but will not be printed until
the user inputs an ID at the machine’s operation panel. This ID must match the ID
that has been input with the printer driver.
• Stored data is automatically deleted after it is printed.
• Stored data can be manually deleted at the operation panel.
• The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using sample print.
• The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding logs stored
using locked print.
• The maximum number of pages is 2,000, including jobs using sample print
and collation.
• Locked print uses the same hard disk partition as sample print and collation,
which is 5.8 GB.
B147/B149/B190 6-108 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING

Print data can be spooled (stored) in the machine’s HDD, and the machine starts to
print when data transfer is complete. Since the machine stores all data first before
printing, the host computer is freed up more quickly.
NOTE: 1) The supported print protocols are IPP and LPR.
2) The default setting for this feature is ‘off’. The user must switch it on
using UP mode to enable this feature.
• The size of the HDD partition for job spooling is 1 GB.
• The partition can hold up to 150 jobs.
Related SP Modes
Job spooling can be turned on and off using the SP mode (SP5-828-069) for each
protocol.
The machine does not spool jobs when job spooling is switched off with the SP
mode, even when the customer switches it on with the user mode.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-109 B147/B149/B190
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Paper Source Selection

Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)
The “Tray Priority” setting Priority Tray
Start of
Tray Search
determines the start of the tray
search when the user selects “Auto
Tray Select” with the driver. The Tray 1
machine searches paper trays for
the specified paper size and type.
When no tray contains paper that Tray 2
matches the paper size and type

specified by the driver, the controller
stops printing until the user loads the
LCT (Optional) Tray 3 (Optional)
correct paper.
The “Tray Priority” setting can be
specified in the following menu:  Tray 4 (Optional)
> System Settings > Tray Paper
Settings > Paper Tray Priority: B146D575.WMF
Printer.
NOTE: The by-pass feed table is not part of the tray search.
Tray Locking
If “Tray Locking” is enabled for a tray, the controller skips the “locked” tray in the
tray search process.
The “Tray Locking” setting can be specified in the following menu:  > System
Settings > Tray Paper Settings > Paper Type: Tray # > Apply Auto Paper Select
(where the “#” indicates the tray number).
NOTE: The by-pass feed table cannot be unlocked (Tray Locking is always
enabled).
Manual Tray Select

If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver,
the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper.
B147/B149/B190 6-110 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Auto Continue
Overview
When this function is enabled, the machine waits for a specified period (0, 1, 5, 10,
15 minutes) for the correct paper size and type to be set in the tray. If the timer
runs out, the machine starts printing, even if there is no paper tray which matches
the paper size and paper type specified by the driver.
The machine searches for a paper tray in the following way:
• The interval can be set with the following menu:  > Printer Features > System
> Auto Continue.
NOTE: The default setting for this feature is “Off.”
Auto Tray Select

When there is no paper tray that Priority Tray
Start of
Tray Search
matches the paper size and type
specified by the driver, the machine
searches for any tray that has paper, Tray 1
and prints from the first tray it finds.
The start of the tray search is the
tray selected as the priority tray. Tray 2
LCT (Optional) Tray 3 (Optional)
Tray 4 (Optional)
B146D576.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
Manual Tray Select
The machine prints from the selected tray even if the paper size and type do not
match the setting specified from the driver.
If “Auto Continue” is disabled, the machine waits until the user loads the correct
paper in the tray.
SM 6-111 B147/B149/B190
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Paper Output Tray

You can select output trays as follows: User Tools > System Settings > Tray Paper
Settings. If a print job does not specify an output tray or if the driver specifies the
default tray, the output tray selected with this user tool will be used.
Output Tray Selected

• If the machine cannot print to the selected output tray, it prints to the default
paper output tray.
• If paper overflow is detected at the selected output tray, the controller suspend
printing.
Stapling
The optional two-tray finisher and booklet finisher can staple papers. Both finishers
support the following stapling positions:
[A]
[A]: One staple (vertical) is at the rear right
corner.
[B]: Two staples (vertical) are at the right Paper exit [B]
middle edge.
[C]: One staple (vertical) is at the front right
corner. [C]
[D]: One staple (slant) is at the front right
corner.
[D]
The two-tray finisher supports the following
stapling position (the booklet finisher does [E]
not):
[D]: One staple (slant) is at the front right
corner.
The booklet finisher supports the following

stapling position (the two-tray finisher does B146D922.WMF
not):
[E]: Two staples (vertical) are at the center.
The table lists the number of papers that the finishers can staple.
Position Paper size
A4, B5, LT A3, Ledger, Legal
Two-tray finisher [A][B][C][D] 50 sheets 30 sheets
[A][B][C][D] 50 sheets 25 sheets
Booklet finisher
[E] — 10 sheets
NOTE: For more paper sizes, see the specifications.
B147/B149/B190 6-112 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Punching
To enable a finisher to punch out holes, you must install the optional punch unit to
it. Each punch unit needs the dedicated punch unit. Note that these punch units
are not interchangeable with each other. To make two holes on a sheet of paper,
you must install the two-hole type; to make three, the three-hole type; and to make
four, the four-hole type. The table shows which type you can install to your finisher.
Finisher model Two holes Three holes Four holes
North America N/A
Europe (excluding
N/A
North Europe)
North Europe N/A N/A
: Available
N/A: Not available
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-113 B147/B149/B190
ETHERNET BOARD
6.15 ETHERNET BOARD

6.15.1 ETHERNET BOARD LAYOUT
GW PHY Bus I/f
EEPROM
Connector
LED PHY DP83843

XTL
25 MHz
LED
Filter Modue
Connector
LAN I/F
B146D579.WMF
Function Blocks Description

PHY (Physical Layer Device) Completely standardized physical layer device for the
functions of each device in the network.
EEPROM Stores the MAC address.
The physical layer device, the lowest layer of the OSI reference model, refers to
the physical components of the network: cables, connectors, and so on. OSI, the
Operating Standard Interface, is a framework upon which networking standards are
arranged. It is commonly diagramed as a layered cake.
B147/B149/B190 6-114 SM
ETHERNET BOARD
6.15.2 ETHERNET BOARD OPERATION

The NIB is a standard IEEE802.3u type which implements 10/100Mbps auto
negotiation. System initialization sets the network for 10Mbps/100Mbps.
[A]
[B]
B146D580.WMF
Indicates the operation mode:

LED [A] (Orange) On: 100 Mbps mode
Descriptions
Off: 10 Mbps mode
Detailed
Indicates the link status:
LED [B] (Green) On: Link Safe
Off: Link Fail
SM 6-115 B147/B149/B190
IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)
6.16 IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)

6.16.1 OVERVIEW
An IEEE1394 interface board is available as an option for this machine to provide
high speed connectivity through what is commonly called Firewire or i.LINK (Sony).
Some important advantages of Firewire are:
• High speed data transmission at 400 Mbps.
• Easier connectivity (many devices can be connected without a host).
• Devices in a computer can be connected to external devices on a shared bus.
IEEE1394 supports two printing methods: 1) SCSI Print, and 2) IP Over 1394. IP
Over 1394 supports printing by setting an IP address, and SCSI supports printing
without an IP address.
Software Application
TCP/IP (Virtual)
SCSI (Virtual) Port
Port
IP over 1394
IEEE802.11b
Ethernet
(Wireless LAN)
Port Port
IEEE1394 Port
IP over 1394
SCSI Printing
Printing
B146D581.WMF
NOTE: 1) Windows Me and Windows XP support IP over 1394.

2) Windows XP and 2000 support IEEE1394 SCSI printing.
B147/B149/B190 6-116 SM
IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)
When the host computer powers up, it queries all the devices connected to the bus
and assigns each one an address, a process called enumeration. Here are some
general features of Firewire:
• Firewire is Plug-and-Play.
• Firewire devices are hot pluggable (they can be plugged while the system is
operating).
• Firewire uses 64-bit fixed addressing, based on the IEEE 1212 standard. There
are three parts to each packet of information sent by a device over FireWire:
• 10-bit Bus ID. Used to determine the Firewire bus where the data came from.
• 6-bit Physical ID. Used to identify the device that sent the data.
• 48-bit Storage Area. Capable of addressing 256 terabytes of information for
each node
• The Bus ID and Physical ID comprise the 16-bit Node ID. 64,000 nodes are
allowed on each system.
• Up to 16 hops are allowed (4.5 m/hop) for a total of 72 meters devices are daisy-
chained.
• Firewire allows its devices to draw power from the Firewire connection. Two
power connectors in the cable can supply power (8 to 40 V, 1.5 amp max.)
• An important element of Firewire is its support of isochronous devices.
When isochronous devices are in the isochronous mode, data streams between
the device and the host in real time with guaranteed bandwidth and no error
correction. Essentially, this means that a device like a digital camcorder can
request that the host computer allocate enough bandwidth for the camcorder to
send uncompressed video in real time to the computer. The camera can sent
data via the Firewire connection in a steady flow to the computer without
anything disrupting the process. This is one of the main reasons why 1394 has
been widely adopted by the consumer electronics industry.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-117 B147/B149/B190
USB
6.17 USB
6.17.1 SPECIFICATIONS
USB connectivity is provided as an option for this machine.
Interface: USB 1.1, USB 2.0
Data rates: 480 Mbps (high speed), 12 Mbps (full speed), 1.5 Mbps (low speed)
High speed mode is only supported by USB 2.0.
6.17.2 USB 1.1/2.0

USB (Universal Serial Bus) offers simple connectivity for computers, printers,
keyboards, and other peripherals. In a USB environment, terminators, device IDs
(like SCSI), and DIP switch settings are not necessary.
USB 1.1 provides the following features:
• Plug & Play. As soon as a new device is connected via USB, the operating
system recognizes it, and the appropriate driver is installed for it automatically if
the driver is available. If the driver is not available, a message prompts the user
for the driver disk for immediate installation.
• Hot swapping (cables can be connected and disconnected while the computer
and other devices are switched on)
• No terminator or device ID required
• Data rates of 12 Mbps (full speed), and 1.5 Mbps (low speed)
• Common connectors for different devices
• Bi-directional data communication between device and host computer via a 4-
byte header and DEVICE ID.
USB 2.0 is an evolution of the USB 1.1 specification. It uses the same cables,
connectors, and software interfaces so the user will see no change. It provides an
easy-to-use connection to a wide range of products with a maximum data rate of
480Mbps (high speed).
Up to 127 devices can be connected and 6 cascade connections are allowed.
Power is supplied from the computer and the maximum cable length is 5 m.
B147/B149/B190 6-118 SM
USB
6.17.3 USB CONNECTORS

USB is a serial protocol and a physical link, which transmits all data on a single pair
of wires. Another pair provides power to downstream peripherals. The USB
standard specifies two types of connectors, type “A” connectors for upstream
connection to the host system, and type “B” connectors for downstream connection
to the USB device.
Type A connector Type B connector
6.17.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT

The controller has the type B receptacle (CN10).
3 2
Descriptions
Detailed
4 1
B146D928.WMF
Pin No. Signal Description Wiring Assignment

1 Power Red
2 Data – White
3 Data + Green
4 Power GND White
SM 6-119 B147/B149/B190
USB
6.17.5 REMARKS ABOUT USB

• The machine does not print reports specifically for USB.
• Only one host computer is allowed for the USB connection.
• After starting a job using USB, do not switch the printer off until the job has been
completed. When a user cancels a print job, if data transmitted to the printer has
not been printed at the time of cancellation, the job will continue to print up to the
page where the print job was cancelled
• When the controller board is replaced, the host computer will recognize the
machine as a different device.
Related SP Mode
“USB Settings” is in SP5-844. Data rates can be adjusted to full speed fixed (12
Mbps). This switch may be used for troubleshooting if there is a data transfer error
using the high speed mode (480Mbps).
Data rates can also be adjusted using the UP mode “USB Setting” in the Host
Interface in the System menu. This mode can be accessed only when the “Enter”,
“Escape”, then “Menu” keys are pressed to enter the UP mode.
B147/B149/B190 6-120 SM
IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)
6.18 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)

The IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN interface card is available as an option for this
machine.
A wireless LAN is a flexible data communication system used to extend or replace
a wired LAN. Wireless LAN employs radio frequency technology to transmit and
receive data over the air and minimize the need for wired connections.
• With wireless LANs, users can access information on a network without looking
for a place to plug into the network.
• Network managers can set up or expand networks without installing or moving
wires.
• Most wireless LANs can be integrated into existing wired networks. Once
installed, the network treats wireless nodes like any other physically wired
network component.
• Flexibility and mobility make wireless LANs both effective extensions of and
attractive alternatives to wired networks.
Standard applied: IEEE802.11b
Data transmission rates: Speed Distance
11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)
Network protocols: TCP/IP, Apple Talk, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX
Bandwidth: 2.4GHz
(divided over 14 channels, 2400 to 2497 MHz for each channel)
NOTE: The wireless LAN cannot be active at the same time as the Ethernet LAN.
The following user tool setting determines which LAN is active: System
Settings – Interface Settings – Network - LAN Type.
Descriptions
Detailed
LED Indicators
LED Description ON OFF
LED 1 (Green) Link Status Linked No Link
LED 2 (Orange) Power Distribution Power On Power Off
SM 6-121 B147/B149/B190
6.18.2 TRANSMISSION MODES

Wireless communication has two modes: 1) ad hoc mode, and 2) infrastructure
mode.
Ad Hoc Mode
The ad hoc mode allows
communication between each device
(station) in a simple peer-to-peer
network. In this mode, all devices
must use the same channel to
communicate. In this machine, the
default transmission mode is ad hoc
mode and the default channel is 11.
First, set up the machine in ad hoc
mode and program the necessary
settings, even if the machine will be
used in the infrastructure mode.
B146D584.WMF
To switch between ad hoc and
infrastructure modes, use the
following user tool: Host Interface
Menu - IEEE802.11b - Comm Mode
Infrastructure Mode
The infrastructure mode allows
communication between each
computer and the printer via an
access point equipped with an
antenna and wired into the network.
This arrangement is used in more
complex topologies. The wireless LAN
client must use the same SSID
(Service Set ID) as the access point in Access Point
order to communicate.
B146D585.WMF
B147/B149/B190 6-122 SM
6.18.3 SECURITY FEATURES

SSID (Service Set ID)
The SSID is used by the access point to recognize the client and allow access to
the network. Only clients that share the same SSID with the access point can
access the network.
NOTE: 3) If the SSID is not set, clients connect to the nearest access point.
4) The SSID can be set using the web status monitor or telnet.
Using the SSID in Ad hoc mode

When the SSID is used in ad hoc mode and nothing is set, the machine
automatically uses “ASSID” as the SSID. In such a case, “ASSID” must also be set
at the client.
NOTE: SSID in ad hoc mode is sometimes called “Network Name.”
Some devices automatically change from ad hoc mode to infrastructure mode
when the same SSID is used in ad hoc mode and infrastructure mode. In such a
case, to use the device in ad hoc mode, use a specified SSID in infrastructure
mode and use “ASSID” in the ad hoc mode.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)

WEP is a coding system designed to protect wireless data transmission. In order to
unlock encoded data, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. There
are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys. However, this machine supports only 64 bit WEP.
NOTE: The WEP key can be set using the Web Status Monitor or Telnet.
MAC Address
When the infrastructure mode is used, access to the network can also be limited at
the access points using the MAC address. This setting may not be available with
Descriptions
some types of access points. Detailed
SM 6-123 B147/B149/B190
6.18.4 WIRELESS LAN TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES

Communication Status
Wireless LAN communication status can be checked with the UP mode “W.LAN
Signal” in the Maintenance menu. This can also be checked using the Web Status
Monitor or Telnet.
The status is described on a simple number scale.
Status Display Communication Status
Good 76 ~ 100
Fair 41 ~ 75
Poor 21 ~ 40
Unavailable 0 ~ 20
NOTE: Communication status can be measured only when the infrastructure mode
is being used.
Channel Settings
If a communication error occurs because of electrical noise, interference with other
electrical devices, etc., you may have to change the channel settings.
To avoid interference with neighboring channels, it is recommended to change by 3
channels. For example, if there are problems using channel 11 (default), try using
channel 8.
25MHz 25MHz
Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
MHz 2,412 2,437 2,462

B146D586.WMF
B147/B149/B190 6-124 SM
Troubleshooting Procedure
If there are problems using the wireless LAN, check the following.
1) Check the LED indicator on the wireless LAN card.
2) Check if “IEEE802.11b” is selected in the following user tool: Host Interface
menu - Network Setup - LAN Type.
3) Check if the channel settings are correct.
4) Check if the SSID and WEP are correctly set.
If infrastructure mode is being used,
1) Check if the MAC address is properly set.
2) Check the communication status.
If the communication status is poor, bring the machine closer to the access
point, or check for any obstructions between the machine and the access
point.
If the problem cannot be solved, try changing the channel setting.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-125 B147/B149/B190
BLUETOOTH
6.19 BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth wireless provides radio links between mobile computers, mobile phones
and other portable handheld devices.
Bluetooth contains the following features.
• Cheaper compared to the IEEE802.11b wireless LAN.
• Many protocols for infrared transmission (IrDA) can be used with Bluetooth.
• A Bluetooth device can connect to other Bluetooth devices without any settings.
Standard applied: Bluetooth 1.1 (Bluetooth Special Interest Group)
Data transfer rates: 1 Mbps
Bandwidth: 2.4GHz Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS)
Piconet. Bluetooth devices communicate with each other device in the ad hoc
mode. This network is called a “Piconet”. A Piconet may contain a maximum of 8
Bluetooth devices.
There is one master device and seven slave devices in a Piconet. The master
device controls the hopping frequency and timing, as well as storing the ID codes
of the slave devices. The master and slave devices can be swapped. Once the
master device leaves the Piconet, a slave device becomes the new master.
Machines with the Bluetooth option become potential slave devices to connect to
the PC.
FHSS (Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum). The Bluetooth device divides
2402 to 2480 MHz into 79 channels of 1 MHz width, and changes the channel 1600
times per second. If other devices in the LAN are using the same radio band,
Bluetooth can avoid interference from the other devices.
Channel 1
Frequency
Channel 2
Channel 3
Time
B146D587.WMF
B147/B149/B190 6-126 SM
BLUETOOTH
6.19.2 BLUETOOTH PROFILES

A Bluetooth device will not operate if it is located to close another Bluetooth device.
However, the Bluetooth device should support the protocols to communicate with
each other. There are many types of Bluetooth and service protocols. These are
listed below.
Here are 14 profiles for Bluetooth as follows.
• Generic Access Profile
• Service Discovery Profile
• Cordless Telephony Profile
• Intercom Profile
• Serial Port Profile
• Headset Profile
• Dial-up Networking Profile
• Fax Profile
• LAN Access Profile
• Generic Object Exchange Profile
• Object Push Profile
• File Transfer Profile
• Synchronization Profile
• Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile
Serial Port Profile (SPP) and Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP) are
used for the printer products.
SPP is used is place of the serial port, while HCRP is used in place of the parallel
port.
6.19.3 BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES

Public and Private Mode. The PC can browse Bluetooth devices. The machine’s
default is public mode. The PC cannot browse the machine if it has been changed
Descriptions
to private mode. Detailed
PIN Code (Personal Identification Number). When the PIN code is used, the PC
connects to the device that sent the PIN code. The PIN code is a 4 digit number.
This machine uses the last four digits of the machine's serial number. It cannot be
changed.
SM 6-127 B147/B149/B190
SCANNER FUNCTIONS
6.20 SCANNER FUNCTIONS

The printer/scanner unit is provided as a standard unit for North America and
Europe models. For other models, install the printer/scanner unit to use scanner
functions.
6.20.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE

The image processing for scanner mode is done in the IPU chip on the BCU board.
The IPU chip chooses the most suitable image processing methods (gamma
tables, dither patterns, etc) depending on the settings made in the driver.
The image compression method can be selected with SP mode (MR/MH/MMR for
binary picture processing, JPEG for grayscale processing).
Whether the user selects the image mode using the driver (TWAIN mode) or from
the operation panel (Delivery mode), the IPU chip does the image processing using
the appropriate image processing methods mentioned above.
Image Data Path
1. Image Store/Image Delivery Mode
File
Image Image Image
HDD NIB
Scanning Processing Compression
SBU BCU Controller

Server
B146D926.WMF
The user can select the following modes from the LCD.
1) Delivery only
2) Store only
3) Store and delivery
After image processing and image compression, all image data for the job are
stored in the printer controller HDD using TIFF file format (binary picture
processing) or JPEG file format (grayscale processing). The type of TIFF format
used depends on the user’s scanner settings.
When delivery mode is selected, the controller creates a file which contains the
destination and page information, then the controller sends the file to a server.
B147/B149/B190 6-128 SM
SCANNER FUNCTIONS
2. Twain Mode
Im age
Image Image Image
NIB
Scanning Processing Compression
SBU BCU Controller

PC
B146D927.WMF
After image processing and image compression, the data (TIFF or JPEG) is sent
to the scanner Twain driver directory on the computer.
6.20.2 SCANNER ACS (AUTO COLOR SELECTION)

The scanner auto-color selection (ACS)
function determines if an original is black Signal
and white or color, so that the black and level
white mode or the full color mode is
automatically selected.
Comparing RGB video signals, the ACS
processes the original as black and white
if the maximum difference among RGB
signals is within a certain range.
After the above processing, the G signals
are further processed to make black and
white data (a pixel is black or white, not
gray). In this processing, the following R G B
information is compared:
B146D938.WMF
Descriptions
• The G signal level Detailed
• The threshold (calculated from the average G signal level)
SM 6-129 B147/B149/B190
FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)
6.21 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

In previous models (such as A-C2, R-C2), DeskTopBinder V2 could retrieve copy
and print jobs from the document server and convert them to TIFF. However, this
software-based conversion was slow for many users.
So, for this machine, this conversion has been made hardware-based, using the
optional File Format Converter. Without the File Format Converter, copy and print
jobs cannot be downloaded to a PC (or e-Cabinet) from the document server.
Two common target formats are provided for conversion to files that can be
selected by the SP modes: JPEG, and TIFF.
In scanner mode, users can select file format from TIFF, JPEG, or PDF. The time
to create TIFF and JPEG files will be shortened with the File Format Converter,
especially for high scanning resolution and large image size. When the customer
selects PDF, the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned image first
then converts it to PDF. So, the total time to create a PDF is also shortened with
the File Format Converter.
B147/B149/B190 6-130 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 09/2004 SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 BASIC
Configuration: Desktop
Print Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Number of scans: 1
Resolution: Scan: 600 dpi
Print: 600 dpi
Gradation: Scan: 8 bits/pixel
Print: 2 bits/pixel
Original type: Sheets, book, objects
Max. original size: A3/11" x 17"
Original reference Left rear corner
position:
Copy speed: Normal
B147: 24 cpm (color) or 32 cpm (black & white)
OHP/Thick
B147, B149, B190: 10 cpm (color/black & white)
ADF 1 to 1
First copy (normal Color: 10 seconds or less
mode): Black & white: 8 seconds or less
Warm-up time: 101 seconds or less (23°C, 50%)
Print Paper Capacity: Standard tray: 500 sheets x 2
(80 g/m2, 20 lb) By-pass tray: 100 sheets
Optional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 1, 500 sheets x 2, Optional
LCT: 2000 sheets
Specifications
Print Paper Size: (Refer to “Supported Paper Sizes”.)

Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Tray 2 A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11" A3/11" x 17"
By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 458 mm/12" x 18"
Optional Tray A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11" A3/11" x 17"
LCT A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Printing Paper Standard tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Weight: Optional paper tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
By-pass tray: 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb.)
SM 7-1 B147/B149/B190
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Paper Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down)

Capacity: External exit tray: 100 sheets (face up)
Continuous copy: Up to 999 sheets
Zoom: Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step)
Fixed:
North America Europe
25% 25%
50% 50%
65% 65%
73% 71%
78% 75%
85% 82%
93% 93%
100% 100%
121% 115%
129% 122%
155% 141%
200% 200%
400% 400%
Memory: Standard: 768 MB (Europe and North America model)/

512 MB (other models*)
* One expansion slot is available.
Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12A (for North America)
220 V – 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 8A (for Europe)
Power Consumption:
120V 230V
Maximum 1440 W or less 1500 W or less
Energy Saver 15 W or less 18 W or less
Noise Emission:
(Sound Power Level)
Mainframe Only Full System
Printing 68 dB or less 72 dB or less
Stand-by 42 dB or less
Low power mode 40 dB or less
NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh

standard methodology.
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Copier: 670 x 698 x 859 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 33.8")
Copier + 1-Tray PFU: 670x 698 x 1,020 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 40.2")
Copier + 2-Tray PFU or LCT: 670 x 698 x 1,118 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 44.0")
Weight: Less than 120 kg (265 lb.) [excluding toner]
B147/B149/B190 7-2 SM
1.2 PRINTER
Printer Languages: PCL5c
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
Resolution and PCL5c:
Gradation: 600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 300 x 300 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
Adobe PostScript 3:
1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
RPCS:
NOTE: 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel) = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits/pixel)
Printing speed:
Resolution Plain paper Thick/OHP
600 x 600 dpi 32 ppm 10 ppm
Monochrome 1,800 x 600 dpi 32 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm
B147
600 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 10 ppm
Color 1,800 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 14 ppm 10 ppm
600 x 600 dpi 38 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm
B149
600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 14 ppm 10 ppm
600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 20 ppm 10 ppm
B190
600 x 600 dpi 20 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 14 ppm 10 ppm
Resident Fonts: PCL5c:

35 Intelli fonts
Specifications
10 TrueType fonts
Adobe PostScript 3:
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
Host Interfaces: Bi-directional IEEE1284 parallel x 1..................... Standard
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)...................... Standard
USB 2.0 ............................................................... Optional
IEEE1394............................................................. Optional
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)............................... Optional
Bluetooth (Wireless)............................................. Optional
SM 7-3 B147/B149/B190
SPECIFICATIONS Rev. 09/2004
Network Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk, SMB

First Print Speed: Color: 9 seconds or less (from tray 1)
Monochrome: 7 seconds or less (from tray 1)
1.3 SCANNER
Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan
Resolution: 600 dpi
Available scanning Twain Mode:
Resolution Range: 100 ~ 1200 dpi
Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB
Scanning B/W: 28 ppm LEF
Throughput Color: 24 ppm LEF
(ARDF mode):
Interface: Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394,
Wireless LAN
Compression B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
Method: Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG
B147/B149/B190 7-4 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

2.1 PAPER FEED
North America Europe/Asia
Paper Size (W x L) By- By-
Tray Tray
Tray 1 LCT pass Tray 1 LCT pass
2/3/4 2/3/4
Tray Tray
# #
A3 W 12" x 18" N N N Y N N N Y
#
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm N Y N Y N Y N Y
# #
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm N Y /Y* N Y N Y N Y
# #
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm N Y N Y Y* Y Y Y
#
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm N N N Y N N N Y
# #
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm N Y N Y N Y N Y
# #
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm N N N Y N N N Y
# # #
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm N Y /Y* N Y N Y N Y
# # # #
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm N Y /Y* N Y N Y /Y* N Y
# #
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm N Y N Y N Y N Y
# #
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm N N N Y N N N Y
#
Ledger 11" x 17" N Y N Y N Y N Y
# #
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" N Y N Y N Y /Y* N Y
# #
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y* Y Y Y N Y N Y
# # #
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" N Y N Y N Y /Y* N Y
Half Letter N N N #
SEF
5.5" x 8.5" N Y N N Y
# # # #
Executive 7.25" x 10.5" N Y N Y N Y N Y
SEF
# #
Executive 10.5" x 7.25" N N N Y N N N Y
LEF
# # #
F SEF 8" x 13" N Y N Y N Y N Y
# # # #
Foolscap 8.5" x 13" N Y N Y N Y N Y
SEF
# # # #
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" N Y N Y N Y N Y
# # # #
8K 267 x 390 mm N Y N Y N Y N Y
# # # #
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm N Y N Y N Y N Y
# # # #
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm N Y N Y N Y N Y
Custom Minimum:
90 x 148 mm # #
N N N Y N N N Y
Maximum:
305 x 458 mm
#
Com10 4.125" x 9.5" N N N Y N N N N
Env.
#
Monarch 3.875" x 7.5" N N N Y N N N N
Specifications
Env.
#
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm N N N N N N N Y
#
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm N N N N N N N Y
#
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm N N N N N N N Y
Remarks:
Y Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
Y# Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
Y* Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
N Not supported
SM 7-5 B147/B149/B190
SPECIFICATIONS
2.2 PAPER EXIT

Internal Tray External Tray 2-tray Booklet
Paper Size (W x L) Duplex
(Face Down) (Face Up) Finisher Finisher
A3 W 12" x 18" N Y N N N
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y* Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y N N N
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y Y N Y
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm N N N N N
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y Y Y Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y* Y
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y Y Y* Y
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm N N N N N
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y* Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y Y
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" Y Y N N N
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y Y N Y
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" Y Y N N N
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y N Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y Y N Y
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" Y Y Y N Y
8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y N Y
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y N Y
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y N Y
Custom Minimum:
90 x 148 mm
Y Y N N N
Maximum:
305 x 458 mm
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" N Y N N N
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" N Y N N N
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm N Y N N N
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm N Y N N N
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm N Y N N N
Remarks:
Y Supported
N Not supported
Y* Stack only (Booklet not supported)
B147/B149/B190 7-6 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

Size (width x length) Platen ARDF
[mm] Inches Metric Inches Metric
A3 (297 x 420) L No Yes Yes Yes
B4 (257 x 364) L No Yes No Yes
A4 (210 x 297) L No Yes No Yes**
A4 (297 x 210) S No Yes Yes Yes
B5 (182 x 257) L No Yes No Yes
B5 (257 x 182) S No Yes No Yes
A5 (148 x 210) L No No* No Yes
A5 (210 x 148) S No No No Yes
B6 (128 x 182) L No No No Yes
B6 (182 x 128) S No No No Yes
11" x 17" (DLT) Yes No Yes** Yes**
11" x 15" No No Yes** No
10" x 14" No No Yes No
8.5" x 14" (LG) Yes No Yes** No
8.5" x 13" (F4) No No Yes** Yes
8.25" x 13" No No No No
8" x 13"(F) No Yes No No
8.5" x 11" (LT) Yes No Yes** No
11" x 8.5" (LT) Yes No Yes** No
8" x 10.5" No No No No
8" x 10" No No Yes** No
5.5" x 8.5" (HLT) No* No Yes No
8.5" x 5.5" (HLT) No No Yes No
8K (267 x 390) No No No Yes**
16K L (195 x 267) No No No Yes**
16K S (267 x 195) No No No Yes
7.25" x 10.5"
No No Yes No
(Executive)
10.5" x 7.25"
No No Yes** No
(Executive)
*: When the message “Cannot detect original size” appears, use SP4-303 to
detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT.
**: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1.
Specifications
SM 7-7 B147/B149/B190
SPECIFICATIONS
3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run
installer allows you to select which components to install.
3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS

Printer Windows Windows Windows Windows Windows
Macintosh
Language 95/98/ME NT4.0 2000 XP 2003
PCL 5c Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
RPCS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86
platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,
Alpha, or MIPS platforms.
2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows
2000, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is
provided with the driver.
3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 8.6 or later versions.
3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE

Software Description
Agfa Font Manager 2000 A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer.
(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP,
NT4)
SmartNetMonitor for Admin A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB
(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP, setup utilities are also available.
NT4)
SmartNetMonitor for Client • A printer management utility for client users.
(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP, • A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IP
NT4) network.
• A peer to peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. This
provides the parallel printing and recovery printing features.
Printer Utility for Mac This software provides several convenient functions for printing
(Mac) from Macintosh clients.
IEEE1394 Utility This utility solves problems with Windows 2000.
(Win2000)
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal document
(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP, management software and can manage both image data
NT4) converted from paper documents and application files saved in
each client’s PC.
LAN-Fax Driver This software enables you to fax documents directly form your
PC. Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to be
installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)
B147/B149/B190 7-8 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
SCANNER
The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM.
Scanner Drivers
• Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003
Scanner Utilities
• Scan Router V2 Lite (Cherry-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP
• Desk Top Binder V2 Lite (Plumeria-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003
Specifications
SM 7-9 B147/B149/B190
SPECIFICATIONS
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
[A]
[I]
[B]
[C]
[H]
[G]
[D]
[E]
B146V902.WMF
[F]
Machine
Item Remarks
Code
Copier B146 C
Platen cover G329 B
One from the two
ARDF B597 A
One from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires one
Booklet finisher B602 I
from [D], [E], and [F]
Punch unit (for B602) B647 Requires [I]
One from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires one
Two-tray finisher B599 G
from [D], [E], and [F]
Punch unit (for B599) B377 Requires [G]
Multi-Bin output tray G306 H One from [G], [H], and [I]
One-tray paper feed unit B601 D
Two-tray paper feed unit B598 F One from the three
LCT B600 E
B147/B149/B190 7-10 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[J]
[F] [I]
[G] [H] B146V903.WMF
[K]
Machine
Item Remarks
Code
IEEE 1284 — A Standard
Distributed with the optional printer/scanner
Ethernet B594 B
for the Asia model
IEEE 1394 B581 C
USB 2.0 B596 D
One from the four
Wireless LAN B582 E
Bluetooth G377 F
File Format Converter B609 G
Specifications
Standard for the Europe and North America

Printer/Scanner B612 H
models; Optional for other models
Hard Disk Drive — I Standard
Distributed with the optional printer/scanner
256 MB DIMM G332 J
for the Asia model
PostScript 3 G369 K
SM 7-11 B147/B149/B190
SPECIFICATIONS
5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
5.1 ARDF
Paper Size/Weight:
Size A3 to B6, DLT to HLT
Simplex
Weight 40 to 128 g/m2 (11 to 34 lb.)
Size A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Duplex
Weight 50 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)
Table Capacity: 80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Original Standard Rear left corner
Position:
Separation: Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Supported Magnification
Ratios:
Copy 50 to 200 %
Color 32.6 to 200 %
Fax
Black & white 48.9 to 200 %
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption: 60 W or less
Dimensions (W × D × H): 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4” x 20.4” x 5.9”)
Weight: 12 kg
B147/B149/B190 7-12 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)
Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Paper Feed System: FRR system
Paper Height Detection: 3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main unit)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 172 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 6.8")
Weight 18 kg (39.7 lb.)
5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Paper Height Detection: 3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)
5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

Paper Size: A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Tray Capacity: 2000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Specifications
Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near End)
SM 7-13 B147/B149/B190
SPECIFICATIONS
5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT

Print Paper Size: No punch mode:
A3/11" x 17" to A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
Punch mode:
2 holes: A3/11" x 17" to A4/81/2" x 11" (SEF)
A4/81/2" x 11" to A5 (LEF)
3 holes: A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (North Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Staple mode:
A3/11" x 17" to B5/81/2" x 11"
Paper Weight: No punch mode:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Punch mode:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Staple mode:
64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 23 lb.)
Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled
Tray Capacity: Upper tray:
500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B5, A5 (LEF)
250 sheets: 11" x 17", A3, 81/2" x 14", B4
Lower tray (default mode – stapled output only goes to
tray 2):
2000 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",
81/2" x 11" (SEF)
500 sheets: A5 (LEF)
Lower tray (multi-tray staple mode – stapled output can
go to either tray):
1500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",
81/2" x 11" (SEF)
500 sheets: A5 (LEF)
Staple capacity: Single size:
50 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B5
30 sheets: A3, B4, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
Mixed size:
30 sheets: A4 (LEF) & A3, B5 (LEF) & B4,
81/2" x 11" (LEF) & 11" x 17"
Staple position: 7 positions
1-staple: 4 positions (Top Left, Top Right,
Top Left-Oblique, Top Right-Oblique)
2-staples: 3 positions (Left, Top, Right)
B147/B149/B190 7-14 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)

Power consumption: 48 W
Weight Without punch unit: 53 kg (116.9 lb.)
With punch unit: 55 Kg (121.3 lb.)
5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER

Paper Size: A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT
Booklet Paper Size: A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF
Paper Weight: Stack/Sort mode:
60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lb.)
Staple mode:
64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb.)
Booklet mode:
64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 21 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 1,000 sheets: A4, LT, B5
500 sheets: A3, B4, DLT, LG
Booklet Tray Capacity: 2 to 5 sheets/booklet: 20
6 to 10 sheets/booklet: 10
Staple capacity: 30 sheets
Booklet capacity: 10 sheets
Staple position: 3 positions (excluding booklet mode)
1-staple: 2 positions (Top right, Top left)
2-staples: 1 positions (Left)
Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)
Specifications
SM 7-15 B147/B149/B190
SPECIFICATIONS
5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY

Number of Bins 2
Paper Size Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)
Paper Weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Stack Capacity Tray 1: 100 sheets
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.) Tray 2: 100 sheets (A4/smaller than 81/2" x 11")
250 sheets (B4/81/2" x 14")
B147/B149/B190 7-16 SM
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
B597
ARDF B597
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ................................................................................ 2
1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER...................................................................... 2
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT ................................................................................ 3
1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH
SENSORS ........................................................................................................... 4
1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS .................................................................. 5
1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER ............................................................................... 5
1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS ...................................................... 6
1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR/PICK-UP HP
SENSOR ............................................................................................................. 6
1.10 TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR ..................................... 7
1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH ....................... 8
1.12 EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................................... 9
1.13 STAMP SOLENOID.................................................................................... 9
1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................................. 9
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................10
2.1 TIMING CHARTS ....................................................................................... 10
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE ............................... 10
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE .............................. 11
2.2 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................... 12
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................13
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 13
3.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 13
3.3 FUSES ....................................................................................................... 13
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ..........................................................14

4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS ................................................................................ 14
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.................................................................... 16
4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM ......................................................................... 16
4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ........................................................ 18
4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM ............................................................ 19
4.4.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ........................................................... 19
4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION ..................................................... 20
4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES ............................. 20
4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................... 21
4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS............................................................. 21
4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ........................................................... 22
4.6 STAMP ....................................................................................................... 23
SM i B597
COVERS
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
1.1 COVERS
[B]
[C] [D]
[A]
B597R110.WMF
[F]
[E]
B597R111.WMF
[A]: Front cover ( x 2)

[B]: Rear cover ( x 2)
[C]: Top cover ( x 1,  x 2)
[D]: Original tray ( x 1,  x 1)
[E]: Platen sheet (Velcro pads)
[F]: Original exit tray ( x 2). Slide to the right and then pull out.
CAUTION
The hinge of the ARDF is spring-loaded and becomes much lighter with all
the covers removed. After removing all the covers, lay a heavy book on the
front right corner of the ARDF to prevent it from springing up
unexpectedly.
SM 1 B597
ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT [A]

Open the top cover.
[A]: Original feed unit
Press it toward you on its shaft to
release and lift out.
B597R101.WMF
1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER

Original feed unit (! 1.2)
[A]: Pick-up roller ( x 1)
[A] B597R102.WMF
B597 2 SM
ORIGINAL FEED BELT
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
[B]
[A]
B597R103.WMF [C]
[D]
B597R104.WMF
Original feed unit and original pick-up roller (! 1.2, 1.3)

[A]: Shaft ( x 1)
NOTE: Before removing the shaft, note carefully the positioning of the spring
[B]. This must be reset during re-installation.
[C]: Feed belt cover (Timing belt, gear, shaft, springs x 2)
NOTE: Do not lose the springs.
[D]: Original feed belt
SM 3 B597
SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/
REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS
1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/
REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS
[A]
[F]
[E] [C]
B597R105.WMF [B]
[D]
B597R106.WMF
Open the top cover.

[A]: Upper original guide ( x 3).
[B]: Skew correction sensor ( x 1)
[C]: Interval sensor ( x 1)
[D]: Registration sensor ( x 1)
[E]: Original width sensor bracket ( x 1,  x 4)
[F]: Original width sensors
B597 4 SM
ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS
1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
Raise the original table.
[A]: Lower cover of original tray ( x 4) [B]
[B]: Original length sensor-1 ( x 1)
[C]: Original length sensor-2 ( x 1)
[C]
[A] B597R107.WMF
1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER

[A]
[A]: Separation roller cover
[B]: Separation roller ( x 1)
[B]
B597R108.WMF
SM 5 B597
INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS
1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS

Rear cover. (! 0) [C]
[A]: Lower the original stopper by rotating
the pick-up motor [B]
[D]
[B]: Feed guide plate ( x 4, stepped [E]
screw)
NOTE: Raise the original tray before

you re-install the paper feed guide.
Separation roller, torque limiter ( x 1) (!
1.7)
[C]: Bracket ( x 1,  x 1)
[D]: Inverter sensor ( x 1) B597R109.WMF
[A]
[E]: Original set sensor ( x 1)
1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP

SENSOR/PICK-UP HP SENSOR
Rear cover (! 0) [B]
[A]: Pick-up motor ( x 1,  x 2, Timing [C]
belt)
[B]: Sensor bracket ( x 2,  x 1)
[C]: Pick-up HP sensor [A]
[D]: Original stopper HP sensor [D]
B597R114.WMF
B597 6 SM
TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR
1.10 TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
[A]
B597R113.WMF
[C]
[D]
[B]
B597R112.WMF
Rear cover (! 0)
[A]: Pick-up roller assembly ( x 1,  x 3,  x 3)
[B]: Motor bracket ( x 3,  x 2, Timing belt x 2)
[C]: Transport motor ( x 2, Spring x 1)
[D]: Inverter motor ( x 2)
SM 7 B597
FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH
1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER

CLUTCH
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B597R115.WMF
Rear cover (! 0)
[A]: Motor bracket ( x 5,  x 1)
[B]: Feed motor ( x 2)
[C]: Clutch stopper ( x 1)
[D]: Skew correction roller clutch ( x 1)
B597 8 SM
EXIT SENSOR
1.12 EXIT SENSOR
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
[B]
Document
Open the ARDF.
[A]
[A]: Pull the platen sheet off halfway.
[B]: Open the exit guide plate.
[C]: Exit guide plate cover ( x 2)
[D]: Exit sensor ( x 1,  x 1)
[C]
[D]
1.13 STAMP SOLENOID B597R116.WMF
Rear cover (! 0)
[A]
Open exit guide plate (! 1.12)
[A]: Exit guide plate cover ( x 1)
[B]: Stamp solenoid ( x 1,  x 1)
[B]
B597R201.WMF
1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD

Rear cover (! 0) [A]
[A]: Controller board ( x 4, all )
B597R202.WMF
SM 9 B597
TIMING CHARTS
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 TIMING CHARTS
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE
0 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 0 500 1000 1500 2000 (ms)
RXD
TXD
ON
Original Set Sensor
OFF
CCW 1600 pps

Pick-up Motor OFF
CW 1600 pps 1600 pps
ON
Original Stopper H.P Sn.
OFF
ON
Original Pick-up H.P Sn. OFF
3979 pps
6800 pps
CCW
Feed Motor OFF
CW 4385 pps
ON
Feed Clutch
OFF
ON
Skew Correction Sn.
OFF
Interval Sn. ON
OFF
Registration Sn. ON
OFF
3433 pps
8268 pps
Transport Motor CCW
OFF
DF Gate OFF
ON
Exit Sn. ON
OFF
ON
Inverter Motor
OFF
JAM6 JAM7
JAM5
JAM4
JAM3
JAM2
JAM1
B597T900.WMF
B597 10 SM
TIMING CHARTS
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
0 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
RXD
TXD
ON
Original Set Sensor
OFF
CCW 1600 pps
Pick-up Motor OFF
CW 1600 pps 1600 pps
ON
Original Stopper H.P Sn.
OFF
ON
Original Pick-up H.P Sn.
OFF
CCW 6800 pps

3979 pps
Feed Motor OFF
CW 4385 pps
ON
Feed Clutch
OFF
ON
Skew Correction Sn.
OFF
ON
Interval Sn.
OFF
Registration Sn. ON
OFF
3433 pps
8268 pps
Transport Motor CCW
OFF
DF Gate OFF
ON
Exit Sn. ON
OFF
CCW 2322 pps

Inverter Motor OFF
CW 5138 pps
73 mm 73 mm
Inverter Sol. ON
OFF
Inverter Sn. ON
OFF
JAM9
JAM8
B597T901.WMF
SM 11 B597
JAM DETECTION
2.2 JAM DETECTION

1 2 3
B597T905.WMF
6 5 4
1. Registration sensor 4. Inverter sensor

2. Interval sensor 5. Exit sensor
3. Skew correction sensor 6. Scanning position
Jam Site Cause

Original stopper HP Original stopper home position could not be detected within 1000 ms
sensor (Jam 1) after the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating counter-
clockwise.
Pick-up HP sensor Pick-up roller home position could not be detected within 1000 ms
(Jam 2) after the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating clockwise.
Skew correction The skew correction sensor does not turn on after the feed motor
sensor jam (Jam 3) has fed the original 185 mm.
Transport jam The interval sensor does not turn on after the feed motor has fed the
(Jam 4) original 141 mm.
Registration sensor The registration sensor does not turn on after the interval sensor
(Jam 5) turned on and the original has been fed 117 mm.
Exit jam (Jam 6) The exit sensor does not turn on after the transport motor has fed
the original 124 mm.
Exit jam (Jam 7) The exit sensor does not turn off after the exit sensor turned on and
the original has been fed 294 mm.
Inverter sensor jam The inverter sensor does not turn on after the inverter motor has fed
(Jam 8) the original 100 mm.
Interval sensor jam The interval sensor does not turn on after the inverter motor has fed
(Jam 9) the original 339 mm.
B597 12 SM
DIP SWITCHES
3. SERVICE TABLES
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
DPS101
Description
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Normal operating mode, with/without stamp.
0 0 0 1 Not used
0 0 1 0 Not used
0 0 1 1 Not used
0 1 0 0 Feed motor rotation (pull-out mode) 6800 pps (1-2 phase)
0 1 0 1 Feed motor rotation (feed mode) 4385 pps (1-2 phase)
0 1 1 0 Transport motor rotation 8268 pps (2W1-2 phase)
0 1 1 1 Inverter motor rotation 7720 pps (1-2 phase)
1 0 0 0 Free run: one-sided original 100% (color mode)
1 0 1 1 Free run: one-sided original 100% (b/w mode)
1 1 0 0 Free run: two-sided original 100% (color mode)
1 1 0 1 Free run: two-sided original 100% (b/w mode)
1 1 1 0 Free run: one-sided (fax mode) 48% (b/w mode)
1 1 1 1 Free run: one-sided (mixed original size mode) 100% (color mode)
3.2 TEST POINTS

No. Label Monitored Signal
TP100 (GND) Ground
TP101 (Vcc) +5V
TP103 (TXD) TXD to the copier
TP104 (RXD) RXD from the copier
3.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU101 Protects the 24 V line.
SM 13 B597
MAIN COMPONENTS
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS
18 1 2 3
16 17 4
15
14
13
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 B597D103.WMF
1 Pick-up roller 10 Exit sensor

2 Original tray 11 Idle roller 3
3 Original length sensor 1 12 Idle roller 2
4 Original length sensor 2 13 Transport roller
5 Reverse table 14 Registration sensor
6 Inverter roller 15 Idle roller 1
7 Junction gate 16 Original width sensor
8 Separation roller 17 Skew correction roller
9 Exit roller 18 Feed belt
Pick-up Mechanism: Picks up the originals for scanning.

Feed/Separation Mechanism: Comprised of the feed belt and separation roller,
feeds and separates the originals, and corrects skew.
Original Size Detection Sensors: Comprised of 4 width sensors and 2 length
sensors, detect the sizes of the originals.
Original Transport Mechanism: Comprised of the transport roller, ADF exposure
glass, and exit roller.
Original Reverse/Exit Mechanism: Exit/junction gate.
B597 14 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
1
11 2
3
4
10 5
6
8
7
B597D102.WMF
1 Feed motor 7 Inverter roller

2 Feed belt 8 Exit roller
3 Pick-up roller 9 Separation roller
4 Pick-up motor 10 Transport roller
5 Transport motor 11 Skew correction roller
6 Inverter motor
SM 15 B597
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM
&
%
$
" [B] B5
[C] LG
[A]
B597D110.WMF
The original size is detected by four original width sensors [A] and two original
length sensors, [B] and [C].
The machine determines the original width when the leading edge of the original
activates the registration sensor.
The ARDF detects the original size by combining the readings of the four width
sensors and two length sensors, as shown in the table on the next page.
B597 16 SM
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
Width Sensor Length Sensor
Size (Width x Length)
& % $ " B5 LG
1
A3 L* (297 x 420 mm) ON ON ON ON ON ON
B4 L (257 x 364 mm) ON ON - - ON ON
A4 L (210 x 297 mm) ON - - - ON -
A4 S*2 (297 x 210 mm) ON ON ON ON - -
B5 L (182 x 257 mm) - - - - ON -
B5 S (257 x 182 mm) ON ON - - - -
A5 L (148 x 210 mm) - - - - - -
A5 S (210 x 148 mm) ON - - - - -
B6 L (128 x 182 mm) - - - - - -
B6 S (182 x 128 mm) - - - - - -
DLT L (11" x 17") ON ON ON - ON ON
11" x 15" L ON ON ON - ON ON
10" x 14" L ON ON - - ON ON
LG L (81/2" x 14") ON - - - ON ON
F4 L (81/2" x 13") ON - - - ON ON
F L (8" x 13") ON - - - ON ON
LT L (8.5" x 11") ON - - - ON -
LT S (11" x 8.5") ON ON ON - - -
71/4" x 101/2" L - - - - ON -
101/2" x 71/4" S ON ON ON - - -
8" x 10" L ON - - - ON -
HLT L 51/2" x 81/2" - - - - - -
HLT S 81/2" x 51/2" ON - - - - -
267 x 390 mm ON ON ON - ON ON
195 x 267 mm ON - - - ON -
267 x 195 mm ON ON ON - - -
*1 L: Lengthways
*2 S: Sideways
ON: Paper present
SM 17 B597
4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE

This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size
mode.
Because this ADF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original
document width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but
the document length detection method is different. Therefore, the scanning speed
is slightly slower.
Document length detection

From when the registration sensor switches on until the interval sensor switches
off, the CPU counts the transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines
the length of the original.
Feed-in cycle
When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the
image cannot be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the
document length has been accurately detected. The length must be determined
before the image is scanned.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Centering
Erase Center/Border
Booklet
Image Repeat
An original follows this path during transport:

1. Document length detection ! Scanning glass ! Inverter table
2. Inverter table ! Scanning glass ! Inverter table (restores original order)
3. Inverter table ! Scanning glass (image scanned) ! Exit tray
Normal feed-in
In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the rate of
reduction/enlargement has been determined, the originals are scanned normally. In
order to store the scanned images, a large area of memory (the detected document
width x 432 mm) is prepared. Next, only the portion of the image up to the detected
document length is read from memory and printed.
B597 18 SM
ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM
4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
4.4.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
[G] [F]
[B] [E]
[D]
[A]
[C]
B597D109.WMF
[I]
[H] B597D505.WMF
When the original is put on the original table, it contacts the original stopper [A] and
pushes the actuator [B] out of the original set sensor [C].
When Start  is pressed, the pick-up motor [D] turns on and the original stopper
cam [E] rotates. The original stopper lowers and releases the original.
Next, the pick-up roller cam [F] lowers the pick-up roller, and then the feed motor
[G (at this location but not shown in the drawing)] turns on to feed the top sheet of
paper. After being fed from the pick-up roller, the top sheet is separated from the
stack by the separation roller [H] and the feed belt [I].
SM 19 B597
ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM
4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION
[A] [B]
[C]
B597D202.WMF
This mechanism is the same as the skew correction used by the registration roller
in the main machine.
The feed motor and the skew correction clutch control the skew correction roller.
Immediately after separation, the skew correction sensor [A] detects the leading
edge of the original. The feed belt [B] moves the paper slightly until it presses
against the skew correction roller [C] and buckles slightly to correct any skew.
4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES

[A]
B597D303.WMF
After performing skew correction, the feed motor runs at a speed higher than its
original speed in order for the next original to catch up to the one ahead of it. This
reduces the gap between the leading edge of the next original with the trailing edge
of the one ahead.
When the leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [A], the feed
motor slows to match the speed of paper transport.
B597 20 SM
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
[C]
[A]
[B] B597D104.WMF
The transport motor drives the transport roller [A] and the exit roller [B]. When the
leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [C], the transport motor
rotates the transport roller. The transport roller then feeds the original through
scanning area. After scanning, the original is fed out by the exit roller to the exit
tray.
SM 21 B597
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS

[B]
Shortly after the transport motor has been
turned on, the inverter solenoid is
activated and junction gate [A] opens. The
original is then scanned and transported
towards the reverse table [B].
B597D105.WMF
[A]
[E]
Shortly after the original exit sensor [C]
detects the trailing edge of the original, the
inverter solenoid turns off and the junction
gate [D] closes.
Next, the inverter motor turns on and the
inverter roller [E] starts rotating to feed the
original from the reverse table.
[C] B597D107.WMF
[D]
Then the original is fed to the transport roller

and the scanning area [F] (where the
reverse side is scanned).
[F] B597D106.WMF
After scanning the reverse side of the original, [G]

the original is then sent to the reverse table
[G] a second time and turned over. This
ensures that the double-sided original will be
properly stacked in the correct order, front
side down, in the original exit tray [H]. [H]
B597D108.WMF
B597 22 SM
STAMP
4.6 STAMP
Auto Reverse
Feeder B597
Document
[C]
[A]
[B]
B597D201.WMF
NOTE: This function is only for fax mode.

The stamp [A] is located between the transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C].
When the original reaches the stamp, the transport motor stops and the stamp
solenoid turns on if the page is sent successfully (immediate transmission) or
stored successfully (memory transmission). After stamping, the ARDF feed motor
re-starts to feed out the document.
NOTE: The position of the stamp can be adjusted with the Stamp Position
Adjustment SP mode.
SM 23 B597
ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
B601
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................ 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 4
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................6

2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 6
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................... 7
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 8
SM i B601
COVER REPLACEMENT

1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
[A]
B601R102.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)
Paper Feed
One-Tray
B601
Unit
SM 1 B601
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
[B]
[A] [C]
B601R101.WMF
1. Paper tray
2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)
3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1)
B601 2 SM
PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
[B]
[A]
B601R103.WMF
1. Rear cover (! 1.1)

2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1,  x 3)
3. Main board [B] ( x 2)
Paper Feed
One-Tray
B601
Unit
SM 3 B601
TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 1,  x 2)
[A] B601R104.WMF
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

2. Bracket [B] ( x 1)
3. Bushing
[B]
4. Paper feed clutch [C]
[C] B601R105.WMF
B601 4 SM
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
B601R106.WMF
1. Right cover [A]

2. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2,  x 1)
Paper Feed
One-Tray
B601
Unit
SM 5 B601
OVERVIEW
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2
B601D001.WMF
1. Pick-up Roller
2. Paper Feed Roller
3. Relay Roller
4. Separation Roller
5. Tray
B601 6 SM
OVERVIEW
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
7
11
14
12
13
B601D101.WMF
1. Paper Size Switch 1 8. Lift Sensor

2. Paper Size Switch 2 9. Paper Feed Clutch
3. Paper Size Switch 3 10. Vertical Guide Switch
4. Paper Size Switch 4 11. Tray Lift Motor
5. Main Board 12. Relay Sensor
6. Paper Feed Motor 13. Paper Height 2 Sensor
7. Paper End Sensor 14. Paper Height 1 Sensor
Paper Feed
One-Tray
B601
Unit
SM 7 B601
OVERVIEW
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
B601D102.WMF
1. Paper Feed Motor

2. Paper Feed Clutch
3. Paper Feed Roller
4. Separation Roller
5. Pick-up Roller
B601 8 SM
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
B598
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................ 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES........................................................................... 4
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................6

2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 6
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................... 7
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 8
SM i B598
COVER REPLACEMENT

1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
[A]
B598R102.WMF
SM 1 B598
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
[B]
[A] [C]
B598R101.WMF
1. Paper tray
3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1)
B598 2 SM
PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
[B]
[A]
B598R103.WMF

2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1,  x 3)
3. Main board [B] ( x 2)
SM 3 B598
TRAY LIFT MOTORS
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS

1. Rear cover (! 1.1) [A]
2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 1,  x 2)
B598R104.WMF
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

[A]
2. Paper feed clutches [A] ( x 1, 1
bracket, 1 bushing)
B598R105.WMF
B598 4 SM
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
[A]
B598R107.WMF
[B]
B598R108.WMF
1. Vertical transport cover [A] (1 hook)

2. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2,  x 1)
SM 5 B598
OVERVIEW
2.1 OVERVIEW
1 2
10
3
4
9 5
6
7
8 B598D001.WMF
1. Upper Pick-up Roller 6. Lower Paper Feed Roller

2. Upper Paper Feed Roller 7. Lower Separation Roller
3. Upper Relay Roller 8. Lower Pick-up Roller
4. Upper Separation Roller 9. Lower Tray
5. Lower Relay Roller 10. Upper Tray
B598 6 SM
OVERVIEW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
9
10
11
25
12
13
24
14
23
15
22 16
21
17
20
19 18
B598D101.WMF
1. Paper Size Switch 1 14. Vertical Guide Switch

2. Paper Size Switch 2 15. Lower Lift Sensor
3. Paper Size Switch 3 16. Lower Tray Lift Motor
4. Paper Size Switch 4 17. Lower Paper End Sensor
5. Main Board 18. Lower Relay Sensor
6. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor 19. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor
7. Paper Feed Motor 20. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor
8. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor 21. Upper Relay Sensor
9. Upper Lift Sensor 22. Paper Size Switch 4
10. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 23. Paper Size Switch 2
11. Upper Paper End Sensor 24. Paper Size Switch 3
12. Upper Tray Lift Motor 25. Paper Size Switch 1
13. Lower Paper Feed Clutch
SM 7 B598
OVERVIEW
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
11
2
10
6
4
B598D102.WMF
1. Tray Motor 7. Lower Pick-up Roller

2. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 8. Upper Separation Roller
3. Lower Paper Feed Clutch 9. Upper Relay Roller
4. Lower Relay Roller 10. Upper Paper Feed Roller
5. Lower Separation Roller 11. Upper Pick-up Roller
6. Lower Paper Feed Roller
B598 8 SM
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
B600
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME.................................... 1
1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ........................................................................ 1
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE.......................................................... 2
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR ............................................................ 3
1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4
1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH.................................. 5
1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 6
1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT...................................................................................... 7
1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS ......... 8
1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER ...................................... 9
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 10

2.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 10
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................ 10
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................. 11
2.2 PAPER FEED............................................................................................. 12
2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE .................... 13
2.4 TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................. 14
2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION................................................................... 15
2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM............................................. 16
2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION................................................... 17
SM i B600
DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME

1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME
1. To draw the tray out, press the

stopper [A] on the guide rail.
2. To install the tray, set the tray on the
guide rails, keep the tray level, and
push the tray in.
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
[A]
B600R101.WMF
1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR

1. Pull out the large capacity tray. [B]
2. Left tray rear side fence [A] ( x 2) [C]
3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x 1)

[D] [A]
4. Connector of the rear fence HP
sensor [C]
5. Rear fence HP sensor [D] ( x 1)
B600R102.WMF
SM 1 B600
CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE

[A]
[B]
A4
A4
Lt
Lt B600R103.WMF
1. Screws [A] [B]

2. Change the position of the side fences.
3. Change the position of the rear fence HP sensor (! 1.2).
4. Before securing the right tray side fence, load the paper in the right tray, and
adjust the fence.
B600 2 SM
LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR
[B]
[A]
[C]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
B600R104.WMF
1. Pull out the large capacity tray.

2. Left tray side fence [A] ( x 2)
3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x1)
4. Left tray paper end sensor [C] ( x 1)
SM 3 B600
TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR
[A]
B600R105.WMF
[B]
B600R106.WMF

2. Tray lift motor [B] ( x 3,  x 1)
B600 4 SM
TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
[C]
[A]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
[B]
B600R107.WMF

2. Tray motor [A] ( x 6,  x 1)
4. Stack transport clutch [C] ( x 2, 2 bushings, 1 gear)
SM 5 B600
PAPER FEED CLUTCH
1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH
[B]
[A]
B600R108.WMF

2. Bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Bushing
4. Paper feed clutch [B]
B600 6 SM
PAPER FEED UNIT
1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT
[A]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
[C]
[B]
B600R109.WMF
1. Stack transport clutch (! 1.6)

2. Paper feed clutch (! 1.7)
3. Paper feed unit cable [A]
4. Open the vertical transport guide plate [B].
5. Paper feed unit [C] ( x 2)
SM 7 B600
UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS
1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND

RELAY SENSORS
[A] [C]
[B]
[D]
B600R111.WMF
1. Paper feed unit (! 1.8)

2. Sensors
• Upper limit [A]
• Relay [B] ( x 1, 1 bracket)
• Right tray paper end [C]
NOTE: To remove the upper limit [A] or paper end sensor[C], press the lever [D]
and hold it down.
B600 8 SM
PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER
1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER
[C]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
[A] [B]
B600R110.WMF
1. Paper tray unit

3. Separation roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Feed roller [C] ( x 1)
NOTE: If the rollers are incorrectly installed, the one-way clutch does not work.
SM 9 B600
OVERVIEW

2.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
11
B600D001.WMF
13 12
1. Paper Height Sensors 5 8. Relay Roller

2. Paper Height Sensors 4 9. Separation Roller
3. Paper Height Sensors 1 10. Paper Height Sensors 2
4. Pick-up Roller 11. Paper Height Sensors 3
5. Upper Limit Sensor 12. Lower Limit Sensor
6. Paper Feed Roller 13. Left Paper End Sensor
7. Relay Sensor
B600 10 SM
OVERVIEW
5 6 7
8
4 9
3
2 10
11
1
12
13
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
14
15
16
17
B600D101.WMF
20 19 18
1. End Fence Home Position Sensor 11. Upper Limit Sensor

2. Left Tray Paper End Sensor 12. Paper Feed Clutch
3. Paper Height Sensor 4 13. Paper Height Sensor 2
4. Paper Height Sensor 5 14. Right Tray Paper End Sensor
5. Paper Size Sensor 15. Paper Height Sensor 3
6. Main Board 16. Vertical Guide Switch
7. Side Fence Open/Closed Sensor 17. Lower Limit Sensor
8. Tray Sensor 18. Tray Lift Motor
9. Tray Motor 19. Relay Sensor
10. Paper Height Sensors 1 20. Stack Transport Clutch
SM 11 B600
PAPER FEED
2.2 PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
[C]
B600D102.WMF
• This product uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism.

• The paper feed unit consists of the pick-up roller [A], paper feed roller [B],
separation roller [C], and relay roller.
• There is a torque limiter (ferrite powder type) in the back of the separation roller.
B600 12 SM
SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER

RELEASE
[C]
[E]
[A]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
B600D107.WMF
[B]
[E]
[A]
[D]
B600D108.WMF
To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the
separation and pickup rollers are set so that they release automatically.
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away
from the paper feed roller [C] and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position.
When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. This
causes the pick-up roller to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and
the separation roller to move up and contact the paper feed roller.
SM 13 B600
TRAY LIFT
2.4 TRAY LIFT
[F]
[G] [E]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B600D103.WMF
[B]
When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray sensor on the back face
turns on and the tray lift motor [A] starts. The base plate lift shaft [B] is coupled to
the lift motor at shaft [C], so the base plate of the tray is lifted. After a short while,
the top of the paper stack contacts the pick-up roller and lifts it up.
When this occurs, the actuator enters the upper limit sensor, the sensor turns off
and the lift motor stops. When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller is
gradually lowered, and the actuator leaves the upper limit sensor (turning the
sensor on). When this happens, the lift motor begins turning again. The tray will
then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit sensor (turning the sensor off
again).
When the tray is removed from the printer, the coupling between the lift motor and
base plate lift shaft is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free fall
(using a damper [D] to slow the fall and prevent damage).
B600 14 SM
NEAR END/END DETECTION
2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION

This tray holds two stacks of paper, so the machine needs to monitor the status of
both these stacks. There are seven sensors to do this.
In the right tray (paper feed side), three height sensors ([E] in the diagram on the
previous page) measure the height of the stack, and an end sensor detects when
all the paper is used up. As the amount of paper remaining in the tray decreases,
the base plate rises and the actuator activates the paper height sensors. When
paper runs out in the right tray, the stack in the left tray is moved across to the right
tray.
There are also two height sensors ([F] in the diagram on the previous page) and an
end sensor in the left tray (paper storage side) ([G] in the diagram on the previous
Capacity Tray
page). When there is no paper in both trays, paper end is detected.
Large
The machine determines the amount of remaining paper based on the sensor
B600
outputs, as shown in the following table.
Amount of paper
100% 75% 50%
Paper Height Sensor 1 " " " " " " $ " "
Paper Height Sensor 2 " " " " " $ – " $
Paper Height Sensor 3 " " $ " " – – $ –
Right Tray Paper End Sensor $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Paper Height Sensor 4 " " " $ $ " " " "
Paper Height Sensor 5 " $ " $ $ " " $ $
Left Tray Paper End Sensor " " " " $ " " " "
Amount of paper
25% Near-end End
Paper Height Sensor 1 $ " " " " $ $ –
Paper Height Sensor 2 – " $ " $ – – –
Paper Height Sensor 3 – $ – $ – – – –
Right Tray Paper End Sensor $ $ $ $ $ $ $ "
Paper Height Sensor 4 " $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Paper Height Sensor 5 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Left Tray Paper End Sensor " " " $ $ " $ $
Right tray paper end sensor: " = Low (no paper), $ = High (paper present)
Other sensors: " = Low (paper present), $ = High (no paper)
The following diagram is the sensor layout, as viewed from the front.
Paper Storage Side Paper Feed Side
Paper End
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 5 Paper Height
Sensor2
Paper Height
Sensor 4 Paper Height
Sensor 3
Paper End
Sensor 2
B600D112.WMF
SM 15 B600
PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM
2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM

[E] [D] [B]
[C]
[A]
B600D104.WMF
When the paper in the right tray is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack transport
clutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from the left
tray to the right tray.
While the stack is being moved, it pushes the side fence aside, and the side fence
open/closed sensor [D] detects that the fence is open.
After the stack has been moved across, a spring in the side fence moves the side
fence back, and the sensor detects that the fence is closed. Then, the tray motor
reverses until end fence home position sensor [E] is deactivated.
B600 16 SM
RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION
2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION
[A]
[B]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
[C]
B600D106.WMF
[E] [D]
B600D111.WMF
The paper end sensor [A] detects when copy paper in the right tray runs out.
When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the paper end feeler [B] and
causes the actuator to enter the sensor. When paper runs out, the feeler drops and
the actuator leaves the sensor, and the machine detects that there is no paper in
the tray.
When the tray is being pulled out, the lever [E] lifts the pick-up roller and this also
lifts up the feeler.
SM 17 B600
TWO-TRAY FINISHER
B599
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................... 1
1.1.2 INNER COVER.................................................................................... 1
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................................... 2
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................ 2
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR ................. 3
1.5 STAPLER TRAY........................................................................................... 3
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ....... 4
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR....................................................................... 5
1.8 LIFT MOTORS ............................................................................................. 5
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR ............................................................................... 7
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS......................................................... 8
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR........................................................ 8
1.12 STAPLER UNIT .......................................................................................... 8
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR.......................................................... 9
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR ..................................................................................... 9
1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS .............................................................................. 9
1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR............. 10
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR .................................................................. 10
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH........................................................ 10
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD ......................................................................... 11
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ............................................... 11
2. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 12
2.1 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................... 12
3. SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 13
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS............................................................................ 13
3.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 13
3.3 FUSES........................................................................................................ 13
. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 14

4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 14
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
4.3 JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16
4.4 TRAY SHIFTING ........................................................................................ 17
4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS............................................................. 17
Tray 1 (Upper Tray) ............................................................................... 17
Tray 2 (Lower Tray) ............................................................................... 18
4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS .............................................................. 19
4.5.1 TRAY 1 .............................................................................................. 19
Introduction ............................................................................................ 19
SM i B599
Normal and sort/stack modes ................................................................ 19
Staple Mode........................................................................................... 20
Tray 1 release mechanism..................................................................... 21
4.5.2 TRAY 2 .............................................................................................. 22
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM ............................................................... 23
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 24
Vertical Paper Alignment .......................................................................24
Horizontal Paper Alignment ...................................................................24
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM ............................................................................ 25
4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT..................................................................... 25
Stapler Rotation ..................................................................................... 25
Side-to-Side Movement .........................................................................25
4.7.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 26
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT ......................................................... 27
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 28
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ........................................................... 28
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ........................................................ 29
B599 ii SM
COVERS

1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS
[A] [D]
1. Top cover [A] ( x 4)
NOTE: If the shift tray below is [B]
blocking the screw hole,
remove the shift tray.
2. Bracket [B] ( x 1) [C]
3. Front door [C]
4. Rear cover [D] ( x 4)
5. Right cover [E] ( x 2)
[E] B599R151.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
1.1.2 INNER COVER
1. Front cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL

COVERS)
2. Inner cover [A] ( x 3, tabs [B] x 3)
[A]
[B]
B599R102.WMF
[B]
SM 1 B599
POSITIONING ROLLER
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

1. Open the front door.
2. Positioning roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Belt [B]
[B]
[A]
B599R103.WMF
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR

[B]
[C]
1. Top cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS) [A]
2. Open transport door [A]
3. Bracket [B] ( x 1, ( x 1)
4. Tray 1 exit sensor [C]
B599R104.WMF
B599 2 SM
ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE

SENSOR
1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 1)
2. Entrance sensor [B] ( x 1) [B]
3. Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket [C] ( x
1,  x 1) [A]
4. Stapler tray entrance sensor [D]
[C]
[D] B599R105.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
1.5 STAPLER TRAY
B599
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
1. External covers, front door, inner cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS, 1.1.2
INNER COVER)
2. Two clamps [A]
3. Harnesses [B] ( x 8)
4. Stapler tray [C] ( x 2 [D],  x 2 [E])
NOTE: At the front of the finisher, pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out.
SM 3 B599
UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER

LIMIT SWITCH
[B]
[D]
B599R201.WMF
[A]
[F] [C]
[E]
[G]
B599R109.WMF
[H]
B599R110.WMF
1. External covers (! 1.1.1)

2. Place one hand under tray 2 (the lower tray), press in on the gear [A] to release
the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.
3. Place one hand under tray 1 (the upper tray), press in on the gear [B] to release
the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.
4. Tray 1 back fence [C] ( x 4)
5. Sensor stay [D] ( x 2, ( x 4)
6. Plastic bracket [E] ( x 1)
7. Stack height sensors [F]
8. Metal bracket [G] ( x 1)
9. Upper limit switch [H]
B599 4 SM
EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR

1. Tray 1 back fence (! 1.6)
2. Exit guide plate motor [A] ( x2, 
x1)
NOTE: Disengage the shaft of the exit
guide plate motor from the
ring.
B599R111.WMF
[A]
Two-Tray
Finisher
1.8 LIFT MOTORS
B599
[A]
1. Top cover and rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Tray 1 back fence [A] (! 1.6)
3. Sensor stay [B] ( x 4)
[B]
B599R203.WMF
SM 5 B599
LIFT MOTORS
4. Motor bracket [C] ( x 3,  x 2)
[C]
B599R204.WMF
5. Tray 1 lift motor [D] ( x 2, drive belt)

6. Tray 2 lift motor [E] ( x 2, drive belt) [D]
[E]
B599R205.WMF
B599 6 SM
LOWER EXIT SENSOR
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR

1. Front door, external and internal
covers. (! 1.1)
2. Exit guide plate motor (! 1.7)
3. Guide plate [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: Pull the shaft toward you
through the round hole.
[A] B599R112.WMF
4. Guide plate exit assembly [B] ( x 1,

 x 1)
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[B] B599R113.WMF
5. Anti-static brush [C] ( x 2) [C]

6. Bracket guide exit [D] ( x 2)
7. Lower exit sensor [E] ( x 1,  x 1)
[E]
[D]
B599R114.WMF
SM 7 B599
LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS
[B] [C]
1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 2)
[A]
4. Feeler [C]
5. Lower stack height sensors [D]
[D]
B599R116.WMF
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR

1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 1)
3. Tray 2 shunt position sensor [B] ( x
1) [B]
[A]
B599R202.WMF
1.12 STAPLER UNIT

1. Open the front door [A]
2. Stapler unit [A] ( x 1,  x 2)
NOTE: Hold the stapler holder [B] with
one hand as you remove the
stapler. Do not twist or rotate
the stapler bracket as you
remove it.
[B]
B599R117.WMF
B599 8 SM
STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR

1. Stapler unit (! 1.12)
[D]
2. Carefully rotate the stapler holder [A].
[C]
3. Stapler cover [B] ( x 1)
4. Sensor bracket [C] ( x 1,  x 1)
5. Stapler rotation HP sensor [D] [B]
[A]
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR B599R118.WMF
1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS

[A]
1. Tray 1 [A] ( x 1)
2. Rear tray cover [B] ( x 1)
Two-Tray
Finisher
[B]
B599
3. Front tray cover [C] ( x 1)
4. Bottom tray cover [D] ( x 2)
[C]
[D]
B599R207.WMF
5. Bottom bracket [E] ( x 3)
[E]
B599R208.WMF
SM 9 B599
TRAY 1 INTERIOR
1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR

[B]
1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)
2. Gear disk [A] ( x 1)
3. Tray shift sensors [B] ( x 1 each).
4. Tray release sensor [C] ( x 1)
[B]
[C]
[A]
B599R210.WMF
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)

2. Motor bracket [A] ( x 3,  x 1)
3. Tray 1 shift motor [B] ( x 3, belt x 1)
[A]
[B] B599R209.WMF
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH
1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)

2. Back fence lock clutch [A] ( x 1,  x
1)
B599R211.WMF
[A]
B599 10 SM
FINISHER MAIN BOARD
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD

1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Main PCB [A] ( x 6, All )
[A]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599R206.WMF
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use the
appropriate SP mode.
To adjust the horizontal position of the holes, use the spacers provided with the
punch unit.
1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Punch unit [A] ( x 3,  x 5)
3. Spacers [B]
The punch position can be adjusted
by up to 4 mm using combinations
of the 3 spacers provided with the
finisher.
[B] [A]
B599R119.WMF
SM 11 B599
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode Jam Content
Shift 1 Shift 2 Staple
Entrance sensor: After the exit sensor in the main machine
! ! ! no detection went off, the entrance sensor did not switch
on for at least 2 s.
Entrance sensor: After the entrance sensor switched on, it did
! ! !
no detection not remain on for at least 150 ms.*1
Upper exit sensor: After the entrance sensor switched on, the
! no detection upper exit sensor did not remain on for at
least 59 pulses. *2
Upper exit sensor: After the upper exit sensor switched on, it
!
jam did not switch off within 150 ms. *1
Lower exit sensor: After the entrance sensor switched on, the
! no detection lower exit sensor did not switch on within 59
pulses. *2
Lower exit sensor: After the lower exit sensor switched on, it did
!
jam not switch off within 150 ms. *1
Stapler tray After the entrance sensor switched off, the
! entrance sensor: stapler tray entrance sensor did not switch
no detection on within 102 pulses.*2
Stapler tray After the stapler tray entrance sensor
! entrance sensor: switched on, it did not switch off within 59
jam pulses.*1
Lower tray exit After the transport motor switched on, the
! sensor: no lower tray exit sensor did not switch on
detection within 1260 ms.
*1
: Timing for A4 L (differs according to paper size).
*2
: Counted by entrance motor pulses because timing differs for feed out.
B599 12 SM
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
DPS101
Mode Description
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Default.
1 1 1 0 Free run. No paper.
0 0 0 1 Transportation See the note below.
NOTE: The following procedure repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.
1) Make sure that the main switch is turned off.
2) Turn on DIP SW101-4 on the main board.
3) Turn on the main switch.
4) After the fisher completes the initialization, turn off DIP SW101-4.
Finisher automatically repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
3.2 TEST POINTS
No. Label Monitored Signal
TP101 GND Ground
TP102 5V 5V
TP103 RXD Received command data
TP104 TXD Transmitted command data
3.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU101 Protects 24 V.
SM 13 B599
GENERAL LAYOUT
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1
8
2
7
4
6
5
B599D118.WMF
1. Upper junction gate 5. Stapler

2. Punch unit (option) 6. Stapler tray
3. Stapler junction gate 7. Tray 2
4. Pre-stack tray 8. Tray 1
Tray junction gate: Directs paper either to the upper or lower exit. In staple mode,
the stack always goes out to the lower exit.
Stapler junction gate: Directs paper either to the lower exit or to the stapler tray.
Pre-stack tray: When stapling multiple prints (A4 LEF, LT LEF, B5 LEF only) in the
staple mode, the first sheet of the second print waits here for the next sheet to feed
while the previous stack is stapled. After the second print is fed, the first and
second sheets are fed together to the pre-stack tray. This delay allows enough time
for the previous stack to be stapled without interrupting paper feed.
Shift trays: Tray 1 (upper) and tray 2 (lower) shift side to side in the sort mode,
and raise and lower to receive ejected prints.
Stapler tray jogger: Employs positioning rollers and jogger fences to align stacks
for stapling.
Punch unit: Punches holes in stacked prints.
B599 14 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
4
3
2
1 5
6
14
13
7
12
11
15
10
16
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
9 8
B599D104.WMF
17
18 B599D103.WMF
1. Tray 1 lift motor 10. Lower transport motor

2. Entrance roller 11. Pre-stack motor
3. Tray 2 lift motor 12. Upper transport motor
4. Upper exit roller 13. Punch motor
5. Tray 1 shift motor 14. Entrance motor
6. Exit guide plate motor 15. Stack feed-out motor
7. Lower exit roller 16. Jogger motor
8. Tray 2 shift motor 17. Stapler motor
9. Exit motor 18. Stapler rotation motor
SM 15 B599
JUNCTION GATES
4.3 JUNCTION GATES

The two junction gates can direct paper to three destinations.
In sort/stack mode for tray 1, the tray junction [A]
solenoid [A] is on, and the prints go to the upper exit
(tray 1 is at the upper exit for sort/stack mode).
B599D205.WMF
In sort/stack mode for tray 2, both the tray junction gate [A]
solenoid [A] and stapler junction gate solenoid [B] are
off, and prints go to the lower exit.
[B]
B599D206.WMF
In staple mode, the tray junction solenoid [A] is off and [A]
the stapler junction gate solenoid [B] is on, and prints go
to the stapler tray.
[B]
B599D207.WMF
B599 16 SM
TRAY SHIFTING
4.4 TRAY SHIFTING

4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS
[F]
[A] [B]
[C]
[D] [E]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599D106.WMF
B599
Tray 1 (Upper Tray)
In sort/stack mode, tray 1 [A] moves from side to side to separate the printed sets.
The tray 1 shift motor [B], inside the shift tray, controls the horizontal position of
tray 1 through the timing belt [C] and gear disk [D].
After one print set is delivered to tray 1, the shift motor turns on, driving the gear
disk and the arm [E], and the tray drive unit moves to one side.
Two shift sensors [F] detect when to stop this side-to-side movement. There is a
cut-out in the gear disk. The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shift
sensors detects the cut-out. Then the shift tray stops.
The next set of prints is then delivered, and the gear disk is turned in the opposite
direction until the other shift sensor is activated.
SM 17 B599
TRAY SHIFTING
Tray 2 (Lower Tray)
[C]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B599D105.WMF
In sort/stack mode, tray 2 [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of prints.
The shift mechanism for tray 2 is similar to that used for tray 1. However, when the
tray 2 shift motor [B] turns on, the arm [D] moves the entire end fence [C] from side
to side (not just the tray).
After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees, the cut-out in the gear disk enters the
tray half-turn sensor [E], and the motor stops. When the next set of prints is
delivered, the motor turns on again, and moves the tray back to its previous
position.
B599 18 SM
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

4.5.1 TRAY 1
[I] [E] [D]
[C]
[H]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[F]
[G]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D204.WMF
Introduction
The tray 1 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 1 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
Normal and sort/stack modes

When the main switch is turned on, the tray is initialized at the upper position. To
do this, the tray is moved up until upper stack height sensor 1 [D] is de-actuated.
During printing, if upper stack height sensor 2 [E] is actuated, the tray 1 lift motor
lowers the tray for a specified time.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator [F] will pass through the tray 1
overflow 1 sensor [G]. When the actuator drops below the sensor (to deactivate the
sensor), the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the
overflow limit.
The upper limit switch for tray 1 [H] prevents the drive gear from being damaged if
the upper stack height sensor 1 should fail. If the tray is raised to the tray
positioning roller [I], the switch will automatically cut the power to the tray 1 lift
motor.
SM 19 B599
Staple Mode
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[G]
[C] [F]
B599D204.WMF
In staple mode, stapled stacks can be delivered to either tray, but they can only go
to the lower exit. So, if tray 1 is selected, tray 1 [A] moves down to the lower paper
exit.
Tray 1 lowers until the actuator [B] enters the tray 1 lower limit sensor [C]. Tray 1
then lifts up until lower stack height sensor 1 [D] is activated.
When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit, tray 2 must be moved down out of
the way. So, tray 2 [E] is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor [F]
detects tray 2 (or the top of the paper stack in tray 2).
The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2
sensor [G]. When this happens, the machine detects that the paper stack height
has exceeded the overflow limit.
B599 20 SM
Tray 1 release mechanism [A]

When tray 1 is selected for staple mode, tray
1 must be moved down to the lower paper
exit. However, to move past the sensors at
the lower exit, the tray must be moved away
from the finisher.
To do this, the tray 1 shift motor turns until
the cut-out in the gear disk enters the tray
release sensor [A]. At this time, the arm [B] [D]
has reached position [C], and is pushing
against the plate [D], in towards the finisher.
However, the plate is fixed, so the tray [B]
moves out away from the finisher.
Then, the tray 1 shift motor stops, then the [C]
B599D201.WMF
tray 1 lift motor lowers tray 1.
When the tray 1 lower limit sensor is

activated (as described on the previous [E]
Two-Tray
Finisher
page), the tray has moved past the sensors
B599
at the lower exit. The tray 1 shift motor turns
on again until the gear disk activates the
tray shift sensor [E]. This moves the tray
back against the finisher.
Next, tray 1 lifts until the finisher detects that
the tray is at the correct height.
B599D202.WMF
When tray 1 is at the lower exit, the tray lock

solenoid [F] is on, and the lever [G] locks the [F]
[I]
tray. This prevents the user from moving the
tray out of position (the first tray has some
play when it is at the lower position).
Before tray 1 goes back to the upper exit
area, the tray lock solenoid [F] turns off to
unlock the tray. In addition, the back fence
lock clutch [H] turns on to hold the back
fence [I]. This prevents the springs inside [G]
the back fence from suddenly contracting
(these springs normally keep the tray steady [H]
during side-to-side shift).
B599D203.WMF
Then, tray 1 is released and it moves up to

the upper exit area.
SM 21 B599
4.5.2 TRAY 2
[H]
[A]
[E]
Overflow condition
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[C] Multi Tray Staple Mode Normal Mode
[F]
B599D500.WMF
[G]
B599D109.WMF
The tray 2 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 2 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
The paper height detection is the same as for tray 1.
When the tray lowers during printing, the tray is judged to be overflowing when the
tray 2 overflow sensor 1 [D] is off and the tray 2 overflow sensor-2 [F] is on (see
‘Normal Mode’ in the above diagram).
In the multi-tray staple mode (selected by the service technician), the machine
detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when the
actuator [E] enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor [D].
The lower limit sensor [G] for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit and
stops the tray 2 lift motor.
The function of the tray 2 upper limit switch [H] is the same as for tray 1.
B599 22 SM
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B599D200.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
NOTE: This feature is available only when using A4 L, LT L, and B5 L.
During stapling, the main machine must wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by
holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It
only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set print job.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] switches on after the first sheet activates
the entrance sensor. This directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray [B].
The pre-stack feed roller [C] stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of the
paper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leaving
the pre-stack tray.
At the same time, the pre-stack junction gate solenoid switches off, and the second
sheet is sent to the paper guide [D]. The pre-stack feed roller (controlled by the
pre-stack motor) starts to rotate again for a specified time after the trailing edge of
the second page has been passed through the entrance sensor, and then both
sheets are sent to the stapler tray together.
SM 23 B599
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM

[C]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[F] [D]
B599D110.WMF
In staple mode, each sheet of print paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when
it arrives in the stapler tray.
Vertical Paper Alignment

After the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor [A], the
positioning roller solenoid [B] is energized for a specified time to push the
positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper.
The positioning roller rotates to push the paper back and align the trailing edge of
the paper against the stack stopper [D].
Horizontal Paper Alignment

When the start key is pressed, the jogger motor [E] turns on and the jogger fences
[F] move to the waiting position, which is 8 mm wider on both sides than the
selected paper.
When the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor, the
jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fences 5 mm towards the paper. After a
short time, the jogger motor turns on again for the horizontal paper alignment then
returns to the waiting position.
B599 24 SM
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM

4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT
[D]
[B]
[A]
[E] [B]
B599D112.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[C] B599D113.WMF
The stapler can be moved from side to side or rotated according to the
requirements of the selected stapling mode.
Stapler Rotation
After the start key is pressed, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the staple unit
[B] until the stapler rotation HP sensor [C] is activated. Then, the stapler moves
from front to rear of the finisher.
When oblique stapling at one position has been selected, after the stapler moves to
the stapling position, the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler 45 degrees
(clockwise) at the stapling position before the stapler fires.
Side-to-Side Movement
The stapler motor [D] moves the stapler from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined by
the size of the selected paper. If the two-staple mode is selected, the stapler
moves to the front stapling position first, and then moves to the rear stapling
position. However, for the next print set, it staples in the reverse order.
After the stapling job is finished, the stapler returns to its home position,
determined by the stapler HP sensor [E].
SM 25 B599
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7.2 STAPLER
[D]
[B]
[C]
B599D208.WMF
[A]
The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A] inside the stapler.
As soon as the paper stack is aligned, the staple hammer motor starts. When
stapling is finished, the staple hammer HP sensor [B] is turned on, and the staple
hammer motor then stops.
The staple end sensor [C] detects the staple end condition and whether the staple
cartridge is installed or not. If a stapler cassette is not installed, or after the stapler
cassette runs out of staples, a message is displayed in the operation panel. If this
condition is detected during a print job, the indicator will appear, but the print job
will not stop.
The staple position sensor [D] detects if there is a staple sheet at the stapling
position. After a new staple cartridge is installed, the staple hammer motor turns on
to transfer the staple sheet until the staple position sensor is activated by the staple
sheet.
If a staple jam occurs and overloads the motor, this causes a staple jam message
to appear on the operation panel.
B599 26 SM
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT
[A]
[C]
[I]
[B]
[D]
B599D115.WMF
[G]
[E]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[F] [H] B599D114.WMF
When stapling starts, the exit guide plate motor [A] switches on and opens the exit
guide plate [B], so that the stapled stack can exit to the tray. The exit guide plate
sensor [C] detects when to switch off the exit guide plate motor.
After the prints have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [D] starts. The pawl [E]
on the stack feed out belt [F] lifts the stapled set and feeds it to the tray [G].
The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints have
started to feed out. Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed-out. The stack
feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home
position sensor [H].
When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit, the exit guide
safety switch [I] cuts power to the tray lift motor if the guide is opened too far. This
prevents damage to the user’s fingers if they are inside the lower exit when the tray
is moving up.
SM 27 B599
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is
provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching.
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
B599D102.WMF
[B]
[H]
[I]
B599D101.WMF
[F] [G]
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

The punch drive mechanism is driven by the punch motor [A]. Each sheet is
positioned and punched by pressure from above. A certain time after the trailing
edge of the paper passes through the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motor
turns on and the paper stops. Then the punch clutch [C] turns on to make the
punch holes.
The home position is detected by the punch HP sensor [D]. When the cut-out in the
punch shaft disk [E] enters the punch HP sensor, the punch clutch turns off.
When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch
holes, the punch hole motor [F] turns on until the disk changes the status of the
punch hole switch [G] (until it switches on or off). This indicates that the cover [H]
and the punch cam [I] have moved to one side or the other to change the number
of holes.
B599 28 SM
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D153.WMF
Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit
inside the finisher.
When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the
hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the
current job is completed.
This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the
waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor
and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the
hopper full condition.
SM 29 B599
BOOKLET FINISHER
B602
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1
1.1 REGULAR TRAY.......................................................................................... 1
1.2 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2.1 FRONT COVER................................................................................... 1
1.2.2 REAR COVER ..................................................................................... 3
1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER ................................. 3
1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER ...................................................................... 5
1.3 SIDE GUIDE................................................................................................. 6
Removal................................................................................................... 6
Reassembly ............................................................................................. 6
1.4 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 7
Removal................................................................................................... 7
Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase.......................................................... 10
1.5 FOLDING UNIT .......................................................................................... 13
Removal................................................................................................. 13
Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase .................................................. 15
1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE ....................................................... 16
1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT........................................................................... 16
1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT ..................................................................... 18
1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT ........................................................................... 20
1.8 TRANSPORT ............................................................................................. 22
1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR ...................................................................... 22
1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER ..................................................................... 22
1.9 STACK TRAY ............................................................................................. 24
1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER ....................................................... 24
1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE..................................................................... 25
1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER....................................................... 27
Removal................................................................................................. 27
Reassembly ........................................................................................... 29
1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD ..................................................................................... 30
1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................. 30
1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD............................. 30
1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER....................................... 32
1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR..................................... 32
1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR ............................................................... 34
1.11.3 CONTROLLER ................................................................................ 35
1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD .............................................................. 35
1.11.5 LED BOARD .................................................................................... 36
1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD ................ 37
1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION............................................. 38
Sensor Voltage ...................................................................................... 38
SM i B602
Punch Type............................................................................................ 39
EEPROM ............................................................................................... 39
2. SERVICE TABLES ........................................................................ 40

2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ........................................................................... 40
Punch Controller Board.......................................................................... 40
3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................... 41
3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 41
3.2 DRIVE ........................................................................................................ 42
3.3 CONTROLLER ........................................................................................... 43
3.4 STACK TRAY ............................................................................................. 44
3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT.............................................................................. 44
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 44
Stack-Tray Belt ...................................................................................... 44
3.4.2 SORT................................................................................................. 45
3.4.3 STACK............................................................................................... 46
Paddle.................................................................................................... 46
Stack-Tray Stopper ................................................................................ 46
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................ 47
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................ 48
Home Position ....................................................................................... 48
Stapler Switch........................................................................................ 48
Safety Feature ....................................................................................... 48
3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE .............................................................................. 49
Action..................................................................................................... 49
Drive ...................................................................................................... 49
Home Position ....................................................................................... 49
Paper Position ....................................................................................... 50
3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 51
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 51
Stack-Tray Belt Home Position .............................................................. 51
3.5 STAPLING.................................................................................................. 52
3.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 52
3.5.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 53
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 53
Stapler Switch........................................................................................ 53
Sensors.................................................................................................. 53
3.5.3 POSITIONING ................................................................................... 54
Action and Drive .................................................................................... 54
Home Position and Ready Position........................................................ 54
Staple Position ....................................................................................... 55
3.6 REGULAR TRAY........................................................................................ 57
Action and Drive .................................................................................... 57
Ready Position....................................................................................... 57
Paper Sensor......................................................................................... 58
B602 ii SM
Paper Full .............................................................................................. 58
Fail Safe Feature ................................................................................... 58
3.7 SADDLE STITCH ....................................................................................... 59
3.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 59
3.7.2 STACK TRAY .................................................................................... 60
3.7.3 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 60
3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT ....................................................................... 61
3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 62
Folding Plate Mechanism....................................................................... 62
Folding Plate Home Position.................................................................. 62
Folder Rollers Mechanism ..................................................................... 63
Folder Rollers Home Position ................................................................ 63
Shape of Folder Rollers ......................................................................... 64
3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 65
3.8.1 REGISTRATION................................................................................ 65
Slide Unit ............................................................................................... 65
Home Position ....................................................................................... 65
Registration............................................................................................ 65
3.8.2 PUNCH.............................................................................................. 67
Types of Punch Unit............................................................................... 67
Drive ...................................................................................................... 67
Home Position ....................................................................................... 67
Two Holes and Four Holes .................................................................... 68
Two or Three Holes ............................................................................... 69
SM iii B602
REGULAR TRAY

1.1 REGULAR TRAY
Regular tray [A] ( x 4)
[A]
B602R901.WMF
Booklet Fin-
1.2 COVERS
isher
B602
1.2.1 FRONT COVER
[A]
[B]
1. Joint guard [A] ( x 2)

2. Front lower cover [B] ( x 2)
SM 1 B602
COVERS
[A]
3. Open the front door [A].
4. Release the stopper and remove the knob
[B].
5.  [C] x 2
[C]
B602R902.WMF
[B]
6. Front cover [D]
[D]
B602R903.WMF
B602 2 SM
COVERS
1.2.2 REAR COVER

[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B602R905.WMF
B602R904.WMF
Rear cover [A] ( [B] x 2,  [C] x 1)
Booklet Fin-
NOTE: One of the screws is under the mylar [D].
isher
B602
1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER
1. Front cover (! 1.2.1)

2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2) [B]
3. Screw (on the right top cover holder) [A]
NOTE: Remove the regular tray [B] if it is
in its upper position.
[A]
B602R907.WMF
SM 3 B602
COVERS
[A] [D]
[B]
B602R908.WMF
[C] B602R906.WMF
4. Open the left top cover [A].

5. Fastener [B]
6. Strap [C]
7. Tray upper cover [D] ( x 1,  x 1)
8. Right top cover (with the right top cover holder)
B602 4 SM
COVERS
1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER

2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
3. Left top cover (! 1.2.3)
4.  [A] x 1
[A]
B602R910.WMF
Booklet Fin-
5. Upper right cover [B]
( [C] x 1, 4 hooks)
isher
B602
[B]
[C]
B602R911.WMF
SM 5 B602
SIDE GUIDE
1.3 SIDE GUIDE

[C]
Removal
1. Regular tray (! 1.1)
3. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
[D]
4. Regular tray holders [A][B] [B]
( x 1 for each) [A]
5.  [C] x 4
[C]
6. Side-guide fastener [D]
B602R912.WMF
7. Open the side guide [E] and release

the feeler link [F]. (The diagram shows [F]
the view seen from the top.)
8. Side guide
[E]
B602R913.WMF
Reassembly
Place the feeler link [A] between the feeler [B] and
the side guide. After installing the side guide, check
that the feeler link moves with the feeler.
[A] [B]
B602R914.WMF
B602 6 SM
STAPLER UNIT
1.4 STAPLER UNIT

Removal [A]
CAUTION: Do not remove the stapler [A] [B]
from the stapler unit. The stapler and the
staple holder [B] must be in their original
positions.
B602R915.WMF
1. Open the front door [C]. [C]

2. Release the lever [D] and pull out the
stapler unit.
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
[D]
B602R989.WMF
3. Stapler knob [E]

4. Jam-release knob [F] ( x 1)
5. Front cover [G] ( x 3) [E]
[F]
[G] B602R990.WMF
SM 7 B602
STAPLER UNIT
6. Gear cover [A] (2 hooks)

7. Side cover [B] ( x 1)
[B]
[A]
B602R918.WMF
8. Gear [C] ( x 1), gear [D] ( x 1), and

timing belt [E]
[E]
9. Spacer (behind gear [C])
10. Gear (behind the spacer)
[C]
11. Belt guide [F]
( x 1, Spring [G] x 1,  [H] x 1) [D]
12. Tension bracket [I]
[G]
[H]
[I] [F]
B602R919.WMF
B602 8 SM
STAPLER UNIT
13. Timing belt [A]

14. Gear [B] ( x 1)
[B]
[A]
Booklet Fin-
B602R920.WMF
isher
B602
SM 9 B602
STAPLER UNIT
Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase

If you remove the gears [A][C] and timing belt [B],
you must adjust the phase of the gears when you
reassemble the machine. These gears and the belt
decide when the staple holder sends a staple and
when the stapler bends the staple. The diagram
shows the view seen from the rear.
[A]
[B]
[C]
B602R917.WMF
1. By rotating the timing-belt gear [A],

align the hole in the staple-holder gear
[B] with the hole in the frame [C].
[A]
[C]
[B]
B602R921.WMF
B602 10 SM
STAPLER UNIT
2. To fix the gear in position, place a thin

tool [A] such as an Allen key or
screwdriver through the holes.
[A]
B602R922.WMF
3. By rotating gear [B], align the hole in cam

[C] with the hole in the frame [D].
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
[B]
[D]
[C] B602R923.WMF
4. To fix the gear in position, place a thin

tool [E] such as an Allen key or
screwdriver through the holes.
[E] B602R924.WMF
SM 11 B602
STAPLER UNIT
5. Install the timing belt [A].
[A]
B602R925.WMF
6. Align the blue mark [B] on the gear with

the hole [C] in the frame, and install the [C]
gear.
NOTE: The stapler is in the home
position when the blue mark and [B]
the hole are aligned.
B602R926.WMF
7. Remove the two thin tools that you

placed earlier to secure the gears in [D]
position.
8. Install the spring [D], spacer [E], gears
[F][G], and timing belt [H].
9. Reassemble the whole stapler unit. [E]
[H]
10. Check the operation.
[F] [G]
B602R927.WMF
B602 12 SM
FOLDING UNIT
1.5 FOLDING UNIT

Removal
2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
3. Open the right cover [A].
4. Magnet bracket [B] ( x 2)
5. Inner cover [C] ( x 2)
[C]
6. Tension plate [D]
[A]
[D]
Booklet Fin-
[B]
isher
B602
B602R991.WMF
7. Rotate the shaft [F] clockwise and lower

the folder plate [E].
[E]
NOTE: You may have to rotate the
shaft about 20 times (7,200°).
[F]
B602R929.WMF
SM 13 B602
FOLDING UNIT
8. Timing belt [A] ( x 1, 1 spacer)

9. Two connectors [B][C]
[A]
[B] B602R930.WMF
[C]
10. Stapler unit [D] (! 1.4).

11. Folding unit [E] ( [F] x 3)
[D] [F]
[E]
B602R931.WMF
B602 14 SM
FOLDING UNIT
Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase

If you remove gears from the folding unit, you must adjust the phase of the gears
when you reassemble the folding unit.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R932.WMF
B602R994.WMF
1. Arrange the folding rollers [A] and cam [B] as shown in the diagram.
2. Install the gears as follows:
• Align either of the two “"” marks [C] on the cam gear with one of the “"”
marks [D] on the relay gear. The “"” marks on the relay gear must be at one
o'clock [D] and five o'clock [E] respectively.
• Align the other “"” mark on the relay gear [E] with the protruding plastic tab
(“#”) on the roller gear [F].
NOTE: When you have correctly installed the gears, the shorter teeth on the relay
gear [D] are at the upper right, and the longer teeth are at the lower left.
SM 15 B602
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE
1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT
[A]
[B]
[B]
B602R934.WMF
[A]
1. Left top cover, tray upper cover (! 1.2.3)
2. Side guide (! 1.3)
3.  [A] x 2
4.  [B] x 5, 2 standoffs
5. Release the front lock [D] and the rear

lock [C] on the mechanical link of the
stack-tray stopper.
[C]
[D]
B602R935.WMF
B602 16 SM
6.  [A] x 3
7. Open the cable fasteners [B].
8. Release the cables [C].
[C]
[B]
Booklet Fin-
[A]
isher
B602
B602R936.WMF
9. Timing belt [D] ( x 1, 1 spacer)

10. 2 standoffs [E]
[E]
[D]
[F] B602R937.WMF
SM 17 B602
11.  [A] x 2
12. Slide the stack tray [B] to the rear and
lift it.
[B]
[A]
B602R938.WMF
1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT

CAUTION: Do not damage the jogger fences.
1. Stack tray (!1.6.1)
2. Place the stack tray unit on a level
surface. Check that the fences [A] are in
safe positions.
[A]
B602R939.WMF
B602 18 SM
3. Timing belt [A]

4.  [B] x 2
[B]
[A]
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R940.WMF
5. Jogger fence unit [C]

[C]
B602R941.WMF
SM 19 B602
STAPLER MOTOR UNIT
1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Stapler unit (! 1.4).
3. Connector holder [A] ( x 1)
4. Release all the cables (on the stapler
motor unit) [B] from the clamps.
5. Release the cables [D] ( x 2 [from
the stapler motor unit or from the
controller])
[D]
[B]
[A]
B602R942.WMF [E]
6. Cable fastener [E] ( x 2)
B602R944.WMF
7. Release the cables ( x 2)
[F]
B602R945.WMF
B602 20 SM
STAPLER MOTOR UNIT
8.  [A] x 3
[A]
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R946.WMF
9. Stapler motor unit [B] ( [C] x 1)
[C]
B602R947.WMF
[B]
SM 21 B602
TRANSPORT
1.8 TRANSPORT
1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR
[B]
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Cable guide [A] ( x 1)
3. Transport motor (with the timing belt [A]
behind) [B] ( x 1,  x 3)
B602R948.WMF
1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER

2. Upper cover (! 1.2.3)
3. Upper right cover (! 1.2.4)
4. Transport motor (!1.8.1)
5.  [A] x 1
6. Bushing [B] ( x 1)
[A] [B]
B602R949.WMF
B602 22 SM
TRANSPORT
[A]
7.  [A] x 2
B602R950.WMF
8. Gear [B] [D] [B]
Booklet Fin-
9. Gear (with the pin behind) [C]
isher
B602
10. Bushing [D] ( x 1)
11.  [E] x 1
[E]
12. Paper guide [F] [F] [C]
B602R951.WMF
13. Transport roller [G]

[G]
B602R952.WMF
SM 23 B602
STACK TRAY
1.9 STACK TRAY

1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER
1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2) [B]

2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise
and lift the stack tray upper roller unit
[B].
[A]
B602R953.WMF
3. Release the stack tray upper roller [C]

from the shaft [D].
[C]
B602R954.WMF
[D]
B602 24 SM
STACK TRAY
[B]
4. Lift up the stack tray upper roller [A],
and push it down.
5. In the same manner, remove the [A]
other roller [B].
B602R955.WMF
1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE
Booklet Fin-
1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)
[B]
isher
B602
2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise
and lift the stack tray upper roller unit
[B].
[A]
B602R953.WMF
SM 25 B602
STACK TRAY
3. Push the bottom of the guide [A] and

release the rear side of it.
[A]
B602R956.WMF
4. Push the bottom of the guide [B] and

release the front side of it.
[B]
B602R957.WMF
5. Paddle [C]
[C]
B602R958.WMF
B602 26 SM
STACK TRAY
1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER

Removal
1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)
2. Slide the jogger fences (the front
fence [A] to the front, the rear fence
[B] to the rear) and remove them.
[B]
[A]
B602R959.WMF
3. Tray stopper [C] (2 clips)

[C]
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R960.WMF
[D]
4. Paper guide [F] ( [D] x 1)
[F]
B602R961.WMF
SM 27 B602
STACK TRAY
5. Paper guide [A] ( [B] x 1) [B]
[A]
B602R962.WMF
6. Slide the bushing [C] ( x 2).
[C]
B602R963.WMF
7. Stack tray lower roller unit [E] ( [F] x [F]

4)
[E]
B602R964.WMF
B602 28 SM
STACK TRAY
8. Stack tray lower roller [A] [B]

9. Belt [B]
[A]
B602R965.WMF
Reassembly
When reassembling, align the positions of
the belt pawls [A][B]. [A]
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
[B]
B602R966.WMF
SM 29 B602
CIRCUIT BOARD
1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD

1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

2. Controller board [A]
(all 's,  x 1, 3 hooks)
NOTE: After replacing the controller
board, remove the NVRAM on
the old board and install it on the
new board.
B602R967.WMF
[A]
1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD
1. Stapler unit (! 1.4)

2. Guide [A] ( x 2)
[A]
B602R969.WMF
B602 30 SM
CIRCUIT BOARD
3. Turn the knob [B] until you see the

screw [C] (on the home position sensor
board) through the opening. The home [B]
position board moves to the front when
you turn the knob clockwise.
4.  [C] x 1
[C]
B602R970.WMF
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
5. Home position board [D]
( x 1, 1 flat cable)
[D] B602R971.WMF
SM 31 B602
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR
1. Right top cover (! 1.2.3)

2. Chad box [A]
[A]
B602R993.WMF
3. Release the cables [B] ( x 1).
[B]
B602R973.WMF
B602 32 SM
4. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 1)
[A]
B602R974.WMF
5. Remove the whole punch unit from the saddle

finisher.
6. Washer [B] ( x 1)
Booklet Fin-
7. Base cover [C] ( x 2,  [D] x 2) (The
isher
B602
diagram shows the view seen from the
bottom.)
[B]
[C]
B602R975.WMF
[D]
SM 33 B602
[A]
8. Sensor unit [A] ( x 2,  x 3)
B602R976.WMF
9. Punch unit motor [B] ( x 2)
[B]
B602R978.WMF
1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR

[A]
1. Remove the whole punch unit from
the saddle finisher.
2. Registration motor [A]
( x 1,  x 2）
B602R979.WMF
B602 34 SM
1.11.3 CONTROLLER
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

2. Punch unit controller [A] (all 's,  x 2)
NOTE: After replacing the punch unit controller,
adjust the sensor voltage and specify the
punch type (! 1.11.7). After replacing
the EEPROM, make the controller
initialize the new EEPROM (! 1.11.7).
[A]
B602R980.WMF
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD
1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)

2. Release the cables [A] [B]
3. Board cover [B] ( x 1)
[A]
B602R981.WMF
SM 35 B602
[A]
4. Photo sensor board [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: After replacing the photo sensor
board, adjust the sensor voltage
(! 1.11.7).
B602R982.WMF
1.11.5 LED BOARD

[A]
1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)
2. LED board [A] ( x 1,  x 1)
NOTE: After replacing the LED board,
adjust the sensor voltage (!
1.11.7).
B602R983.WMF
B602 36 SM
1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD
1. Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)

2. Remove the whole punch unit from the
saddle finisher.
3. Protector [A] ( x 2)
[A]
B602R984.WMF
4. Sensor board [B] ( x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the sensor board,
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
1.11.7).
[B]
B602R985.WMF
5. LED board [C] ( x 1,  x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the LED board,
1.11.7).
[C]
B602R986.WMF
SM 37 B602
1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
Sensor Voltage
You make the controller adjust the LED
voltage of the sensors after you have
replaced any of the following units and
components:
• Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)
• Photo sensor board (! 1.11.4)
B602R995.WMF
• LED board (! 1.11.5)
• Chad box full sensor board (! 1.11.6)
• Chad box LED board (! 1.11.6)
[H]
Perform as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board as
follows: 1 = ON, 2 = OFF, 3 = ON, 4 = OFF [H].
2. Push SW1002 [C] or SW1003 [D]. The controller starts to adjust
the LED voltage of the sensors.
3. Wait until LED1001 [E], LED1002 [F], and LED1003 [G] light.
This indicates the controller ends the adjustment. [I] B602R996.WMF
4. Set the DIP switch as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4 =

OFF.
B602R997.WMF
B602 38 SM
Punch Type [J]

After you replace the punch-unit controller, specify the punch type
as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board as
follows: 1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = ON [J].
2. Push SW1002 [C] to select a punch type. As you push SW1002,
the three LEDs [E][F][G] change as shown in the table. These
LEDs indicate which punch type you have selected.
B602R998.WMF
Punch Type LED1001 LED1002 LED1003

2 holes Lights — —
2 or 3 holes Lights Lights —
4 holes* — Lights —
4 holes** — — Lights
** For the North Europe model
* Four the other models
3. Push SW1003 [D]. The LEDs blink. [K]
Booklet Fin-
4. Push SW1003 again. The controller stores the punch type in the
isher
B602
EEPROM.
5. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4
= OFF [K].
B602R997.WMF
EEPROM [L]
After you replace the EEPROM [A], make the controller initialize the
new EEPROM as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch on the punch-unit controller board as follows:
1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = OFF [L].
2. Push SW1002 and SW1003 at the same time. The controller
starts initializing the EEPROM.
B602R999.WMF
3. Wait until LED1001, LED1002, and LED1003 light. This

indicates that the initialization ends. [M]
4. Adjust the sensor voltage (! Sensor Voltage).
5. Specify the punch type (! Punch Type)
6. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4
= OFF [M].
B602R997.WMF
SM 39 B602
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
2. SERVICE TABLES
2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Punch Controller Board
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
SW1001
Mode Description
1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF Default
ON OFF ON OFF Sensor voltage adjustment See 1.11.7.
ON ON OFF ON Punch type setting See 1.11.7.
ON ON OFF OFF EEPROM initialization See 1.11.7.
B602 40 SM
GENERAL LAYOUT
3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
8
9
20
10
19
18
11
17 12
Finisher
Booklet
B602
13
16
14
15
B602D901.WMF
1. Regular tray 11. Stack-tray transport roller

2. Jogger fence 12. Folding plate
3. Exit roller 13. Folder rollers
4. Paddle 14. Booklet exit roller
5. Stack tray stopper 15. Booklet tray
6. Transport roller 16. Booklet stopper
7. Cam* 17. Stapler
8. Punch* 18. Stack-tray lower roller
9. Punch base* 19. Stack-tray belt
10. Chad box* 20. Stack-tray upper roller
* Installed with the optional punch unit.
SM 41 B602
DRIVE
3.2 DRIVE 1
4
5
B602D902.WMF
1. Paddle motor 6. Rear fence motor

2. Transport motor 7. Front fence motor
3. Stapler slide motor 8. Lift motor
4. Stack-tray exit motor 9. Finisher controller
5. Stapler/folder motor
B602 42 SM
CONTROLLER
3.3 CONTROLLER
Finisher Punch (optional)
Motor
Controller board
Controller
board
Sensor
CPU (IC13)
EEP-ROM (IC12)
Motors
Communication IC
(IC11)
Clutches
EP-ROM (IC6)
Switches
Finisher
Booklet
B602
Regulator IC (IC1)
Sensors
Main unit
Controller board
B602D903.WMF
The finisher controller board communicates with the controllers of the optional
punch unit and the copier or printer. Listed below are the functions of important
ICs:
• CPU (IC13): Controls the sequence or the processing.
• EEP-ROM (CS12): Stores adjustment settings.
• Communication IC (IC11): Contains the program.
• EP-ROM (IC6): Communicates with other controllers.
• Regulator IC (IC1): Generates 5-volt power source.
SM 43 B602
STACK TRAY
3.4 STACK TRAY

3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT
Mechanism
The exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray. The rollers and belts on the
stack tray transport the paper to the regular tray. The finisher operates like this
even when it handles one sheet of paper.
Phase 1: The transport motor drives the [A]

exit roller [A] to transport the paper to the
stack tray.
Phase 2: The paddle motor operates in

reverse to lower the stack-tray upper
roller [B] onto the paper.
Phase 3: The stack-tray exit motor

drives the stack-tray upper roller [B], the [B]
stack-tray lower roller [E], and the stack-
tray belts [C] to transport the paper to the
regular tray.
[C]
[D] [E]
B602D904.WMF
Stack-Tray Belt
The stack tray has two stack-tray belts. Each stack-tray belt has a paper support
[D] on its surface. As stack-tray exit motor rotates the stack-tray belts
counterclockwise (viewed from the machine front), the paper supports moves
counterclockwise. While moving, these paper supports transport the paper from the
stack tray to the regular tray.
For the home position of the stack-tray belt, see “Stack-Tray Belt Home Position” in
section 3.4.5.
B602 44 SM
STACK TRAY
3.4.2 SORT
The finisher can sort and stack the paper. To do this, it uses the stack tray and the
regular tray.
Phase 1: The exit roller transports the [B] [A]

paper on the stack tray [A]. The front
fence motor or the rear fence motor drives
the jogger fence [B] to push the paper to
the front or rear. The jogger fence handles
the next paper in the same way, and
pushes the paper in the same direction.
For the jogger fence mechanism, see
section 3.4.4.
[C]
Phase 2: When the number of papers on
the stack tray reaches one of the following
numbers, the stack-tray upper roller, the
stack-tray lower roller, and the stack-tray
Finisher
Booklet
B602
belts (! 3.4.1) transport the paper stack
[C] to the regular tray.
Paper Size Number of Sheets

300 mm and longer 10
Shorter than 300 mm 30
[D]
Phase 3: The finisher repeats Phase 1
and Phase 2 until it finishers handling the
first set of paper.
Phase 4: For the next set, the finisher

conducts phases 1 through 3 again. This [E] B602D905.WMF
time, the other jogger fence pushes the
paper in the opposite direction in phase 1.
Every time phase 3 ends, the finisher stacks one set of paper on the regular tray.
The diagram shows the paper stack [D] on the regular tray after the finisher stacks
four sets of paper. The arrow [E] indicates the direction of paper travel.
SM 45 B602
STACK TRAY
3.4.3 STACK
Paddle
[B]
[A] [C]
[D]
B602D906.WMF
B602D907.WMF
There are four paddles [C] above the stack tray. These paddles push down the
paper [B] to the stack-tray stopper [D]. This aligns the right edges of the paper
(viewed from the machine front). The paddle motor [A] drives these paddles.
Stack-Tray Stopper
The stack-tray stopper [E] remains standing (as shown in the diagram) while the
exit roller is transporting the paper to the stack tray.
Before the stack-tray upper and lower

rollers transport the paper to the stapler
(! 3.5 and 3.7), the stapler slide motor [E]
starts to move the stapler to the machine
front. The stapler pushes the mechanical
link of the stack-tray stopper (! 1.6.1).
This link pulls down the stack-tray
stopper.
B602D908.WMF
B602 46 SM
STACK TRAY
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism
[A]
[B]
[C]
Finisher
Booklet
B602
B602D910.WMF
The paddle motor [A] drives the stack-tray guide. The stack-tray guide stays away
from the paper (the upper position [B]) under either of the following conditions:
• When the exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray
• When the jogger fences adjust the direction of the paper
The paddle motor drives the stack-tray guide onto the paper (the lower position [C])
under either of the following conditions:
• When the stapler operates
• When the stack-tray upper roller, stack-tray lower roller, and stack-tray belt
transport the paper
SM 47 B602
STACK TRAY
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism

The paddle motor [A] moves the timing [D] [E]
[C]
belts [B][G], which drive the cam [D]. The [B]
cam pushes up the first lever [C], which
[A]
pushes down the second lever [H]. The
second lever lowers the stack-tray guide
[I].
Home Position [F]

The actuator [F] moves with the cam [D].
The actuator interrupts the home position [G]
sensor [E] while the cam does not push
the first lever [C] (in other words, while the [K]
stack-tray guide is in its upper position).
[J] [H]
Stapler Switch
The second lever [H] moves with the
stapler-switch actuator [J]. When the first
lever pushes the second lever (in other
words, when the stack tray guide is in its
lower position), the actuator pushes the
stapler switch [K], turning it on. The stapler [I]
can operate only when this switch is on.
Safety Feature
The stapler switch, along with the stack-
B602D949.WMF
tray guide mechanism, works as a safety
feature. The stapler operates only when the stack-tray guide is in the lower position.
When the stack-tray guide is in this position, the user cannot access the stapler
through the opening between the stack-tray guide and the stack tray. Therefore,
staples do not injure the user.
B602 48 SM
STACK TRAY
[B]
3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE
[I]
[G]
[E]
[D]
[A] [C]
[H]
[F]
B602D911.WMF
Finisher
Booklet
B602
Action
There are two jogger fences: the front fence [A] and the rear fence [B]. These two
jogger fences adjust the position of the paper [C] on the stack tray.
Drive
The front-jogger-fence motor [D] and the rear-jogger-fence motor [E] drive the
jogger fences.
Home Position
There are two home position sensors: the front-fence home-position sensor [F] and
the rear-fence home-position sensor [G]. Each jogger fence is linked to an actuator
[H][I]. When the main switch is turned on, the front and rear fence motors drive the
jogger fences until each home position sensor detected its actuator.
SM 49 B602
STACK TRAY
Paper Position
To align the paper to the front of the ↑ Rear
stack tray, the jogger fences operate as [A]
follows:
• The rear fence [A] pushes the
paper [B] to the front each time the
exit roller transports the paper to [B]
the stack tray.
• The front fence [C] stays at the
front side.
[C]
Regular tray
↓ Front B602D912.WMF
↑ Rear
To align the paper to the rear side of the [D]
stack tray, the jogger fences operate as
follows:
• The rear fence [D] stays at the [E]
rear side.
• The front fence [E] pushes the
paper [F] to the rear each time the
exit roller transports the paper to [F]
the stack tray.
Regular tray
B602D913.WMF
↓ Front
B602 50 SM
STACK TRAY
3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT
[A] [I]
[F]
[G]
B602D906.WMF
[H]
[B] [C]
B602D915.WMF
[E]
[J]
[K]
Finisher
Booklet
B602
B602D914.WMF
[D]
B602D916.WMF
Mechanism
The paper in the stack tray is transported to the regular tray as follows:
1. The paddle motor [A] moves the stack-tray guide to its lower position [G].
2. The stack-tray exit motor [B] drives the stack-tray upper roller [F], the stack-tray
lower roller [H], and the stack-tray belt [I]. The stack-tray belt has a pair of
paper supports [K] that push the paper [C] (! 3.4.1).
3. When the paper supports have left the home position, the controller starts to
count the pulses of the stack-tray exit motor.
4. When the pulse count reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), the
paddle motor moves the stack-tray guide to its upper position [J].
5. The paper supports keep pushing the paper to the regular tray [D].
Stack-Tray Belt Home Position

When the stack-tray belt is at its home position, one of the paper supports [K]
pushes the actuator of the home position sensor [E].
SM 51 B602
STAPLING
3.5 STAPLING
3.5.1 OVERVIEW
The finisher staples the paper as [B] [A]
follows:
Phase 1: The exit roller transports the

paper to the stack tray [A] until the
number of papers reaches a specified
number.
Phase 2: The jogger fences [B] adjust

the position of the paper. For the jogger
fence mechanism, see section 3.4.4. [D] [C]
Phase 3: The stapler [C] staples the

paper.
Phase 4: The stapled paper [D] is

transported to the regular tray.
When the finisher has conducted

phases 1 through 4, it starts the same
processing from phase 1.
B602D917.WMF
B602 52 SM
STAPLING
3.5.2 STAPLER
Mechanism [A]
Finisher
Booklet
B602
B602D920.WMF
The stapler/folder motor [A] drives the stapler (! “Action and Drive” in section
3.5.3).
Stapler Switch
See “Stapler Switch” in section 3.4.3.
Sensors
There are three sensors inside the stapler:
• Staple Home Position Sensor: The staple home position sensor detects the
cam position.
• Staple Sensor: The staple sensor detects the staples in the cartridge.
• Staple Ready Sensor: The staple ready sensor detects the upper end of
the staple.
The staple home position sensor above is different from the home position sensor
on the bottom of the stapler (! 3.5.3).
SM 53 B602
STAPLING
3.5.3 POSITIONING
Front
[A]
[C]
[B]
[K]
[J] [D]
[I]
[E]
[F]
Rear [G]
[H]
B602D921.WMF
Action and Drive

There is one stapler [A] in the finisher. The stapler is on six rails [C][D][E][I]. The
rail [C], rail [D], rail [I], and rail [J] transmit the drive power:
• The rail [C] and rail [I] transmit the drive power of the stapler/folder motor.
The stapler uses this power to staple the paper (! 3.5.2).
• The rails [D] and [J] transmit the drive power of the staple slide motor [H].
This drive power moves the stapler to the front or rear.
In the diagram above, [B] is the paper stack on the stack tray.
Home Position and Ready Position

The home position sensor [G] is at the bottom of the stapler; the sensor blade [F] is
on the frame of the unit. The controller references the home position sensor to set
the stapler in its ready position. Note that the stapler is not in the home position
when it is ready. The controller sets the stapler in the ready position as follows:
1. You turn the main switch on (or you close the front door of the finisher).
2. The slide motor drives the stapler from the rear side to the front side.
3. The home position sensor detects the sensor blade. The slide motor stops.
4. The slide motor starts in reverse to drive the stapler to the rear side. The
controller starts to count the pulses of the motor.
5. When the pulse count reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the slide motor. The stapler is in its ready position.
B602 54 SM
STAPLING
Staple Position
The controller counts the pulses of the stapler slide motor to calculates the
distance between the ready position (! Home Position and Ready Position) and
the staple position
Front-End One Staple [A]

1. Before the stapler slide motor starts, [C]
the stapler is in the ready position [C].
2. The stapler slide motor starts to slide
the stapler to the front. The controller [B]
counts the pulses of the stapler slide
motor.
3. While moving to the front, the stapler
lowers the stack-tray stopper [B] (! [D]
“Stack-Tray Stopper” in 3.4.3).
4. When the pulse count reaches the
B602D922.WMF
predefined number (not adjustable),
the controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the stapling
Finisher
Booklet
B602
position [D].
5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler [A].
[F]
Rear-End One Staple
1. The stapler is in the ready position [F].
2. The stapler/folder motor drives the [E]
stapler. The stapler staples the paper.
The stapler does not move to the front.
The stack-tray stopper [E] keeps
standing
B602D923.WMF
SM 55 B602
STAPLING
[G]
Two Staples
1. Before the stapler slide motor starts, [H]
the stapler is in the ready position [G].
[J]
2. The stapler slide motor starts to slide
the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of the stapler slide
motor. [I]
3. While moving to the front, the stapler
lowers the stack-tray stopper [J].
B602D924.WMF
4. When the pulse count reaches the
predefined number (not adjustable), the controller stops the stapler slide motor.
The stapler is in the first stapling position [H].
5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler.
6. The stapler slide motor starts to slide the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of he stapler slide motor.
7. When the pulse cont reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the second stapling
position [I].
8. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paper.
Saddle Stitch
1. The stack-tray upper and lower rollers
transport the paper to the stapler unit
until the center of the paper [K]
reaches the stapling positions (!
3.7.4).
2. The stapler operates as described in
the previous paragraph (! Two
Staples).
B602D925.WMF
[K]
B602 56 SM
REGULAR TRAY
3.6 REGULAR TRAY
[A]
[B] [E]
[C] [F]
[G]
[D]
Finisher
Booklet
B602
[H]
[I]
B602D926.WMF
Action and Drive

The lift motor [I] drives the regular tray to adjust its height.
Ready Position
Before the stack-tray rollers and belts transport the paper to the regular tray, the lift
motor sets the regular tray in the ready position:
1. The lift motor lowers the regular tray. The controller references the lift motor
encoder sensor [D] to count how many turns the motor makes.
2. When the number of turns reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the lift motor.
3. The lift motor operates in reverse, lifting the regular tray.
4. The paper height sensor [F] detects the edge [G] of the tray or the top of the
paper stack (!Paper Sensor). The lift motor stops.
SM 57 B602
REGULAR TRAY
Paper Sensor
As illustrated in the previous paragraph (! Ready Position), the paper height
sensor [F] can detect either the tray edge or the paper stack. Therefore, the signals
from the paper height sensor are not enough to let the controller know if any paper
is on the tray.
To find the paper on the regular tray, the controller references the paper sensor [E].
This sensor detects the paper but does not detect the tray.
Paper Full
While the stack-tray rollers and belts continue to transport the paper to the regular
tray, the ready position becomes lower (! Ready Position). When the number of
paper reaches about 500 sheets, the paper full sensor [B] is interrupted by its
actuator. When the number of paper reaches about 1,000 sheets, the lower limit
sensor [C] is interrupted by its actuator. To decide the paper-full status, the
controller considers these sensor signals and the paper sizes. The table lists the
paper sizes and the numbers of paper in the paper-full status.
Paper Size Number of Paper
A3, B4, DLT, LG About 500 sheets
Smaller sizes About 1,000 sheets
Fail Safe Feature

When the regular tray reaches its uppermost position, the upper limit sensor [A]
detects it. The finisher stops its operation.
The regular tray does not reach this position in normal operations. The upper limit
sensor works as a failsafe feature. If the regular tray fails to actuate the paper
height sensor [F] because of some hardware error, this failsafe feature works.
B602 58 SM
SADDLE STITCH
3.7 SADDLE STITCH

3.7.1 OVERVIEW
2
1
Finisher
Booklet
B602
B602D927.WMF
The saddle stitch process consists of the following four phases:

1. The stack tray aligns the paper (!3.7.2).
2. The stapler staples the paper (! 3.7.3).
3. The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper in the folding
position (! 3.7.4).
4. The folding plate and folder rollers cooperate to fold the paper and to transport
it to the booklet tray (! 3.7.5).
SM 59 B602
SADDLE STITCH
3.7.2 STACK TRAY

The stack tray operates as follows: [A] [B]
1. The stack-tray stopper aligns the right
edges of the paper in the stack tray (!
“Stack-Tray Stopper” in 3.4.1).
2. The jogger fences adjust the position of
the paper (! 3.4.4).
3. When a specified number of paper [A] is [C]
stacked, the paddle motor operates in
reverse to lower the stack-tray guide and
the stack-tray upper roller [B] onto the
paper.
4. The stack-tray exit motor drives the
stack-tray upper roller and lower roller to
transport the paper to the stapler unit.
B602D928.WMF
5. The booklet clutch [D] turns on. This

clutch transmits the driver power of the
transport motor to the stack-tray
transport roller [C]. [D]
B602D950.WMF
3.7.3 STAPLER
The stapler waits for the paper in the ready position, and operates when the paper
is set to the stapler positions (! 3.5.3). When the finisher is processing one sheet
of paper, the stapler does not staple the paper.
B602 60 SM
SADDLE STITCH
3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT
[A]
[B]
B602D931.WMF
Finisher
Booklet
B602
B602D930.WMF
The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper as follows:
1. When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the folder home position
sensor [A], the controller starts to count the pulses of the transport motor.
2. When the pulse count reaches the number equivalent to the distance [B]
between the stapler and the folding plate, the transport motor stops. The center
of the paper is in the folding position.
SM 61 B602
SADDLE STITCH
3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT

Folding Plate Mechanism
[E]
[A]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B602D932.WMF
B602D933.WMF
The folding plate is driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folding plate operates as
follows:
1. The folding plate waits for the stack-tray transport roller to transport the paper.
2. When the center of the paper is set in the folding position, the stapler/folder
motor drives the folding plate [C] and the folder rollers [D]. The folding plate
presses the paper between the folder rollers.
3. The folder rollers feed the paper about 10 mm, the folding plate returns to its
home position. The folder rollers keep feeding the paper.
Folding Plate Home Position

The home position of the folding plate is detected by the folder home position
sensor [E]. The actuator [F] is linked to the folding plate by way of cam [A] and
lever [B] (though they are separated in the diagram).
The sensor also detects the home position of the folder rollers (! Folder Rollers
Home Position).
B602 62 SM
SADDLE STITCH
Folder Rollers Mechanism

[F]
[A]
[G]
[B]
[C] [H]
[D]
[E]
Finisher
Booklet
B602D935.WMF
B602
B602D934.WMF
The folder rollers are driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folder rollers operate
as follows:
1. The folder rollers [B] feed the paper pressed by the folding plate.
2. The folder rollers and the booklet exit rollers [C] feed the paper [D] and
transport it to the booklet tray [E].
Folder Rollers Home Position

The home position of the folder rollers is detected by the folder home position
sensor [F]. The folder home position sensor blade [A] is linked to the folder rollers
by way of the gears [G][H] (though they are separated in the diagram).
The sensor also detects the home position of the folding plate (! Folding Plate
Home Position).
SM 63 B602
SADDLE STITCH
Shape of Folder Rollers
Folding Plate
[A]
B602D936.WMF
Viewed from the front or rear, each folder rollers is a half-circle [A] except both
ends and middle. This structure prevents the rollers from crumpling the paper stack.
B602 64 SM
3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

3.8.1 REGISTRATION
Slide Unit [C]
The slide unit includes the punch motor
[B]
[C], the punch [A], and paper edge and
size sensors [B]. This unit is driven by the
[A]
registration motor [E].
Home Position
The home position of the slide unit (in
other words, the home position of the
paper edge sensors) is detected by the
registration home position sensor [F].
B602D937.WMF
Finisher
Booklet
B602
Registration [F] [E]
Registration is executed as follows:
1. When the paper [D] comes from the main [G]
unit, the leading edge [I] of the paper is [D]
detected by the paper edge sensor [H].
2. The registration motor starts to operate.
The slide unit [G] moves to the front.
[H]
[I] B602D938.WMF
SM 65 B602
3. One of the paper size sensors [A] that

[A] [B]
corresponds to the paper size detects the
rear end [B] of the paper.
4. When the slide unit is set in place, the
registration motor stops its operations.
B602D939.WMF
5. When the paper edge sensor [C] detects the

trailing edge of the paper, the transport
motor [D] (of the finisher) stops.
[C]
B602D940.WMF
[D]
B602D941.WMF
B602 66 SM
3.8.2 PUNCH
Types of Punch Unit
There are four types:
• 2 holes
• 2 or 3 holes (The user can select 2-hole punching or 3-hole punching from
the operation panel or the printer driver.)
• 4 holes
• 4 holes
There are two 4-hole types: for the North Europe models and for the other models.
Drive
[A] [C]
[D]
Finisher
Booklet
B602
[B]
B602D942.WMF
The diagram shows the 2 or 3 holes type, which has five punch cams [B]: two of
them are for 2-hole punching and the other three are for 3-hole punching. The
punch motor [A] drives the punch cams.
Home Position
The controller uses two sensors, the home position sensor [D] and the encoder
sensor [C], to set the punch cams in the home position. The controller fine-adjusts
the home position by referencing the encoder sensor signals.
SM 67 B602
Two Holes and Four Holes

When the finisher punches holes, the punch motor drives all punches at the same
time.
Phase 1 [A]
1) The punch is in the home position.
1) 2) 3)
The punch home position sensor [A] [B]
is on. When the first sheet of paper is
set, the punch cam starts a forward
turn.
2) When the punch cam has made a
90-degree turn, a hole is punched.
180-degree turn, the punch comes
back to the home position. Note that
B602D943.WMF
the punch cam [B] is not in the
previous position.
Phase 2
4) 5) 6)
4) The punch is in the home position.
The punch home position sensor is
on. When the second sheet of paper
is set, the punch cam starts a
backward turn.
5) When the punch cam has made a 90-
degree turn, a hole is punched.
6) When the punch cam has made 180-
degree turn, the punch comes back
to its home position. Note that the B602D944.WMF
punch cam is not in the previous

position but in the same position as
the start fo phase 1.
Phase 3
• Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.
B602 68 SM
Two or Three Holes

There are five punches. When the finisher punches holes, the punch drives all
punches at the same time. But three of them do not reach the paper (when the
finisher is punching two holes), or two of them do not reach the paper (when the
finisher is punching three holes).
Phase 1
1) 2) 3) 1) 2) 3)
[A]
B602D946.WMF
[B]
B602D945.WMF Standby
Working
Finisher
Booklet
B602
Working punches operate as Standby punches operate as
follows: follows:
1) The punch is in the home 1) When the first sheet of paper is
position. The punch home set, the punch cam starts a
position sensor [A] is on. When forward turn.
the first sheet of paper is set, the 2) When the punch cam has made a
punch cam starts a forward turn. 90-degree turn, the punch is away
2) When the punch cam has made a from the paper.
180-degree turn, a hole is 3) When the punch cam has made a
punched. 180-degree turn, the punch is
3) When the punch cam has made a back to the home position.
180-degree turn, the punch
comes back to the home position.
Note that the punch cam [B] is not
in the previous position.
SM 69 B602
Phase 2
4) 5) 6) 4) 5) 6)
[A]
B602D948.WMF
[B]
B602D947.WMF Standby
Working
Working punches operate as Standby punches operate as

follows: follows:
4) The punch is in the home 4) When the next sheet of paper is
position. The punch home set, the punch cam starts a
position sensor [A] is on. When backward turn.
the next sheet of paper is set, the 5) When the punch cam has made a
punch cam starts a backward 90-degree turn, the punch is away
turn. from the paper.
5) When the punch cam has made a 6) When the punch cam has made a
90-degree turn, a hole is 180-degree turn. the punch
punched. comes back to the home position.
180-degree turn, the punch
comes back to the home position.
Note that the punch cam [B] is not
in the previous position but in the
same position as the start of
phase 1.
Phase 3
• Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.
B602 70 SM
FAX OPTION TYPE 2238
B603
FAX OPTION B603
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 1
1.2 FAX UNIT ..................................................................................................... 3
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 3
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 4
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT .................................................................................. 6
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 6
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 7
1.4 FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT ............................................................. 10
1.5 EXPANSION MEMORY ............................................................................. 11
1.6 HANDSET .................................................................................................. 12
Accessory Check ................................................................................... 12
Installation Procedure ............................................................................ 13
2.1 ERROR CODES......................................................................................... 14
2.2 FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES................................................ 22
SC871 FCU Flash ROM Abnormal ........................................................ 22
FCU Flash ROM Access Limit Exceeded .............................................. 22
SRAM Abnormal .................................................................................... 22
Expansion SRAM Abnormal .................................................................. 22
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................23
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 23
3.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION...................................... 23
Entering and Exiting SP mode ............................................................... 23
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)............................................................................ 25
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings).................................................................. 25
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions) ..................................................................... 26
SP5-XXX (Initializing)............................................................................. 26
SP6-XXX (Reports)................................................................................ 27
SP7-XXX (Tests) ................................................................................... 29
3.2 BIT SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 30
3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 30
3.2.2 FAX SWITCHES................................................................................ 41
3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 45
3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 50
3.2.5 G3-1 SWITCHES............................................................................... 59
3.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES............................................................................... 67
3.3 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 73
3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ......................................... 83
3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ....................................................... 83
SM i B603
3.4.2 PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 84
3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................... 88
4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .........................................89

4.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 89
4.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................... 90
4.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................... 90
4.2.2 MBU................................................................................................... 91
4.2.3 NCU (US) .......................................................................................... 92
4.2.4 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA) ....................................................................... 93
4.2.5 SG3-D BOARD .................................................................................. 94
4.3 ADDRESS BOOK....................................................................................... 95
With Printer Scanner Unit ...................................................................... 95
Without Optional Printer Scanner Unit (Asia Model Only)...................... 95
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................96
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................... 96
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS ............................................ 97
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ..................................................................... 99
B603 ii SM
PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
1. INSTALLATION
Fax Option
B603
1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
WARNING
1. Never install telephone writing during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
5. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an
electrical storm. There may be remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
6. Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the
vicinity of the leak.
CAUTION
1. Before installing the fax unit, switch off the main switch, and
disconnect the power cord.
2. The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if
a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same
or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacture. Discard
batteries in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions and local
regulations.
NOTE FOR AUSTRALIA

Unit must be connected to Telecommunication Network through a line cord
which meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008.
SM 1 B603
PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
The flowchart illustrates your installation procedure.
Start
Do you install the No

expansion memory?
Yes
Install the fax unit

Install the expansion to the copier.
memory to the fax unit.
Do you install No
the handset?
Do you install the fax No

function upgrade unit? Yes
Yes Install the handset

to the copier.
Install the fax function
upgrade unit to the fax
unit.
Specify necessary
settings.
Do you install No
the optional G3 unit?
Check the operations.
Yes
Install the optional G3

unit to the fax unit.
End
B603I910.WMF
B603 2 SM
FAX UNIT
1.2 FAX UNIT
Fax Option
B603
Accessory Check
Description Q’ty
1. Fax key ................................................................................2
2. Fax panel.............................................................................2
3. Stamp ..................................................................................1
4. G3 decal ..............................................................................1
5. Serial number decal.............................................................1
6. FCC decal (for North America model only) ..........................1
7. Cable holder ........................................................................1
1 2 3
7
4 5 6
B603I906.WMF
NOTE: You need the cable holder when installing the optional handset (for the
North America model only).
SM 3 B603
FAX UNIT
CAUTION
Before installing this option, do the following:
1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer
buffer.
2. Press the operation switch to be the standby mode. Make sure the
power LED is not lit then, turn off the main switch and disconnect the
power cord and the network cable.
1. Remove the option cover [A]

( x 2).
2. Turn the battery switch on [B]. [B]
3. Install the fax unit [C] ( x 2).

4. Attach the serial number decal [D] on
the rear cover.
5. Attach the FCC decal on the rear
cover (only for USA/Canada).
[A]
[D]
B603I911.WMF
[C]
[F]
[E]
[H]
6. Remove the key cover [E] and install
one of the fax keys [F].
7. Remove the panel cover [G] and [G]
install the fax panel [H].
B603I902.WMF
B603 4 SM
FAX UNIT
Fax Option
8. Attach the G3 decal [A].
B603
B603I903.WMF
[A]
9. Install the stamp [B] to the ADF [C] (if installed).
10. Connect the telephone line to the “LINE 1” jack at
the left of the machine.
11. Turn the main switch on. [C]
[B]
G307I105.WMF
12. Wait until the following messages are displayed:

Function Problems
Functional problems with facsimile.
Data will be initialized.
13. Touch “OK” on the touch panel. The initialization starts.
14. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set.
15. Enter the service mode and program the serial number into the fax unit (SP3-
102-000). The serial number can be found on the serial number decal (attached
to the machine in step 4).
SM 5 B603
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT

Accessory Check
Description Q’ty
1. NCU.....................................................................................1
2. Interface board ....................................................................1
3. G3 board..............................................................................1
4. Cable ...................................................................................1
5. Flat cable .............................................................................1
6. Spacer .................................................................................4
7 Screw M3 x 6 ........................................................................6
1 2 3
4 5 6 B603I908.WMF
B603 6 SM
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
Fax Option
CAUTION
B603
1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer
buffer.
2. Press the operation switch to be the standby mode. Make sure the
power LED is not lit then, turn off the main switch and disconnect the
power cord and the network cable.
[B]
B604I901.WMF
[A]
1. Remove the “LINE 2” cover [A] on the fax-controller board.

2. Remove the fax controller board [B] ( x 1,  x 4).
SM 7 B603
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
[C] [A]
[B]
[E]
[G]
[D]
[F]
B604I903.WMF
3. Install the four spacers [A] to the rear of the fax-controller unit.
4. Install the interface board [B] on the spacers.
5. Install the flat cable [C] to the interface board.
6. Connect the flat cable to the fax-controller board [D] (the connector is on the
front of the fax-controller board).
7. Connect the G3 board [E] to the interface board ( x 2).
NOTE: See the diagram above and connect the G3 board to the correct slot.
Leave the other slot open–this slot is used by some local models.
8. Connect the cable [F] to the G3 board.
NOTE: The core [G] is on an end of the cable. Connect this end to the G3
board.
B603 8 SM
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
[B]
Fax Option
B603
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C] B604I902.WMF
9. Install the fax-controller board (with the G3 board and interface board) [A] to the
fax-controller base [B] ( x 4,  x 1).
10. Install the NCU [C] to the fax-controller unit ( x 4).
11. Connect the cable [D] on the G3 board to the NCU.
12. Fix the cable to the clamp [E].
13. Install the fax unit to the copier.
15. Enter the service mode. Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to “1.”
17. Print out the system parameter list and check that “G3” is listed as an option.
18. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.
SM 9 B603
FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT
1.4 FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT

CAUTION
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
[A]
[C]
[B]
A892I901.WMF
1. Turn on the DIP switch [A].

NOTE: The DIP switch works as the power switch.
2. Attach the spacer [B].
3. Install the fax function upgrade unit [C].
5. Enter the service mode. Set bit 7 of system switch 1E to “1.”
B603 10 SM
EXPANSION MEMORY
1.5 EXPANSION MEMORY
Fax Option
B603
CAUTION
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
[A]
G578I901.WMF
Install the expansion memory [A] into the memory slot.
SM 11 B603
HANDSET
1.6 HANDSET
The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
Accessory Check
Description Q’ty
1. Base bracket........................................................................1
2. Handset cradle ....................................................................1
3. Handset ...............................................................................1
4. Screw M3 x 6 .......................................................................4
1 2 3
B603I909.WMF
B603 12 SM
HANDSET
Fax Option
[E]
B603
[A] [D]
[C]
[B]
[G]
[F]
B603I907.WMF
1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover.

2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown.
3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D].
4. Attach the cradle to the bracket [B] ( x 2), then replace the label [C].
5. Install the handset [E] on the cradle.
6. Connect the cable [F] to the “TEL” jack at the rear of the machine.
7. Attach the cable holder [G].
NOTE: The cable holder is distributed with the fax unit (not with the handset).
8. Fix the cable to the holder.
SM 13 B603
ERROR CODES
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within • Check the line connection.
40 s of Start being pressed • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
• The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
• Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
• If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
0-01 DCN received unexpectedly • The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
• The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
0-03 Incompatible modem at the • The other terminal is incompatible.
other end
0-04 CFR or FTT not received • Check the line connection.
after modem training • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
• Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• Replace the FCU or NCU.
• The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
• If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be
a bad line.
Cross reference
• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-05 Unsuccessful after modem • Check the line connection.
training at 2400 bps • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
• Check for line problems.
Cross reference
• See error code 0-04.
B603 14 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
0-06 The other terminal did not • Check the line connection.
B603
reply to DCS • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• The other end may be defective or incompatible;
try sending to another machine.
Cross reference
0-07 No post-message response • Check the line connection.
from the other end after a • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
page was sent • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
• The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
• Check for a bad line.
• The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
0-08 The other end sent RTN or • Check the line connection.
PIN after receiving a page, • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
because there were too • Replace the NCU or FCU.
many errors
• The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
settings.
• The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
• Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-14 Non-standard post message • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
response code received • Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
sending to another machine.
• Noisy line: resend.
settings.
Cross reference
SM 15 B603
ERROR CODES

0-15 The other terminal is not The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
capable of specific following functions, or the other terminal’s memory is
functions. full.
• Confidential rx
• Transfer function
• SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected • Check the line connection.
after modem training in • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
confidential or transfer mode • Replace the NCU or FCU.
settings.
• The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
• If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a
line problem.
Cross reference
0-17 Communication was If the Stop key was not pressed and this error keeps
interrupted by pressing the occurring, replace the operation panel.
Stop key.
0-20 Facsimile data not received • Check the line connection.
within 6 s of retraining • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Try calling another fax machine.
• Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
• Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) • Check the connections between the FCU, NCU,
from the other end not & line.
received within 5 s of the • Check for line noise or other line problems.
previous EOL signal • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
• Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
0-22 The signal from the other • Check the line connection.
end was interrupted for • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
more than the acceptable • Replace the NCU or FCU.
modem carrier drop time
• Defective remote terminal.
(default: 200 ms)
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
• Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1
B603 16 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
0-23 Too many errors during • Check the line connection.
B603
reception • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or
rx error criteria.
Cross reference
• Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits
0 and 1
0-30 The other terminal did not • Check the line connection.
reply to NSS(A) in AI short • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
protocol mode • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
• Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
0-32 The other terminal sent a • Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
functions that the receiving
machine cannot handle.
0-52 Polarity changed during • Check the line connection.
communication Retry communication.
0-70 The communication mode • The other terminal did not have a compatible
specified in CM/JM was not communication mode (e.g., the other terminal
available was a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
(V.8 calling and called • A polling tx file was not ready at the other
terminal) terminal when polling rx was initiated from the
calling terminal.
0-74 The calling terminal fell back • The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due
to T.30 mode, because it to noise, etc.
could not detect ANSam • ANSam was too short to detect.
after sending CI. • Check the line connection and condition.
• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-75 The called terminal fell back • The terminal could not detect ANSam.
to T.30 mode, because it • Check the line connection and condition.
could not detect a CM in • Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
response to ANSam
(ANSam timeout).
0-76 The calling terminal fell back • The called terminal could not detect a CM due to
to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc.
could not detect a JM in • Check the line connection and condition.
response to a CM • Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
SM 17 B603
ERROR CODES

0-77 The called terminal fell back • The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to
to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc.
could not detect a CJ in • A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot
response to JM pass JM to the other end.
(JM timeout). • Check the line connection and condition.
• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-79 The called terminal detected Check for line noise or other line problems.
CI while waiting for a V.21 If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to
signal. T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected • The guard timer expired while starting these
due to a timeout in V.34 phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low
phase 2 – line probing. signal level can cause these errors.
0-81 The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
due to a timeout in V.34 • Try making a call at a later time.
phase 3 – equalizer training. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
0-82 The line was disconnected dedicated tx parameters.
due to a timeout in the V.34 • Try increasing the tx level.
phase 4 – control channel • Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
start-up.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
0-83 The line was disconnected
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
due to a timeout in the V.34
control channel restart • Try increasing the tx level.
sequence. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
V.34 phase 4 – control • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
channel start-up.
0-85 The line was disconnected • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
V.34 control channel restart. • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
0-86 The line was disconnected • The other terminal was incompatible.
because the other terminal • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available
in the currently selected
symbol rate.
0-87 The control channel started • The receiving terminal restarted the control
after an unsuccessful channel because data reception in the primary
primary channel. channel was not successful.
• This does not result in an error communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected • Try using a lower data rate at the start.
because PPR was • Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
2-10 The modem cannot enter tx • Replace the FCU.
mode
2-11 Only one V.21 connection • Replace the FCU.
flag was received
B603 18 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU.
B603
2-13 Modem initialization error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
• Update the modem ROM.
• Replace the FCU.
2-20 Abnormal coding/decoding • Replace the FCU.
(cpu not ready)
2-23 JBIG compression or • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
reconstruction error • Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
2-24 JBIG ASIC error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
• Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
2-25 JBIG data reconstruction • JBIG data error
error (BIH error) • Check the sender’s JBIG function.
2-26 JBIG data reconstruction • Update the MBU ROM.
error (Float marker error)
2-27 JBIG data reconstruction
error (End marker error)
2-28 JBIG data reconstruction
error (Timeout)
2-50 The machine resets itself for • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
a fatal FCU system error FCU.
2-51 The machine resets itself • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
because of a fatal FCU.
communication error
4-01 Line current was cut • Check the line connector.
• Check the connection between FCU and NCU.
• Replace the FCU or the NCU.
4-10 Communication failed • Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
because of an ID Code programmed correctly, then resend.
mismatch (Closed Network) • The machine at the other end may be defective.
or Tel. No./CSI mismatch
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
5-00 Data construction not • Replace the FCU.
possible
5-01 Data reconstruction not
possible
5-10 DCR timer expired
5-20 Storage impossible because • Temporary memory shortage.
of a lack of memory • Test the SAF memory.
• Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board
5-21 Memory overflow
5-22 Mode table overflow after • Wait for the messages which are currently in the
the second page of a memory to be sent or delete some files from
scanned document memory.
SM 19 B603
ERROR CODES

5-23 Print data error when • Test the SAF memory.
printing a substitute rx or • Ask the other end to resend the message.
confidential rx message • Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.
5-24 Memory overflow after the • Try using a lower resolution setting.
second page of a scanned • Wait for the messages which are currently in the
document memory to be sent or delete some files from
memory.
5-25 SAF file access error • Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.
6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time out • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
during reception of facsimile • Replace the FCU or NCU.
data
6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was
received
6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected • Check the line connection.
• Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
• Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile data • Check the line connection.
frame not received within 18 • Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
s of CFR, but there was no • Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
line fail
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding • Defective FCU.
error • The other terminal may be defective.
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received • The other end pressed Stop during
in reply to PPS.NULL communication.
• The other terminal may be defective.
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received • Check for a noisy line.
• Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
• See code 6-05.
6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still • Check for line noise.
received at the other end • Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
after all communication dedicated tx parameter for that address).
attempts at 2400 bps • Check the line connection.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during • The other terminal may be defective or
high speed modem incompatible.
communication
6-22 The machine resets the • Check for line noise.
sequence because of an • If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
abnormal handshake in the FCU.
V.34 control channel • Defective remote terminal.
6-99 V.21 signal not stopped • Replace the FCU.
within 6 s
B603 20 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
22-00 Original length exceeded the • Divide the original into more than one page.
B603
maximum scan length • Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower
the scan resolution if possible.
• Add optional page memory.
22-01 Memory overflow while • Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
receiving • Delete unnecessary files from memory.
• Transfer the substitute reception files to an
another fax machine, if the machine’s printer is
busy or out of order.
• Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due to • The job started normally but did not finish
line disconnection at the normally; data may or may not have been
other end received fully.
• Restart the machine.
22-04 The machine cannot store • Update the ROM
received data in the SAF • Replace the FCU.
23-00 Data read timeout during • Restart the machine.
construction • Replace the FCU
25-00 The machine software • Update the ROM
resets itself after a fatal • Replace the FCU.
transmission error occurred
F0-xx V.34 modem error • Replace the FCU.
SM 21 B603
FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES
2.2 FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES

SC871 FCU Flash ROM Abnormal
Message: Flash ROM error.
Quick Dial Table is Unavailable
Please call service.
The flash ROM mounted in the fax unit where the address book is stored has been
detected as abnormal.
FCU Flash ROM Access Limit Exceeded

Message: Flash ROM replacement is now
necessary for the Quick Dial Table.
The access limit of the flash ROM mounted in the fax unit has exceeded the limit.
You can continue to use the machine after this error occurs.
SRAM Abnormal
Message: Functional problems with facsimile.
Data will be initialized.
This message may appear immediately after the fax unit is installed, or when the
SRAM (backup RAM) is detected abnormal.
On this message screen:
• Initialize SRAM.
• Set the SRAM backup switch to ON.
Expansion SRAM Abnormal

Message: Some data will be deleted by installing Fax Memory Board.
Will you continue to install it? If you want to cancel, turn main power switch
off and take the Board out.
This message may appear immediately after installation of the Function Upgrade
Kit, or when the SRAM (backup RAM) is detected abnormal.
On this message screen:
• Initialize the expansion SRAM
• For the Function Upgrade Kit, set the backup switch to ON.
B603 22 SM
3. SERVICE TABLES
Fax Option
B603
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is
open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the
network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory
for reading or writing data.
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

3.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
Entering and Exiting SP mode
 1 Press the Clear Mode key.
.
 2 Use the keypad to enter “107”.
.
 3 Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
.
Fax SP 4 On the touch-panel, press Fax SP.
.
Exit 5 Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
.
SM 23 B603
SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) ! Section 3.2 Bit Switches

1 Mode No. Function
101 System Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for system settings
for the fax option
! Section 3.2 Bit Switches
102 IFAX SW (! Internet Fax (IFAX) Model J-C1 Service Manual)
103 Printer Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings
for the fax option
104 Communication Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for communication
settings for the fax option
105 G3-1 Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the standard G3 board !
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
106 G3-2 Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the optional G3 board
108 G4 Internal Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for the optional
ISDN settings ! Section 3.2 Bit Switches
(Japan Only)
109 G4 Parameter Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for optional ISDN
parameters ! Section 3.2 Bit Switches
(Japan Only)
B603 24 SM
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)
Fax Option
2 Mode No. Function
B603
101 RAM Read/Write
001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
! Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses
102 Memory Dump
001 G3-1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board. !
Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses
002 G3-2 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SG3-1 board.
004 G4 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.
(Japan Only)
103 G3-1 NCU Parameters
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard
G3 board. ! Section 3.3 NCU Parameters
104 G3-2 NCU Parameters
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. ! Section 3.3 NCU Parameters
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)

3 Mode No. Function
101 Service Station
001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
002 Select Line Select the line type.
102 Serial Number
000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.
103 PSTN-1 Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.
If the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or
“PABX(FLASH)”.
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the
G3-1 line.
003 Memory Lock If the customer does not want to receive
Disabled transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, turn this SP on.
104 PSTN-2 Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or
“PABX(FLASH)”.
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
2 line.
line, change this SP to on.
004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.
SM 25 B603
3 Mode No. Function

106 ISDN Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line setting for the ISDN line. If
the machine is installed to the PABX line,
select “PABX”. (Japan Only)
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for ISDN
line. (Japan Only)
line, change this SP to on. (Japan Only)
004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled send any fax messages on the ISDN line.
(Japan Only)
201 FAX Switches
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for scanner
settings for the fax option
! Section 3.2.2 Fax Switches
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)

4 Mode No. Function
101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
104 001 G3-2 ROM Version Displays the G3-2 modem version.
106 001 G4 ROM Version Displays the G4 (ISDN) ROM version.
(Japan Only)
107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used.
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
5 Mode No. Function
101 Initialize SRAM
000 Initializes the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.
102 Erase All Files
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
103 Reset Bit Switches
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters.
104 Factory setting
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM and
files in the SAF memory.
B603 26 SM
SP6-XXX (Reports)
Fax Option
6 Mode No. Function
B603
101 System Parameter List
000 Touch the “ON” button to print the system
parameter list.
102 Service Monitor Report
000 Touch the “ON” button to print the service
monitor report.
103 G3 Protocol Dump List
001 G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all

Communications communications for all G3 lines.
002 G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications) communications for the G3-1 line.
003 G3-1 (1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
Communication) communication for the G3-1 line.
004 G3-2 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications) communications for the G3-2 line.
005 G3-2 (1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
Communication) communication for the G3-2 line.
104 G4 Protocol Dump List
001 Dch + Bch 1 Prints the protocol dump lists for the G4
002 Dch line. (Japan Only)
003 Bch 1 Link Layer
004 Dch Link Layer
005 Dch +Bch 2
006 Bch 2 Link Layer
105 All Files print out
000 Prints out all the user files in the SAF
memory, including confidential messages.
NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
106 Journal Print out
001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication
records on the report.
002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication
records after the specified date.
SM 27 B603
6 Mode No. Function

107 Log List Print out
001 All log files These log print out functions are for
002 Printer designer use only.
003 SC/TRAP Stored
004 Decompression
005 Scanner These log print out functions are for
006 JOB/SAF designer use only.
007 Reconstruction
008 JBIG
009 Fax Driver
010 G3 CCU
011 Fax Job
012 CCU
013 Scanner Condition
B603 28 SM
SP7-XXX (Tests)
Fax Option
These are the test modes for PTT approval.
B603
7 Function
101 G3-1 Modem Tests
102 G3-1 DTMF Tests
103 Ringer Test
104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109 Recorded Message Test
110 G3-2 Modem Tests
111 G3-2 DTMF Tests
112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
124 IG3-1 Modem Tests (Japan Only)
125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests (Japan Only)
126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) (Japan Only)
131 IG3-2 Modem Tests (Japan Only)
132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests (Japan Only)
SM 29 B603
BIT SWITCHES
3.2 BIT SWITCHES

WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”,
as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner
that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Dedicated transmission Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated
parameter programming transmission parameters.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
transmission parameters.
1 Not used Do not change the setting.
2 Technical data printout on the 1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
Journal are listed on the Journal for each G3
0: Disabled communication.
1: Enabled
e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04
(1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Note:
EQM and rx level are fixed at “FFFF” in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at “00” for transmission records and
ECM reception records.
B603 30 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
B603
2 Rx level calculation
Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -
16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.

So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
3 Not used Do not change the settings.
4 Line error mark on the received If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the left edge
page of the page at any place where a line error occurred
0: Disabled in the data. Such errors are caused by a noisy line
1: Enabled for example.
5 G3/G4 communication This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameter display parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
0: Disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
6 Protocol dump list output after This is only used for communication
each communication troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
0: Off transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset
1: On this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is only
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps
Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
Compression mode MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication ECM: With ECM
mode NML: With no ECM
SM 31 B603
BIT SWITCHES
Width and A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction

reduction B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line
Note:
“40” is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short
protocol.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

to
1
2 Communication error reset 0: OFF/1: ON
Bit 2 turns on or off the communication error reset
switch. When this switch is on, the system forcefully
terminates the job under the following conditions:
1. A communication job has started, and
2. The job does not end within an hour.
After terminating the job, the system goes back to
the ready status. When this switch is on, the system
can automatically recover from a communication
error. You cannot adjust the timer for the second
condition above.
4 File retention time 1: A file that had a communication error will not be
0: Depends on User Parameter erased unless the communication is successful.
24 [18(H)]
1: No limit
6 Memory read/write by RDS (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
to Bit 7 6 Setting (0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
7 0 0 Always disabled but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
0 1 User selectable RDS operations to take place. RDS will
1 0 User selectable automatically be locked out again after a certain
1 1 Always enabled time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that
if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch
off until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.
B603 32 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
B603
0 Length of time that RDS is 00 - 99 hours (BCD).
to temporarily switched on when
7 bits 6 and 7 of System Switch This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
02 are set to “User selectable” Switch 02 are set to “User selectable”.
The default setting is 24 hours.

0 Program registration list output This setting determines whether the key to print the
key display selection program registration list is displayed on the screen.
1-2 Not used Do not change the settings.
3 Printing dedicated tx 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
parameters on Quick/Speed printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes
Dial Lists each).
0: Disabled The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
1: Enabled dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service
technicians).
SM 33 B603
BIT SWITCHES

0 Addition of image data from If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
confidential transmissions on page of confidential messages will be printed on
the transmission result report transmission result reports.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Inclusion of communications on 0: Communications that reached phase C (message
the Journal when no image tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
data was exchanged. 1: Communications that reached phase A (call
0: Disabled 1: Enabled setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
2 Automatic error report printout 0: Error reports will not be printed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
3 Printing of the error code on the 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
error report
0: No 1: Yes
5 Power failure report 1: A power failure report will be automatically printed
0: Disabled 1: Enabled after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned off last.
6 Conditions for printing the This switch becomes effective only when system
protocol dump list switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
0: Print for all communications 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
1: Print only when there is a dump list only for communications with errors.
communication error
7 Priority given to various types This bit determines which set of priorities the
of remote terminal ID when machine uses when listing remote terminal names
printing reports on reports.
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
1: Dial label > Tel. number > Quick/Speed Dial number.
RTI > CSI
B603 34 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
System Switch 0A SP No. 1-101-011
B603
3 Continuous polling reception This feature allows a series of stations to be polled
0: Disabled 1: Enabled in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the
polling reception file is erased.
The dialing interval is the same as memory
transmission.
4 Dialing on the ten-key pad 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
when the external telephone is external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
off-hook the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a
0: Disabled 1: Enabled wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine’s ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
5 On hook dial 0: On hook dial is disabled.
7 Line used when the machine This bit switch has no effect if Communication
falls back to G3 from G4 if the Switch 07 bit 0 is set to 0.
other end is not a G4 machine
0: PSTN 1: ISDN (Japan Only)
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E SP No. 1-101-015

3 Action when the external 0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external
handset goes off-hook handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
0: Manual tx and rx operation possible.
1: Memory tx and rx operation 1: The display stays in standby mode even when
(the display remains the same) the external handset is used, so that other people
can use the machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this
setting.
SM 35 B603
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0F SP No. 1-101-016

0 Country/area code for This country/area code determines the factory
to functional settings (Hex) settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
7 However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
00: France 11: USA settings and communication parameter RAM
01: Germany 12: Asia addresses.
02: UK 13: Japan
03: Italy 14: Hong Kong Cross reference
04: Austria 15: South Africa NCU country code: Function 06, parameter C.C.
05: Belgium 16: Australia
06: Denmark 17: New Zealand
07: Finland 18: Singapore
08: Ireland 19: Malaysia
09: Norway 1A: China
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz. 1C: Korea
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain 22: Hungary
0F: Israel 23: Czech
10: Canada 24: Poland

0 TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information
0: Superimposed on the page that the customer considers to be important (G3
data transmissions).
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
1 TSI (G3) or CIL/TID (G4) Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) or CIL/TID (G4)
printing position overprints information that the customer considers
0: Superimposed on the page to be important.
data
1: Printed before the data CIL: Command Information Line (Group 4)
leading edge (Japan Only)
2-6 Not used Do not change the factory setting.
7 Use of parallel memory This determines whether parallel transmission can
transmission with G4 be used with a G4 transmission or not.
transmission Note that this bit is only effective if Parallel Memory
0: Disabled 1: Enabled (Japan transmission is enabled (User Parameter 07 - bit 2).
Only)
B603 36 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
B603
0 TTI/CIL printing position in the TTI/CIL: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
to main scan direction Input even numbers only.
7 This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If
the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may overwrite
the file number which is on the top right of the page.
On an A4 page, if the CIL is moved over by more
than 50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings)


1 Going into the Energy Saver 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
mode automatically mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
0: Enabled active even in the Energy Saver mode.
1: Disabled


3 Selects a temporary address 0: When prefixed by #, handled only as a stored
for the number PC-FAX #. address.
1: When prefixed by #, when a digit exists that
prevents handling the transaction as a Coded,
One-Touch, or Group dialing, handles temporarily.
4 Number of jobs controlled for Sets the number of jobs controlled for PC-FAX
PC-FAX TX transactions. If “1” is selected (no limitations), control
0: 64 Jobs is relinquished to the device (standard 400,
1: No limitations (but expandable to 800).
conforms to device
limitations)
7 Special Original mode 1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form
0: Disabled or letterhead which has a colored or printed
1: Enabled background, change this bit to “1”. “Original 1” and
“Original 2” can be selected in addition to the “Text”,
“Text/Photo” and “Photo” modes.
SM 37 B603
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1A SP No. 1-101-026

0 LS RX memory remaining Sets a value of 4K.
to refresh value setting If the amount of memory remaining falls below 4K,
7 documents received in memory are printed to create
more space in memory.
Initial value: 0x80 (512K)
00-FF (0-1020 KB: Hex)
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1D SP No. 1-101-030

0 RTI/CSI/CPS display 1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of the
0: Disabled LCD panel during communication.
1: Enabled

0 Communication after the This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
Journal data storage area has printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
become full report (e.g., no paper).
0: Impossible 0: If the buffer memory of the communication
1: Possible records for the Journal has become full, fax
communications will become impossible, to prevent
overwriting the communication records before the
machine prints them out.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the
oldest communication records.
Cross Reference
• Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7
• Number of communication records for the
Journal:
200 records (standard)
1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit
installed)
1 Action when the SAF memory 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
has become full during the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
scanning 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
0: The current page is erased. the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
1: The entire file is erased.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
B603 38 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
B603
2 RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
0: RTI 1: CSI displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
3 File No. printing 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 Action when authorized If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
reception is enabled but stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not machine will not be able to receive any fax
yet programmed messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
0: All fax reception is disabled any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block
1: Faxes can be received if the messages from senders that do not include an RTI
sender has an RTI or CSI or CSI, change this bit to “1”, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at “0 (default setting)”.
5-6 Not used Do not change the setting.
7 RAM initialization after the When the machine detects that a Function Upgrade
optional Function Upgrade unit unit has been installed or removed, the machine
is installed or removed shows the following message on the display for the
0: Enabled customer.
1: Disabled
“Adding/Removing FAX Feature Expander causes
data loss. Turn Main Power Switch off and
remove/replace it to avoid loss. To continue, press
Yes.”
If Yes is pressed, the machine initializes the RAM to

the “with” or “without card” configuration. However,
changing this bit to “1” disables this initialization,
even if Yes is pressed.
Change this bit to 1 after installing the Function

Upgrade unit.
0: When the above message is displayed, the

machine initializes the RAM if Yes is pressed. The
amount of data lost depends on whether the board
is in or out. To avoid losing data, the user must
switch off immediately and put the Function
Upgrade unit back in.
1: When the above message is displayed, the
machine does not initialize the RAM even if Yes is
pressed. However, the fax unit cannot be used until
the user switches off, puts the Function Upgrade
unit back in, then switches back on. No data is lost.
SM 39 B603
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1F SP No. 1-101-032

1 Report printout after an original 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
jam during SAF storage or if overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
the SAF memory fills up Change this bit to “1” if the customer does not want
0: Enabled to have a report in these cases.
1: Disabled Memory tx – Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report
3 Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately after
(G3 reception) the machine receives it.
0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message after
1: After receiving all pages the machine receives all the pages in the memory.
4 Received fax print start timing
(G4 reception) (Japan Only)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
5-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
7 Action when a fax SC has 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
occurred than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically
0: Automatic reset resets itself.
1: Fax unit stops 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
fax unit stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”
B603 40 SM
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.2 FAX SWITCHES
Fax Option
FAX Switch 00 - Not used (do not change the settings)
B603
FAX Switch 01 SP No. 3-201-002
0 Scan density step value When scan density is adjusted manually away from
to (Text mode) the Normal setting, the threshold value for binary
7 picture processing changes for each step from the
value specified by Scanner Switch 02, by the
amount programmed here.
For example, with the default setting (14), the
threshold value changes as follows.
+3 (Darkest) : 71 (= 85 – 14)
+2 : 85 (= 99 – 14)
+1 : 99 (= 113 – 14)
0 (Normal) : 113 (Scanner Switch 02 setting)
-1 : 127 (= 113 + 14)
-2 : 141 (= 127 + 14)
-3 (Lightest) : 155 (= 141 + 14)
For smaller steps, input a lower value.

0 Binary picture processing: This setting determines the threshold value for
to Threshold for Text mode - binary picture processing in Text mode (when the
7 Normal setting (center position) scan density setting is at the center).
The value can be between 01 and FF. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: 71(H) = 113(D)
FAX Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings)

to Threshold for monotone binary picture processing in monotone background
7 background special original 1 special original 1 mode (when the scan density
mode - Normal setting (center setting is at the center).
position) The value can be between 01 and FF. For a darker
Default setting: A4(H) = 164(D)
SM 41 B603
BIT SWITCHES

to Threshold for colored binary picture processing in colored background
7 background special original 2 special original 2 mode (when the scan density
mode - Normal setting (center setting is at the center).
position) The value can be between 01 and FF. For a darker
Default setting: 28(H) = 40(D)

0 MTF filter level (Text mode)
to The value can be between 0(Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower value.
3 Default setting: 7
This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes.
4 MTF filter level (Text/Photo mode)
to The value can be between 0(Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower value.

0 Smoothing filter level (Photo The value can be between 0(Off) and 7. For a
to mode) weaker threshold, input a lower value.
This setting is independent from the threshold
setting specified by the copier SP modes.
FAX Switch 08 – Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 3-201-009
FAX Switch 09 – Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 3-201-010
B603 42 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
FAX Switch 0A SP No. 3-201-011
B603
4 to 7 MTF filter level (Colored background special original mode)
The value can be between 0 (Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower
value.
Default setting: 7
FAX Switch 0B SP No. 3-201-012

0 Scan margin setting (right and left margin in book scan ADF mode)
to The setting can be between 0 and F (H) (unit 0.5 mm).
3 Default setting: 2 mm
4 Scan margin setting (top and bottom margin in book scan and ADF mode)
to The setting can be between 0 and 7 (H) (unit 0.5 mm).
7 Default setting: 3 mm
FAX Switch 0C SP No. 3-201-013

0 Action when an original jam This bit is only effective when parallel memory tx is
has occurred while scanning disabled (user parameter 07 - bit 2).
If parallel memory tx is enabled, the machine always
the original into memory for
erases the scanned pages when an original jam
memory tx occurs. The machine then asks the user to retry from
0: Continues scanning after the first page, even if the parallel memory tx is not
recovery actually used.
1: Stops scanning and erases 0: The machine displays a message asking the user to
all scanned pages for that job put the jammed page back into the original stack, and
continues scanning.
The message is displayed for the time period specified
by scanner switch 0E, bit 2.
1: The machine erases all the scanned pages and
asks the user to retry from the first page.
1 to 2 Setting when an original size
cannot be recognized
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 No original
0 1 A5 
1 0 A5 
1 1 No original
SM 43 B603
BIT SWITCHES
FAX Switch 0D SP No. 3-201-014

7 Scan width for A5 lengthwise or 0: The machine scans the original as 210 mm (8.5")
B5 lengthwise originals width. The transmitted image has a blank area on
0: 210 mm (8.5”) the right.
1: Original width 1: The machine scans 148 mm (A5) or 182 mm (B5)
and centers the scanned data on a 216 mm width
transmitted image.
FAX Switch 0E SP No. 3-201-015

1 Scan resolution unit This bit determines which resolution unit will be
0: mm used for scanning a fax message.
1: inches Default setting: mm
FAX Switch 0F SP No. 3-201-015

0 A4/LT LEF-to-SEF turn 0: OFF/1: ON
Bit 0 activates or deactivates the A4/LT LEF-to-
SEF turn function. When this function is
activated, the machine sends A4/LT SEF data
even when the machine has fed an A4/LT LEF
original.
2 A5/HLT SEF-to-LEF turn 0: OFF/1: ON
Bit 2 activates or deactivates the A5/HLT SEF-
to-LEF turn function. When this function is
activated, the machine sends A5/HLT LEF data
even when the machine has fed an A5/HLT
SEF original.
FAX Switch 10 ~ 1F - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 3-201-016
B603 44 SM
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES
Fax Option
Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001
B603
0 Page separation mark 0: No marks are printed.
0: Disabled 1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
1: Enabled sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed
at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,
and a “2” inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split.
1 Repetition of data when the 0: The next page continues from where the previous
received page is longer than page left off.
the printer paper 1: The final few mm of the previous page are
0: Disabled repeated at the top of the next page. The amount of
1: Enabled repeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5
and 6.
2 Prints the date and time on This switch is only effective when user parameter 02
received fax messages - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
0: Disabled received fax messages) is enabled.
1: Enabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed date
and time at the bottom of each received page.

3-4 Maximum print width used in These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
the setup protocol switch 01 is “1”.
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Not used
0 1 A3
1 0 B4
1 1 A4
7 Received message width 0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
restriction in the protocol signal the print width depending on the paper size
to the sender available from the paper feed stations.
0: Disabled Refer to the table on the next page for how the
1: Enabled machine chooses the paper width used in the setup
protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and
4 above.
SM 45 B603
BIT SWITCHES
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
setup protocol
Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width
B5 256 mm width
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width
No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width

0 1st paper feed station usage for 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
fax printing messages and reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled 1: The specified paper feed station will not be used
1 2nd paper feed station usage for printing fax messages and reports.
for fax printing
0: Enabled Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed station
1: Disabled which has been specified by User Parameter Switch
2 3rd paper feed station usage 0F (15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette
for fax printing Selection feature.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3 4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled

0 Length reduction of received 0: Incoming pages are printed without length
data reduction.
0: Disabled (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
1: Enabled to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
1-3 Not used Do not change the settings
B603 46 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
B603
4 Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)
to
7 If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess
portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the
length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)

0 0
1 1
and so on until
F 15
Default setting: 6 mm
Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0

0 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
to <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
4 “N” is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
5 Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
to place.
6 0  1 0 1
  = 4 mm,   = 10 mm,   = 15 mm,   = Not Used
0 0  1 1
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 47 B603
BIT SWITCHES

0 Printing while a paper cassette
is pulled out, when the Just
Size Printing feature is Cross reference
enabled. Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

0 Reduction for Journal printing 1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure that
0: Off there is enough space in the left margin for punch
1: On holes or staples.
4 List of destinations in the 1: Only destinations where communication failure
Communication Failure Report occurred are printed on the Communication Failure
for broadcasting Report.
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where
communication failure occurred

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015

0 Paper size selection priority 0: A paper size that has the same width as the
0: Width received data is selected first.
1: Length 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
1 Paper size selected for This switch determines which paper size is selected
printing A4 width fax data for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has
0: 8.5" x 11" size both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size
B603 48 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015
Fax Option
B603
2 Page separation 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
0: Enabled separation to print a received fax message, the
1: Disabled machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
3 Printing the sample image on “Same size” means the sample image is printed at
to reports 100%, even if page separation occurs.
4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to
0 0 The upper half “0” to enable this switch.
only Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
0 1 50% reduction this feature.
in sub-scan only
1 0 Same size
1 1 Not used
7 Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the
among separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
(Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
0: Enabled paper size when page separation has taken place.
1: Disabled Other pages are printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F SP No. 1-103-016

0 Smoothing feature (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting receives halftone images from other manufacturers
1 0 0 Disabled fax machines frequently.
0 1 Disabled
1 0 Enabled
1 1 Not used
2 Duplex printing 1: The machine always prints received fax
0: Disabled messages in duplex printing mode:
1: Enabled
3 Binding direction for Duplex
printing
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
4 Printing fax messages in user 1: The machine holds the received fax messages
code mode until the machine exits the restricted access mode
0: Enabled (user code or key counter).
1: Disabled If the machine enters the restricted access mode
again while printing fax messages, the machine
stops printing the machine exits the mode again.
SM 49 B603
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001
0 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in receive mode to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
1 Bit 1 0 Modes protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
2 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in transmit mode to be used in the transmission and to be declared in
3 Bit 3 2 Modes phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
5 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems
Reception occur using JBIG compression.
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
6 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems
Transmission occur using JBIG compression.
0: Basic mode priority
1: Optional mode priority
7 Closed network (reception) 1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of the
0: Disabled other terminal does not match the ID code of this
1: Enabled terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.
B603 50 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
B603
0 ECM If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
0: Off 1: On communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
2 Wrong connection prevention (0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
to method sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the
3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the
0 0 None dialed telephone number. This does not work when
0 1 8 digit CSI manually dialed.
1 0 4 digit CSI (1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last
1 1 CSI/RTI 4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the other end does not
identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always
go ahead.
Note: This function does not work when dialing is

done from the external telephone.
6 Maximum printable page length The setting determined by these bits is informed to
to available the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
7 Bit 7 6 Setting protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
0 0 No limit
0 1 B4 (364 mm)
1 0 A4 (297 mm)
1 1 Not used

0 Burst error threshold If there are more consecutive error lines in the
0: Low 1: High received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on the
sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution 100 dpi 200 dpi 400 dpi
3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm 15.4 l/mm
Low settings 6 12 24
High settings 12 24 48
1 Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
0: 5% 1: 10% acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
2 Treatment of pages received 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
with errors during G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
SM 51 B603
BIT SWITCHES

3 Hang-up decision when a 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
negative code (RTN or PIN) is received.
received during G3 immediate 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
transmission receives RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.
7 Method of total error rate 0: Error rate is calculated by dividing the number of
calculation total lines by the number of error lines.
0: Normal method 1: Error rate is calculated by dividing the number of
1: French PTT requirement total plus error lines by the number of error lines.

0 Maximum number of page 00 - FF (Hex) times.
to retransmissions in a G3 This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
7 memory transmission Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

B603 52 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
B603
0 Fallback from G4 to G3 if the Also see system switch 0A bit 7.
other terminal is not a G4 Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual (G4
terminal Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 1C) for the
0: Disabled CPS code set (Cause Value set) that determines G4
1: Enabled (Japan Only) to G3 fallback.
3 Fallback from G4 to G3 0: If a communication falls back from G4 to G3, the
reflected in programmed machine will always start transmission with G3 from
Quick/Speed dials the next communication.
0: Fallback enabled 1: The machine will always start to transmit with G4.
1: Always start with G4
(Japan Only)
4 Fallback from G4 to G3 when 1: Enable this switch only when G4 communication
G4 communication fails on the errors occur because the exchanger connects G4
ISDN B-channel calls to the PSTN.
0: Fallback disabled This problem occurs with some types of exchanger.
1: Fallback enabled
(Japan Only)

Communication Switch 0A SP No. 1-104-011

0 Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time.
0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
1: From page 1 normal memory transmission.
7 Emergency calls using 999 If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to
0: Enabled 1: Disabled dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT
requirement in the Hong Kong.
SM 53 B603
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0B SP No. 1-104-012

0 Use of Economy Transmission These bits determine whether the machine uses the
during a Transfer operation to Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying
end receivers out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
1 Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
the Next Transfer Stations
2 Use of Label Insertion for the This bit determines whether the machine uses the
End Receivers in a Transfer Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
operation Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
3 Conditions required for 0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine
Transfer Result Report will always send a Transfer Result Report back to
transmission the Requesting Station after completing the Transfer
0: Always transmitted Request, even if there were no problems.
1: Only transmitted if there was 1: The machine will only send back a Transfer
an error Result Report if there were errors during
communication, meaning one or more of the End
Receivers could not be contacted.
4 Printout of the message when When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,
acting as a Transfer Station this bit determines whether the machine prints the
0: Disabled 1: Enabled fax message coming in from the Requesting
Terminal.
5 Action when there is no fax After the machine receives a transfer request, the
number in the programmed machine compares the last N digits of the
Quick/Speed dials which meets requesting terminal’s own fax number with all the
the requesting terminal’s own Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N
fax number is the number programmed in communication switch
0: Transfer is disabled 0C.)
1: Transfer is enabled 0: If there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine rejects the transfer
request.
1: Even if there is no matching number programmed
in the machine, the machine accepts the transfer
request. The result report will be printed at the
transfer terminal, but will not be sent back to the
requesting terminal.
B603 54 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Communication Switch 0C SP No. 1-104-013
B603
0 Number of digits compared to 00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
to find the requester’s fax number After the machine receives a transfer request, the
4 from the programmed machine compares the own telephone number sent
Quick/Speed Dials when acting from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed
as a Transfer Station Dials programmed in the machine, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to
the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick
Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the
report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
Communication Switch 0D SP No. 1-104-014

0 The available memory 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
to threshold, below which ringing (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
7 detection (and therefore One page is about 24 kbytes.
reception into memory) is
disabled The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E SP No. 1-104-015

0 Minimum interval between 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
to automatic dialing attempts (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
7 This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
SM 55 B603
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.)

0 Memory transmission: 01 - FE (Hex) times
to Maximum number of dialing
7 attempts to the same
destination
Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

0 Memory transmission: Interval 01 - FF (Hex) minutes
to between dialing attempts to the
7 same destination
Communication Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

0 Inch-to-mm conversion during 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch
transmission format are transmitted without conversion.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored

data in the SAF memory to the format which was
specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
1-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
6 Available unit of resolution in For the best performance, do not change the factory
to which fax messages are settings.
7 received
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit The setting determined by these bits is informed to
0 0 mm the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
0 1 inch protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
1 0 mm and inch
(default)
1 1 Not used
B603 56 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
B603
0 Standard G3 unit Set this bit to 0 if the user wants to use only the
0: Disabled ISDN line (option G4 unit), even for G3
1: Enabled (Japan Only) communications. However, for ISDN on hook
dialing, bit 7 of user parameter 30 must be set to 1.
Note: If the optional G4 unit is not installed, but this
bit is changed to ‘disabled’, no document can be
transmitted.
1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2) Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional
0: Not installed G3 unit.
1: Installed
2 Optional ISDN unit Change this bit to 1 when installing the optional
0: Not installed ISDN unit.
1: Installed (Japan Only)
7 G4 Dual communication 1: The machine uses only one B channel for
0: Enabled communication. This enables a customer to occupy
1: Disabled (Japan Only) another B channel for other purposes such as
internet communication.

0 SEP reception 0: Polling transmission to another maker’s machine
0: Disabled using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.
1: Enabled
1 SUB reception 0: Confidential reception to another maker’s
0: Disabled machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
1: Enabled disabled.
2 PWD reception 0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)
0: Disabled signal reception.
1: Enabled
7 Action when there is no box Change this setting when the customer requires.
with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)

SM 57 B603
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B SP No. 1-104-028

0 Extension access code (0 to 7) If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
to to turn V.8 protocol On/Off procedure, set this bit to “1” to disable V.8.
7 0: On Example: If “0” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
1: Off to 1. When the machine detects “0” as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if “3” is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C SP No. 1-104-029

0 Extension access code (8 and Refer to communication switch 1E.
to 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off Example: If “8” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
1 0: On to 1. When the machine detects “8” as the first
1: Off dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If “9” is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B603 58 SM
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.5 G3-1 SWITCHES
Fax Option
G3-1 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001
B603
0 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
to communication (tx and rx) the communication.
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0 0 Disabled the T.30 protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
1 0 All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
1 1 Not used reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
memory transmission transmission.
G3-1 Switch 01 SP No. 1-105-002

4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
6 CED/ANSam transmission Do not change this setting, unless the
0: Disabled communication problem is caused by the
1: Enabled CED/ANSam transmission.
G3-1 Switch 02 SP No. 1-105-003

0 G3 protocol mode used Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
0: Standard and non-standard only communicate with machines that send T.30-
1: Standard only standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
5 Use of modem rate history for 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
transmission using start from the highest modem rate.
Quick/Speed Dials 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
0: Disabled communications with the same machine when
1: Enabled determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
6 AI short protocol (transmission Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
and reception) Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
SM 59 B603
BIT SWITCHES
G3-1 Switch 03 SP No. 1-105-004

0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
(Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1 V.8 protocol in manual 0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSam
reception when starting a manual reception.
0: Disabled 1: The machine sends ANSam during manual
1: Enabled reception.
2 V.8 protocol 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
0: Disabled Note:
1: Enabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
0: After one PPR signal mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
received modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
1: After four PPR signals condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
received (ITU-T standard) 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit ≤ NRe send
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to

drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back before
page after receiving a negative sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN) received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6 V.8 protocol in manual 1: The machine detects either ANSam or CED
transmission during manual transmission.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B603 60 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
G3-1 Switch 04 SP No. 1-105-005
B603
0 Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
to threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
3 below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
G3-1 Switch 05 SP No. 1-105-006

0 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
0 0 1 1 7.2 k need to change this for specific receivers.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 1 1 0 14.4 k protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
to 7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
SM 61 B603
BIT SWITCHES
G3-1 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007

0 Initial Rx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) reception.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
0 0 1 1 7.2 k during reception.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4 Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the
to reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 disabled manually.
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, Cross reference
V.17/V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3-1 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008

0 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to (tx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting the modem and the telephone exchange.
0 0 None Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
0 1 Low specific receivers.
1 0 Medium
1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error
• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.
B603 62 SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3-1 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008
Fax Option
B603
to (rx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
0 0 None
0 1 Low Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 0 Medium the following symptoms occurs.
1 1 High • Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.

communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “1”.
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(V.34 rx mode; External)
G3-1 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-1 Switch 09 SP No. 1-105-010

0 ISDN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
1 0 Medium
(Japan Only) the following symptoms occurs.

communications.
SM 63 B603
BIT SWITCHES
G3-1 Switch 09 SP No. 1-105-010

2 ISDN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
0 0 None
(Japan Only) 0-20, 0-23, etc.

communications.
4 ISDN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Japan Only)
5 ISDN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
(V.34 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Japan Only)
G3-1 Switch 0A SP No. 1-105-011

0 Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
1 drop during image data time.
reception Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) frequent.
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
4 Maximum allowable frame This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
interval during image data (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
reception. between ECM frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
6 Reconstruction time for the first When the sending terminal is controlled by a
line in receive mode computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
0: 6 s 1: 12 s data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
B603 64 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
G3-1 Switch 0B SP No. 1-105-012
B603
0 Protocol requirements: Europe The machine does not automatically reset these bits
0: Disabled 1: Enabled for each country after a country code (System
1 Protocol requirements: Spain Switch 0F) is programmed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Change the required bits manually at installation.
2 Protocol requirements:
Germany
3 Protocol requirements: France
4 PTT requirements: Germany
5 PTT requirements: France
7 DTS requirements : Germany Change this bit manually if required.
G3-1 Switch 0C SP No. 1-105-013

0 Pulse dialing method P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
0 0 Normal(P=N)
0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)
1 0 Sweden
(N+1)
1 1 Not used
G3-1 Switch 0D SP No. 1-105-014

2 Data rate threshold during V.34 The machine changes the modulation parameters in
to reception the MPh signal to lower the initial modem rate
5 Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting during V.34 reception. If this switch is set to “0111”,
0 0 0 0 Normal the machine lowers the initial speed one step, for
0 1 1 1 Lower by example, from 28,800 to 26,400 bps.
one step This switch reduces transmission time if the
1 1 1 1 Lower by machine frequently sends PPR signals during V.34
two steps reception.
7 B signal detection time for V.34 Change this switch only when there are
polling transmission communication errors during V.34 polling
0: 75 ms (default setting) transmission to a machine with a Panasonic
1: 65 ms modem.
SM 65 B603
BIT SWITCHES
G3-1 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-1 Switch 0F SP No. 1-105-016

0 Alarm when an error occurred If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
in Phase C or later error communication, change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1 Alarm when the handset is off- If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
hook at the end of handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,
communication change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B603 66 SM
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES
Fax Option
B603
These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.
G3-2 Switch 00 SP No. 1-106-001
0-1 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0 0 Disabled the T.30 protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
1 0 All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
1 1 Not used reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
memory transmission transmission.
G3-2 Switch 01 SP No. 1-106-002

4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
6 CED/ANSam transmission Do not change this setting, unless the
0: Disabled communication problem is caused by the
1: Enabled CED/ANSam transmission.
G3-2 Switch 02 SP No. 1-106-003

0 G3 protocol mode used Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
0: Standard and non-standard only communicate with machines that send T.30-
1: Standard only standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
5 Use of modem rate history for 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
transmission using start from the highest modem rate.
Quick/Speed Dials 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
0: Disabled communications with the same machine when
1: Enabled determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
6 AI short protocol (transmission Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
and reception) Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
SM 67 B603
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 03 SP No. 1-106-004

0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
(Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
2 V.8 protocol 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
0: Disabled Note:
1: Enabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
0: After one PPR signal mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
received modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
1: After four PPR signals condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
received (ITU-T standard) 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit ≤ NRe send
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to

drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back before
page after receiving a negative sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN) received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
G3-2 Switch 04 SP No. 1-106-005

0 Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
to threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
3 below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
B603 68 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
G3-2 Switch 05 SP No. 1-106-006
B603
0 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
0 0 1 1 7.2 k need to change this for specific receivers.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit 2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
to 7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007

0 Initial Rx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) reception.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
0 0 1 1 7.2 k during reception.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit 2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
SM 69 B603
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007

4 Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the
to reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 disabled manually.
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, Cross reference
V.17/V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit 2
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3-2 Switch 07 SP No. 1-106-008

1 0 Medium
the following symptoms occurs.

communications.
0 0 None
0-20, 0-23, etc.

communications.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(V.34 rx mode; External)
B603 70 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
B603
G3-2 Switch 0A SP No. 1-106-011
0 Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
1 drop during image data time.
reception Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) frequent.
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
4 Maximum allowable frame This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
interval during image data (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
reception. between ECM frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
6 Reconstruction time for the first When the sending terminal is controlled by a
line in receive mode computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
0: 6 s 1: 12 s data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
G3-2 Switch 0B SP No. 1-106-012

0 Protocol requirements: Europe The machine does not automatically reset these bits
0: Disabled 1: Enabled for each country after a country code (System
1 Protocol requirements: Spain Switch 0F) is programmed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Change the required bits manually at installation.
2 Protocol requirements:
Germany
3 Protocol requirements: France
4 PTT requirements: Germany
5 PTT requirements: France
SM 71 B603
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 0C SP No. 1-106-013

0 Pulse dialing method P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
0 0 Normal(P=N)
0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)
1 0 Sweden
(N+1)
1 1 Not used
G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B603 72 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
3.3 NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
B603
The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units
that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The
factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by
RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter
programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this
will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code
unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.
Change the fourth digit from “5” to “6” (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the
settings for the first optional G3 interface unit.
Change the fourth digit from “5” to “7” (e.g. 680500 to 680700) for the
settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.
SM 73 B603
NCU PARAMETERS
Address Function Unit Remarks

680500 Country/Area code for NCU Use the Hex value to program the
parameters country/area code directly into this
address, or use the decimal value to
program it using SP2-103-001
Country/Area Decimal Hex

France 00 00
Germany 01 01
UK 02 02
Italy 03 03
Austria 04 04
Belgium 05 05
Denmark 06 06
Finland 07 07
Ireland 08 08
Norway 09 09
Sweden 10 0A
Switzerland 11 0B
Portugal 12 0C
Holland 13 0D
Spain 14 0E
Israel 15 0F
USA 17 11
Asia 18 12
Hong Kong 20 14
South Africa 21 15
Australia 22 16
New Zealand 23 17
Singapore 24 18
Malaysia 25 19
China 26 1A
Taiwan 27 1B
Korea 28 1C
Greece 33 21
Hungary 34 22
Czech 35 23
Poland 36 24
680501 Line current detection time 20 ms Line current detection is
680502 Line current wait time disabled.
680503 Line current drop detect time Line current is not
detected if 680501
contains FF.
680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
(high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit disabled.
(low byte)
680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit disabled.
(low byte)
B603 74 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
680508 PSTN dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680508 contains FF(H),
B603
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (address
68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone time 68050D / 68050E).
68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop time Italy: See Note 2.
68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)
68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms Detection is disabled if
this contains FF.
680510 PSTN ring-back tone off detection 20 ms
time
680511 PSTN detection time for silent period 20 ms
after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
680512 PSTN detection time for silent period 20 ms
after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper disabled.
limit (low byte)
680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lower disabled.
limit (low byte)
680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit disabled.
(low byte)
680519 PABX dial tone frequency lower limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
disabled.
68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower limit
(low byte)
68051B PABX dial tone detection time 20 ms If 68051B contains FF,
68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (680520 /
680521).
68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone time
68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop time
680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)
680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)
680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms If both addresses contain
680523 PABX ringback tone off detection 20 ms FF(H), tone detection is
time disabled.
680524 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms If both addresses contain
period after ringback tone detected FF(H), tone detection is
(LOW) disabled.
680525 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms
period after ringback tone detected
(HIGH)
SM 75 B603
NCU PARAMETERS

680526 PABX busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper disabled.
limit (low byte)
680528 PABX busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680529 PABX busy tone frequency lower disabled.
limit (low byte)
68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1 20 ms
68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1
68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2
68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2
68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3
68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3
680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4
680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4
680532 Busy tone continuous tone detection
time
680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-
OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance (±)
Bit 1 0
0 0 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always
0 1 50% be kept at 0.
1 0 25%
1 1 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

680534 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
upper limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680535 International dial tone frequency disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
680536 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
lower limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680537 International dial tone frequency disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
680538 International dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680538 contains FF,
680539 International dial tone reset time the machine pauses for
(LOW) the pause time (68053D /
68053A International dial tone reset time 68053E).
(HIGH)
68053B International dial tone continuous Belgium: See Note 2.
tone time
68053C International dial tone permissible
drop time
68053D International dial wait interval (LOW)
68053E International dial wait interval (HIGH)
B603 76 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
68053F Country dial tone upper frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
B603
limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is
680540 Country dial tone upper frequency disabled.
limit (LOW)
680541 Country dial tone lower frequency If both addresses contain
limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is
680542 Country dial tone lower frequency disabled.
limit (LOW)
680543 Country dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680543 contains FF,
680544 Country dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (680548 /
680549).
680546 Country dial tone continuous tone
time
680547 Country dial tone permissible drop
time
680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)
680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
68054A Time between opening or closing the 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
DO relay and opening the OHDI Function 06-2 (parameter
relay 11).
68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
Function 06-2 (parameter
12).
68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
Function 06-2 (parameter
13).
68054D Time between final OHDI relay 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
closure and DO relay opening or Function 06-2 (parameter
closing 14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
68054E Minimum pause between dialed 20 ms See Note 3 and 8.
digits (pulse dial mode) Function 06-2 (parameter
15).
68054F Time waited when a pause is Function 06-2 (parameter
entered at the operation panel 16). See Note 3.
680550 DTMF tone on time 1 ms Function 06-2 (parameter
17).
680551 DTMF tone off time Function 06-2 (parameter
18).
680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5 –3.5 Function 06-2 (parameter
signals while dialing dBm 19).
See Note 5.
680553 Tone attenuation value difference -dBm x 0.5 Function 06-2 (parameter
between high frequency tone and 20).
low frequency tone in DTMF signals The setting must be less
than –5dBm, and should
not exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.
SM 77 B603
NCU PARAMETERS

680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level -N x 0.5 –3.5 Function 06-2 (parameter
after dialling dBm 21). See Note 5.
680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5
after dialling
680556 Not used Do not change the
settings.
680557 Time between 68054Dh (NCU 1 ms This parameter takes
parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU effect when the country
parameter 15) code is set to France.
setting.
680559 Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open
for this interval.
68055B International dial access code (High) BCD For a code of 100:
68055C International dial access code (Low) 68055B - F1
68055C - 00
68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 68054F
is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
68055E Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
cadence detection enable flags 0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

68055F Not used Do not change the
to settings.
680564
680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:
680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD 680565 - FF
680566 - F0
to settings.
680571
680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: 1000/ N Function 06-2
range 1, upper limit (Hz). (parameter 02).
680573 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: Function 06-2 (parameter
range 1, lower limit 03).
range 2, upper limit 04).
range 2, lower limit 05).
B603 78 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
680576 Number of rings until a call is 1 Function 06-2 (parameter
B603
detected 06).
The setting must not be
zero.
680577 Minimum required length of the first 20 ms See Note 4.
ring Function 06-2 (parameter
07).
680578 Minimum required length of the 20 ms Function 06-2 (parameter
second and subsequent rings 06-2).
680579 Ringing signal detection reset time 20 ms Function 06-2 (parameter
(LOW) 09).
68057A Ringing signal detection reset time Function 06-2 (parameter
(HIGH) 10).
68057B Not used Do not change the
to settings.
680580
680581 Interval between dialing the last digit 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
and switching the Oh relay over to
the external telephone when dialing
from the operation panel in handset
mode.
680582 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit 3 2 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

to settings.
6805A0
6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled.
6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled.
6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
± 20 ms
6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A7 Acceptable CNG detection frequency disabled.
SM 79 B603
NCU PARAMETERS

6805A8 Acceptable CNG detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A9 Acceptable CNG detection frequency disabled.
6805AA Not used Do not change the
setting.
6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
6805AD Number of CNG cycles required for The data is coded in the
detection same way as address
680533.
6805AE Not used Do not change the
settings.
6805AF Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
(800Hz) detection frequency upper FF(H), tone detection is
limit (high byte) disabled.
6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz(BCD) If both addresses contain
(800Hz) detection frequency lower FF(H), tone detection is
limit (high byte) disabled.
6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI short 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
protocol tone
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm Function 06-2 (parameter
01).
6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm
6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
level
6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
level
6805BA ISDN: Tx level from the modem - dBm The setting must be
(Japan Only) between -12dBm and -
15dBm.
6805BB ISDN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805BA - 0.5N 6805BB (dB)
level (Japan Only)
6805BC ISDN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805BA - 0.5N 6805BC (dB)
level (Japan Only)
6805BD Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N
signal detection level) (dBm)
B603 80 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
6805BE Not used Do not change the
B603
to settings.
6805C6
6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 – Not used.
Bit 4 – V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.
6805C8 Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6805D9
6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s
6805E0 Maximum wait time for post 0: 12 s 1: Maximum wait time for
bit 3 message 1: 30 s post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can be
changed to 30 s.
Change this bit to “1” if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
NOTES:
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: – 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone: – 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
SM 81 B603
NCU PARAMETERS
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds

closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and
68054E.
B603 82 SM
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
Fax Option
B603
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be
described.
3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.

2. Press "Dest. Management" in the facsimile standby mode.
3. Press "Program/Change/Delete Quick Dial".
4. Select the destination key you want to program.
5. When the programmed dial number is
displayed, press "Start".
Make sure that the LED of the Start
button is lit as green.
B603S901.WMF
6. The settings for the switch 01 are now

displayed. Press the bit number that
you wish to change.
7. To scroll through the parameter
switches, either:
8. Select the next switch: press "Next" B603S902.WMF
or
Select the previous switch: "Prev." until the correct switch is displayed.
Then go back to step 6.
9. After the setting is changed, press "OK".
10. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
SM 83 B603
3.4.2 PARAMETERS
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 00
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 01
0 Tx level If communication with a particular remote terminal
to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting often contains errors, the signal level may be
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
0 0 0 0 1 -1 communications with that terminal until the results
0 0 0 1 0 -2 are better.
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4 If the setting is “Disabled”, the NCU parameter 01
: setting is used.
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled left.
5 Cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to Bit 7 6 5 Setting frequencies because of the length of wire between
7 0 0 0 None the modem and the telephone exchange when
0 0 1 Low calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 1 1 Disabled the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the

left.
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is

used.
B603 84 SM
Switch 02
Fax Option
B603
0 Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always
to Bit3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
3 0 0 0 0 Not used high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
0 0 0 1 2,400 bits.
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200 For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
0 1 0 0 9,600 must be changed to 0.
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
0 1 1 1 16,800 left.
1 0 0 0 19,200
1 0 0 1 21,600 If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 1 0 24,000 used.
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Other settings: Not used

6 AI short protocol Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Off Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
1: Disabled If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
Switch 03
0 Inch-mm conversion before tx The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting scanning. If “inch only” is selected, the printed copy
1 0 0 Inch-mm may be slightly distorted at the other end if that
conversion machine uses mm-based resolutions.
available
0 1 Inch only If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
2 DIS/NSF detection method (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
to Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
3 0 0 First DIS or transmission. The machine will then wait for the
NSF second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
0 1 Second DIS or
NSF If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
SM 85 B603
Switch 03
4 V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always end
0: Off at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
1: Disabled disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
5 Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are informed
in transmit mode to the other terminal during transmission.
0: MH only If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1: Disabled used.
6 ECM during transmission For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
to Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
7 0 0 Off the (0, 0) setting.
0 1 On Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
1 0 Not used are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
1 1 Disabled If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 06 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required - (Japan Only)

0 Data rate If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of G4
to Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting parameter switch 2 (bits 0 and 1) is used.
3 0 0 0 0 64 kbps
0 0 0 1 56 kbps
1 1 1 1 Disabled
B603 86 SM
Fax Option
B603
0 Layer 3 protocol If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of G4
to Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting parameter switch 6 (bit 0) is used.
3 0 0 0 0 ISO 8208
0 0 0 1 T.70 NULL
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4 Packet modulus If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of G4
to Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting parameter switch 6 (bit 4) is used.
7 0 0 0 0 Modulo 8
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
1 1 1 1 Disabled

0 Attachment of the Higher Layer This bit determines whether Higher Layer
to Capabilities Capabilities are informed in the [SETUP] signal or
1 not.
2 ISDN G3 information transfer In tx mode, this determines the information transfer
to capability capability informed in the [SETUP] messages.
3 0: 3.1 kHz audio In rx mode, this determines the information transfer
1: Speech capability that the machine can use to receive a call.
Set this bit to 1 if the ISDN does not support 3.1 kHz
audio.
SM 87 B603
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)

680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680040 to 68004F(H) - Scanner bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: CIL printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled (Japan Only)
Bit 6: TID printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled (Japan Only)
Bit 7: Not used
B603 88 SM
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report
Fax Option
printout)
B603
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report
printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 1 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages
(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.
0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
1 1 The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission
0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left page
Bit 7: Not used
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
SM 89 B603

Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the “Tone” mark over an ISDN line
0: UUI, 1: Tone (Japan Only)
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D) (Japan Only)
Bit 5: Action when receiving a SETUP signal containing no called number and the
G4 subscriber number was programmed in this machine.
0: Respond to the call, 1: Do not respond to the call
Bit 6: Action when the received HLC (Higher Level Capabilities) is Tel or BC
(Bearer Capabilities) is Speech.
0: Do not respond to the call, 1: Respond to the call
This switch determines which information transfer capabilities the machine can
accept when receiving a call.
1: When the received HLC is Tel (digital telephone) or BC is Speech (voice), the
machine responds to the call. In short, the machine receives every call.
This switch is useful for communication problems when the other terminal informs
the above transfer capabilities although it is a fax machine.
Bit 7: ISDN SPID programming (used only in the USA)
B603 90 SM
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Fax Option
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
B603
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection
0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) – up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer
/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)
0: Off, 1: On
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 1 1st paper feed station
0 1 0 2nd paper feed station
0 1 1 3rd paper feed station
1 0 0 4th paper feed station
1 0 1 LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size
paper is not available.
0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is
selected for broadcasting
0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press “Start” key without an original when using the on hook dial or the
external telephone,
0: displays “Cannot detect original size”.
1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
SM 91 B603

Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet
finisher)
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette
selection feature becomes empty.
0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.
1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not
specified by this feature.
Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-
scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the PC FAX error report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Reprint the documents fail to print from PC Fax driver
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC Fax
driver
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.
↓ ↓
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15) : Not used
6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16): Not used
6800E7(H) – User Parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used
B603 92 SM
Fax Option
Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)
B603
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 File retention impossible
0 1 24 hours
1 0 File retention impossible
1 1 72 hours
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
NOTE: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
6800EA to 6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 29 (SWUSR_1A to 1D)
: Not used
680EE(H) - User parameter switch 30 (SWUSR_1E)
Bit7: On hook dialing
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN (Japan Only)
NOTE: If this bit set to 1, the on hook dialing is available on the ISDN line. But, the
machine cannot use the G3 standard analog line for detecting the ringing
and on hook dialing.
6800F0 to 6800FF(H) - G4 Parameter Switches (Japan Only)
680100 to 68011F(H) - G4 Internal Switches (Japan Only)
680180 to 68019F(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)
See 68036C(H) for the type of network used for this number.
6801A0 to 6801A3(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
6801AA to 6801B3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN)
6801B4 to 6801C7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) (Japan Only)
6801C8 to 6801D3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) (Japan Only)
6801D4 to 6801DF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) (Japan Only)
6801E0 to 6801EB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) (Japan Only)
6801EC to 6801F7(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) (Japan Only)
6801F8 to 68020B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
note below.
68020C to 68021F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the note
below.
680220 to 680233(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the note
below.
680237 to 680276(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the note below.
680277 to 6802B6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the note below.
6802B7 to 6802F6(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following
SM 93 B603
6802F7 to 68030A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)

68030B to 68031E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
68031F to 680332(H) – PSTN-3 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
680333(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for
TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
680340 to 680342(H) - PSTN-1 line settings
680340
Bits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX.
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 Loop start
0 1 Ground start
1 0 Flash start
1 1 Not used
Bit 2: Telephone line type.
0: PSTN, 1: PABX
Bits 3 and 4: Dialing type.
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Pulse dialing
0 1 Not used
1 0 Tone dialing
1 1 Not used
680341: PSTN access number for loop start
Access number Hex value to program (BCD)
0 F0
↓ ↓
9 F9
00 00
↓ ↓
99 99
680342
Bit 0: Transmission disabled
0: Tx and Rx, 1: Rx only
Bit 1: Memory Lock reception
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
680348 to 68034A(H) - PSTN-2 line settings
680350 to 680352(H) - PSTN-3 line settings
680358 to 68035A(H) - ISDN line settings (Japan Only)
680360(H) - ID code (low - Hex)
680361(H) - ID code (high - Hex)
680362(H) - Confidential ID (low - BCD)
680363(H) - Confidential ID (high - BCD)
B603 94 SM
680364(H) - Memory Lock ID (low - BCD)
Fax Option
680365(H) - Memory Lock ID (high - BCD)
B603
68036C(H) - Network type used for the service station number
0 1 (H) - PSTN-1
0 2 (H) - PSTN-2
1 0 (H) - G4 (Japan Only)
0 7 (H) - G3 auto selection
680370 to 680377(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680370(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),
02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680371(H) - Year (BCD)
680372(H) - Month (BCD)
680373(H) - Day (BCD)
680374(H) - Hour
680375(H) - Minute
680376(H) - Second
680377(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
680384(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 4: Function Upgrade unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
680385(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Function Upgrade unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: ISDN unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed (Japan Only)
Bit 7: Not used
6803B8 to 6803CF(H) - G4 terminal ID (ASCII - Max. 24 characters) (Japan Only)
6803D0 to 6803E3(H) - ISDN CSI (Japan Only)
6803E4(H) - Number of ISDN CSI characters (Hex) (Japan Only)
6803E9 to 6803EC(H) - ISDN G3 sub-address (Japan Only)
6803ED to 6803F0(H) - ISDN G4 sub-address (Japan Only)
6803F1 to 6803F5(H) - SiG4 board ROM information (Read only) (Japan Only)
6803F1(H) - Suffix
6803F2(H) - Version (BCD)
6803F3(H) - Year (BCD)
6803F4(H) - Month (BCD)
6803F5(H) - Day (BCD)
6803F6 to 6803FA(H) – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
6803F6(H) - Suffix (BCD)
6803F7(H) - Version (BCD)
6803F8(H) - Year (BCD)
6803F9(H) - Month (BCD)
6803FA(H) - Day (BCD)
680402(H) - Option G3 board (G3-2) modem ROM version (Read only)
SM 95 B603
680406 to 68040B(H) - Modem ROM version (Read only)

680406(H) - Part number (low)
680407(H) - Part number (high)
680408(H) - Control (low)
680409(H) - Control (high)
68040A(H) - DSP (low)
68040B(H) - DSP (high)
680464(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680465(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680482(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680483(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680484(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680485(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680486(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
6BA000 – 6BA1FF(H) – Latest 64 error codes (Read only)
6BE988 – 6BF35F(H) – Latest 20 error communication records
B603 96 SM
OVERVIEW
Fax Option
B603
4.1 OVERVIEW
Fax Function
Upgrade
FCU
NCU G3
CCUIF
NCU
MBU Controller
Expansion
Memory
B603D901.WMF
The basic fax unit consists of three PCBs: an FCU, an MBU and an NCU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. The NCU switches
the analog line between the fax unit and the external telephone.
Fax Options:
1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This
allows full dual access. Only one extra G3 interface option can be installed. The
optional G3 unit consists of three PCBs: G3 board, NCU, and CCUIF.
2. Fax Function Upgrade Unit: JBIG compression becomes available. In addition,
this expands the system’s SRAM capacity to hold programmed telephone
numbers, memory files, etc.
3. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory
(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big
enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
SM 97 B603
BOARDS
4.2 BOARDS
4.2.1 FCU
JP7
Surge OHDI SW.

TIP Protection DB1
TRXD
Noise CML
Over- Filter Relay L-
RING current DC Loop Transformer
Protection Surge
Protection
JP8
Current
Sensor
NCU OHDISW
CMLSW
Hook0
Hook1
ExRing
T1 Ring
Noise Detection
Filter Circuit
T2
B603D902.WMF
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.
FACE2 (Fax Application Control Engine)
• CPU
• Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
• DMA control
• Clock generation
• DRAM backup control
• Ringing signal/tone detection
FBI (FACE Bridge Interface)

• Interface between the PCI bus and the FACE
• DMA control
Modem (Panasonic MN195006-E)

• V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
B603 98 SM
BOARDS
DRAM
Fax Option
• The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
B603
SAF memory : 4 MB
Working memory : 4 MB
Page memory : 8 MB
• The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
Memory back-up
• A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
Switches
Item Description
SW1 Reset switch, to reboot the FCU board
4.2.2 MBU
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains
the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system
data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.
ROM
• 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)
SRAM
• The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.
Memory back-up
• A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in
the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item Description
SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
SM 99 B603
BOARDS
4.2.3 NCU (US)

JP7
Surge OHDI SW.

TIP Protection DB1
TRXD
Noise CML
Over- Filter Relay L-
RING current DC Loop Transformer
Protection Surge
Protection
JP8
Current
Sensor
NCU OHDISW
CMLSW
Hook0
Hook1
ExRing
T1 Ring
Noise Detection
Filter Circuit
T2
B603D903.WMF
Jumpers
Item Description
JP7 These jumpers should be shorted when the machine is connected to a dry
JP8 line.
DB1 Also remove DB1 when the machine is connected to a dry line.
B603 100 SM
BOARDS
4.2.4 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA)
Fax Option
B603
SHUNT
CML Relay DCLSW
T1
TIP DO Sw.
RING TRXD
Current
R1 Sensor DC-
GS Loop
OHDI Sw.
DOSW
OHDISW
GS Sw.
CMLLSW
Hook0
SHUNT Hook1
T1 GSSW
TIP Noise
Filter Ring CSEL
R1
Detection
GS RSEL
Circuit
ExRing
B603D904.WMF
Control Signals and Jumpers

CSEL1 RSEL
Country CN2-5 CN1-13
CTR21 H H
Australia H H
South Africa H H
Malaysia H H
Hong Kong L L
New Zealand L L
Singapore L L
Asia L L
L: Low, H: High
CTR21 (Common Technical Regulation 21):

France, Germany, UK, Italy, Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, Ireland, Norway,
Sweden, Switzerland, Portugal, Holland, Spain, Israel, Greece
SM 101 B603
BOARDS
4.2.5 SG3-D BOARD
FCU NCCP
Flash
SDRAM
CPU ROM
Modem JBIG
(RU30)
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
CODEC AFE NCU

SG3-D
B603D905.WMF
The SG3-D board allows up to two simultaneous communications when used with
the the FCU.
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)

• Controls the SG3-D board
• CPU (RU30)
• Modem (V.34)
• JBIG
Flash ROM
• 8 MB flash ROM shared between the SG3 software and modem softare.
SDRAM
• 16 MB DRAM shared between the ECM buffer, line buffer, and work memory.
CODEC
• Converts analog data to binary data.
• Converts binary data to analog data.
AFE (Analog Front End)
• Analog circuit
• Data transfer
B603 102 SM
ADDRESS BOOK
4.3 ADDRESS BOOK
Fax Option
B603
The address book (directory) for this machine combines under one user name the
fax address and mail address.
With Printer Scanner Unit

All the address data is stored on the HDD. Up to a maximum of 2,000 items can be
stored for addresses.
Without Optional Printer Scanner Unit (Asia Model Only)

All the address data is stored in the FCU.
• Standard: 500 items
• With Expansion Memory: 500 items
• With Fax Function Upgrade Unit: 1,200 items
• With Expansion Memory and Fax Function Upgrade Unit: 1,200
SM 103 B603
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Desktop type transceiver
Circuit: PSTN (max. 2ch.)
PABX
Connection: Direct couple
Original Size: Book (Face down)
Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(single sided document)
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(double sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD
Resolution: G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note.
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note.
Note 1: Optional Expansion Memory required
Transmission Time: G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using
memory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at
standard resolution
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR
JBIG (optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit required)
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM
Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),
V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)
Data Rate: G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/line
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
B603 104 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Memory Capacity: ECM: 128 KB
Fax Option
SAF
B603
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)
Page Memory
Standard: 8 MB (Print: 4 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 16 MB (8 MB + 8 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 8 MB)
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.
With Fax Function

Item Standard
Upgrade Unit
Quick Dial 500 1200 (2000*)
Groups 100 100
Destination per Group 500 500
Boxes
150 400
(Information/Personal/Transfer)
Destinations dialed from the
500 2,000
ten-key pad overall
Programs 100 200
Auto Document 6 18
Communication records for
200 1,000
Journal stored in the memory
Specific Senders 30 50
*: With the Printer/Scanner Option
SM 105 B603
SPECIFICATIONS
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory
are installed.
With the
Without the
Expansion
Expansion Memory
Memory
Memory
400 400
Transmission file
Maximum number of
Without the Fax
page for memory 1,000 3,000
Function Upgrade
transmission
Unit
Memory capacity for
memory transmission 320 2,280
(Note1)
Memory
800 800
Transmission file
Maximum number of
With the Fax
page for memory 1,000 3,000
Function Upgrade
transmission
Unit
Memory capacity for
memory transmission 320 2,280
(Note1)
NOTE: 1) Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the

standard resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
B603 106 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Fax Option
B603
[A] [B]
[C]
[G]
[F]
[E] B603V901.WMF
[D]
Machine
Component Remarks
Code
Fax Unit B603 [A]
Interface Board [B]
Included in the optional G3
G3 Board B604 [C]
unit.
NCU [D]
Fax Function Upgrade Unit A892 [E]
Expansion Memory G578 [F]
Handset B433 [E] For USA model only.
SM 107 B603
INTERNET FAX (IFAX)
IFAX
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 IFAX INSTALLATION ................................................................................... 1
1.2 INITIAL SETTINGS ...................................................................................... 1
2. TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................................2
2.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 2
2.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES ....................................................... 7
3. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES........................................9

3.1 ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES ............................................................. 9
3.2 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH............................................................................... 10
3.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE......................................................... 16
3.4 IFAX RAM ADDRESSES............................................................................ 17
4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .........................................18

4.1 INTERNET FAX.......................................................................................... 18
4.1.1 INTERNET FAX FEATURES............................................................. 18
4.1.2 DNS SERVICE .................................................................................. 19
4.2 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ........................................................ 20
4.2.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION ...................................................................... 20
Procedure .............................................................................................. 20
Data Formats ......................................................................................... 20
Errors ..................................................................................................... 20
Results................................................................................................... 21
Selectable Options................................................................................. 21
Secure Internet Transmission ................................................................ 22
4.2.2 MAIL RECEPTION ............................................................................ 23
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure ............................................... 23
Characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 Reception............................................ 24
SMTP Reception.................................................................................... 24
SMTP Reception Characteristics ........................................................... 25
Delivery: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP
(Off Ramp Gateway)....................................................................... 26
Overview................................................................................................ 26
Handling Mail Reception Errors ............................................................. 29
Printing Received Mail ........................................................................... 30
Multi-part Messages............................................................................... 30
Manual e-mail reception......................................................................... 30
Secure Internet Reception ..................................................................... 30
4.2.3 MAIL BROADCASTING (E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARE COMBINED)... 31
4.2.4 TRANSFER REQUEST ..................................................................... 32
Operation at the Transfer Requester ..................................................... 32
SM i IFAX
Operation at the Transfer Station........................................................... 34
4.2.5 AUTOROUTING ................................................................................ 36
4.2.6 TRANSFER BOX............................................................................... 36
4.3 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) .......................................................... 37
4.3.1 SUBJECT AND LEVEL OF IMPORTANCE....................................... 37
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................... 37
Subjects Displayed on the PC ............................................................... 37
4.3.2 E-MAIL MESSAGES.......................................................................... 38
4.3.3 MESSAGE DISPOSITION NOTIFICATION (MDN) ........................... 39
Handling Mail ......................................................................................... 40
Setting up the Receiving Party............................................................... 41
Handling Reports ................................................................................... 41
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................42
1. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................. 42
IFAX ii SM
IFAX INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION
IFAX
1.1 IFAX INSTALLATION
IFAX requires the installation of the Fax Unit and the Printer/Scanner Controllers.
For details about installation, please refer to the main machine and the Fax Unit
manuals for the machine.
1.2 INITIAL SETTINGS

Users can set the IFAX initial settings. Please refer to the Network Guide Operating
Instructions.
Make sure that the following items are registered in the mail server before machine
installation.
• IP address
• Host name
• Mail account and the password
CAUTION: The initial settings include items related to user security, such as the
login password and IP addresses. So, please ask the user to input the
initial settings of the IFAX. If the user asks you to input the initial
settings, be sure to keep the settings confidential.
To enable IFAX functions, do the following procedure in the User Tools mode:
User Tools > Facsimile Features > E-Mail Settings > Internet Fax Settings
SM 1 IFAX
ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
solve the problem as suggested below.
Code Meaning Cause Action
14-00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to the • Register the address of the
SMTP server. Occurs for any error system administrator.
other than 14-01 to 16. For example, • Set the User Parameter Switch
the mail address of the system 21 (15[H]) Bit 4 to “Off”.
administrator is not registered.
14-01 SMTP Connection Failed to connect to the SMTP server • Check the IP address of the
Failed (timeout) because the server could SMTP/DNS server.
not be found. • Check the traffic on the LAN.
• The IP address for the SMTP • Check the machine settings
server is not stored in the such as the SMTP port setting,
machine. DNS server setting, and so on.
• The DNS IP address is not
registered.
• Network not operating correctly.
14-02 No Service by SMTP SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact the network
Service (421) administrator. Confirm correct
SMTP server settings and
operation.
14-03 Access to SMTP SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the network
Server Denied (450) administrator. Confirm correct
operation.
14-04 Access to SMTP SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the network
Server Denied (550) administrator. Confirm correct
operation.
14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full SMTP Server hard disk full. Contact the network
(452) administrator. Free space on the
HDD of the SMTP server.
14-06 User Not Found on The user does not exist locally. • Check that the mail address is
SMTP Server (551) correct.
• Contact the network
administrator. Check that the
e-mail the user intended to
send exists on the SMTP
server.
14-07 Data Send to SMTP SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the network
Server Failed (4XX) administrator. Confirm correct
operation.
14-08 Data Send to SMTP SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the network
Server Failed (5XX) administrator. Confirm correct
operation.
IFAX 2 SM

14-09 Authorization Failed for POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP POP-Before-SMTP:
Sending to SMTP authorization failed. • Check the IFAX user name
IFAX
Server and password.
• Check that POP server is set
correctly.
• Check the SMTP server
settings.
SMTP Authorization:
• Check the SMTP server user
name and password.
• Check the encryption settings.
• Check the SMTP server
settings.
14-10 Addresses Exceeded Number of broadcast addresses The maximum number of
exceeded the limit for the SMTP addresses depends on the SMTP
server. server.
14-11 Buffer Full The send buffer is full so the No action required. The
transmission could not be completed. transmission will be recalled and
Buffer is full due to using Scan-to- sent as soon as buffer space is
Email while the buffer is being used available.
send mail at the same time.
14-12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because • Divide the original into sections
the detected size of the file was too and send as separate files.
large. • Use G3 to send the original.
• Reduce the TX mail size.
14-13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because No action required.
the user pressed Stop.
14-30 MCS File Creation Failed to create the MCS file • Delete unneeded files from the
Failed because: Document Server.
• The number of files created with • Initialize the HDD.
other applications on the • If initialization fails to correct
Document Server has exceeded the problem, replace the HDD.
the limit. • Update the software.
• HDD is full or not operating
correctly.
• Software error.
14-31 UFS File Creation UFS file could not be created: No action required. Once the job
Failed • Not enough space in UFS area to currently using the UFS area is
handle both Scan-to-Email and finished sufficient space will
IFAX transmission. become available. If this does not
• HDD full or not operating correctly. solve the problem:
• Software error. • Initialize the HDD.
• If initialization fails to correct
the problem, replace the HDD.
• Update the software.
14-32 Cancelled the Mail Due Error detected with NFAX and send Update the software.
to Error Detected by was cancelled due to a software
NFAX error.
14-33 No Mail Address For Neither the mail address of the Contact the network
the Machine machine nor the mail address of the administrator. Check that these e-
network administrator is registered. mail addresses are registered
correctly.
14-50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error, No action required. If the problem
the send was cancelled: persists, update the firmware.
• Address book was being edited
during creation of the notification
mail.
• Software error.
SM 3 IFAX

14-51 UCS Destination Not even one return notification can Check the address in the address
Download Error be downloaded: book.
• The address book was being
edited.
• The number for the specified
destination does not exist (it was
deleted or edited after the job was
created).
14-60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user No action required.
failed to cancel the send operation.
14-61 Notification Mail Send All addresses for return notification • Correct the mail address for
Failed for All mail failed. the PC.
Destinations • Contact the network
administrator. Check the other
error codes to determine if
other errors occur at the same
time.
15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server At startup, the system detected that Register the name of the
Not Registered the IP address of the POP3/IMAP4 POP3/IMAP4 server.
server has not been registered in the
machine.
15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has Register the e-mail account, user
Account Information not been registered. name, and password.
Not Registered
15-03 Mail Address Not The mail address has not been Register the e-mail account and
Registered registered. e-mail address.
15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error other than 15-11 to 15-18. Update the firmware, update the
Error server software.
15-11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server Contact the network
could not be found: administrator.
• The IP address for DNS or • Check that the DNS address is
POP3/IMAP4 server is not stored correct.
in the machine. • Check that the POP3/IMAP4
• The DNS IP address is not IP addresses are correct.
registered. • Confirm correct operation of
• Network not operating correctly. the network.
15-12 Authorization Error POP3/IMAP4 send authorization Contact the network
failed: administrator:
• Incorrect IFAX user name or • Check that the IFAX user
password. name and password are
• Access was attempted by another correct.
device, such as the PC. • Determine whether another
• POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect. device of the same account
attempted access at same
time.
• Check that the POP/IMAP4
settings are correct.
15-13 Receive Buffer Full Occurs only during manual reception. No action required. The next
Transmission cannot be received due transmission can be received as
to insufficient buffer space. The soon as the other application
buffer is being used for mail send or releases the buffer area.
Scan-to-Email.
15-14 Mail Header Format The mail header is not standard Advise the sender to send e-mails
Error format. For example, the Date line in the standard format.
description is incorrect.
15-15 Mail Divide Error The e-mail is not in standard format. Advise the sender to send e-mails
There is no boundary between parts in the standard format.
of the e-mail, including the header.
IFAX 4 SM

15-16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because • Increase the setting that limits
it is too large. the size of e-mail that can be
IFAX
received (in the User Tools>
System Settings> File Transfer
menu).
• Ask the sender to break the e-
mail into smaller parts and
send them separately.
15-17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual receiving Contact the network administrator
only because the network is not and check that the network is
operating correctly. operating correctly.
15-18 Incomplete Mail Only one portion of the mail was Ask the sender to send as one
Received received. transmission.
15-31 Final Destination for The format of the final destination for Ask the sender to check the final
Transfer Request the transfer request was incorrect. destination.
Reception Format Error
15-39 Send/Delivery The transmission cannot be delivered • Delete the destination file to
Destination Error to the final destination: enable receiving.
• Destination file format is incorrect. • Ask the sender to check the
• Could not create the destination transfer destination and final
for the file transmission. destination.
15-41 SMTP Receive Error Reception rejected because the • Check the content of the
transaction exceeded the limit for the “From” entry in the mail
“Auth. E-mail RX” setting. header.
• Check the “Auth. E-mail RX”
setting.
15-42 Off Ramp Gateway The delivery destination address was • Enable the Off Ramp Gateway
Error specified with Off Ramp Gateway function.
OFF. • Ask the sender not to specify
the Off Ramp Gateway
address.
15-43 Address Format Error Format error in the address of the Off Ask the sender to check the mail
Ramp Gateway. destination.
15-44 Addresses Over The number of addresses for the Off Ask the sender to check the mail
Ramp Gateway exceeded the limit of destination.
30.
15-61 Attachment File Format The attached file is not TIFF format. Try to check the format of the
Error sent mail, then ask the user to
use TIFF format.
15-62 TIFF File Compatibility Could not receive transmission due Ask the sender to check the
Error to: following:
Resolution error • File was sent in TIFF format.
• Image of resolution greater than • Compatibility of the resolution
200 dpi without extended memory. setting.
• Resolution is not supported. • Size of the page.
Page size error • Method used to compress the
• The page size was larger than A3. file.
Compression error
• File was compressed with other
than MH, MR, or MMR.
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment • Ask the sender to check that
could not be received because the the attachment was sent in
TIFF header is incorrect: correctTIFF format.
• The TIFF file attachment is a type • If the problem persists, update
not supported. the software.
• The TIFF file attachment is
corrupted.
• Software error.
SM 5 IFAX

15-64 TIFF Decompression The file received as an attachment • Ask the sender to check that
Error caused the TIFF decompression the attachment was sent in
error: correct TIFF format.
• The TIFF format of the attachment • If the problem persists, update
is corrupted. the software.
• Software error.
15-71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received Ask the sender to check the
because the attachment was not content of the attachment.
binary image data.
15-73 MDN Status Error Could not find the Disposition line in Ask the sender to resend the
the header of the Return Receipt, or mail. If the problem persists,
there is a problem with the firmware. update the firmware.
15-74 MSDN Message ID Could not find the Original Message Ask the sender to resend the
Error ID line in the header of the Return mail. If the problem persists,
Receipt, or there is a problem with update the firmware.
the firmware.
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Could not receive the transmission No action required. When
Error because the destination buffer is full destinations are used and a
and the destination could not be space opens in the buffer, the
created (this error may occur when transmission will be received.
receiving a transfer request or a
request for notification of reception).
15-81 Repeated Destination Could not repeat receive the No action required. When
Registration Error transmission because the destination destinations are used and a
buffer is full and the destination could space opens in the buffer, the
not be created (this error may occur transmission will be received.
when receiving a transfer request or
a request for notification of
reception).
15-91 Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer • As the send to check both the
to the final destination: transfer destination and the
• The format of the final destination final destination.
or the transfer destination is • When destinations open, the
incorrect. transmission will be received.
• Destinations are full so the final
and transfer destinations could not
be created.
15-92 Memory Overflow Transmission could not be received • Expand SAF memory.
because memory overflowed during • Ask the sender to break up the
the transaction. file and send the parts
separately.
15-93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete due Initialize memory. If the problem
to a malfunction of SAF memory. persists, replace the MBU.
15-94 Incorrect ID Code The machine rejected an incoming e- • Ask the sender to correct the
mail for transfer request, because the ID code.
ID code in the incoming e-mail did • Set IFAX SW03 Bit 3 to “1”.
not match the ID code registered in
the machine.
15-95 Transfer Station The machine rejected an incoming e- Inform the transfer requester that
Function mail for transfer because the transfer this machine does not support the
function was unavailable. transfer station function.
IFAX 6 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
2.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
IFAX
Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of
the network is causing the problem.
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Route
1. Connection with the • Check that the LAN cable
LAN is connected to the
machine.
• Check that the LEDs on
General LAN the hub are lit.
2. LAN activity • Check that other devices
connected to the LAN can
communicate through the
LAN.
1. Network settings on • Check the network • Is the IP address
the PC settings on the PC. registered in the TCP/IP
properties in the network
setup correct? Check the
IP address with the
administrator of the
network.
Between IFAX and 2. Check that PC can • Use the “ping” command • At the MS-DOS prompt,
PC connect with the on the PC to contact the type ping then the IP
machine machine. address of the machine,
then press Enter.
3. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN • Use the “Network”
machine parameters function in the User Tools.
• Check if there is an IP • If there is an IP address
address conflict with other conflict, inform the
PCs. administrator.
1. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN • Use the “Network”
machine parameters function in the User Tools.
• Check if there is an IP • If there is an IP address
address conflict with other conflict, inform the
PCs. administrator.
Between machine 2. E-mail account on the • Make sure that the • Ask the administrator to
and e-mail server server machine can log into the check.
e-mail server.
• Check that the account
and password stored in
the server are the same
as in the machine.
3. E-mail server • Make sure that the client • Ask the administrator to
devices which have an check.
account in the server can • Send a test e-mail with
send/receive e-mail. the machine’s own
Between machine
and e-mail server number as the
destination. The machine
receives the returned e-
mail if the communication
is performed successfully.
1. E-mail account on the • Make sure that the PC • Ask the administrator to
Server can log into the e-mail check.
server.
Between e-mail
server and internet • Check that the account
and password stored in
the server are the same
as in the machine.
SM 7 IFAX
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Route
2. E-mail server • Make sure that the client • Ask the administrator to
devices which have an check.
account in the server can • Send a test e-mail with
send/receive e-mail. the machine’s own
number as the
destination. The machine
receives the returned e-
mail if the communication
is performed successfully.
3. Destination e-mail Make sure that the e-mail
address address is actually used.
Check that the e-mail
address contains no
incorrect characters such as
spaces.
4. Router settings Use the “ping” command to • Ask the administrator of
contact the router. the server to check.
Check that other devices
connected to the router can
sent data over the router.
1. Error message by e- • Check whether e-mail can • Inform the administrator
mail from the be sent to another of the LAN.
network of the address on the same
Between e-mail destination. network, using the
server and internet application e-mail
software.
• Check the error e-mail
message.
IFAX 8 SM
ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES
3. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES
IFAX
3.1 ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES
1. Ensure that the machine is in standby mode.
2. Press , enter   with the 10-key pad, then hold down  for more
than 3 seconds. The SP mode main menu opens.
3. Touch “Fax SP” on the touch-panel to enter the fax service mode.
4. Use SP1102 1~16 to set the bit switches for IFAX. For details, refer to the
Service Tables on the following pages.
WARNING
Never adjust a bit switched marked “DFU” or “Japan Only," as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not
accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas,
such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List print out.
SM 9 IFAX
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
3.2 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH

Only one SP number is used to access IFAX bit switches. These bit switches are
described in the tables below.
SP IFAX SW
1102 1 00
Bits 0~6: Original Width of TX Attachment File
This setting sets the maximum size of the original that the destination can receive.
(Bits 3~7 are reserved for future use or not used.)
0: On
1: Off
Note: If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the larger size has priority. For
example, if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to “1” then the maximum size is “A3” (Bit 2).
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved A3 B4 A4
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the
destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving machine. The original width
selected with this switch is used as the RX machine’s original width setting, and the
original is reduced to this size before sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can accept,
the machine detects this and this causes an error.
Bit 7: Not Used.
IFAX 10 SM
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
SP IFAX SW
IFAX
1102 2 01
Bits 0~ 6: Original Line Resolution of TX Attachment File
This setting sets the maximum resolution of the original that the destination can
receive.
0: Not selected
1: Selected
Note: If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the higher resolution has
priority. For example, if both Bit 3 and Bit 2 are set to “1” then the resolution is set for
"Reserve (300 x 300)" (Bit 3).
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Reserved Reserved 400 x 400 Reserved 200x400 200x200 200x100
Super Fine Fine Detail Standard
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the
destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (resolution setting) of the receiving machine.
The resolution selected with this switch is used as the RX machine’s resolution
setting, and the original resolution is converted before sending.
The default is both 200 x 100 and 200 x 200 are selected.
If the resolution set with this switch is higher than the receiving fax can accept, the
machine detects this and this causes an error.
Note: The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400
resolution.
Bit 7: mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.
0: Off (No conversion)
1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to “1”), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
Note: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver
to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch
selection is determined by the sender fax.
Only two choices are available for transmission: inch statements and inch images, or
inch statements and mm images.
When this switch is Off (0):
• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
• Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
• Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
• Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
• Images received in mm are converted to inches.
SM 11 IFAX
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
SP IFAX SW
1102 3 02
Bit 0: RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
• When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the “From” address and
“Subject” address are printed as header information.
• When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
Bit 1: Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error

This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail attachment
are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This allows the
customer to see which documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent
to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
Bits 2~3: Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.
00: “Dispatched” Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the
Return Receipt with “dispatched” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The “dispatched” string is included in the Subject string.
01: “Displayed” Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the
Return Receipt with “displayed” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The “displayed” string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
Note: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to “00”
(for “dispatched”) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any
setting other than “displayed” (01) causes a problem, change the setting to “01” to
enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
Bits 4~6: Not Used.
Bit 7: Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
Note: The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400
resolution.
IFAX 12 SM
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
SP IFAX SW
IFAX
1102 4 03
Bit 0: Original Output at Transfer Station
This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it is
received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is the
same as for G3 transfer transmissions.
0: Received original not output at the transfer station.
1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station has
transferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has been
transferred.
Bit 1: Transfer Result Report
This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned to
the transfer requestor.
0: Returns the report after each transfer.
1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer.
Bit 2: Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request
This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations are
correct or not.
0: The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only (addresses with no
errors in them).
1: If any address has an error in it, the transfer station transfers no transmissions
and returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated the
transfer.
There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station to
determine whether the final destination addresses are correct or not. This setting
determines whether or not the transfer station transfers the transmissions if there is a
mistake in even one of the final destination addresses.
Bit 3: Polling ID Check for Reception of Transfer Request
This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions are
checked to ensure that the polling IDs match.
0: Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs.
1: Receives and transfers all messages, even if the polling IDs do not match.
Bits 4~7: Not Used
SP IFAX SW
1102 5 04
Bit 0: Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI
of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine
automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
Bits 1~7: Not Used
SM 13 IFAX
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
SP IFAX SW
1102 6 05
Bit 0: Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive
transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9"
in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
Bits 1~7: Not Used
SP IFAX SW
1102 7 06
Not Used
SP IFAX SW
1102 8 07
Not Used
SP IFAX SW
1102 9 08
Bits 0~7: Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores
fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds
incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory
available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then
stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
Note: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the
amount of memory.
SP IFAX SW
1102 10 09
Bits 0~3: Not Used
Bits 4~7: Restrict TX Retries
This setting determines the number of retries when connection and transmission fails
due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
SP IFAX SW
1102 11 0A
Not Used.
SP IFAX SW
1102 12 0B
Not Used.
IFAX 14 SM
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
SP IFAX SW
IFAX
1102 13 0C
Not Used.
SP IFAX SW
1102 14 0D
Not Used
SP IFAX SW
1102 15 0E
Not Used
SP IFAX SW
1102 16 0F
Bit 0: Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or
output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
Bits 1~7: Not Used
SM 15 IFAX
FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
3.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

When you need to update the firmware for IFAX, follow the firmware update
procedures described in the main machine Service Manual.
IFAX 16 SM
IFAX RAM ADDRESSES
3.4 IFAX RAM ADDRESSES
IFAX
Parameter Function Data Format Address Comments
Mail Address Mail address of the ASC: 128 bytes 69FEAE 128 x 3 area
fax account. provided, but only
the first is used.
User Name User name of the fax ASC: 64 bytes 6A002E 64 x 3 area
account. provided, but only
the first is used.
Password Password of the fax ASC: 64 bytes 6A00EE 64 x 3 area
account. provided, but only
the first is used.
RX Mail Capacity --- 4 Bytes 6A01AE 64-1024 Kbytes
SMTP RX Address or partial ASC: 128 bytes 6A01B2
Permission address that is used
Address to limit access to mail
delivery (see pg. 4-
11, “Auth E-Mail
Rx”).
Doc. Svr. RX Number of RX 2 bytes 6A0232
Notification No Notification Mails that
have been sent in
order to notify receipt
of a fax message on
the document server.
SM 17 IFAX
INTERNET FAX

4.1 INTERNET FAX
4.1.1 INTERNET FAX FEATURES
The Internet fax produced by Ricoh is also known as IFAX.
An Internet fax converts fax hard copy document data to e-mail format and
transmits the data over the Internet. Another IFAX or a PC can receive the e-mail
sent by an IFAX. Rather than inputting the telephone number of the destination, the
user inputs the applicable e-mail address.
Documents are sent as e-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image (the
scanned original), so a MIME-compatible e-mail reader is required in order to view
documents received on a PC. To view an attached image, software capable of
displaying TIFF-F formatted images is required.
NOTE: The IFAX must be connected to a LAN and set up correctly in order to use
its Internet fax functions.
The main IFAX features are:

• TCP/IP communication protocols that support connection to a LAN with e-mail.
• Easy-to-master operations that are identical to those of a standard fax machine.
• Fax transmission and reception over a telephone line.
• Using a browser (such as Netscape or Internet Explorer) to check the settings
and status of an IFAX from a PC This uses the Web Status Monitor application
built into the machine.
• Transferring or mailing received faxes directly to a PC.
• Using the Internet to reduce communication costs.
• Reducing paper expenses by eliminating the use of paper for fax transmission
and reception.
• The IFAX communicates with a server over a LAN (it does not communicate
directly with another party).
• If an error occurs, a mail error report is sent back to the sender.
Some minor restrictions of IFAX are:
• If an Internet related error occurs, the sender might not receive an error report.
• The level of security for Internet communications is low. The use of standard
subscriber lines is recommended for confidential communication.
• Voice communications are not supported over a LAN.
• Internet fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use standard
fax communication whenever time is a crucial factor.
IFAX 18 SM
INTERNET FAX
The following functions are supported with standard fax transmission, but not with
Internet faxing.
IFAX
These functions are not supported by e-mail transmission:
• Immediate Transmission
• Confidential Transmission
• ID Transmission
• Polling Transmission
• Chain Dial
• Transmission by F-Code (SUB) - e-mail protocol cannot specify an F-Code
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
• JBIG Transmission
• Batch Transmission
• ECM (Error Correction Mode)
These functions are not supported by e-mail reception:
• Confidential Reception
• Memory Lock Reception
• Polling Reception
• F-Code (SUB) Reception using Personal Box (e-mail protocol cannot specify an
F-Code)
• Preventing nuisance faxes by destination
• Setting Reception Print by Destination
4.1.2 DNS SERVICE

IFAX supports DNS (Domain Name System). See the Core Technology Manual for
more details (Facsimile Processes – Faxing From a PC – Internet/LAN Fax Boards
– E-mail Basics).
The IFAX can use the Domain Names for the SMTP and POP3/IMAP4 server
instead of the actual IP addresses, if there is a DNS server on the same LAN as
the SMTP server, POP3/IMAP4 server, and the IFAX.
With models that do not support DNS, the user has to input the actual IP addresses
of the SMTP server and the POP3/IMAP4 server.
SM 19 IFAX
INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION
4.2 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

4.2.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION
Sending T erminal
SMT P
IFAX
Server
E-mail
Router
LAN
Internet POP/IMAP
IFAX
Server
E-mail
Router
LAN
IFAXD601.WMF
Procedure
Scanned documents are sent as electronic mail (e-mail).
All messages are sent using memory transmission.
All e-mail transmissions are controlled using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
procedures. There must be an SMTP server on the same LAN as the sending
machine, or the machine will not be able to send e-mail (it is not necessary to set
up an SMTP account).
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file (only MH compression
can be used).
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From Mail address of the sender
Reply To Destination requested for reply
To Mail address of the destination
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content Type Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff
Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Message Body MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files
are attached to e-mail messages)
Errors
An error report is generated if an error occurs during communication between the
machine and the SMTP server. However, it is possible that the sender will not
IFAX 20 SM
receive reports of errors that occurred between the SMTP server and the receiving
terminal.
IFAX
The interval between attempts to resend mail to the same destination when an
SMTP error occurs is the same as for G3 fax transmission.
To view what happens when an error occurs when the machine is receiving, refer
to the Mail Reception section.
Results
The transmission result is listed in the Journal. The file list for e-mail transmissions
is created in the same way as for G3 memory transmissions. The TTI for the mail
message includes the word “Mail” at the head of the information in the TTI column.
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
• With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.
Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution
will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled
with IFAX SW01.
• The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory
capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.
• The default compression is TIFF-F format.
• IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
• IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
SM 21 IFAX
Secure Internet Transmission

To transmit e-mail via the Internet more securely, use SMTP authentication, and
POP before SMTP for IFAX.
• SMTP Authentication. SMTP Authentication requires user authentication before
they can access the server. This prevents unauthorized access to the server. To
use SMTP authentication, your server must support CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, or
LOGIN. The account name and password specified in the “Mail Server” settings
are used for SMTP authentication. Other account names and passwords cannot
be specified.
To set up SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication
• POP Before SMTP. Prevents unauthorized access to the SMTP server and
requires users to access and log onto the POP3 server before sending e-mail.
To set up POP Before SMTP:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
IFAX 22 SM
4.2.2 MAIL RECEPTION
IFAX
SMTP
IFAX
Server
E-mail
Router
LAN
Receiving
Terminal
Internet POP
IFAX
Server
E-mail
Router
LAN
IFAXD912.WMF
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:

• POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
• IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
• SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

In order for the fax machine to receive e-mail, 1) there must be a POP3/IMAP4
server on the same LAN as the IFAX, and 2) an account must be set up for the fax
machine.
The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is
adjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
When the arrival of new e-mail is detected, the IFAX receives the mail.
If the POP3/IMAP4 server is holding several e-mails for the IFAX, the machine
picks up the e-mails one at a time, in the order of arrival at the server.
After POP3 has picked up the mail from a POP3 server, it deletes it from the server.
IMAP4 also picks up the mail from a server, but it does not delete the mail from the
server.
• However, the server setting is given higher priority than the machine setting.
E-mail reception conforms to POP3 (Post Office Protocol version 3.0) procedures
or IMAP4 (Internet Message Access Protocol).
SM 23 IFAX
Characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 Reception

Here are some general characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 receiving:
• No MX record registration. There is no need to register the machine in the MX
record of the DNS server.
• Power can be switched off. As long as the machine is not receiving mail, mail
stored in the mail server is not lost when the power is switched off. With SMTP
reception, if the machine is switched off, the SMTP server sends an error report
back to the sender, and the machine will not receive the mail unless the sender
sends it again after the machine is switched on.
• Dial-up compliance. POP3/IMAP4 can be accessed spontaneously, making it
ideal for dial-up operation.
SMTP Reception
SMTP Mail Reception Procedure
By registering the IFAX as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server,
you can enable direct receiving of mail from the SMTP server.
When mail is sent to the mail address specified for the IFAX, it is received
immediately without checking the server for the arrival of new mail (as is done in
the POP/IMAP protocol). Also, with SMTP, the received mail can be routed to
another fax (this is known as “delivery”).
Setting Method
The following settings are required for SMTP receiving:
• The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS
server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
• Enable SMTP reception:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be
received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the
MX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on
the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
IFAX 24 SM
SMTP Reception Characteristics

• Expanded RX mail delivery. The Off Ramp Gateway feature allows expansion
IFAX
for RX mail delivery to a G3 fax. The machine transfers incoming mail is sent to
the G3 fax specified by the local part. For example, in a destination address
specified as:
fax=0454778907@cl01.dom1.ricoh.co.jp
the “local part” is 0454778907.
• A POP3/IMAP4 server is not required. For example, in an environment where
there is only a UNIX server or in an intranet environment where Notes is used for
mail, mail received from outside is handled via the SMTP gateway.
• Immediacy of response is slightly better. There is no interval in the acquisition
of mail as with POP3/IMAP4, thus slightly improving the response time.
• Easier error handling. When an error occurs with POP3/IMAP4, the receiving
terminal sends an error mail back to the sender in order to inform them that an
error has occurred. With SMTP mail reception, however, in almost all cases the
SMTP server sends the error mail to the sender.
SM 25 IFAX
Delivery: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP (Off Ramp Gateway)

Overview
If the address of the mail received with SMTP contains the following information, it
can be delivered to another G3 fax:
Fax = “ Delivery Number”@”IFAX Host Name.Domain”
DNS SMTP
SMTP IFAX
R
(Address:
Router fax = 045477459@ Cl01.dom1g.ricoh.co.jp)
Internet/
Intranet
Router
SMTP DNS
IFAX
R
Switching
Telephone Line Station
PST N T ransmission
SMTP IFAX Switching
Station
(SMTP Receive Setting:
cl01@ dom1g.ricoh.co.jp)
IFAXD901.WMF
IFAX 26 SM
How to Set Up Mail Delivery

The sender must set the mail address in the following format:
IFAX
1) When dialing using a fax number
fax=<Delivery Destination Fax Number>@<IFAX Host Name>.<Domain Name>
Example:
fax=0454771459@cl01.dom1g.ricoh. ! Delivers to fax number 0454771459
co.jp
2) When dialing using a Quick dial destination

fax=<# Quick Dial Number>@<IFAX Host Name>.<Domain Name>
Example:
fax=#001@cl01.dom1g.ricoh.co.jp ! Delivers to the number registered for Quick
dial key 001.
3) When dialing using a Group dial destination

fax=<#**Group Dial Number>@<IFAX Host Name>.<Domain Name>
Example:
fax=#**05@cl01.dom1g.ricoh.co.jp ! Delivers to numbers registered for Group
dial key 05.
Mail Delivery Conditions

1) The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery
Settings
2) If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver
mail from designated senders, the machine’s “Auth. E-mail RX” feature must
be set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings).
3) If the “SMTP RX File Delivery Setting” is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving,
and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with
an error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings)
4) The “fax=” setting does not distinguish between upper and lower case
letters.
5) More than one destination cannot be specified in the mail address. A Group
counts as 1 destination.
6) If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail
transmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and
outputs an error report.
SM 27 IFAX
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must
be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1) Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp Matches and is delivered.
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
IFAX@ricoh.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
2) Conditions
• The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
• If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming
mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and
the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error
report is not output.
• If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming
mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered
unconditionally.
IFAX 28 SM
Handling Mail Reception Errors
IFAX
Errors during POP3/IMAP4 procedures
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and the message
stays in the server. An error report is output. After a prescribed interval, the
machine calls the server and starts to receive, starting with the interrupted
message. If there is an incomplete received message in memory, it will be erased.
Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the
server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends
information about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the “From”
or “Reply-to” field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message in
the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error
notification after a certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the
following are detected:
1. Unsupported MIME headers.
Supported types of MIME header
Header Supported Types
Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
Charset US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled,
and some garbage may appear in the data.
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF
capacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-
mail will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after
substitute reception files have been printed). The error handling method for this
type of error is the same as for “Abnormal files”.
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine
operates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to “Abnormal
files” above).
SM 29 IFAX
Printing Received Mail

To print received e-mail:
• The machine detects whether it has received a TIFF-F format image, then prints
it.
• Text in US ASCII or ISO 8859 X format can also be printed. When a line of text is
longer than the paper width, the excess data will be truncated and lost.
Multi-part Messages
When a multi-part e-mail message contains several text parts and binary files, the
message will be divided by boundaries, and each portion will be printed separately.
If the machine cannot determine where the boundary is, it will print an error report,
and then send error information e-mail back to the sender.
Manual e-mail reception
The manual e-mail reception function can be stored in a Quick Operation Key.
When the key is pressed, the machine calls the POP3/IMAP4 server immediately.
The timer for automatic e-mail reception is not reset when the machine calls the
POP3/IMAP4 server manually.
Here is an example of the sequence
1. Automatic e-mail reception interval: 30 minutes.
2. The machine calls the POP3 server (automatic e-mail reception)
3. 10 minutes later, the user calls the POP3 server (manual e-mail reception)
4. The machine will call the POP3 server again automatically after 20 minutes.
Secure Internet Reception
APOP: Passwords are encrypted when e-mail is received, making it safer than
POP3 authentication (clear text), which is not encrypted. APOP requires a POP
server that supports APOP.
IMAP-AUTH (Mail Reception): If the IMAP Server supports the AUTHENTICATE

command (CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, or LOGIN confirmation), then higher-level security
confirmation can be implemented for users logging in.
To enable password encryption and higher level security:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption
(set to “On”)
IFAX 30 SM
4.2.3 MAIL BROADCASTING (E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARE

COMBINED)
IFAX
G 3 Transmissions E-mail Transmissions
(PSTN) (LAN/Internet)
SMT P
IFAX
Server
E-mail
transmission
LAN
IFAXD913.WMF
The machine can send the same message to several destinations in one operation.
Some destinations can be G3 faxes and others can be e-mail. For the G3 fax
transmissions, each address has to be dialed separately. However, all e-mail
addresses can be sent with the message to the SMTP server in one transmission.
The SMTP server then sends the message to each destination.
The following example for broadcasting to three e-mail destinations and two G3 fax
destinations shows how G3 fax messages are each sent individually. However, the
e-mail destinations are all sent to the server at the same time.
• Order of inputting the addresses at the operation panel
G3 fax (1) - mail (1) - G3 fax (2) - mail (2) - mail (3)
• Order of transmission
G3 fax (1) - mail (1), (2), (3) - G3 fax (2)
The SMTP server cannot broadcast the message if the message contents included
individual information for each terminal in the transmitted data (such as a label
insertion). If this type of feature is used, the machine sends the e-mails to the
server one by one.
With the default settings, up to 500 destinations (including both e-mail and G3 fax)
can be dialed for one broadcast. The maximum number of e-mail destinations in a
broadcast depends on the limitations of the mail server.
SM 31 IFAX
4.2.4 TRANSFER REQUEST

Operation at the Transfer Requester
Request by Mail
Transfer
Requester
SMT P R: Router
IFAX
Server Individual G3
E-mail Transmissions
R (PSTN)
LAN Transfer
Station
POP
IFAX
Server
E-mail
E-mail End LAN
R
Receivers
SMT P E-mail
Server
Individual E-mail (several destinations, G3 End Receivers
Transmissions one transmission)
E-mail (one transmission

for each destination)
IFAXD914.WMF
The requesting terminal dials the Transfer Station, and requests it to transfer the
message to end receivers stored as quick dials, speed dials, and group dials in the
Transfer Station.
• A quick dial number is indicated by a “#” and 1 to 5 digits.
• A group dial is indicated by “#**” and 1 to 5 digits.
The machine can request transfer to a maximum of 30 end receivers for each
Transfer Station. The end receivers can be a mixture of e-mail and G3 fax
addresses.
The transfer request goes to the SMTP server as an e-mail message. The dialing
codes (Quick, Speed, Group) and the ID code are included in the mail body field of
the e-mail as text. The message arrives at the POP3/IMAP4 server of the Transfer
Station.
The Transfer Station sends the message to the end receivers.
The Transfer Station sends back a transfer result report. The original may be
attached to the transfer result report, depending on the G3 settings of the fax
machine. For transmissions to e-mail end receivers, the transfer result report only
indicates whether the message was successfully transmitted from the Transfer
Station to its SMTP server.
IFAX 32 SM
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content
IFAX
From E-mail address of the requesting terminal
To Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content-Type Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01….
Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.
Request by G3 Fax
G3 End Receivers
G 3 Transmission (Transfer Request)

IFAX PSTN
G 3 Transmission (Report)
Requesting
Term inal
E-mail End SMT P Transfer

IFAX
Receivers Server Station
E-mail
LAN
IFAXD915.WMF
The procedures are the same as for a normal G3 fax machine.

The requesting terminal dials the Transfer Station, and requests it to transfer the
message to end receivers stored as quick dials, speed dials, and group dials in the
Transfer Station.
The machine uses NSF to send an ID code and the machine telephone number.
Up to 30 end receivers can be requested.
End receiver destinations can also be selected using tone signals, in the same way
as for other recent fax models. An e-mail address can also be selected in this way,
as end receivers and as the destinations for receiving the transfer result report.
The receiving IFAX machine receives the transfer request on the PSTN
connection. It then handles the transfer request in the same way as explained in
“Request by Mail”.
SM 33 IFAX
Operation at the Transfer Station

Request by Mail
Transfer
Requester
SMTP R: Router
IFAX
Server Individual G3
E-mail Transmissions
R (PSTN)
LAN Transfer
Station
POP/IMAP
IFAX
Server
E-mail
E-mail End LAN
R
Receivers
SMT P E-mail
Server
Individual E-mail (several destinations, G3 End Receivers
Transmissions one transmission)
E-mail (one transmission

for each destination)
IFAXD605.WMF
The IFAX polls the POP3/IMAP4 server at regular intervals. If a transfer request
has come in, it receives the e-mail from the server, then sends the message to the
end receivers by G3 fax or e-mail, depending on the type of end receiver address.
The IFAX sends each G3 fax as an individual transmission. However, for the e-
mail, the IFAX sends the message to the SMTP server once, and the server
broadcasts the message to the e-mail end receivers one at a time.
The Transfer Station sends back a transfer result report to the address in the
“From” field of the received e-mail. If an administrator address is registered, the
result report is also sent to that address. The original may also be attached to the
transfer result report, depending on the G3 settings of the fax machine.
For transmission to e-mail end receivers, the transfer result report only indicates
whether the message was successfully transmitted from the Transfer Station to its
SMTP server. The Transfer Station does not know what happens to the messages
on the way to the end receivers.
If a communication error occurs between the machine and the SMTP server during
result report transmission, the machine prints the result report.
IFAX 34 SM
Request by Fax
IFAX
G3 End Receivers
G 3 Transmission (Transfer Request)

G3 FAX PSTN
G 3 Transmission (Report)
Requesting
Term inal
E-mail End SMT P Transfer

IFAX
Receivers Server Station
E-mail
LAN
IFAXD916.WMF
When the machine receives a transfer request by G3 fax, it sends the message to
the e-mail and G3 end receivers in the same way as for a request by mail.
The machine sends back the transfer result report to the telephone number of the
requesting terminal, which it specified in the NSF signal. The machine prints the
result report if it cannot be sent.
The IFAX can accept end receiver destinations and transfer result report
destinations that were sent from the requester as DTMF tones. This applies to e-
mail or PSTN G3 addresses.
SM 35 IFAX
4.2.5 AUTOROUTING
G 3 T ransmission
G 3 Fax PST N
SU B cod e: 1111
SM T P
IFAX
Server
e-mail Personal C o de 1111:
abc@ ricoh.com
LAN
C lient
PC
E-m ail ad dress:

abc@ ricoh.com
IFAXD918.WMF
When a G3 fax message is received with a SUB code (max. 20 digits), the machine
compares this SUB code with the Personal Box SUB codes stored in the machine
with e-mail addresses. If there is a match, the machine routes the message to that
e-mail address by e-mail.
There can be only one destination. If there is no destination attached to the SUB
code of the personal box, the incoming message is kept in the fax machine’s SAF
memory.
A communication failure report will be printed if a transmission error occurs
between the machine and the SMTP server.
The RTI or CSI of the forwarding machine is indicated in the subject field of the
forwarded e-mail. The format is “From RTI (or CSI) (Fax Message No.xxxx)”.
4.2.6 TRANSFER BOX

When a G3 fax message is received with a SUB code, the machine compares this
SUB code with the Transfer Box SUB codes stored in the machine with e-mail
addresses. If there is a match, the machine uses e-mail to transfer the message to
the e-mail addresses specified in the Transfer Box.
Up to 5 destinations, including both e-mail and G3 fax addresses, can be stored in
one Transfer Box. There must be at least one destination.
IFAX 36 SM
E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE)
4.3 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE)
IFAX
The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject,
designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
4.3.1 SUBJECT AND LEVEL OF IMPORTANCE

You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject
can also be prefixed with an “Urgent” or “High” notation.
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type
Mail Type ! " #
Subject Entry --- Entry Condition
1. “CSI” (“RTI”) Fax Message No.
No Subject 2. “RTI” CSI not registered +
Entry 3. “CSI” RTI not registered File No.
4. None CSI, RTI not registered
1. “CSI” (“RTI”) Normal:
Return Receipt
(dispatched).
2. “RTI” CSI not registered You can select
Confirmation
From “displayed” with IFAX
of Reception
SW02 Bits 2 and 3.
3. “CSI” RTI not registered Error:
Return Receipt
4. None CSI, RTI not registered
(processed/error)
RTI or CSI of
the station
Mail delivery
designated for
Mail delivery, delivery
memory
RTI or CSI of Mail sending from G3
transfer, Fax Message No. + File
From sender memory
SMTP Number
receiving and Mail address
Memory sending
delivery of sender
SMTP receiving and
Mail address
delivery (Off Ramp
of sender
Gateway)
Mail error
--- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
notification
Items ! " # of the table above are in the Subject.
Subjects Displayed on the PC
IFAXD919.WMF
SM 37 IFAX
4.3.2 E-MAIL MESSAGES

After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail
Message
Limitations on Entries
Item Maximum
Number of Lines 5 lines
Line Length 80 characters
Name Length 20 characters
IFAX 38 SM
4.3.3 MESSAGE DISPOSITION NOTIFICATION (MDN)
IFAX
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been
received correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this
request (known as MDN):
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
3. Send confirmation of mail reception
4. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other party’s machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions
below are met:
• The other party’s machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
• The other party’s machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
R outer
Server Server
Internet
Server
R outer Modem
$ %
R IFAX
R IFAX
R
R eception Confirmation M ail (R equest receive
s_tadasi@ abcde.ne.jp
O ptioin O n respone)
SF2@ dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
$ * * * JO U R NAL * * *
Time AD DR ESS Mode Time PAG E RESU LT

10:17AM s_tadasi@ abcde.ne.jp MailSMQ 0'09" 2 --
' C onfirm &

IFAX Mail (Answer to R eception IFAX
C onfirmation R equest)
T X M anagem ent
R eport
C onfirmation
(TX M anagement
R eport)
& * * * JO U R NAL * * *
Time AD D RESS M ode Time PAG E RESU LT
10:18AM SF2@ dom1g.ricoh M ailSM A 0'09" 2 --
' * * * JO U R NAL * * *
Time AD D RESS M ode Time PAG E R ESU LT

10:17AM s_tadasi@ abcde.ne.jp MailSMQ 0'09" 2 OK OK
IFAXD920.WMF
SM 39 IFAX
Handling Mail
Handling Mail on the Send Side
When mail is sent, a “Disposition Notification To” notation is included in the header
as a request for confirmation that the mail was received.
X-Mozilla Status : 0001
X-Mozilla Status2 : 00000000
Message-ID : <3A23379A.81BE0ABD@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp>
Disposition-Notification-To : T.Suzuki <s_tadashi@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp>
Date : Tue, 28 Nov 2000 13:4203 +0900
From : T.Suzuki <s_tadashi@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp>
X-Mailer : Mozilla 4.73 [ja]C-CCK-MCD BDP jm-Sony 3
(Win95: U)
X-Accept-Language : ja
MIME-Version : 1.0
To : fuser_01@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
Subject : Mail Request for Reception Confirmation
Content-Type : text/plain: charset=iso-2022-jp
Content-Transfer-Encoding : 7bit
Handling Mail on the Receive Side

Return Path: <>
Received : From fuser_01 ([133.139.157.20]) by dom1g.ricoh.co.jp (post
office MTA V1.9.3 ID# 0100110-37392) with SMTP id AAA163
for<S_tadasi@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp>
Date : 28 Nov 2000 13:4236 +0900
X-Mailer : ICFAX Version 1.0
MIME-Version : 1.0
Content-Type : multipart/report: report-type=disposition-notification:
boundary=”—ICFAX_000000EF48—“
To : T.Suzuki <s_tadashi@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp>
Message-ID : <20001128133423664.ICFAX-XFC9BE-X26986@133.139.157.20]>
From : fuser_01@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
Subject : From @81454771459”(“RICOH GTS)(Return Receipt)(dispatched)
X-Mozilla-status : 8001
X-Mozilla-Status2 : 00000000
X-UIDL : 20001128044713447.AAA163@fuser_01
This is a Return Receipt for the mail that you sent to “fuser_01@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp”
Final Receipt: rfc822:fuser_01#dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
Original Message ID: <3A23379A.81BE0ABD@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
Disposition: automatic action/MDN-send-automatically: dispatched Respond Mail Text
IFAX 40 SM
Setting up the Receiving Party

The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
IFAX
1) The “Disposition Notification To” field is in the received mail header
(automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page,
if MDN is enabled), and
2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter
Setting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is
as follows:
Normal reception: “Return Receipt (dispatched)” in the Subject line
IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) “Return Receipt (displayed)” in the Subject line
Error: “Return Receipt (processed/error)” in the Subject line
Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender’s
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a “Q” in the
Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt
Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the
mail receiver’s journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column
and an “A” in the Mode column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
• After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail
sender’s journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is
annotated with “OK” in the Result column.
• When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an “E”
in the Result column.
• The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of “OK” or “E” in
the Result column.
• If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group
destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See “How
to set up Mail Delivery”), the Result column of the Journal is updated every
time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5
destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication
with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,
even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the
destination for the first error only.
SM 41 IFAX
Report Sample
DATE TIME ADDRESS MODE TIME PAGE RESULT
MAY. 5 10:15 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SM 0'09" 2 --

10:16 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'05" 1 --
10:17 s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09" 2 OK
10:19 m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05" 1 --
IFAXD921.WMF
IFAX 42 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
IFAX
1. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
Type Protocol
Fax Unit and Printer/Scanner Unit (Supported by TCP/IP protocol)
Connectivity Transmission:
Local area network IETF RFC821 SMTP procedure
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T Reception:
IETF RFC1725 POP3 procedure
Connection IETF RFC2026 IMAP4 procedure
100base-Tx/10base-T direct
connection Data rate
100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
Resolution 10 Mbps (10base-T)
Main scan: 200 dpi
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi Remark
The machine must be set up as an e-
NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit
4 must be set to “1”. mail client before installation. Any
client PCs connected to the machine
Transmission Time through a LAN must also be e-mail
1 s (through a LAN to the server) clients, or some features will not work
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (e.g. Autorouting).
(Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Document Size
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
Note: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX
SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3)
must be set to “1”.
E-mail File Format
Single/multi-part
MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH) format only
SM 43 IFAX
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit
Type A/B694-01
Type B/B692-01
DataOverwriteSecurityUnit
B692/B694
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 1
DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A .............................................. 1
DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type B .............................................. 1
1.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN.................................................................................. 2
1.3 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL.................................................................... 2
1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 3
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE........................................................5

3.1 HDD.............................................................................................................. 6
3.2 NVRAM ........................................................................................................ 7
3.3 DIMM OR SD CARD .................................................................................... 9
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................. 10
4.1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................ 10
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................. 11
4.2 OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED ......................................... 12
5. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................13
5.1 COPY SP SERVICE TABLES .................................................................... 14
5.2 PRINT SERVICE TABLE............................................................................ 15
6. DETAILS.........................................................................................16
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................21
1. HARDWARE................................................................................................. 21
2. SOFTWARE ................................................................................................. 21
SM i B692/B694
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts
making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The metal parts of the fusing unit and other internal components become
extremely hot while the copier is operating. Avoid touching those
components with your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
the machines.
2. The NVRAM has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly.
Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer
recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Never attempt to recharge or
incinerate this battery. Used NVRAMs must be handled in accordance with
local regulations regarding the disposal of such items.s
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Never incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly
when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can
seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
What This Manual Contains
This manual describes the DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A/B for:
• B147/B149
• B135/B138
• B089/B093.
The DOS unit is an optional DIMM (or SD card) that contains special firmware. At
the end of every job, this special firmware overwrites every cluster in temporary
storage on the HDD twice with random data. Then each cluster is once again
overwritten with a zero. This erases sensitive data on the disk which could be
retrieved secretly.
Conventions in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol What it means

! Refer to section number
 See Core Tech Manual for details
 Screw
 Connector
 E-ring
 Clip ring
Short Edge Feed (SEF) Long Edge Feed (LEF)

ACCESSORY CHECK
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:
DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A
This module is for B135/B138 and B089/B093.
Description Q'ty
1. DIMM .................................................................................. 1
2. Keytops for B089/B093 (Blank Covers) ............................... 2
3. Keytops for B135/B138 (Blank Covers) ............................... 2
4. Operation Instructions.......................................................... 1
DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type B

This module is for B147/B149.
Description Q'ty
1. SD Card............................................................................... 1
2. Keytop (Blank Covers)......................................................... 2
3. Operation Instructions.......................................................... 1
CAUTION
The machine should always be switched off and its power cord
disconnected before doing any of the following procedures.
Security Unit
B692/B694
Overwrite
Data
SM 1 B692/B694
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
1.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

1.2.1 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL
[A]
B692I901.WMF
B692I903.WMF
[B]
CAUTION
Before you start the installation, you must check the box seals to confirm
that they have not been removed since the items were sealed in the box at
the factory.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.

• Confirm that a tape is attached to each corner.
• The surfaces of the tapes should be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapes
STOP, do not install the components, contact your superviser.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes are unmarked, remove from the corners of the box.
3. As you remove each seal, the “VOID” marks [B] appear. This prevents the tape
from being reattached to the box.
4. Make sure that you have the correct security module for the machine. The
machine model requires either the DIMM type or the SD Card type.
Model Security Module Required
B135/B138 e/f DOS Unit Type A (DIMM)
B089/B093 DOS Unit Type A (DIMM)
B147/B149 DOS Unit Type B (SD Card)
B692/B694 2 SM
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. If the machine is on, switch off the main power switch.
2. Disconnect the Network cable if the NIB is installed.
3. Disconnect the Fax module cable if the fax option is installed.
4. Switch the main power switch on.
5. Check that the following “Copy SPs” are set as indicated below:
SP No. SP Name Set To:
5871 001 HDD Function Disable 1 (On)
5967 001 Document Server Set Function 1 (Off)
5846 090 USC Settings - Plain Data Forbidden 1 (Check)
5836 001 Capture Settings – Capture Function 0 (Off)
5832 001 HDD Formatting (ALL)
• B089/B093 OR B135/B138 Press # to Execute
• B147/B149 Press “Execute” key
6. Check that the following “Printer SPs” are set as indicated below:
1006 001 Sample/Proof Print 1 (On)
7. Turn off the operation switch.

8. Turn off the main switch.
9. Disconnect the Fax cable (RJ11 connection) if installed
10. Disconnect the Network cable (RJ45 connection) if NIB is installed
B089/B093
B147/B149
B135/B138
[A]
[A]
[B]
Security Unit
B692/B694
B692I902.WMF
Overwrite
11. Install either the DIMM [A] or the SD Card [B]:

Data
• The DIMM is installed for B135/B138 or B089/B093.

• The SD Card is installed for B147/B149.
SM 3 B692/B694
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Model B147/B149
• If the PostScript 3 option is not installed, install the DOS option SD card in Slot 2.
• If the PostScript 3 option is installed, remove the Printer/Scanner card from Slot
1 and install the DOS option SD card in Slot 1.
• Follow the procedure in the B147/B149 Service Manual, section 5.7 SD Card
Appli Move, to move the Printer/Scanner application data to the DOS option card.
(The Printer/Scanner software is now on the SD card with the DOS option.)
• Remove Printer/Scanner card from Slot 3
NOTE: After the SD Card Appli Move procedure is completed the Printer/Scanner
card will no longer function
• After the procedure is completed, the DOS card, with Printer/Scanner
application data, will be in Slot 1. The PS3 card will be in Slot 2 and Slot 3 will be
empty
12. Connect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.
13. Connect the Fax cable if the fax option is installed.
[A]
[B] [C]
09/09/2003 14:13
Origi. Total Copies
0 1 0
B692I904.WMF
B692I905.WMF
15. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.
16. Make a Sample Copy.
17. Watch the overwrite erase icon.
• The bottom of the icon becomes thicker [B].
• “Next Copy” is displayed briefly below the icon.
• The icon returns to its normal appearance [C].
18. Remove the Document Server and Scanner keytops and replace them with the
blank keytops provided.
B692/B694 4 SM
There are no preventive maintenance checks or procedures for the
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit.
Security Unit
B692/B694
Overwrite
Data
SM 5 B692/B694
HDD

3.1 HDD
1. Switch the operation power switch off.
2. Switch the main power switch off.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power supply.
4. Replace the HDD. (Refer to the section “3. Replacement and Adjustment” in
the Service Manual of the appropriate machine.
5. Discard the used HDD
CAUTION
The customer engineer must consult with the key operator or system
administrator to decide how to handle the old HDD.
6. Connect the power cord to the power supply.

7. Switch on the main power switch.
[A]
[B] [C]
09/09/2003 14:13
Origi. Total Copies
0 1 0
9. Check the overwrite erase icon [A] in front of the date in the upper right corner
of the operation panel display.
10. Confirm that the icon has changed from the display for data on disk [B] to no
data on disk [C]
NOTE: No SP settings are required for replacement of a defective HDD.
B692/B694 6 SM
NVRAM
3.2 NVRAM
1. Switch the operation power switch off.
2. Switch the main power switch off.
4. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.
5. Disconnect the fax cable if the fax option is installed.
6. Insert a blank IC card or SD card into the controller slot:
• B135/B138, B089/B093 require the IC card.
• B147/B149 requires the SD card.
7. Connect the power cord to the power supply.
8. Switch the main switch on.
10. Do the following SPs.
SP No. Name Comment
5990 003 SMC Printout – SP Prints a list of all the current User Tool
settings
5990 002 SMC Printout – User Prints a list of all User Tool settings.
Programs
5824 NVRAM Data Upload Uploads all SP and UT settings to the card.
11. When the upload is finished, switch the main power switch off.
12. Disconnect the power cord from the power supply, and remove the card.
13. Replace the NVRAM. (For more details about how the replace the NVRAM,
refer to section “3. Replacement and Adjustment” in the Service Manual for the
appropriate machine.
14. Switch on the main power switch.
15. Do the following SPs:
SP No. Name Comment
5801 001 Memory Clear – All Clear Clears entire memory.
5832 002 HDD Formatting – IMH Initializes documents stored on the document
server, stamp print data, scanner delivery
images, fax delivery images.
Security Unit
B692/B694
Overwrite
Data
SM 7 B692/B694
NVRAM
16. Switch the main power switch off, then switch it on again.
17. Insert the IC card or SD card with the uploaded NVRAM data into the controller
slot.
18. Enter the SP mode and do SP5825 (NVRAM Data Download).
19. In the “Copy SP” mode, confirm the correct settings of the following SPs:
SP No. SP Name Correct Setting
5967 001 Copy Server Set Function 1 (Disable)
5836 001 Capture Settings – Capture Function 0 (Disable)
20. Exit the “Copy SP” mode and enter the “Print SP” mode.
21. Confirm the correct setting of SP1006.
SP No. SP Name Correct Setting
1006 001 Sample/Locked Print 1 (Enable)

23. Connect the fax cable if the fax option is installed.
B692/B694 8 SM
DIMM OR SD CARD
3.3 DIMM OR SD CARD

1. Switch the operation switch off.
2. Switch the main switch off.
4. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.
5. Disconnect the fax cable if the fax option is installed.
6. Make sure that you have the correct DOS unit for the machine.
7. The machine model requires the DIMM or the SD Card.
Model Security Module Required
B147/B149 DOS Unit Type B (SD card)
8. Install either the DIMM or the SD Card in the controller slot:

• B135/B138, B089/B093 require the DIMM.
• B147/B149 requires the SD card.
10. Connect the Fax cable if the fax option is installed.
[A]
[B] [C]
09/09/2003 14:13
Origi. Total Copies
0 1 0
B692R908.WMF
B692R907.WMF
13. Check the overwrite erase icon [A] in front of the date in the upper right corner
of the operation panel display.
14. Confirm that the icon has changed from the display for data on disk [B] to no
data on disk [C].
Security Unit
B692/B694
Overwrite
Data
SM 9 B692/B694
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is
open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the
network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory
for reading or writing data.
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure

The LCD shows the SC code. The The customer engineer must:
customer cannot continue to use • Enter the SP mode.
A the machine. The customer must • Switch the main power switch off and on.
call for service. • Troubleshoot the problem by following
the procedures described in this section.
The LCD shows the SC code. The The customer must:
customer cannot continue to use • Switch the operation switch off and on.
the machine. This is a machine • If the error occurs again, switch the main
B error. switch off and on.
• If the error occurs again, user must call
for service.
The LCD shows the SC code. The customer must:
However, only the unit that • Switch the operation switch off and on.
generated the error is disabled. • If the error occurs again, switch the main
switch off and on.
• After recovery, the user can continue to
C use any feature other than the disabled
function. For example, if an error occurs
in Tray 1, the user can use other paper
feed trays.
• Customer should call for service if the
affected function continues to return
errors.
The LCD shows no SC code. The No action required. The machine updates
D customer can continue to use the the SC history.
machine.
B692/B694 10 SM
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
SC828 B Copy Countermeasure Error B135/B138, B089/B093 Only

A special chip on the ROM- • ROM-DIMM
DIMM installed in the machine is
designed to prevent copying.
After the command was sent to
this chip, the chip generated an
unexpected response.
SC865 B HDD Access Error B135/B138, B089/B093, B147/B149

During operation, the HDD Hard Disk Failure
generated an error. • Do SP5832 001 (HDD Formatting - All)
• Do SP5832 002 (HDD Formatting - IMH)
• If normal operation of the HDD cannot be
recovered after doing these two SPs,
replace the HDD.
SC866 B SD Card Recognition Error B147/B149 Only

The machine generated an error • Use an approved SD card.
when it attempted to detect the
electronic recognition license.
An illegal program is on the SD
card.
SC867 B SD Card Removal Error B147/B149 Only

The SD card was removed from • Never remove an SD card from the
its slot while an application was controller slot while a program is
executing. executing.
• Switch the main power switch off and on,
then start again.
SC868 B SD Card Access Error B147/B149 Only

The SC card controller returned • Replace the SD card.
an error because the SD card is • Replace the SD card controller.
defective or the SC card
controller is defective.
Security Unit
B692/B694
Overwrite
Data
SM 11 B692/B694
OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED
4.2 OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED

[A]
09/09/2003 14:13
Origi. Total Copies
0 1 0
B692T901.WMF
If the overwrite erase icon [A] is not displayed, check the following SPs and make
sure that they are set correctly.
Copy SPs

5967 001 Copy Server Set Function 1 (Disable)
5836 001 Capture Settings – Capture Function 0 (Disable)
Print SP
1006 001 Sample/Locked Print 1 (Enable)
B692/B694 12 SM
COPY SP SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES
Service Table Key
Notation What it means
[range / default / step] Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be
adjusted in the range ±9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM
reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with
each key press.
* Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value
(factory setting) is restored.
1111 An SP number set in bold-italics denotes a “Special Service
Program” mode setting. To display the SSPs:
2. On the touch panel, press “Copy SP” and  together.
DFU Denotes “Design or Factory Use”. Do not change this value.
Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this
value.
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed
(!6.2 Image Processing) Refer to “6.2 Image Processing” in “6. Details”.
Due to fundamental changes in how image processing
adjustment is done with Group 4 SP codes, more details are
provided in Section 6.
Security Unit
B692/B694
Overwrite
Data
SM 13 B692/B694
COPY SP SERVICE TABLES
5.1 COPY SP SERVICE TABLES
5801 1 Memory Clear - All Clear

Resets all data for process control and all software counters, and restores all
modes and adjustments to their default values. To execute, hold down  for
over 3 seconds, and then turn the copier off and on again.
Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the copier has
malfunctioned due to a damaged NVRAM.
5801 014 Clear DCS Settings

Initializes SP setting related to DCS. DCS (Delivery Control Service) manages
the Scan Router connection. To execute, hold down  for over 3 seconds,
and then turn the copier off and on again.
5824 NVRAM Data Upload

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial
number) from NVRAM on the control board to a flash memory card.
While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover open. This prevents a
software module accessing the NVRAM during the upload.
5825 NVRAM Data Download

Downloads the content of a flash memory card to the NVRAM on the control
board.
5832 HDD Formatting

Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
5832 1 ALL Initializes entire content of the HDD.
5832 2 IMH Initializes 1) documents stored on the document
server, 2) stamp print data, 3) scanner delivery images,
4) fax delivery images.
5836* Capture Settings

5836 1* Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable
0: With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature
cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected.
1: With this function enabled, the settings screen for the capture features an
be displayed.
B692/B694 14 SM
PRINT SERVICE TABLE
5846 UCS Settings

UCS (User Control Service) is the software that manages user codes, the fax
address book, the scan-to-email address book, and the scan-to-folder address
book.
5846 50* Initialize All Directory Info. Clears all directory information managed by UCS,
including all user codes
5871 HDD Function Disable [0~1 / 0 / 1] (0: OFF, 1: ON)

Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the
HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to
enable the setting. This SP is used after the optional Security Module Type A
has been installed on the machine. For more details about this installation, see
“1. Installation”.
5872 HDD Overwrite Status Check

Determines whether the content of the hard disk has been overwritten.
Range: 0 to 65535
5967* Copy Server Set Function

Allows or denies access to the document server screen. After changing this
setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.
0: Function enable. Pressing the Document Server button opens the
Document Server screen.
1: Function disable. Pressing the Document Server button does not display
the Document Server screen. Free access to the document server is denied.
However, files on the document server can still be accessed with the printer
driver.
5990 SP Print Mode (SMC Printout)

5990 1 All (Data List) Execute to print a list of the settings for the selected
5990 2 SP (Mode Data List) item.
5990 3 User Program
5990 5 Diagnostic Report
5.2 PRINT SERVICE TABLE

1006 001 Sample/Locked Print
[0~1/0/1] 0: Linked, 1: On
Enables and disables the document server. When you select “0”, the
document server is enabled according to the Copy Service Mode SP5967. If
Security Unit
you select “1”, the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service
B692/B694
Overwrite
Mode SP5967.
Data
Note: Set to “1” (On) for use of the Sample Copy and Locked Print features.
SM 15 B692/B694
6. DETAILS
When an original is scanned or printed, the data for the job is stored temporarily on
the hard disk for jam recovery. After the copy or print job finishes, some of this
temporary data remains on the HDD at random locations until it is overwritten by
the next job.
At the end of every copy and print job, the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit
automatically writes over unneeded temporary data with random data twice and
with a zero (0) once. This is the method recommended by NSA.
[A]
1 2 3 4 Overwritten
5 6 7 8
Data present
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 No data present
17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28
[B]
29 30 31 32
B692D901A.WMF
Original Data
B692/B694 16 SM
Overwrite
[B]
9 8
10 7
23 22
11
24 . 3 2
6
21
20 19
12
26 25
5
31 3 0
. .
13
4
29 .
18
27
14
3
17 28
5 2
16 1 1
[A] B692D902A.WMF
HDD Data
A copy or print job always starts writing data to disk, starting with the clusters at the
outer edge [A] and progressing toward the center.
The overwrite, on the other hand, always begins at the center cluster [B] and
progresses toward the edge.
Taking the first square as cluster 1 on the outermost track:
• A job starts writing from 1, 2, 3, and continues toward 32.
• At the end of the job , the Security module overwrite erase proceeds from the
opposite direction, starting from 32, 31, 30 on the innermost track and continues
to 1.
NOTE: Each number in the illustration represents 1 cluster, the smallest unit the
operating system uses to handle data on the HDD.
If a copy or print job starts during data overwrite, the job has priority and the
overwriting stops, and the copy or print job begins.
Security Unit
B692/B694
Overwrite
Data
SM 17 B692/B694
HDD Data Original Data
[A]
9 8 1 2 3 4
10 7
23 2 2 5 6 7 8
11
24 . 3 2
6
21
9 10 11 12
20 19
12
26 25
5
31 3 0
13 14 15 16
..
13
17 18 19 20
4
29 .
18
27
21 22 23 24
14
3
17 2 8
16 1
5
1
2 25 26 27 28
29 30 31 32
B692D903A.WMF
1. A copy job writes data to the HDD as far as cluster 32 [A].
[B]
9 8 1 2 3 4
10 7
23 22 5 6 7 8
11
24 . 3 2
6
21
9 10 11 12
20 19
12
26 25
5
31 30
13 14 15 16
..
17 18 19 20
13
29 .
18
27
21 22 23 24
14
17 28
5 2 25 26 27 28
16 1 1
29 30 31 32
B692D904A.WMF
2. When the copy job is finished, the data overwrite starts at cluster 32 [B] can
continues to overwrite each cluster twice with random data and once with a “0”.
B692/B694 18 SM
9 8 1 2 3 4
10 7
23 2 2 5 6 7 8
1
24 . 32
6
13 12 1
21
9 10 11 12
20 19
26 25
5
31 30
13 14 15 16
..
17 18 19 20
4
29 .
18
27
21 22 23 24
14
3
17 28
5 2 25 26 27 28
16 1 1 [C]
29 30 31 32
B692D905A.WMF
3. In this example, a copy job starts when the overwrite reaches cluster 21 [C] and
overwriting stops.
9 8 1 2 3 4
10 7
23 22 5 6 7 8
11
24 . 3 2
6
21
9 10 11 12
20 19
12
26 25
5
31 30
13 14 15 16
..
17 18 19 20
13
29 .
18
27
21 22 23 24
14
17 28
16 1
5
1
2 [D] 25 26 27 28
29 30 31 32
B692D906A.WMF
4. Next, the job writes data to the disk as far as cluster 32. When the job finishes,
the overwrite restarts, starting with cluster 21 [D].
Security Unit
B692/B694
Overwrite
Data
SM 19 B692/B694
[E]
9 8 1 2 3 4
10 7
23 22 5 6 7 8
1
24 . 32
6
13 12 1
21
9 10 11 12
20 19
26 25
5
31 30
13 14 15 16
. .
17 18 19 20
4
29 .
18
27
21 22 23 24
14
3
17 28
16 1
5
1
2 25 26 27 28
29 30 31 32
B692D907A.WMF
5. As soon as the overwrite progresses as far as cluster 1, it starts again from

cluster [E] and continues through 32, 31, and so on.
[F]
9 8 1 2 3 4
10 7
23 22 5 6 7 8
1
24 . 32
6
13 12 1
21
9 10 11 12
20 19
26 25
5
31 30
13 14 15 16
. .
17 18 19 20
4
29 .
18
27
21 22 23 24
14
17 28
16 1
5
1
2 25 26 27 28
29 30 31 32
B692D908A.WMF
6. When overwriting reaches cluster 22 (in this example), the overwrite is finished.
B692/B694 20 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. HARDWARE
SD Card B147/B149 Either the DIMM or SD card is
DIMM B135/B138, B089/B093 required.
2. SOFTWARE
The table below describes:
• The types of data overwritten automatically.
• Compatibility of the data overwrite function with other functions of the machine.
Types of temporary data that are Copy jobs
overwritten Print jobs
Sample print/locked print jobs *1
LAN fax printing
Types of temporary data that are Document server functions
not overwritten Scanner functions (except TWAIN)
Internet fax
Paperless/serverless fax
PS3 (only for Type A) *2
Spool printing
SDK applications (Global Scan, Doc Mail, etc.)
File format converter functions
Types of temporary data that are Normal fax functions (except I-Fax, paperless/serverless
not originally stored on the HDD fax)
TWAIN scanner
*1 A sample print or locked print job can be overwritten after execution.

*2 The PS3 function cannot be used with the Type A DIMM because the Type A DIMM is
inserted in the PS3 slot. However, B147/B149 is provided with an SD card merge function,
so the PS3 function can be used with the Type B.
*3 User stamps are not overwritten and erased.
*4 Printer fonts, overlay forms, and RTIFF data are not overwritten.
• If the fax option is installed, the address book data is stored in the FCU (500
addresses maximum). If the Function Upgrade Kit is installed, up to 1200
addresses can be stored. The number of addresses that can be stored is
determined by the capacity of the FCU and Function Upgrade Kit. The HDD does
not store address book data.
Security Unit
B692/B694
Overwrite
Data
SM 21 B692/B694
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149 - 001 05/14/2004

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – DSc332/DSc338
LANIER - LD232c/LD238c
RICOH – Aficio 2232C/2238C
SAVIN – C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied.

An arrow has highlighted the revised areas ⇒.
MANUAL
SERVICE
PAGES:
• xiii Updated Information (Table of Contents)

• Tab Page Updated Information ( Bleeding Tab Page)
• 1 through 21 New Information (B692/B694 Data Overwrite Security Unit)
Copyright  2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Rev. 05/2004





FAX OPTION B603

INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

SEE SECTION IFAX FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

SEE SECTION B692/B694 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM xiii B147/B149
Rev. 05/2004
INSTALLATION
POSITION 1
TAB
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B597
FAX OPTION B603
INTERNET FAX (IFAX)
POSITION 2
TAB
POSITION 3
TAB
POSITION 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB
POSITION 5
SERVICE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 6
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS TAB
SPECIFICATIONS
POSITION 7
TAB

POSITION 8
TAB
BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149 – 002 06/02/2004

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER - DSc332/DSc338
RICOH - AFICIO 2232C/2238C
SAVIN - C3224/C3828
!
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.
MANUAL
SERVICE
PAGES:
• 5-10 Updated Information (SP1-105)

COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 06/2004

1-105-2 P: Ready *BCU [ 10 to 100 / NA: 10, EU: 20 / 1oC/step ]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing ready condition.
Temperature specified in this SP mode
The following SPs set the target operating temperatures of the heating and pressure
rollers in various modes. (The default settings are different for N. America and
Eur./Asia)
⇒ 1-105-6 H:N [K] D 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 165 / 5°C/step] **
1-105-7 H:N [K] D 185 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 175 , EU: 175 / 5°C/step]
1-105-8 H:N[FC] S 62.5 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5°C/step]
1-105-9 H:N[FC] S 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / 180 / 5°C/step]
1-105-10 H:N[FC] D 62.5 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 145, EU: 145/ 5°C/step]
⇒ 1-105-11 H:N[FC] D 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 170 / 5°C/step] **
1-105-13 H:OHP *BCU [ 100 to 190 / 165 / 5°C/step]
⇒ 1-105-17 P:N [K] D 125
1-105-18 P:N [K] D 185
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 145 / 5°C/step] **
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 145, EU: 155 / 5°C/step]
1-105-19 P:N[FC] S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 125, EU: 130 / 5°C/step]
1-105-20 P:N[FC] S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 160 / 5°C/step]
1-105-21 P:N[FC] D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 120, EU: 125 / 5°C/step]
⇒ 1-105-22 P:N[FC] D 125
1-105-24 P:OHP
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5°C/step] **
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 150 / 5°C/step]
1-105-26 H:TH *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 175 / 5°C/step]
1-105-28 P:TH *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5°C/step]
1-105-29 H:Envelop *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 175 / 5°C/step]
1-105-30 P:Envelop *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5°C/step]
1-105-31 H: Slow Down *BCU [ 1 to 20 / 5 / 1°C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
Fusing temperature must be decreased when the machine changes to a process
speed that is slower than the current process speed (for example, when the speed
changes from 185 mm/s to 62.5 mm/s). The machine idles while reducing the fusing
temperature. When the fusing temperature becomes lower than the ready
temperature, the machine starts printing.
Ready Temperature = Target temperature + Temperature specified in this SP mode.
1-105-32 P: Slow Down *BCU [ 1 to 20 / 10 / 1°C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
1-105-33 H:SP 62.5 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]
1-105-34 H:SP 125 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]
1-105-35 H:SP 185 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]
1-105-36 P:SP 62.5 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]
1-105-37 P:SP 125 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]
1-105-38 P:SP 185 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +20 / 1°C/step]
⇒ ** Requires Engine firmware 1.09C or later.

1-106 [Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)
Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
1-106-1 Heat Roller [ 0 to 200 / - / 5°C/step]
1-106-2 Pressure Roller
B147/B149 5-10 SM

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – DSC332/DSC338
LANIER – LD232C/LD238C
RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C
SAVIN – C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: COLD OFFSET (POOR FUSING)

MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
Cold offset (poor fusing) may occur when all of the following conditions are met:
1. The machine is turned on under low-temperature conditions
2. The weight of the paper loaded in the tray is near the upper limit for plain paper (e.g. 100g/28lb.)
3. Copies are made in B&W mode (185 mm/sec.)
NOTE 1: The offset normally occurs between the second and fifth copy, gradually improving and
disappearing within approximately 15 copies.
NOTE 2: This does not occur in Color mode or with paperweights of 80g/24lb or less.

CAUSE:
ELECTRICAL
The heat distribution across the fusing belt is not uniform while the initial copies are made onto thicker plain
paper in B&W mode (highest processing speed.)
SOLUTION:
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:
o o
1. SP1-912-2: Change the threshold for enabling low temperature correction from 17 C to 22 C.
2. SP1-916-1: Enable idling mode (set to a value of 1.)
SP Mode Default Change to

o o
SP1-912-2 17 C 22 C
SP1-916-1 0: OFF 1: ON See Notes below.
NOTE 3: It is not required to change the idling time (default: 30 sec) for SP1- 916- 2. Please maintain
this setting of 30sec, since a software bug will cause the machine to continue running if the
setting is changed to 40sec or more (the firmware correcting this will be released soon.)
NOTE 4: Enabling Idling Mode causes the warm-up time to increase by 30sec, therefore please advise
customers of this point.
PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:
The firmware will be modified to ensure cold offset does not occur without changing the warm-up time. This
TSB will be reissued when the released date has been confirmed.
Copyright  2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1

BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149/B190 – 003 REISSUE + 10/25/2004

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: COLD OFFSET (POOR FUSING)
MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
Cold offset (poor fusing) may occur when all of the following conditions are met:
1. The machine is turned on under low-temperature conditions
2. The weight of the paper loaded in the tray is near the upper limit for plain paper (e.g. 100g/28lb.)
3. Copies are made in B&W mode (185 mm/sec.)
NOTE 1: The offset normally occurs between the second and fifth copy, gradually improving and
disappearing within approximately 15 copies.
NOTE 2: This does not occur in Color mode or with paperweights of 80g/24lb or less.

ELECTRICAL
CAUSE:
The heat distribution across the fusing belt is not uniform while the initial copies are made onto thicker plain
paper in B&W mode (highest processing speed.)
SOLUTION:
o o
1. SP1-912-2: Change the threshold for enabling low temperature correction from 17 C to 22 C.
2. SP1-916-1: Enable idling mode (set to a value of 1.)
SP Mode Default Change to

o o
SP1-912-2 17 C 22 C
SP1-916-1 0: OFF 1: ON See Notes below.
NOTE 3: It is not required to change the idling time (default: 30 sec) for SP1- 916- 2. Please maintain
this setting of 30sec, since a software bug will cause the machine to continue running if the
setting is changed to 40sec or more (the firmware correcting this will be released soon.)
NOTE 4: Enabling Idling Mode causes the warm-up time to increase by 30sec, therefore please advise
customers of this point.
+ The B147/B149 Engine firmware version 1.11 or later has been modified to ensure that cold offset does not
occur without changing the warm-up time. This firmware modification has been in production starting in April
2004.


APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: METER CLICK FUNCTION ERROR

SYMPTOM:
SOFTWARE
The counter on a meter charge device installed mistakenly increments twice when all of the following
conditions are met.
- A meter charge device (e.g. key-card, coin-lock, key-counter) is installed
- The 2-tray paper supply unit is installed
- SP5-121 is set to “Paper Feed”
- A paper misfeed occurs in tray 4
NOTE: This error occurs only on the external meter charge device. The mainframe meter click counter
increments correctly.
CAUSE:
A software bug causes the counter to increment twice under the above conditions.
SOLUTION:
I. PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:
Engine main firmware modification (applied from v1.09b)
II. FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:

Upgrade the engine-main firmware to v1.09b, or Change SP5-121 to “1: Paper Exit.”
All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new firmware v1.09b,
or later installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER

Gestetner DSC332 K024010047
Savin C3224
Gestetner DSC338 K0340100331
Savin C3828
Lanier LD232C K024010047
Lanier LD238C K0340100331
Ricoh – Aficio 2232C K024010047
Ricoh – Aficio 2238C K0340100331


APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – DSc332/DSc338
LANIER – LD232c/LD238c
SAVIN – C3224/C3828
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas ⇒.

MANUAL
SERVICE
PAGES:
• Vii Updated Information (Table Of Contents)

• 2-1 Updated Information (Settings)
• 2-2 Updated Information (PM Table)
• 4-29 Deleted SC570 and SC571
• 5-63 Updated Information(Service Mode Tables)
• 5-73 Updated Information (Service Mode Tables)
• 5-140 Updated Information (Updating Firmware)
• 6-49 Deleted Sentence (Photoconductor Unit)
• 6-58 Deleted Sentence (Development)
• 6-96 Updated Information (Fusing Waste Oil)
• 6-96 Updated Information (Oil Supply Detection)

Rev. 06/2004
5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN… ..............................................................5-140

5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE...............................................................5-140
5.6.3 VERIFYING A SUCCESSFUL UPDATE ......................................5-147
5.6.4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL.............5-150
5.6.5 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA ..................................................5-151
5.6.6 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-152
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ...................................5-152
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM................................................5-152
5.6.7 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE .........................................5-153
5.6.8 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS ...............................5-156
5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE........................................................................5-157
5.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-157
5.7.2 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................5-158
5.7.3 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................5-159
5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................5-160
5.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-160
5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ................................................5-161
5.9 USER PROGRAM MODE .....................................................................5-162
5.9.1 MENU ...........................................................................................5-162
5.9.2 DISPLAY ......................................................................................5-166
Selecting Menu .................................................................................5-166
Inquiry ...............................................................................................5-166
5.10 DIP SWITCHES...................................................................................5-167
Controller Board................................................................................5-167
BCU Board........................................................................................5-167
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH...................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-3
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4
Overview...............................................................................................6-4
Descriptions ..........................................................................................6-5
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS ......................................................................6-6
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-8
6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-8
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-8
Overview...............................................................................................6-8
Process Control Self Check ..................................................................6-9
6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-10
Step 1: VSG Adjustment .....................................................................6-10
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment .........................6-12
SM vii B147/B149
Rev. 06/2004 SETTINGS
2.1 SETTINGS
New Unit Set
You must enable New Unit Set (SP5-999) before you replace the following units:
⇒
Maintenance
Preventive
• PCU–K (SP5-999-001) • Development Unit–C (SP5-999-008)
• PCU–Y (SP5-999-002) • Development Unit–M (SP5-999-007)
⇒ • PCU–M (SP5-999-003) • Development Unit–Y (SP5-999-006)
• PCU–C (SP5-999-004) • Fusing Unit (SP5-999-009)
• Development Unit–K (SP5-999-005)
1. Start the SP mode (☛ 5.1.1).
4. Select "OK."
8. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts the initialization for the new unit.
Counter Reset
After you replace the following units, you must reset the counter (SP7-804):
• By-pass tray (SP7-804-011) • Tray 4 (SP7-804-015)
• Tray 1 (SP7-804-012) • Transfer unit (SP7-804-017)
• Tray 2 (SP7-804-013) • Transfer belt cleaning unit (SP7-804-
• Tray 3/LCT (SP7-804-014) 018)
1. Start the SP mode (☛ 5.1.1).
3. Select "EXECUTE."
SM 2-1 B147/B149
2.2 PM TABLES
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Copier
Item 20K 40K 60K 80K 120K 140K EM Remarks
Scanner
Front and Rear
C Dry cloth
Rails
ADF Exposure
C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Glass
Development
⇒ Dev. Unit–K R ☛ 2.1
⇒ Dev. Unit–C R ☛ 2.1
⇒ Dev. Unit–M R ☛ 2.1
⇒ Dev. Unit–Y
PCU–K R
R ☛ 2.1
☛ 2.1
PCU–CMY R ☛ 2.1
Transfer
Fusing
Fusing Unit R ☛ 2.1
Oil Supply Unit R
Paper Path
Duplex Unit
Miscellaneous
R Distributed with development
Dust Filter
unit-K
Breaker I
B147/B149 2-2 SM
Rev. 06/2004 SC TABLE
⇒ SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause

Related
SCs
Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SC 555 Pressure roller When the fusing unit is not • Pressure roller 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
consecutive full the pressure roller fusing lamp position
power keeps ON with full power for
100 consecutive seconds.
SC 556 Pressure roller The pressure roller • Loose connection of 1. Check if the fusing unit is properly set A
fusing lamp temperature changes by the pressure roller and connected to the main frame.
temperature ±20°C or more in one second. thermistor 2. Check if the pressure roller thermistor
fluctuation This occurs three times in one • Loose connection connector is firmly connected.
minute or two consecutive between the fusing 3. Replace the fusing unit.
times. unit and main frame
SC 560 Zero cross error When the main switch is • Electrical noise in the 1. Replace the PSU. A
turned on, the machine checks supply from the
how many zero-cross signals power cord
are generated during 500 ms.
If the number of zero-cross
signal generated is either more
than 66 or less than 45 and
when this condition is detected
10 consecutive times, this
code is displayed.
SC 620 ARDF • After the ARDF is detected, • Incorrect installation 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication the break signal occurs or of ARDF 2. Check the cable connection of the
error communication timeout • ARDF defective ARDF.
occurs. • IPU board defective 3. Shut out the external noise.
• External noise 4. Replace the ARDF.
5. Replace the IPU board.
SC 621 Two-tray While the BCU communicates • Cable problems 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
finisher/booklet with an optional unit, an SC • BCU problems 2. Check if the cables of peripherals are
finisher code is displayed if one of • PSU problems in the properly connected.
communication following conditions occurs. machine 3. Replace the PSU if no power is
error 1. The BCU receives a signal • Main board problems supplied to peripherals.
SC 622 Bank which is generated by the in the peripherals 4. Replace the BCU or main board of
communication peripherals only just after peripherals.
error the main switch is turned
SM 4-29 B147/B149
5-997-6 By-pass Paper Size [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric

0: A4 LEF 1: LT LEF
2: A3 3: DLT
Selects the paper size for making a test pattern from the by-pass table.
5-997-7 Print
Prints the test pattern with the settings specified with SP5-997-001 to 006.
NOTE: When exiting the SP mode, the test print mode is automatically canceled.

5-998-1 ENG Setting Clears the engine settings except for counters.
5-998-2 ENG Counter Clears all counters.
5-999 New Unit Set *BCU [0: Disable/1: Enable]

#
5-999-1 PCU: Bk This program makes the machine to start the
5-999-2 PCU: Y initialization processing for a newly installed
⇒ 5-999-3
5-999-4
PCU: M
PCU: C
unit. You set “1: Enable” before installing a
new unit.
5-999-5 Dev. U: Bk
5-999-6 Dev. U: Y
5-999-7 Dev. U: M
5-999-8 Dev. U: C
5-999-9 Fuser
Service
Tables
SM 5-63 B147/B149
7-803-33 S: Toner [C]

Displays the total operating time for the toner attraction pump.
7-803-34 Toner Supply[K] *BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 s/step ]
7-803-35 Toner Supply[Y]
7-803-36 Toner Supply[M]
7-803-37 Toner Supply[C]
(Current revolution ÷ Target revolution) × 100, where “Current revolution” is the
current value for the counter of the part, and “Target revolution” is the values of SP7-
803-17 through 27. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been
used up.
The R% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter
is still less than 100%.
Oil supply unit: When the R% counter reaches 100%, it enters the near-end condition,
not the end condition. The end condition occurs some number of rotations after this
(not adjustable).
NOTE: The machine internally adjusts or compensates as necessary, depending on
conditions of machine usage. Due to this, at the oil supply unit near-end
condition, the R% counter of the oil supply unit can be 100%, lower than
100%, or higher than 100%.
7-803-38 R(%): PCU [K] *BCU
7-803-39 R(%): PCU [Y]
7-803-40 R(%): PCU [M]
7-803-41 R(%): PCU [C]
7-803-42 R(%): Dev [K]
7-803-43 R(%): Dev [Y]
7-803-44 R(%): Dev [M]
7-803-45 R(%): Dev [C]
7-803-46 R(%): Oil Spply
7-803-47 R(%): Fusing
Service
Tables
7-803-48 S: Trans Cln
7-803-49 R: Trans Cln
7-804 [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear

(Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Clears the PM counter.
⇒ Press the Enter key after the machine asks “Execute?,” which will store the PM
counter value in SP7-906-1 to 25 (PM Counter – Previous), and reset the value
of the current PM counter to 0.

7-804-1 Paper
7-804-2 PCU [K]
7-804-3 PCU [Y]
7-804-4 PCU [M]
7-804-5 PCU [C]
7-804-6 Dev. [K]
7-804-7 Dev. [Y]
7-804-8 Dev. [M]
7-804-9 Dev. [C]
7-804-10 Oil Supply
7-804-11 PF By-pass
7-804-12 PF Tray 1
SM 5-73 B147/B149
FIRMWARE UPDATE Rev. 06/2004
5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN…

An SD card is a precision device, so always observe the following precautions
when handling SD cards:
• Always switch the machine off before inserting an SD card. Never insert the SD
card into the slot with the power on.
• After the power has been switched on, never remove the SD card from the
service slot.
• Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD
card.
• Store SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed high temperature,
high humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
• Always handle SD cards with care to avoid bending or scratching them. Never
drop an SD card or expose it to other shock or vibration.
Keep the following points in mind while you are using the firmware update
software:
• “Upload” means to send data from the machine to the SD card, and “download”
means to send data from the SD card to the machine.
• To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-
screen of the LCD, or press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the
operation panel. For example, “Exit (0)” displayed on the screen means you can
touch the Exit button on the screen, or press the button on the operation
panel of the copier.
• Before starting the firmware update procedure, always make sure that the
machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job from arriving
while the firmware update is in progress.
5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE

⇒ Preparation
1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire “romdata” folder onto the SD card.
2. If the card already contains the “romdata” folder, copy the “B149” folder onto the
card.
3. If the card already contains folders up to “B149”, simply copy the necessary
firmware files (e.g. B149xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
B147/B149 5-140 SM
Rev. 06/2004 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

⇒ 6.7.1 OVERVIEW
2
6
B146D529.WMF
1. Cleaning brush roller 4. Cleaning brush

2. Charge roller (non-contact) 5. Waste toner collection auger
3. OPC drum 6. Cleaning blade
This machine has four independent PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU consists
Descriptions
of an OPC drum, non-contact charge roller, cleaning brush, and cleaning blade. Detailed
The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm).
The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development roller
is determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not
adjustable in the field.
.
SM 6-49 B147/B149
DEVELOPMENT Rev.06/2004
6.8 DEVELOPMENT
⇒ 6.8.1 OVERVIEW
3
6
5 B146D534.WMF
1. Doctor blade 4. TD sensor

2. Developer hopper 5. Mixing auger (left)
3. Mixing auger (right) 6. Development roller
This machine has four independent development units, one for each color. Each
contains 280 g of developer when new. The developer in each unit is supplied to
the development roller by the two mixing augers and attracted onto the surface of
the roller.
The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined by
the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not adjustable in the field.
The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unit
has a TD sensor.
The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm (circumference about 56.5 mm).
B147/B149 6-58 SM
FUSING Rev. 06/2004
Waste Oil Sensor

There is an enclosed area [A] on the rear left shoulder of the waste oil bottle. On
the inside wall of this area are two pinholes, through which the waste oil can flow
into the enclosed area. This enclosed area contains an actuator [B], which
interrupts the waste oil sensor [C] if no oil is in the area.
When the amount of waste oil becomes large enough for the waste oil to flow into
the area, the actuator floats on the oil. When the actuator leaves the waste oil
sensor, the message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full,” is displayed on the
operation panel.
NOTE: With this error message, another message, “Waste Oil Bottle Setting
Error,” can be displayed (☛ Bottle Set Sensor).
After this message appears, the copier can operate until the number of rotations of
development drive motor K reaches the value specified with SP7-905-010. When
⇒ the number has reached this value, an error message is displayed and the copier
stops its operation. When you dispose of the waste oil, the machine resumes its
normal operations (no need to switch the machine off/on).
6.12.6 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B146D573.WMF
The fusing oil supply unit [A] contains a fuse [B] in a circuit between the fusing unit
and the BCU board. The fuse opens shortly after a new unit has been installed in
the machine and the power is switched on. When the power is turned on or the left
cover is closed, the BCU checks whether a new fusing oil supply unit is installed by
checking the fuse condition. If the fusing oil supply unit has been replaced, the
machine detects the new unit and automatically resets the counter for the unit.
Oil near-end is detected by counting the number of prints made. The machine
indicates oil near-end 2,500 sheets before the life of the oil supply unit runs out.
This timing can be changed with SP7-905-14. . When the number has reached this
⇒ value, an error message is displayed and the copier stops its operation.
B147/B149 6-96 SM

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING COPY QUALITY ISSUES
COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM:
A RAM access error sometimes occurs when the controller attempts to access the SDRAM DIMM, resulting
in one of the faulty images shown below (band shifting along the main scan direction, solid banding,
stretched banding).
Note:
Occurrence is limited to when SDRAM DIMM memory is inserted in all 3 slots, and shows a factory rate
of approximately 0.56%.
Even if this occurs on a FAX image, the machine will not send the data.
CAUSE:
PARTS
The response time that the controller requires is sometimes too short for the SDRAM DIMM, preventing the
image from being read out of memory correctly.
SOLUTION:
Production Countermeasure:
SDRAMM DIMM parts are tested so that only those that are able to respond in time are selected for use.
ELECTRICAL
Production Countermeasure (permanent):
The following controller board has been changed to ensure proper communication between the controller
and SDRAM DIMM.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B1475730 B1475733 Controller for J-C1y (B146/147) 1 97 9
B1495730 B1495733 Controller for J-C1z (B148/149) 1 97 9

Tech Service Bulletin No B147/B149 – 006
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace the controller board when any of the following image symptoms are reported.
1. Printer Image 2. Printer Image
Page 2 of 4
3. Copy Image 4. Scan-to-Email Image (Color)
5. Scan-to-Email Image (Grayscale) 6. Scan-to-Email Image (Text)
Page 3 of 4
7. Scan-to-Email Image (Text/Photo)
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Controller,
installed during production

Gestetner DSc332 K0231200001
Savin C3224
Gestetner/DSc338 K0331200001
Savin C3828
Lanier LD232c K0231200001
Lanier LD238c K0331200001
Ricoh AFICIO 2232C K0231200001
Ricoh 2238C K0331200001
Page 4 of 4

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN - C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: OIL SUPPLY UNIT

PARTS
GENERAL:
The pressure between the oil supply pad and the oil supply roller has been optimized to further improve
the uniformity of oil supply from the roller. The following part update is being issued for all B147/B149
Parts Catalogs. Please update your parts catalog with the following information.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B1164280 B1164285 Oil Supply Unit 1 1 61 35
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Oil Supply
Unit installed during production.

Lanier LD232c
Ricoh Aficio 2232C
Savin C3224
Lanier LD238c
Ricoh Aficio 2238C
Savin C3828
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.


APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN - C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: PCU
PARTS
GENERAL:
A lubricant bar has been added to the PCU cleaning brush to further ensure that additives contained in
paper do not stick to the drum surface. The following part update is being issued for all B147/B149 Parts
Catalogs. Please update your parts catalog with the following information.
In accordance with this change:

The PCU yield has been increased from 40k to 60k.
Both the color and Bk PCUs have been standardized to one part number, as they all use the same
modified cleaning mechanism mentioned above.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B1492214 PCU-BK 1→0 - 51 1
B1492213 PCU-CMY 3→0 - 51 2
B1909510 PCU:C1:EXP:ASS'Y 4 0 51 1
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE:
Before replacing any of the new units, be sure and perform the following procedure to enable the new-unit
detection program.
1. Check the engine firmware version.

2. If the version is version 1.11 or newer, go to step 4.
3. If available, update the engine firmware to version 1.11 or newer.
4. Access SP5-999.
5. Select one of the new set programs (SP5-999-001 to 004).
7. Select "OK."
Number Unit Default Adjustable Range
Settings
SP5-999-001 PCU–K 0 0: Disable
SP5-999-002 PCU–Y 1: Enable
SP5-999-003 PCU–M
SP5-999-004 PCU–C
8. Exit SP Mode.
9. Turn the main switch OFF.
11. Turn the main switch ON. The machine will begin the initialization for the new unit. If the engine firmware
is version 1.11 or newer, the following step is not required.
12. If the engine firmware is older than version1.11: in User Tools, perform Auto Color Registration
(automatic line position adjustment) twice.

Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149 – 008
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style PCU
installed during production.

Lanier LD232c
Ricoh Aficio 2232C
Savin C3224
Lanier LD238c
Ricoh Aficio 2238C
Savin C3828
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
Page 2 of 2

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN - C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: SC285, SC387, SC388 OR SC389

ELECTRICAL
SYMPTOM:
An SC285, SC387, SC388, or SC389 can sometimes occur on machines that printout primarily in B/W
mode (total color to B/W page ratio of 1:100), such as when using the machine primarily as a FAX.
CAUSE:
Color development units are activated at power OFF/ON, jam recovery and process control (ID sensor
pattern), which slightly charges and consumes the toner. However, the units are inactive and therefore toner
is not replenished when printing out (primarily in B/W mode triggering the SC).
SOLUTION:
1. Set SP3-125-003 to a value of 2 to enable Job End & Non-use Self Check Mode.
NOTE: This will instruct the machine to perform Auto Density Adjustment every 200 prints at the next job
end (operation lasts approximately two to six minutes).
2. Set SP3-125-005 to a value of 0 (disable).
NOTE: This will instruct the machine to ignore all environmental factors when performing process control.

BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149/B190 – 010 09/08/2004

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – DSc332/DSc338/DSc328
LANIER – LD232c/LD238c/LD228c
RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C/2228C
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: NEW PRODUCT RELEASE INFORMATION
GENERAL:
!
The purpose of this TSB is to supply the technician with the information required to support the new B190
color copier. This bulletin contains the additional parts information and service manual changes from the
PARTS
other models in the series, the B147 and B149. Please update your B147/B149 Parts Catalog and
Service Manual with the information supplied in this bulletin.
PARTS CATALOG UPDATE:

The following parts updates are being issued for all B147/B149/B190 Parts Catalogs.
!
PAGE:
MANUAL
SERVICE
• Legend Updated Information (Legend)
REFERENCE
B147/B149
B190 PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
PART NO.
B1495059 B1905059 PCB: BCU : B190 Board 1 93 15
B1475733 B1915734 PCB: Controller Ass’y (B190) 1 97 9
B1495733
B1476192 B1906192 Decal Emblem: B190: Ricoh 1 11 1
B1496192 147 9
B1476193 B1906193 Decal Emblem: B190: Savin 1 11 1
B1496193 147 9
B1476194 B1906194 Decal Emblem: B190: Gestetner 1 11 1
B1496194 147 9
B1476195 B1906195 Decal Emblem: B190: Lanier 1 11 1
B1496195 147 9
B1476492 B1906492 Decal Emblem: B190: NRG NSA 1 11 1
B1496492 147 9
B1476493 B1906493 Decal Emblem: B190: NRG REX 1 11 1
B1496493 147 9
B1476494 B1906494 Decal Emblem: B190: NRG GES 1 11 1
B1496494 147 9

Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149/B190 – 010
SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE:
PAGES:
• Legend Updated Information (Legend)

• 2-2 and 2-3 Updated Information (PM Tables)
• 5-167 Updated Information (Dip Switches)
• 7-1 Updated Information (Specifications – Basic)
• 7-3 and 7-4 Updated Information (Specifications – Printer and Scanner)
Page 2 of 2
LEGEND
G329 Platen Cover Type 3800C
B597 Auto Reverse Document Feeder DF77
B601 1-Tray Paper Feed Unit PS540
B598 2-Tray Paper Feed Unit PS550
B600 Large Capacity Tray PS560
G306 Multi-Bin Unit PT460
B599 2-Tray Finisher SR90
B377 Punch Kit Type 1045
B602/B657 Booklet Finisher SR910
B612 Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2238
B603 Fax Option Type 2238
B604 G3 Interface Unit Type 2238
1 09/2004 B190 release
LEGEND
1 09/2004 B190 update
2.2 PM TABLES
On the B190, there is a wider gap between sheets of paper. Since the PM interval
is based on the number of motor revolutions, increasing the paper interval means
shortening the PM interval by 10% (motor revolutions are more frequent, making
the PM timing sooner).
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%

B147/B149
Copier B190
20K 40K 60K 120K 140K

Item EM Remarks
18K 36K 54K 108K 126K
Scanner
Front and Rear Rails C Dry cloth
ADF Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Development
Dev. Unit–K R 2.1
Dev. Unit–C R 2.1
Dev. Unit–M R 2.1
Dev. Unit–Y R 2.1
PCU–K R 2.1
PCU–CMY R 2.1
Transfer
Fusing
Fusing Unit R 2.1
Oil Supply Unit R
Paper Path
Duplex Unit
Miscellaneous
Dust Filter R Distributed with development unit-K
Breaker I
B147/B149/B190 2-2 SM
Rev. 09/2004 PM TABLES
B147/B149
ARDF B190
240K
Item EM Remarks
216K
Pick-up Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Feed Belt R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Separation Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Maintenance
Sensors C C Blower brush
Preventive
Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
White Plate C Dry or damp cloth
Drive Gear L Grease G501
Transport Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Exit Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Idle Rollers C Damp cloth; alcohol
NOTE: 240k copies (= 80k originals x 3 copies/original) (B147/B149)

216k copies (= 72k originals x 3 copies/original) (B190)

Feed Roller C Damp cloth
Pickup Roller C Damp cloth
Separation Roller C Damp cloth

Feed Rollers C Damp cloth
Pickup Rollers C Damp cloth
Separation Rollers C Damp cloth
LCT
Relay Roller C Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth
Two-Tray Finisher
Items 240K EM Remarks
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
Jogger Fences I Replace if required.
Two-Tray Finisher Punch Kit

Punch Chad C Discard chad.
SM 2-3 B147/B149/B190
Rev. 09/2004 DIP SWITCHES
5.10 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board
DIP SW No. OFF ON
Boot-up from flash Boot-up from IC card
1
ROM
2 to 4 Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.
BCU Board
Set the DIP switch on the BCU as listed in the table.
DIP Switch
Model 4
1 2 3
B147/B190 B149
North/South
ON OFF OFF OFF ON
America
Europe OFF ON OFF OFF ON
Asia ON ON OFF OFF ON
Taiwan ON OFF ON OFF ON
Korea OFF ON ON OFF ON
When the DIP switch is incorrectly set, one of the following error occurs:
• “SC195”
• “SC902”
• “Fusing Unit Setting Error”
Service
Tables
SM 5-167 B147/B149/B190
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 BASIC
Configuration: Desktop
Print Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Number of scans: 1
Resolution: Scan: 600 dpi
Print: 600 dpi
Gradation: Scan: 8 bits/pixel
Print: 2 bits/pixel
Original type: Sheets, book, objects
Max. original size: A3/11" x 17"
Original reference Left rear corner
position:
Copy speed: Normal
OHP/Thick
B147, B149, B190: 10 cpm (color/black & white)
ADF 1 to 1
First copy (normal Color: 10 seconds or less
mode): Black & white: 8 seconds or less
Warm-up time: 101 seconds or less (23°C, 50%)
Print Paper Capacity: Standard tray: 500 sheets x 2
(80 g/m2, 20 lb) By-pass tray: 100 sheets
Optional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 1, 500 sheets x 2, Optional
LCT: 2000 sheets
Specifications
Print Paper Size: (Refer to “Supported Paper Sizes”.)

Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Tray 2 A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11" A3/11" x 17"
By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 458 mm/12" x 18"
Optional Tray A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11" A3/11" x 17"
LCT A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Printing Paper Standard tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Weight: Optional paper tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
By-pass tray: 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb.)
SM 7-1 B147/B149/B190
1.2 PRINTER
Printer Languages: PCL5c
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
Resolution and PCL5c:
Gradation: 600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 300 x 300 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
Adobe PostScript 3:
RPCS:
NOTE: 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel) = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits/pixel)
Printing speed:
Resolution Plain paper Thick/OHP
600 x 600 dpi 32 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm
B147
600 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 14 ppm 10 ppm
600 x 600 dpi 38 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm
B149
600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 14 ppm 10 ppm
600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 20 ppm 10 ppm
B190
600 x 600 dpi 20 ppm 10 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 14 ppm 10 ppm
Resident Fonts: PCL5c:

35 Intelli fonts
Specifications
10 TrueType fonts
Adobe PostScript 3:
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
Host Interfaces: Bi-directional IEEE1284 parallel x 1..................... Standard
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)...................... Standard
USB 2.0 ............................................................... Optional
IEEE1394............................................................. Optional
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)............................... Optional
Bluetooth (Wireless)............................................. Optional
SM 7-3 B147/B149/B190
SPECIFICATIONS Rev. 09/2004
Network Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk, SMB

First Print Speed: Color: 9 seconds or less (from tray 1)
Monochrome: 7 seconds or less (from tray 1)
1.3 SCANNER
Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan
Resolution: 600 dpi
Available scanning Twain Mode:
Resolution Range: 100 ~ 1200 dpi
Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB
Scanning B/W: 28 ppm LEF
Throughput Color: 24 ppm LEF
(ARDF mode):
Interface: Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394,
Wireless LAN
Compression B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
Method: Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG
B147/B149/B190 7-4 SM

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: “ADD PAPER TO TRAY 1 (2)” WITH PAPER IN THE TRAY

SYMPTOM:
PAPER PATH
The message “Add paper to Tray1 (2)” is displayed even if there is paper in paper tray 1 or 2.
NOTE: This symptom does not occur in the LCT or paper bank.
CAUSES:
1. The paper tray holder (Item 17: See picture below) moves forward due to the defective rear metal board.
This does not let the paper tray close correctly. This tends to occur in tray 2 because of the machine’s
layout.
2. The paper tray holder cannot hold the paper tray firmly if these occur:
- The paper tray gets pushed and pulled many times.
- The paper tray holder becomes worn.

SOLUTIONS:
For CAUSE 1:
Use this procedure to attach the tape (P/N: G0123897 X 4).
1. Remove the rear cover (See B147/B149/B190 Service Manual 3.5.1).

2. Remove the high voltage supply unit (See B147/B149/B190 Service Manual 3.13.6).
3. Remove the sub power supply unit (See B147/B149/B190 Service Manual 3.13.7).
4. Remove the tray holders (See illustration below).
5. Attach the tape (P/N: G0123897 X 4) according to the following illustration.
6. Reassemble the parts.
For CAUSE 2:
1. Replace the paper tray holder (P/N G0602801).
Page 2 of 2

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – DSC332/DSC338/DSC328
LANIER – LD232C/238C/LD228C
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: SC397/SC388
SYMPTOM:
SC387/SC388 may occur when you install the machine.
CAUSE:
The drum plate can bend if development unit K (Y) is not set correctly. This will not let development unit C

(M) get set correctly. At this time, development unit C (M) cannot mesh with the mainframe drive gear. As a
MECHANICAL
result, the development unit cannot be driven when the main switch is turned on.
Action required when installing the machine
NOTE: Do these steps before you turn on the main

switch.
1. Turn the transfer belt release lever
counterclockwise.
2. Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate.


Tech Service Bulletin No.B147/B149 /B190 – 012
3. Hold the development unit. At the same time,

slowly pull out the tape horizontally.
4. .Push in each development unit
5. Lower the drum plate. Then tighten two screws

that hold the plate (the upper left one first, then
the lower right one).
Page 2 of 2

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/c2820
SUBJECT: SC386/SC387/SC388/SC389
SYMPTOM:
+ SC386/SC387/SC388/SC389 may occur when you install the machine.
CAUSE:
the drum plate can bend if development unit k (y) is not set correctly. this will not let development unit c (m)

get set correctly. at this time, development unit c (m) cannot mesh with the mainframe drive gear. as a result,
MECHANICAL
the development unit cannot be driven when the main switch is turned on.
SOLUTION:
ACTION REQUIRED WHEN INSTALLING THE MACHINE
NOTE: Do these steps before you turn on the main

switch.
1. Turn the transfer belt release lever
counterclockwise.
2. Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate.


Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149 /B190 – 012 REISSUE +
3. Hold the development unit. At the same time,

slowly pull out the tape horizontally.
4. Push in each development unit.
+ 5. Lower the drum plate. Then tighten two screws

that hold the plate (the upper left one first, then
the lower right one).Return the transfer belt
release lever to its operational position (See
step no. 1).
Page 2 of 2

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: SC386/SC387/SC388/SC389
SYMPTOM:
+ An SC386, SC387, SC388, or SC389 may occur when you install the machine or replace the development
unit.
+CAUSE:
The drum plate bends slightly and the development unit gear cannot mesh with the mainframe gear. This
MECHANICAL
can happen when:
The unit is not installed correctly at the factory.
or
A new unit is not installed correctly in the field during developer replacement.
+ SOLUTIONS:
Action Required When Installing The Machine
NOTE: Do these steps before you turn the main switch

ON.
1. Turn the transfer belt release lever counterclockwise.
2. Loosen the two screws that fasten the drum plate.

3. Then lift the plate until you hear a click.

+
4. While holding the development unit with one hand,
pull out the tape gently as shown.
5. Push in the four development units all the way to

the rear.
6. Lower the drum plate.

7. Tighten the upper-left screw for the drum plate.
8. Tighten the lower-right screw for the drum plate.
9. Return the transfer belt release lever to its
operational position. (See step 1.)
Page 2 of 3
+
Action Required When Replacing The Development Unit
If the symptom occurs after you install a new development unit,
1. Pull out the new development unit from the machine.

2. Check if there is any toner scattering inside the machine, and clean the area if necessary.
Toner scattering can occur because in some cases, toner is supplied even when the development
unit is not running.
3. Install the new development unit again.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the development unit is pushed all the way to the rear of the machine.
Page 3 of 3

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: EARLY TONER NEAR END ALERT
SYMPTOM:

MECHANICAL
The toner near end alert shows even if toner remains in the toner cartridge.
CAUSE:
When the machine is not used for a long period of time, the air supply bulbs cannot work normally. This
causes insufficient toner agitation.
SOLUTION:
Remove the toner cartridge from the machine and shake it side to side 5 to 6 times. Then put it back in the
machine.


APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820
!
MANUAL
SERVICE
PAGES:
• 1-7 through 11 Updated Information (Installation Procedure)

Installation
CAUTION
Remove the tape from the development units (see step 2) before you turn
the main switch on. The development units may be severely damaged if
they operate with the tape attached.
If you install an optional paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time, place
the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install the copier and other
options.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. You may need
them (in the future) to transport the machine to another location.
[A]
B146I945.WMF
B146I944.WMF
⇒ 1. Remove the tape and padding on the copier. To remove the tapes from the
developer units follow the procedure below:
a) Turn the transfer belt release lever
counterclockwise.
b) Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate.
SM 1-7 B147/B149/B190
⇒ c) Hold the development unit. At the

same time, slowly pull out the tape
horizontally.
d) Push in each development unit
e) Lower the drum plate. Then tighten

two screws that hold the plate (the
upper left one first, then the lower
right one). Return the transfer belt
release lever to its operational position. (See Step a).
2. Remove the pin [A]. (As shown on the previous page.)

NOTE: Keep the pin. You may need it to transport the machine in the future
( 1.4.3).
B146I913.WMF
3. Remove the tape from the oil supply unit.

B146I914.WMF
B147/B149/B190 1-8 SM
⇒4. Install the oil supply unit to the fusing

[A]
Installation
unit.
5. Install the fusing unit [A] to the copier.
[B] B146I912.WMF
6. Shake the toner cartridge five or six

times.
7. Install the toner cartridges to the copier.
8. Check that the hooks [B] hold the
cartridge correctly.
B146I915.WMF
[C]
9. Install the external tray [C].
B146I916.WMF
SM 1-9 B147/B149/B190
⇒ 10. Attach the cloth holder [A] to the left side of the
scanner unit.
11. Place the contact glass cleaning cloth [B] in the
holder.
B146I936.WMF
12. Remove the guide cover [C].

13. Attach the duplex inverter guide [D].
14. Re-attach the guide cover.
[B]
[C]
[A] B146I003.WMF
[D]
15. Attach the appropriate model name decal [A] to

the front cover.
16. Pull each paper tray out, and adjust the side
guides and end guide to match the paper size.
NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out
the tray fully, then push down the green
lock at the rear inside the tray.
17. Attach the appropriate paper tray number
decals [B] to the paper trays.
[A]
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used
for the optional paper tray or the
optional LCT. Keep any remaining
decals for use with these optional units.
18. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen B146I928.WMF
cover. [B]
B147/B149/B190 1-10 SM
⇒19. Plug in the machine and turn the main power switch on. The machine
Installation
automatically starts the initialization procedure. After this has finished, the Start
button LED (C) turns green.
20. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
21. Perform the Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) as follows:
1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
2) Place the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Place 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
5) Press “Start Scanning” on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
22. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
23. Check that the circuit breaker works normally.
Settings Relevant to Contract

If the customer has a service contract, change the settings of the following SPs in
accordance with it.
NOTE: You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in
accordance with the contract ( SP5-045-001).
Item SP No. Function Default
Counting SP5-045-001 Specifies whether the counting method “0”:
method used in meter charge mode is based on Developments
developments or prints.
NOTE: You can specify this setting only
one time. After you have specified
it, you cannot change the setting.
A3/11" x 17" SP5-104-001 Specifies whether the counter is doubled “No”: Single
double for A3/11" x 17" paper. counting
counting
Serivice Tel. SP5-812-001 Programs the service station fax number.
No. Setting through 004 The number is printed on the counter list
when the meter charge mode is selected,
so that the user can fax the counter data to
the service station.
SM 1-11 B147/B149/B190

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: PAPER JAM IN THE DUPLEX UNIT
SYMPTOM:
PAPER PATH
Paper jams in the duplex unit.
CAUSE:
The shape of the sheet gate mylar’s (P/N -
G3484682; Sheet: Gate: 2; Index 16) used in
the duplex unit were out of specification. They
were angled in the wrong direction, creating a
block when the paper was transferred to the
two-tray finisher.
OCCURRENCE CONDITIONS:
Mainframe units that are configured with:
- Two-Tray Finisher and LCT or
- Two-Tray Finisher and Paper Feed Unit
Type (2 trays) or
- Booklet Finisher
SOLUTION:
An inspection process has been added to the production line whereby the mylar’s are checked to ensure
they conform to specification. In addition, the mylar’s stocked as service parts have been replaced with the
modified ones.
NOTE: The serial number cut-in information not available at the time of this publication.

Replace the seven mylar’s as shown in the procedure below.
MYLAR REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE:

1. Open the duplex left cover [A].
2. Remove the top cover (4 screws).
3. Remove the stopper.
Page 2 of 4
4. Remove the duplex control board (4 screws, 7 Connectors).
5. Remove the left middle guide plate (2 screws ).
Page 3 of 4
6. Replace the seven (7) Mylar’s circled below.

IMPORTANT:
Refer to the Attachment Specifications below.
Clean the attachment area for each Mylar before you attach the new one.
Press hard on the attachment area of the Mylar.
Make sure the Mylar is not sticking out from the guide plate.
Attachment Specifications:
A: Horizontal (left to right): - 0.5mm to + 0.5mm
B: Vertical (up and down): 0 to + 0.5mm
NOTE: The “edge line” is a line on the guide plate. It is not the edge of the guide plate.
Page 4 of 4

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: SERVICE CODE 385

SYMPTOM:
ELECTRICAL
SC385 sometimes may occurs at intervals of 20k prints or less
CAUSE:
Toner scatters from the transfer belt during process control, which can then sometimes accumulate on the
center ID sensor.
SOLUTION:
If SC385 occurs, clean the surface of the ID sensor by opening and closing the ID sensor shutter (black felt
covered handle) several times.
The ID sensor shutter is located inside the drum positioning plate (at the end of the ID Sensor).
At the next service visit, make sure that SP3107-02, -04 and –06 all show a value of 200 or lower. If they do
not, clean the ID sensor as described above.
NOTE: In either case, after cleaning the ID sensor, check the SP modes listed above and confirm that
they show a value of 200 or lower.


APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: SPRINGS FOR THE TRANSFER UNIT ROLLERS COME LOOSE
MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
The springs for the transfer unit rollers come loose during transport.
NOTE: The Transfer Unit part number is- B1013810.
CAUSE:
Vibration during transport may cause the springs to come loose.
SOLUTION:
Production Countermeasure:
Two stoppers have been added to the unit. (As shown in the photo below.)
NOTE: New transfer units have a yellow circle on the outer box.
Stopper
Stopper

Field Countermeasure:
When you install the new style units (units with stoppers):
- Remove the two stoppers before you install the new transfer unit.
Remove the wires at the four ends of the stoppers.
Remove the four red tags.
Page 2 of 2
FIRMWARE HISTORY
FIRMWARE HISTORY
PUBLISHED DATE: 11/17/2004
PRODUCT CODE: B147/B149/B190

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820
GENERAL: Flash
The latest firmware version can be downloaded at the Technology Solutions Center FTP Site at
Memory
Card
http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. Be sure to check the README file for important notes and explanations.

FIRMWARE
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
⇒ 1. 1.1
B147/B149/B190 ENGINE: ................................................................. 2
B147/B149 ENGINE FIRMWARE HISTORY: ..............................................2
1.2 B190 ENGINE FIRMWARE HISTORY: ........................................................4
2. SYSTEM:............................................................................................. 6
2.1 SYSTEM FIRMWARE HISTORY: ................................................................6
3. LANGUAGE KIT: ................................................................................ 8
3.1 LANGUAGE FIRMWARE HISTORY: ...........................................................8
4. MUSIC:................................................................................................ 9
4.1 MUSIC FIRMWARE HISTORY:....................................................................9
5. FAX: .................................................................................................... 9
5.1 FAX FIRMWARE HISTORY: ........................................................................9
6. NETFILE:........................................................................................... 10
6.1 NETFILE FIRMWARE HISTORY: ..............................................................10
7. NIB: ................................................................................................... 10
7.1 NIB FIRMWARE HISTORY: .......................................................................10
8. WebSystem: ..................................................................................... 11
8.1 WebSystem FIRMWARE HISTORY:..........................................................11
9. WebDocBox: .................................................................................... 11
9.1 WebDocBox FIRMWARE HISTORY: .........................................................11
10. LCDC: ............................................................................................. 11
10.1 LCDC FIRMWARE HISTORY: .................................................................11
11. FCU: ................................................................................................ 12
11.1 FCU FIRMWARE HISTORY:....................................................................12
12. SCANNER:...................................................................................... 13
12.1 SCANNER FIRMWARE HISTORY:..........................................................13
13. SCANNER IPU: ............................................................................... 14
13.1 SCANNER IPU FIRMWARE HISTORY: ..................................................14
14. PRINTER:........................................................................................ 15
14.1 PRINTER FIRMWARE HISTORY: ...........................................................15
15. POST SCRIPT:................................................................................ 16
15.1 PS FIRMWARE HISTORY: ......................................................................16

Firmware History for B147/B149/B190
1. B147/B149/B190 ENGINE:
NOTE: The B190 engine firmware is different from B147/B149 engine firmware. Make sure you are using
the correct firmware when updating your machine.
1.1 B147/B149 ENGINE FIRMWARE HISTORY:
CARD VERSION PART NUMBER CHECK SUM PRODUCTION DATE
1.08 B1495505C C8E5 October 2003 production

1.08B B1495505D 24CC November 2003 production
1.09 B1495505E 360C December 2003 production
1.09A B1495505F D474 December 2003 production
1.09B B1495505G 5C1B January 2004 production
1.09C B1495505H 4CE3 February 2004 production
1.09D B1495505J 33E4 March 2004 production
1.11 B1495505K D9E8 April 2004 production
1.13 B1495505L 86FB June 2004 production
1.14 B1495505M 2EF0 September 2004 production
CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
Initial Production Release 1.08
Corrects the following: 1.08B
• Optimized the target pressure roller temperature for when recovering from Low Power
Mode.
NOTE: This applies to the Asia model only.
Corrects the following: 1.09

• Optimized conditions for error detection during developer initialization to ensure that new
development units are properly detected (Vt normal range changed from 0.5V to
≤0.78V).
• Optimized toner supply control for when printing onto undefined paper types longer than
DLT/A3.
• SC220-1 misdetections.
• Optimized detection conditions of output tray JAM 25 to eliminate unnecessary

occurrences.
Corrects the following: 1.09A
• (Changes applied to the Japanese model only).
Page 2 of 16
CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
Corrects the following: 1.09B
• The counter on a meter charge device installed mistakenly increments twice when all of
the following conditions are met:
- A meter charge device (e.g. key-card, coin-lock, key-counter) is installed
- The 2-tray paper supply unit is installed
- SP5-121 is set to “Paper Feed”
- A paper misfeed occurs in tray 4
NOTE: This error occurs only on the external meter charge device. The mainframe meter
click counter increments correctly.
Page 3 of 16
⇒ 1.2 B190 ENGINE FIRMWARE HISTORY:

1.01 B1905505 A AFED August 2004

K1.02 B1905505 B 62D0 October 2004
CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
Corrects the following: K1.02
• Optimized the target pressure roller temperature for when recovering from Low Power
Mode.
Page 4 of 16
CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
Corrects the following: 1.09C
• Default fusing temperature changed on NA machines for the following modes in order to
increase the glossiness on the second side of a duplex sheet.
1105 6 H:N [K] D 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 165 / 5°C/step]
1105 11 H:N[FC] D 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 170 / 5°C/step]
1105 17 P:N [K] D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 145 / 5°C/step]
1105 22 P:N[FC] D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5°C/step]
Corrects the following: 1.09D

• SC670 misdetection.
• Modified as part of solution for cold offset at power on under cold conditions.
• Modified in conjunction with PCU cleaning blade modification to ensure the blade remains
properly fixed in place.
• Finisher jam with series printing if the stapling positions for the 1st and 2nd jobs are
different and the 1st job is set for stapling under unsupported conditions (e.g. only one
sheet in stack).
• SC545/555 misdetection (EU).

• The display values for SP7-803-46 and SP7-906-34 were wrong (“oil unit lifetime
1000%”). Also, the calculation for oil unit lifetime was improved.
• Modified software to get Energy Star certification in Taiwan.

• Added the serial number information for the Korea model.
Page 5 of 16
2. SYSTEM:
1.10.1 B1015851D BE45 October 2003 production

1.12.2 B1015851E 7EFF December 2003 production
1.14.1 B1015851F 0EED February 2004 production
1.18.1 B1015851G 6A36 May 2004 production
1.19 B1015851H 0086 July 2004 production
⇒ 1.20 B1015851J F49B October 2004 production
2.1 SYSTEM FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
Initial Production Release 1.10.1
Corrects the following: 1.12.2
• Minor errors during an HDD self-diagnostic are sometimes not detected.
• Minor errors during an optional RAM self-diagnostic are sometimes not detected.
• The machine mistakenly allows local storage files containing mixed B/W and color pages
to be printed out in Magazine Mode.
• Optimized detection conditions for NVRAM access errors to eliminate unnecessary

occurrences.
Specification changes:
• A data backup function (SP5-846-50 to -53) has been added to the SD card that allows
the Address Book data to be uploaded to the card.
Note: An RTB will be released announcing the details of this change.
• Specification for the development counters (SP8-771-01 to -05) changed so that the
counter increments according to actual machine operation, i.e. no longer follows the
value of the meter charge counter.
• Revised so that SP8-383-01 (F:Total PrtPGS) does not increment when printing out a
Fax reception document from local storage.
Page 6 of 16
CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
• After canceling a scan using DeskTopBinder, an internal error will occur if another scan is
attempted afterward.
• Unable to send with Scan-to-Folder to an SMB-connected Win98 PC with shared security

settings enabled when all of the following conditions are satisfied:
- The destination folder is selected from a registered entry in the Address Book.
- A New Password has been set but the User Name has not in the Address Book
MgmtNew Program Folder screen.
- Neither the SMB Default User Name nor Default Password has been set in the File
TransferDefault Username/Password (Send) screen.
• Network PC stations registered under a given workgroup are not displayed when the
workgroup name consists only of numerical characters (SMB transmission Network
screen).
• HDD initialization is performed when the main switch is turned on
• SC990 sometimes occurs when the main switch is turned on.

• Added the B190 product name.
• "Near End" messages for oil and waste toner are only displayed when the display
language is English or Japanese.
• When a Magazine/Combine job is made, the separator line is printed in the wrong color
or it is not printed.
⇒ Corrects the following: 1.20

• The remote service system captures the Development Counter data even when the
machine is configured to use the Page Counter.
Example: A color print job.

Color Counter BK Counter
Page Counter value +1 0
Development Counter value +3 +1
Excess +2 +1
Page 7 of 16
3. LANGUAGE KIT:
3.28 B1015238 5F95 October 2003 production
3.1 LANGUAGE FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
Using the Language Kit.

1. Insert the SD card containing the firmware into the controller SD card slot.
2. Turn ON the main power. Then, chose either the First or Second display language for the update.
Note: It is also possible to write to both the First and Second languages.
3. Start the update.
4. Select the appropriate display language in User Tools.
As shown in the table below, there are some cases where certain languages cannot be displayed, depending
on the type of operation panel software:
Possible Display Languages for Operation Panel Software
Key:
: Can be displayed.
∆: Can be displayed, but printer application window is not displayed correctly.
--: Cannot be displayed.
LCDC Software: B1015234 B1015235 B1485531

NA EU Asia/TWN
Language:
Japanese 9 9 --
English-NA 9 9 9
English-UK 9 9 9
French 9 9 9
German 9 9 9
Italian 9 9 9
Spanish 9 9 9
Dutch 9 9 9
Norwegian 9 9 9
Danish 9 9 9
Swedish 9 9 9
Portuguese 9 9 9
Czech 9 9 9
Finish 9 9 9
Page 8 of 16
4. MUSIC:
1.00 B1015660 A108 October 2003 production
4.1 MUSIC FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
5. FAX:
02.00.00 B1015853A 2F66 October 2003 production

03.00.00 B1015853B 3F99 December 2003 production
04.00.00 B1015853C A8D0 July 2004 production
5.1 FAX FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
• Minor changes applied to improve reliability.
• Machine cannot detect fax option if network interface board is not installed.
Page 9 of 16
6. NETFILE:
1.01 B1015854A 7540 October 2003 production

1.02 B1015854B F83C December 2003 production
6.1 NETFILE FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
• The Tray Full error message is not displayed when the destination output tray has
reached capacity.
7. NIB:
4.11 B1015852B 1EF8 October 2003 production

4.13 B1015852C 7DB9 December 2003 production
7.1 NIB FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
• Printing slows when jobs of more than 1 Mb are sent through a Windows 2000 Standard
TCP/IP port (Raw protocol) only.
Page 10 of 16
8. WebSystem:
1.03 B1015855B 5A7E October 2003 production
8.1 WebSystem FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
9. WebDocBox:
1.03 B1015856B 149D October 2003 production
9.1 WebDocBox FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
10. LCDC:
1.03 B1015234A 8255 October 2003 production
10.1 LCDC FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
Page 11 of 16
11. FCU:
05.00.00 B6035570D E6EA October 2003 production

06.00.00 B6035570E 1E9C December 2003 production
07.00.00 B6035570F BB96 February 2004 production
11.1 FCU FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION

• Communication error sometimes occurs when receiving a PC FAX through MH/MR
reception.
• The machine accepts an incoming email while in an SC error condition, in spite of the fact
that User SW05 bit 0 is set to 1 (i.e. “do not accept emails while in an SC error
condition”).
• The sound generated to alert the operator that reception has been completed does not
turn off, even when this setting is disabled.
Page 12 of 16
12. SCANNER:
2.02 B6126520B 42C7 October 2003 production

2.03 B6126520C D7A6 December 2003 production
2.04 B6126520D FB6F February 2004 production
12.1 SCANNER FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
• The Access Code dialogue box remains displayed after pushing the Scanner button on
the MFP if the Partial Access Code settings are not completed.
• When a blank fax number is input for an advanced search using the LDAP search
function, information for the previous user will be displayed instead.
• SP1-007-001 (Store Priority) returns to its default value of 1 (“Send Only”) following a
Scanner Document Server job using either a setting of 2 (“Store Only”) or 3 (“Send and
Store”).
• The Destination field for a Scanner Document Server job is selectable even if SP1-007-
001 (Store Priority) has been set to 2 (“Store Only”), when: The setting of 2 is input →
Scanner main screen is accessed → Main power is turned Off/On.
• The following errors occur when printing out the Scanner UP from SP5-990-23:
- The default and current values for “Original Feed Type Priority” do not appear
on the printout.
- The default and current values for “Exposure Glass” and “SADF” (under Wait
Time for Next Originals) are displayed incorrectly.

• VRAM memory-full error after multiple Scanner transmission jobs.
• Network PC stations registered under a given workgroup are not displayed when the
workgroup name consists only of numerical characters (SMB transmission Network
screen).
Page 13 of 16
13. SCANNER IPU:
1.09:03 B1015155B 8833 October 2003 production

1.10:03 B1015155C 7B9F December 2003 production
1.11:03 B1015155D 53B1 July 2004 production
13.1 SCANNER IPU FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
Initial Production Release 1.09:03
Corrects the following: 1.10:03
Corrects the following: 1.11:03
• Scanner freezes if SP4-008 (Firmware Release History (Scanner IPU)) is set to 0.8 or
higher or a negative value.
Page 14 of 16
14. PRINTER:
1.01 B6126505 A666 October 2003 production

1.02 B6126505A EDEF December 2003 production
1.03.1 B6126505B A415 January 2004 production
1.04 B6126505C D24E February 2004 production
1.05 B6126505D 4423 July 2004 production
14.1 PRINTER FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
Corrects the following: GPS 1.02
• Cell shading specified using the "pattern" settings is not printed when using Excel (for
Win2K/XP).
Corrects the following: PCL
• The form overlay and text in a PCL job are printed separately.
• Vector lines are shifted slightly to the side with Overlay Printing (PCL 5c 1.4.0.0).
• Incorrect font size settings when printing a multi-page document in PCL format.

• B/W pages contained in data sent from the driver as a Color job are not counted up by
the external counting device when the device is set to prohibit B/W prints.
NOTE: The mainframe counters increment correctly.
• Addition:
Bit SW2 bit 6 is now active, which utilizes a new dither pattern to improve color
consistency in 600x600dpi, 2-bit Photo Mode.
NOTE: To properly activate the setting, it is necessary to turn the main power Off/On,
and then perform ACC.

• SC920 sometimes occurs when attempting to bring the Printer function on line (timeout
error).
• Sometimes Locked Print does not work when User Code Control is enabled.
Page 15 of 16
15. POST SCRIPT:
1.00 G3695907 9337 October 2003 production
15.1 PS FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
VERSION
Page 16 of 16

Aficio 2238c Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Aficio 2238c Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

B147/B149/B190

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

 2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN… ..............................................................5-140

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599

BOOKLET FINISHER B602

FAX OPTION B603

INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

Symbols and Abbreviations

Symbol What it means

Short Edge Feed (SEF) Long Edge Feed (LEF)

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694

B146I935.WMF 10°C 15°C 30°C 32°C

1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A

1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

No. Options Remarks

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

No. Options Remarks

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

Unpack the copier. Install the copier.

Select the language.

Set the date and time.

Place the copier on the paper feed unit or

Check magnification and registration.

Will the two-tray finisher End

Will the punch unit installed?

Install the punch unit.

Install the finisher.

1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION

* The Asia model does not include these accessories.

⇒ c) Hold the development unit. At the

d) Push in each development unit

e) Lower the drum plate. Then tighten

2. Remove the pin [A]. (As shown on the previous page.)

3. Remove the tape from the oil supply unit. 

⇒4. Install the oil supply unit to the fusing

6. Shake the toner cartridge five or six

12. Remove the guide cover [C].

15. Attach the appropriate model name decal [A] to

Settings Relevant to Contract

1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE

1. Check that the transfer belt is in its

4. Remove the rear stand [B]

1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE

1. Check that the transfer belt is in its correct position.

This is because the toner supply system uses a touch-and-release

3. Remove the tape from the oil supply unit.